JP2020014623A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A second variable winning device 72 that is opened for a short time when a small win game is won and is to be described later is disposed in a downstream side (a right lower side of a board) of a normal electric accessory 64c. As a result, when a small win game is won as a result of dynamic display of a special pattern 2 in "a meta-stochastic variation state", a state in which partial balls shot by a rightward shooting game can enter a small winning hole 72a of the second variable winning device 72 without entering a second start pocket 64b.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 84

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is directed to one of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. Performs a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a ball, and in the case of winning in an advantageous state such as a hit in the corresponding lucky lottery, opens the normally closed variable ball-in means and provides a predetermined game value to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-148264 A

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the determination information obtaining means for obtaining the determination information based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means Determining means, a first game value providing means capable of providing a predetermined first game value to a player based on the first game result being derived by the determining means, and a second game by the determining means. Based on the result being derived, a second game value providing means capable of providing the player with a second game value different from the first game value, and a probability that the first game result by the determination means is derived. Setting means that can be changed, and is used for the determination by the determination means, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result, a second value corresponding to the second game result, Whether to remember Means for providing a game value to a player when the determination information acquisition means extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value. The decision storage unit is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value may be different depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, and the determination information obtaining unit may be configured to When the setting value is changed by the means, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the success / failure storage means is configured not to change the derivation probability of the second value. Have been.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the third value is determined based on the first set value at which the derivation probability of the first value is lowest. An increase of the first value at a second set value at which the probability of deriving the first value is the highest is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, determination information obtaining means for obtaining determination information based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition, and determination means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means, Based on the first game result being derived by the determining means, a first game value providing means capable of providing a predetermined first game value to the player, and the second game result being derived by the determining means. Based on the second game value assigning means that can assign a second game value different from the first game value to the player, and a setting that can change the probability that the first game result is derived by the determination means. Means, which is used for the determination by the determination means and stores at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result. Means, comprising The determining means is configured not to give a game value to the player when the determination information obtaining means extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value, The success / failure storage means is stored such that the derivation probability of the first value may be different depending on the setting value set by the setting means, and the determination information obtaining means sets the setting value by the setting means. When the change is made, the derivation probability of the third value is changed in accordance with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the success / failure storage unit is configured not to change the derivation probability of the second value. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the third value is the first set value at which the derivation probability of the first value is the lowest, and the first value at the second set value at which the derivation probability of the first value is the highest from the first set value. Increase is provided. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a main control device. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, reserved ball storage area, and reserved ball execution area. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot type table, and (c) is a diagram in which the number of reserved balls is two. FIG. 4D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot variation pattern table in the case of (b), and FIG. 4D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an out-of-place (normal) variation pattern table when the number of retained balls is two; (E) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern table when the number of reserved balls is two. It is the figure which showed an example of the prize ball number table typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory ratio management main process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception processing performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception processing performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory ratio calculation process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the inspection result output process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (C) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a main control device according to a second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information storage processing performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the inspection result output process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hand ratio main process performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a winning combination process performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hand ratio main process performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a base display device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the base display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value, which is stored in an external work area of a RAM in an MPU of a main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing each base. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of value data. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a base value process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a base value calculation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a part of a base value display process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the other part of base value display processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the setting key showing a case where the setting key is in an off state, and (b) is a front view of the setting key showing a case where the setting key is in an on state. The figure which showed the start-up mode of the pachinko machine, and each state of the RAM erase switch, the setting key, and the door open switch at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine for starting in each start-up mode. It is. (A) is a diagram illustrating the role of the RAM erasure switch and the setting key in the setting change mode, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the role of the setting key in the setting confirmation mode. It is the model which showed typically the various examples of the display content of the base display device in a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when an error history is displayed on a base display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an arrangement of the LEDs of the first symbol display device, and (b) is a case where the round number notification LED notifies that the maximum number of rounds is two. A lighting pattern, a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, a lighting pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed, and a lighting for notifying that the setting is being checked. It is a figure showing a pattern. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in an external work area of a RAM in an MPU of a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a base display process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in an internal work area of a RAM in an MPU of a main control device. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a start-up mode set in response to each start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change or the setting confirmation. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. (A) is a left front perspective view of the protection cover according to the ninth embodiment as viewed from the left front, and (b) is a right rear perspective view of the protection cover according to the ninth embodiment as viewed from the right rear. It is a right view of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a left front perspective view for explaining the attachment method of the protective cover member to the outer frame in the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the outer frame in 9th Embodiment, and the protective cover member attached to the outer frame. It is a front view of the board box of the main control unit in a ninth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line AA of FIG. 67. FIG. 74 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of a main control device and a protective cover member in a region B of FIG. 73. It is the left front perspective view which expands and shows the inner frame and the front frame with respect to the outer frame to which the protective cover member in 9th Embodiment was attached. The start mode of the pachinko machine according to the tenth embodiment and the information of each of the RAM erasing switch and the setting key when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on for the start mode in each start mode are shown. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. The start mode of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment and information on each of the RAM erasing switch and the setting key when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on for starting in the start mode for each start mode are shown. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an eleventh embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 12th Embodiment. It is a right view of the pachinko machine in 12th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and each reserved ball execution area of 13th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit random number table of special figure 1 of a 13th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 13th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit type table of special figure 1 of a 13th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit type table of special figure 2 of a 13th embodiment. FIG. It is a figure showing typically an example of the number table of reservations of a 13th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of A table of a stop pattern table of a 13th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of B table of a stop pattern table of a 13th embodiment. It is the figure which showed, and (c) is a figure which showed typically an example of the C table of the stop pattern table of 13th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of a D table of a stop pattern table of a 13th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of an E table of a stop pattern table of a 13th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of a change pattern table for a loss of special figure 1 of a 13th embodiment, and (b) is for big hits and small hits of special figure 1 of a 13th embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a fluctuation pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a loss variation pattern table of the special figure 2 in the “normal gaming state” of the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a “normal gaming state” of the thirteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table for big hits / small hits of the special figure 2 in a "state." (A) is a figure which typically showed an example of the loss variation pattern table of special figure 2 in "probability variation state" or "time reduction state" of 13th Embodiment, (b) is 13th. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits / small hits of special figure 2 in "probability change state" or "time reduction state" in embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a random number table per ordinary figure according to the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a general figure change table according to the thirteenth embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an electrical activity opening table according to the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of a big hit opening table of a 13th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of a small hit opening table of a 13th embodiment. . It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows external output processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose variation process performed by the MPU in the main control device of the 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a hit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening / closing control process performed by the MPU in the main control device of the 13th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during opening of a special winning opening performed by the MPU in the main control device of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 13th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning opening opening / closing control processing performed by the MPU in the main control device of the 13th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric-power combination control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of 13th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 14th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine of a 14th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counter of each of 14th Embodiment, each reserved ball storage area, and each reserved ball execution area. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit random number table of special figure 1 of a 14th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 14th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit type table of special figure 1 of a 14th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit type table of special figure 2 of a 14th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically an example of the small hit type table of the special figure 2 of 14th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the reservation number table of 14th Embodiment typically. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of A table of a stop pattern table of a 14th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of B table of a stop pattern table of a 14th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of a D table of a stop pattern table of a 14th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of an E table of a stop pattern table of a 14th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of a change pattern table for loss of special figure 1 of a 14th embodiment, and (b) is a fluctuation pattern table for big hits of special figure 1 of a 14th embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the above. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table for loss of the special figure 2 of 14th Embodiment, (b) is for big hits and small hits of the special figure 2 of 14th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a fluctuation pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a random number table per ordinary figure according to the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a general figure variation table according to the fourteenth embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an electrical activity opening table according to the fourteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of a big hit opening table of a 14th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of a small hit opening table of a 14th embodiment. . It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving subtraction processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a hit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning opening opening / closing control processing performed by the MPU in the main controller of the 14th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit random number table of special figure 1 of a 15th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 15th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit random number table of special figure 1 of a 16th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 16th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit random number table of special figure 1 of a 17th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 17th embodiment. FIG.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch 208g (see FIG. 6) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been unlocked and opened (the door has been opened). I have.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

  The frame button 22 is, for example, a button pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing a player to select the effect content in a so-called super reach, which is one mode of the variable effect.

  The variable effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described later, the ball fired on the front area of the game board 13 has a specific winning opening (a second starting opening 64b described later. 2) is executed when a ball (starting prize) is entered. After a symbol (a third symbol described later) is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the symbol is stopped and displayed. This is an effect in which the result of the lottery performed (whether or not a jackpot) is presented to the player.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-described fluctuation effects and reach effects executed during the fluctuation effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

  The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during a high-speed fluctuation in which the third symbol is displayed at a high speed so that the player cannot visually recognize the third symbol. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the status is repeatedly changed in the order of “town stage” → “sky stage” → “island stage” → “town stage” →. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  Further, when the normal reach production is started in the variable production performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the selection screen of the super reach production mode selection screen is displayed during the normal reach. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

  On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as the effect mode of super reach are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. If the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. Then, an effect mode of super reach is determined based on the effect mode candidate selected when developing into super reach, and the super reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect mode.

  In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed down. However, instead of the frame button 22, a predetermined direction (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the , Rearward, rightward and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the effect mode of super reach may be selected.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination units 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred, is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the illumination part 32 on the right side, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) disposed on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is regenerated in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit.

  In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17 has a lower plate 50 formed in the center thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown).

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The firing interval of the sphere in the sphere firing unit 112a is set to about 0.6 seconds. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for guiding the ball, a first normal winning opening 63a, A second normal winning opening 63b, a first starting opening 64a, a second starting opening 64b, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled. Attached to. The first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate a fluctuation display performed when a ball (start winning prize) is entered into one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b by the lighting state of the LED 37a, or the fluctuation display. As a stop symbol after the end, a symbol corresponding to a result of a lottery performed for the start winning is indicated by a lighting state, or a variation in the balls entered in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is changed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors.

  The pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not a ball hits the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b as a jackpot (a jackpot lottery). Is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 2R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared.

  The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change executed in response to the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, If it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “2R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of two rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after the 15 rounds of jackpots and the time is reduced during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). .

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change, probability change state). In other words, the special game state (jackpot) ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. The high-probability state (probable-change state, probable-change state) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the hit probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily enters the second starting port 64b.

  On the other hand, the “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of change is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of hit is lower than that in the case of probability change. The time-saving state (medium-time saving) of the “low-probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, while the jackpot probability remains unchanged, and only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, and the second starting port 64b This refers to a game state where a hemisphere easily enters.

  In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the later-described electric accessory attached to the second starting port 64b is opened, or one time by the second symbol It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessory is opened at the point of contact. Specifically, in the time reduction state, the time during which the electric accessory associated with the second starting port 64b is opened is made longer than in the case other than the time reduction state, or the number of times the electric accessory is opened per one time May be increased as compared with the case other than the time saving state. Further, in the time saving state, at least two of increasing the probability of hitting the second symbol, increasing the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory may be performed simultaneously. Good.

  A first ordinary winning opening 63a is provided on the lower left side of the game area, and a second ordinary winning opening 63b is provided on the lower right side of the gaming area. When a ball enters the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c is turned on. Eight balls are paid out as prize balls. When a ball enters the second ordinary winning opening 63b, a second ordinary winning opening switch 208d (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is turned on. As a result, eight balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the number of prize balls when a ball wins in the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the number of award balls when a ball wins in the second ordinary winning opening 63b are not necessarily the same. The number of prize balls may be different, such as the number of balls and the latter is eight.

  A variable display device unit 80 is provided at the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 and a second symbol display device 83. The third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37 by using a ball (start winning a prize) in any one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b as a trigger. , A liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol. The second symbol display device 83 is provided with a second symbol display device 83 configured by LEDs that variably display the second symbol when the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is used as a trigger. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of, for example, an 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, so that, for example, the left and the center are displayed. And the right three symbol columns are displayed.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. This is performed by the third symbol display device 81. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on the activated line L1. ) Is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned on the activated line L1. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even numbers are added are aligned on the activated line L1.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds display the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable manner (fluctuation effect). The main display area Dm, and the other upper third are the sub-display areas Ds for displaying announcement effects, characters, and the like. Also, a reserved ball count display area Db for displaying the reserved ball count is provided in the lower bottom side center portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right. A symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, a symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, and a display area. The symbol row Z3 is displayed on Dm3.

  In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle portion of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each variation effect, a third symbol is displayed on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Stopped and displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1, a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 is an area for displaying a character and a preview effect image. The image displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 gives the player a sense of expectation that will result in a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The number-of-reserved-balls display area Db is the number of retained balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display (fluctuation effect) has not been executed among the balls entered into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Is an area for displaying.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, which suggests to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a black boy. The notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair of the user, the color of the normally white bee, or the appearance of another character.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b while the variable effect (variable display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), The number of entering balls is reserved up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the reserved ball number display area Db. In the reserved ball count display area Db, one reserved ball count symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed for each reserved ball count, and the reserved ball count is displayed according to the displayed number of the reserved ball count symbols. .

  That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number symbol is displayed. Indicates that the number of balls is four. When the reserved ball count symbol is not displayed in the reserved ball count display area Db, it indicates that the reserved ball count is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the ball which entered into the 1st starting port 64a and the 2nd starting port 64b was comprised so that it may be held up to a total of four times, the maximum number of holding balls is four times in total. The number is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved ball number display area Db, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. However, the display may be performed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. is there. In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory provided at the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed based on the number of lit second symbol retaining lamps 84.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, instead of turning on the second symbol holding lamp 84, a variation display of the second symbol may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number of passing balls through the through gate 67 is not limited to four as in the case of the second starting port 64b, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). May be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  A first starting port 64a is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and a second starting port 64b is provided below the first starting port 64a. The first starting port 64a is provided with an opening through which a ball can enter upward. The opening of the first starting port 64a is always open, so that the ball can enter. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a, a first starting port switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the turning on of the first starting port switch 208a. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a variation effect of the third symbol is performed by the third symbol display device 81. Be executed. The first starting port 64a is also one of the winning ports from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  On the other hand, the second starting port 64b is provided with an electric accessory having two blades that covers an opening through which a ball enters the second starting port 64b. By opening and closing the two blades, the electric accessory brings the second starting port 64b into an open state (expanded state) or a closed state (reduced state). In the normal state, the second starting port 64b is in a closed state in which the blade of the electric accessory is closed (the blade stands up), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b or enters the ball. It is in a difficult state.

  Then, when the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol of “○”, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. While the electric accessory is being operated, the blade of the electric accessory stands up. The second starting port 64b is in an open state in a state of being movable in a substantially V-shape (an inverted C-shape). When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball can easily enter the ball compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, a stop is made at the symbol of “」 ”and a hit occurs, and when the second starting port 64b is opened, a ball enters the second starting port 64b. Then, it is possible to set a state in which a lot of jackpots can be performed.

  When a ball enters the second starting port 64b, a second starting port switch 208b (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is performed due to the turning on of the second starting port switch 208b. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a variation effect of the third symbol is performed by the third symbol display device 81. Be executed. The second starting port 64b is also one of the winning ports from which two balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the second starting port 64b, and a large rectangular winning port (large opening port, also referred to as a special winning port) 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped and the LED 37a is turned on. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The special winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds).

  The variable prize winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the special winning opening 65a, and a special winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the lower opening of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The large winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily enter the big winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  When a ball enters the special winning opening 65a, the special winning opening switch 208e (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the number of times the special winning opening switch 208e is turned on is counted. The number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a is counted, and the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is determined. In addition, as a result of turning on the special winning opening switch 208e, twelve balls are paid out as prize balls. Then, the open state and the closed state of the special winning opening 65a are repeated by the jackpot, so that many balls easily enter the special winning opening 65a, and the player has a game value (game value). As an award, a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. This state is one form of a special game state advantageous to the player.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A special winning opening and a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening, the gaming state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening may be formed as a special gaming state.

  Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which a sphere passes in a vertical direction. When the ball fired in the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 causes the second symbol ( A lottery).

  As a result of the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball passing through the through gate 67, when it is determined that the winning is achieved, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the second symbol through the display. After the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b operates. As a result, the blade of the electric accessory, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, moves from a state of standing substantially vertically to a substantially V-shape (an inverted C-shape) and moves the ball for a predetermined time. Is in a state where the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or in a state where the ball can easily enter the ball as compared with the closed state.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. Further, the balls entering the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through a switch provided for each winning opening for detecting the entering ball. You. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch 208f (see FIG. 6) for detecting the guided ball, and is then discharged to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed. .

  Here, the ball fired into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters one of the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out port 66. Therefore, the balls entering the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out opening 66 are guided to the ball discharge path and always pass through the out switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, the number of balls fired in the game area (the number of balls used in the game) can be grasped. The out switch 208f detects a ball that has actually passed through the game area and entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. That is, a ball fired in the game area, but caught somewhere in the game area, and consequently not used in the game is not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to suppress the balls not used in the game from being counted as balls fired in the game area as a result.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  In addition, the main board is provided with an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 5) to which an inspection device 300 for inspecting the performance of the gaming machine, such as the ratio of the accessory, can be connected. The inspection terminal 207a is normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the inspection terminal 207a so that the inspection terminal 207a is exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection device 300 can inspect the gaming performance such as the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein.

  In the main control device 110, the main features of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of a variable display (fluctuation effect) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device 83 are selected. Execute the process. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processing.

  The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Then, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the special winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 composed of a large winning opening solenoid for opening / closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes a switch group and a sensor group including various switches for detecting a ball entering each winning opening, a ball guided to the ball discharge path through each winning opening and the out opening. The MPU 201 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch 253 and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs a signal output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on SG2.

  Main controller 110 is provided with an accessory ratio management chip 207 that manages information on the accessory ratio in pachinko machine 10. The accessory ratio management chip 207 is connected to the MPU 201 via the bus 206, receives information required for managing the accessory ratio from the MPU 201, processes and stores the received information, and thereby stores the information of the pachinko machine 10. It is a microchip (integrated circuit) that manages information about the ratio.

  An inspection terminal 207a is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 that inspects the performance of the gaming machine, such as the ratio of the accessory, and when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, Information on the accessory ratio managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 and other information on the inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300. The inspection device 300 can determine whether or not the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal range based on the information on the accessory ratio received via the inspection terminal 207a.

  Here, a detailed configuration of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of main controller 110.

  As described above, the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 is connected to the input / output port 205 as the input side, and the solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, the second symbol holding lamp 84, In addition to the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113, as various switches 208 connected as an input side, a first starting port switch 208a for detecting a ball winning the first starting port 64a, a second starting port switch 208a, A second starting port switch 208b for detecting a ball winning the starting port 64b, a first normal winning port switch 208c for detecting a ball winning the first normal winning port 63a, and a second normal winning port 63b. Second normal winning opening switch 208d for detecting a hit ball, and a special winning opening switch 208e for detecting a ball winning the special winning opening 65a. An out switch 208f for detecting a ball that has won the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a and a ball that has entered the out port 66 and that has been guided to the ball discharge path; A door opening switch 208g for detecting that at least one of the front frames 14 is locked and opened is connected.

  The input / output port 205 includes a first port 205a to which the output of the first starting port switch 208a is input, a second port 205b to which the output of the second starting port switch 208b is input, and a first normal winning port switch 208c. An ordinary switch 205c to which an output is input, an ordinary port 205d to which an output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is input, a special winning opening port 205e to which an output of the special winning opening switch 208e is input, and an out switch. An out port 205f to which the output of 208f is connected, and a door opening port 205g to which the output of the door opening switch 208g is connected are provided.

  The MPU 201 executes a switch reading process (see FIG. 11) for checking the status of various switches in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every 2 milliseconds. In the switch reading process, the MPU 201 refers to the first port 205a, the first two ports 205b, the first port 205c, the second port 205d, the special winning port 205e, and the out port 205f, and determines the winning port where the prize has been won. And the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds. (The number of balls fired into the game area) is counted. Then, the counted number of each ball and the game state at that time (whether a big hit, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, an error state, and the like) are displayed. It is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates and manages the accessory ratio based on the number of each ball. Whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

  The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a prize ball number table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. Main controller 110 executes main processing of pachinko machine 10 based on various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables 202a to 203d stored in ROM 202. The award ball count table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used for managing the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and are used when the main control device 110 is turned on. It is transmitted to the management chip 207.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are mainly used to perform a jackpot lottery, setting of a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used by the MPU 201 of the control device 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a second random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot symbol are set. A per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. .

  In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 17). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described later in detail, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). The values of a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It returns to the structure. When the first random number counter C1 is updated one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 is read from the initial value. The random number counter C1 is updated.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b ( At the timing of the start prize, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the first random number counter storage area of any of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. 203b1. The value of the random number to be the big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding area is set by the big hit random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot that has been made, it is determined to be a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has a bigger hit than the low probability state used for the low probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (period when the probability is not changing). It is divided into two types, a high-probability state used during a high-probability state (probable change) and a high-probability state. Then, the numbers of random numbers to be big hits included in the low probability state and the high probability state are set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first hit random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (big hit random value) that becomes a big hit in the low probability state is 3, and the value “7,307,582” is stored in the big hit random number table 202a. ing.

  On the other hand, in the case of the high probability state, the number of the random numbers (the jackpot random number value) which is the big hit is 30, and the value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322”. , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number values for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are respectively set so as not to be duplicated. You have set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally assigning a jackpot may increase. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), the jackpot is determined. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the value of the random number to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the type of a big hit in the case of a big hit. The first hit type counter C2 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball is activated by one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. At the timing of winning in the mouth (starting winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is set to the first random number counter C1 of the first to fourth areas of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the same hold area as the hold area to be stored.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is lost, a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect. Also, the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number with a large hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. . In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the big hit type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the big hit type table 202b is a table in which the big hit types are associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and the maximum round number shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. There is a “15R normal big hit” that is a time saving state during the number of times of change, and a “2R certain variable big hit” where the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of big hits.

  In the big hit type table 202b, each big hit type is associated with a value of a first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability change jackpot, and the value “40 to 40” of the first hit type counter C2 with respect to the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ", and the value" 80-99 "of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability change jackpot.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability change big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "60". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probable big hit” is determined as the big hit type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table.

  The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and in each of the jackpot type tables, the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed.

  Further, the probability of selecting the jackpot type may be changed depending on the starting port that entered the ball. That is, as a probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, For example, "15R probability change big hit" is 40%, "15R normal change hit" is 40%, "2R probability change hit" is 20%, and the ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b when the ball enters the second starting port 64b. As the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a random number that is a jackpot, for example, 55% for “15R probable jackpot”, 40% for “15R ordinary jackpot”, and “2R probable jackpot” May be set to 5%.

  In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first starting port 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second starting port 64b are prepared, and in each of the jackpot type tables, the first jackpot type associated with each jackpot type. What is necessary is just to change the number of values of the counter C2. The values of the various counters stored in each of the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b are used for winning the winning in any one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. A flag indicating whether the jackpot is stored is also stored together, and the jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag is also stored. A table may be selected. Alternatively, a flag is separately provided in a form corresponding to each of the reserved first to fourth areas, and according to the flag, the values of various counters stored in the corresponding area are set in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. The jackpot type used to determine which jackpot type has been stored in accordance with the prize to the starting port and determine the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag. A table may be selected.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern at the time of the off-state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Three stops: a "reach out of front and rear", which stops after the reach occurs, and a "reach other than front and rear out" in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol. Direction) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball is moved to one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. At the time of winning (starting winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first random number counter C1 of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the same hold area as the hold area.

  A plurality of stop pattern tables 202c having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop types are selected are provided in the ROM 202 in correspondence with the stop pattern selection counter C3. The plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high probability state, the stop pattern table 202c having a wide range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” of 0 to 89 is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur. And it becomes easy to select “completely out of order”. In the stop pattern table 202c, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that "reach out of front and rear" and "reach other than front and rear out" are hard to be selected. Become.

  In the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out of range” is 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. And the narrow stop pattern table 202c is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of place”. In the stop pattern table 202c, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and back out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long rendering time, so that the ball entry time to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b can be secured, and the fluctuation by the third symbol display device 81 can be ensured. The display is easily performed continuously. Note that, also in the latter stop pattern table 202c, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). At the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the reserved first to fourth areas, the random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 of the same reserved area as the reserved area in which the first random number counter C1 is stored.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining a variation pattern. That is, when performing a variable effect based on various counters stored in one reserved area, the MPU 201 stores the variable type counter CS1 stored in the variable type counter storage area 203b4 of the reserved area and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the ROM 202. The variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine design of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The change mode is determined, and the presence or absence of the announcement effect and the execution mode of the advance effect are determined.

  Here, details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of a jackpot, and detachment variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 used at the time of a detachment, as the variation pattern table 202d. Also, as the variation pattern table for deviation 202d2, 202d3, depending on whether the game state is a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, or a normal low probability state excluding the time reduction state, the game state for the deviation (probability). A variation pattern table 202d3 and a variation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal) are prepared.

  Further, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 includes a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 0 (that is, when there is no reserved ball), a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 1, A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is two, a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is three, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is four are separately provided.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls, and each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is changed so that the table referred to simply based on the number of reserved balls is changed. May be provided. For example, each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 may be separately prepared as a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. . In each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining the table to be referred to may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 includes a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3, and a table referred to when the number of retained balls is 3 or more. A different table may be prepared as the table 202d2 for each number of reserved balls, and one table may be prepared as the variation pattern table for departure (probable change) 202d3 regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is two in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type, regardless of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, it is divided into a 15R jackpot type that is referred to when the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R regular jackpot are determined as the jackpot type, and a 2R probability variable jackpot that is referred to when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined. I have. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value (big hit random value), the variation pattern is changed according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. Is determined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Is done.

  In common with the 15R jackpot, three variation patterns, a variation A having a variation time of 30 seconds, a variation B having a variation time of 60 seconds, and a variation C having a variation time of 90 seconds are prepared to be selectable. Is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The fluctuation A is a fluctuation pattern in which a so-called normal reach in which the third symbol is aligned after the reach having a short fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The variation B is a variation pattern in which the so-called super reach in which the third symbol is aligned after the reach having a longer variation time than the normal reach is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The super reach includes, for example, a reach that evolves from a normal reach, a long reach that simply has a long reach time, and the like. The fluctuation C is a fluctuation pattern in which the so-called special reach in which the third symbol is aligned after the reach having a longer fluctuation time than the super-reach is executed on the third symbol display device 81. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach, and a special reach that has a development destination from the normal reach different from the super reach.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the association between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for variation A in the 15R jackpot common table. B is 11 to 99, and variation C is 100 to 198. Since the table common to the 15R jackpots is selected in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, the variation C in which the special reach is executed is easily selected in order to give the player an expectation. Has become. However, by configuring so that the variation A in which the normal reach is executed and the variation B in which the super reach is executed are selected, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a big hit can be expected from any reach.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a large number of stalls having different staging contents are prepared for each reach. For example, the super reach includes a rear image (a third image which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81). (The image displayed on the back side of the image) can be changed quickly and displayed, or a character can be displayed suddenly, etc. A plurality of reach with different production contents, such as a character to which "?" Is added, is included. The main controller 110 determines only the variation A, variation B, and variation C as the variation pattern when the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 determine each variation A to A detailed variation pattern corresponding to C is determined. According to the detailed fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Only the variation pattern of “2R variation” having a variation time of 59 seconds is prepared for exclusive use for the 2R probability variation jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, as shown in FIG. 7C, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot (irrespective of the number of reserved balls) 0R-198) is associated with the 2R variation. In other words, when the jackpot variation type is the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

  When the 2R variation is selected by the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 determine a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. Therefore, when the main control device 110 determines the 2R probability change jackpot as the jackpot type, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect with a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation, for example, while displaying characters such as “chicken” or “girl” in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol with lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, and the like are included.

  The change pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using only the change type counter CS1, but may be determined using another plurality of change type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of the jackpot or the reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when reach is established, The number of symbols shifted to stop the third symbol to be stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after) may be determined by another variation type counter.

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot is provided. However, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected, only the variation pattern of “2R variation” is selected. A group dedicated to the 2R probability change jackpot may not be provided, and only the association between the change type counter CS1 and the change pattern in the case of a 15R probability change hit or 15R normal hit may be defined in the hit change pattern table 202d1. In this case, when the jackpot type is the 2R sure-change jackpot, the 2R variation may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  In the pachinko machine 10, only “2R fluctuation” is selected when a 2R probability change hit occurs, but one fluctuation pattern is selected from a plurality of change patterns when a 2R probability change hit occurs. You may do so. In this case, like the group common to the 15R jackpots, even in the group dedicated to the 2R probability jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in the case of the 2R jackpot, and The variation pattern associated with the stored value of the variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect suspended in the suspension area.

  FIG. 8D schematically illustrates an example of the out-of-place (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 in the out-of-place (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8D, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is dedicated to complete detachment that is referred to when complete detachment is determined as a stop type at the time of detachment, and reach forward and backward detachment and front and rear detachment. Is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the type of stop at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. Is attached.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a value of a big hit (big hit random number value), that is, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is out of value, the gaming state is a normal time except a time reduction state. When in the low probability state, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the suspension area according to the suspension type corresponding to the value of the suspension pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same suspension area as the first random number counter C1. Is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  For complete departure, two variation patterns, a variation D with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation E with a variation time of 10 seconds, are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each variation pattern. Are associated. When the fluctuation D or the fluctuation E is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the third symbol display device 81 executes a fluctuation effect in which after the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol is started, stop display is performed without reaching the reach. As shown in FIG. 8D, in the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, each variation dedicated to complete variation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 correspond to the variation D. 0 to 98 and fluctuation E is 99 to 198.

  In addition, the reach is common to the three fluctuations A to C described above, namely, the fluctuation A in which the normal reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81 with the fluctuation time of 30 seconds and the super reach is executed with the fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Three variation patterns are prepared to be selectable: a variation B executed by the three symbol display device 81 and a variation C executed by the third symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 90 seconds and a special reach. In the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each reach common fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is as follows: fluctuation A is 0 to 98, and fluctuation B is 99 to 190. , The variation C is 191 to 198.

  FIG. 8E schematically shows an example of the out-of-place (probably variable) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, which is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, among the out-of-place (probable change) fluctuation pattern tables 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when the complete departure is determined as the departure stop type, similarly to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table. Fluctuation D and Fluctuation E can be selected as a fluctuation pattern only for complete departure, and the reach that is referred to when the reach other than front and rear departure and reach other than front and rear departure is determined, and fluctuations A to C can be selected as the fluctuation pattern, It is divided into groups (groups) based on the type of stop at the time of departure, and in each of the divided groups, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a variation pattern that can be selected.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that comes off, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probable change, In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is changed to the deviation (probable change) change pattern. It is determined from the table 202d3.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, in the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202 d 3, the association between each variation and the value of the variation type counter CS <b> 1 in the complete variation only when the number of reserved balls is 2 is as follows. 0 to 190, and the variation E is 191 to 198. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is that variation A is 0 to 98, variation B is 99 to 190, and variation C is 191 to 198. ing. That is, the association between each variation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is the same in the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the variation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3.

  On the other hand, when the game state is the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of a probable change, the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b, and the complete departure (fluctuation E) with a long fluctuation time is frequently executed. Then, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, which may give the player a waiting state and make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, the operation rate of a hole is also unfavorably reduced.

  Therefore, if the game state is completely off when the game state is in the time reduction state or the high probability state at the time of a probability change, the complete change with a shorter fluctuation time than in the other game state (normal state except the time reduction state) ( A variation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal) and a variation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probable variation) are configured so that the variation D) is easily selected. Thus, by starting the next variable display early, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operation rate.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of departure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence / absence of notice, etc.). In addition, the selection of the type of miss is configured to be divided into a variation pattern table for the removal (normal) and a variation pattern table for the removal (probable variation), but even if the game state is normal, a plurality of holding balls (for example, In the case of a maximum of four, three or more), the fluctuation display may be terminated early, and the selection may be made with reference to the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table.

  In addition, since the association between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the out-of-order reach or the reach other than the out-of-order fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same irrespective of the game state, the association for the out-of-range ( The (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probable fluctuation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 do not include a group common to the reach, and these fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely deviated. In addition, a variation pattern table that is referred to when the stop type is the out-of-reach reach or the out-of-reach reach regardless of the state of the game may be separately prepared.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the association between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is out-of-reach reach or the reach other than the out-of-reach reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state. Although it is assumed that there is, it may be different depending on the game state.

  Further, in the fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for deviations shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the fluctuations D and E are simply referred to as “perfect deviation fluctuations”, and the “perfect deviation fluctuation” is selected. In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation D and the variation E are selected with a predetermined probability by referring to another table. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is performed, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right through gate 67. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined as a hit, and a symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol). The lighted display is performed, and the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is operated, and the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

  Note that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is executed once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is performed. It is updated and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of (fluctuation effect) and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The prize ball count table 202e of the ROM 202 is a table that defines the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) in each of the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a. Here, the details of the award ball count table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the award ball count table 202e.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the prize ball number table 202e, as the “starting port type”, the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. Is defined, and the “number of prize balls” corresponding to the winning opening is defined for each winning opening. Specifically, in the prize ball number table 202e, the prize ball number 3 is associated with the first starting port 64a, the prize ball number 2 is associated with the second starting port 64b, and the first normal winning is achieved. The prize ball number 8 is associated with the mouth 63a, the prize ball number 8 is associated with the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the prize ball number 12 is associated with the special winning opening 65a.

  The prize ball number table 202e defines the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning port for all winning ports provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, when a winning port is provided in addition to the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, the prize ball number table 202e including the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning port is provided. Is defined.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls is the same in the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b. Therefore, in the prize ball count table 202e, the "starting port type" is defined as "normal winning port" by combining the first normal winning port 63a and the second normal winning port 63b, and is associated with the "normal winning port". The number of award balls 8 may be defined. Also, if the number of awarded balls in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same as “3”, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are matched in the awarded ball number table 202e. The “starting port type” may be defined as “starting port”, and the number of prize balls 3 may be defined in association with the “starting port”.

  The award ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 during the initialization processing of the MPU 201 executed when the power is turned on to the main control device 110. Used to calculate the ratio.

  The trigger information data 202f is data that defines the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Although details will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 corresponds to three timings (triggers) as timings (triggers) for calculating the accessory ratio. The first is the number of shot balls, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio every time the number of shot balls reaches a predetermined number. The second is the time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio when a predetermined time comes. The third is the game time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio when the game time by the player has passed a predetermined time.

  In the trigger information data 202f, information indicating any of “number of shots”, “time”, and “game time” is defined as a timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  When the information indicating the “number of shots” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating the “predetermined number of balls” that is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the “number of shots” and information indicating 500 balls as the “predetermined number of balls”, each time the number of shot balls reaches 500, the ratio of the accessory In the management chip 207, the accessory ratio is calculated.

  When the information indicating “time” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating “predetermined time” which is a timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when information indicating “time” and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 are defined as the “predetermined time” in the trigger information data 202f, the time is set to 12:00. At 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the accessory ratio is calculated in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  When the information indicating the “game time” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the “predetermined time” which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating “game time” and information indicating two hours as “predetermined time”, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is set every time the game time elapses two hours. , The accessory ratio is calculated.

  The trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the prize ball number table 202e in the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the power is turned on to the main controller 110. This is used when the management chip 207 determines a trigger for calculating the accessory ratio.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer illustrated in FIG. 7, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, and I / Os. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter), a power failure signal SG1 output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201. With this input, the power-off occurrence information is set by the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) executed. Then, in the main processing of the MPU 201 (FIG. 17), when it is determined that there is power-off information, the stack pointer at that time and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 20), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 19).

  The RAM 203 further stores a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a first counter 203d, a first two counter 203e, a first counter 203f, a second counter 203g, a special winning opening counter 203h, and an out. It has at least a counter 203i.

  The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is one of the first opening 64a and the second opening 64b detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 is counted up to four times based on the entry of the ball (start winning prize). It is a counter to do. The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by an initialization process (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 (see S202 and S203 in FIG. 12). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time a variable effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 13).

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the reserved ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 12). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of retained balls in the variable effect retained in the main control device 110 by the retained ball number command. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the variable effect is suspended without accessing the main control device 110. Further, every time a start winning is detected, the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball count command to the audio ramp control device 113, so that the suspended ball count of the variable effect managed by the audio ramp control device 113 is reduced by noise. Even if the number of balls deviated from the actual fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command to notify the reserved ball number to the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball count symbol in the reserved ball count display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the reserved ball count command to the sound ramp control device 113, not only the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a obtained by adding 1 to the reserved ball count command, but also The first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the above-mentioned winning start which triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. C3 and the values of the variation type counter CS1 are also included.

  That is, when there is a start winning, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the main controller 110 are changed. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  In the sound ramp control device 113, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball count command are changed based on the respective values. Before the effect is executed, a look-ahead is performed, and before the execution of the variable effect, it is determined what the variable effect will be (whether it will be a big hit or not, and how long the variable time will be). Then, based on the result of the pre-reading, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b stores a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of a winning start. This is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won (starts winning) one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), the MPU 201 reads the counter from the counter buffer. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b includes four reserved areas (reserved first to first) so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

  The reserved ball execution area 203c stores data (each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in a process such as a jackpot lottery or setting of a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Value).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the start timing of the execution of the fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as a jackpot lottery and setting of the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-mentioned reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one start winning is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Shift to Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described with reference to FIG. 7 again. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery and to set a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Used by

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first random number counter C1 used for determining the jackpot type are set. A hit type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the type of stop when the vehicle goes off, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine a variation pattern are used. Each of the above-mentioned counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins (starts winning) in one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Store each value.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) stores a first random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and a second random number counter C2 for storing the value of the first random counter C2. A per-type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are stored in one holding ball storage area. Although provided in 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  As described above, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b for up to four times. However, in this case, data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas). In other words, data corresponding to an earlier start winning prize is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and data corresponding to an earliest start winning prize is stored in the reserved first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In the reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first collision type counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 transfers the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b to the reserved ball. Shift to the respective areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the change start processing (see FIG. 17), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variable display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, and are also notified to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. . Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 transfers the random number value in the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. Then, the random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  When the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the areas (first to third) having the area number smaller by one. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Here, a data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, when the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a when the start of the variable effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. I do. In this state, the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth) to the respective areas. The area shifts to the area with the smaller number (first to third). That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a at the time when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the reserved second area to the reserved first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third and fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load.

  Note that, regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data in the reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The first counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the first starting port 64a, the first counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the second starting port 64b, and the first counter 203f. Is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a, 203g is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and 203h is a large winning counter 203h. The out counter 203i, a counter for counting the number of balls winning in the winning opening 65a, is a counter for counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). is there. Each of these counters 203d to 203i is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on.

  Also, the MPU 201 performs the first port 205a, the first two ports 205b, the first two ports 205b in the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every two milliseconds. With reference to the port 205c, the ordinary two port 205d, the special winning opening port 205e, and the out port 205f, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d. It is determined whether a ball has been detected in each of the special winning opening switch 208e and the out switch 208f. Then, when a prize is awarded at any of the winning ports (a ball is detected at the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the winning port at which the prize is received is counted up by one, and the ball is output at the out switch 208f. Is detected, the out counter 203i is counted up by one.

  The counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i is performed continuously for 0.5 seconds. When 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information, together with information indicating the game state at that time, in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Is done. When the setting of the values of the counters 203d to 203i in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is completed, the values of the counters 203d to 203i are initialized to zero, and the winning prize mouths in the next 0.5 seconds are again won. The number of balls played is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning in each winning opening for each winning opening at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and calculates the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path. The number (ie, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. The number of balls won in each winning opening until the timing of calculating the material ratio or before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio from the previous calculation of the accessory ratio is calculated. It counts each time, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game).

  As described above, the number of winning balls in the winning opening actually detected by the MPU 201 is input from the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The number of balls recognized as winning can be accurately grasped.

  Also, suppose that the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Assuming that the counting is performed only by the accessory ratio management chip 207 without performing the above, the accessory ratio management chip 207 also wins a prize at each winning opening at a short interval (for example, every 2 milliseconds) or guides the ball to the ball discharge path. The monitored ball must be monitored, and the processing load increases and the power consumption may increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the counting result of the MPU 201 sets these counting results in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at 0.5 second intervals. Each time a prize is obtained from when the power is turned on until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio for the first time, or from the time when the ratio of the accessory is calculated for the previous time to the time when the ratio for the next role is calculated. A process of counting the number of balls winning the mouth for each winning opening and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning in each winning opening for each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). For this reason, for example, at two millisecond intervals, a prize at each winning opening or a ball guided to a ball discharge path is monitored. This is necessary for performing such control, and processing is originally performed at short time intervals of 2 milliseconds. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls fired into the game area by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning port counted at 0.5 second intervals is provided. The number of winning balls or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is 0 or 1 ball in most cases, and at most several balls. Therefore, the data amount required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by this counting process. Therefore, in the MPU 201, the number of balls winning each winning opening in 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls used in the game). ) Is not significantly affected.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 includes a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first reading memory 263, a second reading memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC") 266. These are connected to each other via a bus 206. Further, the bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and the inspection terminal 207a.

  Further, a large-capacity capacitor 267 is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. While the power is supplied to the main control device 110, the capacitor 267 is charged. When the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is Using the electric power charged in the capacitor 267, a process associated with the power-off is executed. Note that a chargeable / dischargeable secondary battery may be connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207 instead of the capacitor 267.

  The CPU 261 is an arithmetic device that controls the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The CPU 261 executes a control program stored in a ROM (not shown) provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207, so that the CPU The management of the material ratio is performed by the accessory / material ratio management chip 207. The CPU 261 performs the management of the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the like, and thus can flexibly cope with a change in the functions and specifications of the accessory ratio management chip 207 by changing the software.

  The RTC 266 outputs the current time. The RTC 266 has a built-in chargeable / dischargeable secondary battery (not shown), and the RTC 266 always outputs the time while keeping the current time by using the secondary battery as a power source. The time output by the RTC 266 is referred to by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is “time”, and the time indicated by the RTC 266 is the trigger setting area. When the time matches or exceeds the “predetermined time” set in H.265b, a process of calculating the accessory ratio is executed. Further, although details will be described later, the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, or the large hit data 263g, the open data 263h, the error data 263i, and the out-of-time data 263j are stored in the first reading memory 263, respectively. When out-of-time information is added, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266, and the read time is added to each data together with each information.

  The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various types of information set by the MPU 201, and is configured by an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) which is a volatile memory from which data can be read and written. The first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, the out buffer 262f, the big hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, the error buffer 262i, etc. Is provided at least.

  The first buffer 262a stores the value of the first counter 203d set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The value of the start 2 counter 203e set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the start 2 buffer 262b. The value of the general counter 203f set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the general buffer 262c. The buffer 2 262d stores the value of the counter 203g set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The value of the special winning opening counter 203h set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the special winning opening buffer 262e. The value of the out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the out buffer 262f.

  When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is a big hit at intervals of 0.5 seconds, information (big hit information) is stored in the big hit buffer 262g. When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 at intervals of 0.5 seconds, information (door opening information) is stored in the opening buffer 262h. When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is in error at intervals of 0.5 seconds, information (error information) is stored in the error buffer 262i.

  In the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 performs setting (writing) on various buffers provided in the buffer 262, and upon receiving an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 executes a setting information receiving process (to be described later) (FIG. 19). See). The setting information receiving process counts the number of winning balls for each winning opening based on various information set in the buffer 262, and guides the ball to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball fired to the game area). The number of balls is counted and the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and information on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

  The setting register 265 is a register for setting a set value required for the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The setting register 265 has at least a prize ball number data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

  In the award ball number data setting area 265a, a award ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. In the trigger setting area 265b, trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. When the main controller 110 is turned on, the award ball count table 202 e and the trigger information data 202 f are transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, the CPU 261 sets the prize ball number table 202e in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and sets the trigger information data 202f in the trigger setting area 265b.

  The prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is referred to by the CPU 261 when calculating the accessory ratio. Here, the number of prize balls when there is a prize in each prize port is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is conventionally stored in the ROM 202. Each time the power is supplied, the information on the number of prize balls is transmitted to the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207. By setting to 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of award balls different for each model in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. If the pachinko machine model is different, the ROM 202 may be changed. Even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

  The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referred to by the CPU 261, and it is determined whether or not the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f has been reached. When it is determined, a process of calculating the accessory ratio is executed. Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is determined by the accessory ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limitation on the storage capacity for recording information on the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but that the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10 are considered. Like the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the accessory ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and power is supplied. Each time the pachinko machine 10 sends the trigger information data 202f to the ROM ratio management chip 207, the trigger information data 202f is sent to the ROM 202 at a timing that matches the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264.

  It should be noted that only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted in the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is turned on are the prize ball number data. The setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b are configured to be set. The startup process is a so-called boot process, which is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false prize ball count table and trigger information data in the prize ball count data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

  The first reading memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 while accumulating until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. The first reading memory 263 is configured by a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data, for example, an SRAM. Note that the first reading memory 263 may be configured by a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing a larger amount of data.

  The first reading memory 263 includes a first counter 263a, a second counter 263b, a first counter 263c, a second counter 263d, a special winning opening counter 263e, an out counter 263f, big hit data 263g, open data 263h, and an error. At least data 263i and out-of-time data 263j are stored. These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on an initialization signal transmitted from the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on ( (See S710 in FIG. 18).

  These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are referred to by the accessory ratio calculation process executed by the CPU 261 when the timing of calculating the accessory ratio has come, and necessary processes are executed. After that, the CPU 261 again initializes all the bits to 0 (S744 in FIG. 21). As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 again while accumulating until the next timing of calculating the accessory ratio. .

  The first counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the first counter 203d indicating the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a for 0.5 second is set in the first buffer 262a by the MPU 201, the value set in the first buffer 262a by the CPU 261. (That is, the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263a.

  The first 2 counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the start 2 counter 203e indicating the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a in the start 2 buffer 262b for 0.5 second, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the start 2 buffer 262b. (That is, the number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263b.

  The general 1 counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the general counter 203f indicating the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds is set in the general buffer 262c by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 sets the value of the general buffer 203c. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263c.

  The second counter 263d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the general 2 counter 203g indicating the number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 second is set in the general 2 buffer 262d by the MPU 201, the CPU 2 sets the value in the general 2 buffer 262d. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the second counter 263d.

  The special winning opening counter 263e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the special winning opening counter 203h indicating the number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e by the MPU 201, the value is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e by the CPU 261. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the special winning opening counter 263e.

  The out counter 263f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, balls fired into the game area) until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the out counter 203i indicating the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 second is set in the out buffer 262f by the MPU 201, the value set in the out buffer 262f by the CPU 261 (that is, 0). (The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 5 seconds) is added to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the accessory ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is “number of fires”, the out counter 263f is referred to, and the number of balls (number of fires) indicated by the out counter 263f is set in the trigger setting area. When it becomes equal to or more than the “predetermined number of balls” set to 265b, the CPU 261 executes a process for calculating the accessory ratio.

  If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has reached the jackpot before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio, the jackpot medium data 263g indicates the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has reached the jackpot and the time at that time. It is the data defined together. When the MPU 201 sets the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the jackpot buffer 262g, the CPU 261 combines the jackpot information with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 and sets the jackpot. It is added to the middle data 263g.

  The opening data 263h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 has opened the door when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (door) before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. This is data that defines the door opening information indicating that the state has been set, together with the time at that time. When the MPU 201 sets the door opening information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the opening buffer 262h, the CPU 261 sets the door opening information. Is added to the open data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

  The error-in-progress data 263i includes error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. This is the data defined in conjunction with the time. When the MPU 201 sets error-in-progress information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in error as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the error-in-progress buffer 262i, the CPU 261 compares the error-in-progress information with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Are added to the error data 263i.

  The out-of-time data 263j is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 when the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is performed during a late-night time period (for example, between midnight and 6 a.m.) which is normally outside business hours. This is data that defines out-of-time information indicating that some operation was performed at midnight, together with the time at that time. When the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 is performed by the MPU 201, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266 by the CPU 261, and when it is determined that the time is in the midnight time zone, the out-of-time information is It is added to the out-of-time data 263j together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

The second reading memory 264 is configured by a nonvolatile memory capable of reading and writing data, for example, a flash memory. The second reading memory 264 only needs to hold the stored data even when the power is turned off, and other than a flash memory, a ferroelectric memory (FeRAM: Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), a magnetoresistive RAM, or the like. (MRAM: Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory), resistance change memory (ReRAM: Resistive Random)
Access Memory). Further, while the second reading memory 264 is constituted by a DRAM, the backup voltage is continuously supplied from the power supply device 115 to the DRAM while the power is turned off, so that data is retained even when the power is turned off. You may make it.

  The second reading memory 264 stores at least the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d.

  The accessory ratio data 264a is data in which data representing the accessory ratio calculated at each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is recorded together with the calculated time. The continuous character ratio data 264b is data obtained by recording data representing the continuous character ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger) together with the calculated time.

  Here, the ratio of the bonuses is paid out along with the winning in the second starting port 64b and the special winning opening 65a in which the bonuses work out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. It indicates the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls), and is set to 70% or less. In addition, the ratio of the consecutive bonuses is a ball (prize) paid out along with a prize in the special winning opening 65a in which the bonuses are continuously operated, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. (Balls), and is set to 60% or less.

  Originally, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio refer to the above-mentioned ratio in the case where the test shooting test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but here, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. At the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio shown by the player, the CPU 261 operates the player until the timing is reached for the first time after the power is turned on or between the previous timing and the current timing. Out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with the prize in the second starting port 64b and the special winning port 65a is calculated. The time is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time. In addition, of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player during the period from when the power is turned on until the timing reaches for the first time or between the previous timing and the present timing, a special winning prize The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in connection with the winning in the mouth 65a is calculated, and is recorded in the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

  In addition, even when the power supply is cut off, the power is paid out while the power supply is determined to be cut off from the timing (trigger) for calculating the latest accessory ratio using the power charged in the capacitor 267. Based on the number of balls (prize balls) that have been hit, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated, and are recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a or the continuous accessory ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after calculating and recording the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, even after the power is cut off, even with respect to the number of prize balls paid out, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are not leaked. The ratio can be calculated.

  The number of balls winning the first starting port 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls winning the second starting port 64b indicated by the second counter 263b, The number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the first counter 263c, the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the second counter 263d, and the large number indicated by the large winning counter 263e. For each of the number of balls winning the winning opening 65a, the number of winning balls associated with each winning opening shown in the winning ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a. , The number of balls paid out for each winning opening in accordance with the winning in the winning opening can be calculated. Then, by summing these, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

  As a result, the number of balls paid out with the prize in the second starting port 64b and the balls paid out with the prize in the grand prize port 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player. By calculating the total ratio with the number of items, the accessory ratio can be calculated. In addition, by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out in accordance with the prize in the special winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the continuous character ratio can be calculated.

  The number of fired balls data 264c is obtained by calculating the total number of balls fired into the game area counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio and the time at that timing. It is data recorded together. The total number of balls fired in the game area from when the power is turned on until the timing reaches the timing for the first time or from the previous timing to the current timing is indicated by the out counter 263f. When the timing for calculating the accessory ratio comes, the value of the out counter 263f at that time is recorded in the shot ball count data 264c together with the time indicated by the RTC 266.

  The gaming state data 264d includes the jackpot data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the jackpot information stored in the after-hour data 263j stored in the first reading memory 263, the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-time information. Is recorded together with the time associated with each piece of information. When it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the big hit data 263g, the open data 263h, the error data 263i, and the outside data 263j of the first reading memory 263 are stored as big hit information, door open information, The CPU 261 records the in-error information, the out-of-time information, and the time associated with each information in the gaming state data 264d.

  At this time, for example, when the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than one second, it means that the jackpot is continuously occurring as a gaming state, and thus the jackpot at the oldest time is used. Only the information and the time are recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, in the case of the information during door opening, the information during error, and the out-of-time information, when each information is stored in each of the data 263h to 263h at intervals of less than 1 second, the information of the oldest time and the time thereof are respectively provided. Only the game state data 264d is recorded. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

  When the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-hours information are recorded in the gaming state data 264d, the CPU 261 arranges (sorts) each piece of information from the oldest time information to the gaming state data 264d. Record. Then, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the order of recording. As a result, each piece of information is output in ascending order of time, so that the inspection device 300 can easily analyze a change in the game state with the passage of time by analyzing the information in that order.

  However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily need to arrange the pieces of information in order from the oldest time information and store the information in the game state data 264d. In this case, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may read out the game state data 264d in order from the information of the oldest time and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. Alternatively, each information may be output to the inspection device 300 in the order in which the information was recorded, and the inspection device 300 may rearrange the received information from the information at the oldest time.

  In addition, the jackpot information 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the jackpot information stored in the after-hour data 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 correspond to the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the after-hour information, respectively. All of them may be recorded in the game state data 264d together with the attached time. Although the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d becomes large, by outputting this to the inspection device 300, it is possible to analyze the operation state of the pachinko machine 10 while seeing a small change in the game state.

  Here, information relating to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the total number of balls fired to the game area that can be recorded in the bonus ratio data 264a, the continuous bonus ratio data 264b, and the number-of-launched-balls data 264c are respectively a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). In addition, the total number of the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-time information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the latest information is stored there. Is recorded. For example, the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d are each configured as a ring buffer, and each manages a position at which information is written on the ring buffer. The memory is prepared separately in the second reading memory 264 or in a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second reading memory 264, and by shifting the writing position by one each time information is written, the oldest information can be obtained. Erasing and recording the latest information there. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. When the information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, and the analysis including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by the inspection apparatus 300. Can be done. By providing a memory for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer in the second reading memory 264, even if the power is cut off, the power is supplied after the power is supplied. From the continuation of the information stored up to this point, new information can be added and recorded.

  When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261 and the CPU 261 causes the accessory ratio data 264a recorded in the second reading memory 264, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, and the emission. The ball count data 264c and the game state data 264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection device 300. When transmitting each of the data 264a to 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 records each information recorded in each of the data 264a to 264d (including the recorded time information associated with each information). They are read out in order and transmitted to the inspection device 300. By simply connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs and a process of transmitting each piece of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is performed. Can be completed. Therefore, the inspection device 300 analyzes the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information received from the pachinko machine 10, and can detect fraudulent acts quickly and easily based on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

  More specifically, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of the recordable information (the predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds the information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read out, and the inspection is performed. Transmit to the device 300. On the other hand, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of the recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) which is defined for each of the data, the data to be written is indicated by the memory for managing the information writing position. From the next position (ie, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded) after the written position, the read position is shifted by one at a time, and the position indicated by the memory managing the position where the information is written (ie, the position indicated by the memory) , The information recorded up to the latest time is recorded and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information at the oldest time.

  Since the second reading memory 264 is constituted by a non-volatile memory, even when the power is cut off in the middle, information on the ratio of the accessory in the pachinko machine 10 is recorded in the second reading memory 264. Continue to be. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can receive and analyze the information on the accessory ratio and the like including the information before the power is turned off.

  Here, some of the wrongdoers illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method or guide a ball to the second starting port 64b, so that the second starting port 64b can be operated. Some are trying to increase the chances of jackpots by increasing the prize money. In addition, there are those that try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening 65a by some method or guiding a ball to the special winning opening 65a. When such misconduct has occurred, the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 obtains winning information from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to each winning opening. , And calculates and calculates the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory in the pachinko machine 10 at a predetermined timing. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded on the accessory ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection device 300. In this way, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, when an illegal act has been performed, the illegal act can be found.

  In the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of balls fired to the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on information on the number of balls fired in the game area and information on the game state. be able to.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202, and the like. Accordingly, it is difficult for the wrongdoer to modify the winning information and the like input to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also, it is difficult to falsify or delete the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high reliability with respect to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated and output by the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 includes a first reading memory 263 and a second reading memory 264, and counts the number of balls won for each winning opening in the first reading memory 263. Based on the number of winning balls for each winning opening counted in, a bonus ratio and a continuous bonus ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Here, the second reading memory 264 is constituted by a nonvolatile memory. However, in general, a nonvolatile memory requires large power for writing, takes a long time for writing, The number of times of writing is limited. In the present embodiment, the first reading memory 263 composed of a volatile memory and the second reading memory 264 composed of a non-volatile memory are separated. By performing the process of counting and storing the number of winning balls for each mouth at high speed, the number of winning balls in each winning opening can be counted without missing. Then, a process of calculating the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio from the number of winning balls for each winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording the same in the second reading memory 264 is performed at a predetermined timing ( By executing each trigger, the number of times of writing to the second reading memory 264 can be reduced, so that it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problems caused by using a nonvolatile memory from becoming obvious.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of 51, and a ball is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect or continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the notice effect.

  The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect mode at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than the change of the stage, such as changing the effect of the super reach, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the frame button operation command, the display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81.

  The RAM 223 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, or indicates that a variation effect should be started in an ON state. It has a change start flag (not shown) and the like.

  The command storage area is constituted by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The fluctuation start flag is set as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 25). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set on the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 26).

  The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and displays various screen displays such as a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol and a big hit effect at the time of a big hit by an audio lamp. The control is performed according to a command transmitted from the control device 113 (main control device 110).

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as that of the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 and other various commands. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores effect data (character information) such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 includes an area (not shown) for storing a plurality of pieces of character information read from the character ROM 235 in a decompressed format to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a plurality of decompressed pieces of information. This is a memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data for one frame generated using at least a part of the character information until the display is performed.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads out the display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to perform the third reading. This is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in the present embodiment at a period of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then the startup processing and the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt processing and the main processing, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the sound ramp control device 113, and the like is generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. I do. In the external output process in S101, the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, a command for the number of held balls set in the start winning process (see FIG. 12) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a determination command, and the like set in the variation process (see FIG. 13) and the variation start process (FIG. 14), which is one of the variation processes, are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball firing signal set when a ball is fired in the processing of S111 described later is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the large winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed. Large opening opening / closing processing is performed (S103). In other words, the special winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have been won in the special winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “（” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). In brief, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes, and the second symbol display device 83 changes the second symbol. The display is performed. Then, lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory associated with the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, a switch reading process is executed (S106). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next. Details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value. When they reach (899, 99, 99, 198, 250 in this embodiment, respectively), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first random number counter C1 or The initial value of the second random number counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then, the first start port 64a. Then, a start winning process is executed in accordance with a win in one of the start ports of the second start port 64b (S110). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the sphere is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

  The other processing (S112) includes processing for determining whether the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. For example, although the information of the ball firing signal is set in the process of S111, the ball guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball fired to the game area) is detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined time or more. If not, it is determined that there is a possibility of clogging of the ball, and it is determined that there is an error. Further, when the abnormal payout signal is read in the process of S102, it is determined that the payout of the ball is in an error state. Further, when a large vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10 or when it is determined that the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed in the game, and that the game is in an error state. .

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a vibration sensing sensor for sensing vibration, and the output of the vibration sensing sensor is input to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 to determine whether a large vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10. The processing is performed by reading the output of the vibration sensor in the process of S112. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a magnetic sensor for detecting a change in magnetism, and the output of the magnetic sensor is input to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 to determine whether the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10. This is performed by reading the output of the magnetic sensor in the process of S112.

  If it is determined in the process of S112 that an error has occurred, an error command including information on the error type is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the error type can be output from the audio output device 226, the display lamp 34 can be turned on and blinked, and an image corresponding to the error type can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .

  Next, a switch reading process (S106), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S106).

  In the switch reading process, first, each of the first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the big winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. The output is read by referring to the first port 205a, the first two ports 205b, the first port 205c, the second port 205d, the special winning port 205e, and the out port 205f of the input / output port 205, and the first starting port 64a, The presence / absence of a prize in the second starting port 64b, the first normal prize opening 63a, the second normal prize opening 63b, and the special prize opening 65a, and the presence / absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path are determined, and the detection information ( The winning detection information is stored (S151). The winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharging path are performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a to 208f.

  Next, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a winning has been achieved by the processing of S151 among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. If there is a determined winning opening, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is paid out such that the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening (ie, the number specified by the winning ball count table 202e) is paid out. The award ball command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S152). Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

  Then, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a winning has been achieved in the processing of S151 among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. If there is a winning port determined, the counter corresponding to the winning port having the winning is set to 1 among the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the first 1 counter 203f, the second 2 counter 203g, and the big winning port counter 203h. When it is determined that the ball has been guided to the ball discharge path while counting up, the out counter 203i is counted up by one (S153).

  Next, it is determined whether or not 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the last time the winning information (the value of each of the counters 203d to 203i and the information on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10) was set in the accessory / material ratio managing chip 207 (see FIG. S154). As a result, if 0.5 second has not elapsed (S154: No), the switch reading process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that 0.5 seconds have elapsed (S154: Yes), the processing of S155 to S157 is executed. First, in the process of S155, the values of the first counter 203d, the second counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g, and the special winning counter 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information. Is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (S155).

  Thus, the value of the first counter 203d is set in the first buffer 262a of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the value of the first counter 203e is set in the second buffer 262b of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the first counter The value of 203f is set in the first buffer 262c of the bonus ratio management chip 207, the value of the second counter 203g is set in the second buffer 262d of the bonus ratio management chip 207, and the value of the special winning opening counter 203h is used. The value is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e of the physical ratio management chip 207, and the value of the out counter 203i is set in the out buffer 262f of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  As described above, the counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i is performed continuously for 0.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set. Is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with information indicating the gaming state at that time as out information. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning in each winning opening at every 0.5 second interval for each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path ( That is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. The number of balls won in each winning opening until the timing of calculating the material ratio or before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio from the previous calculation of the accessory ratio is calculated. It counts each time, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game).

  It is assumed that the MPU 201 does not count the number of balls winning each winning opening for each winning opening or count the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Assuming that the counting is performed only by the accessory ratio management chip 207, even the accessory ratio management chip 207 wins a prize at each winning opening or is guided to the ball discharge path at a short interval (for example, 2 millisecond interval). The sphere must be monitored, which increases the processing load and power consumption.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the counting result of the MPU 201 sets these counting results in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at 0.5 second intervals. Each time a prize is obtained from when the power is turned on until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio for the first time, or from the time when the ratio of the accessory is calculated for the previous time to the time when the ratio for the next role is calculated. A process of counting the number of balls winning the mouth for each winning opening and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning in each winning opening for each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, at two millisecond intervals when the timer interrupt processing is executed, the winning in each winning opening and the ball guided to the ball discharging path are monitored. This is necessary for performing main control of a game such as award ball determination, and is originally performed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls fired into the game area by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning port counted at 0.5 second intervals is provided. The number of winning balls or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is 0 or 1 ball in most cases, and at most several balls. Therefore, the data amount required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by this counting process. Therefore, in the MPU 201, the number of balls winning each winning opening in 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls used in the game). ) Is not significantly affected.

  The game state set by the process of S155 includes, for example, a big hit, an opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, and an error. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

  Whether or not the gaming state is in error is based on the result determined by the processing of S112 of the timer interrupt processing. In the process of S155, when it is determined in the process of S112 that there is an error, information indicating that the game is in an error state is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  If the gaming state set in the process of S155 includes a jackpot, jackpot information is stored in the jackpot buffer 262g. If the gaming state includes the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the jackpot is opened. The information indicating that the door is being opened is stored in the middle buffer 262h, and if the gaming state includes an error, the error information is stored in the error buffer 262i. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, these pieces of information are finally recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the game state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with information on the accessory ratio. Therefore, when the inspection device 300 analyzes the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and finds a mysterious tendency in the accessory ratio, the inspection device 300 refers to the information indicating the gaming state to find the cause. Can be.

  After the processing of S155, an interrupt signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S156). The accessory ratio management chip 207 executes a setting information receiving process (see FIG. 19) to be described later based on the interrupt signal and, based on various information set in the buffer 262, a ball that has won a prize hole for each winning opening. Is counted, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls fired into the game area) is counted, and the numbers of these balls are stored in the first reading memory 263, and the pachinko machine is used. Information on the ten game states is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

  After the processing of S156, the first counter 203d, the second counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g, the big winning counter 203h corresponding to each winning opening, the large winning counter 203h, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f are reset to 0. Is initialized (S157), the switch reading process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the processing of S157, the number of balls winning each winning opening in the next 0.5 seconds is counted by the counters 203d to 203h again for each winning opening. The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out counter 203i.

  In the process of S154, if this process is executed for the first time after the power is supplied to the main control device 110, the winning information (the values of the counters 203d to i and the value of the pachinko machine) (S154: Yes) It is assumed that 0.5 seconds have passed since the setting of the game state of No. 10 (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. This is the number of balls winning each winning opening detected before the power was turned off or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, which is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 when the power is turned off. The value of each of the counters 203d to 203i of the RAM 203, which has not been maintained, can be set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 immediately after the power is supplied, provided that the value is retained even during power-off. Therefore, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, it is possible to suppress the omission of the winning information and the out information due to the power cut.

  Next, the start winning process (S110), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether there is a ball (start win) in one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, and if there is a start win, each of the counters C1 to C3. A process of storing (reserving) the value of CS1 in the retaining ball storage area 203b is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the value of each of the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed.

  Upon executing the start winning process, the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won (start win) the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201). Here, by the processing of S151 of the switch reading processing (see FIG. 11), the first starting port switch 208a for detecting the winning to the first starting port 64a and the second starting for detecting the winning to the second starting port 64b. The result of the presence or absence of a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, which is determined based on the output signal from the mouth switch 208b, is used.

  When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (the start winning has been achieved) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the main controller 110 holds the ball). It is determined whether or not the number N of the pending balls of the fluctuating effect is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S202). Then, whether there is no prize in any of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. If the number N of reserved balls is not N <4 (S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201: Yes) and if the number N of retained balls is smaller than 4 (S202: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (Reserved). The number of balls N) is incremented by 1 (S203). Then, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, a first random number counter storage area 203b1, a first type counter storage area 203b2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area of an area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. 203b4 is held (stored) in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

  Specifically, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the reserved first area. If the value of the added ball count counter 203a is “2”, the storage area of the reserved second area is “2”. If the value of the added ball counter 203a is “3”, the reserved third area is “3”. If the value of the added ball count counter 203a after addition is "4" in each storage area, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the respective storage areas of the fourth reserved area.

  Next, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a (the number N of reserved balls) after the addition in the process of S203, the first random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S204, In order to transmit the reserved ball count command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice ramp control device 113, the reserved ball count command is provided in the RAM 203 for command transmission. A ring buffer is set (S205). As a result, the external ball number command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 by the external output processing of S101 of the next timer interrupt processing.

  The sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command and instructs the display control device 114 to display the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number N in the reserved ball number display area Db (see FIG. 4). I do. In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball count command to read ahead before performing a variable effect based on each value, and to determine which variable effect It is determined before the execution of the fluctuating effect whether or not such a situation occurs (whether or not a big hit will occur, what will be the fluctuating time, etc.). Then, based on the result of the pre-reading, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects.

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the processing of S205 may use the values themselves read from the counter buffer in the processing of S204, or the reserved sphere storage area in the processing of S204. A value obtained by reading out (holding) the value stored in 203b may be used.

  Upon completion of the process in S205, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a description will be given of the fluctuation process (S109), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation processing (S109). The fluctuation processing (S109) controls the fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently occurring (S301). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is being hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N of the variable display retained in the main control device 110). Is greater than or equal to 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, and first, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved) The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the execution of one variation effect of the suspended variation effects is started by the variation start process (S307), and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c, and executes the reserved first area → reserved ball execution. The data in each area is shifted, for example, the area 203c, the reserved second area → the reserved first area, the reserved third area → the reserved second area, the reserved fourth area → the reserved third area, and so on.

  After the data shift process of S306, the variation start process is executed for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), and returns to the timer interrupt processing. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, it is determined whether or not the demonstration is being performed (S308). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the reserved ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0. It is determined that the interval is under demonstration.

  When it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S308: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interruption process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output process (S101 in FIG. 14) of the next timer interrupt process. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the demonstration command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the demonstration command is set when there is no pending ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation stop, as described above. Therefore, if the fluctuation display is not started even after the elapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not being performed (S308: No), the process of determining whether a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation is further performed. After the execution and the fluctuation stop, the process of S309 may be executed after the second predetermined time has elapsed to set the demonstration command. Thereby, when there is no pending ball after the fluctuation stop, the player can show the stopped design of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S310). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (decided according to the change pattern command), and the change time elapses. If not (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 2 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. When the counter reaches 200, the LED is turned on. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is set in advance by a fluctuation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start processing, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the processing of S306, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter C2 is determined. Depending on the value of, a pattern that becomes a 15R probability variable jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds changes to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot) or a 2R probability variable jackpot (the maximum number of rounds changes to the high probability state after two rounds of jackpot) It is determined whether the symbol is a symbol that becomes a transitional jackpot to be shifted or a symbol that becomes a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of the 15th round has been reached).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change hits after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability change hit occurs, and the red LED and the blue LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. In order to confirm and display, a decision command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to stop the fluctuation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stopped symbol. Do.

  Next, a variation start process (S307), which is one of the variation processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the change start processing (S307). In the change start process (S307), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storing area, a "big hit" or "missing" lottery (big hit lottery) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. And the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process, first, a jackpot that determines whether or not a jackpot is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). A lottery (win / fail judgment) process is performed (S401).

  Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state, “7,307,582” is defined as the jackpot random value. When the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 "are defined as the jackpot random numbers.

  In the process of S401, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and they match. In this case, it is determined that the hit is a big hit. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8B) ), The display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S402).

  In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the high probability state after the maximum hit of 15 rounds The 15R probable jackpot that shifts to the 15R regular jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, or the 2R probability jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of 2 rounds Is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (the lighting state of the LED 37a) on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is, The display mode at the time of the big hit in the three symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed in the big hit display mode is determined. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, first, the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8C) to be used is selected according to the number of the reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. Then, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “15R jackpot common” group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The change pattern associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, one of the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C is selected.

  If the 2R probability change jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the change type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “2R probability change jackpot only” group of the selected jackpot change pattern table 202d1. A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In this embodiment, only the 2R variation is selected in this case. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation A, fluctuation B, fluctuation C, and 2R fluctuation) and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S401 that the hit is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of departure is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third pattern is displayed based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of the reach out of front and rear, the reach other than the front and back out, and the complete out of reach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop symbol is displayed in the off symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state at normal time excluding the time saving state, the variation pattern table for miss (normal) corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the retained ball number counter 203a. 202d2 (see FIG. 8D) is selected. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of the probability change, the variation pattern table 202d3 for the deviation (probability change) corresponding to the number of the reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a ( 8 (e) is selected.

  If complete departure is set as the stop type in the process of S404, the suspension is reserved in the “permanent departure only” group of the selected departure (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or the departure (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3. A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the fluctuation D or the fluctuation E is selected.

  In the process of step S402, if the stop type is set to the out-of-order reach and the reach other than the out-of-order stop, the "reach common" of the selected off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or the off (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is set. In this group, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C are selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the process of S406, based on the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 is set (S415), and the process returns to the fluctuation process. These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are output as voices in the processing of S101 of the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). Sent to lamp control device 113. When receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command based on the command, and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S501). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a description will be given of a start-up process performed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S604). If it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not, it is not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S614 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S614 in such a case.

  The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S706 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S614). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 203, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game balls can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S615, S616).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S615, S616) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S615, S616) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S615, S616), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and thereafter, an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S604: No), S607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S610, the initialization signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S610). Thus, the accessory ratio management chip 207 receives the initialization signal, and performs an initialization process such as initializing the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 to all 0 (S711 in FIG. 18). Initialization is performed so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 can manage the accessory ratio.

  Next, the information of the award ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize when there is a prize at each winning port indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. On the basis of the number of balls, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

  Here, the number of prize balls when there is a prize in each prize port is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is conventionally stored in the ROM 202. Each time the power is supplied, the information on the number of prize balls is transmitted to the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207. By setting to 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of award balls different for each model in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Further, when the pachinko machines are of different models, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202. Even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

  Next, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S612). Accordingly, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, when the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b and the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f comes, the pachinko machine 10 Is calculated.

  Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is determined by the accessory ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limitation on the storage capacity for recording information on the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but that the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10 are considered. Like the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the accessory ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and power is supplied. Each time the pachinko machine 10 sends the trigger information data 202f to the ROM ratio management chip 207, the trigger information data 202f is sent to the ROM 202 at a timing that matches the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264.

  After the processing of S612, the interruption is permitted (S613). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main process, a counter update process and a power-off process are roughly performed.

  In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 10) (S703), and the process proceeds to S701.

  Here, while the main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 10 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In the timer interrupt processing, different processing is executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is performed, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 controls the display of the second symbol. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, the number of the jackpot random number values to be compared with the acquired first random number counter C1 depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

  The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random. . In particular, by updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at random, the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 are updated using these as initial values for updating. Can have randomness.

  In the process of S701, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. Since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 15 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). And the power-off information is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process ends. Thereby, in the main processing of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and at the timing when the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed, the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing can be started from the processing of S701 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

  Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S701. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the periodically executed processing is executed by the timer interruption processing, and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interruption processing in the main processing. A part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening / closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch reading which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. A part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In this case, a step of determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main processing is provided. Only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a process to be executed every predetermined time is executed. The updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be performed regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is performed during the remaining time of the processing executed at predetermined time intervals, but the processing executed at predetermined time intervals is executed in accordance with the state of the game. , The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated randomly even in such a configuration.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the CPU 261 can be roughly classified into main processing of managing an accessory ratio which is started when the power is turned on, and receiving of setting information executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201. There is a process and a test result output process executed based on the connection of the test device 300 to the test terminal 207a.

  First, with reference to FIG. 18, the accessory ratio management main processing executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main part ratio management process. This accessory ratio management main process is started when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  When the accessory ratio management main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not an initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). While it is determined that the initialization signal has not been received (S710: No), the determination in S710 is continued. If it is determined that the initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to S711 to perform initialization (S711). Thereby, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the initialization of the RAM 203 in at least the MPU 201 is completed, and the initial setting of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed after waiting for the stage in which the control of the game by the MPU 201 can be started. Will do.

  In the initialization of S711, when starting the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207, initialization necessary for each device in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed. For example, the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0. As a result, in the buffer 262, even if there is a buffer that is not set by the MPU 201 for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, meaningless data can be suppressed from remaining in the buffer. It can be prevented from being stored in the memory 263. Also, in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls won in each winning opening and the ball discharge path are guided to the timing of calculating the ratio of the bonus after the power is supplied to the bonus ratio management chip 207. The number of balls that have been hit (that is, the number of balls fired into the game area) can be accumulated and counted, and information about the game state during that time can be stored.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the award ball count table 202e has been received from the MPU 201 (S712). Then, while not receiving (S712: No), the process of S712 is continuously executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been received (S712: Yes), the received prize ball count table 202e is set in the prize ball count data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize when there is a prize at each winning port indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. On the basis of the number of balls, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the trigger information data 202f has been received from the MPU 201 (S714). Then, while not receiving (S714: No), the process of S714 is continuously executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the trigger information has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. Thus, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b occurs in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and The continuous character ratio is calculated.

  As described above, only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted during the startup process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is turned on are the prize balls. The number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b are configured to be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false prize ball count table and trigger information data in the prize ball count data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

  Next, when the processing of S710 to S715 is completed, interruption permission is set (S716). As a result, when an interrupt signal transmitted after the winning information and the like is set from the MPU 201 is received, the setting information receiving process is executed, and the error occurs based on the fact that the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. Inspection result output processing is executed by the interrupt signal.

  When an interrupt signal is input at the same time, the setting information receiving process is executed prior to the inspection result output process. As a result, the latest winning information, out information, and information on the game state input from the MPU 201 are accumulated and stored in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and then the information such as the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be performed including the latest information. On the other hand, when the interrupt signals are input at the same time, the inspection result output processing may be executed prior to the inspection apparatus output processing. In this case, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, it is possible to transmit information about the accessory ratio and the like to the inspection device 300.

  Next, it is determined whether or not power-off information has been received from the MPU 201 (S717). Unless power-off information has been received (S717: No), S717 is continuously executed. If the CPU 261 receives an interrupt signal from the MPU 201 during that time, it executes the setting information receiving process prior to the process of S717, and generates an interrupt generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a. If an inspection signal is received, an inspection result output process is executed.

  As a result of the processing in S717, when the power-off information is received (S717: Yes), the power to the main control device 110 (the accessory ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, the accessory ratio calculation processing is executed (S718), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. The details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the setting information reception processing executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the setting information receiving process. This setting information receiving process is executed based on the interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after the winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201.

  The setting information receiving process includes winning information (each value of the first counter 203d, the second counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g, and the special winning opening counter 203h) set in the buffers 262a to 262e by the MPU 201 and This is a process of storing the out information (the value of the out counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f and the game state set in each of the buffers 262g to 262i in the first reading memory 263. If it is the timing of calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263, and the data on the number of fired balls and the game state are calculated. At the same time, processing for recording in the second reading memory 264 is also performed.

  First, reference is made to FIG. In the setting information receiving process, first, it is determined whether or not there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720). If there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: Yes), the door opening information is set (added and stored) in the opening data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 ( S721).

  When it is determined by the processing of S720 that there is no door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: No), and after the processing of S721, next, it is determined whether there is error information in the error buffer 262i. Is determined (S722). If there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: Yes), the error information is set (added and stored) in the error data 263i together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S723). .

  If it is determined by the processing of S722 that there is no error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: No), and after the processing of S723, the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is then changed to the midnight time zone (midnight 0). It is determined whether or not the time is between the hour and the early morning (6:00) (S724). Normally, since the midnight hours are outside business hours, the fact that the MPU 201 transmits an interrupt signal during this midnight time and the setting information receiving process is executed means that any illegal acts are performed during the midnight hours. It is thought that it was done. Therefore, if it is determined in the process of S724 that the time is midnight (S724: Yes), in order to keep a record to that effect, the out-of-time information is indicated by the RTC 266 in the out-of-time data 263j. It is set (added and stored) in accordance with the time (S725).

  If it is determined by the processing of S724 that it is not the midnight time zone (S724: No), and after the processing of S725, it is then determined whether or not there is big hit information in the big hit buffer 262g (S726). If there is jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726: Yes), the jackpot information is set (added and stored) in the jackpot data 263g together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S727).

  When it is determined that there is no big hit information in the big hit buffer 262g by the process of S726 (S726: No), and after the process of S727, it is set in the buffers 262a to 262f corresponding to each winning port and the out switch 208f. The calculated values are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first reading memory 263 (S728).

  Specifically, the value set in the first buffer 262a corresponding to the first starting port 64a (that is, the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a is accumulated in the first counter 263a. The value set in the first buffer 262b corresponding to the second starting port 64b (that is, the number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b is accumulated in the first counter 263b.

  The value set in the general 1 buffer 262c corresponding to the first normal winning opening 63a (that is, the number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the general 1 counter 263c. As a result, the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a is accumulated in the first counter 263c. The value set in the second buffer 262d corresponding to the second normal winning opening 63b (that is, the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the second counter 263d. As a result, the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b is accumulated in the second counter 263d. The value set in the special winning opening buffer 262e corresponding to the special winning opening 65a (that is, the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the special winning opening counter 263e. Thus, the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a is accumulated in the special winning opening counter 263e.

  Each of the counters 263a to 264f and each of the data 263g to 264j of the first reading memory 263 includes an initial setting process (refer to FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and an accessory ratio. It is initialized to 0 in later-described S744 (see FIG. 21) executed when the timing for calculation is reached. As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 again while accumulating until the next timing of calculating the accessory ratio. .

  Subsequently, the description of the setting information winning process will be continued with reference to FIG. After the processing of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is the “number of fires” (S729: “number of fires”), the value of the out counter 263f (that is, the game) It is determined whether or not the number of balls fired in the area) is equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of balls” (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S730). If the value of the out counter 263f is equal to or more than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S733). , To S734. The details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if the value of the out counter 263f is not equal to or more than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

  By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio based on the number of shot balls, it is possible to always calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio while a predetermined ball is fired. Therefore, since many balls win various prize ports and the winning agent ratio and the continuous winning agent ratio at the stage when the winning ball is performed can be calculated, the averaged winning agent ratio and the continuous winning agent ratio are calculated. it can. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate fluctuations in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in a short time in a normal game, so that the inspection device 300 can more easily analyze a fraudulent activity.

  In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “time” (S729: “time”), the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is changed to “time”. It is determined whether or not the “predetermined time” (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f has been reached (S731). Here, reaching has not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC 266 matches the "predetermined time" but also includes the case where the "predetermined time" has passed for the first time.

  When it is determined that the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the “predetermined time” by the process of S731 (S731: Yes), it is determined that the timing for calculating the accessory ratio has come. Then, the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the flow shifts to S734. On the other hand, if the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has not reached the “predetermined time” (S731: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

  By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio based on the current time, even when the pachinko machine 10 does not play a lot of games, the arrival of the predetermined time ensures that the accessory ratio is ensured. And the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can be surely analyzed for the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the surely calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

  In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “game time” (S729: “game time”), the player uses the pachinko machine 10 It is determined whether or not the total time (game time) in which the game has been performed is equal to or longer than the "predetermined time" included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

  Here, the game time can be calculated by, for example, the following method. That is, a game time counter is provided in the first reading memory 263. The game time counter, like other counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263, performs an initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207; It is initialized to 0 in later-described S744 (see FIG. 21) executed when the timing for calculating the accessory ratio comes. Then, in the setting information receiving process, the value of the out buffer 262f is checked, and if a value of 1 or more is set, the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected, that is, the ball is detected in the game area. Since it means that the game has been fired, the game time counter is counted up by one. The setting information reception counter is started by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. Therefore, the game time can be calculated by adding 0.5 seconds to the value of the game time counter.

  When it is determined that the game time is equal to or longer than the “predetermined time” by the process of S732 (S732: Yes), it is determined that the timing for calculating the accessory ratio has come, and the accessory ratio calculation process is executed. (S733) The flow shifts to S734. On the other hand, if the game time is shorter than the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

  The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are originally calculated by performing a test shooting test of a game ball for 10 hours. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio by the game time, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio close to the original definition can be calculated by the accessory ratio management chip. The analysis can be performed using the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio close to the original definition.

  In the process of S734, all buffers 262 are initialized to 0 (S734). Thereby, in the next setting of the winning information, the out information, and the game information from the MPU 201, even if there is a buffer that is not set for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, it is possible to suppress that meaningless data remains in the buffer, It is possible to prevent the meaningless data from being stored in the first reading memory 263. After the processing in S734, the setting information reception processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the accessory ratio calculation processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the accessory ratio calculation process. The accessory ratio calculating process is a process of calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording the ratio in the second reading memory 264. The timing of calculating the accessory ratio ( (Trigger) (see FIG. 20), and also when power is cut off (see FIG. 18).

  In the accessory ratio calculation process, first, the accessory ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the accessory ratio data 264a together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. (S740). Next, the continuous character ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and is added to the continuous character ratio data 264b and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S741). ).

  The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls winning the first starting port 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, and the number of balls winning the second starting port 64b indicated by the second counter 263b. , The number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the first counter 263c, the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the second counter 263d, and the large winning counter 263e. The prize associated with each winning opening shown in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a with respect to each of the numbers of the balls winning in the special winning opening 65a. When the number of balls is multiplied, the number of balls paid out for each winning opening in accordance with winning in the winning opening is calculated. Next, the total of these is calculated as the total number of balls paid out to the player.

  Then, with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the number of balls paid out with the prize in the second starting port 64b and the number of balls paid out with the prize in the big winning port 65a By calculating the ratio of the total with the number, the ratio of the accessory is calculated. Further, the ratio of the number of balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the special winning opening 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated, thereby calculating the ratio of the continuous character.

  Originally, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio refer to the above-mentioned ratio when a game ball test test is performed for 10 hours. In the present embodiment, the trigger information data set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. At each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by 202f, the player is notified from the time when the power is turned on until the timing reaches the timing for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. Of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in accordance with the prize in the second starting port 64b and the special winning port 65a is calculated as the accessory-material ratio. Then, it is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. In addition, of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player during the period from when the power is turned on until the timing reaches for the first time or between the previous timing and the present timing, a special winning prize The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in connection with the prize in the mouth 65a is calculated as the continuous bonus ratio, and is recorded in the continuous bonus ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

  In addition, even when the power supply is cut off, the power is paid out while the power supply is determined to be cut off from the timing (trigger) for calculating the latest accessory ratio using the power charged in the capacitor 267. Based on the number of balls (prize balls) that have been hit, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated, and are recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a or the continuous accessory ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after calculating and recording the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, even after the power is cut off, even with respect to the number of prize balls paid out, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are not leaked. The ratio can be calculated.

  Next, the value of the out counter 263f indicating the total number of balls shot into the game area is added to the shot ball count data 264c and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S742). Furthermore, various jackpot information stored in the big hit data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, out-of-time data 263j, door open information, error information, and out-of-hour information are associated with each information. The times (the times at which the information was stored) are arranged (sorted) in order from the information of the oldest time, and added to the game state data 264d and recorded (S743).

  In the processing of S743, for example, when the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot medium data 263g at intervals of less than 1 second, it means that the jackpot is continuously occurring as the gaming state, and therefore the oldest time is set. Is recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Similarly, in the case of the information during door opening, the information during error, and the information outside time, when each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the information of the oldest time and the time thereof Only the game state data 264d is recorded. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

  As described above, upon receiving the winning information, the out information, and the information on the game state from the MPU 201, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates and temporarily stores the information in the first reading memory 263, At each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and added to the second reading memory 264. Record. Thus, the ratio of the accessory and the like can be managed with a small storage capacity, and the information on the ratio of the accessory and the like can be transmitted to the inspection device 300.

  In addition, the second reading memory 264 also stores the time when these were recorded in the second reading memory 264 for the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Further, in the second reading memory 264, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area as well as the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is stored in the second reading memory 264 at the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. The information about the game state (big hit information, door opening information, error information, out-of-hours information) is also recorded together with the time when each information is stored in the first reading memory 263. 264. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, when there is a large change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the changed accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is changed to the second. By analyzing the total number of balls fired in the game area and the game state near the time recorded in the second reading memory 264, the cause of the change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio can be found.

  Here, information relating to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the total number of balls fired to the game area that can be recorded in the bonus ratio data 264a, the continuous bonus ratio data 264b, and the number-of-launched-balls data 264c are respectively a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of hit information, door opening information, error information, and out-of-time information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the latest information is stored there. Is recorded.

  More specifically, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d are each constituted by a ring buffer, and a memory for managing a position where information is written on the ring buffer is prepared for each. By shifting the writing position by one each time information is written, the process of erasing the oldest information and recording the newest information therein can be realized.

  In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. When the information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, and the analysis including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by the inspection apparatus 300. Can be done.

  After the processing in S743, the first reading memory 263 is initialized to all zeros (S744). Thus, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored again by the first reading memory 263 until the next timing of calculating the accessory ratio is reached. .

  When the process of S744 ends, the accessory ratio calculation process ends.

  Next, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the inspection result output processing. This inspection result output processing is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when a connector of a cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, the data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

  When the inspection result output processing is executed, first, all the accessory ratios recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a and the accessory ratios associated with the respective accessory ratios are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The recorded time is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the recording medium having the oldest recording time (S751).

  Specifically, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the accessory ratio data 264a, the CPU 261 writes information of the accessory ratio first in the accessory ratio data 264a. The information of the bonus ratio recorded from the location to the location indicated by the memory that manages the location where the information is written (ie, the location where the bonus ratio information at the latest time is recorded) is stored. The data is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the accessory ratio data 264a, the position next to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (that is, The position to be read is shifted one by one in order from the position of the information on the ratio of the character at the oldest time, and the position indicated by the memory managing the position where the information is written (that is, the position of the latest time). The information recorded up to the position where the information of the physical ratio is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the accessory ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information at the oldest time.

  Next, all the continuous bonus ratios recorded in the continuous bonus ratio data 264b and the time when the continuous bonus ratio associated with each continuous bonus ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 are described. Then, the recording time is outputted to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest thing ratio (S752).

  More specifically, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the continuous auditors ratio data 264b, the CPU 261 first stores information on the continuous auditors ratio in the continuous auditors ratio data 264b. Is recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (that is, the position where the information on the continuous character ratio at the latest time is recorded). The information of the physical ratio is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when the continuous accessory ratio data 264b satisfies the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the position next to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (that is, the next position) From the oldest time to the position where the information on the continuous character ratio is recorded) is shifted by one at a time, and the position indicated by the memory for managing the position at which the information is written (that is, the latest time) (The position at which the information on the continuous character ratio is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the continuous character ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information at the oldest time.

  Next, information on the number of balls fired to all the game areas (number of fired balls) recorded in the number of fired balls data 264c and information on the number of fired balls associated with the information on each number of fired balls are displayed. (2) The times recorded in the reading memory 264 and the recorded times are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest thing ratio (S753).

  Specifically, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the number-of-launched-balls data 264c, the CPU 261 writes the information of the number of launched spheres in the number-of-launched-balls data 264c first. Information of the number of shot spheres recorded from the recorded position to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (ie, the position where the information of the number of fired balls at the latest time is recorded). The data is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the number-of-launched-balls data 264c, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, The reading position is shifted one by one in order from the earliest time in which the information of the number of fired balls is recorded, and the position indicated in the memory managing the position where the information is written (that is, the latest time of firing). The information recorded up to the position where the information on the number of balls is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the number of shot balls is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information on the oldest time.

  Next, all the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-time information recorded in the game state data 264d, and the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263 in association with each information. Are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the information whose time is old (S754).

  Specifically, in the case where the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the game state data 264d, the CPU 261 starts from the position where the information is first written in the game state data 264d. The information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory for managing the writing position (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the game state data 264d, the position next to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (that is, the most The reading position is shifted one by one from the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded, and the position indicated in the memory managing the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) ) Are sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As described above, in the gaming state data 264d, information on the gaming state is arranged (sorted) from the information of the oldest time and recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Therefore, the information on the game state is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

  By the processes of S751 to S754, each piece of information is sequentially output from the oldest one. Therefore, the inspection apparatus 300 analyzes each piece of information in the order of the output, thereby obtaining the ratio of the character and the material with time. It is possible to easily analyze the change of the continuous character ratio, the number of fired balls and the game state.

  After the processing of S754, the inspection result output processing ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. And record. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded on the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

  Here, some of the wrongdoers illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method or guide a ball to the second starting port 64b, so that the second starting port 64b can be operated. Some are trying to increase the chances of jackpots by increasing the prize money. In addition, there are those that try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening 65a by some method or guiding a ball to the special winning opening 65a. When such misconduct has occurred, the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory increase.

  On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, if an illegal act is performed, Can be found.

  In the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of balls fired to the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on information on the number of balls fired in the game area and information on the game state. be able to.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202, and the like. Accordingly, it is difficult for the wrongdoer to modify the winning information and the like input to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high reliability with respect to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated and output by the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  Also, since the MPU 201 does not manage the accessory ratio and the like, but a dedicated accessory ratio management chip 207 for managing the accessory ratio and the like is provided, an increase in the processing load of the MPU 201 can be suppressed, and The MPU 201 can be dedicated to such control.

  Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a prize ball number data setting area 265a, and when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio using the award ball number table 202e set in the award ball number data setting area 265a. This eliminates the need to store information on the number of prize balls different for each model in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. If the pachinko machine model is different, the ROM 202 may be changed. Even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 23, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”), and the power-off processing in S915 (see FIG. 24). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when receiving a power-off command from main controller 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), sound lamp control device 113 executes a power-off process in S915. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S915 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is OFF (S802: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off processing in S915 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S915 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S915, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a checking method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S806). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when executing the power-off process in S915 (see S914 in FIG. 24). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S915 is executed, the process of S808 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S808 is performed with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S808 is performed via the processes of steps S804 to S806. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), the process skips S809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S810, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S811), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S809 is skipped is that when the process from S804 to the process of S808 is performed via the process of S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S804. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the last time the process of S901 was executed (S901). If the one or more millisecond has not elapsed (S901: No). , Without performing the processing in S902 to S908. In the processing of S901, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. Unlike S902 to S908, which need not be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), the variable display processing in S910. This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S911 or S911 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S910 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  In the process of S901, when it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the last time the process of S901 was executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. If the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process directly proceeds to the process of S902.

  In the process of S902, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S906 described later (S903), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S904). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S905 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  Next, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, and the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S905 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S905) is completed, next, a lamp editing process is executed (S906), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S907, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S906 is performed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / outputting process of S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Run in time. After the processing in S908, the flow shifts to the processing in S910.

  In the process of S910, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the fluctuation display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S911). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off processing is executed (S915). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S916), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S911). This command determination processing (S911) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S1001). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in a variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later, a display variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern to the display control device 114. Used when setting.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the change start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. .

  Note that the main control unit 110 transmits the fluctuation pattern command when the fluctuation effect is started, and then indicates the fluctuation production stop type in which the fluctuation pattern is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. This command is always transmitted from 110. By setting the fluctuation start flag to ON in the processing of S1005, in the fluctuation display processing to be executed later, based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the previously received fluctuation pattern command and the stop type extracted from the stop type command. Then, a process for generating a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern and the stop type, and performing processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is performed.

  As a result of the processing in S1003, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1003: No), it is next determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1006). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the suspended variable effect is retained) The number of spheres is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1007).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Every time there is, by the processing of S1007, the value of the number of retained balls stored in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the number of retained balls of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the retained number of balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the number of retained balls of the The value of the number counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  Next, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received pending ball count command are extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. It was done. The audio ramp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process by referring to each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223. That is, when the suspended fluctuation effect is executed, the result of the fluctuation effect is determined (whether or not a jackpot, the fluctuation time, etc.) will be determined before the execution of the fluctuation effect, Execution of various effects can be determined.

  Next, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the reserved ball count stored in the RAM 223 by the processing of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main processing. The display reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by a command output process (S902) of the main process. As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process to display the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of the processing in S1006, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1006: No), it is next determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1011), and the process returns to the main processing. . The display determination command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. The display control device 114 stops the fluctuation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the determination command for display, and corresponds to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display earlier. By displaying the stop symbol, it is confirmed and displayed.

  As a result of the processing of S1010, when it is determined that the finalization command has not been received (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1012), and proceeds to main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1013, temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then executed as a command output process ( It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by S902).

  Next, the variable display processing (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S910).

  This fluctuation display processing (S910) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the command, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. This is the processing to be performed.

  In the variation display processing, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the change start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. End and return to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S1102) and extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S1002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25). The fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1103). The variation pattern extracted here is a variation time. In the sound ramp control device 113, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns are prepared for each fluctuation time, and one detailed fluctuation pattern is prepared from the plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the extracted fluctuation pattern (variation time). The pattern is determined by lottery, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern is set (S1104).

  The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by a command output process of the main process (S902). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the extracted stop type is set (S1104). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by a command output process (S902) of the main process. The display control device 114 sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set in the process of S1105 is to be confirmed and displayed. I do.

  Next, the value of the number of reserved balls in the RAM 223 is reduced by one in accordance with the consumption of the reserved balls in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command (that is, the setting of the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls). (S1107), a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the reserved ball count is set (S1108). Then, the process returns to the main processing.

  The display pending ball count command set by the processing of S1108 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (S902). You. The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the retained balls by counting the number of the retained ball symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 236. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is started when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

  When the main process is executed by the MPU 231 after the power is turned on, first, an initial setting process is executed (S1401). Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the extracted information is stored in an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 where the decompressed character information is stored. The extracted character information is written in the prepared frame buffer area. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed.

  When the initial setting process is completed, interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1402, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27C is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. And display to the image controller 236.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 236 when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing and the display processing are not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 27C, first, a command determination processing (S1602) is executed. In this command determination processing (S1602), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption processing are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored, the image is drawn so that the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 by the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern table command. And control of display is started.

  When the display stop type command is stored, the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed at the stop symbol indicated by the display stop type command, so that the high speed fluctuation is performed ( While the display of the third symbol is being changed so that the player cannot recognize the content of the third symbol), the displayed third symbol is replaced. When the confirmation command for display is stored, the drawing and display of the image are controlled so that the fixed display is performed in the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the command determination process (S1602), all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the fluctuation effect and other effect modes selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Can be controlled so that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the command determination process (S1602) is completed, a display setting process (S1603) is executed. In the display setting process (S1603), based on the type of screen to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602) and the like, one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The content of the image is specifically specified.

  After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, a task process is executed (S1064). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S1603), the characters (sprites, display objects) constituting the image are determined. The type is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite).

  Then, a drawing process is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined in the task process (S1503) are transmitted to the image controller 236. Thus, the image controller 236 executes the image drawing process according to the information, and displays the image drawn according to the information received 1V before on the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Control for transmitting image data to the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  Thereafter, after performing other necessary processing, for example, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main control device 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the role ratio management chip 207 Calculate and record the material ratio and the continuous character ratio. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded on the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

  Here, some of the wrongdoers illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method or guide a ball to the second starting port 64b, so that the second starting port 64b can be operated. Some are trying to increase the chances of jackpots by increasing the prize money. In addition, there are those that try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening 65a by some method or guiding a ball to the special winning opening 65a. When such misconduct has occurred, the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory increase.

  On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, if an illegal act is performed, Can be found.

  In the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of balls fired to the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on information on the number of balls fired in the game area and information on the game state. be able to.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the values of the counters 263 a to 263 e stored in the first reading memory 263. Has been described, and is recorded in the second reading memory 264. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, each of the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 is read. The values of the counters 263a to 263e are recorded in the second reading memory 264 as they are, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second reading memory 264 are output to the inspection device 300 as they are.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of main controller 110 in pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the second reading memory 264 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 stores the accessory ratio data 264a and the accessory ratio data 264a according to the first embodiment. The point is that prize counter data 264e is recorded instead of the continuous character ratio data 264b.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is different from that of the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the trigger information data 202f indicates a trigger (timing) for recording the values of the respective counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. Note that only the meaning of the trigger information data 202f is different from that of the first embodiment, and the content itself is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  That is, in the trigger information data 202f, as the trigger (timing) for recording the values of the respective counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264, "number of firings", "time", " Information indicating any of "game time" is defined.

  When the information indicating the “number of shots” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating the “predetermined number of balls” that is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the “number of shots” and information indicating 500 balls as the “predetermined number of balls”, the first reading is performed every time the number of shot balls reaches 500. The values of the respective counters 263 a to 263 e stored in the memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  When the information indicating “time” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating “predetermined time” which is a timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when information indicating “time” and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 are defined as the “predetermined time” in the trigger information data 202f, the time is set to 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  When the information indicating the “game time” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the “predetermined time” which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when information indicating “game time” and information indicating 2 hours as “predetermined time” are defined in the trigger information data 202f, the first reading memory 263 is read every time the game time elapses 2 hours. Of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the second reading memory 264.

  The winning counter data 264e is stored in the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) of recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. The total number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a counted, the total number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b counted by the first counter 263b, and the first normal number that has been counted by the first counter 263c. The total number of balls that have won the winning opening 63a, the total number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the ordinary 2 counter 263d, and the large winning opening 65a that has been counted by the special winning opening counter 263e. Is the data recorded together with the total number of hit balls and the time at the recording timing.

  The total number of balls won in each winning opening during the period from when the power is turned on until the timing reaches for the first time or between the previous timing and the present timing is determined by a counter 263a to 263e corresponding to each winning opening. Is indicated by When it is time to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264, the values of the counters 263a to 263e at that time are indicated by the RTC 266. Is recorded in the winning counter data 264e at the same time.

  The winning counter data 264e is associated with one time, and the total number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a, the total number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b, and the first normal winning port 63a have been won at that time. The total number of balls, the total number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the total number of balls that have won the large winning opening 65a may be recorded.

  Further, an area for recording the total number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a in the winning counter data 264e, an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second starting opening 64b, and a winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a. An area for recording the total number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a, and a first reading memory. When the timing (trigger) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the second reading memory 264 into the second reading memory 264 is reached, the total number of balls winning the corresponding winning opening is calculated for each area. The winning counter data 264e may be configured to be recorded in synchronization with the time at the timing.

  Here, the information on the total number of balls that have won the winning holes that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, in association with one time, the total number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a at that time, the total number of balls winning the second starting opening 64b, the total number of balls winning the first normal winning opening 63a, When the winning counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b and the total number of balls winning in the special winning opening 65a, a predetermined number of information is already recorded in the winning counter data 264e. If the information has been set, the oldest time information is deleted, and the latest information is recorded there. For example, the winning counter data 264e is configured as a ring buffer, and a memory for managing a position where information is written is separately prepared on the ring buffer, and the writing position is shifted by one each time information is written. Thus, a process of erasing the oldest information and recording the newest information therein can be realized. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. When the information to be recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is recorded. An analysis can be performed.

  It should be noted that an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting port 64b, and a total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning port 63a are recorded. In the case where the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b and an area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a, Alternatively, a ring buffer may be configured for each area, and an upper limit may be set for the number of information that can be recorded in each area, and control may be performed as described above. Thereby, when the information to be recorded reaches the upper limit number in each area, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is recorded. An analysis can be performed.

  When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261. The CPU 261 records the winning counter data 264e recorded in the second reading memory 264, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the game state data. 264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When transmitting each of the data 264e, 264c, 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 stores each information recorded in each of the data 264e, 264c, 264d (including the recorded time information associated with each information). Are read out in the order in which they were recorded, and transmitted to the inspection device 300.

  More specifically, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of the recordable information (the predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds the information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read out, and the inspection is performed. Transmit to the device 300. On the other hand, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of the recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) which is defined for each of the data, the data to be written is indicated by the memory for managing the information writing position. From the next position (ie, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded) after the written position, the read position is shifted by one at a time, and the position indicated by the memory managing the position where the information is written (ie, the position indicated by the memory) , The information recorded up to the latest time is recorded and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information at the oldest time.

  It should be noted that an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting port 64b, and a total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning port 63a are recorded. In the case where the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b and an area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a, By reading the information for each area as described above, the total number of balls winning the winning opening is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information for each winning opening. Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of the winning information storage processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the winning information storing process. In the first embodiment, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio comes (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18), the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is used. In the second embodiment, the main character ratio and the continuous main character ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 21). However, in the second embodiment, they are stored in the first reading memory 263. When the timing (trigger) for recording each piece of information in the second reading memory 264 is reached (see FIG. 20), and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18), a prize is won in place of the accessory ratio calculation process. Execute information storage processing. The winning information storing process is a process of recording each information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264.

  In the winning information storing process, first, the values of the counters 263 a to 263 e corresponding to the winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 are combined with the current time indicated by the RTC 266, and the second reading memory 264 is read. It is recorded in addition to the winning counter data 264e (S761). Thus, for each combination timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, a period from when the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. Until the timing of the first reading memory 263, the total number of balls winning the first starting port 64a counted by the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the second starting port 64b counted by the second counter 263b are stored. The total number of balls won, the total number of balls won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a counted by the first counter 263c, and the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the second counter 263d. The total number and the total number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a counted by the special winning opening counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  Further, even when the power supply is cut off, it is determined that the power supply is cut off from the most recent timing (trigger) of recording in the second reading memory 264 using the power charged in the capacitor 267. In addition, the total number of balls winning the first starting port 64a counted by the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263, and the total number of balls winning the second starting port 64b counted by the second counter 263b And the total number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the first counter 263c, the total number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the second counter 263d, The total number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a counted by the mouth counter 263e is additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, even if a prize is received in each winning port during a period in which it is determined that the power is cut off from the timing (trigger) when the recording was performed on the second reading memory 264, the prize is not missed. The total number of balls played can be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each winning opening.

  In subsequent S742 to S744, the same processing (see FIG. 21) as S742 to S744 of the accessory ratio calculation processing of the first embodiment is executed, and the winning information storage processing ends.

  Next, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the inspection result output processing. This inspection result output processing is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, as in the first embodiment. In the inspection result output process, the data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

  When the inspection result output process in the second embodiment is executed, first, the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is output to the inspection device 300 (S771). Next, all the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e is associated with the information, and the time when the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the recording time. Output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest information (S772). In S753 and S754 executed subsequent to the process of S772, the same processes as S753 and S754 of the inspection result output process of the first embodiment are executed, and the inspection result output process ends.

  The inspection device 300 calculates the ratio of the bonus material and the continuous bonus material ratio based on the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening output in S772 and the prize ball number table 202e output in S771. Then, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are analyzed. Then, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on information on the number of balls fired to the game area and information on the game state. be able to. In addition, by the processing of S772, the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening is sequentially output from the oldest one, so that the inspection apparatus 300 analyzes each information in the order in which the information is output. In addition, it is possible to easily analyze changes in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio over time.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, every time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, The values of the counters 263a to 263e for counting the total number of winning balls for each winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 is the prize ball number table 202e. Is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the total number of balls that have won the corresponding winning opening is obtained for each winning opening, and is recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, the required storage capacity of the second reading memory 264 is larger than in the case where the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264 as in the first embodiment. Since the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is transmitted to the device 300, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that there is a large change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the inspection device 300 By referring to the total number of winning balls for each winning opening, the cause can be grasped more accurately.

  Further, information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening transmitted to the inspection device 300 is associated with the time at which the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264, and transmitted to the inspection device 300. You. Therefore, in the inspection device 300, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are analyzed based on the information indicating the total number of balls winning each winning opening, a large change occurs in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. The time at which the total number of balls won in each winning opening used in the calculation of the changed bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio is specified in the second reading memory 264, and the time is specified. By analyzing the total number of balls won in each winning opening, the total number of balls fired in the game area, or the game state, it is possible to find the cause of the change in the ratio of the accessory or the continuous accessory.

  In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can provide the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments, a case where the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 and the information on the accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207. explained. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the MPU 201 manages information relating to the accessory ratio. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is provided with the hand ratio display device 400, and displays the information on the accessory ratio on the hand ratio display device 400.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first or second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first or second embodiment. And description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment is that the configuration of the main control device 110 is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

  As described above, the main control device 110 of the third embodiment does not include the accessory ratio management chip 207, and manages information on the accessory ratio by the MPU 201. Specifically, the accessory ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment is executed in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201. . At this time, each counter and data stored in the first reading memory 263 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 are stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

  Further, the second reading memory 264 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 so as to be connected to the input / output port 205. In the third embodiment, the RTC 266 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment uses a built-in (not shown) in the MPU 201.

  Further, the inspection terminal 207a to which the inspection device 300 is connected is connected to the input / output port 205. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, the MPU 201 executes an inspection result output process, and information about the accessory ratio and other information about the inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300.

  Further, the winning combination display device 400 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The winning combination display device 400 is composed of, for example, a plurality of 7-segment display devices, and is provided on a main board constituting the main control device 110. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is assembled so that the display screen of the winning combination display device 400 can be seen when looking at the back side thereof. Note that the pachinko machine 10 may be assembled so that the display screen of the duty ratio display device 400 can be seen from the front side.

  The combination ratio display device 400 displays a combination of the bonus and the consecutive combination, or information (for example, a base value) related to the combination of the combination and the ratio of the continuous combination. For example, the information on the role ratio and the continuous role ratio displayed on the role ratio display device 400 may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning, for each winning opening, or all winnings. The total number of balls paid out by winning a prize to the mouth, the total number of balls paid out by winning a prize to the winning opening (the second starting port 64b and the big winning opening 65a) in which the accessory operates, and It may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning a winning opening (large winning opening 65a) that operates. Further, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area (the number of fired balls) may be included in the information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the combination ratio display device 400. The winning combination display device 400 is configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display. Alternatively, information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed.

  The MPU 201 has a built-in ROM 202 and a RAM 203, and also has a plurality of registers 200 for storing various data in a hierarchy closest to an ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit) which is the heart of the MPU 201. The plurality of registers 200 are generally used in various situations without a specific purpose, such as temporarily holding a value in the middle of an operation or storing a memory address required for processing. Various registers such as a general-purpose register and an accumulator register for accumulating and summing the operation results of the ALU are included.

  The plurality of registers 200 also include a flag register 200a (also referred to as a status register or the like) including a flag indicating an overflow by an ALU operation, a flag indicating an interrupt state, and the like. The contents of the flag register 200a can be updated each time one instruction is executed due to the nature of the register.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a use area inside area 203x and a use area outside area 203y, and a work area (inner work area 203x1, outer work area 203y1) and a stack area (inner stack area 203x2, outer stack area 203y2, respectively). ) Are provided.

  This is because, when the MPU 201 performs main control of the game, while the MPU 201 manages information relating to the accessory ratio, the counter is stored in the RAM 203 and used for various counters used for the main control of the game. This is because it is necessary to prevent data from being erroneously destroyed by various counters and data stored in the RAM 203 and used for managing information on the ratio of the accessory. In other words, various counters and data used for main control of the game must be protected with certainty in order to protect the interests of the player. In addition, the data saved in the stack area of the RAM 203 when performing the main control of the game also continues the main control of the game again without any problem after the processing relating to the management of the information on the accessory ratio is performed on the way. You must ensure that it is protected.

  Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores various counters and data used for main control of the game in the internal work area 203x1 of the area 203x in the use area, and stores the stack area when performing the main control of the game. Is saved to the stack area 203x2 of the used area 203x. On the other hand, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data used for management of the information about the accessory ratio in the outer work area 203y1 of the out-of-use area 203y, and stores it in the stack area when managing the information about the accessory ratio. The data to be saved is saved in the outside stack area 203y2 of the outside area 203y. This makes it possible to reliably protect various counters and data used for main control of the game, and data saved in the stack area when performing the control.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, it is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, a game process for performing main control of the game is executed (S2001). For example, processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment are executed in the process of S2001. That is, the main control of the game includes a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display, opening / closing control of the big winning port (large opening port) 65a at the time of the jackpot, a lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. . As described above, the MPU 201 uses the in-use area area 203x (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the processing in S2001.

  Next, a winning ratio process for managing information relating to the winning ratio is executed (S2002). Details of the winning combination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing in S2002, the timer interrupt processing ends.

  As described above, in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, the game processing is performed first, and thereafter, the role control processing is performed, so that the main control of the game, which is an important control, is executed with priority.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, details of the winning combination process (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the combination processing. In this combination processing, first, the interrupt is prohibited (S2011), then the flag register 200a is saved in the inner stack area 203x2 by the PUSH instruction (S2012), and thereafter the combination processing is executed by the CALL instruction. The subroutine program to be executed is read out, and the winning combination main process is executed (S2013). Details of the winning combination main process will be described later with reference to FIG. At the stage of the processing of S2011 and S2012, the MPU 201 executes the processing by using the in-use area 203x of the RAM 203.

  When the processing of S2013 ends and returns to this combination processing from the subroutine program of the combination processing, then the flag register 200a saved in the inner stack area 203x2 is restored by the POP instruction (S2015). Is permitted (S2016), and then the winning combination process ends. Note that the MPU 201 also executes the processing in S2015 and S2016 using the in-use area 203x of the RAM 203.

  In the processing of S2012, the flag register 200a was saved to the inner work area 203x1 using a load (LD) instruction, and in the processing of S2014, the flag register 200a was saved to the inner work area 203x1 using a load (LD) instruction. The flag register 200a may be restored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, details of the winning ratio main process (S2013) executed by reading the subroutine program by the winning ratio process (S2002) (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the winning combination main process.

  In the win ratio main process, first, a stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set to a start position of the outer stack area 203y2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2021). As a result, in the subsequent processing, the data is saved in the outer stack area 203y2. After this process, the MPU 201 uses the external work area 203y1 as a work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data using the external work area 203y1, and uses the external stack area 203y2 as necessary.

  Next, among the registers 200, the registers 200 (except for the flag register 200a) used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually loaded into the areas determined in the respective external work areas 203y1 by a load (LD) instruction. It is evacuated (S2022). Then, a process relating to the accessory ratio is executed (S2023).

  In the process of S2023, for example, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the same process as the accessory ratio management main process (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed. In addition, a process of controlling the display of the winning combination display device 400 is executed. In addition, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 of the first or second embodiment (see FIGS. 22 and 30). The same processing as described above may be executed in the processing of S2023.

  When the processing of S2023 is completed, a stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set to a fixed address in the inner stack area 203x2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2024). As a result, in the subsequent processing, data is started again in the inner stack area 203x2.

  Here, the winning ratio main process (S2002) in which the winning ratio main process (S2013) is executed is a game process (S2001) in which the main control of the game is executed in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Done after finishing. The timer interrupt processing is read out when the counter update processing (S702 to S703) is not executed in the infinite loop (loop of S701 to S703) of the main processing (FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 201. Is executed.

  Therefore, when the process of S2020 is performed, the data saved when shifting from the main process to the timer interrupt process and the flag register 200a saved by the process of S2012 are stored in the inner stack area 203x2. It is saved (however, when the flag register 200a is saved in the inner work area 203x1 by the load instruction, it does not exist in the inner stack area 203x2), and the number of the saved data is fixed. Therefore, in the process of S2012, when the stack pointer is specified at a position where the stack pointer is stacked in the inner stack area 203x2, the position can be reliably specified only by setting the fixed address for the stack pointer. Then, before shifting the stack pointer from the inner stack area 203x2 to the outer stack area 203y2 (before executing the processing of S2012), it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer indicating the inside of the inner stack area 203x2. An increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 due to the saving can be suppressed.

  Next, by the processing of S2022, the value of each register 200 individually saved in the determined area of the outer work area 203y1 is respectively transferred from the determined area of the outer work area 203y1 corresponding to the load (LD) instruction. By reading and setting in the corresponding register 200, it is restored (S2025). Then, after the processing of S2025, the winning combination main process ends, and the process returns to the winning ratio process. After the process of S2025 is completed, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 as a work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data by using the inner work area 203x1, and uses the inner stack area 203x2 as necessary.

  As described above, in the MPU 201, when executing the process related to the accessory ratio (S2023), each process is executed using the area 203y outside the use area (the outside work area 203y1 and the outside stack area 203y2). At the stage of shifting to the process of S2023 using the out-of-area area 203y, of the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in the process relating to this accessory ratio are individually saved to the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203. I do. Then, before the processing of S2023 ends and the MPU 201 returns to the processing using the in-use area 203x, the registers 200 saved in the external work area 203y1 are returned to the corresponding registers 200 individually. Thereafter, a game process for performing main control of the game using the used area 203x (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) is executed.

  Here, from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area, the processing relating to the ratio of the character using the area 203y outside the use area is performed, and the game using the area 203x within the use area is performed again. When returning to the game process of performing the main control of the game, the protection of the player's interest and the fact that the main control of the game must be continuously performed again without any problem, The processing must not be affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio. Therefore, the RAM 203 is divided into an in-use area 203x used for main control processing of the game and an out-of-use area 203y used for processing relating to the accessory ratio. However, since the register 200 has a smaller capacity as compared with the RAM 203 and the register 200 whose use purpose is specified also exists, the register 200 used in the main control processing of the game and the processing relating to the accessory ratio is used. Is impossible or difficult to separate.

  In addition, before and after performing the process related to the accessory ratio, in other words, shifting from the game process for performing main control of the game using the in-use area 203x to the process related to the accessory ratio using the out-of-use area 203y. The contents of the register 200 are made the same between the step of performing and the step of shifting from the processing relating to the ratio of the character using the area 203y outside the used area to the game processing performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the used area. Therefore, there is also a demand for ensuring that the game process for performing the main control of the game is not affected by the process related to the accessory ratio executed between the game processes.

  On the other hand, before performing the process related to the ratio of the use of the accessory using the area 203y outside the use area, the contents of all the registers 200 are collectively saved to the outer stack area 203y2 using the PUSH instruction, and After execution, a method of returning all the registers 200 from the outer stack area 203y2 collectively by using a POP instruction is also conceivable. However, in this case, it is necessary to previously set the capacity of the outer stack area 203y2 to be large in order to save the contents of all the registers 200, and the capacity of the outer work area 203y1 becomes smaller or the RAM 203 becomes larger. Must be transformed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is provided in the MPU 201 when shifting from the game processing for performing main control of the game using the area 203x within the used area to the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area. Of the registers 200 that have been used, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are individually evacuated to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and after the processing related to the combination processing is executed, the area 203y outside the used area is removed. When shifting (returning) from the processing relating to the used ratio to the game processing in which the main control of the game using the in-use area 203x is performed, the registers 200 evacuated to the outer work area 203y1 are individually restored. Thereby, the stage of shifting from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area to the processing relating to the ratio of the character using the area 203y outside the use area, and the step of using the area 203y outside the use area. Since the contents of the register 200 can be the same at the stage of shifting from the processing related to the physical ratio to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the used area 203x, the game for performing the main control of the game It can be ensured that the processing is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio executed between the processing.

  In addition, a stage of shifting from a game process for performing a main control of a game using the area 203x within the use area to a process relating to a ratio of an accessory using the area 203y outside the use area, At the stage of shifting from the processing related to the ratio to the game processing performing the main control of the game using the used area 203x, the processing related to the accessory ratio is performed instead of saving / restoring the contents of all the registers 200. Since only the contents of some of the registers 200 used are saved / restored, the capacity of the RAM 203 (external work area 203y1) required to save the contents of the registers can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 and to secure a large area for storing other data in the external work area 203y1.

  The register 200 that is not used in the process for the accessory ratio is not affected by the process for the accessory ratio in the first place, and its contents are kept before and after the process for the accessory ratio is executed. Therefore, only the contents of some registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are saved / restored, without saving / restoring the contents of the registers 200 not used in the processing related to the accessory ratio. It is possible to reliably ensure that the game process for performing the main control of the game is not affected by the process related to the accessory ratio executed between the game processes.

  However, since the flag register 200a is a register used for all instructions executed by the MPU 201, it is naturally used for processing relating to the accessory ratio. However, in the processing of S2022, the flag register 200a Has not been evacuated exceptionally. This is because the contents of the flag register 200a are changed only by reading the winning ratio main process (S2013) in the winning ratio process shown in FIG. This is because the value of the flag register 200a at the time when the game process is completed cannot be saved at the stage of the process of S2022.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, only the flag register 200a is evacuated to the inner stack area 203x2 before reading the main role ratio process (S2013) in the role ratio process shown in FIG. , Only the flag register 200a is returned from the inner stack area 203x2. Thereby, the value of the flag register 200a at the time when the game processing is completed can be reliably returned after the processing relating to the accessory ratio is executed.

  In addition, a stage of shifting from a game process for performing a main control of a game using the area 203x within the use area to a process relating to a ratio of an accessory using the area 203y outside the use area, The saving / restoring of the registers 200 at the stage of shifting from the processing related to the ratio to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the in-use area 203x is performed individually for each register. Only the register 200 that needs to be saved / returned in order to ensure that the game process that performs the main control is not affected by the process related to the accessory ratio executed between them (that is, is used for the process related to the accessory ratio) Of the register 200 only) can be individually saved and restored.

  Further, since the register 200 is retracted not to the outer stack area 203y2 but to the outer work area 203y1, the capacity required for the outer stack area 203y2 can be reduced and the capacity of the outer work area 203y1 can be increased. Some MPUs 201 specify a stack area and a work area in advance depending on the model (type). Such an MPU 201 has a function of clearing (initializing to 0) the content itself of the RAM 203 when data is further saved and stacked beyond the area of the stack area designated in advance. is there. On the other hand, by evacuating the register 200 to the external work area 203y1 instead of the external stack area 203y2, it is possible to prevent the external stack area 203y2 from being immediately filled with the stacked data. Therefore, in the MPU 201 having such a function, it is possible to prevent the RAM 203 from being cleared because data is further stacked beyond a predetermined area of the outer stack area 203y2.

  Further, since the register 200 is saved not by using the PUSH instruction / POP instruction but by using the load (LD) instruction, the place where the register 200 is saved can be fixed by the program. Therefore, while performing the process related to the accessory ratio, a program that performs a main control of the game by explicitly avoiding the area where the register 200 is evacuated and using the outside work area 203y1 is formed. The contents of the register 200 used in the processing can be reliably protected.

  When all the registers 200 are used in the processing related to the accessory ratio, all the registers 200 are individually saved / restored in a predetermined area of the external work area 203y1 by using a load (LD) instruction. You may make it do. Thus, the effect of retreating the register 200 to the external work area 203y1 can be enjoyed.

  When a part of the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio is saved, the registers 200 are individually saved to a predetermined area of the outer stack area 203y2 by using a PUSH instruction, and the outer stack area 203y2 is determined. The registers 200 saved in the area may be individually restored using a POP instruction. Thus, the capacity of the RAM 203 required to save the contents of the register can be suppressed. Therefore, the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced, and a large area for storing the external work area 203y1 can be secured. In this case, when the register 200 saved by using the POP instruction is restored, it is necessary to restore the register 200 saved by the PUSH instruction later by using the POP instruction first. .

  In addition, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments can provide the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the main control device 110 shifts from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area to the processing related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the use area. At this stage, the register 200 used in the process for the accessory ratio is individually saved, and after the process for the accessory ratio ends, the process for the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area is changed to the process for the inside of the used area. The case where the evacuated register 200 is individually restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the main controller 110 uses the area 203x in the used area in the accessory processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32). During execution of the process, at the stage of reading out the main item main process (S2013) for executing the process relating to the ratio of the main character using the area 203y outside of the use area by the CALL instruction, the register 200 used in the process relating to the main item ratio is read. Are individually cleared to 0, and the main item main process (S2013) is read by the CALL instruction. In the main item main process (S2013), at the stage where the main item main process (S2013) using the area 203y outside the use area is ended and the process returns to the process using the area 203x within the use area, a process regarding the main item ratio is performed. After individually clearing the registers 200 used in step (1) to 0, the process returns to the winning combination processing.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to third embodiments. Description is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment in that the duty ratio processing (S2002), which is one of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, is performed. The partial processing is different from the partial processing of the winning combination main processing (S2013), which is one processing of the winning combination processing (S2002).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the winning combination process (S2002) in the fourth embodiment. In this winning combination processing, first, the same processing of S2011 and S2012 as in the third embodiment is executed, and then all the registers 200 (except for the flag register 200a) used in the processing related to the winning combination are executed. Are individually cleared to 0 using a load (LD) instruction. Then, the process proceeds to S2013, in which a subroutine program for executing the hand ratio main process using the out-of-use area 203y is read by the CALL instruction, and the hand ratio main process is executed. Then, the same processes in S2014 and S2015 as in the third embodiment are executed, and thereafter, the winning combination process ends.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a winning combination main process (S2013) in the fourth embodiment. In this winning combination main process, first, the same process of S2021 as in the third embodiment is executed, and then, the process of S2023, that is, the same as in the third embodiment (that is, the process relating to the accessory ratio) is executed. Next, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0 (S2041). Then, the same processing of S2024 as in the third embodiment is executed to terminate the winning ratio main process using the area 203y outside the use area, return to the ratio processing, and execute the processing using the area 203x inside the use area. Execute.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the register 200 used in the process related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area, the value is changed by the process related to the accessory ratio, and the value is left as it is in the corresponding register 200. On the other hand, even if the MPU 201 executes a game process for performing a main control of a game using the in-use area 203x, it is assumed that the MPU 201 does not affect the game process. In this case, the MPU 201 is provided with the MPU 201 at the stage where the game processing which mainly controls the game using the area 203x within the use area, shifts to the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the use area. The register 200 used in the process for the accessory ratio is saved from the register 200 and the process for the accessory ratio is executed. There is no problem even if the saved register 200 is not restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x. However, in this case, since the value of the register 200 changes before and after the processing relating to the accessory ratio, it is impossible for an external person to determine whether there is really no problem with this.

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, first, in the winning combination processing, the processing is shifted from the gaming processing for performing a main control of the game using the area 203x within the used area to the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area. Before reading the subroutine program for executing the main portion ratio processing by the CALL instruction, once, all the registers 200 used in the process related to the accessory ratio performed in the main portion ratio main process are individually set to 0. To clear. Then, in the winning combination main processing, after executing the processing relating to the winning combination, the main processing of the game using the inside area 203x is started from the processing relating to the inside ratio 203x using the outside area 203y. At the stage of shifting to, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio (that is, the same register 200 as the register 200 cleared to 0 before executing the ratio main processing) are individually set to 0. clear. Thereby, a step of shifting from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the used area to the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area (a step of reading out the main ratio processing). A step of shifting from the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside of the use area to a game processing of performing a main control of a game using the area 203x within the use area (a step of returning to the ratio processing from the ratio main processing) Thus, the contents of the register 200 can be made identical at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to reliably ensure that the game process for performing the main control of the game is not affected by the process related to the accessory ratio executed between the game processes. The register 200 that is not used in the process related to the accessory ratio does not change its contents before and after the process related to the accessory ratio and is kept held. Therefore, even if the unused register 200 is not cleared to 0, It is the same at both stages.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0 in the processing of S2031 and S2041, but it is not always necessary to clear the registers 200 to 0. For example, even if the same predetermined value is stored in the processing of S2031 and S2041, the above effect can be enjoyed. However, immediately after the power is turned on and the reset input to the MPU 201 is released (at the stage where software initialization is not executed), in consideration of the fact that all registers are initialized to 0, S2031 and S2041 are performed. In the processing of (1), it is desirable to individually clear (initialize) the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio to zero. Also, by individually clearing the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio to zero, it can be grasped at a glance that the register 200 has been cleared to zero.

  In addition, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, four 7-segment displays (lower right of the 7-segment portion) are used instead of the winning ratio display device 400 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the third or fourth embodiment. A base display device 401 (see FIG. 38A) including dot segments 401a, 401b, 401c, and 401d is provided. The base value of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the base display device 401 as one piece of information on the accessory ratio.

  The base value is the number (ratio) of balls to be paid out (prize balls) for 100 balls at the time of a big hit, a high probability (probable change), and a normal time excluding a time reduction. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the number of out balls guided from the game area to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls hit into the game area, in other words, the number of balls used in the game). Each time the total number of outs reaches 60000, the base value for the 60000 spheres is measured and stored.

  The base display device 401 displays a base value (hereinafter, referred to as a “real-time base value”) measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60000, and the last (most recent) total out number. Is measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 one before the previous time (before the previous time), in addition to the base value measured when the number reaches 60,000 (hereinafter referred to as "previous base value"). Base value (hereinafter referred to as “base value before the previous time”) and a base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 immediately before the previous time (before the previous time) (hereinafter “before the previous time”). ) Is switched and displayed every predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In addition to the real-time base value, displaying the past multiple base values (previous base value, pre-previous base value, pre-previous base value) enables more accurate determination of fraudulent activity, Further, the time at which the misconduct has occurred can be made predictable to some extent.

  In the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Is turned on for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In the base display device 401, if some segments are not turned on due to a failure such as a disconnection, the base value or the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a possibility that an erroneous determination may be made in determining whether or not there is an illegal act. Every time the power is turned on, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are turned on for a predetermined period, so that it can be confirmed whether all the segments can be turned on normally. It can be easily determined whether the display of 401 is normally performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in a manufacturing plant, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand. When starting up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from a normal base value display. . In the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10, in a shipping inspection for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10, etc., there is a case where a ball is manually inserted into each winning opening and a prize ball is paid out. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when a new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) is the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fourth embodiments. Description is omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The point that the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is that, in the third embodiment, the ratio display device 400 is connected to the main control device 110, In the embodiment, the point is that the base display device 401 is connected to the main control device 110. The base display device 401 is for displaying the base value of the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

  In the combination ratio display device 400 according to the third embodiment, the base value of the pachinko machine 10 may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals in addition to the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to provide the inspection terminal 207a, and the configuration may not be such that the information on the accessory ratio is output to the inspection device 300. In the case where information on the accessory ratio is not output to the inspection device 300, the second reading memory 264 may be omitted.

  Here, the details of the base display device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 38A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the base display device 401. The base display device 401 includes four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d arranged in a horizontal row, and is disposed on a main board constituting the main control device 110. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be viewed when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed, so that four-digit numbers or alphabetic characters can be confirmed. The pachinko machine 10 may be assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen from the front side.

  Each of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d has a dot segment provided on the lower right side of the seven-segment part in addition to the seven-segment part. The base display device 401 uses two left-side seven-segment displays 401a and 401b as identification segments and four right-side seven-segment displays 401c and 401d among four seven-segment displays 401a to 401d as ratio segs. I do. The identification segment is used to indicate identification information for specifying the content to be displayed in the ratio segment. The ratio seg is used to display the ratio of the content specified by the identification information indicated by the identification seg.

  FIG. 38B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 and the last (most recent) total out number reaches 60,000. The previous base value measured before, the base value measured one time before the previous time (before the last time) when the total number of outs reaches 60000 pieces, and the base value one time before the previous time (the time before the last time) 2) The base value measured two times before and after the total number of outs reaches 60000 is switched and displayed every 5 seconds.

  When displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, “bL.” Is displayed on the identification segment and the real-time base value being measured is displayed on the ratio seg in two digits. By displaying “bL.” On the identification segment, a person who has seen that the number displayed on the ratio segment is a real-time base value can be recognized.

  When displaying the previous base value on the base display device 401, “b1.” Is displayed in the identification segment and the previous base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying “b1.” In the identification segment, a person who has seen that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the previous base value can be recognized.

  When displaying the base value twice before the base display device 401, “b2.” Is displayed in the identification segment and the base value before the last two digits is displayed in the ratio segment. By displaying “b2.” In the identification segment, a person who has seen that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value two times before can be recognized.

  When the base value is displayed twice before the base display device 401, “b3.” Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value is displayed in two digits before and after the ratio seg. By displaying “b3.” On the identification segment, a person who has seen that the number displayed on the ratio segment is the base value two times before can be recognized.

  In this way, the base display device 401 also displays a plurality of past base values (previous base value, pre-previous base value, pre-previous base value) in addition to the real-time base value. Here, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60000 as described above. Here, generally, in the hall, about 10,000 to 20,000 balls are launched per day for one pachinko machine 10, and a game is played. In other words, the last base value, the last-last base value, and the two-last base value measured for 60000 spheres indicate base values over several days of about 3 to 6 days. If the real-time base value is not displayed on the base display device 401, it takes about 3 to 6 days until the measurement of the base value for 60000 spheres is performed. It could be the base value 3-6 days ago. Therefore, if there is any misconduct after the previous measurement of the base value, the base value for the next 60,000 balls is measured and displayed on the base display device 401 for 3 to 6 days. Misconduct may not be discovered. On the other hand, by displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the current base value can be shown as a preliminary value. Discover possible actions.

  On the other hand, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time with the total number of outs being less than 60000 as described above. As described above, the base value is the number (percentage) of balls that are paid out (prize balls) for 100 balls in normal times, and thus the state of the game of the pachinko machine 10 changes. (For example, the normal state happens to continue for a long time, the jackpot happens to happen frequently, the probable change happens to happen for a long time, etc.), the real-time base value may fluctuate. Therefore, if only the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been a fraud.

  On the other hand, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time measured for 60,000 spheres indicate the base value over several days of about 3 to 6 days. Regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the corresponding several days, the previous base value, the base value before the previous game, and the base value before the previous game can be averaged. Therefore, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the base value measured for 60000 spheres such as the last base value on the base display device 401, it is possible to more accurately determine whether there is an illegal act. it can.

  On the other hand, if only the previous base value is displayed as the base value measured for the 60,000 balls, it is assumed that a player who has become accustomed to the pachinko machine 10 has played a game during the period in which the previous base value was measured. Then, the base value generally decreases. Therefore, even when only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been an illegal act. On the other hand, by displaying not only the last base value but also a plurality of base values such as a base value before the previous time and a base value before the previous time as the base value measured for 60,000 balls, each base value is displayed. In, it can be determined whether or not the base value has changed based on the familiarity of the player who played the game. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine whether there is an improper act.

  In the present embodiment, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base value are switched and displayed every 5 seconds on the base display device 401. May be switched between a mode in which the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed simultaneously and a mode in which the pre-last base value and the pre-last base value are simultaneously displayed at predetermined intervals. Alternatively, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the pre-last base value, and the pre-last base value may all be simultaneously displayed on the base display device 401.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where three values of a previous base value, a base value before last time, and a base value before last time are displayed as base values measured for 60,000 balls to be displayed on the base display device 401. Has been described, but it is also possible to display two values, a previous base value and a base value before the last time, and in addition to the base value before the previous time, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time, the base value before the previous time Alternatively, the base value may be further displayed two times before and after the previous one (two times before and after) when the total number of outs reaches 60000 pieces. That is, an arbitrary number of base values equal to or greater than 2 may be displayed as the base values measured on 60000 spheres to be displayed on the base display device 401.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. The base display device 401 is connected to a base display device control circuit 402 provided in the main control device 110 and connected to the input / output port 205. The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d of the base display device 401 based on the drive and control signals from the MPU 201, and performs various operations as shown in FIG. The display is performed.

  In the process for displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the process is performed using the area 203y outside the used area of the RAM 203. That is, information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the outside use area 203y. Here, with reference to FIG. 39, details of information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 and stored in the outside work area 203y1 will be described. First, FIG. 39A is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value, which is stored in the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203.

  The information necessary to display the base value stored in the outside work area 203y1 includes a total out number counter 203j, a low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, last base value data 203m, and last-before-last base value data. At least a reference value 203n, a base value data 203o, a new start flag 203p, and a display type counter 203q are prepared.

  Among them, the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the pre-last base value data 203n, the pre-last base value data 203o, and the new startup flag 203p are: Even when the power is turned on while the RAM erasure switch 122 is operated, the information is not initialized (cleared) but is kept stored. Thus, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value performed before the operation is performed is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Can be done. Further, the previous base value, the pre-last base value, and the pre-last base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 is performed can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a RAM all erase switch (not shown) is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is stored, and only when the power is turned on while the RAM all erase switch is operated, The RAM 203 includes the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the previous base value data 203n, the base value data 203o before last time, and the new startup flag 203p. Initialized (cleared). When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up at a manufacturing plant, or when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, such as when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, the RAM all erase switch is operated. While the power is turned on, the total-out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the pre-last base value data 203n, the pre-last base value data 203o, and the new The start-up flag 203p can be initialized, from which the measurement of the base value can be newly started. Also, when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, it is possible to initialize (clear) this information, so that the illegal operation is performed in the previous hall and the base value is set. Even if has changed, the information is continuously displayed at the next store, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of suspicion that fraud has occurred at the next store. Further, since the RAM all erasure switch is provided in the board box 100 connected unopenable, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from deleting information necessary for displaying the base value, and it is possible to reliably protect such information.

  Note that a hole such as a keyhole is provided in place of the RAM all erasure switch, and only when a key or the like that fits the hole is inserted, the total out number counter 203j, the low-precision payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, The last base value data 203m, the last-before-last base value data 203n, the two-last-before-last base value data 203o, and the new startup flag 203p may be initialized. As a result, only those having a key or the like that fits the hole can delete the information necessary for displaying the base value, thereby preventing a fraudster from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value. , You can surely protect this information.

  The total out number counter 203j is a counter for counting the total out number, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game). The total-out number counter 203j is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erasure switch, and when a ball is detected by the out switch 208f, the ball is guided to the ball discharge path. And 1 is added. When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the MPU 201 determines that the total out number has reached 60000, executes a predetermined process described later, and initializes the total out number counter 203j to zero. Become Thus, the total out number is counted again by the total out number counter 203j until the total out number reaches 60000.

  The low-probability-payout number counter 203k is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out at the time of a big hit, at a high probability (probable change), and at a normal time excluding a time reduction. When the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erasure switch, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero. If there is a payout of balls (prize balls) when the gaming state is normal, the number of the paid out balls is added to the low-probability payout counter 203k.

  For example, in the present embodiment, at normal times, the first opening 64a, which is a so-called "navel", whose opening is always open, and the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b which are general winning openings. When the first starting port switch 208a, the first normal winning port switch 208c, and the second normal winning port switch 208d detect that a ball has been hit, the number of prize balls set for the corresponding winning port is detected. Is determined by the award ball count table 202e (see FIGS. 6 and 9), and the award ball count is added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, a "small hit" is provided as one mode of "missing", and when the "small hit" occurs, the large winning opening 65a is opened for a few seconds and several times. In normal times, with the opening of the special winning opening 65a in the "small hit", there is a ball in the special winning opening 65a, and when a prize ball is played, the number of prize balls is set to a low certainty payout number counter 203k. May be added. In addition, when a game state is normal and there is a ball in the second starting port 64b and a prize ball is played, the number of prize balls may be added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

  The number of prize balls is added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000. That is, when the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the value of the low-probability payout number counter 203k is equal to the value of the ball paid out at normal time in the game state for the 60,000 balls launched into the game area. It becomes the number.

  When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the low-probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero together with the total out number counter 203j. In this way, the number of balls paid out in the normal game state during the period until the total out number reaches 60000 is counted by the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

The MPU 201 calculates the real-time base value at predetermined intervals (for example, at every 4 milliseconds when the timer interrupt processing is executed) using the following equation (1).
Real time base value = value of low-probability payout number counter 203k / value of total out number counter 203j × 100 (1)
The real-time base value calculated by the equation (1) is stored in the real-time base value data 203l.

  That is, the real-time base value data 203l is data indicating the measured (calculated) real-time base value. Further, the previous base value data 203m is data indicating the previous base value, the pre-last base value data 203n is data indicating the pre-last base value, and the pre-last base value data 203o is data indicating the pre-last base value. is there.

  Here, the configuration of the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the pre-last base value data 203n, and the two-last-last base value data 203o will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of each of the base value data 203l to 203o.

  As shown in FIG. 39B, each of the base value data 203l to 203o is composed of 8 bits (1 byte), the seventh bit (most significant bit) on the MSB side is a valid data flag, and , The base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits (lower 7 bits). When the valid data flag is 1, each of the base value data 203l to 203o means that a valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits. On the other hand, when the valid data flag is 0, each of the base value data 203l to 203o means that no valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits.

  When the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erasure switch, all of the base value data 203l to 203o are initialized to zero for both the valid data flag and the base value. That is, immediately after the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erasure switch, all of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base value do not store valid data.

  Thereafter, the base value calculated by the expression (1) is stored as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l, while the real-time base value data 203l is stored until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300. Is set to 0. In this case, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, “88.” is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is compared with the ratio. Flashing (or lighting) is displayed on the segment.

  As described above, the RAM all erasing switch is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, and the new pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. It is operated when it is done. When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, a ball may be manually inserted into each winning port to pay out a prize ball in a shipping inspection or the like for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches 300 first blinks (or lights) “88.” in the identification segment. At the same time, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is blinked (or lit) in the ratio segment and displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, so that the displayed base value is normal. Is not a valid base value (a valid base value). Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state. In this special display mode, both “88.” of the identification seg and the real-time base value of the ratio seg may be turned on or off. Alternatively, "88." of the identification segment may be turned on to blink the real-time base value of the ratio segment, or conversely, "88." of the identification segment may be blinked and the real-time base value of the ratio segment is turned on. You may.

  When the total number-of-outs counter 203j reaches 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1. Thus, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l becomes a valid base value. Therefore, based on the fact that the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l has become 1, "bL." Is lit on the identification segment of the base display device 401, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed on the ratio segment. By doing so, an effective real-time base value can be reported.

  On the other hand, at this stage, the valid data flag of each of the previous base value data 203m, the pre-last base value data 203n, and the pre-last base value data 203o remains 0. At this time, when the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base are displayed on the base display device 401 by switching every predetermined period, the identification seg is displayed corresponding to each base value, while the ratio seg is displayed. Is turned on with "-". Thus, it can be shown that a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, the pre-last base value, or the pre-last base value.

  When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l at that time becomes the base value for the total out number of 60000. Thus, the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before and after the previous time and the last base value data 203m is shifted to the base value data 203n before the previous time. Shift. Thereby, the base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 is held as the previous base value.

  Here, when shifting the data to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is “1”, and the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m after the shift is set. Is also “1”. Therefore, when displaying the previous base value on the base display device 401 thereafter, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203m is displayed as an effective base value on the ratio segment.

  When shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data 203n two times before the previous time, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). After all the initialization of the RAM 203 has been executed, this corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time), and the effective data flag of the base value data 203n two times before the shift becomes “1”. Therefore, thereafter, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before, the base value stored in the base value data 203n is displayed as an effective base value on the ratio seg.

  Further, when the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before and after the previous time, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before the previous time is set to “1” (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). After turning on and all initialization of the RAM 203 has been executed, this corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time), and the effective data flag of the base value data 203o before and after the shift is set to “1”. ". Therefore, thereafter, when the base value is displayed two times before the base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203o before the last time is displayed as an effective base value on the ratio seg.

  When the total number-of-outs counter 203j reaches 60000 and the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the real-time base-value data 203l is also reset as the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0. Initialized to 0 including the valid data flag. Then, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is kept at 0 until the total number-of-outs counter 203j reaches 300 again. When the total number-of-outs counter 203j reaches 300, the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l is retained. 1 is stored in the flag. Thereafter, 1 is held in the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000.

  Here, while the total number of outs is small, the measured real-time base value greatly depends on the content of the game at that time, so even if it is displayed, it becomes a meaningless base value and adversely affects the determination of misconduct. May cause. Therefore, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0 while the total number of outs is 0 to 300, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes the real-time base value. “BL.” Indicating the value is turned on, while “−−” is turned on for the ratio segment. Accordingly, it is possible to indicate that a currently valid real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small. In this case, “bL.” Indicating the real-time base value may be blinked on the identification segment and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l may be displayed on the ratio segment. Accordingly, it is possible to indicate that a currently effective real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small, and it is possible to notify the real-time base value at that time as a reference.

  On the other hand, after the total number of outs reaches 300, the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1 to display the real-time base value on the base display device 401. While “bL.” Indicating the base value is turned on, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as an effective base value in the ratio segment.

  Returning to FIG. 39 (a), the new start-up flag 203p is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing plant, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand. A flag 10 indicates that a new start-up period is in progress. When the new start-up flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a new start-up period.

  The new start-up flag 203p is initialized to be turned on when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erasure switch that is operated when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period. Is shown. The new startup flag 203p is kept on until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, and if the total out number counter 203j differs by 300, the new startup flag 203p is set to off. Thereafter, the new startup flag 203p is kept off.

  When the new start-up flag 203p is ON, the special display mode described above, that is, "88." The real-time base value is displayed in such a manner that the stored real-time base value is blinked (or lit). Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

  The display type counter 203q is a counter for determining the type of the base value to be displayed on the base display device 401. When the display type counter 203q is 0, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value, and when the display type counter 203q is 1, the base display device 401 displays the previous base value, and the display type counter 203q Is 2, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 twice before, and when the display type counter 203q is 3, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before.

  The display type counter 203q is set when the new start-up flag 203p is set to off, that is, when the total number of outs is 300 and the new start-up period ends after the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. Is initialized to 0. Then, the display type counter 203q is incremented by one every five seconds, and is returned to 0 when the value of the display type counter 203q is 3 when counting up. As a result, the base value displayed on the base display device 401 changes in the order of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, the base value before the previous time every five seconds, and the display of the base value before the previous time. Thereafter, the display returns to the real-time base value, and the display of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time are repeated while being switched every 5 seconds.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, a description will be given of a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on in the fifth embodiment in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. Here, the start-up process will be described focusing on differences from the start-up process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Note that, as described above, the same processes as those in the start-up process of the first embodiment are executed with the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined by the processing of S604 that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on (S604: Yes), and when it is determined by the processing of S605 that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 ( (S605: No), when the calculated RAM determination value is determined to be not normal by the processing of S607 (S607: No), after transmitting the payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 (S614), Among the used areas, the total number of out counters 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the last base value data 203m, the previous base value data 203n, and the last two previous times are information necessary for displaying the base value. The area excluding the base value data 203o and the new startup flag 203p is cleared to 0. And (S3001), sets an initial value for RAM203 area was the clear, except for information needed to display the base value such as (S3002).

  Thus, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value performed before the operation is performed is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Can be done. Further, the previous base value, the pre-last base value, and the pre-last base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 is performed can be displayed on the base display device 401. Then, even if the wrongdoer operates the RAM erase switch 122 to delete the evidence, the information necessary for displaying the base value is kept, so that the evidence of the wrongdoing can be suppressed.

  If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on by the processing of S604 (S604), then it is determined whether or not the RAM all erase switch has been turned on (S3003). If the RAM all erasure switch has not been turned on (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S605.

  On the other hand, if the RAM all erasure switch is turned on (S3003: Yes), a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 as in the process of S614 (S3004). The whole initialization process (S3005, S3006) is executed. In the entire initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S3005, S3006), the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the last base value data 203m, and the last two previous bases, which are information necessary for displaying the base value. The used area of the RAM 203 including the value data 203n, the base value data 203o before and after the new start flag 203p is cleared to 0 (S3005), and thereafter, the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S3006).

  As described above, the RAM all erasing switch is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, and the new pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. To be operated. Then, by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erasure switch, the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the previous and previous base value data 203n, The base value data 203o and the new start-up flag 203p can be initialized each time, from which the measurement of the base value can be newly started. Also, when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, it is possible to initialize (clear) this information, so that the illegal operation is performed in the previous hall and the base value is set. Even if has changed, the information is continuously displayed at the next store, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of suspicion that fraud has occurred at the next store. Further, since the RAM all erasure switch is provided in the board box 100 connected unopenable, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from deleting information necessary for displaying the base value, and it is possible to reliably protect such information.

  When any one of S609, S3002, and S3006 is executed, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are turned on (S3007). In this state, a wait process is performed for 5 seconds (S3008). Thus, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are continuously turned on for at least 5 seconds. .

  In the base display device 401, if some segments are not turned on due to a failure such as a disconnection, the base value or the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a possibility that an erroneous determination may be made in determining whether or not there is an illegal act. By turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for at least 5 seconds each time the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally turned on, and display the base. Whether the display of the device 401 is normally performed can be easily determined.

  In addition, the progress of the start-up process is waited for 5 seconds during which the lighting is performed, and the start of the normal game process is waited. Thereby, when the base value cannot be correctly displayed on the base display device 401, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game without being able to determine whether or not there is a fraudulent act. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of any disadvantage to the player, the hall, and the like.

  In this embodiment, every time the power is turned on, while all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are turned on, the game is stopped for 5 seconds so that the game does not progress. However, a normal game process may be started and the game may proceed while the lighting is being performed. In this case, only the display of the base value on the base display device 401 may be made to stand by while measuring the real-time base value in accordance with the progress of the game. Thus, when a momentary power failure occurs, even if the process of turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 is performed, the player can immediately play the game. Can resume.

  In the start-up process, after the process of S3008, the process proceeds to the process of S613.

  Next, a base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the base value processing. This base value processing is a hand ratio processing of a timer interruption processing (see FIG. 32) periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 shown in the third embodiment. This is executed as one process of (S2002), and calculates (measures) a base value and displays the base value.

  In this base value processing, first, a base value calculation processing is executed (S3101), a real-time base value is calculated (measured), and when the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the base value data between the base value data 203l to 203o is calculated. And the like. Details of the base value calculation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether one second has elapsed since the last execution of the base value display processing (S3103) (S3102), and it is determined that one second has elapsed since the previous execution of the base value display processing (S3103). If it is performed (S3102: Yes), a base value display process is executed (S3103), and a process of displaying a base value on the base display device 401 is executed. The details of the base value display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44.

  When the processing in S3103 is completed, the base value processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that one second has not elapsed since the last time the base value display processing (S3103) was executed (S3102: No), the base value display processing (S3103) is skipped. To end the base value processing. Thus, the base value display processing (S3103) is executed at one-second intervals, and the display of the base display device 401 is drive-controlled every second.

  In the determination process of S3102, if the process of S3102 is executed for the first time after the power of main controller 110 is turned on (that is, after the startup process shown in FIG. 40 is executed), the previous time the base It is not determined whether or not one second has elapsed since the execution of the value display processing (S3103), but an affirmative determination is made (S3102: Yes), and the base value display processing (S3103) is executed. Thus, the drive control process of the base display device 401 can be executed immediately after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the above-described base value calculation processing (S3101), which is one processing of the base value processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the base value calculation process.

  In the base value calculation processing (S3101), first, at least the output of each of the first starting port switch 208a, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, and the out switch 208f is read, and the first starting port is read. 64a, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored (S3201). ). The winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharging path are performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a, 208c, 208d, and 208f.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the out switch 208f is on (S3201). If it is determined that the out switch 208f is on and there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: Yes), the total out is performed. One is added to the number counter 203j (S3203). Thus, the total out number, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of hit balls), is counted by the total out number counter 203j.

  After the process of S3203 or by the process of S3201, when it is determined that the out switch 208f is not on and there is no ball guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: No), then, when the gaming state is a big hit Instead, it is determined whether or not the game is in the low probability state and the time saving state, that is, whether or not the gaming state is normal (S3204). Then, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a big hit, a low probability state and a time saving state, that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is a normal state (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is executed.

  That is, in the processing of S3205, based on the winning detection information stored in the processing of S3201, the winning that is determined to have a winning among the first starting opening 64a, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, and the second ordinary winning opening 63b. If there is a mouth, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize hole having the prize (that is, the number specified by the prize ball number table 202e) is added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out at the time of a big hit, a high probability (probable change), and a normal time excluding a time reduction is counted by the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

  After the processing of S3205 or by the processing of S3204, when it is determined that the gaming state is a big hit, a high probability (probable change), or a time reduction, that is, the gaming state is determined to be not the normal state (S3204: No) Then, the real-time base value is calculated by the above equation (1), and the calculated real-time base value is stored as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l (S3206). By this processing, the measurement of the base value is performed in real time.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out number counter 203j is 60000, that is, whether or not the total out number has reached 60000 (S3207). As a result, if the total number of outs does not reach 60000 (S3207: No), the processing of S3208 to S3210 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S3211. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 60,000 (S3207: Yes), the processing of S3208 to S3210 is executed, and the flow shifts to the processing of S3211.

  In the process of S3208, first, the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before and after the previous time, the base value data 203m is shifted to the base value data 203n before the previous time, and the real time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous time. The data is shifted to the base value data 203m (S3208). As a result, the real-time base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 is held as the previous base value, and thereafter, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 as the previous base value. Further, the respective base values that have been displayed as the previous base value and the base value before the previous times are thereafter displayed on the base display device 401 as the base value before the previous times and the base value before the previous times.

  Note that each base value may be stored in a ring buffer of a FIFO (First In First Out) method. In this case, in the process of S3208, the address (ring buffer pointer) for storing the real-time base value may be updated. However, when the base value is stored in the FIFO ring buffer, if the ring buffer pointer is broken once due to some influence such as noise, the base value may be correctly stored in the RAM 203 and cannot be displayed thereafter. is there. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the area of the RAM 203 for storing the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before last time, and the base value before last time is fixed, and every time the total number of outs reaches 60000, By shifting the data during this period, the above-described problem that may occur when the base value is stored in the FIFO ring buffer can be avoided.

  In the process of S3208, these shift processes are executed by one LDIR instruction. The LDIR instruction enables block transfer of data only by setting the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred, the start address (DE) of the transfer destination, and the number of transfer bytes (BC). That is, data is transferred from (HL) to (DE), and both (HL) and (DE) are incremented by one, and (BC) is decremented by one. This is repeated until (BC) becomes 0. Therefore, the base value data 203o is stored at the address (AA) two times before the previous time (AA is one address of the RAM 203), the base value data 203n before the previous time is stored at the address (AA + 1), and the previous base value data 203m is stored at the address (AA + 2). ), The real-time base value data 203l is stored in the address (AA + 3), the head address (HL) of the data to be transferred is set to (AA), the transfer destination address is set to (AA + 1), The shift process in S3208 can be easily realized by setting the number of transfer bytes to 3 bytes and executing only one LDIR instruction.

  In the subsequent process of S3209, the base value and the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l are initialized to 0 (S3209). As a result, the base value is newly measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60000, while the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l remains unchanged until the total number of outs reaches 300. It is kept at 0. While the total number of outs is small, the measured real-time base value greatly depends on the content of the game at that time, so even if it is displayed, it becomes a meaningless base value, and it may adversely affect the judgment of wrongdoing is there. Therefore, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0 while the total number of outs is 0 to 300, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes the real-time base value. “BL.” Indicating the value is turned on, while “−−” is turned on for the ratio segment. Accordingly, it is possible to indicate that a currently valid real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small.

  In the subsequent processing of S3210, the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0 (S3210). Thus, the total out number is counted again by the total out number counter 203j until the total out number reaches 60000.

  In the process of S3211, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out number counter 203j is 300, that is, whether or not the total out number has reached 300 (S3211). As a result, if the total number of outs has not reached 300 (S3211: No), the processing of S3212 to S3215 is skipped, and the base value calculation processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 300 (S3211: Yes), the process of S3212 to S3215 is executed, and then the present base value calculation process ends.

  In the process of S3212, it is determined whether or not the new startup flag 203p is on (S3212). As a result, when the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erasure switch. . Then, since the total number of outs has reached 300 as a result of the processing in the previous step S3211, it is time to end the new start-up period, so the new start-up flag 203p is set to off (S3213). Then, the display type counter 203q is initialized to zero (S3214). As a result, the base display device 401 thereafter switches and displays the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time every 5 seconds.

  After the process of S3214 or by the process of S3212, when it is determined that the new startup flag 203p is off (S3212: No), 1 is set to the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l. You. As a result, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes: While “bL.” Indicating the real-time base value is turned on, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as an effective base value in the ratio segment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, details of the above-described base value display processing (S3103), which is one processing of the base value processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 and executed at one second intervals. Will be described. FIGS. 43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the base value calculation processing (S3103).

  First, referring to FIG. 43, when the base value calculation process (S3103) is started, it is determined whether or not the new startup flag 203p is on (S3301). When the new startup flag 203p is on (S3301: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup period by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erasure switch. Accordingly, the base display device control circuit 402 causes the identification segment of the base display device 401 to blink (or light) “88.” and the ratio segment to blink (or light) the base value of the real-time base value data 203l. (S3302). Then, the base value display processing ends.

  As described above, in the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10, in a shipping inspection or the like for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10, there is a case where a ball is manually put into each winning opening and a prize ball is paid out. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the display of the base display device 401 blinks (or lights) “88.” on the identification segment and displays the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l. To display that the displayed base value is not a regular base value (valid base value) by displaying it in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, which blinks (or lights) on the ratio segment. Can be. Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3302, when the new start-up flag 203p is off (S3301: No), it is determined whether five seconds have elapsed since the display type counter 203q was updated or initialized (S3303). As a result, when 5 seconds have elapsed (S3303: Yes), the display type counter 203q is updated (S3304), and the flow shifts to the process of S3305 shown in FIG. On the other hand, if 5 seconds have not elapsed as a result of the process of S3303 (S3303: No), the process of S3304 is skipped, and the process shifts to the process of S3305 shown in FIG.

  In updating the display type counter 203q in S3304, when the display type counter 203q is other than 3, 1 is added to the display type counter 203q. When the display type counter 203q is 3, the display type counter 203q is initialized to 0. By updating the display type counter 203q every 5 seconds, the type of the base value displayed on the base display device 401 is changed to a real-time base value, a previous base value, a pre-preceding base value, a pre-pre-twice base value, a real-time base value , The last base value,... In the order of 5 seconds.

  Referring to FIG. 44, in the process of S3305, the value of display type counter 203q is determined (S3305). When the display type counter 203q is 0 (S3305: “0”), it is a period during which the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 (S3306). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3306: Yes), “bL. Is turned on and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to turn on and display the base value of the real-time base value data 203l in the ratio segment (S3307). As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured for the total number of outs of 300 or more, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1 Is set to Therefore, the real-time base value measured as the effective base value can be displayed and indicated on the base display device 401.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3306, when the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 0 (S3306: No), while the “bL.” Is lit on the identification seg of the base display device 401 and the ratio seg is displayed. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is displayed (S3308).

  As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured when the total number of outs is less than 300, it is determined that the base value is not valid, and the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l is determined. 0 is set in the flag. Accordingly, it is possible to indicate that a currently valid real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small.

  When the display type counter 203q is 1 as a result of the processing in S3305 (S3305: “1”), it is a period in which the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 1 (S3309). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3309: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is set to "b1. Is lit, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the previous base value data 203m is lit on the ratio seg (S3310). Thus, when a valid base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m, the valid previous base value can be displayed and indicated on the base display device 401.

  Also, when the total number of outs reaches 60000 and the data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and The valid data flag of the base value data 203m also becomes “1”. Therefore, when the total number of outs first reaches 60000 after the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the last base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m. The base value will be displayed on the ratio segment as a valid base value.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3309, when the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 0 (S3309: No), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is displayed with "b1." A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is displayed (S3311). Accordingly, when a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, it is possible to indicate that a valid previous base value has not been obtained by “−−” displayed in the ratio segment.

  If the display type counter 203q is 2 as a result of the processing in S3305 (S3305: “2”), it is a period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203n is 1 before the last (S3312). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3312: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is set to “b2. Is lit, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the base value data 203n is lit and displayed on the ratio seg two times before (S3313). In this way, when a valid base value is stored in the pre-last base value data 203n, the valid pre-last base value can be displayed and indicated on the base display device 401.

  When shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data 203n two times before the previous time, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). After all the initialization of the RAM 203 has been executed, this corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time), and the effective data flag of the base value data 203n two times before the shift becomes “1”. Accordingly, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 after that, the base value stored in the base value data 203n is displayed on the ratio seg as a valid base value.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3312, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n is two times before (S3312: No), “b2.” Is displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401 while the ratio segment is displayed. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is displayed (S3313). Accordingly, when a valid base value is not obtained as the last-before-time base value, it is possible to indicate that a valid second-before-time base value is not obtained by “——” displayed in the ratio segment.

  If the display type counter 203q is 3 as a result of the process of S3305 (S3305: “3”), it is a period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203o is two before last (S3315). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3315: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is determined. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "b3." Is lit and the base value of the base value data 203o is lit and displayed twice before and after the ratio seg (S3316). Thus, when a valid base value is stored in the two-last-last base value data 203o, the valid second-last base value can be displayed and indicated on the base display device 401.

  When the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before and after the previous time, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before the previous time is set to “1” (the power supply is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time after the RAM 203 has been turned on and all initialization of the RAM 203 has been performed), the effective data flag of the base value data 203o is set to “1” two times before and after the shift. ". Therefore, after that, when the base value is displayed twice before the base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203o before and after the previous time is displayed on the ratio seg as a valid base value. Become.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3315, when the valid data flag of the base value data 203o is two times before the previous one (S3315: No), “b2.” Is displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401 while being lit. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "-" is lit on the ratio segment (S3317). In this way, if a valid base value is not obtained as the base value before the last time, the “−−” displayed in the ratio segment indicates that a valid base value before the time is not obtained. Can be shown.

  When any one of S3307, S3308, S3310, S3311, S3313, S3314, S3316, and S3371 ends, the base value display process ends as shown in FIG.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value (hereinafter, “real-time base value”) measured in real time during the period until the total out number reaches 60,000. Base value), the previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached the last (most recent) reaches 60000, and the total out number reached 10000 before (2 times before) the previous time The base value measured two times before and the base value measured two times before when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 immediately before (two times before) two times before the predetermined number of times, Is displayed. In addition to the real-time base value, displaying the past multiple base values (previous base value, pre-previous base value, pre-previous base value) enables more accurate determination of fraudulent activity, Further, the time at which the misconduct has occurred can be made predictable to some extent.

  In the fifth embodiment, every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. For a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). This makes it possible to confirm whether all the segments can be lit normally and easily determine whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is normally performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in a manufacturing plant, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand. When starting up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from a normal base value display. . In the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10, in a shipping inspection for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10, etc., there is a case where a ball is manually inserted into each winning opening and a prize ball is paid out. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when a new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) is the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

  In addition, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments can provide the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are preset in the main control device 110, and the jackpot probability and / or the It was made impossible to change the winning probability of two symbols. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment sets the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol in a plurality of stages (in the present embodiment, the set values “1” to “6”) ). The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment changes the setting value of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “probability setting value”) (hereinafter, referred to as “setting change mode”) or When the probability setting value is confirmed (hereinafter, referred to as “setting confirmation mode”), the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to be able to display a history of errors (hereinafter, referred to as “error history”) occurring in the pachinko machine 10 on the base display device 401.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifth embodiments. Description is omitted.

  FIG. 45 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the base display device 401 is disposed on a main board constituting the main control device 110, and as shown in FIG. It is assembled so that the display screen of the device 401 can be seen. The base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in the normal state, while the probability set value is displayed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The base display device 401 is also configured to display an error history.

  A setting key 501 used to change the set probability set value or to confirm the set probability set value is provided on the main board constituting the main control device 110. An error display button 502 used to display an error history is provided. The setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by persons involved in the hall without opening the board box 100.

  Here, the setting key 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a front view of the setting key 501 when the setting key 501 is in the off state, and FIG. 46B is a front view of the setting key 501 when the setting key 501 is in the on state. FIG. The setting key 501 inserts a dedicated key into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501 to switch between an OFF side indicated by “OFF” and an ON side indicated by “ON”. It is configured to be rotatable. The setting key 501 is turned off when it is located on the off side, and turned on when it is located on the warm side.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine is operated according to the states of the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door open switch (not shown). The startup mode of the machine 10 is determined. The door opening switch is a switch that detects that the inner frame 12 has been unlocked and opened (the door has been opened).

  FIG. 47 shows a start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 122, a setting key 501, and a door open switch when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to start up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode. (Not shown).

  As the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, four modes of a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode are prepared. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability set value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability set value.

  The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode. When the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203, or when the data stored in the RAM 203 is damaged. This is a mode for executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 and restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power-off.

  Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode on condition that the door opening switch is on. . When the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode on condition that the door opening switch is on.

  In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the person in charge of the hall, etc., depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, can turn on the pachinko machine 10. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select a RAM clear mode or a normal mode which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned on after the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, the person involved in the hall can turn on the RAM erase switch 122 or not. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is possible to select between a setting change mode related to the probability setting value and a setting confirmation mode.

  That is, a startup mode irrelevant to the probability set value and a startup mode irrelevant to the probability set value can be selected according to whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on. When the startup mode is not related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the startup mode related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

  Here, when the probability set value is changed, the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability in the game are changed. Therefore, when the game is continued while taking over the game state before the power is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 May not be able to exhibit predetermined game performance. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203 when the probability set value is changed in the setting change mode. On the other hand, the setting confirmation mode is a start-up mode in which the probability setting value is merely confirmed, so that the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (not cleared) so that the game can be continued while taking over the game state before the power is turned off. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, and the RAM is erased while the setting key 501 is turned on. When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the switch 122 and the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting check mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened before setting. The power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode or the setting change mode for clearing the data stored in the RAM 203, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing (turning on) the RAM erase switch 122. That is, if the person involved in the hall understands the meaning of each start-up mode, he can easily understand what kind of operation is required as an operation on the pachinko machine 10 necessary for the start-up mode to be started up.

  In addition, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hole. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily checking the probability set value and searching for the pachinko machine 10 with the large jackpot probability and / or the hit probability being high, or preventing the player from changing the probability set value to the high probability without permission. Further, since the RAM erasing switch 122 is normally provided at a position where the player does not easily touch it, it is possible to prevent the player from changing the probability setting value to a high probability without permission at this point.

  Further, even when the switch or the like to be operated at the same time is activated in the setting operation mode, there are two switches and the switch can be sufficiently operated with both hands, so that operability is good. As described above, the person in charge of the hall or the like can easily and easily select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by properly using the on / off state of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

  In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the door opening switch is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, the inner frame 12 is opened. It is a condition.

  This is because, in order to change or check the probability set value, it is necessary for a person related to the hall or the like to visually recognize the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame is required. 12 is required to be open. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is on, the setting key 501 is not started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As in the case of the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode if the RAM erasing switch 122 is off, and the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode if the RAM erasing switch 122 is on. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even though the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 is in the on state. It can be suppressed that it does not start. Also, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, the player opens the inner frame 12 without permission and checks the probability setting value to search for the pachinko machine 10 having the high jackpot probability and / or the winning probability, or changes the probability setting value to the high probability without permission. Can be suppressed.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the condition that the door opening switch is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, that the inner frame 12 is opened is not necessarily a condition. It is not necessary. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is set in the setting change mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on. May be launched. When the setting key 501 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is set in the setting check mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on or not. May be launched.

  Now, the pachinko machine 10 prepares a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode for changing or confirming the probability set value as one of the start-up modes. However, in the present embodiment, the change and confirmation of the probability set value are performed. Is enabled only when the pachinko machine 10 is started (when the power is turned on) in the setting check mode, and the probability set value cannot be checked while the game is in progress. This is for the following reason.

  That is, the display of the accessory ratio such as the display of the base value by the base display device 401, the display of the accessory ratio, and the display of the value indicating the game performance, the game state, and the like enable the fraudulent act to be detected early. Therefore, in principle, it must be displayed during the game. Therefore, at least the probability set value cannot be displayed while the game is being played by the player.

  If the setting key 501 is turned on so that the display of the probability setting value can be performed other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, the probability setting value can be displayed even during the game being played by the player. For example, the game may be stopped. However, with the main control device 110, the variation time can be stopped along with stopping the game, but the variation effect may be continuously performed on the third symbol display device 81. A mismatch may occur between the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

  When the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed at times other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, the probability setting value is displayed during the game being played by the player. Although it is conceivable that the game can be continued as it is and the probability set value can be confirmed on the base display device 401, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 in order to confirm the display on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is substantially difficult for the player to continue the game.

  It is also conceivable that after the setting key 501 is turned on, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 after all the variable effects including the jackpot and the suspended portion have been completed. However, many fluctuation effects include those with a long fluctuation time, some of which last for about 5 minutes. In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation time is also set to be long when the gaming state is normal, and it takes a lot of time until all the holdings are exhausted, so it is difficult to wait until the probability set value is displayed.

  Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to change or check the probability set value, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off, the setting key 501 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Thereby, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401 in a state where the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10, and the probability setting value can be surely changed or confirmed by the person related to the hall or the like. Further, once the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the state before the power is turned off is backed up in the RAM 203, and the startup processing is performed without clearing the backed up state. Even if the set value is confirmed, the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

  In addition, by restricting the change or confirmation of the probability set value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to suppress a player from checking or changing the probability set value without permission at normal times.

  FIG. 48A illustrates the role of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 in the setting change mode. FIG. 48B illustrates the role of the setting key 501 in the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the setting change mode, the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated. When the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is determined as the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, “1” to “6” can be set as the probability setting values, and the jackpot random number value and / or the second probability setting value are set for each of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”). The winning random number value of the symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol at the probability set value are determined by the number of jackpot random numbers and / or the number of hit random numbers of the second symbol determined for each probability set value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability set value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and the larger the probability set value (closer to 6), the larger the jackpot probability and / or Alternatively, the big random number value and / or the second random number value of the second symbol are determined for each probability setting value so that the winning probability of the second symbol is high.

  Note that the jackpot random number value and / or the hit random number value of the second symbol are fixed, and the range and / or range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”) Alternatively, a range of random numbers to be generated for performing the second symbol winning lottery may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability at the probability set value are determined by the range of the jackpot random number and / or the range of the hit random number of the second symbol set for each probability set value.

  In the setting change mode, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is incremented by one. However, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is “6”, the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated to “1”. You. In other words, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 loops while adding the range of “1” to “6” by one.

  When the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is determined as the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10. Then, after the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 performs game control with the determined probability set value thereafter, and displays the base value on the base display device 401.

  In the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 48B, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the base value is displayed instead of the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401. Is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the display contents of the probability set value to be displayed on the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating various examples of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and FIG. 49A is an example thereof.

  In the example shown in FIG. 49A, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. Further, among the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, all the segments of the left-seven-segment display 401c are turned off, and only the right-seventh-segment display 401d is used. The probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed.

  As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., B1,..., Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio seg are included in the identification segment. ) Is displayed, in the example shown in FIG. 49A, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all segments of the identification segment are turned off. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between displaying the base value and displaying the probability set value on the base display device 401. It is possible to make the user know which information is the base value or the probability setting value. When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, when the base value is, for example, “6”, the ratio segment is displayed as “06”. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and the probability set value is displayed on the left side. Since all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, even if the identification seg is broken and cannot be turned on, see that all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg are turned off. Thus, it is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the hall and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability set value.

  FIG. 49B is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 49B, in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit on the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401, Turn off other segments. That is, “−−” is displayed on the identification segment. Also, among the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, also in the left-side seven-segment display 401c, only the middle horizontal bar segment is turned on, and the other segments are turned off. That is, “−” is also displayed on the segment. Then, the probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment.

  This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Further, in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio seg, and "-" is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Therefore, even if the identification seg is broken and cannot be turned on, looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg, it is confirmed that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability set value. It is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the hall etc.

  FIG. 49 (c-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49 (c-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is the schematic diagram which showed another example of the content. In this example, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, in the identification segment, similarly to FIG. 49A, all the segments of the seven-segment display units 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment are turned off. On the other hand, the ratio segment displays “H” indicating the setting change mode or “C” indicating the setting confirmation mode on the left 7-segment display 401c among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment. , The probability set values (1 to 6) are displayed on the right 7-segment display 401d.

  This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value.

  When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, when the base value is, for example, “6”, the ratio segment is displayed as “06”. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and (c-2), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting is performed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment. The value is displayed, and “H” is displayed in the setting change mode and “C” is displayed in the setting confirmation mode on the left 7-segment display 401c. As a result, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, “H” or “C” different from the number is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment, so that the base display device 401 is displayed. Can be clearly grasped by the person in charge of the hall or the like that the information displayed in is displayed as the probability set value.

  In the setting change mode and the setting check mode, different display contents are displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting check mode. be able to.

  FIG. 49 (d-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49 (d-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is the schematic diagram which showed another example of the content. Also in this example, as in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and (c-2), the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, in the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification seg, only the middle horizontal bar segment is turned on and the other segments are turned off, as in FIG. 49B. That is, “−−” is displayed on the identification segment. On the other hand, as for the ratio segment, the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio seg change the setting change mode on the left 7-segment display 401c similarly to FIGS. 49 (c-1) and (c-2). "H" or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed, and the probability set values (1 to 6) are displayed on the right 7-segment display 401d.

  This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Also, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, “H” or “C” different from the number is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment, so that the base display device 401 is displayed. The fact that the displayed information is the probability set value can be clearly grasped by the person involved in the hall or the like. In the setting change mode and the setting check mode, different display contents are displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting check mode. be able to.

  FIG. 49 (e-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49 (e-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is the schematic diagram which showed another example of the content. Also in this example, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. However, the display contents are changed by the identification segment, so that the display contents shown in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and (c-2) are changed. This is different from the example and the examples of FIGS. 49 (d-1) and (d-2). Specifically, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, "SH." Is displayed in the setting change mode, and "SC." Is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all the segments of the left seven-segment display 401c are turned off, and the probability set values (1 to 6) are displayed using only the right seven-segment display 401d.

  As described above, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., B1,..., Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio seg are displayed in the identification segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49A, “SH.” Indicating the setting change mode is displayed in the case of the setting change mode, and “SC.” Indicating the setting check mode is displayed in the case of the setting check mode. . As described above, by displaying different display contents in the case where the base value is displayed as the display contents displayed in the identification segment and in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, both can be clearly differentiated. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Further, by displaying different display contents on the identification segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  When the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment, and in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a 7-segment display on the right side of the ratio segment is displayed. The probability set value is displayed using only 401d, and all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, the 7-segment display on the left side of the ratio seg is displayed. By seeing that all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, it is clear to the persons involved in the hall or the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is at least a probability set value instead of a base value. It can be grasped.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. The error display button 502 is a button for displaying an error history on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 can display an error history that is a history of errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10. The display of the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the error display button 502 is pressed. That is, the base value is continuously displayed on the base display device 401 unless the error display button 502 is pressed.

  An improper operation such as applying a shock to the pachinko machine 10 or bringing a magnet closer to change the flow direction of the ball to cause the ball to enter various winning openings, thereby intentionally obtaining a prize ball or performing a jackpot lottery. There is a case where an act or a fraudulent act of letting a ball pass through the through gate 67 and intentionally performing a lottery for a normal symbol is performed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to detect an impact or to detect the approach of a magnet, and when these are detected, stop the game as a serious error. At this time, instead of displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the base value is continuously displayed.

  If it is configured to display the type of error on the base display device 401 when a serious error is detected, if a wrongdoing is performed so that the base value or the like is changed, the base display device 401 In order to hide the base value displayed on the pachinko machine, a serious error is caused by intentionally applying an impact to the pachinko machine 10 or bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 10, causing the base display device 401 to display the error type, and the base value is not displayed. It is conceivable to be driven.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, even if a serious error is detected, a person who has committed an illegal act such as changing the base value or the like by continuing to display the base value on the base display device 401, The display of the base value after the cheating can not be hidden, and the cheating on the base value can be surely found.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only during the pressing operation. From the displayed error history, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp what kind of error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When the pressing operation of the error display button 502 is released, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 again.

  Note that the error history may display only the type of error that occurred closest in time. Further, the error type may be displayed up to a plurality of times (for example, four times) from the error including the error occurring closest in time. In the case of displaying the error types for a plurality of times at the maximum, the error occurrence time is displayed on the base display device 401 by a predetermined time in order from the closest to the current time. When the error display button 502 is pressed when no error occurs in the pachinko machine 10 (or when no error record remains), an error message is displayed while the pressing operation is being performed. A display indicating that there is no record may be displayed on the base display device 401, or the base value may be continuously displayed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, while the error display button 502 is being pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401, but when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the error display is performed. When the button 502 is pressed once, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401. When the error display button 502 is pressed once while the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the error is displayed on the base display device 401. The base value may be configured to be displayed again.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the display contents when displaying the error history on the base display device 401 will be described. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when an error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and FIG. 50A is an example thereof.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50A, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, all the segments of the seven-segment display devices 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. Further, among the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that an error history is to be displayed is displayed on the left-hand seven-segment display 401c, and the seven-segment display on the right is displayed. The error type is numerically displayed using only the device 401d. For example, if an impact detection error occurs, “1” is displayed as an error type, and if a magnet detection error occurs, “2” is displayed as an error type.

  As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., B1,..., Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio seg are included in the identification segment. ) Is displayed, in the example shown in FIG. 49A, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all segments of the identification segment are turned off. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed, so that the display state is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It is possible to make the user know whether the information is a base value or an error history. When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, when the base value is, for example, “6”, the ratio segment is displayed as “06”. In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 50A, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the probability set value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and the left side is displayed. "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c, so that even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history. This can be clearly understood by persons involved in the hall and the like.

  Further, even if the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49A, FIG. 49C-1 and FIG. When displaying on the display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so that the base display device 401 displays the probability set value and displays the error history. In some cases, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. it can.

  On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are shown in FIGS. 49 (b), 49 (d-1), (d-2), FIGS. 49 (e-1), and (e- In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the probability set value is displayed and the case where the error history is displayed, and is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It can be grasped whether the information is a probability set value or an error history. When displaying the error history on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c. Also, it is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the halls and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history.

  FIG. 50B is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. In the example shown in FIG. 50B, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit on the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401. And turn off the other segments. That is, “−−” is displayed on the identification segment. Further, among the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that an error history is to be displayed is displayed on the left-hand seven-segment display 401c, and the seven-segment display on the right is displayed. The error type is displayed as a numerical value in the same manner as in FIG.

  This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed. It is possible to make the user know whether the information is a base value or an error history. When displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the base history is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio seg, and the display of the error history is shown on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Since “E” is displayed, even if the identification seg is broken and cannot be turned on, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is displayed by looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg. The probability set value can be clearly understood by the hall-related persons and the like.

  Further, even when the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49B, FIG. 49D-1 and FIG. When displaying on the display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so that the base display device 401 displays the probability set value and displays the error history. In some cases, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. it can.

  On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are shown in FIGS. 49 (a), 49 (c-1), (c-2), FIGS. 49 (e-1), and (e- In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the probability set value is displayed and the case where the error history is displayed, and is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It can be grasped whether the information is a probability set value or an error history. When displaying the error history on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c. Also, it is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the halls and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history.

  FIG. 50 (c-1) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when displaying the error type that occurred closest in time as the error history, and FIG. 50 (c-2) shows the error history. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when displaying an error type that has occurred second closest in time. In the examples of FIGS. 50 (c-1) and (c-2), “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401a among the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment. Is displayed on the right side of the 7-segment display 401b, and a numerical value indicating how close the error type to be displayed is related to the error that occurred in time is shown. In other words, when the identification segment is displayed as “E1.”, It indicates that the error type of the error that occurred closest in time is displayed, and when the identification segment is displayed as “E2.” Indicates that the error type of the error that occurred second closest is displayed. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off, and the error type is displayed using only the right 7-segment display 401d.

  In this way, as the display contents displayed on the identification segment, when displaying the base value, when displaying the probability set value, and when displaying the error history, the display contents are different from each other, so Can be differentiated. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value, a probability setting value, or an error history. Also, in the identification segment, by displaying a numerical value indicating how close the error type to be displayed is related to an error that occurred in time, the displayed error type is close to what time in time. It can clearly indicate whether the error is related to the error that has occurred.

  When the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment, and when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the seven segments on the right side of the ratio segment are displayed. The error type is displayed using only the display 401d, and all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, the left segment of the ratio seg is not displayed. By seeing that all the segments of the seven-segment display 401c are turned off, it is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the halls or the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is not at least the base value. it can. When the pachinko machine 10 is not started up or when the error display button 502 is depressed, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history. Can be easily grasped.

  Next, referring to FIG. 51, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates that the base display device 401 is displaying the probability set value in the setting change mode (hereinafter, referred to as “display during setting change”). The display mode shown and the display mode showing that the probability set value is displayed in the setting check mode (hereinafter, referred to as “display during setting check”) will be described.

  First, FIG. 51A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the LEDs 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The plurality of LEDs 37a are provided as described above in the description of the first embodiment. Depending on the lighting state of the plurality of LEDs 37a, a fluctuation display is performed, a pattern according to the result of the lottery is displayed after the fluctuation display, and the holding series is displayed. Or show. The LED 37a includes seven round number notification LEDs 37a1 (first round number notification LED to seventh round number notification LED) for notifying the maximum number of rounds in the case of a big hit when a big hit occurs.

  The pachinko machine 10 uses the round number notification LED 37a1 to light the round number notification LED 37a1 in a lighting pattern different from the maximum round number notification, so that the setting change display is being performed or the setting check is being performed. Notify that display is being performed.

  FIG. 51B shows a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2, a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, and a setting change in the round number notification LED 37a1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when notifying that a display is being performed, and a lighting pattern when notifying that a display is indicating a setting being confirmed.

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is “off”, the second round number notification LED is “off”, and the third round number notification LED. Is “off”, the fourth round number notification LED is “off”, the fifth round number notification LED is “on”, the sixth round number notification LED is “on”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “on”. .

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is “on”, the second round number notification LED is “on”, and the third round number notification LED. Is “ON”, the fourth round number notification LED is “ON”, the fifth round number notification LED is “OFF”, the sixth round number notification LED is “OFF”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “OFF”. .

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the setting change display is being performed is as follows: the first round number notification LED is “on”, the second round number notification LED is “off”, and the third round number notification LED is “On”, the fourth round number notification LED is “On”, the fifth round number notification LED is “On”, the sixth round number notification LED is “Off”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “On”.

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the display is during the setting confirmation display is as follows: the first round number notification LED is “on”, the second round number notification LED is “off”, and the third round number notification LED is “On”, the fourth round number notification LED is “Off”, the fifth round number notification LED is “On”, the sixth round number notification LED is “Off”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “On”.

  In the present embodiment, not only the maximum number of rounds at the time of the big hit is notified by using the round number notification LED 37a1, but also the setting change display or the setting confirmation is being performed by the lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern used for the notification. Although the case of notifying that the display is being performed has been described, the LED other than the round number notification LED 37a1, such as the LED for notifying the big hit symbol and the LED for notifying the hit symbol, or the entire LED 37a, Using a lighting pattern that is not used in the notification, the fact that the setting change display or the setting check display is being performed may be notified. Accordingly, the setting change display or the setting confirmation display can be notified on the first symbol display device 37 only by software control without changing the hardware configuration of the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is that the setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The point is that the impact detection sensor 503 and the magnetic sensor 504 are connected to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. Also, the point that an error detection signal is output from the payout control device 111 to the main control device 110 is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment.

  The setting key 501 outputs to the main control device 110 a signal indicating whether it is in the off state or the on state. Main controller 110 grasps the state of setting key 501 during the startup process executed when the power is turned on, and is output from RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with RAM erase switch 122. The contents of the RAM erase signal SG2 and the signal output from the door open switch are grasped, and the start-up mode is determined based on the conditions shown in FIG.

  Error display button 502 outputs a signal indicating the presence or absence of a pressing operation to main controller 110. Main controller 110 determines whether or not error display button 502 has been pressed based on a signal output from error display button 502, and displays an error history on base display device 401 while the button is pressed.

  The impact detection sensor 503 is a sensor for detecting that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10. The magnetic sensor 504 is a sensor for detecting that a magnet has approached the pachinko machine 10.

  When the impact detection sensor 503 detects that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 applies an impact to the pachinko machine 10 by a fraudulent person, and the flowing direction of the ball is illegally changed. To determine that a serious error has occurred, instruct the firing control device 112 to stop firing the ball, and notify the main control device 110 of the occurrence of the error. Outputs an error detection signal.

  Further, when the magnetic sensor 504 detects that the magnet has approached the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 causes the magnet to approach the pachinko machine 10 by an illegal actor and illegally changes the flowing direction of the ball. In order to judge that there is a possibility that the error has occurred, instruct the firing control device 112 to stop firing the ball as a serious error occurrence, and notify the main control device 110 of the occurrence of the error. Output an error detection signal.

  When receiving the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 stops the progress of the game. Thus, when there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred, the game in the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped. Further, main controller 110 determines the type of error (shock detection error or magnet detection error) notified by the error detection signal received from payout controller 111 as error data 203t of RAM 203 (see FIG. 53). ). When the error display button 502 is pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

  FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The outer work area 203y1 stores at least the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t.

  The base value data 203r is data necessary for calculating the base value and displaying the calculated base value on the base display device 401. For example, the total out number counter shown in FIG. 203j, a low-probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, pre-last base value data 203n, pre-last base value data 203o, new start-up flag 203p, and the like.

  The accessory ratio data 203s is data necessary for calculating the accessory ratio and displaying the calculated accessory ratio on the base display device 401. For example, the first counter 263a shown in FIG. The first two counters 263b, the first one counter 263c, the second one counter 263d, the special winning opening counter 263e, the out counter 263f, the data corresponding to the bonus ratio data 264a, the continuous bonus ratio data 264b or similar data. .

  The error data 203t is data indicating an error type of an error that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When an error detection signal is received from the payout control device 111, the error type indicated by the error detection signal is stored as error data 203t. When the error display button 502 is pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

  Here, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is only the error type that occurred closest in time, only the latest error type is always stored in the error data 203t. Specifically, upon receiving the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 overwrites the error data 203t with the error type indicated by the error detection signal. As a result, only the latest error type is always stored in the base display device 401, and only the most recent error type is displayed in the error history displayed on the base display device 401.

  On the other hand, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 includes a plurality of (for example, four) error types up to a plurality of times (for example, four times) retroactive to the error, including the error that occurred closest in time. In the error data 203t, the occurrence time is stored a plurality of times in ascending order from the current time.

  For example, the error data 203t indicates that the error type that occurred closest in time is stored in the error data 203t such that four error types are stored in order from the closest occurrence to the current time. First error type data to be stored, second error type data to store an error type that occurred second closest in time, and third error type to store an error type that occurred third closest in time Data and fourth error type data that stores an error type that has occurred fourth closest in time. When receiving the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 shifts the third error type data to the fourth error type data, shifts the second error type data to the third error type data, The one error type data is shifted to the second error type data, and the error type indicated by the received error detection signal is stored as the first error type data. As a result, four types of errors are stored in the error data 203t in order from the closest occurrence to the current time, and the base display device 401 includes the error that occurred closest in time. In addition, error types for a plurality of times (for example, four times) are displayed at most retroactively from the error. In this case, if the address of each error type data is assigned so that the shift processing of each error type data can be performed by one LDIR instruction, the shift processing can be performed by only one LDIR instruction. .

  Note that the error history displayed on the base display device 401 includes a plurality of (for example, four) error types up to a plurality of times (for example, four times) retroactive to the error, including the error that occurred closest in time. The error data 203t may be constituted by a ring buffer of a FIFO (First In First Out) system, and may store the error types for a plurality of times. In this case, when receiving an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 may update the address (ring buffer pointer) storing the error type.

  Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode, the pachinko machine 10 keeps at least the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t without erasing. I do. As a result, even if the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on, the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t cannot be erased, so that they can be displayed on the base display device 401. Can be. Therefore, even if the wrongdoer turns on the RAM erase switch 122 to hide the wrongdoing, the evidence can be suppressed from being hidden.

  The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, and the data in the RAM 203 is also deleted when the probability set value is changed. However, the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are deleted. Without holding. Thus, even if the fraudster changes the probability set value in order to conceal the fraud, it is possible to suppress the concealment of the evidence. On the other hand, the accessory ratio data 203s is deleted during the deletion of the data in the RAM 203 performed after the change of the probability setting value. This is because if the probability set value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes. Therefore, if the data 203s for the accessory ratio based on the probability set value before the change remains, the role based on the probability set value after the change remains. This is because the material ratio cannot be calculated correctly. On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, the base value data 203r is stored, and the past base value and information necessary for calculating the base value are stored. By doing so, it is possible to detect past misconduct without being concealed.

  As described above, in erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the change of the probability set value, a part of the data related to the display of the base display device 401 is kept without erasing, and the remaining data is retained. By erasing the data, the data can be retained or erased in accordance with the actual situation of each data.

  Further, in the external work area 203y1, the area to be erased by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the change of the probability set value is performed, and the area to be retained without being erased are divided into areas to be erased. Alternatively, the base value data 203r and the error data 203t may be stored in an area where the data 203s are stored and stored without being erased. This makes it possible to easily erase the data including the character ratio data 203s stored in the area to be erased by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability set value is changed, and to erase the data. The data including the base value data 203r and the error data 203t stored in the holding area without fail can be securely held by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed. it can.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S4001). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4002). In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) for performing main control of the game is executed with a timer interrupt (hereinafter, referred to as “4 millisecond timer interrupt”) generated every 4 milliseconds as a trigger. A base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling display contents displayed on the display device 401 is executed with a timer interrupt (hereinafter, referred to as a “2 millisecond timer interrupt”) generated every 2 ms. In the processing in S4002, for example, the 4 ms timer interrupt and the 2 ms timer interrupt are permitted. In addition, when a random number value required for performing the jackpot lottery or the hit lottery is generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, in the process of S4002, the range of the generated random number value ( Set the maximum value).

  In particular, by permitting a 2 ms timer interrupt in the internal function register setting process, a 2 ms timer interrupt occurs every 2 ms and the base display control process is executed. Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  In the process of S4002, it is not always necessary to permit the interruption of the 4 millisecond timer and to set the range (maximum value) of the random number value. In the process of S4002, when the permission of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt and / or the setting of the range (maximum value) of the random number value are not performed, the other processes described later, which are executed at the stage of shifting from the startup process to the main process, are performed. In the raising process (S4013), permission of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt not performed in the process of S4002 and / or setting of the range (maximum value) of the random number value may be performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4003). If it is turned on (S4003: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on and the door open switch is on. Is determined (S4004). If an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, so that as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set to the setting change mode, and the setting change process is executed (S4005).

  Here, the details of the setting change processing (S4005) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing (S4005). The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting a change in the probability set value from a person related to the hall or the like and confirming the change.

  In the setting change processing (S4005), first, the start of the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set (S4101). With the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the base display device 401 by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is one of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

  Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the start-up mode is set to the setting change mode, the display on the base display device 401 may be started at a specific probability set value without fail. The specific probability set value may be, for example, “1” which is the minimum value of the probability set values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “3” which is an intermediate value of the probability set values. 4 "or" 6 "which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. Thereby, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the person related to the hall and the like can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when the start-up mode is set to the setting change mode, display may be started on the base display device 401 with the probability set value set before the power was turned off as it is. This allows the person involved in the hall or the like to change the probability set value while considering the probability set value that was set before the power was turned off.

  When the startup mode is set to the setting change mode, the probability setting value is displayed as “3” on the base display device 401 if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is 3 or more. Is started, and if the probability set value that was set before the power was turned off is less than 3, the display may be started with the probability set value that was set before the power was turned off as it is. Good. For example, when the probability set value set before the power is turned off is high, such as “5” or “6”, there are many cases where the probability set value needs to be reduced slightly (for example, by 1) in many cases. In such a case, if display is started with the probability set value set as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem occurs. That is, the update of the probability set value is incremented by one each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability set value is “6”, the probability set value is changed to “ 1 ". Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability set value from “6” to “5”, the probability set value must be substantially rotated once while the RAM erase switch 122 is repeatedly turned on. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value is started to be displayed as “3”, thereby reducing the number of times the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, thereby reducing the probability setting value. The value can be updated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the range of “1” to “6” (S4102). If it is not within the predetermined range, that is, if the probability set value is abnormal (S4102). : No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S4103), and the process proceeds to S4104. The initial value may be “1” which is the minimum value of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “4” which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Or the maximum value of the probability setting value may be “6”. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability set value is within the range of “1” to “6” as a result of the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the process of S4103 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4104. .

  In the process of S4104, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4104). In the process of S4104, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off. This is because, as described later, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122, the probability setting value is broken and the probability setting value is within the normal range (the range of “1” to “6”). If not, the setting change processing is executed. At this time, however, the setting key 501 is normally in the off state. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state, the probability setting value is broken and the probability range is normal (“1”). If the setting key 501 is in the OFF state even if the setting change processing is executed and the setting key 501 is in the off state, an affirmative determination is immediately made in the processing of S4104, and the probability setting is performed as described later. The value is determined and the setting change process ends. Therefore, it becomes impossible for persons involved in the hall or the like to change the probability set value. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4104 that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off. Unless a related person or the like performs an operation of temporarily turning the setting key 501 from the off state to the on state and then back to the off state, an affirmative determination is not made in the process of S4104. Changes can be made.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is started up without turning on the RAM erasure switch 122, even if the probability setting value is broken and is not within the normal range (the range of “1” to “6”), the setting is performed. When the change process is not executed (for example, when the hall-related person is prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode), the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is turned off. May be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off.

  As a result of the processing in S4104, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4104: No), it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S4105: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on (S4105: Yes), the probability setting value is set. Is updated (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. As described above, when the probability setting value up to that time is “1” to “5”, 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that time is updated. When the value is “6”, the setting is performed by returning the probability setting value to “1”. The probability set value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

  The loop processing of S4102 → S4103 → S4104: No → S4105 (and S4106) → S4102 continues to be executed by the processing of S4104 until it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4104: Yes). When it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned on by the process of S4104 (S4104: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is changed to the probability setting value to be used in a game from now on. Is determined (S4107). Then, the end of the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process ends. By the process of S4108, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value, The display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  Referring back to FIG. 54, the description of the startup processing will be continued. When the setting change processing in S4005 is completed, next, a setting change RAM clear processing is executed (S4006). In this setting change RAM clearing process, of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1) and the data 203s for the accessory ratio Are erased (cleared), while the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. By erasing the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1), newly starting a game using the newly set probability set value Can be.

  Further, as described above, when the probability setting value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes. Therefore, if the data 203s for the accessory ratio based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the probability setting value after the change is changed. Cannot be calculated correctly. In the setting change RAM clearing process, by deleting the accessory ratio data 203s, it is possible to correctly calculate the accessory ratio based on the changed probability set value.

  On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, in the setting change RAM clear processing, the base value data 203r is held and the past base value and the base value are calculated. By retaining necessary information, it is possible to detect unfair acts performed in the past without being concealed. Also, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the fraudulent person who caused the error starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history is stored. It cannot be erased and concealment of fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  After the processing of S4006, other start-up processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off or the door open switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off, the startup mode is set to the RAM clear mode and the normal RAM clear processing is executed as shown in FIG. 47 (S4007). If the RAM erasing switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on, but the door opening switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. The normal RAM clear processing is executed instead of the change mode in the RAM clear mode (S4007). Thus, even if the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 is on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode, and the game is not started in the pachinko machine 10. it can.

  In the normal RAM clearing process (S4007), of the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1) is erased (cleared). , The base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. A new game can be started by deleting data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1).

  On the other hand, by holding the data 203r for the base value, the data 203s for the accessory ratio, and the data 203t for the error without erasing them, the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on and the data in the RAM 203 is erased. However, these can be displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, even if the wrongdoer turns on the RAM erase switch 122 to conceal the wrongdoing, the wrongdoing can be found from the base value, the accessory ratio, the error history, and the like displayed on the base display device 401. .

  After the processing of S4007, other start-up processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  As a result of the processing in S4003, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off (S4003: No), it is then determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008). If not (S4008: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off may not have been completed normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S4007 to execute the normal RAM clear process (S4007). .

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated, and whether the calculated RAM determination value is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value is stored when the power is turned off. It is determined whether the value matches the RAM determination value (S4009). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, the probability set value stored in the RAM 203 is also used for calculating the checksum value.

  If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S4009: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the data in the backed-up RAM 203 is destroyed. In this case, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is within a normal range (a range from “1” to “6”) (S4010). If the probability set value is within the normal range (S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to S4007, where the normal RAM clearing process is executed. Needless to say, the probability set value is maintained without being erased in the normal RAM clear processing or the setting change RAM clear processing.

  On the other hand, if the probability set value is not within the normal range, for example, “7” (S4010: No), the process proceeds to S4005, and the setting change process shown in FIG. A related person or the like is set again to set the probability setting value. At this time, a display prompting the change of the probability set value may be performed on the third symbol display device 81, or a notification sound or a sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the user. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the probability set value is not within the normal range. Thus, it is possible to notify the person concerned with the hall or the like that it is necessary to reset the probability set value.

  As a result of the processing in S4009, if the calculated RAM determination value is normal (S4009: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on and the door open switch is on (S4011). If an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: Yes), the RAM erasure switch 122 is off, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, so that as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting confirmation processing is executed (S4012).

  Here, the details of the setting confirmation processing (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (S4012). The setting confirmation process (S4012) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the probability set value on the base display device 401.

  In this setting confirmation processing (S4012), first, the start of the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set (S4201). With the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the base display device 401 by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is one of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2).

  Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4202). In the process of S4202, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on-state to the off-state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off. Note that it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is off.

  As a result of the processing in S4202, if the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4202: No), S4202 is repeatedly executed, and waits until the setting key 501 is turned off. During this time, the display of the probability set value is continuously performed on the base display device 401. When the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202: Yes), the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set to end (S4203), and the setting confirmation processing ends. By the process of S4203, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value, The display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  This setting confirmation processing (S4012) is executed after it is determined whether the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal. This is because, when the RAM determination value is abnormal, the RAM clear processing should be executed before confirming the probability set value. However, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation process may be executed before the determination whether the RAM determination value (check sum) is normal is made. .

  Referring back to FIG. 54, the description of the startup processing will be continued. When the setting confirmation processing in S4012 ends, other startup processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  If a negative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, and the setting key 501 is off or the door open switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is off, the startup mode is set to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 47, the setting confirmation process in S4012 is skipped, and the other startup in S4013 is performed. After performing the raising process, the process proceeds to the main process. If the RAM erasure switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, but the door opening switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. The normal mode is set instead of the confirmation mode, the setting confirmation processing in S4012 is skipped, the other startup processing in S4013 is executed, and then the flow shifts to the main processing. Thus, even if the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 is on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode, thereby preventing the pachinko machine 10 from starting a game. it can.

  Next, a base display control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the base display control process is a process of controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401, and is executed by a 2 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 2 milliseconds.

  In the base display control process, first, various setting processes for causing the base display device control circuit 402 to perform display control of the base display device 401 are executed (S4301). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting of the probability set value in the setting change mode is being changed (S4302). If it is determined that the setting is being changed (S4302: Yes), the probability set value during the setting change is changed. The setting change seg data including the seg data is set as seg data (S4303), the seg data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the base display control process ends. As a result, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 in one of the display modes of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1). You.

  If it is determined that the setting is not being changed as a result of the process of S4302 (S4302: No), then it is determined whether the setting of the probability set value in the setting check mode is being checked (S4304). As a result, when it is determined that the setting is being confirmed (S4304: Yes), the setting confirmation seg data including the probability setting value during the setting confirmation is set as the seg data (S4305), and the seg data is used as the base display device control circuit. 402 (S4309), and terminates the base display control process. As a result, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 in one of the display modes of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2). You.

  If it is determined that the setting is not being confirmed as a result of the process of S4304 (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the error history is being displayed based on the fact that the error display button 502 is pressed (step S4304). S4306). As a result, when it is determined that the error history is being displayed (S4306: Yes), the error history seg data including the error type is set as the seg data (S4307), and the seg data is output to the base display device control circuit 402. (S4309), and ends the base display control processing. As a result, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 in one of the display modes shown in FIGS. 50 (a), (b), (c-1) and (c-2).

  If it is determined that the error history is not being displayed as a result of the process of S4306 (S4306: No), the normal game seg data including the base value or the accessory ratio is set as the seg data (S4308), and the seg data is displayed on the base. The output is output to the device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the base display control process ends. Thus, the base value or the accessory ratio is displayed on the base display device 401 in the normal state.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process for performing main control of a game, and is executed by a 4 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds.

  In this timer interrupt processing, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within a normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4401). Each time the timer interrupt process is executed, it is determined whether the probability set value is within the normal range, so that even if the probability set value has been destroyed for any reason, it can be found early. can do.

  As a result of the process of S4401, if the probability set value is within the normal range (S4401: Yes), the normal game process for performing the main control of the game is executed (S4402), and then the calculation and the base of the accessory ratio are performed. The CPU executes a ratio process (base process) for performing a process of managing information relating to the ratio of the bonus and the base value, such as calculating a value (S4403), and terminates the timer interrupt process.

  In the game process (S4402), for example, processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment are executed. That is, the main control of the game includes a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display, opening / closing control of the big winning port (large opening port) 65a at the time of the jackpot, a lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. . Note that the MPU 201 uses the used area in the RAM 203 (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S4402. On the other hand, while executing the process of S4403, the MPU 201 uses the outside area 203y (the outside work area 203y1 and the outside stack area 203y2) in the RAM 203.

  At this time, in the processing of S4403, as described in the third embodiment, from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the used area, the ratio of the character and the base using the area 203y outside the used area is changed. When shifting to the processing related to the value, the register 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201 is individually evacuated to the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, After execution of the processing relating to the base processing, when the processing is shifted from the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area to the game processing mainly controlling the game using the area 203x within the used area (return), The registers 200 evacuated to the work area 203y1 may be individually restored.

  Further, as described in the fourth embodiment, while executing the processing using the area 203x within the used area, the processing for executing the processing relating to the character ratio or the base value using the area 203y outside the used area is described in the CALL instruction. At the stage of reading, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio or the base value may be individually cleared to 0, and the processing for executing the processing related to the accessory ratio or the base value may be read by the CALL instruction. . Then, at the stage where the processing using the area 203y outside the used area read by the CALL instruction is completed and the processing returns to the processing using the area 203x inside the used area, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually stored. After clearing to 0, the process may return to the winning combination process (base process).

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4401, if the probability set value is not within the predetermined range (S4401: No), the process does not proceed to the game process (S4402), the notification command is set (S4404), and the notification command is set. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In response to the notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs, from the sound output device 226, a notification sound or a sound that prompts a person in the hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 to change the probability setting value. Alternatively, a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a message urging a person related to the hall to be displayed is output to the display control device 114. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the probability set value is not within the normal range. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall and the like restarts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and performs a process of changing the probability set value.

  In addition, following the processing in S4404, a ball firing stop instruction is issued to the payout control device 111 (S4405). Thereby, the launch of the ball is stopped. After the processing in S4405, the timer interrupt processing ends. While the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4401: No), the game process (S4402) is not executed even if the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 milliseconds. Stopped completely. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by continuing the game with the abnormal probability set value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 starts up regardless of the probability setting value depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on. A mode and a startup mode related to the probability setting value can be selected. When the startup mode is not related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the startup mode related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Thereby, if the person involved in the hall understands the meaning of each start-up mode, it can easily understand what kind of operation is required as an operation on the pachinko machine 10 necessary for the start-up mode to be started up. .

  In addition, the configuration described in the description of the sixth embodiment has the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122, and it is detected that the setting key 501 is turned off. The case where the probability set value is determined when the setting is performed has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the setting change switch (not shown). When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability set value is determined.

  Here, the setting change switch is a switch for updating the probability set value by being operated during the setting change mode. Like the error display button 502, the main board is changed from the hole provided in the board box 100 through the main board. It is provided more protruding, and can be operated by persons involved in the hall without opening the substrate box 100. The setting change switch normally outputs an off signal, and outputs an on signal when pressed down.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to sixth embodiments. Description is omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (S4005) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 54) by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, as in the sixth embodiment, and accepts and fixes a change in the probability set value from a person related to the hall or the like. It is processing for.

  In the setting change process according to the seventh embodiment, first, the processes in S4101 to S4103 similar to those in the sixth embodiment are executed, and then, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4111). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 has not been turned on (S4111: No), then it is determined whether the setting change switch has been turned on (S4112).

  As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch has not been turned on (S4112: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the setting change switch has been turned on (S4112: Yes), the processing of the sixth embodiment will be described. The probability set value is updated in the same manner as in S4106 (see FIG. 55) (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. The probability set value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

  The loop processing of S4102 → S4103 → S4111: No → S4112 (and S4106) → S4102 is continuously executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by the processing of S4111 (S4111: Yes). If it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on by the process of S4111 (S4111: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is changed to the probability set value to be used in a game from now on. Is determined (S4107). When the probability set value is determined, the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared) as described in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, by turning on the RAM erasure switch 122 by the person involved in the hall to determine the probability setting value, the person concerned in the hall can strongly recognize that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased thereafter.

  After the processing in S4107, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4113). In the process of S4113, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off, or the setting key 501 may be determined. By detecting that the level of the signal output from is OFF, the setting key 501 may be determined to be OFF.

  As a result of the processing in S4113, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S4113: No), the processing in S4113 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off as a result of the processing in S4113 (S4113: Yes), the end of the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change processing is performed. To end. By the process of S4108, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value, The display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the seventh embodiment provides the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments can provide the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability set value can be updated, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting check mode, the probability set value can be confirmed. Was explained. Further, a case where the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined from the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the operation states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 when the power is turned on. explained.

  Here, if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the problem is how to start up when the power is turned on again. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment solves such a problem. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the abnormality of the RAM 203 (hereinafter, referred to as “RAM abnormality”), the fact that the setting change process has been performed, and the fact that the setting confirmation process has been performed are reported to the hall via the external output terminal 503. Output to the computer 600. The person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp, via the hall computer 600, a RAM abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, a fact that setting change processing or setting confirmation has been performed, and the like.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth and eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to seventh embodiments. Description is omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is that an external output terminal 503 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. The external output terminal 503 is configured to be connectable to the hall computer 600. The external output terminal 503 is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and by connecting a wiring connector (not shown) connected to the hall computer 600 to the external output terminal 503, Signals and data output from main controller 110 to hall computer 600 are relayed to hall computer 600.

  FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the internal work area 203x1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In this inner work area 203x1, probability set value data 203x11, change probability set value data 203c12, setting change flag 203x13, setting check flag 203x14, RAM abnormal flag 203x15, and RAM erase switch flag 203x16 are stored. At least stored.

  The probability set value data 203x11 is data indicating a probability set value set (confirmed) in the pachinko machine 10. Also in the present embodiment, like the sixth and seventh embodiments, “1” to “6” can be set as the probability set values, and the respective probability set values (“1” to “6”) are set. On the other hand, the random number value of the big hit and / or the random number value of the second symbol are stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol at the probability set value are determined by the number of jackpot random numbers and / or the number of hit random numbers of the second symbol determined for each probability set value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability set value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and the larger the probability set value (closer to 6), the larger the jackpot probability and / or Alternatively, the big random number value and / or the second random number value of the second symbol are determined for each probability setting value so that the winning probability of the second symbol is high.

  In the setting change process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability set value determined by the person related to the hall or the like is set to the probability set value data 203x11. Is stored in The pachinko machine 10 sets a jackpot random number value and / or a second symbol hit random value corresponding to the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 based on the ROM 202, and performs a jackpot lottery or a second symbol hit lottery. Execute

  Note that the jackpot random number value and / or the hit random number value of the second symbol are fixed, and the range and / or range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”) Alternatively, a range of random numbers to be generated for performing the second symbol winning lottery may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability at the probability set value are determined by the range of the jackpot random number and / or the range of the hit random number of the second symbol set for each probability set value. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 sets the range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery corresponding to the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 and / or the random number generated for performing the jackpot lottery of the second symbol. A range is set, and a random number for performing the jackpot lottery and / or a random number for performing the second symbol win lottery is generated.

  The update probability set value data 203x12 is a probability that is updated by a person related to the hall before the probability set value is determined in the setting change process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode. This is data indicating a set value. That is, the above-described probability set value data 203x11 is data indicating the determined probability set value, whereas the update probability set value data 203x12 is updated by a person related to the hall before the determination in the setting change process. Data indicating the probability setting value to be performed.

  Specifically, when the execution of the setting change process is started, first, the probability set value data 203x11 is stored as the update probability set value data 203x12. In other words, the probability setting value so far is set in the update probability setting value data 203x12, and starting from the probability setting value so far, the person related to the hall or the like updates the probability setting value. Each time the RAM erase switch 122 also serving as a switch for updating the probability set value is turned on, the update probability set value data 203x12 is incremented by one, and the update probability set value data 203x12 is "6". When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at this time, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated to "1". Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the update probability set value data 203x12 is stored as the probability set value data 203x11, and the probability set value updated by the person related to the hall or the like will be used in a future game. It is determined as a probability setting value.

  Here, in the setting change processing, the probability setting value is not updated using the probability setting value data 203x11, but the probability setting value is updated using the updating probability setting data 203x12 for the following reason. . That is, if the probability set value is updated using the probability set value data 203x11, if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change process, the probability set value that has been used for the game until that time is deleted by the update. Will be done. Therefore, even if the power is turned on again, the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the probability setting value is changed from the beginning, the probability setting value used for the game has disappeared. Disappears. In this case, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value data 203x11 before the power is turned off, that is, the setting change process can be restarted from the probability setting value in the middle of the setting change, but the probability setting value that has not been determined is stored. May give the illusion of a person involved in the hall.

  Further, depending on the relationship between the timing at which the person in charge of the hall or the like turned on the RAM erase switch 122 and the timing at which the power was turned off, an event that the probability set value data 203x11 was not updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 was turned on occurred. obtain. In this case, a difference occurs between the probability setting value that the hall-related persons and the like thought to have updated and the probability setting value stored by the pachinko machine 10, so that the hall-related persons and the like may feel distrust.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the probability set value is updated in the setting change process, the probability set value is updated using the update probability set value data 203x12. The probability setting value used so far can be stored in 203 × 11. As a result, even if the power is cut off during the setting change process, in the setting change process executed again, the probability set value used in the game up to now and remaining as the probability set value data 203x11 is updated. By saving the probability set value data 203x12, the probability set value can be updated again from the beginning. Therefore, the person related to the hall and the like can redo the update of the probability setting.

  The setting change flag 203x13 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting change process is being executed. The setting change flag 203x13 indicates that the setting change process is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the setting change process is not being executed when it is off. The setting change flag 203x13 is set to off at normal time. Then, when the execution of the setting change process is started, the setting change in-progress flag 203x13 is set to ON. When the updated probability set value is determined in the setting change processing and the execution of the setting change processing ends, the setting change flag 203x13 is turned off.

  By the way, if the setting change flag 203x13 is turned on in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power is turned on, the setting change process is being executed when the power was last cut off. That is, it indicates that the power has been cut off during the update of the probability set value by the setting change process. Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 62, a start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a start-up mode set in response to each start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change or the setting confirmation.

  As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is cut off during the setting change, a startup operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, turning on the power while the setting key 501 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is off. When the start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted (from the beginning) and executed instead of starting up in the normal mode.

  After the power was turned off during the setting change, a startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, a startup operation of turning on the power by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned off. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted (from the beginning) and executed instead of starting up in the RAM clear mode.

  After the power is turned off during the setting change, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, a start-up operation of turning on the power by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned on. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the start-up operation. Also in this case, the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) and executed.

  After the power is cut off during the setting change, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, a start-up operation of turning on the power while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is started again (from the beginning) and executed instead of starting up in the setting check mode.

  As described above, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not limited to the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode and other startup operations. Even if the operation is a raising operation, the setting change mode is set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning and executed. Thus, when the power is cut off during the setting change, the probability setting value can be changed from the beginning by the persons involved in the hall without fail when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, the change of the probability set value can be reliably performed by the person related to the hall, and the change can be determined. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the setting change, the persons involved in the hall can reliably update and confirm the probability set value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be safely operated. A change in the probability set value for 10 can be made.

  Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated when the power is cut off during the setting change and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability set value can be updated again from the beginning using the probability set value (probability set value data 203x11) used in the game up to now. Therefore, the person related to the hall and the like can redo the update of the probability setting.

  Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting confirmation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as the start-up mode. is there. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 indicates that the setting confirmation processing is being executed when the flag is ON, and indicates that the setting confirmation processing is not being executed when the flag is OFF. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to off at normal times. Then, when the execution of the setting confirmation processing is started, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON, and when the execution of the setting confirmation processing ends, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned OFF.

  By the way, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on in the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power was last shut down. That is, it indicates that the power has been turned off during the confirmation of the probability set value by the setting confirmation process. Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 62 again, a startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off during the setting check, a startup operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, turning on the power while keeping the setting key 501 off and the RAM erase switch 122 off. When the start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting check mode in which the setting check process is restarted (from the beginning) and executed instead of starting in the normal mode. Thus, after the power is turned off during the setting check, the probability set value can be checked even if the person involved in the hall starts up by operating in the normal mode. This allows the person involved in the hall or the like to confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being cut off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with confidence.

  After the power was cut off during the setting confirmation, a startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, a startup operation of turning on the power by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned off. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall. The fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned in the hall or the like wants to at least clearly clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of a person related to the hall or the like.

  After the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, a start-up operation of turning on the power by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned on. Also in this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the start-up operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person related to the hall or the like clearly wants to change the probability set value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of the hall-related personnel.

  After the power is cut off during the setting change, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, a start-up operation of turning on the power while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. Also in this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as in the start-up operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person related to the hall or the like wants to clearly confirm the probability set value again. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting check mode in which the setting check process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning), the start-up process can be performed according to the intention of the hall-related personnel.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is a flag for indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, such as that data stored in the RAM 203 has been destroyed. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 indicates that the RAM 203 has an abnormality when turned on, and indicates that there is no abnormality in the RAM 203 when turned off.

  The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is normally set to off. In the start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power is turned on, whether or not the power-off occurrence information to be stored at the time of the previous power-off is not present in the RAM 203, If the judgment value (check sum) is not normal or the probability setting value is not within the normal range (“1” to “6”), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203 and the RAM abnormality flag 203 × 15 is set to ON.

  When the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on, a notification of the RAM abnormality is issued to prompt a restart in the setting change mode, and the fact is notified to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. The MPU 201 of the control device 110 enters an infinite loop state. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode by the persons involved in the hall and the like, and the probability setting value is surely reset, and the RAM 203 is cleared, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Can be driven.

  The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is a flag indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the RAM erasing switch 122 is used to determine the start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 starts up, and to set the probability setting value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. Also used when updating. That is, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability set value is updated.

  At this time, when the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 has been turned on, and the probability set value is updated. The RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is used to determine whether or not the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state. That is, when the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erasure switch 122 is off and the RAM erasure switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is on. After making the determination, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

  Here, the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “1” before the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode and before it is determined whether the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state. Set to "ON". This is because when the state of the RAM erasing switch 122 is first determined from the OFF state to the ON state, the RAM erasing switch is still used as a start-up operation for starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off at this time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on. There is a possibility that the probability setting value may be updated by erroneously determining that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on for updating the probability setting value. Accordingly, persons involved in the hall and the like have a distrust of updating the probability set value even though the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on to update the probability set value.

  On the other hand, after the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to "1" before first determining whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. By setting “ON”, even if the RAM erasing switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the time of the first determination, it is set to the probability setting. It is possible to suppress that the probability setting value is updated by erroneously determining that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on for updating the value.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is performed upon power-on (S4201). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4202). In the present embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, a base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401 is executed every two milliseconds by a 2 millisecond timer interrupt. Execute as an opportunity. In the process in S4202, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. Further, when a random number value required for performing the jackpot lottery or the hit lottery is generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, in the process of S4202, the range of the generated random number value ( Set the maximum value). In the process of S4202, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. In the process of S4202, the main controller 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113.

  In particular, by permitting a 2 ms timer interrupt in the internal function register setting process, a 2 ms timer interrupt occurs every 2 ms and the base display control process is executed. Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  In the process of S4202, it is not always necessary to set the range (maximum value) of the random value. In the case where the range (maximum value) of the random number value is not set in the process of S4202, in the other startup process (S4221) described later, which is executed at the stage of shifting from the startup process to the main process, The range (maximum value) of the random number value not performed in the process of S4202 may be set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4203). As a result, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4203: Yes), it means that the process at the time of the previous power-off is normally completed, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and calculated. It is determined whether or not the determined RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether or not the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (S4204). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value. However, the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

  As a result of the processing in S4204, if it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (S4204: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal, and at least the RAM determination value is used to calculate the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the stored data (information) is normally held, it is next determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4205). Here, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range because, when the power was turned off last time, although the processing related to the power cutoff was performed normally, the probability set value is determined at that stage. This is because it may be broken and out of the normal range. The process of S4205 is performed to reliably detect such an abnormality in the probability set value.

  If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4205: Yes), it is determined whether the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4206). If the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4206: Yes), it means that the setting change process was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the power supply was being updated while the probability setting value was being updated by the setting change process. Indicates that was rejected. Therefore, in this case, the processing shifts to the processing of S4213, and the setting change processing is executed (S4213).

  As a result, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not limited to the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, and other startup operations Even if it is an operation, a setting change mode can be set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning and executed. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the setting change, the probability setting value can be changed from the beginning by the persons involved in the hall without fail when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, the change of the probability set value can be reliably performed by the person related to the hall, and the change can be determined. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the setting change, the persons involved in the hall can reliably update and confirm the probability set value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be safely operated. A change in the probability set value for 10 can be made.

  Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated when the power is cut off during the setting change and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability set value can be updated again from the beginning using the probability set value (probability set value data 203x11) used in the game up to now. Therefore, the person related to the hall and the like can redo the update of the probability setting. The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4206, if the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4206: No), it means that the setting change processing was not being executed when the power was last turned off, and then the hall is changed. As a process of confirming a start-up operation performed when a person concerned turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4207). In the process of S4207, since the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process described later is not executed, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed by the switch state read process of the timer interrupt process. The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input / output port 205 instead of making a determination using the read data.

  If the result of the processing in S4207 is that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on to confirm further the start-up operation (S4207). S4208). In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined only whether the setting key 501 is in the ON state. However, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting key 501 is in the ON state and the door is opened. It may be determined whether or not the switch is on.

  As a result of the processing in S4208, if the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4208: N0), since the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state, the person involved in the hall starts up in the normal mode. It means that you operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON (S4209). As a result, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209: Yes), the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the confirmation of the probability set value by the setting confirmation processing. Indicates that the power was turned off during. In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability set value can be confirmed.

  As described above, even when the hall-related person performs the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode as the start-up operation, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the normal mode, and the setting confirmation process is started from the beginning ( The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode to be executed again from the beginning. Thus, after the power is turned off during the setting check, the probability set value can be checked even if the person involved in the hall starts up by operating in the normal mode. This allows the person involved in the hall or the like to confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being cut off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with confidence. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4209, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is off (S4209: No), it means that the setting confirmation processing was not being executed when the power was last shut down. . The process of S4209 is executed when the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be OFF in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), that is, the setting change process is performed when the power is last turned off. Even if it was not running.

  Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode is set to the normal mode indicated by the start-up operation by the person in charge of the hall or the like, and the setting confirmation process in S4210 and the process in S4211 described later are skipped, and other start-up processes are executed. Thereafter (S4214), the process proceeds to the main process. In addition, as other startup processing, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the present embodiment, similarly to the sixth or seventh embodiment, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) for performing main control of a game is executed with a 4 ms timer interrupt generated every 4 ms. . By permitting a 4 millisecond timer interrupt in the processing of S4214, the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds.

  In the main process of the present embodiment, only the updating process of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the updating process of the variation type counter CS1 (S702 and S703 in FIG. 17) are executed during the loop. Execute an infinite loop processing. FIG. 17 shows a power outage monitoring process executed in the main process in the first embodiment and the like (a process of monitoring whether there is information on occurrence of power interruption, and executing a process related to power interruption when there is information on occurrence of power interruption. Steps S701 and S704 to S707) are executed in the timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the ON state as a result of the processing in S4208 (S4208: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is OFF and the setting key 501 is in the ON state. Means that the startup operation was performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4208 is performed when the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be off in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), that is, the setting change process when the power was last shut down. Is not running. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko machine 10 is operated in the setting check mode in which the hall-related person or the like has started up, regardless of whether the setting check process was being performed when the power was last turned off. In order to start up, the process proceeds to S4210, and a setting confirmation process is executed (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability set value can be confirmed. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the setting confirmation processing (S4210) ends, an external output processing is executed (S4211). In this external output processing, information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed or that the probability set value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp that the setting confirmation processing is executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, when the probability setting value is incorrectly displayed, it can be quickly grasped. After the external output process has been executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4207, which is a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the hall-related person or the like turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10, ( S4207: Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on to confirm the start-up operation (S4212). In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined only whether the setting key 501 is in the ON state. However, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting key 501 is in the ON state and the door is opened. It may be determined whether or not the switch is on.

  As a result of the processing in S4212, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), the RAM erasure switch 122 is ON and the setting key 501 is in the ON state. It means that the operation was raised. When the start-up operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting check flag 203x14 is on, that is, whether or not the setting check processing was being executed when the power was last turned off. Regardless of this, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode.

  Therefore, as a result of the processing in S4212, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), the setting change processing is executed (S4213). By the setting change processing, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by a person related to the hall or the like, the probability set value is updated and the setting key 501 is turned off. Then, the updated probability set value is determined as the probability set value to be used for the game from now on, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Thus, after changing the probability set value, the gaming machine can be newly started with the changed probability set value. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, the fact that the setting key 501 was turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 was turned on means that a person involved in the hall is in charge. Etc. clearly indicate the intention to change the probability set value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of the hall-related personnel.

  When the setting change process (S4213) ends, an external output process is executed (S4214). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or the probability set value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp that the setting change process has been executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability set value has been changed. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illegally changed, it can be quickly grasped. After the external output process has been executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing in S4212 (S4212: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal by referring to whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on. (S4215). Here, the RAM erase switch 122 is determined to be ON by the processing of S4207 (S4207: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined to be OFF by the processing of S4212 (S4212: No), and the processing of S4215 is performed. If executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the process of S4215 (S4215: No).

  In this case, in the process of S4206, since the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be off (S4206: No), the case where the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last shut down. is there. Therefore, the RAM erase switch 122 is determined to be on by the processing of S4207 (S4207: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined to be off by the processing of S4212 (S4212: No), and the RAM abnormality is determined by the processing of S4215. If it is determined that this is not the case (S4215: No), it means that the person involved in the hall has started up in the RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last turned off. As shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off. Therefore, a RAM clear process is executed (S4216).

  In this RAM clearing process, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) of the data stored in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared), The accessory ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) stored in the outside work area 203y1 are retained without being deleted. A new game can be started by deleting data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, even if the RAM clear processing is executed, the probability set value data 203x11 is held, so that the game can be continued with the probability set value determined before the RAM clear processing is executed.

  Here, as described above, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, there is no RAM abnormality, and the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode is performed. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall. The fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned in the hall or the like wants to at least clearly clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of a person related to the hall or the like.

  When the RAM clear processing in S4216 is completed, other start-up processing is executed (S4221), and the flow shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S4203 that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4203: No), the calculated RAM determination value is determined by the processing of S4204 to be the same as the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4204: No), the process of S4205 determines that the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4205: No). Is satisfied, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on (S4217), and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to confirm the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall and the like. Is determined (S4218). In the process of S4218, similarly to the process of S4207, the input / output port 205 is directly accessed to read the state of the RAM erase switch 122.

  As a result of the processing in S4218, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is on (S4218: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described S4212, and further, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on. A determination is made (S4212). As a result, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), it means that the person related to the hall or the like has performed the start-up operation in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4212: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in accordance with the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall or the like, the flow shifts to S4213 to execute the above-described setting change processing.

  Here, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the RAM can be cleared after resetting the probability setting value again. Therefore, a new game can be started with the newly set normal probability set value. The RAM clear flag turns off the RAM abnormality flag 203x15. Therefore, thereafter, main controller 110 can control the game without executing the process related to the RAM abnormality.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off as a result of the processing of S4218 (S4218: No), even if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is on as a result of the processing of S4218, the processing of S4212 is performed. As a result of the processing, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4218: Yes, S4212: No), among the RAM abnormalities, the person in charge of the hall etc. performs the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode. This means that the startup operation has been performed in any of the startup modes.

  In this case, the flow shifts to the above-described processing of S4215, and in the processing of S4215, it is always determined that the RAM is determined to be abnormal (S4215: Yes), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4219. In the process of S4219, a RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4219). In this RAM abnormality setting process, a process for performing notification regarding the RAM abnormality is executed. For example, a sound lamp for turning off the power once and prompting to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is provided by sound output from the sound output device 226 and / or display on the third symbol display device 81. A command is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Then, an external output process for notifying the hall computer 600 of the RAM abnormality via the external output terminal 503 is executed (S4220), and other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process proceeds to the main process. I do. Since the hall computer 600 is notified that the RAM is abnormal, the person in charge of the hall or the like can surely grasp that the RAM abnormality has occurred without noticing the notification from the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, although the details will be described later, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on due to the occurrence of the RAM abnormality, in the timer interruption processing, the main control regarding the game is not executed except for the random number update processing and the power failure monitoring processing. And That is, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 shifts to the main process, since the main control relating to the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt process, the MPU 201 enters an infinite loop state. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is re-started in the setting change mode after the hall related person or the like grasps the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting process in S4219 or the external output process in S4220, and the probability set value is securely set. By resetting and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to operate normally.

  As described above, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the person related to the hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Then, in order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the elimination of the RAM abnormality always involves a hall (store manager) managing the dedicated key. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hole side from resolving the RAM abnormality without knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

  Next, details of the setting change process (S4213), which is one process of the startup process (FIG. 63), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4213). The setting change process (S4213) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and confirming a change in the probability setting value from a person related to the hall or the like.

  In this setting change process, first, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4301). By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt, a timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) described later is executed upon occurrence of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt. Although the details will be described later, when the power failure monitoring process is executed during the timer interruption process and the power is cut off during the execution of the setting change process, the state at that time is held in the RAM 203 by the power failure monitoring process. As it is, it is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely cut off.

  Next, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to ON (S4302), and necessary initial settings are performed at the start of the setting change (S4303). In the process of S4303, for example, an initial value is set in the RAM area used in the setting change process. The clearing (off setting) of the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 accompanying the execution of the setting change process when the RAM is abnormal may be performed in the process of S4303 or may be performed by a RAM clear process (S4313) described later. Good. As described above, when the RAM is abnormal, the hall-related person is urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. When the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is reset and the RAM 203 is cleared, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Therefore, by clearing (off setting) the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 along with the execution of the setting change process, it can be shown that the RAM abnormality has been eliminated.

  Next, the probability setting value data 203x11 indicating the probability setting value used so far is read and stored as the update probability setting value data 203x12 (S4303). The update of the probability set value is performed not by using the probability set value data 203x11 but by using the update probability set value data 203x12. The update probability set value data 203x12 is displayed on the base display device 401. The display mode at this time may be any one of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

  Next, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set to ON (S4305). Note that the on setting of the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 may be executed in the process of S4303. During the period from when the setting change process is executed to when the process of S4309 (determination process of whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on) described later is executed for the first time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned on. The settings need only be made.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability set value stored in the update probability set value data 203x12 is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4306), and is not within the normal range, that is, abnormal. If the probability set value has been reached (S4306: No), the update probability set value data 203x12 is changed to the initial value (S4307), and the process proceeds to S4308. The initial value may be “1” which is the minimum value of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “4” which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Or the maximum value of the probability setting value may be “6”. Accordingly, even when the probability set value data 203x11 is destroyed due to a RAM abnormality, or when the update probability set value data 203x12 is destroyed while updating the probability set value, the update probability set value data 203x12 is not used. By saving the probability set value in the normal range as, the probability set value in the normal range can be updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability set value stored in the update probability set value data 203x12 is in the range of “1” to “6” (S4306: Yes) as a result of the process of S4306, the process of S4307 Are skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S4308.

  In the process of S4308, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4308). In the processing of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off.

  This is because, as described above, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode in which the setting key 501 is turned off when the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process, This is because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning). In the process of S4308, when it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off only by checking that the level of the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine is started by the start-up operation in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode. When the setting key 501 is turned on and the execution of the setting change process is started as described above, since the setting key 501 is in the OFF state from the beginning, an affirmative determination is immediately made in the process of S4308, and the probability set value cannot be updated. However, there is a problem that the probability set value is determined as described later.

  On the other hand, when it is detected in the process of S4308 that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge detection), the setting key 501 is turned off. By making the determination, it is possible to avoid determining that the setting key 501 has been turned off unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, after the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the start-up operation in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode and the setting change process is executed, the setting key 501 is once turned on. Since the probability set value can be determined only by setting the state to the off state, the problem that the probability set value is determined without updating the probability set value can be avoided.

  As a result of the processing in S4308, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S4308: No), it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4309). In the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 has been turned on, and the probability set value is updated.

  As described above, the RAM erasing switch 122 is used to determine the start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 starts up, and updates the probability set value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. It is also used when That is, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability set value is updated. Therefore, as a result of the processing in S4309, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on (S4309: Yes), the update probability set value data 203x12 is updated (S4310), and the processing returns to S4306. In the process of S4010, specifically, the update probability set value data 203x12 is updated by adding 1, and when the update probability set value data 203x12 is “6”, the update probability set value data 203x12 is set to “1”. Update to

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 has not been turned on as a result of the process of S4309 (S4309: No), the process of S4310 is skipped, and the process returns to S4306.

  Thus, in the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on. Specifically, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 for setting the probability and the output of the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 read in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 66) described later. When the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on. Then, after making the determination, in the process of S4309, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

  Here, as described above, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “ON” by the processing of S4305 and the like before the processing of S4309 is first performed after the execution of the setting change processing is started. This is because there is a possibility that the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the stage of executing the process of S4309 first. If the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is off, the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erasure switch 122 is on, so that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on to update the probability set value. There is a possibility that the probability setting value may be erroneously determined to have been updated. Accordingly, persons involved in the hall and the like have a distrust of updating the probability set value even though the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on to update the probability set value.

  On the other hand, after the execution of the setting change process is started and before the process of S4309 is performed for the first time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “ON”, so that the pachinko machine can perform the first determination. Even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the 10 in the setting change mode, it is erroneously determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on for updating the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the probability set value from being updated.

  The loop processing of S4306 to S4310 is continued to be executed until it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on by the processing of S4308 (S4308: Yes). If it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned on by the processing of S4308 (S4308: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is stored as the probability setting value data 203x11 (S4311). As a result, the probability set value updated by the person in charge of the hall or the like is determined as a probability set value to be used in a future game.

  Next, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is prohibited (S4312), and the execution of the timer interrupt process is stopped. Then, RAM clear processing is executed (S4313), and the setting change processing ends.

  In the process of S4313, of the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) is deleted (cleared), and While the data 203s for the ratio of belongings stored in the outside work area 203y1 is deleted, the data 203r for the base value and the data 203t for the error (see FIG. 53) are held without being deleted. A new game can be started by deleting data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, since the probability set value data 203x11 is held, a game can be performed with the determined probability set value.

  Further, by this RAM clear processing, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to off. Therefore, if the power is not turned off during the execution of the setting change processing, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to off, while if the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change processing, the setting change flag 203x13 is turned on. Will remain. Therefore, if the setting change flag 203x13 is on in the startup processing shown in FIG. 63, it can be determined that the setting change processing was being executed when the power was last turned off.

  Further, if the probability set value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes. Therefore, if the accessory ratio data 203s based on the probability set value before the change remains, if the accessory ratio data 203s based on the changed probability set value is left. The ratio cannot be calculated correctly. In the setting change RAM clearing process, by deleting the accessory ratio data 203s, it is possible to correctly calculate the accessory ratio based on the changed probability set value.

  On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, in the setting change RAM clear processing, the base value data 203r is held and the past base value and the base value are calculated. By retaining necessary information, it is possible to detect unfair acts performed in the past without being concealed. Also, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the fraudulent person who caused the error starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history is stored. It cannot be erased and concealment of fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  When the setting change process ends, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 ends, and the display of the base value on the base display device 401 starts.

  Next, the details of the setting confirmation process (S4210), which is one of the startup processes (FIG. 63), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (S4215). The setting confirmation process (S4215) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the currently set probability setting value on the base display device 401.

  In this setting confirmation processing, first, as in the processing of S4301 of the setting change processing, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4401). By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt, a timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) described later is executed upon occurrence of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt. Although the details will be described later, when the power failure monitoring process is executed during the timer interruption process and the power is cut off during the execution of the setting change process, the state at that time is held in the RAM 203 by the power failure monitoring process. As it is, it is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely cut off.

  Next, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON (S4402), for example, as shown in any of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2). In the display mode, when the display of the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 on the base display device 401 is started, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4403). In the process of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off.

  This is because, as described above, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode in which the setting key 501 is turned off when the power is turned off during the execution of the setting confirmation process, the pachinko machine 10 is not operated. This is because the configuration is such that the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (from the beginning). In the process of S4403, the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the start-up operation in the normal mode when it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off only by checking that the level of the setting key 501 is off. When the setting confirmation processing is started as described above, since the setting key 501 is in the OFF state from the beginning, an affirmative judgment is immediately made in the processing of S4403, and the confirmation of the probability setting value ends instantaneously. The problem arises.

  On the other hand, when it is detected in the process of S4403 that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on-state to the off-state (edge detection), the setting key 501 is turned off. By making the determination, it is possible to avoid determining that the setting key 501 has been turned off unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, after the power is turned off during the execution of the setting confirmation process, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the start-up operation in the normal mode and the setting confirmation process is executed, the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned on. Since the confirmation of the probability set value can be completed only by turning off, the problem that the confirmation of the probability set value ends instantaneously can be avoided.

  If the setting key 501 is not in the off state as a result of the processing in S4403 (S4403: No), S4403 is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting key 501 is turned off. During this time, the display of the probability set value is continuously performed on the base display device 401. When the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403: Yes), when the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is terminated and the display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started, the setting is being checked. The flag 203x14 is cleared to off (S4404). As a result, if the power is not turned off during the execution of the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to off, while if the power is turned off during the execution of the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned off. It remains on. Therefore, in the startup process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on, it can be determined that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off.

  Then, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is prohibited (S4405), the execution of the timer interrupt processing is stopped, and the setting confirmation processing ends.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process for performing main control of a game, and is executed by a 4 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds.

  In this timer interruption process, first, a random number update process used for a big hit lottery or a second symbol hit lottery is executed (S4501), and then a power failure monitoring process is executed (S4502). In the power failure monitoring process, a process is performed to monitor whether or not there is power-off occurrence information, and to execute a process related to power-off when there is power-off occurrence information (processing corresponding to S701 and S704 to S707 in FIG. 17). ).

  Next, with reference to the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is off and no RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 to S4515 is executed as normal game processing.

  That is, a trial test information setting process for setting trial test information is executed (S4504), and then, a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a solenoid 209, and a base display device control circuit 402 connected to the input / output port 205. , The first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the external output terminal 503, etc., perform a port output process for outputting an output signal set in the previous timer interrupt process. The process is executed (S4505).

  Next, the state of various sensors, switches 208 and the like are read (S4506). The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is also read by the processing in S4506. Next, subtraction processing of various timers used for game control is performed (S4507), and then processing for detecting improper behavior due to impact, magnets, or the like based on an error signal from the payout control device 111 is executed (S4507). S4508).

  Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of a sphere by the sphere launch unit 112a is executed (S4509), and then a payout command for notifying the number of balls paid out by the payout control device 111 is issued to the payout control device 111. A payout command receiving process is received (S4510), and then a payout command transmitting process for instructing the payout control device 111 to pay out a ball is executed (S4511).

  Next, a special figure / special electric power control process relating to a variable display of the first symbol (third symbol, special symbol) and a big hit is executed (S4512), and then a general symbol / variable display relating to the variable display and the hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed. The ordinary power control process is performed (S4513). Then, display LED data setting processing of the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and the like is executed (S4514), and output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. An external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be performed is executed (S4515), and the timer interrupt process ends.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4503, if the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and it is determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: Yes), the processing in S4504 to S4515, which is a normal game processing, is skipped. Then, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  As described above, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on by detecting the occurrence of the RAM abnormality by the start-up process of FIG. 63, in the timer interruption process, the main processes related to the game except the random number update process and the power failure monitoring process are performed. Control is not executed. As a result, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 enters the infinite loop state since the main control relating to the game is not executed even in the timer interruption process after the transition to the main process. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is re-started in the setting change mode after making the hall-related persons grasp the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting processing in S4219 and the external output processing in S4220 of the start-up processing, and the probability setting is performed. Clearly resetting the value and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203 × 15 allow the pachinko machine 10 to operate normally.

  As described above, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the person related to the hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Then, in order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the elimination of the RAM abnormality always involves a hall (store manager) managing the dedicated key. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hole side from resolving the RAM abnormality without knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, in the timer interrupt processing, even when a RAM abnormality has occurred, the random number updating processing and the power failure monitoring processing are executed. By executing the random number update process, the random number can be continuously generated while the power is on. In addition, by executing the power failure monitoring process, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, the occurrence of a power failure can be monitored, and when the power failure has occurred, a process corresponding to the power failure can be reliably executed. In particular, when the pachinko machine 10 has been started up in the setting change mode in the situation where the RAM abnormality is detected, the setting change processing is executed in the start-up processing. If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change processing, the setting change flag 203x13 is held in the RAM 203 while being turned on. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up next time, Regardless of the start-up operation, the setting change process can be restarted from the beginning.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the eighth embodiment achieves the effects described above. Moreover, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to seventh embodiments can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a setting key 501 is provided on the front side of the main control device 110 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10). Thus, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed in a plurality of stages (for example, six stages of set values “1” to “6”).

  The setting key 501 is provided so as to be exposed in the direction of the back of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, and the locking of the inner frame 12 is released by a person involved in the hall or the like. When the inner frame 12 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with the rotation of the inner frame 12. With this configuration, when the person in charge of the hall wants to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10, the key for changing the setting can be immediately inserted into the setting key 501 by rotating the inner frame 12. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed quickly.

  The hall is provided with an island facility incorporating a ball automatic supply device or the like in a closed predetermined space, and by attaching an outer frame of a pachinko machine to both sides of the island facility in the long side direction, the island facility is installed. A plurality of pachinko machines can be installed in the system. Then, outside the opening hours of the hall, the persons involved in the hall release the lock between the inner frame and / or the front frame and the outer frame of each of the pachinko machines installed on the island facilities, and attach them to the outer frame (island facilities). On the other hand, the inner frame and / or the front frame are opened, and setting change work and maintenance work of each pachinko machine are performed.

  However, since the setting key 501 is configured to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, for example, in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is installed on one long side of the hall island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed. The inner frame of another pachinko machine installed on the other long side (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10) other than the long side of the pachinko machine 10 is opened for some reason (for example, fraud, etc.). If so, the setting key 501 provided to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be directly operated. As a result, even if the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is not opened, the pachinko machine on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, and the setting key 501 of the pachinko machine 10 is directly operated. When the setting key 501 is illegally operated, the setting contents may be changed, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. In addition, for example, illegal operations such as unauthorized replacement of the main control device 110 due to cutting of the sealing unit 100c connecting the box base 100a and the box cover 100b of the board box 100 are performed, and an unexpected disadvantage occurs in the hall. May cause.

  Here, as in a slot machine, a structure in which the entire back side of the pachinko machine 10 is covered with a housing structure to prevent improper operation of the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be considered. In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, unlike a slot machine, it is necessary to replenish balls from the upper side of the island facility and to discharge out balls, and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a housing. If the ball is covered with the structure, a complicated structure for replenishment and discharge of the ball is required, and the manufacturing cost may increase due to the housing structure and the replenishment and discharge structure.

  Also, in the island facility, when the wiring connection with the card sanding device arranged adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 and the connection wiring with the power supply are considered, the back structure of the pachinko machine 10, particularly the back of the pachinko machine 10 The structure on the left side is desirably configured to be open to some extent, and is preferably a structure that is easily connected to the above devices and the like by wiring.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, a protective cover member 140 for covering the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. In this situation, the protection cover member 140 is configured so that the setting key 501 is not exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting key 501 from being directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover member 140 when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. It is possible to prevent an improper operation such as an illegal operation of the setting key 501.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the sealing unit 100c provided on the left side of the back surface of the board box 100 that houses the main control device 110 (the right side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front) is covered with a protective cover member 140. By configuring the sealing unit 100c so that it cannot be in direct contact with the sealing unit 100c, it is difficult to perform unauthorized operations such as cutting the sealing unit 100c and replacing the main control device 110. Can be prevented.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to eighth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is that the outer frame 11 is configured by combining a wooden plate and an aluminum plate, and the outer frame 11 11 is that a protective cover member 140 is attached. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment.

  The outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment has an upper plate 11a made of a wooden plate as an upper side, a lower plate 11b also made of a wooden plate as a lower side, and is more rigid than the wooden plate. The left side plate 11c made of an aluminum plate material having a high height is defined as a left side, and the right side plate 11d also formed of an aluminum plate material is formed as a right side with four fixed sides.

  By forming the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 with an aluminum plate material, even if the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d are formed to be thinner than a conventional wooden plate material, Since the rigidity of the entire machine 11 can be maintained, a design space in the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  Further, the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d are formed in a U-shape in cross section when viewed from above, and are directed toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 at the side surface portion located on the side surface of the pachinko machine 10 and at the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at the side surface portion. The pachinko machine 10 includes a front portion that is extended and formed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 and a rear surface portion that extends toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10.

  The pachinko machine 10 drives the outer frame 11 (that is, the pachinko machine 10) by driving a nail into an island facility (not shown) from the inner wall side of the upper plate 11a and the lower plate 11b of the outer frame 11. Is configured to be fixed to the island facility.

  The protective cover member 140 is fixed to a right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 by a fixing screw 11g (see FIG. 69) described later, and is used to control a setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 72) described later. It is configured to cover together.

  The base display device 401 and the error display button 502 of the main control device 110 are not covered by the protective cover member 140 and are exposed toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10. This is because the base display device 401 and the error display button 502 do not change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 and are used to display the status of the pachinko machine 10, and are unlikely to be fraudulent. Therefore, it is not necessary to cover with the protective cover member 140. With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 can be formed with a minimum necessary size, and the manufacturing cost required for the protective cover member 140 can be reduced.

  Here, the details of the protection cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68A is a left front perspective view of the protection cover member 140 according to the ninth embodiment as viewed from the front left side, and FIG. 68B is a view of the protection cover member 140 according to the ninth embodiment viewed from the right rear side. FIG.

  The protective cover member 140 is formed entirely of a transparent resin (for example, a polycarbonate resin), and includes a cover attaching portion 150 attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, and a cover attaching portion 150. An upright portion 160 extending and formed in the back direction (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10, and a rightward direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 from the tip side of the upright portion 160 (that is, the back side (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10). (I.e., a cover 170 extending from the pachinko machine 10 to the left as viewed from the front).

  The cover mounting portion 150 includes a mounting surface 151 that is in surface contact with a part of the inner wall surface of the side surface of the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, an upper mounting hole 152 and a lower mounting hole 153 that are formed in the mounting surface 151. And a curved portion 154 formed in a shape to abut along the inner wall shape of the right side plate 11d.

  The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are formed in the mounting surface 151 so that a fixing screw 11g (see FIG. 69) described later can be inserted thereinto. The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are located at positions where they can be respectively mounted on a cover upper mounting hole 11e and a cover lower mounting hole 11f (see FIG. 69) which are formed in the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and are described later. Is provided.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 71, a manner of attaching the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 will be described. FIG. 69 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 (excluding the front frame 14) in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a front left perspective view for explaining a method of attaching the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a front view of the outer frame 11 and the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 69 shows a state in which the front frame 14 has been removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIGS. 70 and 71 show that the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have been removed from the outer frame 11. And the description thereof is omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 69, a cover mounting hole, which is a through hole for mounting a protective cover member 140, is provided in the middle part of the side surface of the right side plate 11 d constituting the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10. 11e and a cover lower mounting hole 11f are formed by drilling, and fixing screws 11g are screwed into the respective holes.

  70, the upper cover mounting hole 11e and the lower cover mounting hole 11f are formed at positions corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 of the protective cover member 140, respectively. Specifically, an upper cover mounting hole 11e is formed at a position corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152, and a lower cover mounting hole 11f is formed at a position corresponding to the lower mounting hole 153. Then, with the (outer) mounting surface 151 and the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 abutting on the inner side of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d, the outer side of the right side plate 11d (the right rear side in FIG. 70). ), The fixing screws 11g are screwed into the cover upper mounting hole 11e and the upper mounting hole 152, and are also screwed into the cover lower mounting hole 11f and the lower mounting hole 153, whereby the outer frame 11 ( The protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d).

  Here, the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 is formed in a shape that comes into contact with the inner wall shape of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d. The rear surface of the right side plate 11d is made of aluminum. Therefore, in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner wall of the side surface and the rear surface of the right side plate 11 d abuts on the curved portion 154, and the right side plate 11 d and the protective cover member 140 come into contact with each other. There is no gap (space). Thus, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting By making it impossible to directly operate the fixing screw 11g inserted into the hole 153 and the cover lower mounting hole 11f, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being detached from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Can be.

  Further, a card sanding device (not shown) is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 in the island facility, and usually, a gap is not formed between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. Is configured. Therefore, by configuring so that the fixing screw 11g cannot be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being detached from the side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, it is difficult to remove the protection cover member 140 from the back side or the side surface of the pachinko machine 10, and by directly covering the setting key 501 by covering the setting key 501 with the protection cover member 140 when the inner frame 12 is closed. Can not be operated.

  Further, the curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of a resin material constituting the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the curved portion 154 causes the protective cover member 140 to be slightly bent in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. With such a configuration, for example, even when the main controller 110 (see FIG. 69) comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 and receives an impact due to the momentum at the time of closing when the inner frame 12 is closed, Since the bending portion 154 is bent by the elastic force and absorbs the impact, the protection cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Here, returning to FIG. 68A and FIG. 68B again, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 will be described. The protection cover member 140 is provided with an upright portion 160 extending from the cover mounting portion 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in addition to the cover mounting portion 150, and a front end side of the upright portion 160 (that is, A cover 170 is formed in a cantilever shape from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. The upright portion 160 is provided with an upright cover wall 161, an upright upper cover portion 162, an upright lower cover portion 163, an upright inner rib 164, and an upright outer rib 165. Further, the cover 170 is provided with a cover plate 171, a cover-side protrusion 172, a key cover 173, and a cover outer rib 174.

  Hereafter, the configuration of the upright portion 160 will be described in detail. The upright cover wall 161 is formed so as to extend continuously from the curved portion 154 of the cover attaching portion 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The upright cover wall 161 covers the right side surface of the main control device 110 in front view (left side surface in rear view), and is provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both shown in FIG. 72) described later. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized act from the right side of the front view 110 (left side of the back view).

  The upright upper cover portion 162 includes an upper inner cover portion 162a and an upper outer cover portion 162b. The upper inner cover portion 162a extends horizontally from the entire upper portion of the upright cover wall 161 and a portion of the upper portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction in which the main control device 110 is provided). It is formed. The upper outer cover portion 162b extends horizontally from the entire upper portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (in a direction in which the main controller 110 is not provided).

  By forming the upright upper cover portion 162 such that the upper inner cover portion 162a and the upper outer cover portion 162b are flush with each other, the right upper portion of the main controller 110 as viewed from the front (the upper left portion as viewed from the back) is formed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the upper right side in front view (upper left side in rear view) of the main control device 110 that is covered and provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both shown in FIG. 72) described later. The upper outer cover portion 162b can also be used, for example, in a case where wire misbehavior is performed from the left side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and when the wire is transmitted upward from the outside of the upright cover wall 161, the wire is Collides with the upper outer cover portion 162b, thereby preventing the wire from entering.

  The upright lower cover portion 163 includes a lower inner cover portion 163a (see FIG. 68A) and a lower outer cover portion 163b (see FIG. 68B). The lower inner cover portion 163a extends horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction in which the main control device 110 is disposed). Is formed. Further, the lower outer cover portion 163b is formed to extend horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control device 110 is not provided).

  The lower inner cover 163a has a larger area than the upper inner cover 162a. This is because the arrangement position of the main control device 110 is closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 67), and the main control device 110 is accessed from the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 from above. For this reason, a person who misbehaves with respect to the main control device 110 often performs misconduct by infiltrating a wire or the like from the lower side of the back of the pachinko machine 10 in many cases. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned misconduct, the area of the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover portion 163a forms the main control device 110 at the lower right portion in front view (lower left portion in rear view). The gap between the control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 is configured to be as small as possible.

  As described above, by forming the standing lower cover portion 163 such that the lower inner cover portion 163a and the lower outer cover portion 163b are flush with each other, the right lower portion in the front view (the lower left portion in the rear view) of the main control device 110 is formed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the lower right side in front view (lower left side in rear view) of the main control device 110 that is covered and provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both shown in FIG. 72) described later. Further, the lower outer cover portion 163b allows, for example, when the wire is transmitted downward from the outside of the upright cover wall 161 in a case where an illegal act is performed by a wire, the wire is connected to the lower outer cover portion 163b. The collision can prevent the wire from entering.

  The upright inner rib 164 (see FIG. 68 (a)) is formed in a rib shape in which the amount of protrusion gradually increases toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the middle portion of the upright cover wall 161 inside the pachinko machine 10. I have. The upright inner ribs 164 function as reinforcing ribs of the upright cover wall 161 to prevent the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged. In particular, other parts (for example, main control) disposed on the pachinko machine 10 can be used. The degree of reinforcement of the upright cover wall 161 is increased by gradually increasing the amount of protrusion of the upright inner rib 164 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 within a range not in contact with the device 110).

  The upright outer rib 165 (see FIG. 68 (b)) is formed in a rib shape in which the amount of protrusion gradually decreases toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the middle portion of the upright cover wall 161 outside the pachinko machine 10, It is formed at a position that is paired inside / outside with the upright inside rib 164 described above. The upright outer rib 165 functions as a reinforcing rib of the upright cover wall 161 similarly to the upright inner rib 164, and prevents the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged.

  The upstanding outer ribs 165 are formed so as to have the same protrusion amounts as the upper outer cover portion 162b and the lower outer cover portion 163b described above, and the pachinko machine 10 to which the protective cover member 140 is attached is installed in the island facility. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so as not to be an obstacle when the pachinko machine 10 is installed, for example, the standing outer rib 165 is caught by the island facility.

  Hereafter, the configuration of the cover 170 will be described in detail. The cover plate 171 is configured such that the plate surface of the cover plate 171 extends in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 from the above-described upright portion 160 (the upright cover wall 161, the upright upper cover portion 162, the upright lower cover portion 163, and the upright inner rib 164). Each direction is extended to a position that is equal to or greater than the setting unit 100d (see FIG. 72) of the main control device 110 and less than the base display device 401 (error display button 502).

  On the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 (that is, the side facing the main control device 110; the same applies hereinafter), a position corresponding to a setting unit 100d (see FIG. 72) of the main control device 110, which will be described later, The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed to project in a square shape toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a part of the cover plate 171 surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172 is configured as a key cover portion 173.

  The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed so as to enter a space formed by a setting-portion side wall 100e of the setting portion 100d and a case-side protrusion 100g, which will be described later, and has a protrusion amount enough to abut the setting-portion bottom surface 100f. Is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71, the protective cover member 140 attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 is installed such that the plate surface of the cover plate 171 of the cover unit 170 described later faces the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Is done. The cover plate 171 has a setting section 100d (see FIG. 74) provided in the board box 100 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. 110 "in some cases), a cover-side projection 172 formed in a square shape on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a key surrounded by the cover-side projection 172. And a cover portion 173. Therefore, the key cover portion 173 of the protection cover member 140 and the setting portion 100d of the main control device 110 are configured to face each other.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the configuration of the setting unit 100d in the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140, and the key cover 173 will be described. FIG. 72 is a front view of the board box 100 of the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment, FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line AA in FIG. 67, and FIG. 5 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of main controller 110 and protective cover member 140 in region B of FIG. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 72 omits illustration of parts that are not related to the present invention, and FIG. 73 illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Description is also omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 72, the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment has a main control device 110 housed in a board box 100 in which a box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and a box cover 100b are combined. A setting key 501 used to change the set probability set value or check the set probability set value is provided on the main board constituting the control device 110.

  The box cover 100b is provided with a setting portion 100d at a position corresponding to the setting key 501. The setting portion 100d is provided on the box cover 100b from the outermost surface side (that is, the back surface of the pachinko machine 10). The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed to be recessed by the amount of protrusion of the cover 172 so as to accommodate the entire cover-side protrusion 172. As a part constituting the setting portion 100d, a setting portion side wall 100e, a setting portion bottom surface 100f, and a case-side protrusion 100g are provided.

  The setting portion side wall 100e is formed so as to extend from the outermost surface side of the box cover 100b toward the main board side (not shown), and as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the extension length of the setting portion side wall 100e. The height (the amount of depression of the setting portion 100d) is formed to be equal to the amount of protrusion of the cover-side protrusion 172.

  The setting portion bottom surface 100f is formed to extend from the setting portion side wall 100e, has a keyhole (not shown) that exposes a keyhole portion of the setting key 501, and is formed so as to close a portion other than the keyhole. . With this configuration, it is possible to operate the setting key 501 while the main controller 110 is housed in the closed space formed by the box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and the box cover 100b.

  The case-side protrusion 100g is formed so as to project from the setting portion bottom surface 100f toward the protective cover member 140 (the back side of the pachinko machine 10) so as to have the same amount of protrusion as the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140. ing. The cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 is formed to be accommodated in a space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover-side protrusion 172 is formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g. And the cover-side protrusion 172 abuts the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the setting portion 100d while the case-side protrusion 100g abuts on the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140. . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the arrangement portion of the setting key 501 is sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protection cover member 140 and the case-side protrusion 100g of the setting portion 100d. By making the access to the setting unit 100d difficult by the side protrusions 172, the security of the setting key 501 is enhanced, and there is no room for wire or the like to enter, so that an illegal act on the setting key 501 can be prevented.

  Also, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main control device 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protection cover member 140 are in contact with the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the main control device 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protection cover member 140, respectively. With this configuration, if the setting change key is still inserted in the setting key 501, the inner frame 12 cannot be locked to the outer frame 11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the person in charge of the hall from forgetting to collect the setting change key.

  Returning to FIG. 68 (a) and FIG. 68 (b), the description will be continued. On the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 (that is, the side not facing the main controller 110), cover outer ribs 174 are formed in a rectangular shape and a cross-shaped rib shape. The cover outer rib 174 functions as a reinforcing rib of the cover plate 171 to prevent the cover plate 171 from being damaged.

  Further, the cover outer rib 174 allows the wire to move upward or downward from the cover plate 171 when the wire is transmitted upward or downward from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, for example. The intrusion of the wire can be prevented by hitting the outer rib 174.

  Next, the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a left front perspective view showing the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 unfolded (opened) with respect to the outer frame 11 to which the protective cover member 140 according to the ninth embodiment is attached. For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 75, illustration of parts not related to the present invention is omitted or simplified, and the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, when the person related to the hall unlocks the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 with respect to the outer frame 11 outside the opening hours of the hall or the like, the state shown in FIG. The frame 14 rotates with respect to the outer frame 11, and the back side of the inner frame 12 is exposed toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the protective cover member 140 remains fixed to the outer frame 11, and the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back surface of the inner frame 12 turns the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. With the movement, the pachinko machine 10 is exposed to the front side, and can be immediately operated by the person in charge of the hall.

  Therefore, the person in charge of the hall can immediately change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 simply by unlocking and rotating the inner frame 12 without performing complicated work such as removing the protective cover member 140. . Further, in performing the setting change operation, the user can perform the setting change operation while visually recognizing the base display device 401, and the setting change operation can be easily performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the protection cover member 140 that covers the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the setting key 501 is not exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover member 140. When the lock of the inner frame 12 is unlocked and the setting is changed, the back side of the inner frame 12 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with the protective cover member 140 remaining on the outer frame 11. It is configured to

  With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with a simple configuration using the protective cover member 140. The setting key 501 can be prevented from being fraudulently operated. Further, since the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without using a housing structure such as a slot machine, an increase in the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 due to the use of the housing structure or the like is suppressed. be able to.

  When the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back of the inner frame 12 is operated by the pachinko machine as the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 rotate. It is exposed to the front side of the machine 10 and is immediately ready for operation by persons involved in the hall. Therefore, the person in charge of the hall can perform a setting change operation of the pachinko machine 10 without performing a complicated operation such as removing the protective cover member 140. Further, in performing the setting change operation, the user can perform the setting change operation while visually recognizing the base display device 401, and the setting change operation can be easily performed.

  Further, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover-side protrusion 172 is configured to enter a space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g. When the side projection 100g contacts the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, the cover-side projection 172 is configured to contact the setting unit bottom surface 100f of the setting unit 100d. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the arrangement portion of the setting key 501 is sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protection cover member 140 and the case-side protrusion 100g of the setting portion 100d. By making the access to the setting unit 100d difficult by the side protrusions 172, the security of the setting key 501 is enhanced, and there is no room for wire or the like to enter, so that an illegal act on the setting key 501 can be prevented.

  Further, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main control device 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protection cover member 140 are in contact with the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the main control device 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protection cover member 140, respectively. If the key for setting change is kept inserted in the setting key 501, the inner frame 12 cannot be locked to the outer frame 11, so that the setting by the person in charge of the hall is required. It is possible to prevent forgetting to collect the change key.

  When the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner wall of the right side plate 11 d abuts against the curved portion 154, and no gap (space) is generated between the right side plate 11 d and the protective cover member 140. State. Thus, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting By making it impossible to directly operate the fixing screw 11g inserted into the hole 153 and the cover lower mounting hole 11f, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being detached from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Can be.

  Further, a card sanding device is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 in the island facility, and is usually configured so that no gap is formed between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. . Therefore, by configuring so that the fixing screw 11g cannot be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being detached from the side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, the curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of a resin material constituting the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the curved portion 154 causes the protective cover member 140 to be slightly bent in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, for example, when the inner frame 12 is closed, even when the main control device 110 comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 due to the momentum at the time of closing and an impact is applied, the bending portion 154 is elastic. The protective cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged by being bent by the force and absorbing the impact.

  Further, the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, and the cover outer rib 174 allow, for example, when wire misbehaving is performed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, the wire is raised by the upright cover wall 161 or the cover plate 171. When the wire travels upward or downward from the outside of the wire, the wire collides with the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, or the cover outer rib 174, thereby preventing the wire from entering.

  In addition, the area of the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover portion 163a allows the main control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 at the right lower portion in front view (lower left portion in rear view) of the main control device 110 to be connected. The gap is configured to be as small as possible. With this configuration, the lower right part of the main control device 110 in front view (the lower left part in rear view) is covered, and the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c are provided. Fraud from the lower left) can be prevented.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the ninth embodiment achieves the effects described above. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door opening switch 208g for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 (in the tenth embodiment, the inner frame The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 has been determined according to the state described below.

  That is, when the power is turned on, the detection mode of the setting key 501 and the RAM erase switch 122 is detected, and the detection mode of the door open switch 208g is detected. According to the detection results, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Was configured to change.

  However, when determining the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the door opening switch 208g, if the door opening switch 208g cannot be turned on (that is, the opening of the inner frame 12) due to a failure or the like, the door is opened. The startup mode (that is, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) set based on the detection of the opening switch 208g cannot be started. Therefore, due to the erroneous detection of the door opening switch 208g, it is not possible to change settings, which are important game elements of the pachinko machine 10, and it may not be possible to execute the business mode assumed by the hall.

  Further, in the start-up process at the time of power-on, a process of detecting the door opening switch 208g is required, and the control required at the time of power-on is complicated, and the processing load on the main control device 110 is increased. There is a risk.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while employing the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment, the inner frame opening switch 208g1, which is the door opening switch 208g, is turned on. Regardless of the detection result, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

  With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 prevents the pachinko machine 10 from acting on the setting key 501 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and prevents the inner frame opening switch 208g1 from being opened when the inner frame 12 is opened. Regardless of reliability, setting change or the like, which is an important game element of the pachinko machine 10, can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 and reliably execute the business mode assumed by the hall.

  Further, in the startup process at the time of power-up, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not required, so that the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Can be.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to ninth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 76, each startup mode when the power of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 76 shows the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, and the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for starting up in each start-up mode. It is a figure which showed each information of.

  In the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, four modes of a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode are prepared similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability set value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability set value.

  The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode. When the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203, or when the data stored in the RAM 203 is damaged. This is a mode for executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 and restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power-off.

  Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

  On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, regardless of the detection result of the door opening switch 208 (that is, even if the ON detection is performed). The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode (even when the off-state is detected). When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned off, regardless of the detection result of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 (that is, even if the ON detection is performed). The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode even if the off-state is detected.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is unlocked or not, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the person in charge of the hall can use the RAM erase switch. Depending on whether or not 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode, which is a start-up mode not related to the probability set value, or in the normal mode.

  On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the inner frame 12 is unlocked, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the person involved in the hall and the like can turn the RAM erase switch 122 on. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode related to the probability set value can be selected as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1, whether the setting key 501 is in the off state or the on state, the start mode irrespective of the probability setting value and the probability setting value Startup mode with When the startup mode is not related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the startup mode related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

  Here, since the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured so that setting change or setting confirmation can be performed regardless of opening of the inner frame 12, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed. Although there is a concern that the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment may use the protection cover member 140 according to the ninth embodiment, there is a concern that the illegal operation of the setting key 501 may be performed. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 prevents the pachinko machine 10 from directly contacting the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c from the back side. Therefore, it is possible to change settings without performing processing such as detection of opening of the inner frame 12, and to prevent illegal acts when the inner frame 12 is closed.

  In other words, when the setting key 501 is operated by providing the protective cover member 140, it means that the inner frame 12 is open. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the inner frame 12 is open without detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 in the process.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 77, an inner frame opening switch 208g1 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 of the tenth embodiment. The inner frame opening switch 208g1 is for detecting whether or not the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and a protruding piece (not shown) protruding to the upper rear side of the inner frame 12. And an elastic body (not shown) for applying an elastic force such as a spring to the projecting piece, and a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the projecting piece. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the protruding piece of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is pressed against the upper portion of the outer frame 11 and is immersed in the inner frame 12 because the force of the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the elastic body. On the other hand, when a dedicated key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in the first direction (for example, clockwise), the inner frame 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the elastic force of the elastic body is Thereby, the projecting piece is configured to project toward the outer frame 11 side. When the detection sensor detects the protrusion of the protruding piece, it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, and an inner frame opening signal is output.

  The detection result of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 (that is, the presence or absence of the inner frame opening signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via the input / output port 205. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not determined to be ON, and does not output an inner frame opening signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, when the inner frame 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is determined to be ON, and outputs an inner frame opening signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 specifies that the inner frame 12 is open when the inner frame opening signal is input from the inner frame opening switch 208g1, and closes the inner frame 12 when the inner frame opening signal is not input. Identify the state.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process of the tenth embodiment, first, an initial value setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4401). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4402). In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the eighth embodiment, a base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling display contents displayed on the base display device 401 is triggered by a 2 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 2 milliseconds. Execute. In the process in S4402, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In addition, when a random number value required for performing a jackpot lottery or a hit lottery is generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, in the process of S4402, the range of the generated random number value ( Set the maximum value). In the process of S4402, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. In the process of S4402, the main controller 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113.

  In particular, by permitting a 2 ms timer interrupt in the internal function register setting process, a 2 ms timer interrupt occurs every 2 ms and the base display control process is executed. Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  In the process of S4402, it is not always necessary to set the range (maximum value) of the random value. In the case where the range of the random number value (maximum value) is not set in the process of S4402, in the other startup process (S4421) to be described later, which is executed at the stage of shifting from the startup process to the main process, A range (maximum value) of the random number value not performed in the process of S4402 may be set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4403). As a result, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4403: Yes), it means that the process at the time of the previous power-off is normally completed, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and calculated. It is determined whether the determined RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off (S4404). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. In the tenth embodiment, a case will be described in which the probability set value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value. However, the probability set value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

  As a result of the process of S4404, when it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (S4404: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal, and at least the RAM determination value is used for calculating the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the stored data (information) is normally held, it is determined whether the probability set value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4405). Here, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range because, when the power was turned off last time, although the processing related to the power cutoff was performed normally, the probability set value is determined at that stage. This is because it may be broken and out of the normal range. The processing in S4405 is performed to reliably detect such an abnormality in the probability set value.

  If the probability set value is within the normal range (S4405: Yes), it is determined whether the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4406). If the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4406: Yes), it means that the setting change process was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the power supply was being updated while the probability setting value was being updated by the setting change process. Indicates that was rejected. Therefore, in this case, the processing shifts to the processing of S4413, and the setting change processing is executed (S4413).

  As a result, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not limited to the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, and other startup operations Even if it is an operation, a setting change mode can be set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning and executed. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the setting change, the probability setting value can be changed from the beginning by the persons involved in the hall without fail when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, the change of the probability set value can be reliably performed by the person related to the hall, and the change can be determined. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the setting change, the persons involved in the hall can reliably update and confirm the probability set value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be safely operated. A change in the probability set value for 10 can be made.

  Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated when the power is cut off during the setting change and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability set value can be updated again from the beginning using the probability set value (probability set value data 203x11) used in the game up to now. Therefore, the person related to the hall and the like can redo the update of the probability setting.

  On the other hand, if the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off as a result of the processing in S4406 (S4406: No), it means that the setting change processing was not being executed when the power was last shut down. Next, as a process of confirming the start-up operation performed by the person in charge of the hall when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4407). In the process of S4407, since the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process is not executed, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read in the switch state read process of the timer interrupt process. Instead of making a determination using a device, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input / output port 205.

  If the result of the processing in S4407 is that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on to confirm further the start-up operation (S4407). S4408). In the tenth embodiment, the configuration is such that the detection of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not performed in S4408. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-on, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 becomes unnecessary, and the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. .

  As a result of the processing in S4408, when the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4408: N0), since the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state, the person involved in the hall starts up in the normal mode. It means that you operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4409). As a result, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON (S4409: Yes), the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the confirmation of the probability set value by the setting confirmation processing. Indicates that the power was turned off during. In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation processing is executed from the beginning (S4410). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability set value can be confirmed.

  As described above, even when the hall-related person performs the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode as the start-up operation, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the normal mode, and the setting confirmation process is started from the beginning ( The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode to be executed again from the beginning. Thus, after the power is turned off during the setting check, the probability set value can be checked even if the person involved in the hall starts up by operating in the normal mode. This allows the person involved in the hall or the like to confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being cut off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with confidence.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4409, when it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4409: No), the setting confirmation processing is not being executed when the power was last turned off. Means that The process of S4409 is performed when the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is determined to be OFF in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), that is, when the power was last shut down. There is also a case where the setting change process is not being executed.

  Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode is set to the normal mode indicated by the start-up operation by the person in charge of the hall or the like, and the setting confirmation process in S4410 and the process in S4411 described later are skipped, and other start-up processes are executed. Thereafter (S4414), the process shifts to the main process. In addition, as other startup processing, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the eighth embodiment, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) for performing main control of a game is executed by a 4 ms timer interrupt generated every 4 ms. By permitting a 4-ms timer interrupt in the process of S4414, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is on as a result of the process of S4408 (S4408: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, so that the person related to the hall, etc. Means that the startup operation was performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4408 is executed when the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is determined to be off in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), that is, when the power was last turned off. Sometimes, the setting change process is not being executed. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko machine 10 is operated in the setting check mode in which the hall-related person or the like has started up, regardless of whether the setting check process was being performed when the power was last turned off. In order to start up, the process proceeds to S4410, and a setting confirmation process is executed (S4410). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability set value can be confirmed.

  When the setting confirmation processing (S4410) ends, an external output processing is executed (S4411). In this external output processing, information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed or that the probability set value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp that the setting confirmation processing is executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, when the probability setting value is incorrectly displayed, it can be quickly grasped. After the external output processing has been executed, other start-up processing is executed (S4421), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4407, which is a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the hall-related person or the like turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10, ( (S4407: Yes), and it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in an ON state to further confirm the start-up operation (S4412). In the tenth embodiment, the configuration is such that the detection of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not performed in S4412. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-on, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 becomes unnecessary, and the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. .

  As a result of the processing in S4412, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4412: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is ON and the setting key 501 is in the ON state. It means that the operation was raised. When the start-up operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is ON or not, that is, when the power is last cut off. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being executed.

  Therefore, as a result of the process of S4412, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4412: Yes), the setting change process is executed (S4413). By the setting change processing, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by a person related to the hall or the like, the probability set value is updated and the setting key 501 is turned off. Then, the updated probability set value is determined as the probability set value to be used for the game from now on, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Thus, after changing the probability set value, the gaming machine can be newly started with the changed probability set value.

  Here, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, the fact that the setting key 501 was turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 was turned on means that a person involved in the hall is in charge. Etc. clearly indicate the intention to change the probability set value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of the hall-related personnel.

  When the setting change process (S4413) ends, an external output process is executed (S4414). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or the probability set value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp that the setting change process has been executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability set value has been changed. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illegally changed, it can be quickly grasped. After the external output processing has been executed, other start-up processing is executed (S4421), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4412, if the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is on to determine whether or not the RAM is abnormal. It is determined whether or not it is (S4415). Here, the RAM erasure switch 122 is determined to be ON by the processing of S4407 (S4407: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined to be OFF by the processing of S4412 (S4412: No), and the processing of S4415 is performed. If executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the process of S4415 (S4415: No).

  In this case, since the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is determined to be off in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), the setting change process is being executed when the power was last shut down. If not. Therefore, the RAM erase switch 122 is determined to be on by the processing of S4407 (S4407: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined to be off by the processing of S4412 (S4412: No), and the RAM abnormality is determined by the processing of S4415. If not determined (S4415: No), it means that the person involved in the hall has started the operation in the RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last turned off. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off. Therefore, a RAM clear process is executed (S4416).

  In this RAM clearing process, of the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling a game (except for the probability setting value data 203x11 (see FIG. 61) stored in the inner work area 203x1 (see FIG. 61)). While the data) are erased (cleared), while the data 203s for the accessory ratio stored in the outside work area 203y1 (see FIG. 53), the data 203r for the base value, and the data 203t for the error (both refer to FIG. 53) Keep without erasing. A new game can be started by deleting data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, even if the RAM clear processing is executed, the probability set value data 203x11 is held, so that the game can be continued with the probability set value determined before the RAM clear processing is executed.

  Here, as described above, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, there is no RAM abnormality, and the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode is performed. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall. The fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned in the hall or the like wants to at least clearly clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of a person related to the hall or the like.

  When the RAM clear processing in S4416 is completed, other start-up processing is executed (S4421), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S4403 that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4403: No), the calculated RAM determination value is determined by the processing of S4404 to be the same as the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4404: No), or if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range by the processing of S4405 (S4405: No). If any of the above applies, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203. Therefore, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is turned on (S4417), and in order to confirm the start-up operation of the person related to the hall, etc. Then, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4418). In the process of S4418, similarly to the process of S4407, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input / output port 205.

  If it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is ON as a result of the process of S4418 (S4418: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described S4412, and further, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on. A determination is made (S4412). As a result, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4412: Yes), it means that the person related to the hall, etc., has started up in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4412: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in accordance with the start-up operation of the person related to the hall or the like, the flow shifts to S4413 to execute the above-described setting change processing.

  Here, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the RAM can be cleared after resetting the probability setting value again. Therefore, a new game can be started with the newly set normal probability set value. Note that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is turned off by this RAM clear. Therefore, thereafter, main controller 110 can control the game without executing the process related to the RAM abnormality.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off as a result of the processing of S4418 (S4418: No), or if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is on as a result of the processing of S4418, the processing proceeds to S4412. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state as a result of the processing (S4418: Yes or S4412: No), the person in charge of the hall, etc., in the RAM abnormality, sets the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, This means that the startup operation has been performed in any of the startup modes in the confirmation mode.

  In this case, the flow shifts to the above-described processing of S4415, and in the processing of S4415, it is always determined that the RAM is determined to be abnormal (S4415: Yes), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4419. In the process of S4419, a RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4419). In this RAM abnormality setting process, a process for performing notification regarding the RAM abnormality is executed. For example, a sound lamp for turning off the power once and prompting to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is provided by sound output from the sound output device 226 and / or display on the third symbol display device 81. A command is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Then, an external output process for notifying the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503 that the RAM is abnormal is executed (S4420), and other start-up processes are executed (S4421), and the process proceeds to the main process. I do. Since the hall computer 600 is notified that the RAM is abnormal, the person in charge of the hall or the like can surely grasp that the RAM abnormality has occurred without noticing the notification from the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while employing the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment, the door opening switch 208g is used. Regardless of the detection result of the frame release switch 208g1, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501. With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 prevents the pachinko machine 10 from acting on the setting key 501 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and prevents the inner frame opening switch 208g1 from being opened when the inner frame 12 is opened. Regardless of reliability, setting change or the like, which is an important game element of the pachinko machine 10, can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 and reliably execute the business mode assumed by the hall.

  Further, in the startup process at the time of power-up, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not required, so that the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Can be.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the tenth embodiment provides the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to ninth embodiments can provide the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. In the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1, the pachinko machine 10 is controlled according to the state of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501. Startup mode was determined.

  On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the front frame opening switch 208g2 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided, and when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects the opening of the inner frame 12 (that is, ON detection), In addition, when the front frame opening switch 208g2 detects that the front frame 14 is closed (that is, off detection), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started. On the other hand, even when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects the closing of the inner frame 12 (that is, OFF detection), or when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects the opening of the inner frame 12, When the frame opening switch 208g2 detects opening of the front frame 14 (that is, ON detection), it is configured to start in the normal mode without starting the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Conventionally, if the pachinko machine 10 is easily shifted to a state in which the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed, it is not possible to eliminate a room for performing an incorrect setting change or the setting confirmation. It is desirable to take multi-step security measures for the pachinko machine 10 so as not to shift.

  On the other hand, when a person involved in the hall performs maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened from the outer frame 11, and the maintenance work is performed on the hall having the authority to change settings and confirm settings. It is generally performed by employees of the hall who do not have the authority to change settings or check settings, rather than the person in charge.

  Here, if the employee enters the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during maintenance work by an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or check the setting, if the employee enters inside with an outside fraudulent person There is a possibility that information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, during a maintenance work in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened, the setting change or the setting confirmation cannot be performed, so that the authority to change the setting is granted. The security performance for the pachinko machine 10 can be improved by making it difficult for a non-employee to change the settings.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to tenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to tenth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 79, each startup mode when the power of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 79 shows a start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, and a RAM erase switch 122 and a setting key 501 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for starting up in each start-up mode. It is a figure which showed each information of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2.

  In the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, four modes of a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode are prepared. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability set value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability set value.

  The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode. When the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203, or when the data stored in the RAM 203 is damaged. This is a mode for executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 and restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power-off.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and with the setting key 501 being turned off, the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is determined. Regardless, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2. Starts in the RAM clear mode.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the normal mode may be set based on the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 or the front frame opening switch 208g2 even when the setting key 501 is turned on. is there.

  Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, even if both the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 are on, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is not on or the front frame release switch 208g2 is off. If not, that is, if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is off or the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, but the front frame opening switch 208g2 is on, the normal mode is started instead of the setting change mode. It is configured as follows.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, even if the RAM erasing switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not on or the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on. If the switch is not off, that is, if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is off or the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on but the front frame opening switch 208g2 is on, the normal mode is set instead of the setting confirmation mode. Is configured to stand up.

  Conventionally, when a person in charge of the hall performs maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened from the outer frame 11, and the setting change is not performed by the person in charge of the hall that changes the settings and confirms the settings. Or a hall employee who does not have the authority to check the settings. That is, during the maintenance operation of the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on.

  Here, if the employee enters the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during maintenance work by an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or check the setting, if the employee enters inside with an outside fraudulent person There is a possibility that information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, during maintenance work in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened, that is, when both the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2 are on. , So that setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 by making it difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or the like to change the setting or confirm the setting.

  Next, while turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 while turning on the setting key 501, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned off. Under certain conditions, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned off, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off. On the condition that the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode.

  As described above, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the person in charge of the hall or the like sets the setting key 501 to the OFF state, and determines whether or not to turn on the RAM erasing switch 122. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select a RAM clear mode or a normal mode which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned on on condition that only the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, the person in charge of the hall and the like can turn the RAM erase switch 122 on. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode related to the probability set value can be selected as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, first, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a start-up mode irrelevant to the probability set value and a start-up mode related to the probability set value can be selected. Then, in the startup mode irrespective of the probability set value, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2, depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on or not. While it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, if the startup mode is related to the probability setting value, the RAM is set on condition that only the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on. Depending on whether or not the erase switch 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment is connected to a front frame opening switch 208g2 as the door opening switch 208g in addition to the inner frame opening switch 208g1. The front frame opening switch 208g2 is for detecting whether or not the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12, and has a front protruding piece (not shown) protruding from the upper rear side of the front frame 14. ), A front elastic body (not shown) for applying an elastic force such as a spring to the front projecting piece, and a front detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the front projecting piece. When the front frame 14 is closed, the front projecting piece of the front frame opening switch 208g2 is pressed against the upper portion of the inner frame 12 and is immersed in the front frame 14 because the force of the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the front elastic body. On the other hand, when a dedicated key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in a second direction (for example, counterclockwise) different from the first direction, the front frame 14 is released from the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened. Is opened, the front projecting piece projects toward the inner frame 12 by the elastic force of the front elastic body. When the front detection sensor detects the protrusion of the front protruding piece, it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is on, and a front frame opening signal is output.

  The detection result of the front frame opening switch 208g2 (that is, presence / absence of a front frame opening signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via the input / output port 205. In this case, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the front frame open switch 208g2 is not determined to be ON, and does not output a front frame open signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12, the front frame release switch 208g2 is determined to be on, and outputs a front frame release signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 determines that the front frame 14 is open when the front frame opening signal is input from the front frame opening switch 208g2, and closes the front frame 14 when the front frame opening signal is not input. Identify the state.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  The startup process of the eleventh embodiment differs from the startup process of the tenth embodiment in that when the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is turned off. The setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed on condition that the switch is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off, and the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on. In some cases, on condition that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned off, the setting change process (S4413) is executed, and the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the inner frame opening switch 208g1 are turned off. In the confirmation processing of the front frame opening switch 208g2, when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on, or If the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not off even if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on (that is, if it is on), it is necessary to start up in the normal mode without starting up in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. is there.

  In the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment, when the setting key 501 is determined not to be on in the determination of the setting key 501 in S4408 (S4408: No), and when the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on, If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has not been turned on (SS4409: No), the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on with both the RAM erasing switch 122 and the setting key 501 turned off, and the process proceeds to S4421 to start up in the normal mode. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4408, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4408: Yes), or even when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off (S4408: No) If it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned on (S4409: Yes), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off when the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on and the setting key 501 is turned on. Since it is turned on, the process shifts to S4451 in order to check whether or not the setting confirmation process (S4410) can be executed, that is, whether or not a maintenance operation is being performed.

  In the process of S4451, it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open, the front frame opening switch 208g2 is then turned on. It is determined whether the switch is off (S4452). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off (S4452: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the front frame 14 is closed, the person in charge of the hall having the setting confirmation authority As a result, it is considered that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on, the process proceeds to S4410, and the setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4451 that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4451: No), that is, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of a fraudulent act from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not executed, and the process proceeds to S4421. Start in mode.

  Also, in the process of S4452, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4452: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open and the front frame 14 is open. In this case, it is highly probable that the pachinko machine 10 is undergoing maintenance work, so that the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not performed, and the process proceeds to S4421 to start up in the normal mode.

  Next, if the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be on in the process of S4406 (S4406: Yes), or if the setting key 501 is determined to be on in the process of S4412, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Since the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on while the setting key 501 is on, the setting change process (S4413) can be executed, that is, it is not during maintenance work. The process moves to S4453 to confirm whether

  In the process of S4453, similarly to the process of S4451, it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open, the front frame opening switch 208g2 is then turned on. It is determined whether it is off (S4454). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is OFF (S4454: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the front frame 14 is closed, the person in charge of the hall having the setting confirmation authority As a result, it is considered that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on, the process proceeds to S4413, and the setting change process (S4413) is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4453 that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4453: No), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of a fraudulent act from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the setting change process (S4413) is not executed, and the process proceeds to S4421. Start in mode.

  In the process of S4454, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4454: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open and the front frame 14 is open. In this case, it is highly probable that the pachinko machine 10 is undergoing maintenance work, so that the setting change process (S4413) is not performed, and the process proceeds to S4421 to start up in the normal mode.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, only the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, that is, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame is opened. When the release switch 208g2 is off, the configuration is such that the setting change or the setting confirmation operation can be performed. On the other hand, during maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, that is, the inner frame release switch. When both 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 are on, the configuration is such that setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed. Therefore, at the time of maintenance work in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode, not in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 by making it difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or the like to change the setting or confirm the setting.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the eleventh embodiment provides the above-described effects. Moreover, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to tenth embodiments can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twelfth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 are covered by the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11, and when the inner frame 12 is closed. The configuration key 501 and the sealing unit 100c are configured so as not to be directly operated.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protection cover member 140 is extended leftward in front view (that is, right side in rear view) to a portion covering the connector mounting portion 100h of the main control device 110, and the payout is performed. The control device 111 is formed so as to extend downward from the front as far as a portion covering the sealing portion 111a. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the protective cover member 140 covers the connector mounting portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111. .

  With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, a connector connection used for communication of control signals to the control devices 111 and 113 and the like is provided. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the parts related to the game specifications, such as the wearing part 100h and the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of the prize balls and the rental balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eleventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  Here, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment. For convenience of description, FIG. 82 shows a state in which the front frame 14 has been removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 83 shows a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have been removed from the outer frame 11. And their description is omitted.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is that the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 is different from the pachinko machine 100 of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. A point that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with the sealing portion 111a, and the upright cover wall 161 and the upright lower cover portion 163 of the protection cover member 140 are in front of the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111 in a front right side (in a back view left side). ) And the positions of the lower cover mounting hole 11f of the right side plate 11d and the lower mounting hole 153 of the cover mounting portion 150 are provided slightly below the ninth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the upright cover wall 161 of the protective cover member 140 of the twelfth embodiment is continuously connected to the pachinko machine from the curved portion 154 of the cover mounting portion 150 formed longer than the ninth embodiment. It is formed extending toward the rear side of the machine 10 (see FIG. 83). The upright cover wall 161 covers the right side of the main controller 110 in front view (left side in rear view) and the right side of front view of the payout controller 111 (left side in rear view). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 can be directly Since the part cannot be contacted, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the pachinko machine 10 from the right side in the front view.

  The upright lower cover part (not shown) of the twelfth embodiment includes a lower inner cover part (not shown) and a lower outer cover part (not shown). The lower inner cover portion extends horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction in which the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are disposed). It is formed extending in the direction. In addition, the lower outer cover portion is formed to extend horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are not provided). I have.

  The lower inner cover portion (not shown) has a larger area than the upper inner cover portion (not shown), as in the ninth embodiment. This is because the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, in particular, the disposition position of the payout control device 111 is closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10, and the main control is from the upper side of the pachinko machine 10 to the lower side. Since it is easy to access the device 110 or the payout control device 111, a person who misbehaves with respect to the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111 often causes a wire or the like to enter from the lower side of the back of the pachinko machine 10. Do wrongdoing by doing. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned misconduct, the area of the lower inner cover portion is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover portion 163a controls the payout control in the lower right portion in the front view of the payout control device 111 (the lower left portion in the rear view). The gap between the device 111 and the protective cover member 140 is configured to be as small as possible.

  In this manner, by forming the lower inner cover portion (not shown), the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, particularly, the right lower portion in the front view of the payout control device 111 (the lower left portion in the back view) are covered, It is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 provided with the sealing portion 111a or the main control device 110 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c from being fraudulently viewed from the lower right side in front view (lower left side in rear view). .

  Next, the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is moved from the upright portion 160 (the upright cover wall 161, the upright upper cover portion 162, the upright lower cover portion 163, and the upright inner rib 164 (see FIG. 68)) to the cover plate 171. The board surface is oriented in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is formed to extend to a position covering the setting portion 100d of the main control device 110 and covering the connector attachment portion 100h of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 82). The plate surface of the cover plate 171 covers the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115. In this way, by covering the devices 501, 100c, 122, and 111a that can affect the game specifications with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. The cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed so as not to cover the base display device 401 and the error display button 502. In addition, since the cover plate 171 is transparent, the visibility of the back surface or the like does not decrease, so that the base display device 401 and / or the error display button 502 may be covered from the viewpoint of security of the entire main control device 110. .

  The cover outer rib 174 formed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 is formed to project from a portion corresponding to the setting key 501 and a portion corresponding to the RAM erase switch 122. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to form holes or the like in the cover plate 171, and it is possible to improve security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the upper side protrusion (not shown) of the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed in a rib shape in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower side protrusion (not shown) of the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94. ) May be formed in a rib shape in the direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. The lower side of the upper side protrusion and the upper side of the lower side protrusion are configured to be in contact with each other, so that even when the protective cover member 140 is attached to the outer frame 11, the upper side protrusion may be formed. The rear pack 92 provided on the inner frame 12 can be closed without interference between the lower part and the lower protrusion of the back pack 92, and the upper surface of the lower protrusion and the lower surface of the upper protrusion contact each other. This eliminates a gap between the back pack 92 and the protective cover member 140, and prevents the pachinko machine 10 from being in contact with the main controller 110 using a wire or the like from the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent improper operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the back pack 92 is attached to the outer frame 11 in a cantilever shape because the back pack 92 is attached to the inner frame 12 in one end and the other end of the back pack 92 fixed to both ends. Even if an impact is applied to the protective cover member 140 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the rigidity of the protective cover member 140 is compensated for by the back pack 92 attached to the inner frame 12 in the form of a beam fixed at both ends. can do. Therefore, even when an impact or the like is applied from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the protection cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is extended to the left side in front view (that is, the right side in rear view) to the portion covering the connector mounting portion 100h of the main control device 110. At the same time, the dispensing control device 111 is formed so as to extend downward from the front as far as a portion covering the sealing portion 111a. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the protective cover member 140 covers the connector mounting portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111. . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, a connector connection used for communication of control signals to the control devices 111 and 113 and the like is provided. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the parts related to the game specifications, such as the wearing part 100h and the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of the prize balls and the rental balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration using one member.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a thirteenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls. A so-called machine split, hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “ball rate”, is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person in charge of a hall or the like is set to a pachinko machine. There is a configuration in which a person involved in the hall or the like can be changed (updated) after the power of the machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before opening the game hall). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. Becomes possible.

  Specifically, for example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a jackpot game in which the obtained game value is high and a small jackpot game in which the obtained game value is lower than the jackpot game, a jackpot random number table 272a different for each set value is provided in advance. Have been. In the jackpot random number table 272a, the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game, the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game, and the loss turbulence corresponding to the losing in which none of the variable winning devices 65 and 72 are opened. The number of the numerical values (hereinafter, the jackpot random value, the small random number value, and the loss random number value are collectively referred to as “each random number value”) is distributed (defined) so as to be different for each set value. . Then, as the set value increases, the payout rate is more advantageous for the player (for example, the number of jackpot random numbers increases).

  In a conventional pachinko machine, a first special symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special figure 1") and a second special symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special figure 2") are provided. , The distribution of the number of jackpot random numbers, the number of small hit random numbers, and the number of lost random numbers in Toku-zu 1, and the number of jackpot random numbers, the number of small hit random numbers, and the number of lost random numbers in Toku-zu 2 There is a configuration in which each distribution is different. When configured in this way, the distribution of the number of each random value is different for each set value, and the distribution of the number of each random value is also different for each special symbol, so that various playability can be provided for each set value. It can create and enhance the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the variable display based on the lottery game of Toku-zu 1 and the variable display based on the lottery game of Toku-zu 2 are executed simultaneously and in parallel on the special symbol display device 39, and each special symbol is displayed. Some are configured to be able to simultaneously perform variable display based on the same (a so-called simultaneous variable device).

  Here, in the pachinko machine described above, as a game specification relating to each special symbol, there is a "normal game state" (or "time reduction state") in which the special jackpot probability is low and the jackpot game is unlikely to occur. In addition, there is provided a "probability changing state" in which the special symbol jackpot probability is high and the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the "normal gaming state".

  In order to realize this “probability variation state”, it is necessary to provide a larger number of jackpot random numbers in the “probability variation state” than in the “normal game state”, but the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is limited to an upper limit (for example, “ 0 to 9999), and the number of each random value must be distributed within that range.

  In addition, in order to install a pachinko machine in a game hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by the competent authority and obtain approval that the pachinko machine is within the specified range. For this reason, the pachinko machine developer must obtain the approval rate by passing all the set values of the pachinko machine at the time of designing the game specifications in order to obtain approval by passing the certification test and receiving approval. As described above, the number of jackpot random numbers and the number of small jackpot random values in the jackpot random number table 272a must be distributed.

  However, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased in order to change the special symbol from the low-probability state to the high-probability state on a pachinko machine whose setting value can be changed, the small number increases with the number of jackpot random numbers. If the number of hit random numbers is reduced and changed, it is necessary to calculate the payout rate of the big hit game and the payout rate of the small hit game for each set value, and to calculate each, The calculation of the overall payout rate becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the man-hours at the time of designing the game specifications may increase. In particular, in a pachinko machine such as a simultaneous fluctuation machine, it is necessary to calculate a payout rate in consideration of a fluctuation time of each special symbol performed in a simultaneous progression, and to calculate each payout rate in a big hit game and a small hit game. In the case of performing a composite calculation for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification may be enormous.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers from the low probability state to the high probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the number of lost random numbers in all set values. It is configured to make up for. Further, the number of the small random number values of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changed for each set value. That is, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change and the increase in the number of jackpot random values due to the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state for each setting are reduced by the number of the loss random numbers. Then, the reduced amount is compensated by assigning it to the big hit random value, and the number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol small hit random value is the same for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol setting. . With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, and to increase the man-hour when designing the game specification. Can be suppressed.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to twelfth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to twelfth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to twelfth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The difference between the board configuration of the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment and the first embodiment is that the top of the center frame 86 of the variable display device unit 80 is slightly biased rightward when viewed from the front, so-called left-handed. That the game and the right-handed game are clearly different from each other on the board, that the through gate 67 is arranged only on the right side of the board, and that the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the board. The point that the ordinary electric hand 64c of the ordinary symbol is arranged on the right side of the panel surface and is constituted by a retractable opening / closing plate, and the second starting port 64b corresponding to the special figure 2 is located downstream of the ordinary electric hand 64c. The arrangement is different from the arrangement in that the second variable winning device 72 having the small winning opening 72a is newly provided. Other configurations and functions are the same or substantially the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guides, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first starting opening 64 a, the second starting opening 64 b, the ordinary electric hand 64 c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second variable winning device 72, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled.

  The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the ordinary electric hand 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second variable winning device 72, and the variable display unit 80 are formed by a base plate by router processing. The game board 13 is disposed in a through hole formed in the game board 13 and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

  A special symbol display device 39 provided with a state LED group 39a and a special LED group 39b, each of which is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, is provided on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (the upper right side in FIG. 84). Have been. The special symbol display device 39 displays the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 85) described below (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols is referred to as “ Dynamic display "), and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

  The state LED group 39a indicates the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (entered) the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of the big hit and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 39a corresponding to the state. In addition, the state LED group 39a is configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

  Note that the “round” in the jackpot means a period from the opening to the closing of a large winning port 65a to be described later in order to separate the number of winning balls in the jackpot, and in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, One "round" is executed when "30 seconds" elapse after the opening of the winning opening 65a or when 10 balls are won while the large winning opening 65a is open.

  The special LED group 39b includes a total of 12 LEDs, including an upper LED group 39b1 composed of six LEDs and a lower LED group 39b2 composed of six LEDs. In the upper LED group 39b1, a first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed. In the lower LED group 39b2, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed.

  Specifically, the upper LED group 39b1 has a dynamic state until a fluctuation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning in the first starting port 64a provided in the center of the game board 13 is elapsed. After the display (in the thirteenth embodiment, the lower LEDs of the upper LED group 39b1 are sequentially turned on one by one from the uppermost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a symbol indicating the determination result (the thirteenth embodiment) In this example, the stop display is performed in a total of 64 types of stop symbols according to the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

  The lower LED group 39b2 displays a dynamic display (dynamic display time) until a fluctuating time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning in the second starting port 64b provided on the right side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 1). In the thirteenth embodiment, the lower LED group 39b2 sequentially turns on the lower LEDs from the uppermost LED one by one, and repeatedly displays the lighting pattern. Depending on the combination of the respective lighting patterns of the six LEDs, stop display is performed in a total of 64 types of stop symbols.

  In any of the LED groups 39b1 and 39b2, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a big hit, the type (type) of the big hit is corresponded. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. Details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is configured so that the dynamic display of the special figure 1 and the dynamic display of the special figure 2 can be executed simultaneously and in parallel on the special symbol display device 39. Therefore, for example, when a ball wins in the second starting port 64b while the upper LED group 39b1 fluctuates based on the winning of the ball in the first starting port 64a, the lower LED group 39b2 is generated based on the winning. , The dynamic display of the special figure 2 is started immediately.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a hit to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is determined to be a big hit or not (big hit lottery), and when each hit is determined to be a big hit, In addition, the jackpot type is also determined according to the winning ports 64a and 64b that have won.

  The jackpot type determined in the thirteenth embodiment corresponds to “16 rounds (hereinafter round may be simply referred to as“ R ”) probable jackpot” based on winning in the first starting opening 64a. “Probability variation A”, “probability variation B” corresponding to “6R probability variation jackpot”, and “time reduction” corresponding to “6R time saving jackpot” are prepared (see FIG. 88 (a)). Further, based on the winning in the second starting opening 64b, the “probability fluctuation A” corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot”, the “probability variation B” corresponding to “6R probability variation jackpot”, and “6R time reduction jackpot” A corresponding “time reduction” is prepared (see FIG. 88 (b)).

  Here, the jackpot type of “probability variation A” corresponding to “16R probability change jackpot” means that each special symbol has a higher probability state than the “normal game state” after the maximum round number of 16 rounds. On the other hand, it is a big hit that shifts to a gaming state in which the normal symbol is in a low probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “super probability fluctuation state”). In addition, the jackpot type of “probability variation B” corresponding to “6R probability change jackpot” means that after the maximum number of rounds of six rounds, each special symbol has a high probability state compared to the “normal game state”. In addition, it is a jackpot that shifts to a game state in which a normal symbol is also in a high probability state (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “probability variation state”). Furthermore, the jackpot type of “time reduction” corresponding to “6R time-saving jackpot” means that, after the maximum number of rounds of six rounds, each special symbol has a low probability state, and a normal symbol has a high probability state. It is a jackpot that shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “time reduction state”).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the “normal gaming state” refers to a gaming state other than the “super-probability variation state”, the “probability variation state” or the “time reduction state”, and the jackpot probability of each special symbol. And a state in which the normal symbol win probability is in a normal state (ie, a low probability state) and the normal electric hand 64c is opened for a short time (ie, a non-open extended state). In other words, in the "normal gaming state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is lower than in the "super probability fluctuation state" and "probability fluctuation state", and it is more normal than in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state". The probability of winning the symbol is low and the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is also short. Although details will be described later, in this case, when a so-called right-handed game is played, a game state in which a ball is likely to win in the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, a state in which a ball is likely to win in the second starting port 64b is referred to as " (May be referred to as a "prize assist state"), but the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

  The right-handed game refers to the act of shooting a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, and the game board 13 of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view. A ball can win the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the second starting port 64b arranged on the right side. On the other hand, the left-handed game refers to an act of causing the launched ball to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, and the ball can win at the first starting port 64a. Hereinafter, the term “right-handed game” or “left-handed game” refers to a state in which a ball is fired in the above-described firing mode, respectively.

  Next, the "time shortened state" is a state in which the big hit probability of each special symbol is a low probability state like the "normal game state", but the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric hand 64c. Also refers to a state in which a so-called "time saving function" for a long time is provided. That is, in the "time reduction state", although the big hit by the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit by the normal symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the normal electric hand 64c becomes long. Therefore, in the “time reduction state”, a so-called winning assist state is set, and almost all balls fired by the right-handed game win the second starting port 64b. Although details will be described later, in this case, the dynamic display of the special map 2 can be continuously executed, and a prize ball (for example, one piece / prize) based on a prize in the second start port 64b can be obtained. It is possible to play a game while suppressing the decrease in the possessed ball.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the “time reduction state” is a predetermined number of times (50 in the thirteenth embodiment) that is predetermined for each of the jackpots after the jackpot of the jackpot type “time reduction” (see FIG. 88). Times) until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed. After the specified number of special symbols have been dynamically displayed, the state is shifted from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

  Next, the “probability change state” is a high probability state in which the subsequent jackpot probability of each special symbol is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased. It refers to a gaming state in which the opening time is also long (that is, an extended opening state). In other words, the "probability variation state" is a state in which the jackpot result with the special symbol is easily derived, the winning result with the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is longer. Although the details will be described later, in this case, in the “probability variation state”, a so-called winning assistance state is set, and almost all the balls fired by the right-handed game enter the second starting port 64b. The dynamic display can be continuously executed, and a prize ball (for example, one piece / prize) based on winning in the second starting port 64b can be obtained to play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held. It is possible to play the game in a state where a jackpot game (special game state) based on the dynamic display of the special map 2 is likely to occur. In other words, in the “probability variation state”, almost all the balls fired by the right-handed game enter the second starting port 64b and do not flow down to the downstream side (that is, the second variable winning device 72 side). Has become.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, as the “probability variation state”, after the jackpot of the jackpot type “probability variation B” (see FIG. 88), the next jackpot game is started (until the next jackpot). Both the big hit probability of each special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are maintained in a high probability state. That is, once the "probability change state" is entered, the "probability change state" is continued until a jackpot game with each special symbol occurs.

  Next, the “super probability fluctuation state” is a high probability state in which the subsequent jackpot probability of each special symbol is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, while the normal symbol hit probability is as low as the “normal gaming state”. This is a game state in which the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is short in addition to the probability state. That is, the “super probability fluctuation state” is a state in which the jackpot result by the special symbol is easily derived, while the hit result by the ordinary symbol is hardly derived from the “time reduction state” and the “probability fluctuation state”, and The opening time of the hand 64c is shorter than the "time reduction state" and the "probability fluctuation state". Although details will be described later, in this case, in the “super probability fluctuation state”, if the player makes a right-handed game, passes the ball to the through gate 67, and wins a win in the variable display of the normal symbol, the second start Although it is possible to cause the mouth 64b to win a ball and execute the dynamic display of the special figure 2, since the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is for a short period of time, a ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c Is in a gaming state where it can be guided to the downstream side of the ordinary electric hand 64c as it is.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, as the “super probability variation state”, after the jackpot of the jackpot type “probability variation A” (see FIG. 88), the next jackpot game is started (the so-called next jackpot). In addition, while the jackpot probability of each special symbol is in the high probability state, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is maintained in the low probability state. That is, once the user enters the “super-probability changing state”, the “super-probability changing state” is continued until a jackpot game with each special symbol occurs.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, a second variable prize device 72 described later, which is opened for a short time on the downstream side (lower right side of the board) of the ordinary electric hand 64c when a small hit game described later is won. Is arranged. Although details will be described later, in the “super probability fluctuation state”, when the small hitting game is won as a result of the dynamic display of the special figure 2, a part of the ball fired by the right-handed game is moved to the second starting port. It is possible to win the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72 without winning the win 64b. The small winning opening 72a has a larger number of prize balls based on winning than the second starting opening 64b (winning in the small winning opening 72a → 10 prize balls, winning in the second starting opening 64b → prize ball). 1), by winning the small hit game in the "super probability fluctuation state", it is possible to increase the number of balls possessed by the player by causing the ball to enter the small winning opening 72a instead of the second starting opening 64b. Become. By setting (distributing) such that the small hit game is frequently won in the dynamic display of the special map 2, payout of the prize ball by the small hit game can be frequently performed in the "super probability fluctuation state". . As a result, in the “super probability fluctuation state”, it is possible to realize the gaming property of how to keep the “super probability fluctuation state” long and make the small winning opening 72a win many balls.

  With such a configuration, first, in the "normal gaming state", a left-handed game is performed, the big hit game is won in the dynamic display of the special figure 1, and the game value by the big hit game is obtained. It is possible to realize a game property in which the gaming state is any of the “super-probability variation state”, the “probability variation state”, or the “time reduction state” accompanying the jackpot type. Then, in the "time reduction state", a right-handed game is performed to realize the playability of how to win the jackpot game in the dynamic display of the special figure 2 while the prize assist state is valid. it can. Further, in the "probability variation state", it is possible to realize a gaming ability of performing a right-handed game and maintaining the winning assistance state while determining whether or not the next big hit game is a big hit type. Further, in the "super probability fluctuation state", although the player plays a right-handed game and does not have a prize assisting state, the player wins the small hitting game and wins a ball in the small winning opening 72a to increase the number of possessed balls, thereby increasing the jackpot. It is possible to realize the game property of how to continue the “super probability fluctuation state” without winning the game. The driving mode of the ordinary electric winning combination 64c and the driving mode of the second variable winning device 72 in each gaming state will be described later.

  Here, the display mode of the special LED group 39b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper special LED group 39b1 for the first special symbol, one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “probability variation A”, and the type of the jackpot type “probability variation” There are provided a total of 64 display patterns, 21 display patterns corresponding to "B" and 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction". Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group 39b1, it is possible to recognize that the stop display of the loss has been stopped, while the jackpot type “probability variation A”, “probability variation B” or “ It is difficult to identify which of the stop displays of “time reduction”.

  Also, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower special LED group 39b2 for the second special symbol, one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “probability variation A”, and A total of 64 types of display patterns are provided, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to "probability variation B", 20 types of display patterns corresponding to the big hit type "time reduction", and one type of display pattern corresponding to the small hit. I have. Like the upper LED group 39b1, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the lower LED group 39b2, the stop display of the loss and the stop display of the small hit can be recognized, while the big hit type “probability change A”, “probability change B” or It is difficult to identify which stop display is “time reduction”.

  With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39, unless all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are grasped. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the type of the winning jackpot. Therefore, for example, even if the player wins the “probability variation B”, the third symbol display device 81 displays the big hit result corresponding to “time reduction” as a temporary display, and “ The jackpot promotion effect of promoting the jackpot result corresponding to “time reduction” to the jackpot result corresponding to “probability variation B” can be effectively executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, in the game area of the game board 13, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins.

  Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first special symbol or the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 39 is triggered by entering the first opening 64a (start winning) or entering the second opening 64b (start winning). A third symbol display device constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) having a third symbol display area 81a for performing a fluctuation effect of the third symbol while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. 81 is formed in a display area different from the third symbol display area 81a in the third symbol display device 81, and synchronized with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the upper LED group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39. The fourth symbol 82a for special figure 1 for performing the variable display of the symbol and the special symbol for performing the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39. (2) A fourth symbol display area 82 having a fourth symbol 82b, and an LED for displaying an ordinary symbol in a variable manner (hereinafter, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is referred to as a "variable display") when the ball of the through gate 67 passes as a trigger. A second symbol display device 83 (hereinafter, the second symbol display device 83 is referred to as “ordinary symbol display device 83” for convenience of description) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 85) described later, so that, for example, left, middle, and right Are displayed (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the dynamic display of the special figure 1 and the dynamic display of the special figure 2 are configured to be able to be executed simultaneously and in parallel. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the display area 81a is configured to execute a variable effect based on any one of the special symbols according to various situations. Specifically, for example, in the case of the “normal game state”, only the variable effect relating to the special figure 1 is executed in the third symbol display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable effect relating to the special figure 2 is the third effect. The fourth symbol 82b for the special figure 2 and the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 are configured not to perform the adjustment in the symbol display area 81a. In the case of the “super probability fluctuation state”, the “probability fluctuation state”, or the “time reduction state”, only the fluctuation effect related to the special figure 2 is executed in the third symbol display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. 1 is not performed in the third symbol display area 81a, but is executed by the fourth symbol 82a for special figure 1 and the upper LED group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect (variable effect) relating to a special symbol to be noted in each game state in the third symbol display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 which is a large display. Can accurately recognize the game situation and the like.

  As described above, the fourth symbol display area 82 displays the fourth symbols 82a and 82b corresponding to the respective special symbols, and executes or does not execute the dynamic display of each special symbol in the fourth symbols 82a and 82b. Is configured to be displayed. The fourth symbols 82a and 82b are synchronized with the dynamic display of each special symbol in each of the LED groups 39b1 and 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 and the fluctuation display of each special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is configured to have the same function as the special symbol display device 39. Therefore, the player, for example, in the third symbol display device 81, even if the variation of the third symbol is a temporary stop, blackout, freeze, etc., even if the variation effect of the third symbol is difficult or unrecognizable, By confirming the manner of execution of each of the fourth symbols 82a and 82b, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable effect (dynamic display) is being executed even in the above-described difficult-to-recognize state.

  Note that the execution of each special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not only a variation effect relating to the special symbol to be executed according to the game state as in the thirteenth embodiment, but also dynamic display of both special symbols. May be displayed and executed simultaneously by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a priority order of special symbols to be executed for each game state is provided, and when a special symbol having a high priority is executed, a special symbol having a high priority is executed while performing a variable effect related to the special symbol. When the execution of a special symbol having a low priority is acquired in a situation where the variable effect is not executed, the variable effect related to the special symbol may be executed.

  The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (ordinary symbol) are alternately turned on each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the thirteenth embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the ordinary electric hand 64c above the second starting port 64b operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (open).

  The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned special symbol display device 39, and the second symbol retaining lamp 84 (hereinafter, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 will be described. For the sake of convenience, it is also lit on a "ordinary symbol holding lamp 84". Usually, four symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed based on the number of lights of the ordinary symbol retaining lamp 84.

  Note that the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-illumination of a plurality of lamps in the ordinary symbol display device 83 as in the thirteenth embodiment. 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the ordinary symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls that pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 39, it is not always necessary to perform the lighting display by the ordinary symbol retaining lamp 84.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64a into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a, a first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by the turning on of the first starting port switch. At 110 (see FIG. 85), a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed. Then, a dynamic display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED group 39b1 above the special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only in the "normal gaming state". A variable effect based on the first special symbol is executed. The first starting port 64a is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A second starting port 64b through which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric hand 64c is in an open state is provided on the right side of the gaming board 13 in a front view and below a variable winning device 65 described later. Have been. When a ball enters the second starting port 64b, a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by turning on the second starting port switch. At 110 (see FIG. 85), a jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is performed. A display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED group 39b2 below the special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39, and is in the "super probability fluctuation state", the "probability fluctuation state", or the "time reduction state". Only in this case, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable effect based on the second special symbol. The second starting port 64b is also one of the winning ports where one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

  As described above, a single plate-shaped ordinary electrical hand 64c is provided above the second starting port 64b to cover the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. The normal electric role 64c is in a closed state in which it protrudes from the board surface of the game board 13 to cover the opening of the flow path flowing into the second starting port 64b. It is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which an opening of a flow path that flows into the opening is opened. The second starting port 64b is normally in a closed state in which the normal electric role 64c protrudes from the board, and the ball cannot enter or hardly enters the second starting port 64b. .

  On the other hand, when the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol of “○”, the ordinary electric hand 64c of the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. While the normal electric hand 64c is operated, the normal electric hand 64c is immersed in the board from the state in which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes from the board, and the second starting port 64b is in the open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball can easily enter the ball compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83, the symbol stops at the symbol of “」 ”and hits. A state in which a lot of jackpots can be performed can be achieved.

  A deceleration member (not shown) for decelerating a ball rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is formed above the ordinary electric hand 64c. In the thirteenth embodiment, a ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c collides with this deceleration member, so that the time for rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is lengthened. Is configured so that it takes about 3 seconds for the ball to roll on the upper surface from the right end to the left end of the normal electric hand 64c. Therefore, when the ball fired by the right-handed game is rolled on the ordinary electric hand 64c (that is, for about 3 seconds), the ball is released (submerged) when the ordinary electric hand 64c is opened (submerged). Due to its own weight, it can flow downward in the vertical direction of the game board 13 and win a prize in the second starting port 64b, while the normal electric hand 64c closes (protrudes) while rolling on the normal electric hand 64c. When maintained, the normal electric hand 64c rolls from the right end to the left end, and flows down to the small winning opening 72a side arranged on the left side of the gaming board 13 of the normal electric hand 64c in a front view. ing. Although the details will be described later, in the “probability fluctuation state” and the “time reduction state”, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set to less than “3 seconds” (that is, “0.5 seconds”), so that the normal electric While the ball is rolling over the upper 64c, the variable display of the normal symbol ends, and as a result, the ball hits the normal symbol, and the ball rolling above the normal electric hand 64c becomes the second ball. It flows into the second starting port 64b.

  Note that the time for rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to have a short time of less than “3 seconds” (for example, “1 second”) or a long time of “3 seconds” or more (for example, “5 seconds”). The configuration may be such that

  A variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, and a horizontally long large winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 85) is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, The special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39 is illuminated and displayed so as to be a big hit stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit (for example, three identical symbols ("777") is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And the like) are displayed to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot game. Thereafter, the opening / closing plate (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit game) in which the ball can easily enter the big winning opening 65a. In this special game state, the large winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until “30 seconds” elapse or until ten balls are won).

  When the special winning opening 65a is opened, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, the special winning opening 65a is closed, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player. As a provision of a value (game value), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  Below the variable winning device 65, there is provided a transverse feed member 65c for guiding a ball flowing down the right side of the center frame 86 to the upper right end of the ordinary electric hand 64c. By this transverse feed member 65c, a ball fired by a right-handed game, which has not been won in the variable winning device 65, is guided to the right end side of the normal electric hand 64c, and the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c is always Can be rolled.

  As described above, it takes about 3 seconds for the sphere to roll along the slope from the right end to the left end of the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c, so that the ball rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c. In a situation where the ball is not opened for more than 3 seconds (ie, the closed state of the grid 64c is maintained for more than 3 seconds), the ball is moved to the right end of the upper surface of the grid 64c. To the left end, and flows down to the downstream side. On the other hand, when the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c and the ordinary electric hand 64c is opened within about 3 seconds (that is, the closed state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is maintained for about 3 seconds or more). Otherwise, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c flows down to the second starting port 64b side, and is configured to win the second starting port 64b.

  A second variable winning device 72 is disposed on the left side (downstream side) of the second starting port 64b when viewed from the front, and a horizontally long small winning port 72a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 85) is a small hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39 is illuminated and displayed so as to be a small symbol stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the small symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a fixed specific symbol ( "341")) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of the small hit game. Thereafter, the opening / closing plate (not shown) provided in the second variable winning device 72 is opened, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (small hitting game) in which the ball easily enters the small winning opening 72a. In this special game state, the small winning opening 72a which is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until "1.8 seconds" elapses or one ball is won). .

  The opening and closing operation of the small winning opening 72a is configured to be performed only once in one small hitting game. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state (small hitting state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is provided with more gaming value (gaming value) than usual at the time of giving the gaming value (game value). Payout of less prize balls than the jackpot game is performed. In addition, the small winning opening 72a is closed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since opening or a predetermined number of winnings are detected) when the small winning opening 72a is opened, and the small hitting game ends after the closing. Then, the game is restarted in the gaming state before the start of the small hitting game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the ball fired by the right-handed game and not winning the variable winning device 65 is the second ball in the state where the ordinary electric hand 64c is closed for 3 seconds or more. It can flow down to the position where the variable winning device 72 is provided and flow into the small winning opening 72a. On the other hand, in a state where the ordinary electric hand 64c is intermittently opened within three seconds, almost all balls rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c flow down to the second starting port 64b side, and It is configured not to reach the position where the variable winning device 72 is disposed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment.

  The main control device 110 of the thirteenth embodiment is equipped with an MPU 271 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 272. A certain RAM 273 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, the main features of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a setting of dynamic display and a variable effect on the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a variable display display result on the ordinary symbol display device 83. Perform various processing. The RAM 273 is provided with a counter buffer 273c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  The ROM 272 also stores a jackpot random number table 272a, a jackpot type table 272b, a hold number table 272c, a stop pattern table 272d, a fluctuation pattern table 272e, a random number table 272f per ordinary figure, a general figure fluctuation table 272g, an electric utility opening table 272h, and a large jackpot. At least an open table 272i and a small hit open table 272j are stored. Main controller 110 executes the above main control using various counters stored in RAM 273 and various tables stored in ROM 272.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 273 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 39, a setting of a variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a variable display display result in the normal symbol display device 83. It is used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The jackpot lottery and the small hit lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 39, and the setting of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81 include a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the small hit lottery, A jackpot type counter C2 used to select a jackpot symbol stop type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select a rough presentation mode of a variable effect, and a first initial value used to set an initial value of a jackpot random number counter C1. A random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for detailed variation pattern selection are used.

  In addition, a random number counter C4 per ordinary figure (equivalent to the second random number counter C4 in the first embodiment) is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83. A second initial value random number counter CINI2 (equivalent to the second initial value random number counter CINI2 in the first embodiment) is used.

  Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time an update is performed, and the counter returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 17). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 273c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 273. Although details will be described later, the RAM 273 includes a first reserved ball storage area 273d including four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 273e composed of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and in each of these areas, a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 9999”) and becomes a maximum value (for example, “9999” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 9999”). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the update of the jackpot random number counter C1 is performed from the initial value. Done.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of “0 to 9999”, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of “0 to 9999”. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the thirteenth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting opening 64a, the first holding first to first holding provided in the first holding ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first starting opening 64a (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of any of the first holding areas in the fourth area. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b, the second reserved first to first provided in the second reserved ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second starting port 64b (second special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of any of the second holding areas in the fourth area.

  The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot or a small jackpot is set by a jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 272 of the main control device 110. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of the reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 272a1 corresponding to the first special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit. Also, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of the reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 272a2 corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot random number table 272a1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 272 (hereinafter, referred to as a "special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1"). FIG. 87 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 272a2 corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM 272 (hereinafter, referred to as a "special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2"). is there.

  The special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the thirteenth embodiment are respectively for each set value, for the low probability state used when the gaming state is the special symbol low probability state, The game state is divided into two types: a high probability state used in the case of a special symbol high probability state having a higher probability of a big hit than the special symbol low probability state.

  Then, for each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in the low probability state and the high probability state is differently set. Further, an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required for shifting from the low probability state to the high probability state is compensated for from the number of loss random numbers corresponding to the loss. That is, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased in order to shift from the low probability state to the high probability state, the number of lost random numbers is reduced, and the decrease is assigned as the number of jackpot random values. In this way, by changing the number of jackpot random numbers according to the game state, the jackpot probability is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  On the other hand, in each special symbol, the number of small random numbers included in each of the set values and in the low probability state and the high probability state is set to be the same. That is, the number of small random numbers in the first special symbol is the same for each set value, and is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. Similarly, the number of small random numbers in the second special symbol is the same for each set value, and is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. In this way, by setting the number of small random numbers to the same value for each set value in each special symbol, and for the low-probability state and for the high-probability state, all the set values and the game state in each special symbol In this case, the game value giving ratios in which only the small hit games are considered are equalized.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers from the low probability state to the high probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the loss random number value in all the set values. It is configured to supplement from the number of Further, the number of the small random number values of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changed for each set value. That is, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change and the increase in the number of jackpot random values due to the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state for each setting are reduced by the number of the loss random numbers. Then, the reduced amount is compensated by assigning it to the big hit random value, and the number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol small hit random value is the same for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol setting. . With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, and to increase the man-hour when designing the game specification. Can be suppressed.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is determined by the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot random number value that can be obtained when the player is most likely to stay in a game. It is configured to compensate from the role of the most random number other than (the loss random number value). With such a configuration, for example, in the first special symbol whose execution rate is encouraged in the “normal game state” where the stay rate is high, the appearance of the lost role, which is the most frequent role in the variation effect of the first special symbol, appears. Setting discrimination can be made difficult from the number of times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance rate of the jackpot having a lower appearance probability than the losing role as the setting determination element by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is determined by the loss random number value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the loss role of not giving the player a gaming value. It is configured to compensate from the number.

  The losing role is different from the jackpot role and the small winning role, because it is a role that does not provide a game value, and is provided for each pachinko machine 10 and a data lamp (not shown) for displaying a game result or the like in the pachinko machine 10. Is not clearly (largely) displayed. Here, suppose that the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game and the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the small jackpot game which are easily (largely) easily displayed on the data lamp are changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rates of the two elements of the big hit game and the small hit game with a data lamp, the setting discrimination of the pachinko machine 10 is easily guessed. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the change in the setting of the probability set value is determined by using the jackpot random number counter C1 which does not give a game value to a player and is not clearly (broadly) displayed on a data lamp. Is configured so as to compensate from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the above, so that the setting discrimination element by the player is only the appearance rate of the big hit, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is hard to be seen from the appearance rate of the small hit. be able to. Therefore, the discrimination factor of the probability set value is limited to the appearance rate of the hand based on one random number value. The game can be continued without being seen, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the lower the set value, the less the jackpot is generated, and the higher the set value, the more the large jackpot is generated. In the "state", the lower the set value, the longer the stay period of the "super probability fluctuation state" is likely to be. As a result, as the set value is lower, the number of wins in small hits in the “super probability fluctuation state” tends to increase, so that the game value given in the “super probability fluctuation state” increases. Therefore, even if the set value is low, by entering the “super probability fluctuation state”, it is possible to increase the game value that can be given to the player as compared with the case where the set value is high. Therefore, by providing the "super probability fluctuation state", the advantage and disadvantage of the setting difference can be reversed, the variation of the game can be abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 The number of values (big hit random value) of the counter C1 is 50, and the value “0 to 49” is defined (set) in the special drawing 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100. (That is, 0.5%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500, and the values “0 to 499” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are both 100 and low. The value “50 to 149” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 599” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (losing random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9850, the values “150 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that result in a loss is 9400 other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value, and the values “600 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9850/10000 = 98.5 / 100. (That is, 98.5%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9400. / 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9850 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 52, and the value is “0 to 51”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100. (That is, 0.52%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 520, and the value “0 to 519” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 520/10000 = 5.2 / 100 (that is, 5.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is equal to the set value “1”. As in the case, the value “52 to 151” in the case of the low probability state or the value “520 to 619” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Have been. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “2” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. 9848, and the values “152 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is 9380 remaining values other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “620 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9848/10000 = 98.48 / 100. (That is, 98.48%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9380. /10000=93.8/100 (that is, 93.8%).

  That is, at the set value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change in the set value is configured to compensate for the decrease. (That is, 9848 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “1”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 54, and the value is “0 to 53”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become a big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 540, and the values “0 to 539” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100 (that is, 5.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Further, when the set value is “3”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are the set value “1” and As in the case of the set value “2”, the number is 100 each, and the values “54 to 153” in the low probability state or the values “540 to 639” in the high probability state are stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table. 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “3” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 9846, the values “154 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9360 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “640 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9846/10000 = 98.46 / 100. (That is, 98.46%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9360. /10000=93.6/100 (that is, 93.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest staying rate in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9846 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “2”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 56, and the value “0 to 55” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100. (That is, 0.56%).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “4”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) which are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 560, and the values “0 to 559” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 560/10000 = 5.6 / 100 (that is, 5.6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Further, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are set values “1” to “1”. As in the case of “3”, the value is “100” in both cases, and the value “56 to 155” in the case of the low probability state or the value “560 to 659” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “4” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Accordingly, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 9844, the values “156 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of lost random numbers (losing random number values) is the remaining 9340 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9844/10000 = 98.44 / 100. (That is, 98.44%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9340. /10000=93.4/100 (that is, 93.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9844 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “3”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 58, and the value is “0 to 57”. Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100. (That is, 0.58%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 580, and the value “0 to 579” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 580/10000 = 5.8 / It is set to 100 (that is, 5.8%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is from the set value “1” to As in the case of “4”, the values are “100” in both cases, and the values “58 to 157” in the case of the low probability state or the values “580 to 679” in the case of the high probability state are stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “5” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "158 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is 9320 remaining values other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “680-9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9842/10000 = 98.42 / 100. (That is, 98.42%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9320. /10000=93.2/100 (that is, 93.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9842 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “4”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “4”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 60, and the value is “0 to 59”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state”) is 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100. (That is, 0.6%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 600, and the value “0 to 599” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 600/10000 = 6/100 ( That is, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is from the set value “1” to As in the case of “5”, the number is 100 each, and the value “60 to 159” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600 to 699” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “6” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9840, the values “160 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “700 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9840/10000 = 98.4 / 100. (That is, 98.4%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300. / 10000 = 93/100 (that is, 93%).

  That is, at the setting value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (Ie, 9840 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “5”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot is determined in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. The number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) is 50, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, and the value “0 to 49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. Have been. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 500, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500 as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 are both 9400 pieces. The value “50 to 9449” for the low probability state or the value “500 to 9899” for the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 550, the values “9450-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 100 other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value “9900 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / 100. (I.e., 5.5%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 100. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 550 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  As described above, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (1% → 94%), and is smaller than the loss random value of the second special symbol. It is set to the number that can be very easily selected. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, the setting is such that it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit or a loss.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 52, and the values “0 to 51” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 52 / It is set so that 10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%).

  When the setting value is “2”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 520 like the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. The value “0-519” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 520 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.2/100 (that is, 5.2%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. In the same manner as in the case of (1), the value “52 to 9451” in the case of the low probability state or the value “520 to 9919” in the case of the high probability state are specified (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. ) Has been. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “2” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 548, the values “9452 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is the remaining 80 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the values “9920 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 548/10000 = 5.48 / 100. (Ie, 5.48%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 80. /10000=0.8/100 (that is, 0.8%).

  That is, at the setting value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While configuring to compensate for the decrease, the number of big random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase in the set value change is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (That is, 548 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (94%) as compared to the set value “1”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 54, and the values “0 to 53” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 54 / like the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 540, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0 to 539” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 540 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the setting value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “2”, the number is 9400, and the value “54 to 9453” in the case of the low probability state or the value “540 to 9939” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “3” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 546, the values “9454-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 60 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “9940 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 546/10000 = 5.46 / 100. (Ie, 5.46%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 60. /10000=0.6/100 (that is, 0.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (Ie, 546 or less).

  Therefore, although the setting value “3” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is equal to the setting value “2” (both at 94%), the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 56, and the values “0 to 55” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 56 / like the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random number value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 560 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-559” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 560 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.6/100 (that is, 5.6%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the setting value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “3”, the number is “9400” in both cases, and the value “56 to 9455” in the case of the low probability state or the value “560 to 9959” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “4” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 544, the values “9456-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) which are lost is the remaining 40 random numbers other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “9960 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 544/10000 = 5.44 / 100. (Ie, 5.44%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 40. /10000=0.4/100 (that is, 0.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 2 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay rate is the highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 544 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value “3” (both 94%), the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 58, and the values “0 to 57” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 58 / like the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 580 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-579” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 580 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.8/100 (that is, 5.8%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “5”, the number of small random numbers (small hit random value) in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “4”, the number is both 9400, and the value “58 to 9457” in the case of the low probability state or the value “580 to 9979” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “5” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value. For 542, the values “9458-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number values) is the remaining 20 other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 542/10000 = 5.42 / 100. (Ie, 5.42%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 20. /10000=0.2/100 (that is, 0.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 542 or less).

  Therefore, although the setting value “5” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is equal to the setting value “4” (both 94%) and the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “4”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , And 60 values thereof are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 60/60, similar to the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 600, as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. The value “0-599” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 600 as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “5”, there are 9400 pieces in each case, and the value “60 to 9449” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600 to 9999” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “6” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 540, the values “9460 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random numbers and the small random numbers, and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 includes the lost random numbers. The corresponding value is not stored. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100. (I.e., 5.4%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super-probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%) is set so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 2 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 540 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (94%) as the set value “5”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

  As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, the increment of the number of jackpot random numbers in the “probability variation state” is calculated by the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state”. , And within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state”. In addition, the number of small random number values per hit is not changed between the “normal gaming state” and the “probability changing state”. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the jackpot random value, thereby suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specification. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines a jackpot type when a jackpot is reached, and is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”), and the maximum value (for example, “0 to 99”) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take the value of ".", It returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the thirteenth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98)).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the jackpot of the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 273d of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a is won. The random number counter C1 is stored in the big hit type counter storage area 273d2 of the first reservation area which is the same as the first reservation area in which the random number counter C1 is stored. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the jackpot in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. The random number counter C1 is stored in the big hit type counter storage area 273e2 of the second reservation area which is the same as the second reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored.

  Here, for example, a random number (big hit random number value) or a small hit in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 273d or the second holding ball storage area 273e becomes a big hit. If the random number is not a random number (small random number value), that is, if the random number is a loss (losing random number value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are lost. It is time. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is a random number (big hit random number value) which is a big hit, a fluctuation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is a random number (small hit random number value) in which a small hit is obtained, the fluctuation will occur. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in the performance are those at the time of the small hit

  As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”, and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 272. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 272b. The jackpot type table 272b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. Are provided.

  Here, the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 and the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b). FIG. 88 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 88 (b) is also stored in the ROM 272. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), the jackpot type table 272b is provided according to the type of the special symbol (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol). And the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, until the next special jackpot is won (so-called, until the next jackpot. Hereinafter, referred to as “the next jackpot”). ), The special symbol is in the high probability state, the normal symbol is in the low probability state, and the "super probability fluctuation state" corresponding to the "super probability fluctuation state" is the maximum probability round. The number of rounds corresponding to the "probability variation B" corresponding to the "probability variation state" in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are in the high probability state after the jackpot of six rounds until the next jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds While the special symbol's jackpot probability is in the low-probability state until the fluctuation effect of each special symbol is executed 50 times in total after the six round jackpot, the normal symbol Probability per corresponds to a high probability state "time reduction state" there is a "time reduction".

  In the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 and the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2, each big hit type is associated with a possible value of the big hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type.

  In the example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 of FIG. 88 (a), the value “0-9” of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with “probability change A”, and the big hit is obtained with “probability change B”. The value “10-59” of the type counter C2 is associated, and the value “60-99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “time reduction”.

  In the first special symbol win / loss lottery in the thirteenth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 273d becomes a big hit. If the value is the value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2 of the same first reservation area is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “7”, “probability variation A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “50”, “probability variation B” is used as the jackpot type. Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “95”, “time reduction” is determined as the jackpot type.

  In other words, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol as the first lottery game, the jackpot type of “probability variation A” is 10%, the jackpot type of “probability variation B” is 50%, and “ The big hit type of "shortening" will be won at a rate of 40%.

  In the example of the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 in FIG. 88 (b), the value “0 to 29” of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with “probability variation A”, and “probability variation B” is associated with “probability variation B”. The value "30-59" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the value "60-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 for "time reduction".

  In the second special symbol winning / losing lottery in the thirteenth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of any of the first reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e becomes a big hit. If the value is the value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 273e2 of the same first holding area is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “17”, “probability variation A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “40”, “probability variation B” is determined as the jackpot type. Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “85”, “time reduction” is determined as the jackpot type.

  That is, when the big hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol as the second lottery game, the jackpot type of “probability variation A” is 30%, the jackpot type of “probability variation B” is 30%, and “time” The big hit type of "shortening" will be won at a rate of 40%.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, in the first lottery game with the first special symbol, the selection ratio of “probability variation A” having the highest game value is 10%, while the second lottery with the second special symbol. In the game, since the selection ratio of “probability variation A” is 30%, the lottery game using the second special symbol is set to have a higher game value for the player than the lottery game using the first special symbol. For this reason, the player is provided with a game property of how to receive the lottery by the second special symbol, that is, to make the ball enter the second starting port 64b rather than the first starting port 64a. Variations are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 272b according to the set probability.

  Further, the probability of selecting the jackpot type may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 272b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 272b.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to add, for example, "1" in order within a range of "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the rough effect mode of the variable effect at the time of the big hit and the loss at the time of the big hit and the loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the number of the held variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Selected. Specifically, “non-reach (long)” production mode and “non-reach (short)” production mode in which “reach display” does not occur, and “variable element of“ normal reach ”as“ reach display ”are executed. A “normal reach” production mode, a “super-reach” production mode in which the “super-reach” variable element is executed by developing from the “normal-reach” variable element, and a “special-reach” mode that also evolves from the “normal-reach” variable element Is different from the “reach display” effect mode in which the “reach display” effect mode in which the “reach display” is performed and the “extremely long fluctuation” effect condition in which the fluctuation time is set long without the “reach display” occurring An effect mode is selected from a “special fluctuation” effect mode in which a special effect described later is executed.

  Here, each production mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, “non-reach (long)” production mode and “non-reach (short)” production mode (hereinafter, “non-reach (long)” production mode and “non-reach (short)” production mode are collectively referred to. Then, the “non-reach” effect mode may be referred to as “a non-reach” effect mode), in which the three symbol columns (not shown) fluctuate as a special symbol fluctuating effect. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the two symbol columns that stop first after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” in which the “shutter” is shuffled at high speed does not generate “reach display”.

  The variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is, for example, in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each symbol row is scrolled at a high speed vertically downward on the display screen. Means the variable factor that is being used. In this “high-speed change”, the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the variable effect previously stopped and displayed is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, the fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” is executed except for a specific production mode (“non-reach (short)” production mode). It is configured to be.

  The variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” means that in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation”, the third symbol is reduced at a speed visible to the player. Means a variable element that is scrolling. In the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", each symbol row is stopped and displayed in order while the player recognizes the display content of the third symbol. When the same third symbol is stopped in two symbol columns (for example, the left symbol column and the right symbol column) to be stopped and displayed first, it is determined that "reach display" has occurred and the symbol has developed into a variable element of "normal reach". When a different third symbol is stopped in the two symbol columns to be stopped and displayed first, the remaining symbol columns are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is ended.

  Therefore, in the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol row stops in order, and stops first. The third symbol, which is different from the two symbol columns to be stopped, stops, the remaining one symbol column stops, and one variable effect ends. On the other hand, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, after the “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is not performed, and after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element ends, each symbol row is simultaneously displayed. Stopping, a different third symbol is stopped and displayed in two symbol columns (for example, two symbol columns that stop first in the “non-reach (long)” effect mode), and other symbol columns are also stopped and displayed, The variable production of 1 ends.

  In the effect mode, the “normal reach” effect mode refers to “floating effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81, which is“ immediately after the same third symbol stops in the two symbol columns to be stopped and displayed first. The variable element of "normal reach" is executed, and is one of the production modes of the other "reach display", that is, the "reach display" which does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach".

  Among the effect modes, the “super reach” effect mode is one of the “reach display” effect modes in which the “super reach” variable element is developed from the “normal reach” variable element.

  Among the effect modes, the “special reach” effect mode is one of the “reach display” effect modes in which the “normal reach” variable element is developed and the “special reach” variable element is executed.

  In the production mode, the “super long fluctuation” production mode is that the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed for a long time, then the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol row stops in order. The third symbol, which is different from the first symbol row to be stopped first, is stopped, and then the remaining symbol rows are also stopped and displayed, and the one variable effect ends.

  Among the production modes, the “special fluctuation” production mode is a variable element of “normal reach” that can be selected in the “special reach” production mode and a variable element of “special reach” and a variable element of “re-variation”. Is one of the production modes of the “reach display” executed.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the thirteenth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98)). Then, at the timing when the ball has won the first starting port 64a, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first holding ball storage area 273d provided in the first holding ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first starting port 64a. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the second holding ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 of the second holding area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth areas.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the success or failure of the variable effect (big hit, small hit or losing), the current playing state, and the number of the variable effects of the two special symbols currently on hold (the number of holding balls) are described. Accordingly, the stop pattern table 272d that refers to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 272d are provided, and are configured to be selected based on the number of floating effects (the number of reserved balls) of both special symbols in standby.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, when determining a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect, first, based on the number-of-reserved table 272c (see FIG. 89) provided in the ROM 272, whether or not the fluctuation effect is appropriate is determined. One of the stop pattern tables 272d corresponding to the state and the current number of variable effects (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 272d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode which is a rough mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and a value of a variation type counter CS1 described later.

  The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 272d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected differs for each stop pattern table 272d. The plurality of stop pattern tables 272d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the success / failure of the variable effect, the game state, and the number of balls to be held. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “super probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state”, “time reduction state”. Alternatively, the selection ratio of the production mode is changed according to whether the game is in the “normal game state” and (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable production being reserved.

  The first reason is to change the degree of expectation to be a big hit for each effect mode. That is, in the case of winning in the jackpot lottery and in the case of losing the jackpot lottery, a stop pattern, that is, a “non-reach” production mode, a “normal reach” production mode, a “super reach” production mode, and a “special reach” production By configuring the selection ratios of the modes to be different from each other, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is changed for each effect mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the “super reach” production mode or the “special reach” production mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the “non-reach” production The mode and the "normal reach" effect mode are configured to be easily selected.

  With such a configuration, the “super reach” production mode and the “special reach” production mode can be a large-hit production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode and the “non-reach” production mode are hard to hit. An effect or a non-jackpot effect can be set, and the jackpot expectation degree for each effect mode can be differentiated. Therefore, when an effect that easily hits the fluctuation effect appears, while the effect that easily hits is performed, it is suggested to the player that a jackpot is likely to occur, and the interest of the game is enhanced. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, the stop pattern table 272d in which it is easy to select an effect that is easy to hit and it is difficult to select an effect that is hard to hit. The effect mode (stop pattern), which is the rough content of the variable effect, is selected based on the above. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that is easy to hit, and the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect is based on the stop pattern table 272d that is easy to select an effect that is hard to hit. Configure to select. Thereby, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a jackpot is easily generated in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. In this case, a jackpot is less likely to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the jackpot expected value for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

  Further, as a second reason, the number of times of entering the first starting port 64a in the state where the number of times of waiting for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible the useless balls (so-called non-lottery of special symbols due to overflow prize) based on the ball entering the second start-up port 64b in the state of reaching.

  More specifically, the maximum number of standby times for the variable effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four at a maximum, and the variable effect is performed for at least a fixed time. In the gaming state in which a ball easily enters the second starting port 64b in the “probability variation state”, “probability variation state”, and “time reduction state”, it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In these game states, if a fluctuating effect with a long fluctuating time is selected, the ball frequently enters the second starting port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has been reached, and the angle and the second starting port Despite having entered the ball at 64b, the second special symbol lottery opportunity cannot be obtained. Also, in the “normal game state”, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is held during the execution of the fluctuation effect. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, it is not possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In such a state, the player determines that the game value is not obtained even if the ball is thrown into the first starting port 64a, and the player is excited for the game, and the fluctuation effect is digested. The game is stopped and the game is interrupted until the number of reserved balls can be obtained again.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, a gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is easily reached, or a value close to (or coincides with) the maximum number of reserved balls. With the number of reserved balls, the effect form of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 272d in which the short change time is easy to select. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) has been reached. it can.

  Further, as a third reason, by setting a long execution time and delaying the end of the variable effect, the state in which the variable effect is executed is maintained for a long time. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small (absent), a ball is newly inserted into either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b within the changing time of the running variable effect. If the ball is not balled, the next fluctuation effect cannot be started, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the case where the fluctuation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the player plays a game by firing a ball, it is possible to obtain an interest relating to the jackpot lottery required by the player. Instead, it gets excited to the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b because the variable effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a possibility that the game with the pachinko machine 10 may be stopped because it is determined that the game value is difficult to obtain.

  In view of this, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 272d in which the long change time is easily selected when the number of balls to be changed is small. I have. This makes it difficult for a situation in which the variable effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 to be maintained, and the execution state of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

  Further, as a fourth reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is a so-called simultaneous fluctuating machine capable of executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol simultaneously and in parallel. However, a special symbol to be executed (encourageed) for each game state is set (defined) in advance as a game specification. In order to actively draw a special symbol to be executed for each game state, temporarily When a lottery opportunity for a special symbol that is not desired to be executed in a predetermined game state (not recommended) is acquired, a predetermined penalty (penalty) is given.

  Specifically, for example, in the “normal gaming state”, a left-handed game is previously encouraged as a game specification, and the left-handed game is performed, and the big hit game is won in the dynamic display of FIG. While obtaining the game value of the jackpot game, the game property of realizing the accompanying “super-probability change state”, “probability change state”, or “time reduction state” depending on the jackpot type is realized. Also, in the "time shortened state", a right-handed game is previously recommended as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and how the special display 2 is dynamically displayed during the situation where the winning assisting state is valid. In the above, the game performance of whether to win the jackpot game is realized. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", a right-handed game is previously encouraged as a game specification, and the next big-hit game becomes any big-hit type while performing the right-handed game and maintaining the winning assisting state. Or not. In the "super probability fluctuation state", a right-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and although there is no prize assisting state, while the second starting port 64b is appropriately awarded, Based on the winning, the small winning game is won, and the ball is increased to the small winning opening 72a, so that the number of possessed balls is increased. The big winning game based on the winning in the second starting opening 64b is not won. The game specification is set in advance so as to realize the game characteristics of how to keep the period of the “super probability fluctuation state” long.

  Therefore, in the “normal game state”, the execution of the dynamic display of the special figure 1 based on the left-handed game is encouraged, while in the “super probability fluctuation state”, the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time reduction state”, The execution of the dynamic display of the special map 2 based on the right-handed game is encouraged. Here, if the game is not executed according to the above-described game specifications, in particular, in the “normal game state”, an action of executing the dynamic display of the special figure 2 and simultaneously executing the dynamic display of the special figure 1 is performed. In the event that the game has been lost, a game result different from the payout rate based on the game specification originally set may be derived, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, in the "normal gaming state", when the total number of reserved special symbols is 5 or more, that is, at least one reserved special figure 2 is not encouraged. In the case where a plurality of dynamic displays of the special figure 1 are suspended (for example, four) in the presence of the above, the dynamic display of the special symbol newly started (the dynamic display of the special figure 1 ) Is performed for a long time (for example, 5 minutes) to reduce the execution efficiency of dynamic display of special symbols. With this configuration, when a ball is awarded to the second starting port 64b which causes the dynamic display of the special figure 2 which is not recommended as a game specification, the dynamic state of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 By lowering the execution efficiency of the display, it is possible to lower the efficiency of giving the game value. As a result, it is possible to hesitate the player to execute the dynamic display of the special figure 2 in a game state where the execution of the dynamic display of the special figure 2 is not encouraged (that is, the “normal game state”), It is possible to prevent a game different from the assumed game specification from being performed, thereby reducing a disadvantage to the hall.

  In the "super probability fluctuation state", the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the left-handed game is not promoted as the game specification, but the non-recommended game (that is, the left-handed game) is performed. Even in this case, the gaming value obtained by the player is set lower than when the recommended game (that is, the right-handed game) is performed. For this reason, the game mode is not disadvantageous to the game hall, and no special penalty is provided.

  Here, the details of the number-of-reservations table 272c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 272c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, when performing a fluctuating effect based on the fact that a ball has entered the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, Based on the gaming state at that time and the total number of fluctuation effects of special figures 1 and 2 at that time as well, referring to the number-of-reservations table 272c, one of the stop pattern tables 272d1 to 272d5 is selected. Is configured. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 272d1 to 272d5 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

  Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 272c of FIG. 89, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the total number of reserved balls is “1 to 3”, or When the loss is extracted in the “state”, “probability variation state”, or “time reduction state” and the total number of reserved balls is “1”, the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 90A) ) Is selected.

  In addition, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the number of reserved balls is “4”, or when the loss is extracted in the “super probability fluctuation state”, the “probability fluctuation state”, or the “time reduction state”. If the number of reserved balls is "2 to 8", the B table 272d2 (see FIG. 90B) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected.

  Further, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the number of retained balls is “5 to 8”, the C table 272d3 (see FIG. 90C) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected. .

  In addition, at the time of winning the jackpot (ie, when extracting the “16R probability variable jackpot”, the “6R probability variable jackpot”, and the “6R short time jackpot”), the stop pattern table 272d regardless of the game state or the number of retained balls. Is selected (see FIG. 91A).

  Further, at the time of winning a small hit (that is, at the time of extracting a small hit game), the E table 272d5 (see FIG. 91 (b)) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of retained balls. Is done.

  That is, when any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 272d (D table 272d4) is selected based on only the type of the jackpot, regardless of the number of retained balls or the game state at that time, and the small jackpot is won. In this case, the stop pattern table 272d (E-table 272d5) is selected based only on the winning of the small hit, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, and the winning pattern or the small hit is selected. Only when the winning is not made (that is, at the time of losing), the stop pattern table 272d (A table 272d1, B table 272d2 or C table 272d3) is selected based on the number of retained balls and the game state at that time.

  It should be noted that, even when a big hit or a small hit is won, the stop pattern table 272d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a jackpot is won, a stop pattern table 272d in which a relatively short variation pattern is easily selected may be selected.

  In this case, for example, in each effect mode in which the “reach display” is executed, the effect mode in which only the time of the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. . With this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, even if the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed in 5 seconds, At the time point when the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds ends (at the time point when it is recognized as a variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds), “reach display” may occur in the fluctuation effect. For this reason, even when the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds is performed, an effect mode in which “reach display” is executed other than the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is executed. By doing so, at the time of execution of the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element for 5 seconds, it is not possible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss.

  Next, each stop pattern table 272d will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 272d that can be selected at the time of loss, and FIG. 90A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d. (B) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the B table 272d2 of the stop pattern table 272d, and FIG. 90 (c) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the C table 272d3 of the stop pattern table 272d. is there. FIG. 91 is a diagram schematically illustrating a stop pattern table 272d selected at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and FIG. 91A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d. FIG. 91B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d.

  As shown in FIG. 90A, in the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” production mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” production mode is “95” to “95”. 97, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is set to “98”, “99”. In the A table 272d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode and the “extremely long fluctuation”, and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode and The “super long fluctuation” effect mode is set so as not to be selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, in the B table 272d2 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is “95”. To "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the B table 272d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode and the “super long fluctuation” effect mode, and the “non-reach (long)” effect The mode and the “super long fluctuation” effect mode are set so as not to be selected.

  That is, in the A table 272d1, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. In the B table 272d2, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio.

  Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the A table 272d1, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the B table 272d2 instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, it can be said that the A table 272d1 tends to have a relatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 272d2. In other words, it can be said that the B-table 272d2 is more likely to have the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation effect shorter than the A-table 272d1.

  The selection ratios of the “normal reach” effect, the “super reach” effect, and the “special reach” effect with the A table 272d1 and the B table 272d2 are set to be equal.

  In this way, when the loss lottery result is extracted, the effect form of the variable effect is selected based on the number of balls on hold for the variable effect on hold. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. Thereby, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened, and the execution number of the variable effect is increased, whereby the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be increased.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending balls for the variable effect is small, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is used in order to secure the ball entry time to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is long is selected. Thereby, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is longer than when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected can be performed, and thus the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The situation in which the variable effect is being executed by making it easier to secure the ball entry time for the ball, and by increasing the possibility that a new starting prize will occur during the execution time of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. Can be maintained.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), in the C table 272d3 of the stop pattern table 272d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “super long fluctuation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other "losing display" or "reach display" is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when the total number of special symbols held is 5 or more in the “normal game state” is set to always be the “super long fluctuation” effect mode.

  With this configuration, in the “normal game state”, when the number of reserved special symbols is 5 or more, that is, when there is at least one or more reserved special figure 2 which is not encouraged, In the case where a plurality of dynamic displays of Toku-zu 1 are held, a fluctuation effect of a newly started special symbol (even if the dynamic display of Toku-zu 1 is performed) is performed for a long time (for example, 5 minutes). It is configured to reduce the execution efficiency of the special symbol fluctuation effect. As a result, when a ball is awarded to the second starting port 64b, which is not encouraged as a game specification, and the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 can be executed, the execution efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is reduced. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of giving the game value. As a result, in the game state in which the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 is not encouraged, the player wins the prize (that is, the execution of the right-handed game) to the second starting port 64b which is a trigger of the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the assumed game specification for each game state, and reduce disadvantages to the hall.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the stop pattern table 272d that is selected based on the number of retained balls in the variable effect is configured to be different when selecting the effect mode in the loss effect variable effect. Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected by the determination of the variable effect based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b and the determination of the variable effect based on the start of the variable effect based on the entering ball. Is configured.

  Specifically, in the case of a loss effect fluctuating effect, one of the A table 272d1 and the B table 272d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls of the fluctuating effect, but the A table 272d1 And the B table 272d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is the same, and is assigned to another effect mode. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

  That is, the only difference is whether the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable effect. The only effect is that the effect mode is substantially the same except for the time of the effect element. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even when the game state transitions (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even if a look-ahead notice such as "holding change notice" is made based on the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning, the content of the variable effect to be executed becomes substantially the same, and the target of the look-ahead notice Can be executed in which no inconsistency occurs with the contents of the prefetch notice.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91A, in the D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is set to “5” to “39”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is “40” to “40”. 99 ". In the D table 272d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “special fluctuation” effect mode, and the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. The D table 272d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, and since "reach display" always occurs, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91B, in the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is allocated only to the “special fluctuation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other “reach display” is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when the small hit is won is always set to the “special fluctuation” effect mode. Since the E table 272d5 is the stop pattern table 272d selected at the time of the small hit, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  That is, in the D table 272d4, the selection ratio is set such that the “normal reach” effect mode is 5%, the “super reach” effect mode is 35%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 60%. In the E table 272d5, the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set so as to have a selection ratio of 100%.

  Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode> It is set so that the selection ratio increases in the order of “super-reach” effect mode> “special reach” effect mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree at the time of appearance of each “reach display” is likely to show the jackpot display result in the order of “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode It is configured to be. Thereby, the degree of expectation to the big hit can be shown to the player by the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy a feeling of uplifting to the big hit according to the effect mode of the executed variable effect.

  As described above, the situation in which a game is played by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of executions of the variable effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

  In the case where the number of retained balls in the variable effect is large (for example, “4”), when “reach display” is selected, the stop pattern in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” of each “reach display” is shortened A table 272d may be provided. In addition, when the number of reserve balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 272d may be provided in which the effect element of “low speed change” is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 272d in which the selectivity of each effect mode is completely different from each other may be provided according to the number of retained balls of the variable effect. However, in the case where the selectivity of each effect mode is different depending on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the execution of the pre-reading advance notice and There may be a case where the number of reserved balls at the time of execution of the fluctuation effect that is the target of the prefetch notice is different. In such a case, it is necessary to perform a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, so that the process becomes complicated.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to add “1” in order within a range of “0 to 9” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value (that is, “9”). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. Of the obtained first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 273e of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. Of the obtained second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variation type counter storage area 273e4 of the second reserved area.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used for determining a detailed fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect. That is, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 272e stored in the ROM 272 to produce detailed information on the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 272d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuating time. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1. In addition, the presence or absence of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

  As described above, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With this configuration, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed notice lottery control or the like necessary for executing the variable production, so that the processing of the MPU 271 related to the variable production can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 to prepare commands for all the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby performing the fluctuation effect. The degree of freedom for selection can be increased. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes every moment, it is possible to select or change the effect contents of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern table 272e will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as the fluctuation pattern table 272e, a special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 commonly used in all game states when the first special symbol is lost, and when the first special symbol has a big hit. Or, the special pattern 1 large hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2 which is used at the time of the small hit and is commonly used in all the game states, and is used at the time of the loss of the second special symbol and the "normal game state" Special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 used in the case of "big game state" at the time of big hit or small hit of the second special symbol, When the second special symbol is lost, the "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" (hereinafter, "super probability fluctuation state") The "moving state", the "probability changing state" and the "time reduction state" are sometimes collectively referred to as "probable change / time saving time". A special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e6 used when the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit and "probable change / time saving time" is prepared.

  FIG. 92A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. FIG. 93A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the small hit variation pattern table 272e2. FIG. 93A illustrates an example of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 for the “normal game state” stored in the ROM 272. FIG. 93 (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 for the “normal game state” stored in the ROM 272. FIG. 94A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 for “probability change / time saving” stored in the ROM 272. 4 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a stored is "probability variation-time reduction when" JP Figure 2 for the big hit, small prize fluctuation pattern table 272e6 for the ROM 272. As shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, each of the variation pattern tables 272e1 to 272e6 is divided into groups based on the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, as the production mode at the time of the loss, “E0: non-reach (long)” and “non-reach (short)” productions referred to when the “non-reach (long)” production mode is determined “E1: non-reach (short)” referred to when the aspect is determined, “E2: normal reach” referenced when the “normal reach” production mode is determined, and “super reach” production mode Are determined when “E3: Super Reach” is produced, and “E4: Special Reach” is produced when the “Special Reach” production mode is determined. It is classified into “E5: super long fluctuation” which is referred to when it is determined. In addition, as the production mode at the time of the big hit and the small hit, it is referred to when the “normal reach” rendering mode is determined and “E6: normal reach” and when the “super reach” rendering mode is determined. "E7: Super Reach", "E9: Special Reach", which is referred to when the production mode is determined, and "E9: Special Reach", and "E9", which is referred to when the "special variation" production mode is determined. : Special fluctuation ”. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first special symbol is a big hit value (big hit random value) and a small hit value. If it is not (small hit random number value), that is, if the value is a loss, referring to the reserved number table 272c, based on the playing state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time. Then, the stop pattern table 272d is selected, and an effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 which is referred to when the first special symbol is lost, “E0: non-reach (long)” has “15 seconds” for the entire variation time ““ high-speed variation (long) ”. "Variable element + variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" (variation time. In the following, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time").

  In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ the low-speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. “Variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is associated with all possible values (“0 to 9”). In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. You.

  Here, each variable element constituting the variable pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation”, the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”, the variable element of “normal reach”, the variable element of “super reach”, and the variable element of “special reach” A variable element and a variable element of “re-change” are provided.

  The variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is a variable element that scrolls at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the contents of the third symbol. When the “non-reach (short)” effect mode or the like is selected, the variable element of the “high-speed change” is performed “5 seconds” at the beginning of the variable effect (hereinafter, referred to as “high-speed change (short)”). If the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the like is selected, “10 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the variable effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “high-speed change (long)”), When the “super long fluctuation” effect mode is selected, “595 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the fluctuation effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “high speed fluctuation (extremely long)”), and the “high probability fluctuation / time saving time” “3 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as “high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)”). It should be noted that, when the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” ends, a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” to be described later is started (executed) or the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

  The variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is started after the execution of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" of "3 seconds", "5 seconds", "10 seconds" or "595 seconds" so that the third symbol can be visually recognized. This is a variable element that indicates whether or not “reach display” is generated by scrolling. The fluctuation element of the “low speed fluctuation” is not executed when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected, and is not performed in the effect mode other than the “non-reach (short)” effect mode (for example, “non-reach (long)”. ) If "effect mode" is selected, "5 seconds" is performed after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation".

  That is, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, after the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, each symbol row of the third symbol display device 81 rapidly changes without passing through the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”. (It stops). In addition, when the fluctuation element of this “low-speed fluctuation” ends, the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode includes a “fast change” fluctuation element of “10 seconds” and a “slow change” fluctuation element of “5 seconds”. A fluctuation effect is constituted by the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation effect. Further, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, a variable effect is configured with a change pattern of only a “fast change” change element of “5 seconds”. Further, in the “super long fluctuation” effect mode, a fluctuation effect is configured by a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” of “595 seconds” and a fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” of “5 seconds”.

  When the same symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “reach forming symbol”) is stopped and displayed in the symbol row of 2 which stops first in the variable element of “low speed variation”, the variable element of “normal reach” is the remaining element. Is a variable element that indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur depending on the result of the change in the symbol sequence. The variable element of “normal reach” is performed “5 seconds” after the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”, a pattern that directly shows “loss display”, a pattern that directly shows “big hit display”, and a pattern of “super reach” A pattern that evolves into a variable element, a pattern that evolves into a “special reach” variable element, and a pattern that executes a “re-change” variable element once a temporary “losing display” appears Have been.

  The variable element of “super reach” is developed and executed when the change of the remaining symbol row is continued without stopping the “loss display” in the variable element of “normal reach”, and in the third symbol display device 81 This is a variable element that indicates whether a big hit occurs by performing a predetermined effect (for example, “battle effect”). The variable element of “super reach” is performed “10 seconds” after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “super reach”, a temporary pattern of “miss display” and a pattern of direct “big hit display” are temporarily set. And a pattern for executing a variable element of “re-variation” after the “loss display” appears.

  The variable element of “special reach” is developed and executed when the “loss display” is not stopped and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol columns is continued in the variable element of “normal reach”. This is a variable element that indicates whether a special effect (for example, “competitive effect”) different from the predetermined effect is performed and a jackpot occurs. The variable element of “special reach” is performed for “20 seconds” after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “special reach”, a temporary pattern of “loss display” and a pattern of direct “big hit display” are temporarily set. And a pattern that "re-fluctuates" after "miss display" appears.

  It should be noted that it is configured to develop into a variable element of “super reach” or a variable element of “special reach” after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”. When the symbol stops, it may be configured such that it does not pass through the variable element of “normal reach” and suddenly develops into the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach”. Further, the configuration may be such that the variable element of “special reach” is performed after the execution of the variable element of “super reach”.

  The variable element of “re-change” is a variable element that develops and executes after “losing display” once appears in any of the “reach displays”, and appears as “big hit display”. The variable element of this “re-change” is performed “5 seconds” after any of the “reach display”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, a pattern in which “big hit display” or “small hit display” appears after the execution of the “re-change” variable element is prepared.

  Further, the variable element of the “re-change” is configured to be generated only when the big hit game or the small hit game is won. In other words, in the case of "losing display", the variable element of "re-change" is not executed. This is because the variable element of “re-change” is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed “losing” to “big hit” or “small hit”. If it is done in the case of "losing display" that is not done, inconsistencies in the production will occur. Therefore, the variable element of this "re-change" is selected only in the big hit / small hit change pattern tables 272e2, 272e4, 272e6 (see FIGS. 92 (b), 93 (b) and 94 (b)). It is configured not to be selected in the loss variation pattern tables 272e1, 272e3, 272e5 (see FIGS. 92 (a), 93 (a) and 94 (a)).

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E1: non-reach (short)” includes one of “only high-speed variation (short) variation elements” with a total variation time of “5 seconds”. There are two fluctuation patterns.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only for the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 referred to when performing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 is set. All the possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “only the high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation element is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, in the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E2: normal reach” has a fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + a fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “20 seconds”. + Variable element of "normal reach"].

  In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "0 to 9" for the "variable element of" normal reach "", and only the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ the fluctuation element of" normal reach "" Is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all the fluctuation type counters CS1 can take. The value (“0 to 9”) is associated with “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ””. That is, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”” Is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E3: Super Reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with a total variation time of “30 seconds”. A variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”” is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “super reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + “Normal reach” fluctuation element + “super reach” fluctuation element ”alone.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss variable pattern table 272e1 that is referred to at the time of performing the variable effect of the first special symbol, all the possible values of the variable type counter CS1 can be obtained. (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”” Have been. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long) + variation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”is always used as the fluctuation pattern. + “Variable element of“ super reach ”” is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E4: special reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with an overall variation time of “40 seconds”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element "alone.

  That is, in any game state, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 that is referred to at the time of performing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” Have been. That is, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variation element of “normal reach” is always used as the fluctuation pattern. + “Variable element of“ special reach ”” is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e1 for the special figure 1 loss, “E5: super long fluctuation” includes a fluctuation element of “high speed fluctuation (super long)” of “600 seconds” + “low speed fluctuation”. Of fluctuation factors ”is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E5: super long fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high speed fluctuation (super long) ”+“ low speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ the variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" are set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “extremely long fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be taken. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ””. That is, in the case of the “super long fluctuation” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “variation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ variation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. .

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of the loss of the special figure 1 is determined as the variation pattern as it is, and the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. In addition, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, the selection may be made using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of the presence or absence of a notice display or the like).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92 (b), the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2 referred to at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that is a big hit or a small hit, With reference to the reserved number table 272c, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of retained balls at that time, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to is determined in the special figure 1 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2 based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2, the change pattern (change time) associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same hold area is stored in the hold area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the suspended fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2, “E6: Normal Reach” has a total change time of “20 seconds” and a “high-speed change (long)” change element + “low-speed change” change. Element + “normal reach” fluctuation element ”, and the entire fluctuation time is“ 25 seconds ”“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”fluctuation element +“ low-speed fluctuation ”fluctuation element +“ normal reach ”fluctuation element +“ re The two variation patterns “variation element of variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: Normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Variable element of" normal reach "", "0 to 2", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation of" re-variation " "3-9" for "element".

  That is, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2 which is referred to at the time of executing the change effect of the first special symbol, ““ high speed change (long) )), The fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal-reach fluctuation" is 30%, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" Is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the special hit of the special map 1, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the“ re- fluctuation ” The variation pattern of the “variable element” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation element of“ high-speed variation (long) ”+ variation element of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”” is selected so that any variation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game that can be expected to be a big hit.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2, "E7: Super Reach" has a variation factor of "high speed variation (long)" with a total variation time of "30 seconds" + "low speed variation". ”+“ Normal reach ”fluctuation +“ super reach ”fluctuation” and “high-speed fluctuation (long) fluctuation + low-speed fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “35 seconds”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each variation pattern Are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”,“ 0-3 ”,“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” “Variable element + variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is “4 to 9”.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2 which is referred to at the time of executing the first special symbol change effect, ““ high speed change ( Variable) "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach "" is 40%, and the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long) + The variation pattern of "low-speed variation" + variation factor of "normal reach" + variation factor of "super reach" + variation factor of "re-variation" is set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the “super-reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 1, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ super-reach ” (Variable element of “+ variable element of re-change”) ”(60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ fluctuation element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2, "E8: special reach" has a variable factor of "high-speed variation (long)" + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "40 seconds". ”+“ Normal reach ”+“ Special reach ”variance” and “High speed (long) variability” + “Slow variability” with a total variance of 45 seconds. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each variation pattern Are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”,“ 0-4 ”,“ fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” Variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation"].

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2 which is referred to when the first special symbol changing effect is executed, ““ high speed change ( Variable) "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" special reach "] is 50%, and the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" The variation pattern of “low-speed variation” + the variation factor of “normal reach” + the variation factor of “special reach” + the variation factor of “re-variation” is selected such that the variation pattern is 50%.

  Therefore, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the special hit of special figure 1, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ special reach ” Of "variable element" and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach" + the variable element of "re-variation" Is selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected in any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2, "E9: special change" has a total change time of "45 seconds", "high-speed change (long)" change element + "low-speed change". , A fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “special reach” + a fluctuation element of “re-change”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E9: special fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are “0 to 9”, and the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + Variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + Variable element of "Normal reach" + Variable element of "Special reach" + Variable element of "re-variation" are set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the "special fluctuation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, all the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. (“0-9”), “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+” It is set so that the same variation pattern as the variation element of “special reach” + the variation element of “re-variation” is selected without exception. Thus, the fluctuation pattern of the “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the fluctuation element of“ special reach ”+ the fluctuation element of“ re- fluctuation ”” In this case, it is possible to expect a big hit or a small hit, and to provide a game property in which some game value is given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when a big hit or a small hit is won, by configuring a relatively long change pattern to be easily selected, the content of the variable effect in which a big hit or a small hit occurs can be enhanced to enhance the game content. Interest can be improved. In addition, in the case where the big hit and the small hit are not won, that is, in the case of a loss, a relatively short fluctuation pattern such as a “non-reach” effect mode is configured to be easily selected, so that the fluctuation effect at the time of the loss is achieved. Can shorten the effect contents, and can efficiently consume the variable effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93 (a), the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 that is referred to when the second special symbol is lost in the “normal game state” (that is, “normal time”) will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value of a big hit or a small hit, that is, a loss occurs. If the value is a value, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls reserved at that time with reference to the reservation number table 272c and stored in the same reservation area. The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the "normal game state", "E0: non-reach (long)" indicates that the overall variation time is "high-speed variation (extremely long)" of "600 seconds". And a fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation".

  In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+“ low speed ”. "Variable element of fluctuation" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the “normal game state”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9)) is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation pattern is always “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+“ the low-speed fluctuation ”. Is selected. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the "normal game state", "E1: non-reach (short)" indicates that the total variation time is "595 seconds" and "high-speed variation (super 1) is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed to “only high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) fluctuation elements”. On the other hand, it is set to "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (extremely long) "" can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, ““ high speed ”is set for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the variation type counter CS1. Only the variation element of “variation (extremely long)” is associated. In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, “variable element of“ high-speed change (extremely long) ”is always selected as the change pattern. Is done. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the “normal game state”, “E2: normal reach” indicates that the entire variation time is “605 seconds” and “high-speed variation (extremely long)”. Fluctuation element + variation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variation element of “normal reach”].

  In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "is" 0-9 ", and" "high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element " Only set to be selectable.

  In other words, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “high-speed variation (extremely long) is performed for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the variation type counter CS1. )) + Variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variable element of “normal reach”]. That is, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the change element of “high-speed change (extremely long)” + “low-speed change” is always used as the change pattern. + “Normal reach” variable ”is selected. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the "normal game state", "E3: super reach" has "615 seconds" for the entire variation time of "" high speed variation (extremely long) "". , A fluctuation element of “low speed fluctuation” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “super reach”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. “0-9” for “variable element +“ normal reach ”variable element +“ super-reach ”variable element”, and “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ” Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “super-reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, ““ high-speed variation (ultra) ”is performed for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the variation type counter CS1. Long), a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “super reach”. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation pattern of “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ” Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the “normal game state”, “E4: Special Reach” has “625 seconds” for the entire variation time of “High-speed variation (extremely long)”. And a fluctuation element of “low speed fluctuation” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “special reach”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-9" for "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" special reach "variable element" and "" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "fluctuation element +" low-speed fluctuation "fluctuation Element + “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ””.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “high-speed variation (ultra-high speed variation) is performed for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the variation type counter CS1. Long), a “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element, a “normal reach” fluctuation element, and a “special reach” fluctuation element ”. In other words, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation pattern is always “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the "normal game state", "E5: super long fluctuation" indicates that the entire fluctuation time is "" high speed fluctuation (super long) "of" 600 seconds ". And a fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation".

  In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E5: super long fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high speed fluctuation (super long) ”+“ low speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

  That is, when the “extremely long fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e3, the “high-speed fluctuation (“ 0 to 9 ”) is performed for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Ultra-long) + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”. In other words, in the case of the “super long fluctuation” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation pattern is always “the fluctuation element of“ high speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low speed fluctuation ”. Variable element "is selected. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93 (b), a special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 referred to at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the second holding ball storing area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit or a value that becomes a small hit, With reference to the reserved number table 272c, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of retained balls at that time, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to is determined in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, a change pattern (change time) associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same hold area is stored in the hold area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the suspended fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 referred to in the “normal game state”, “E6: Normal Reach” has “605 seconds” for the entire change time and “High-speed change (extremely long)”. Fluctuation element + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" "and fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "with fluctuation time of" 610 seconds "+ fluctuation of" low-speed fluctuation " An element + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “re-change” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach"], fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + "re- fluctuation" "3-9" for the "variable element".

  That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 which is referred to at the time of executing the change effect of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", "" High speed change ( 30% of the fluctuation pattern of the "fluctuation factor of" Ultra-long) "+" fluctuation factor of "Slow-fluctuation" + "fluctuation of" normal reach "" + Variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “re-variation” ”is set to be selected at a rate of 70%. Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad).

  Therefore, although the time efficiency of the game is low, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the big hit in Toku-zu 2, the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)” + the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” (Variable element + variable element of "re-variation") "(70% of the total). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation element of“ high-speed variation (extremely long) ”+ variation element of“ slow variation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”” is configured to be selected. However, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 referred to in the “normal game state”, “E7: Super Reach” indicates “615 seconds” for the entire change time of “High-speed change (super Variable element of “long”) + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super-reach” ”and“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”with a total fluctuation time of“ 620 seconds ” ”+“ Low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”fluctuation +“ super-reach ”fluctuation +“ re-variation ”fluctuation. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-3" for "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" super-reach "variable element", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" normal reach " "+ Fluctuation element of" super-reach "+" fluctuation element of "re-fluctuation" ".

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 which is referred to at the time of executing the change effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, ““ high speed change ” (Ultra-long) "fluctuation factor +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element +" Super reach "fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, and "High-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" fluctuation The fluctuation pattern of the element + the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "super reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" is set to be selected at a rate of 60%. ing. Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad).

  Therefore, although the time efficiency of the game is low, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of the big hit in Toku-zu 2, the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)” + the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” ”+“ Super-reach ”+“ re-variation ”fluctuation pattern” (60% of the total). Also, a variation pattern of “variable element of“ high-speed variation (extremely long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed variation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 referred to in the "normal game state", "E8: Special Reach" indicates that the entire change time is "625 seconds" and "High Speed Change (Super Variable) element of + slow fluctuation + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach", and "high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)" with a total fluctuation time of "630 seconds" ”+“ Low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”fluctuation +“ special reach ”fluctuation +“ re-variation ”fluctuation. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-4", "fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" normal reach "for fluctuation element + fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation element of" special reach " ”+“ Variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” ”.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 that is referred to at the time of executing the changing effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, ““ high speed changing ” (Ultra-long) "+" Low-speed fluctuation "+" Normal reach "+" Special reach "fluctuation pattern is 50%, and" High-speed fluctuation (Ultra-long) "fluctuation It is set so that the fluctuation pattern of the element + the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "special reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" is 50%. ing. Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad).

  Therefore, although the time efficiency of the game is low, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Toku-zu, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)” + the fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” And "special reach" fluctuation patterns and "high-speed fluctuations (extremely long)" fluctuations + "slow fluctuations" fluctuations + "normal reach" fluctuations + "special reach" (Variable element + variable element of “re-variation”) ”(50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected in any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 referred to in the "normal game state", "E9: special change" indicates that the entire change time is "630 seconds" and "high speed change (super Long), a “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element, a “normal reach” fluctuation element, a “special reach” fluctuation element, and a “re- fluctuation” fluctuation element ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E9: special fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-9" for the variable element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "special reach" + the variable element of "re-change", and the "high-speed change (extremely long)" It is set so that only the variable element + the variable element of “low speed fluctuation” + the variable element of “normal reach” + the variable element of “special reach” + the variable element of “re-variation” can be selected.

  That is, when the “special fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e4, which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation type counter CS1 “Variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”for all values (“ 0 to 9 ”) that can be selected in the“ special reach ”effect mode And the fluctuation pattern of “special reach” + the fluctuation element of “re-fluctuation” ”. Accordingly, the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)" + the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "special reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" In the pattern, a big hit or a small hit can be expected, a game property that some game value is given is provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad). With such a configuration, in the “normal game state”, when a ball is awarded to the second starting port 64b and the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is executed, it is much longer than the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol. Since the fluctuation effect of time (that is, at least “595 seconds” or more) is executed, the execution efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is compared with the execution efficiency of the first special symbol, It is set to be very bad. Therefore, the profit (merit) of winning the second starting port 64b in the “normal game state” can be reduced as much as possible.

  Furthermore, when the total number of reserved first and second special symbols is large, a very long variation time is selected in the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol. Therefore, in a situation where the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is reserved, even if it is attempted to execute the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the time efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol can be reduced. In the "normal gaming state", the profit (merit) of winning the second starting port 64b can be further reduced. As a result, in the game state in which the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 is not encouraged, the player wins the prize (that is, the execution of the right-handed game) to the second starting port 64b which is a trigger of the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the assumed game specification and reduce disadvantages to the hall.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94 (a), a special figure 2 referred to when a "super probability fluctuation state", a "probability fluctuation state", or a "time shortened state" (that is, "probable change / time saving time") is lost. The loss variation pattern table 272e5 will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value of a big hit or a small hit, that is, a loss occurs. If the value is a value, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls reserved at that time with reference to the reservation number table 272c and stored in the same reservation area. The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the variation pattern table 272e5 for the special figure 2 lost referred to in the "probable variation / time saving time", the "E0: non-reach (long)" indicates that the entire variation time is "8 seconds" in the "high-speed variation (ultra short )) + Variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+“ low speed ”. "Variation element of" fluctuation "" is set to "0-9", and only "variation element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "+ variation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to by “probability change / time saving”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 9) is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ””. In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, the change pattern is always “variable element of“ high-speed change (ultra short) ”+“ low speed ” Fluctuation element of fluctuation ”is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to by “probable variation / time saving”, “E1: non-reach (short)” indicates “3 seconds” for the entire variation time “high speed variation ( One variation pattern “only the variation element of“ Ultra short ”) is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed to “only high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)” fluctuation elements. On the other hand, it is set to “0 to 9”, and only “variable elements of“ high-speed variation (ultra-short) ”only” can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to as “probable variation / time saving time”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 9) is associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, “variable element of“ high-speed change (ultra short) only ”is always used as the change pattern. Selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e5 for the special figure 2 loss referred to by the “probable variation / time saving time”, “E2: normal reach” has “13 seconds” for the entire variation time ““ high speed variation (ultra short) ””. , A fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "is" 0-9 "," "high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element " Only set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to by “probability change / time saving”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) Is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ””. In other words, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time reduction”, the change pattern of “variable element of“ high-speed change (ultra short) ”+ variation of“ low-speed change ” Element + variable element of “normal reach” ”is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e5 for the special figure 2 loss referred to by “probable variation / time saving time”, “E3: super reach” has “23 seconds” of the entire variation time “high speed variation (ultra short)”. , A fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “super-reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-9" for the variable element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach", and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to as “probable variation / time saving”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) ) Is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ a fluctuation element of“ super reach ”. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, as the change pattern, “variable element of“ high speed change (ultra short) ”+ variable element of“ low speed change ” Variable element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e5 for the special figure 2 loss referred to by "probable variation / time saving time", "E4: special reach" has a total variation time of "33 seconds" of "high speed variation (ultra short). , A fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuations” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “special reach”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. “0-9” for “variable element + variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ variable element of special reach ””, and “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ variation of“ low-speed fluctuation ” Element + “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ””.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to by “probability change / time saving”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) ) Is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ a fluctuation element of“ special reach ”. In other words, in the case of the “special reach” production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, the fluctuation pattern is always “variable element of“ high speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ variable element of“ low speed fluctuation ”. Variable element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  In addition, in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time”, the C table 272d3 is not allocated in the number-of-reservations table 272c. Therefore, in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time”, since the “super long fluctuation” effect mode is not selected, the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to in the “probability change / time saving time” is not selected. No value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the “super long variation” effect mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94 (b), a special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e6 referred to at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time” will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the second holding ball storing area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit or a value that becomes a small hit, With reference to the reserved number table 272c, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of retained balls at that time, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e6 is determined based on the selected effect form. In the group (group) of the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6, the change pattern (change time) associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same hold area is stored in the hold area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the suspended fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 referred to in the “probable change / time saving time”, “E6: Normal Reach” has “13 seconds” for the entire change time of “High Speed Change (Ultra Short)”. ”+“ Low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”fluctuation element” and “18-second” “high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)” fluctuation element + “low-speed fluctuation” A variation element + a variation element of “normal reach” + a variation element of “re-variation” is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0 + 2", "Fast variation (ultra short)" variation + "Slow variation" variation + "Normal reach" variation + "Re-variation" "3-9" for the "variable element".

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 which is referred to at the time of performing the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, ““ high speed change ” (Ultra-short) fluctuation element + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "fluctuation pattern is 30%," High-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "fluctuation element +" Low-speed fluctuation "fluctuation pattern The variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 2 of “probable change / time saving time”, the “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ” The variation pattern of “variable element + variable element of“ re-variation ”” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (ultra short) ”+ variation factor of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation factor of“ normal reach ”” is configured to be selected so that a game can be efficiently performed in a short time. While playing, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 referred to in the “probability change / time saving time”, “E7: super reach” has “23 seconds” of the entire change time “high speed change ( Ultra-short) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal-reach ”+“ super-reach ”fluctuation” and “28-second” “high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) )) + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation + "super reach" fluctuation + "re-variation" fluctuation. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-3", "fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" normal reach "for fluctuation element + fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation element of" super reach " "+ Fluctuation element of" super-reach "+" fluctuation element of "re-fluctuation" ".

  That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 which is referred to when performing the change effect of the second special symbol in "probable change / time saving time", "" high speed " The fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation element (ultra short)" + the fluctuation element of "slow fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of "super reach" are 40%, and the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)" The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "super reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" is set to be selected at a rate of 60%. Have been. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 2 of “probable change / time saving time”, the variable element of “high speed fluctuation (ultra short)” + the variable element of “low speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” (Variable element of “super reach” + variable element of “re-variation”) ”is easily selected (60% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (ultra-short) ”+ variation factor of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation factor of“ normal reach ”+ variation factor of“ super reach ”” is also selected. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected from any of the fluctuation patterns while playing the game efficiently with reduced time.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 referred to in the "probable change / time saving time", "E8: special reach" indicates that the entire change time is "high speed change (33 seconds)". "Variable element of" Ultra short) "+" Variable element of "Low speed fluctuation" + "Variable element of" Normal reach "+" Variable element of "Special reach" "" and "Variable element of" High speed (Ultra short) )) + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation + "special reach" fluctuation + "re-variation" fluctuation ". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. “0 to 4”, “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”for the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the fluctuation element of“ special reach ” ”+“ Variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” ”.

  In other words, when the special special effect effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6, which is referred to when performing the change effect of the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time”, ““ high speed ” Fluctuating element of "fluctuation (ultra-short)" + fluctuating element of "slow fluctuation" + fluctuating element of "normal reach" + fluctuating element of "special reach" 50% The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "special reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" is set to be selected at a rate of 50%. Have been. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Accordingly, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 2 of “probable change / time saving time”, the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)” + the fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” Fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" special reach "" and fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation of "special reach" The variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ re-variation ”” is evenly selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which any variation pattern more time-efficient than the “normal gaming state” can be expected to be equally successful.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 referred to in the "probable change / time saving time", the whole change time is "3 seconds" in the "high speed change ( One variation pattern “only the variation element of“ Ultra short ”) is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94B, the association between the variation pattern in “E9: special variation” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “only the variation element of“ high-speed variation (ultra short) ””. 0 to 9 ", and only the" high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) "fluctuation element alone is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “special fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e6 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, the fluctuation type counter The same fluctuation pattern as “only high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) fluctuation element” that can be selected in a “non-reach (short)” production mode for all possible values (“0 to 9”) of CS1 It is set so that the fluctuation pattern is selected without exception.

  Thus, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, only the variable element of “high-speed change (ultra short)” which is the most time-efficient among the selectable change patterns. Is executed without fail, it is possible to quickly execute small hits that frequently appear in the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time”. As a result, a right-handed game is performed in the “probable change / time saving time”, a small hit game is frequently performed in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, and a ball is won in the small winning opening 72a, so that the player's possession ball is held. It is possible to realize a gradually increasing gaming property.

  Further, in the “probable change / time saving time”, the change time that can be selected is configured to be shorter than the “normal game state”. Therefore, in the “probable change / time saving time”, it is possible to efficiently use the fluctuation effect in a time efficient manner, and to perform a light effect and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern in the case of winning a small hit is not limited to the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the “normal gaming state”, a special effect provided specially may be performed, or “probability variation” In the "state", a long variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected in a "special reach" effect mode) may be performed when the second special symbol is won in a small lottery by lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. The per-figure random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of “0 to 99” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value (ie, “99”). When the per-figure-period random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-figure per-figure random number counter C4.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure (value = “0 to 99”), and is used for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). It is updated once and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 17).

  The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is updated, for example, periodically (in the thirteenth embodiment, once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98)), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. At the timing, it is stored in one of the first to fourth general-purpose reserved areas provided in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i of the RAM 273. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the general figure reserved ball execution area 273j in the order stored in the general figure reserved ball storage area 273i, and the value of the general figure per-random number counter C4 stored in the general figure reserved ball execution area 273j is changed. A hit determination is made for the hit.

  The value of the random number, which is a normal symbol hit, is set by a general symbol random number table 272f (see FIG. 95 (a)) stored in the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 for each game state. When the value of the per-figure-per-hit counter C4 stored in the area 273j matches the value of the random number which is a win set by the per-figure-per-figure random number table 272f, it is determined to be a win. The variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set by referring to the ordinary symbol change table 272g (see FIG. 95 (b)) according to the game state, and the ordinary symbol display device 83 stops after the variable display time has elapsed. A symbol “○” is displayed as a symbol (normal symbol). Thereafter, the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is set by referring to the electric act opening table 272h (see FIG. 95 (c)) according to the gaming state, and during the opening time, the ordinary electric act 64c is opened. In the meantime, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b.

  On the other hand, if the value of the per-figure-per-counter C4 stored in the per-figure per-drawing counter area does not match the value of the winning random number set by the per-figure per-random number table 272f, it is determined that a loss has occurred. Then, the variable display time is set by referring to the ordinary symbol change table 272g (see FIG. 95 (b)) according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses on the ordinary symbol display device 83, the stopped symbol (ordinary symbol) ), The symbol “x” is lit and displayed.

  Here, the details of the per-figure random number table 272f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the per-figure random number table 272f stored in the ROM 272.

  As described above, the random number per figure table 272f indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (“probability variation state” or “time The game state of the “normal symbol low-probability state” used in the period that is not the “shortened state” (including the special symbol jackpot) and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are more ordinary patterns than the “normal symbol low-probability state”. Is a state with a high probability of winning, a “probability variation state” or a “normal symbol high probability state” used in the case of a “time shortened state”. Then, the numbers of winning random numbers included in the “normal symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol high probability state” are set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers different between the “normal symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol high probability state”, the “normal symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol high probability state” , The winning probability is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the number of values of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure which is a hit in the case of the “normal symbol low probability state” is 50, and the value “ “50 to 99” are defined (set) in the random number table 272f per ordinary figure. That is, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol in the “normal symbol low-probability state” (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “super-probability changing state”) is set to be 50/100 = １ ／.

  On the other hand, the number of values of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure which becomes a hit in the case of the “normal symbol high probability state” is 99, and the value “1 to 99” is defined (set) in the random number per ordinary figure table 272f. Have been. That is, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the “normal symbol high probability state” (that is, the “probability variation state” or the “time shortened state”) is set to be 99/100.

  Thus, by changing the probability of the ordinary symbol depending on the game state, it is possible to make a difference as to whether or not the ordinary electric hand 64c is easily opened (immersed). As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric hand 64c is likely to be opened (submerged), so that it is possible to win a prize toward the second starting port 64b, or the normal electric hand 64c is opened ( It is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state by making the state in which the ball hardly wins the second starting port 64b depending on the game state because it is difficult to immerse.

  In particular, in the "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", it becomes "normal symbol high probability state" The normal electric hand 64c is easily opened, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b. In other words, the ball hit right in the “probability changing state” and the “time shortening state” is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b and hardly enter the small winning port 72a. On the other hand, in the "super-probability changing state", the "normal pattern low probability state" is set, the ordinary electric hand 64c is hard to open, and the ball fired by the right-handed game rolls from the right end to the left end on the ordinary electric hand 64c. , And can flow down to the small winning opening 72a side. In other words, the ball struck right in the “super probability fluctuation state” is more difficult to win in the second starting port 64b than in the “probability fluctuation state” and “time reduction state”, and is easier to win in the small winning opening 72a. It is configured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95 (b), the details of the ordinary figure change table 272g for determining the variable display time of the ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the general-purpose variation table 272g stored in the ROM 272.

  Similar to the per-figure random number table 272f, the regular figure fluctuation table 272g is divided into two types, one for the "normal symbol low probability state" and the one for the "normal symbol high probability state". And, for "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, for "normal game state" and "super probability fluctuation state") and for "normal symbol high probability state" (that is, "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state") ) And the variable display time of the normal symbol is set differently. In this way, by changing the variable display time of the ordinary symbol in the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state", the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" Normally, the time at which the symbol pass / fail result is derived is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol set in the case of the “ordinary symbol low probability state” is set to “5 seconds”. It is defined by the fluctuation table 272g. That is, in the "normal symbol low probability state", the time from the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol is set to "5 seconds" without exception.

  On the other hand, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol set in the case of the “normal symbol high probability state” is defined by the ordinary symbol variation table 272g to be “0.5 seconds”. That is, in the “normal symbol high probability state”, the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol is set to be “0.5 seconds” without exception.

  Thus, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol in accordance with the game state, it is possible to determine whether the ball rolling on the normal electric hand 64c is in a state where the variable display result is easily derived during the rolling. Can be caused. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage is executed, while the ball is rolling from the right end to the left end on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c (that is, approximately (3 seconds), the variable display result is derived, and based on the derived result, the normal electric hand 64c is opened (immersed) or while the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c is rolling from the right end to the left end. By changing the situation in which the ball rolls from the right end to the left end on the upper surface of the ordinary electric utility 64c without deriving the variable display result depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state. .

  In particular, in the "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", it becomes "normal symbol high probability state" While the ball rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c, the normal electric hand 64c is opened (submerged), and the ball fired by the right-handed game can win the second starting port 64b. It is configured as follows. In other words, the ball hit right in the “probability changing state” and the “time shortening state” is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b and hardly enter the small winning port 72a. On the other hand, in the "super-probability changing state", the state becomes the "normal symbol low-probability state", and while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c, the ordinary electric hand 64c tends to maintain the closed (projected) state. The ball fired by the right-handed game rolls from the right end to the left end on the ordinary electric hand 64c, and can flow down to the small winning opening 72a side. In other words, the ball struck right in the “super probability fluctuation state” is more difficult to win in the second starting port 64b than in the “probability fluctuation state” and “time reduction state”, and is easier to win in the small winning opening 72a. It is configured.

  Next, the electrical activity release table 272h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the electrical activity opening table 272h stored in the ROM 272. The electric winning combination opening table 272h is referred to when a normal symbol hits, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of times of opening the normal electric winning 64c are defined based on the game state at the timing when the normal symbol hit occurs.

  The electric activity opening table 272h is divided into groups based on the game state in which the symbols are usually drawn by lot. Specifically, the "normal game state" and the "super probability fluctuation state" are referred to as "normal symbol low probability state", and the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" are referred to as "normal" The opening mode (the number and time) of the ordinary electric hand 64c is changed for the “symbol high probability state”.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the normal symbol is won in the “normal symbol low probability state”, that is, in the “normal game state” or the “super probability fluctuation state”, The number of times of opening of the ordinary electric hand 64c is “one time”, and the opening time is defined in the electric hand opening table 272h so as to be “0.1 second”. In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the “normal symbol low probability state”, the normal electric hand 64c is set to be opened for a total of “0.1 seconds”.

  On the other hand, the number of times of opening the normal electric hand 64c which is set when a normal symbol is won in the “normal symbol high probability state”, that is, in the “probability changing state” or the “time reduction state”, is “3 times”. The opening time is specified in the electrical opening table 272h so as to be "5 seconds". That is, when a normal symbol is won in the “normal probability high state”, the normal power 64c is configured to be opened for a total of “15 seconds”.

  In addition, the closing time (so-called interval time) between the opening of one of the ordinary electric roles 64c and the next opening is set to be "1 second". Therefore, when the normal symbol is won in the “normal symbol high probability state”, the opening and closing of the ordinary electric hand 64c are intermittently repeated for a total of “17 seconds”.

  Thus, by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric hand 64c according to the gaming state, it is possible to cause a difference in the length of the period during which the ordinary electric hand 64c is open (immersed). As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is easy to win the second starting port 64b due to the long period during which the normal electric hand 64c is opened (immersed), or the normal electric hand 64c is opened. Whether the situation where the ball is difficult to win the second starting port 64b due to a short (immersive) situation is made different depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game properties for each game state.

  In particular, in the "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", it becomes "normal symbol high probability state" The opening period of the ordinary electric hand 64c is prolonged, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b. In other words, the ball hit right in the “probability changing state” and the “time shortening state” is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b and hardly enter the small winning port 72a. On the other hand, in the “super-probability change state”, the “normal pattern low-probability state” is set, the opening period of the normal electric hand 64c is shortened, and the ball fired by the right-handed game does not win the second starting port 64b. , And can flow down to the small winning opening 72a side. In other words, the ball struck right in the “super probability fluctuation state” is more difficult to win in the second starting port 64b than in the “probability fluctuation state” and “time reduction state”, and is easier to win in the small winning opening 72a. It is configured.

  In this manner, by providing four gaming states in which the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state or the low probability state of the ordinary symbol are provided, the game property is changed to each gaming state, A variety of games can be provided, and the interest of the games can be improved.

  The winning probability of variable display of a normal symbol and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to those in the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio may be used as long as the probability that the “probability variation state” or the like is easier to win the ordinary symbol than the “normal gaming state”, for example, the probability of winning the ordinary symbol in the “normal gaming state” May be configured to be difficult to hit with about 1/100, or the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the “probability variation state” may be set to about 50/100 = １ ／. In addition, any time may be used as long as the variable display time is shorter in the “probability change state” than in the “normal game state”. For example, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol in the “normal game state” is “5 seconds” or more. May be a long time (for example, “30 seconds”) or a short time less than “5 seconds” (for example, “1 second”).

  Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric hand 64c are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c, any opening time may be used as long as the “probability variation state” is more advantageous for the player than the “normal gaming state”, for example, “normal” The opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the "game state" may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "3 times"). ) May be set. Further, the open time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the “probability variation state” may be a long time of “5 seconds” or more (for example, “10 seconds”), or a short time of less than “5 seconds” (for example, “1”). Seconds "). Further, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric hand 64c in the “probability variation state” may be a large number of times “3” or more (for example, “10”), or a small number of times less than “3” (for example, “1”). Times)).

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. The RAM 273 includes, in addition to the counter buffer 273c shown in FIG. 86, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 are stored, various flags, counters, input / output It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. The RAM 273 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 273 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 273. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 273. The writing to the RAM 273 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 17), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 273 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 54). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 271 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 271, An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  The RAM 273 further stores a first reserved ball number counter 273a, a second reserved ball number counter 273b, a first reserved ball storage area 273d, a second reserved ball storage area 273e, a first reserved ball execution area 273f, and a second reserved ball execution area. It has at least an area 273g, a general-purpose reserved ball number counter 273h, a general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i, and a general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j.

  The first reserved ball number counter 273a receives a ball (hereinafter, referred to as a first start) into the first start port 64a detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 39 (third symbol display device) based on the entry of a ball into the mouth 64a or the second starting port 64b is sometimes referred to as “start winning”. The counter counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) in the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed in step 81).

  The first reserved ball number counter 273a is set to "0" as an initial value by an initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 273 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning in the first opening 64a is detected and the number of balls to be reserved for the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol is increased, one is added to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 100). S5303). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 273a is decremented by one every time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S5512 in FIG. 103).

  The second reserved ball number counter 273b is, like the first reserved ball number counter 273a, a second starting port 64b detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Of the second special symbol dynamic display (variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the special symbol display device 39 based on the winning of the start. This is a counter for counting the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times.

  As in the case of the first reserved ball number counter 273a, the second reserved ball number counter 273b is set to "0" as an initial value by an initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 273 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning in the second starting opening 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the second special symbol increases, one is added to the maximum value “4” (FIG. 100). S5307). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 273b is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S5542 in FIG. 105).

  The value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (that is, the reserved ball number of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (that is, the reserved ball number of the second special symbol) is the reserved ball number command. Is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S5310 in FIG. 100). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first reserved ball number counter 273a or the second reserved ball number counter 273b is incremented by one. Command.

  The sound ramp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself in the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol retained in the main control device 110 by the retained ball number command. it can. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times of suspension of dynamic display (variable effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, every time a winning start is detected, the main controller 110 transmits a reserved ball count command to the audio ramp control device 113, thereby dynamically displaying (changing) each special symbol managed by the audio ramp control device 113. Even if the number of retained balls in the effect) deviates from the actual number of retained balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) retained in main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the number of retained balls to be received next The deviation can be corrected by the ball number command.

  Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the reserved ball number command to the sound ramp control device 113, the first reserved ball number counter 273a or the 1 In addition to the value of the 2 reserved balls counter 273b, the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 86) in association with the above-mentioned starting prize which triggered the addition of the first reserved balls counter 273a or the second reserved balls counter 273b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the above is also included.

  That is, when a winning start is made, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the main controller 110 are stored in the holding ball. The number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the sound ramp control device 113, a fluctuation effect based on each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball number command is executed. Before the execution of the variable effect, it is determined in advance that the variable effect will be performed (whether or not a big hit will occur, and how long the variable time will change). Then, based on the result of the pre-reading, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect content and the execution timing (timing) of the “pending change notice”.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the command of holding | maintenance ball number command which shows the holding | maintenance ball number of a fluctuation effect, and the command which shows the value of the big hit random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As a command indicating a value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, a reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and the command is generated. A command similar to a variation pattern command and a stop type command based on entering a ball (a pre-variation pattern command and a pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, a program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command can be easily created by diverting the program of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 273d stores the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 273c in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the first opening 64a. And a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 271 detects that the ball has won (starts winning) the first starting port 64a during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98), the MPU 271 outputs the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 273c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d. The first holding ball storage area 273d stores four holdings so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one starting winning of the first special symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 86).

  As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 273e stores the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 273c in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the second opening 64b. And a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 271 detects that the ball has won (starts winning) the second starting port 64b in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98), the MPU 271 reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 273c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 273e. The second holding ball storage area 273e stores four holdings so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one starting winning of the second special symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 86).

  As described above, the first reserved ball execution area 273f starts the execution, or performs the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery of the first special symbol being executed, the movement of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a target display and a variation effect.

  When the MPU 271 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol, the MPU 271 performs a large hit lottery or a small hit lottery of the first special symbol, dynamically displays the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, and In order to execute the processing such as the setting of the variable effect, the oldest start of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d described above. The data corresponding to the winning is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Note that the shift in the thirteenth embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  As described above, the second reserved ball execution area 273g starts the execution, or the big special lottery or the small special lottery of the second special symbol being executed, and the movement of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a target display and a variation effect.

  When the MPU 271 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol, the large special lottery and the small special lottery of the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 and In order to execute the processing such as the setting of the fluctuation effect, of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the starting prize stored in the above-mentioned second reserved ball storage area 273e, The data corresponding to one start winning is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 273g.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 86 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 273d, the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the first reserved ball execution area 273f, and the second reserved ball execution area 273g will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 273d, the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the first reserved ball execution area 273f, and the second reserved ball execution area 273g are a jackpot lottery or a small jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to perform dynamic display and setting of a fluctuation effect of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the jackpot lottery and the small jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display and the variable effect setting of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 are used for the big hit lottery. Jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern. Used. The first reserved ball storage area 273d and the first reserved ball execution area 273f store the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball has won the first starting port 64a (starting winning). Are stored, and the second reserved ball storage area 273e and the second reserved ball execution area 273g are acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball has won (started winning) the second starting port 64b. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored.

  The first reserved ball storage area 273d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 273d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  The second reserved ball storage area 273e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 273d. Each of the four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 273d, has a jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2. , A stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273e4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Have been.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 273d1 and 273e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 273d2 and 273e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 273d3 and 273e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 273d4 and 273e4 are one. Although they are collectively provided in the two reserved ball storage areas 273d and 273e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

  As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 273d, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the time when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a is stored up to four times. In this case, data is sequentially stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). It is memorized. In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the first starting port 64a that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the first reserved first area is stored in the first starting port 64a that is the oldest in time. Will be stored.

  Further, the first reserved ball execution area 273f is composed of only one area. In the first reserved ball execution area 273f, as in the first reserved ball storage area 273d, a jackpot random number counter storage area 273f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 273f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273f4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 271 determines that the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol has come, the MPU 271 determines whether or not the first special symbol has any data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 273e and the second reserved ball execution area 273g. When data is stored in the first reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 273d, the data stored in the first reserved first area is replaced with each area 273f1 of the first reserved ball execution area 273f. 273f4.

  Then, the data shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 273f is referred to in the special figure 1 change start process (see FIG. 103), and the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed based on the reference data and the game state. , The change pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the special symbol display device 39, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined fluctuation pattern and the stop type are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and a special figure 1 stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the following based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command. A fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is performed.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol has come, the MPU 271 determines whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of the first reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter of the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Shift to area 273f1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2 of the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 273f2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 of the first hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273f3, and shifts the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 of the first reserved first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 273f4.

  When the data is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 273f, the first reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. A shift process is performed to pack the (reserved) data into areas (areas 1 to 3) having an area number smaller by one. In the thirteenth embodiment, data is shifted only in the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved sphere storage area 273d.

  Here, the data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 273d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a when the start of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is determined is “4”, and all the areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 273d are provided. ) Is assumed to store data. In this state, the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 273f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 271 causes other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data of the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data of the first reserved fourth area is shifted. To the first reserved third area.

  In addition, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a at the time when the start of the variation effect of the first special symbol is determined is “2”, the MPU 271 stores only the data of the first reserved second area. , The data is shifted to the first reserved first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed on the first reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), thereby facilitating creation of a program.

  Next, in the second reserved ball storage area 273e, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b is up to four times. In this case, data is stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the second starting port 64b that is earlier in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the oldest second starting port 64b is stored in the second reserved first area. Will be stored.

  The second reserved ball execution area 273g is composed of only one area. In the second reserved ball execution area 273g, as in the second reserved ball storage area 273e, a jackpot random number counter storage area 273g1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 273g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273g3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273g4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 271 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol has come, regardless of the presence or absence of data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d and the first reserved ball execution area 273f, the second When data is stored in the second reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 273e, the data stored in the second reserved first area is transferred to each area 273g1 of the second reserved ball execution area 273g. 273g4.

  Then, the data shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 273g is referred to in the special figure 2 change start process (see FIG. 105), and the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed based on the reference data and the game state. , The change pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the special symbol display device 39, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol has come, the MPU 271 determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of the second reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter of the second reserved ball execution area 273g. Shift to area 273e1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 273e2 of the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 273g2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 of the second hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273g3, and shifts the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 273e4 of the second reserved first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 273g4.

  When the data is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 273g, the second reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. A shift process is performed to pack the (reserved) data into areas (areas 1 to 3) having an area number smaller by one. In the thirteenth embodiment, data is shifted only in the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved sphere storage area 273e.

  Here, the data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the second reserved ball storage area 273e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b at the time when the start of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is determined is “4”, and all the areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e (first to fourth) ) Is assumed to store data. In this state, the data in the second reserved first area is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 273g, and when the second reserved first area is vacant, the MPU 271 causes other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data of the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data of the second reserved fourth area is shifted. To the second reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b at the time when the start of the variation effect of the second special symbol is determined is “2”, the MPU 271 only stores the data of the second reserved second area. , The data is shifted to the second reserved first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the second reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

  In this way, the data on the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the data on the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are separately stored, and the dynamic display is performed based on each data. Is performed, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed.

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. The normal figure holding ball number counter 273h normally displays a symbol based on the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. This is a counter for counting up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of variable display of ordinary symbols performed by the device 83.

  As in the case of the reserved ball number counters 273a and 273b, the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 273h is set to "0" as an initial value by an initial setting process (see S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 273 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the passage of a ball to the through gate 67 is detected and the number of balls for variable display of the ordinary symbol increases, one is added to the maximum value "4" (see S5405 in FIG. 101). On the other hand, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 273h is decremented by one each time the normal symbol variable display is executed (see S5595 in FIG. 108).

  The general figure holding ball storage area 273i is a memory for storing the general figure counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 273c in accordance with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67. When the MPU 271 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98), the MPU 271 obtains the value of the counter C4 per general figure from the counter buffer 273c and stores the general figure holding ball. It is stored in area 273i. The general figure holding ball storage area 273i has four holding areas (normal figure) so that the data (value of the counter C4 per general figure) corresponding to one holding ball of a normal symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. (Reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 86).

  The general figure holding sphere execution area 273j is a memory for starting execution or storing data (the value of the general figure random number counter C4) to be referred to in the process of executing the normal symbol winning lottery or variable display. It is.

  When the MPU 271 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the MPU 271 executes the process of holding the normal symbol holding ball described above in order to execute a process such as a lottery of the normal symbol and a setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. One of the data stored in the storage area 273i (the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure) is shifted to the ordinary figure holding sphere execution area 273j. Note that the shift in the thirteenth embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 86 again, the details of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i and the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j will be described. The general figure holding ball storage area 273i and the general figure holding ball execution area 273j are used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to perform a process such as a lottery of a normal symbol and a setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. You.

  As described above, the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 used for the ordinary symbol hit lottery is used for setting the normal symbol hit lottery and the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 83. The general-purpose-reserved-sphere storing area 273i stores the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball passes through the through gate 67.

  The general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i is composed of four reserved areas (general-purpose reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (the first to fourth areas of the ordinary drawing reservation) is provided with an ordinary random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the ordinary figure random number counter C4.

  The data (value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) obtained at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is stored up to four times in the normal figure reserved sphere storage area 273i. Data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) in the vacant areas of the reservation area (normal drawing first to fourth areas). In other words, the data corresponding to the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the first area of the ordinary figure reservation stores the data of the ball to the through gate 67 that is the oldest in time. Data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

  On the other hand, the ordinary figure reserved ball execution area 273j is composed of only one area. In the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j, a general-purpose random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is provided similarly to the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i. .

  When the MPU 271 determines that the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the MPU 271 stores the data stored in the first general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i in the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j. shift.

  Then, the data shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 273j is referred to in the general figure changing process (see FIG. 108), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed and the contents of the variable display are performed. To determine. In the ordinary symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 271 determines that the execution start timing of the variable display of the ordinary symbol has come, the random number value in the random number counter storage area (not shown) in the general figure holding first area of the general figure holding ball storage area 273i is stored. Is shifted to a per-figure-per-figure-per-random-counter storage area (not shown) of the general figure holding sphere execution area 273j.

  When the shift of the data to the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j is completed, the first general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i because the first general-purpose reserved ball storage area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to pack the (held) data into areas (first to third) with the area number smaller by one. In the thirteenth embodiment, data is shifted only in the general-purpose reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (reserved) in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i.

  Here, a description will be given of a data shift performed on each reserved area in the ordinary figure reserved ball storage area 273i. For example, when the start of variable display of the ordinary symbol is determined, the value of the general figure reserved ball number counter 273h is “4”, and the general figure reserved ball storage area 273i is stored in all areas (first to fourth). It is assumed that data is stored. In this state, when the data of the first general-purpose reserved area is shifted to the general-purpose first-use reserved ball execution area 273j, and the first general-purpose reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 271 sets the other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the second area of the general figure reservation is shifted to the first area of the general figure reservation, the data of the third area of the general figure reservation is shifted to the second area of the general figure reservation, and the data of the fourth area of the general figure reservation is shifted. Is shifted to the third area of the regular drawing reservation.

  Further, for example, if the value of the general figure reserved ball number counter 273h at the time of determining the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol is “2”, the MPU 271 transmits only the data of the general figure reserved second area, The data is shifted to the first area shown in FIG. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the general-purpose reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data in the general-purpose reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the ordinary drawing holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. As described above, the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 refers to the ROM 272 of the first special symbol or the second special symbol for controlling the opening of the special winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 when a jackpot is won in the lottery game. The big hit opening table 272i to be played and the small size referred to for controlling the opening of the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72 when a small hit is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The hit release table 272j is stored.

  Here, the big hit opening table 272i and the small hit opening table 272j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the big hit opening table 272i stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic diagram of an example of the small hit opening table 272j stored in the ROM 272. FIG. The jackpot opening table 272i is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type that generated the jackpot of each special symbol, the opening mode (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum Winning prize) is specified. The small hit opening table 272j is referred to at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and regardless of the game state in which the small hit of each special symbol occurs, the opening mode (number of times) of the small winning opening 72a. , Maximum opening time, maximum winning number).

  First, the jackpot opening table 272i is classified based on the jackpot type that has won the jackpot. Specifically, for the “probability fluctuation A” referred to when the jackpot type “probability variation A” is won, and for the “probability variation B” referenced when the jackpot type “probability variation B” is won. The opening mode of the special winning opening 65a is changed for "time reduction" which is referred to when the jackpot type "time reduction" is won.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the number of times the large winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type “probability variation A” is won is “16”. The maximum opening time for opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds" and the maximum winning number is "10", and the prize balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a. The number is defined in the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”.

  In addition, the shift gaming state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type “probability change A” is shifted to the “super probability change state” of “special figure: high probability, ordinary figure: low probability”. Stipulated in

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "probability variation B" is won is "6 times", and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". The maximum winning number is "10", and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a is defined by the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be "15". I have.

  In addition, in the jackpot opening table 272i, it is determined that the transition gaming state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type “probability variation B” transitions to the “probability variation state” of “special figure: high probability, ordinary figure: high probability”. Stipulated.

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "time reduction" is won is "6 times", and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is “10”, and the number of award balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a is defined by the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”. .

  The jackpot opening table 272i specifies that the game state after the end of the jackpot due to the jackpot type “time reduction” shifts to the “time reduction state” of “special figure: low probability, ordinary figure: high probability”. Have been.

  As a result, the game value (total number of prize balls that can be paid out) is given to the player for each of the winning jackpot types. Can be caused. In addition, by changing the game state to be shifted to after the big hit game for each of the big hit types, it is possible to cause a difference in the playability after the big hit based on the big hit type. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbol, it is possible to produce a game property of determining whether to win any of the jackpot types, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The mode of opening the special winning opening 65a based on the jackpot type (the number of times, the maximum opening time, the maximum winning number, the number of winning prizes, and the transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. is there. Specifically, the number of releases may be the same for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. May be. In addition, it is not necessary to shift to a separate gaming state for each jackpot type, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of jackpot types are shifted to a common gaming state.

  In addition, during a jackpot game due to “probability variation A”, “probability variation B”, and “time reduction”, the system is configured to temporarily transition to the “normal gaming state”. With such a configuration, during each big hit game, it is possible to prevent a game value from being given (for example, a long opening of the ordinary electric utility 64c) other than by opening the special winning opening 65a. The calculation of the payout rate at the time of design of the game specification becomes easy, and the design man-hour of the game specification can be reduced.

  Further, in one round of the big hit game (or the small hit game), the opening and closing of the big winning port 65a (or the small winning port 72a) may be performed a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, in one round, after the opening of the special winning opening 65a is started, the opening is temporarily closed for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, “5 seconds”) shorter than the maximum opening time, and the predetermined closing time ( For example, after one second), the special winning opening 65a may be opened again, and may be closed again after the maximum opening time elapses or when the maximum winning number is won. With such a configuration, variations of the game in the big hit game (or the small hit game) can be abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, there is one type of opening mode of the small winning opening 72a set when a small hit is won. The number of times the small winning opening 72a is opened is "1 time", the maximum opening time in opening one of the small winning openings 72a is "1.8 seconds", and the maximum winning number is "1". The number of award balls to be paid out based on the winning of a ball into the small winning opening 72a is defined in the small hit opening table 272j so as to be "10". As a result, when a small hit is won, a predetermined number of prize balls can be obtained, although a game value as high as a big hit is not obtained.

  Further, after the end of the small hit, the gaming state does not shift, and is defined in the small hit opening table 272j so that the gaming state before the small hit is maintained. Specifically, for example, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the “normal gaming state”, after the small hit game ends (including the execution of the small hit game), It is defined to be in the “normal game state”. In addition, in the case of winning a small hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the “super probability fluctuation state”, after the end of the small hit game (including the execution of the small hit game), the “super probability fluctuation state” is returned again. State ". Furthermore, in the case of winning the small hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the “probability changing state”, after the small hitting game is completed (including during the execution of the small hitting game), the “probability changing state” is returned again. It is stipulated that In the case where the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won in the "small hitting state" in the "time shortening state", after the small hitting game ends (including the execution of the small hitting game), the "time shortening state" is returned again. It is stipulated that

  The mode of opening the small winning opening 72a based on the small hit (the number of times, the maximum opening time, the maximum winning number, the number of winning balls, or the transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. is there. More specifically, the number of times of opening in the small hitting game may be configured to be performed a plurality of times, the maximum opening time may be changed, or the maximum winning number may be changed. May be.

  In addition, as a mode of opening the small winning opening 72a based on the small hit, as the maximum opening time (for example, “1.8 seconds”) based on the small winning game, the total accumulated seconds of the opening time of the small winning opening 72a is the maximum opening time. The small winning opening 72a may be opened until the time is reached. Specifically, the opening time of one small winning opening 72a is set to “0.2 seconds”, and the small winning opening 72a is repeatedly opened and closed “9 times” in one small hitting game, and the small winning The small winning opening 72a is configured to be opened such that the total opening time of the small winning opening 72a based on the game is equal to the maximum opening time. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a playability of whether or not a ball can be won while the small winning opening 72a is open in the small hit game, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, while the small hit game and the small hit game are configured so that the pre-small gaming state is maintained, the small hit game or after the small hit game is configured to transition from the pre-small gaming state. You may. Specifically, for example, during the small hitting game, the state transitions to the “normal gaming state” regardless of the gaming state before the small hitting game, and thereafter, the gaming state before the small hitting (for example, “pre If the "probability change state", it may be configured to shift to the "super probability change state" even after the small hit game. In addition, a gaming state having a high game value from the gaming state before the small hitting game (for example, “probability variation state” to “super probability variation state”, “time reduction state” to “probability variation state”, or “normal gaming state” ”To“ time reduction state ”). Furthermore, a gaming state having a lower game value from the gaming state before the small hitting game (for example, “probability fluctuation state” to “probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state” to “time reduction state”, or “time reduction state” ) To a “normal game state” or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a game property in which a game state is shifted upon a small hit, to enhance a variety of games, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 85, the description will be continued. An input / output port 275 is connected to the MPU 271 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 274 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 275 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 39, an ordinary symbol display device 83, an ordinary symbol holding lamp 84, and a front side with the lower side of the open / close plate of the special winning opening 65a as an axis. A large winning opening solenoid for opening and closing the small winning opening 72a, a small winning opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a to the front side around the lower side of the opening and closing plate, and a normal electric wire for opening and driving the ordinary electric hand 64c. A solenoid 209 including a role solenoid is connected, and the MPU 271 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 275.

  The input / output port 275 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Further, the input / output port 275 includes a base display device control circuit 402 for controlling the base display device 401, a setting key 501, an error display button 502, a setting change switch 505, and an external output terminal plate 700. It is connected.

  The external output terminal plate 700 is provided above a payout unit 93 (see FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the back view of the pachinko machine 10, and connects the pachinko machine 10 and a hall computer 600 of a game hall (see FIG. 60). It is electrically connected. This external output terminal plate 700 is used to display game information (for example, jackpot information, small hit information, game state information (“normal game state”, “super probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state” "Time reduction state" or "big hit game"), winning information to the first opening 64a, winning information to the second opening 64b, winning information to the big winning opening 65a, small winning opening 72a. And a plurality of output terminals (not shown) for outputting prize information to the hall computer 600. By connecting the output terminals to the hall computer 600, the hall computer 600 allows the player to enter a game hall. It is possible to grasp the game state and the like of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the game result (role) of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the hall computer 600 (see FIG. 60) by the external output terminal plate 700, and the output result, that is, the number of jackpots and small The number of hits is displayed on a data lamp (not shown) provided in each pachinko machine 10. A player playing a game may check the data lamp provided on the pachinko machine 10 before playing the game. Then, based on the display contents of the data lamp, the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10 are guessed by referring to the game history of the day or the past of the pachinko machine 10 to play a game from now on, and the pachinko machine 10 to play the game is selected. In this case, if the setting content is a game result that is easy to be discriminated (observed), the player selects the pachinko machine 10 with good setting content (for example, the setting value “6”) and bad setting content (for example, Setting value "1") By avoiding the game of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced, and the profit of the game hall may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, at least one role (that is, a small probability of “probability variation state”) that frequently appears in a specific game state and can be clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp. The configuration is such that a difference is not provided for each set value in a winning combination, and a setting difference is provided in a combination that is least likely to appear (ie, a big hit in a “probability variation state” or the like). With this configuration, it is difficult to cause a role having a setting difference and a low appearance ratio to appear, and it is difficult to grasp the setting difference of the role unless the number of game trials is increased. be able to. Therefore, when the number of trials of the game is small, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the setting difference of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine the setting difference of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 with a low setting can also be operated, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall. Can be.

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 271 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 54) started upon power-on, a setting change process (see FIG. 97) executed in the start-up process, and the start-up process. Main processing (see FIG. 17) executed later, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98) started periodically (in the thirteenth embodiment, every 4 milliseconds), and generation of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal There is an NMI interrupt process activated by input (see FIG. 15). Here, for convenience of explanation, the setting change processing (see FIG. 97) will be described first, and then the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98) will be described. The start-up process (see FIG. 54), the main process (see FIG. 17), and the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) are the same processes as the above-described embodiments (the first and seventh embodiments). Therefore, the description is omitted.
First, the details of the setting change process (S4005) of the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4005) of the thirteenth embodiment. The setting change process (S4005) of the thirteenth embodiment is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode. The jackpot random number table 272a is set.

  Regarding the setting change processing (S4005) of the thirteenth embodiment, the difference from the setting change processing of the seventh embodiment is that, after the set value is determined (S4107), the set value corresponds to the determined (set) value. That is, the process (S4121) of setting the jackpot random number table 272a2 is performed.

  In the setting change process (S4005) of the thirteenth embodiment, in S4101 to S4111, the setting value change (update) process is performed based on the detection result of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting change switch 505, and the change (update) is performed. The set value is determined as a probability set value to be used in a future game (S4107). Then, a jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to the probability setting value is set (S4121), and in the subsequent lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the winning / non-selection lottery is performed with reference to the jackpot random number table 272a. .

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 starts up, the jackpot random number table 272a is set based on the probability setting value, so that the jackpot random number table 272a cannot be changed unless the start-up process is executed. it can. Since the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be normally turned on and off only by persons involved in the halls, it is possible to prevent the player from altering the jackpot random number table 272a illegally.

  In addition, the jackpot random number table 272a is set based on the probability setting value only when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, and the jackpot random number table 272a is not set at the time of a normal game. It is not necessary to perform the process of setting the jackpot random number table 272a at the time of the game in which the game is performed, and the processing load at the time of executing the game can be reduced.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the thirteenth embodiment.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S5101). In the timer interrupt processing and the main processing (see FIG. 17), a command or a signal to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the hall computer 600, or the like is generated based on various processes, and the command is generated. When the signal is generated, the signal is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and when a signal is generated, the signal is output to a device corresponding to the signal (for example, the external output terminal plate 700). In the external output process of S5101, the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and the above signal is output to various devices.

  Here, the external output processing (S5101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this external output processing (S5101).

  In this external output processing (S5101), first, it is determined whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S5201). The command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is, for example, a pending ball number command set in a start winning process (see FIG. 100) described later or a special figure 1 change start process (see FIG. 103) described later. Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command set in a special figure 2 change process (see FIG. 104) described later, special figure described later Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command set in 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 105), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command set in special figure 1 change processing (see FIG. 106) described later, and Special figure 1 stop type command, special figure 1 confirmation command and / or special figure 2 confirmation command set in fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 107) described later, and hit processing described later The jackpot opening command or the small jackpot opening command set in (see FIG. 109), the opening command set in the large winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 110) described later, and the special winning opening opening process described later (see FIG. 111). ), An ending command set in a jackpot ending process described later (see FIG. 112), or a small opening command or a small closing set in a small winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 113) described later. Command (hereinafter, the command may be referred to as an “audio lamp command”).

  In the process of S5201, if the voice lamp related command has been set (generated) in the timer interrupt process executed previously (previous), it is determined that there is a command to be transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 (S5201). : Yes), the voice lamp related command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203. On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that the voice ramp command has not been set (generated) (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203 without performing the process of S5202.

  Next, in the process of S5203, it is determined whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S5203). As a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, each start winning command based on the determination that the ball has won the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b in the start winning process (see FIG. 100) described later. In addition, a special winning command based on the determination that a ball has won the special winning opening 65a in a special winning opening opening process (see FIG. 111) described later, and a small winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 113) described below. , A small winning command (hereinafter, the command may be referred to as a “payout command”) based on the determination that the ball has won the small winning port 72a, and the like.

  In the process of S5203, if a payout-related command has been set (generated) in the previously (last time) executed timer interrupt process, it is determined that there is a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S5203: Yes). ), The payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5203 that the payout-related command has not been set (generated) (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5205 without performing the process of S5204.

  Next, in the process of S5205, it is determined whether or not there is output information (signal) to be output to the external output terminal board 700, that is, the hall computer 600 (see FIG. 60) (S5205). The output information (signal) to be output to the external output terminal plate 700 includes the number of winnings in the first opening 64a, the number of winnings in the second opening 64b, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63, and the number of outs 66. The number of inflows into the game, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of start or stop), the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of start or stop), the number of start of the big hit game (the number of end), the start of the small hit game Number (end number), opening mode (open or closed) of the special winning opening 65a, opening mode (opening or closing) of the small winning opening 72a, number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a, number of winnings in the small winning opening 72a, The number of balls entering the through gate 67, the number of shots by the firing solenoid, the game state (hereinafter, the above signal may be referred to as an "outer end signal"), and the like correspond to the above.

  In the process of S5205, if it is set so as to output the external terminal system signal in the previously (last time) executed timer interrupt process, the signal to be output to the external output terminal board 700 (Hall computer 600) is output. It is determined that there is (S5205: Yes), the external end system signal is output to the external output terminal board 700 (S5206), and the external output processing (S5101) ends, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98) starts. Return. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5205 that the external end system signal has not been set (S5205: No), the processing of S5206 is not performed, the external output processing (S5101) is terminated, and the timer interrupt is performed. Return to the processing (see FIG. 98).

  Returning to FIG. 98, the description will be continued. After the processing in S5101, the winning ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S5102), and then the hit processing for executing the processing at the time of hitting each special symbol is executed (S5102). S5103). This hit processing (S5103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After S5103, next, a normal electric hand control process for executing a drive control process of the normal electric hand 64c is executed (S5104). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the ordinary symbol, and as a result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol, a winning symbol of the ordinary symbol (for example, “ When the symbol “○” appears and becomes a hit state, the ordinary electric hand 64c is opened for a predetermined time. The details of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S5104, next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S5105). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). In addition, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 based on the winning detection information. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S5101) of the next timer interrupt process.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S5106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches a maximum value ("9999" in the thirteenth embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 273c area of the RAM 273. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 273c area of the RAM 273.

  Furthermore, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the ordinary figure random number counter C4 are updated (S5107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the per-figure random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (the first embodiment). In the embodiment, when the numbers reach “9999”, “99”, “99”, “9”, and “99”, respectively, they are cleared to “0”. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the ordinary figure random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the ordinary figure random number. The initial value of the counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the ordinary figure random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area 273c of the RAM 273.

  Next, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S5108), and then a gate passing process is executed in accordance with the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (S5109). . The details of the start winning process (S5108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 100, and the details of the gate passing process (S5109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the gate passing process (S5109), a process for dynamically displaying a special symbol by the special symbol display device 39 based on the processing content of the above-mentioned start winning process (S5108) or by the third symbol display device 81. A special figure fluctuation process for setting a fluctuation pattern of the third symbol and the like is executed (S5110). The details of the special figure change process (S5110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the special figure variation processing (S5110), then, based on the processing content of the gate passing processing (S5109), the ordinary figure variation which executes the processing for performing the variable display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display device 83 is performed. The processing is executed (S5111). The details of the ordinary figure change processing (S5111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the normal figure fluctuation processing (S5111), the control unit executes the firing control processing (S5112), and further executes other processing to be executed periodically (S5113), and ends the timer interruption processing. The firing control process (S5112) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining whether to turn on the ball. When the launch of the ball is on, the information of the launch signal is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273 in order to transmit the launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S5101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

  Next, the start winning process (S5108), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S5108).

  In the start winning process (S5108), it is determined whether or not a ball has been won in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and if there is a winning, the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 has been won. A process of storing (reserving) in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e corresponding to the mouths 64a and 64b is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the value of each of the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed.

  In the start winning process (S5108), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the ball has won (start win) the first starting port 64a (S5301). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 entrance switch (not shown) for detecting the entrance (winning) to the first starting port 64a, which is read in the switch reading processing (see S5105 in FIG. 98). , The ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 98).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (there is a start winning) (S5301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the first reserved ball number in the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number of active balls N1 for the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of one special symbol is less than the upper limit ("4" in the thirteenth embodiment) (S5302). Then, even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a, if the number of active balls N1 is not N1 <4 (S5302: No), this starting prize processing (S5108) is ended and a timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98). Return to

  On the other hand, if the number N1 of pending operation balls <4 (S5302: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number N1 of pending operation balls) is incremented by 1 (S5303). Then, since this time is a prize in the first starting opening 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 273d is set as a storage destination of each of the random numbers C1 to C3, CS1 (S5304), and the processing is performed. To S5309.

  In the processing of S5301, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64a (S5301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 64b (start winning). (S5305). Here, similarly to the first starting port 64a, a special figure 2 entrance switch (shown in FIG. 98) for detecting the entry (winning) to the second starting port 64b read in the switch reading process (see S5105 in FIG. 98). On the basis of the output signal of FIG. 98, a ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 98).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (there is a start winning) (S5305: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the first reserved ball number in the main controller 110). 2 It is determined whether or not the number N2 of operation-reserved balls for dynamic display of special symbols (fluctuation effect) is less than an upper limit value ("4" in the thirteenth embodiment) (S5306). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting opening 64b (S5305: No), or if there is a winning in the second starting opening 64b but the number of active balls is not N2 <4 (S5306: No), this is determined. The start winning process (S5108) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, if the number N2 of pending operation balls is smaller than 4 (S5306: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number N2 of pending operation balls) is incremented by 1 (S5307). Since this time is a prize in the second starting opening 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 273e is set as a storage destination of each of the random numbers C1 to C3 and CS1 (S5308), and the processing is performed. To S5309.

  In the process of S5309, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 86), and are set as storage destinations in S5304 or S5308. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas or the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the first reserved ball storage area 273d is provided. If it is specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3, and the variation type counter of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 273a. Each is stored in the storage area 273d4. (Stored) to (S5309). When the second reserved ball storage area 273e is designated as the storage destination, the big hit random number counter storage area 273e1, the big hit type counter storage area 273e2, and the stop of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 273b are stopped. It is suspended (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 and the variation type counter storage area 273e4 (S5309).

  Specifically, for example, in the process of S5304 based on winning in the first starting port 64a, the first reserved ball storage area 273d is set as a storage destination, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the process of S5303 is performed. If the value of 273a is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the first holding first area. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "4" in each of the storage areas of the first reserved third area, the respective stored areas of the first reserved fourth area are counters C1 to C3. , CS1 are reserved.

  Further, for example, in the process of S5308 based on winning in the second starting opening 64b, the second reserved ball storage area 273e is set as a storage destination, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after the addition in the process of S5307. Is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the second holding first area. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after the addition is "4" in each storage area of the second reserved third area, the counter C1 to C3 is stored in each stored area of the second reserved fourth area. , CS1 are reserved.

  Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a or the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number N1 of activated balls or the number N2 of activated balls) after the addition by the processing of S5303 or S5307, and the first value by the processing of S5309. The retained ball number command including each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is voiced. In order to transmit the command to the lamp control device 113, the command of the number of reserved balls is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 (S5310). As a result, the retained ball count command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process in S5101 of the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). Upon completion of the process in S5310, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  In the process of S5310, the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command may use the value itself read from the counter buffer 273c in the process of S5309, or the first reserved in the process of S5309. The value stored (reserved) in the ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e may be used.

  Further, in the processing of S5301 and S5305, when a ball wins simultaneously in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the winning processing of the ball to the first starting port 64a is preferentially executed, and the second starting is performed. The process waits for the ball winning process in the mouth 64b, and in the start winning process (S5108) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98), executes the ball winning process in the waiting second starting port 64b. May be configured.

  Next, a gate passing process (S5109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this gate passage processing (S5109).

  The gate passage process (S5109) determines whether or not the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67. If the ball has passed (entered), the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is stored in the ordinary figure holding ball. A process of storing (holding) in the storage area 273i is executed. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, in a game state where right-handed game is not encouraged (that is, “normal game state”), if the passage of a ball is detected at the through gate 67 that passes only during right-handed game, it is encouraged. It is determined that a game that has not been executed is executed, and a predetermined notification (for example, an alarm sound output) is made.

  In the gate passage processing (S5109), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the ball has passed the through gate 67 (S5401). Here, based on the output signal of a general-purpose gate switch (not shown) for detecting passage of a sphere to the through gate 67 (entering the ball) read in the switch reading process (see S5105 in FIG. 98), Is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 98).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5401 that the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67 (S5401: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current game state is the "normal game state" (S5402). ). If the result of determination is “normal game state” (S5402: Yes), a right-handed game is played in a situation where right-handed game is not encouraged, and a ball has been detected by the through gate 67. In addition, a normal right-handed error process for giving an error message indicating that a game not recommended to the employees of the game hall has been executed is performed (S5403), and the process proceeds to S5404.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5402, when it is determined that the game is not the “normal game state” (S5402: No), the situation where the right-handed game is encouraged (that is, the “super probability fluctuation state”, the “probability fluctuation state”, or Since the right-handed game is performed in the “time reduction state”, the process of S5403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5404.

  In this way, when the game is played in a situation where the right-handed game is not encouraged, the situation is determined by the through gate 67 detected only in the right-handed game, and the determination result is reported as an error. The player and the employee of the game hall can recognize that the game is not encouraged. As a result, a non-recommended game can be detected without the need to provide another detection device, and a non-recommended game is performed by suppressing the player from performing a non-recommended game by the notification. Of the game hall due to the above can be suppressed.

  Next, in the process of S5404, the value of the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 273h (the number of operation reserved balls HN for variable display of ordinary symbols retained in the main controller 110) is set to the upper limit value ("4" in the thirteenth embodiment). )) Is determined (S5404). Then, there is no passage (entering the ball) to the through gate 67 (S5401: No), or even if there is a passage (entering the ball) to the through gate 67, the number of active balls is not HN <4 (S5404: No), this gate passage process (S5109) is ended, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, if the number of operation-reserved balls HN <4 (S5404: Yes), the value of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 273h (the number of operation-reserved balls HN) is incremented by 1 (S5405). Then, the value of the per-figure per-counter C4 is read from the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 86), and the read data is read out of the first to fourth areas of the general-figure hold sphere storage area 273i. It is stored in an area corresponding to the value indicated by the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 273h (S5406).

  Specifically, for example, if the value of the general figure reserved ball number counter 273h after the addition in the processing of S5405 is “1”, the value of the general figure per-counter C4 is reserved in the general figure reserved first area. In addition, if the value of the post-additional ball-holding ball counter 273h is “2”, the value is “2”. If the value of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 273h after the addition is “4” in the reserved general-purpose reserved area, the value of the general-purpose counter C4 is retained in the general-purpose reserved fourth area. After the end of the processing of S5406, this gate passage processing (S5109) ends, and the processing returns to the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 98).

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the reserved ball count command relating to the variable display of the ordinary symbol is configured not to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The information may be transmitted to the CPU 113 to perform an effect (notification) on a reserved symbol or the like related to the variable display of the ordinary symbol. In this case, by transmitting the value of the counter C4 per ordinary figure in the number of retained balls command and transmitting the same, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute a so-called look-ahead process on ordinary symbols, and to provide a variation of the effect on ordinary symbols. It may be configured to be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a special figure change process (S5110) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this special figure change processing (S5110).

  This special figure variation processing (S5110) is for performing dynamic display on the special symbol display device 39 relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and control relating to the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special figure change processing (S5110), the MPU 271 first determines whether any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is currently in a big hit (S5501). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 39 at the time of the jackpot, during the predetermined time before the jackpot game start (that is, the jackpot opening), During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game (ie, the jackpot ending). If the result of determination in S5501 is that any of the special symbols is in a big hit (S5501: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S5110) is terminated, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5501 that no big hit is occurring (S5501: No), then it is determined whether any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is currently in the small hit. (S5502). During the small hit, the predetermined time before the start of the small hit game (that is, the small hit opening) and during the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 39 at the time of the small hit And during the predetermined time after the end of the small hitting game (that is, the small hitting ending). If the result of determination in S5502 is that any of the special symbols is in a small hit (S5502: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S5110) is terminated, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98).

  In the process of S5502, when it is determined that the small hit is not occurring (S5502: No), it is next determined whether or not the display mode of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 is dynamically displayed. (S5503). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the first special symbol is being dynamically displayed (S5503: Yes), the process of S5504 and S5505 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5506. If the display mode of the first special symbol is not being dynamically displayed (S5503: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 has stopped. (S5504). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after stopping the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5504: No), the process proceeds to S5506. Thereby, the stop symbol in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the stop symbol is displayed to the player. It can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5504, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5504: Yes), it is the timing at which the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed. A special figure 1 change start process, which is a process for determining whether or not to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol, is performed (S5505), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S5506. The details of the special figure 1 change start process (S5505) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S5506, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 is being dynamically displayed (S5506). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the second special symbol is being dynamically displayed (S5506: Yes), the process of S5507 and S5508 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5509, while the second symbol in the special symbol display device 39 is displayed. (2) If the display mode of the special symbol is not being dynamically displayed (S5506: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 has stopped. (S5507). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5507: No), the process proceeds to S5509. Thereby, the stop symbol in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the stop symbol is displayed to the player. It can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5507, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5507: Yes), it is the timing at which the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed. A special figure 2 change start process, which is a process for determining whether or not to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol, is performed (S5508), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S5509. The details of the special figure 2 change start process (S5508) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S5509, it is determined whether to stop the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, and if it is time to stop, the execution of the dynamic display is executed. A fluctuation stop process as a stop process is performed (S5509). After the fluctuation stop processing (S5509), the special figure fluctuation processing (S5110) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98). The details of the fluctuation stop processing (S5509) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously and in parallel, so that each special symbol is sequentially displayed. More lottery opportunities can be given to the player than in the case of execution, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) which is one of the special figure change processing (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 change start processing (S5505).

  In the special figure 1 change start process (S5505), when the timing at which the execution of the dynamic display (change effect) of the first special symbol can be started is reached, the number of reserved balls (N1) of the first special symbol exists. It is determined whether or not to perform the determination, and if the number of reserved balls is present, the content of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the determination result while performing the hit determination based on the game state. In addition, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed and the result of the dynamic display of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is determined. Is a big hit or a small hit, the currently set execution time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is compared with the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the currently executed second special symbol. If it is determined that the execution time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is shorter than the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the dynamic time of the second special symbol being executed is determined. While changing the target display to the dynamic display of the loss, the execution time to be stopped at the same time as the dynamic display of the first special symbol is reset. Further, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not a small hit and the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed has a content that can derive a big hit, a winning / non-selection lottery in the first special symbol is performed. First, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set as the dynamic display of the loss.

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a jackpot or a small jackpot from being generated by the other special symbol while the jackpot or the small jackpot is being performed by one of the special symbols. ) Can prevent the player from being paid out an excessive game value. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider overlapping big hits or small hits, so that calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed. .

  In the special figure 1 change start process (S5505), the MPU 271 first activates the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (dynamic display (variation effect) relating to the first special symbol held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N1) is larger than “0” (S5511). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is not a value larger than “0” (S5511: No), the reserved ball number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be started Does not exist, the special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) ends, and the flow returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 102).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5511, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number N1 of activated reserved balls) is not “0” (S5511: Yes), the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol is performed. It is the execution start timing, and it is determined that there is a dynamic display of the first special symbol to be started. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is decremented by 1 (S5512). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (variable effect) of the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the reserved first special symbol is started, and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Next, in the process of S5513, the data stored in the first reserved sphere storage area 273d is shifted (S5513). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 273d toward the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Hold first area → first hold ball execution area 273f, first hold second area → first hold first area, first hold third area → first hold second area, first hold fourth area → first The data in each area is shifted, such as in a reserved third area.

  Next, in the processing of S5514, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the special symbol high-probability state, that is, whether or not the “super-probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” (S5514). As a result of the determination, if the gaming state is not the special symbol high-probability state, that is, if it is determined to be the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state” (S5514: No), the jackpot probability of the first special symbol (And the small-hit probability) is in the low-probability state, so that it is set to refer to the low-probability state in the special figure 1 big-hit random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 87A) (S5515). Move to determination process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5514, when the gaming state is the high probability state of the special symbol, that is, the “super probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” (S5514: Yes), the first special symbol Since the jackpot probability (and the small jackpot probability) is in the high probability state, it is set so as to refer to the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 87A) (S5516), and the processing is S5517. Then, the process proceeds to the success / failure determination process.

  In the hit determination processing of S5517, first, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f in the first special symbol and the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 set in S5515 or S5516 (FIG. 87 (a)) to perform a small hit lottery (small hitting success / failure determination) process of determining whether or not a small hit has been won (S5517).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the small hit is determined based on the relationship between the probability set value set when the power is turned on, the value of the big hit random number counter C1, and the type of the special symbol. As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, no difference is provided between the small hit random numbers for each set value (that is, all 100), but the number of jackpot random numbers different for each set value is different. As the (range) is changed, the value (range) of the small hit random value is different for each set value.

  Specifically, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “time shortening state”), the random number of small hits for each set value is 100 pieces. In the case of the setting value “1”, the value is “50 to 149”, in the case of the setting value “2”, the value is “52 to 151”, and in the case of the setting value “3”, the value is “54 to 153”. In the case of the setting value "4", it is defined as "56 to 155", in the case of the setting value "5", it is "58 to 157", and in the case of the setting value "6", it is defined as "60 to 159". .

  On the other hand, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state (that is, “super-probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”), the small random number value for each set value is also 100 pieces. The setting value is “500 to 599” for the setting value “1”, “520 to 619” for the setting value “2”, and “540 to 639” for the setting value “3”. In the case of the value "4", it is defined as "560-659", in the case of the set value "5", it is "580-679", and in the case of the set value "6", it is defined as "600-699".

  In the processing of S5517, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is compared with the small hit random number value defined in the special figure 1 big jackpot random number table 272a1, and they match. If so, it is determined that it is a small hit. As a result of the processing of S5517, when it is determined that the small hit is made (S5517: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S5518). In the thirteenth embodiment, since only one type of small hit game is provided, when a small hit is won, the same counter is obtained without checking other counters (for example, big hit type counter C2). A stop symbol (for example, “341” or the like) corresponding to the small hit is set.

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of small hit games (for example, "small hit A" for one round, "small hit B" for two rounds, etc.) are provided, and the big hit types stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. The type of the small hitting game may be selected by the counter C2. In this case, instead of the big hit type counter C2, a small hit type counter dedicated to a small hit may be provided, and the type of the small hit game may be selected based on the value of the small hit type counter. With this configuration, variations in the small hit game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, in the process of S5519, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit is determined (S5519), and the process proceeds to S5520. Specifically, in the process of S5519, the variation pattern is determined by the same control program as that at the time of the big hit or the loss. That is, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the effect mode is selected based on the presence or absence of a small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Then, the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from among the selected rendering modes. In the thirteenth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, the E table 272d5 (see FIG. 91 (b)) is selected without fail irrespective of the gaming state and the number of reserved balls, and furthermore, the E table 272d5 "E9: Special fluctuation" effect mode is selected without exception.

  In the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2 provided for each effect mode set in the processing of S5519, the special pattern is associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Select the fluctuation pattern. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance. In the thirteenth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + a fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” is a fluctuation pattern of “45 seconds” without exception. ”+“ Special reach ”+“ re-variation ”.

  Next, in the process of S5520, the special figure 2 is changed in order to determine whether or not the lottery result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is changed by the small hitting game of the first special symbol that has been won this time. The process (S5520) is performed, and then the process shifts to S5527.

  Here, the special figure 2 change processing (S5520) which is one processing of the special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 change processing (S5520).

  This special figure 2 change processing (S5520) is executed when the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the big hit game or the small hit game is performed in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed. If it can occur, the change time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, “45 seconds”) is compared with the change time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, If the change time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time is shorter than the change time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit. Alternatively, a process of changing from a small hit to a loss is performed.

  In the special figure 2 change process (S5520), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5531). If the result of the determination is that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not been executed (S5531: No), there is no dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed. S5520) is ended, and the process returns to the special figure 1 change start processing (FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5531, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5531: Yes), the result of the dynamic display of the currently executed second special symbol is lost. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S5532). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is lost (S5532: Yes), the large winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a will not be opened repeatedly, and in this case also. This special figure 2 change processing (S5520) ends, and the processing returns to special figure 1 change start processing (FIG. 103).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5532, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is not a loss, that is, if the dynamic display is a big hit or a small hit (S5532: No), then the second special symbol being executed is displayed. The change time of the dynamic display (remaining execution time) is compared with the change time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, “45 seconds”), and the dynamic time of the second special symbol being executed is compared. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display (remaining execution time) is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, whether or not the remaining “45 seconds” or more) (S5533). ).

  As a result of the determination in S5533, when it is determined that the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed (the remaining execution time) is longer than the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time ( S5533: Yes), since the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time derives the winning / failing result earlier, the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is preferentially executed, In order to prevent the overlapping winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a from being opened in duplicate, the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is changed to "losing" (S5534), and the second special symbol being executed is changed. The variation pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display is set equal to the variation pattern of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, “45 seconds”) (S5535). With this configuration, the result of the first special symbol derived earlier is preferentially executed, and the result of the second special symbol derived later is changed (erased). The opening of the opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a can be prevented beforehand, and an excessive gaming value can be prevented from being given to the player.

  Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern command based on the variation pattern changed in the processing of S5535 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 (S5536), and based on the success / failure result changed in the processing of S5534. The special figure 2 display mode command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S5537). After the processing of S5537, the special figure 2 change processing (S5520) is ended, and the processing returns to the special figure 1 change start processing (FIG. 103). As a result, the special figure 2 change pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S5101) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98) executed next. You.

  Upon receiving the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 executes the special figure 2 display fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 A display type command is generated and transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Here, the voice lamp control device 113 determines that a command transmission error has occurred if the variation pattern command and the display mode command cannot be normally received (as a set) when performing the variation effect of each special symbol. An error change (default change) indicating that a transmission error has occurred is executed. Here, when the variation pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the success / failure result are changed, and only the variation pattern command or only the stop type command is transmitted, the sound lamp control device 113 Since the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, which should be transmitted as a set, are not transmitted, there is a possibility that a command transmission error is determined. In addition, if the receiving program of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed in consideration of the change of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the control program must be newly designed and the sound lamp control device is changed. The control program on the 113 side may be complicated.

  Therefore, when the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is changed based on the content of the dynamic display of the first special symbol as in the thirteenth embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed is performed. By transmitting the variation pattern command and the stop type command as a set to the audio ramp control device 113, it is not necessary to change the control program on the audio ramp control device 113 side, thereby reducing the number of design steps and the control burden. be able to. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the variation effect of the special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is different depending on the gaming state. Here, when the content of the non-executing special symbol variation effect is replaced by the third symbol display device 81, the non-executing special symbol variation effect is not executed in the first place. Even when the replacement control is executed for, it is possible to provide a comfortable game without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In the process of S5533, if the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed (remaining execution time) is not longer (ie, shorter) than the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time. When it is determined (S5533: No), the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time derives the winning / failure result later, that is, the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is performed first. In order to derive the success / failure result, the jackpot game or the small jackpot game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is preferentially executed, and the opening of the overlapping large winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a is prevented beforehand. In this case, the result of the pass / fail of the first special symbol set this time is changed to “losing” (S5538), and the change pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time is changed to the second special symbol being executed. Dynamic Display Fluctuation Time The remaining run time) and set equally (S5539), the special symbol 2 terminates change processing (S5520), returns to the special symbol 1 change start processing (see FIG. 103). With this configuration, the result of the pass / fail of the second special symbol derived earlier is preferentially executed, and the result of the pass / fail of the first special symbol derived later is changed (erased). The opening of the opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a can be prevented beforehand, and an excessive gaming value can be prevented from being given to the player.

  In the process of S5532, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is a loss (S5532: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5535, and the second special symbol being executed is executed. Of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, "45 seconds") (S5535). ). With such a configuration, the result of the pass / fail of the first special symbol derived first is preferentially executed, and the second special symbol derived later is stopped in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the dynamic display is executed in a situation where the big hit game or the small hit game has been started.

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S5517 that the winning is not a small hit (S5517: No), then, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed and the lottery result of the big hit game in the dynamic display It is determined whether or not can be derived (S5521). Whether the jackpot game can be derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed or not can be determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g according to the game state and the special figure. It is performed with reference to the two big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 87 (b)). If the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed (S5521: No), then the first hit is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273f and the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 87 (a)) set in S5515 or S5516. A jackpot lottery (win / fail judgment) process is performed (S5522).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, whether or not a jackpot is determined is determined based on a relationship between a set value set at power-on, a value of a jackpot random number counter C1, and a gaming state (mode) at each time. You. As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 87 (a)), the jackpot random number value has a setting difference, and the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state. (Ie, the “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) and the high probability state (ie, “super probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”), the value of the random number of the jackpot (Range) are different.

  Specifically, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state”), the jackpot random number value for each set value is equal to the set value. In the case of "1", it is "0-49 (that is, 50)", in the case of the setting value "2", it is "0-51 (that is, 52)", and in the case of the setting value "3", "0 to 53 (i.e., 54)", "0" to "55" (i.e., 56) when the set value is "4", and "0 to 57" (i.e., the set value "5"). , 58), and the set value “6” is defined as “0 to 59 (that is, 60)”.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state (that is, “super-probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot random number value for each set value is set to “1”. "Is" 0-499 (i.e., 500) ", the set value" 2 "is" 0-519 (i.e., 520) ", and the set value" 3 "is" 0 ". -539 (i.e., 540) ", the set value" 4 "is" 0-559 (i.e., 560) ", and the set value" 5 "is" 0-579 (i.e., 580). ), And the set value “6” is defined as “0-599 (ie, 600)”.

  Therefore, in the process of S5522, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is compared with the jackpot random number value specified in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, and these are compared. If they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the processing of S5522, when it is determined that the current dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big hit (S5522: Yes), then, the big hit type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is determined. Based on the value and the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 (see FIG. 88 (a)) corresponding to the first special symbol, the display mode at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol is set (S5523).

  In this processing, according to the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1, the big hit type associated with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f, that is, the maximum number of rounds after the 16 round big hit "Probability fluctuation A" which shifts to "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation B" which shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpots, or " It is determined whether or not “time reduction” is to be entered for the “time reduction state”. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (display mode of the upper LED group 39b1) on the special symbol display device 39 is set. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f and the special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1 (see FIG. 88 (a)). .

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5524), and the process shifts to S5520. Specifically, first, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. The effect mode is selected based on the value, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected effect mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, a stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 90 or FIG. 91) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot. Then, in the process of S5520, as in the case where the small win has been won, the dynamic (variable) time of the big hit scheduled to be implemented this time in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol A special symbol which is prioritized according to whether a big hit or a small hit occurs, and whether the dynamic display of the second special symbol is longer or shorter than the dynamic time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol this time. Determine the jackpot or the small hit.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, there are three types of jackpot games, but if a jackpot is won, regardless of the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of pending dynamic display balls on standby, all of the jackpot games are completed. The D table 272d4 (see FIG. 91A) is set. Then, in the D table 272d4, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is selected.

  In the process of S5524, referring to the selected rendering mode and the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2, the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is corresponded. Select the attached fluctuation pattern. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5521 that the big hit can be derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed (S5521: Yes), the big hit game is already derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Is determined, the display mode at the time of the loss is set so that the big hit is not repeatedly derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5525).

  In the process of S5525, the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is set to a display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and a rough variation pattern (effect mode) is set. The setting of the effect mode includes the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f, the total value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a and the second reserved ball number counter 273b, and the current value. Based on the gaming state, the non-reach (long) production mode, the “non-reach (short)” production mode, the “normal reach” production mode, and the “super reach” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the production mode. One of an effect mode, a “special reach” effect mode, and a “super long fluctuation” effect mode is set. In the thirteenth embodiment, each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “normal gaming state”, the “super-probability variation state”, the “probability variation state”, or the “time reduction state”. The stop pattern table 272d is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S5526), and the flow shifts to the process of SS5527. In the processing of S5526, the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop symbol is displayed in the lost symbol. Specifically, the fluctuation stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of the loss determined in the processing of S5525. A variation pattern associated with the value of the type counter CS1 is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  In the process of S5522, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not a big hit (S5522: No), the process proceeds to S5525, and the processes of S5525 and S5526 are performed. The display mode and the fluctuation pattern at the time are set.

  As described above, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, and the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are performed by the stop pattern table 272d. By using the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 to determine and determine using the same determination program, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps during development can be reduced.

  Next, in the processing of S5527, based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the dynamic display of the first special symbol determined by the processing of S5519, S5524, or S5526, the fluctuation pattern is provided via the sound lamp control device 113. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time corresponding to the time is set (S5527).

  Specifically, for example, when the big hit lottery is won, the big hit type is “probability change A”, and a change pattern including a change element of “super reach” of “25 seconds” is selected. Is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating special figure 1, big hit, “probability fluctuation A”, and “super reach” of “25 seconds”. In addition, if the player loses the jackpot lottery and further selects a variation pattern that includes a variation element of “25 seconds” “super reach”, the special figure 1 loss, “25 seconds” “super reach” The special figure 1 variation pattern command shown is set. As described above, even when the fluctuation effects have the same fluctuation time, the special lamp 1 fluctuation pattern command is set together with the type of the special symbol, the validity of the fluctuation effect, and the content of the rough fluctuation pattern, so that the sound ramp control is performed. The device 113 grasps the type of the special symbol to be changed, the contents of the effect mode including the pass / fail, and the change time, and can determine a detailed change pattern of the change effect based on the information.

  After the processing of S5527, a special figure for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S5518, S5523 or S5525. One stop type command is set (S5528), the special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) ends, and the process returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 102).

  Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “probability variation A”, without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “7” symbol), A special figure 1 stop type command indicating "probability variation A" is set. In addition, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “time reduction”, it is “time reduction” without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “4” symbol). A special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate this.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the “Super Reach” production mode is selected, the specific stop mode (for example, “787”) of the third symbol is not specified and “ A special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate the "super reach" effect mode. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. A special figure 1 stop type command indicating the effect mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the “non-reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258” or the like) is not specified and “ A special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate the "non-reach" effect mode.

  As described above, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the special figure 1 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (the display control device 114) can determine the special symbol to be changed and the success or failure. By grasping the stop type based on the information, it is possible to determine a detailed fluctuation effect stop result based on the information.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and are externally output in the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98). In (S5101), these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 1 change pattern command or the special figure 1 stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a change pattern command for special figure 1 display or the special figure 1 display type command based on the command, and the display control device 114. Send to

  Next, the special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) which is one of the special figure change processing (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 change start process (S5508).

  This special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) related to the first special design for the second special design. When the timing at which the execution of the target display (fluctuation effect) can be started is reached, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (N2) of the second special symbol exists, and when the number of reserved balls exists. In this case, the content of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the result of the determination while making the determination based on the game state. In addition, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the result of the dynamic display of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is determined. Is a big hit or a small hit, the currently set execution time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is compared with the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed. When it is determined that the execution time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is shorter than the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic time of the first special symbol during execution is determined. While changing the target display to the dynamic display of the loss, the execution time to stop at the same time as the dynamic display of the second special symbol is reset. Further, in the case where the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not a small hit, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed has a content that can derive a big hit, a winning / non-selection lottery in the second special symbol is performed. First, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set as the dynamic display of the loss.

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a jackpot or a small jackpot from being generated by the other special symbol while the jackpot or the small jackpot is being performed by one of the special symbols. ) Can prevent the player from being paid out an excessive game value.

  In the special figure 2 change start process (S5508), the MPU 271 first activates the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol held in the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N2) is larger than “0” (S5541). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not a value greater than "0" (S5541: No), the reserved ball number of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be started Does not exist, the special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) ends, and the processing returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 102).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5541, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not "0" (S5541: Yes), the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) related to the second special symbol is performed. It is the execution start timing, and it is determined that there is a dynamic display of the second special symbol to be started. First, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is decremented by 1 (S5542). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the reserved dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the second special symbol is started, and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Next, in the processing of S5543, the data stored in the second reserved sphere storage area 273e is shifted (S5543). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to first reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e toward the second reserved ball execution area 273g. Hold first area → second hold ball execution area 273g, second hold second area → second hold first area, second hold third area → second hold second area, second hold fourth area → second The data in each area is shifted, such as in a reserved third area.

  Next, in the process of S5544, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the special symbol high probability state, that is, whether or not the “super probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” (S5544). As a result of the determination, when the gaming state is not the special symbol high probability state, that is, when it is determined to be the “normal gaming state” or the “time shortened state” (S5544: No), the jackpot probability of the second special symbol Since the small hit probability is in the low probability state, the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 87 (b)) for the low probability state of the second special symbol is set (S5545), and the process is performed in S5547. Move to determination process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5544, when the gaming state is the high probability state of the special symbol, that is, “super probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state” (S5544: Yes), the second special symbol Since the jackpot probability (and the small jackpot probability) is in the high probability state, the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 87 (b)) for the high probability state of the second special symbol is set (S5546), and the processing is performed. Is transferred to the success / failure determination process of S5547.

  In the hit determination processing of S5547, first, in the second special symbol, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 set in S5545 or S5546 (see FIG. 87 (b)) to perform a small hit lottery (small hit success / failure determination) process of determining whether or not a small hit has been won (S5547).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the small hit is determined based on the relationship between the set value set when the power is turned on, the value of the big hit random number counter C1, and the type of the special symbol. As described above, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, there is no setting difference in the small hit random number values (that is, all 9400 pieces), but the number (range) of the jackpot random number values different for each set value is By being changed, the value (range) of the small random number value differs for each set value.

  Specifically, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state”), the small random number value for each set value is 9,400. In the case of the setting value “1”, the value is “50 to 9449”, in the case of the setting value “2”, the value is “52 to 9451”, and in the case of the setting value “3”, the value is “54 to 9453”. In the case of the setting value "4", it is defined as "56-9455", in the case of the setting value "5", it is "58-9457", and in the case of the setting value "6", it is defined as "60-9449". .

  On the other hand, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern high-probability state (that is, “super-probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”), the small random number value for each set value is also 9,400. In the case of the set value “1”, it is “500-9899”, in the case of the set value “2”, it is “520-9919”, and in the case of the set value “3”, it is “540-9939”. In the case of the value "4", it is defined as "560-9959", in the case of the set value "5", it is defined as "580-9979", and in the case of the set value "6", it is defined as "600-9999".

  In the processing of S5547, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g is compared with the small jackpot random number value specified in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, and they match. If so, it is determined that it is a small hit. As a result of the processing of S5547, when it is determined that the small hit is made (S5547: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S5548). In the thirteenth embodiment, since only one type of small hit game is provided, when a small hit is won, the same counter is obtained without checking other counters (for example, big hit type counter C2). The display mode (type) of the small hit game is set.

  Next, in the processing of S5549, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S5549), and the processing shifts to S5550. Specifically, in the process of S5549, the variation pattern is determined by the same control program as that at the time of the big hit or the loss. That is, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, based on the small hit display mode (stop type) and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g. Then, the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected rendering mode. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, the E table 272d5 is selected without fail irrespective of the game state and the number of retained balls, and furthermore, “E9: special fluctuation” is completely selected in the E table 272d5. An effect mode is selected.

  The special special figure 2 large hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 provided for each effect mode set in the processing of S5549 and referred to at the time of the "normal game state", or "super probability change state", "probability" The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e6 for probability change / time saving referred to in the "change state" or "time reduction state". Is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance. In the thirteenth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, if the “normal game state” is selected, the fluctuation pattern of “630 seconds”, which is the “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+” "Variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" Variable element of "Normal reach" + Variable element of "Special reach" + "Variable element of" re-variation "" is selected, and "Super stochastic fluctuation state", "Probability fluctuation state" or "Time In the case of the "shortened state", the "3 seconds" fluctuation pattern "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) "" is selected.

  Next, in the process of S5550, the special figure 1 is changed in order to determine whether or not the lottery result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is changed by the small hitting game of the second special symbol that has been won this time. The process (S5550) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S5557.

  Here, the special figure 1 change processing (S5550) which is one of the special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 change processing (S5550).

  This special figure 1 change processing (S5550) is executed when the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the big hit game or the small hit game is performed in the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed. If it can occur, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time (that is, “630 seconds” or “3 seconds”) and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed If the change time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time is shorter than the change time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed, the dynamic time of the first special symbol being executed is A process of changing the content of the display from a big hit or a small hit to a loss is performed.

  In the special figure 1 change processing (S5550), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5561). If the result of the determination is that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not been executed (S5561: No), there is no dynamic display of the first special symbol to be changed. S5550) is ended, and the process returns to the special figure 2 change start process (FIG. 105).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5561 that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5561: Yes), the hit / fail result indicated by the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is lost. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S5562). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is lost (S5562: Yes), the large winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a will not be opened repeatedly, and in this case also. This special figure 1 change processing (S5550) ends, and the processing returns to special figure 2 change start processing (FIG. 105).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5562, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is not a loss, that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit (S5562: No), then the first special symbol being executed is displayed. The change time of the dynamic display (remaining execution time) is compared with the change time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time (that is, “630 seconds” or “3 seconds”). 1 Whether the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol (remaining execution time) is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time (that is, the remaining “630 seconds” or “3 seconds”) Is determined (S5563). In the dynamic display of the first special symbol, a variation pattern of “630 seconds” or more is configured not to be selected. Therefore, in S5563, it is configured to determine whether it is “3 seconds” or more. You may.

  As a result of the determination in S5563, when it is determined that the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed (the remaining execution time) is longer than the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time ( S5563: Yes), since the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time derives the result of the winning first, the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, In order to prevent the overlapping winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a from being opened in duplicate, the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is changed to "losing" (S5564), and the execution of the first special symbol being executed is changed. The change pattern (change time) of the dynamic display is set to be equal to the change pattern of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time (that is, “630 seconds” or “3 seconds”) (S5565). With this configuration, the result of the pass / fail of the second special symbol derived earlier is preferentially executed, and the result of the pass / fail of the first special symbol derived later is changed (erased). The opening of the opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a can be prevented beforehand, and an excessive gaming value can be prevented from being given to the player.

  Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern command based on the variation pattern changed in the processing of S5565 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 (S5566), and based on the success / failure result changed in the processing of S5564. The special figure 1 display mode command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S5567). After the processing of S5567, the special figure 1 change processing (S5550) is ended, and the process returns to the special figure 2 change start processing (FIG. 105). As a result, the special figure 1 change pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S5101) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98) executed next. You.

  In the processing of S5563, if the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed (the remaining execution time) is not longer (ie, shorter) than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time. When it is determined (S5563: No), the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time derives the result of the success / failure, that is, the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is performed first. In order to derive the success / failure result, the jackpot game or the small jackpot game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is preferentially executed, and the opening of the duplicate big winning port 65a or the small winning port 72a is prevented beforehand. In this case, the pass / fail result of the second special symbol set this time is changed to "losing" (S5568), and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time is changed to the first special symbol being executed. Dynamic Display Fluctuation Time And equally set the remaining running time) (S5569), the special symbol 1 terminates change processing (S5550), returns to the special symbol 2 change start processing (see FIG. 105). With this configuration, the result of the first special symbol derived earlier is preferentially executed, and the result of the second special symbol derived later is changed (erased). The opening of the opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a can be prevented beforehand, and an excessive gaming value can be prevented from being given to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S5547 that the winning is not a small hit (S5547: No), then, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the lottery result of the big hit game in the dynamic display. It is determined whether or not can be derived (S5551). This determination is made with reference to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f according to the game state and the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 87 (a)). When the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed (S5551: No), then, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g, and S5545 or S5546. Based on the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 87 (b)) set in the above, a big hit lottery (win / fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a big hit is performed (S5552).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, whether or not a jackpot is determined is determined based on a relationship between a set value set at power-on, a value of a jackpot random number counter C1, and a gaming state (mode) at each time. You. As described above, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 87 (b)), similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 87 (a)), the jackpot random number value has a setting difference. The game state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal low-probability state (ie, “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) and a high-probability state (ie, “super-probability state”). Or "probability variation state"), the value (range) of the jackpot random value is configured to be different. Note that the range of the jackpot random number value in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, in the process of S5552, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g is compared with the jackpot random number value specified in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, and those are compared. If they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the processing of S5552, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol at this time is a big hit (S5552: Yes), the big hit type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g is next. Based on the value and the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 (see FIG. 88 (b)) corresponding to the second special symbol, the display mode at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol is set (S5553).

  In this process, according to the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2, the big hit type associated with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g, that is, the maximum round number after the 16 round big hit "Probability fluctuation A" which shifts to "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation B" which shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpots, or " It is determined whether or not “time reduction” is to be entered for the “time reduction state”. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (display mode of the lower LED group 39b2) on the special symbol display device 39 is set. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2 (see FIG. 88 (b)). .

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5554), and the process proceeds to S5550. Specifically, first, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g. The effect mode is selected based on the value, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected effect mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, a stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 90 or FIG. 91) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot. Then, in the processing of S5550, as in the case of winning the small hit, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the dynamic (fluctuation) time of the big hit scheduled to be implemented this time, and in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, A special symbol which is prioritized according to whether a big hit or a small hit occurs, and whether the dynamic display of the first special symbol is longer or shorter than the dynamic time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol this time. Determine the jackpot or the small hit.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, there are three types of jackpot games, but if a jackpot is won, regardless of the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of pending dynamic display balls on standby, all of the jackpot games are completed. The D table 272d4 (see FIG. 91A) is set. Then, in the D table 272d4, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g is selected.

  The special special figure 2 large hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 provided for each effect mode selected in the processing of S5554 and referred to in the "normal game state", or the "super probability change state", "probability" The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e6 for probability change / time saving referred to in the "change state" or "time reduction state". Is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5551 that the big hit can be derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed (S5551: Yes), the big hit game is already derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Is determined, the display mode at the time of the loss is set so that the big hit is not repeatedly derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5555).

  In the processing of S5555, the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is set to a display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and a rough variation pattern (effect mode) is set. The setting of the effect form includes the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g, the total value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a and the second reserved ball number counter 273b, and the current value. Based on the gaming state, the non-reach (long) production mode, the “non-reach (short)” production mode, the “normal reach” production mode, and the “super reach” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the production mode. One of an effect mode, a “special reach” effect mode, and a “super long fluctuation” effect mode is set. In the thirteenth embodiment, each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “normal gaming state”, the “super-probability variation state”, the “probability variation state”, or the “time reduction state”. The stop pattern table 272d is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S5556), and the flow shifts to the process of SS5557. In the processing of S5556, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until stop display with the lost symbol is determined. More specifically, a normal special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 provided for each loss display mode (effect mode) determined in the processing of S5555 and referred to in the "normal game state", or In the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 for probabilistic variation and time reduction referred to in the "super probability variation state", "probability variation state" or "time reduction state", the variable is stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g. The change pattern associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  In the process of S5552, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol at this time is not a big hit (S5552: No), the process proceeds to S5555, and the processes of S5555 and S5556 are performed. The display mode and the fluctuation pattern at the time are set.

  Thus, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small hit in the second special symbol, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, and the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss, By using the same random number values C3 and CS1 to determine and determine by the same determination program, the program can be shared and the number of development steps during development can be reduced. In addition, by determining and determining the hit / fail determination processing for the second special symbol and the hit / fail determination processing for the first special symbol using the same determination program, the program can be shared and the number of development steps during development can be reduced. be able to.

  Next, in the processing of S5557, based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the dynamic display of the second special symbol determined by the processing of S5549, S5554, or S5556, the fluctuation pattern is provided via the sound lamp control device 113. The special figure 2 change pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change time according to the setting is set (S5557).

  Specifically, for example, when the big hit lottery is won, the big hit type is “probability change A”, and a change pattern including a change element of “super reach” of “25 seconds” is selected. Is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command that indicates "super reach" of special figure 2, jackpot, "probability fluctuation A", and "25 seconds". In addition, if the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation element of “25 seconds” “Super Reach” is selected for the jackpot lottery, and the special pattern 2 is lost, “Super Reach” of “25 seconds” is selected. The special figure 2 variation pattern command shown is set. In this way, even if the fluctuation effect is the same fluctuation time, the special lamp 2 fluctuation pattern command is set together with the type of the special symbol, the validity of the fluctuation effect, and the content of the rough fluctuation pattern, so that the sound ramp control is performed. The device 113 grasps the type of the special symbol to be changed, the contents of the effect mode including the pass / fail, and the change time, and can determine a detailed change pattern of the change effect based on the information.

  After the processing of S5557, a special figure for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in the processing of S5548, S5553 or S5555. The 2 stop type command is set (S5558), the special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) ends, and the process returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 102).

  Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “probability variation A”, without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “7” symbol), A special figure 2 stop type command indicating “probability variation A” is set. In addition, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “time reduction”, it is “time reduction” without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “4” symbol). A special type 2 stop type command is set to indicate this.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the “Super Reach” production mode is selected, the specific stop mode (for example, “787”) of the third symbol is not specified and “ A special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate the "super reach" effect mode. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. A special figure 2 stop type command indicating the effect mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the “non-reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258” or the like) is not specified and “ A special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate the "non-reach" effect mode.

  As described above, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (the display control device 114) can determine whether the special symbol to be changed and the correct design are appropriate. By grasping the stop type based on the information, it is possible to determine a detailed fluctuation effect stop result based on the information.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and are externally output in the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98). In (S5101), these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 change pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a change pattern command for special figure 2 display and the special figure 2 display type command based on the command, and generates the display control device 114. Send to

  Next, the fluctuation stop processing (S5509), which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop processing (S5509).

  This fluctuation stop processing (S5110) is to change the display content of the upper LED group 39b1 or the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 during the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol. At the same time as updating, when the end timing of each dynamic display comes, a determination command according to the special symbol to be ended is set, and the fluctuation of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the end timing is stopped.

  In the fluctuation stop processing (S5509), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special symbol display device 39 (S5571). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed (S5571: No), S5572 to S5581 relating to the stop processing of the first special symbol are skipped, and the process shifts to S5582.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5571: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the execution time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed has elapsed. (S5572). The display time during the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the special pattern 1 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) has not elapsed (S5572: No), the display of the upper LED group 39b1 on the special symbol display device 39 is updated (S5573), and the process proceeds to S5582. .

  In the thirteenth embodiment, in the upper LED group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39, for example, the uppermost LED of the upper LED group 39b1 until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. When the lower LED is turned on one by one and the lower LED is turned on one after another, a display mode of repeatedly displaying a lighting pattern in which the lower LED is turned on one by one from the uppermost LED again is used. Is set.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 has elapsed (S5572: Yes), the upper LED group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39 is displayed. Then, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S5574). The stop symbol is preset by the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 103), the special figure 2 change processing (see FIG. 104), or the special figure 1 change processing (see FIG. 106). By the processing of S5518, S5523 or S5525 of the special figure 1 change start processing or S5538 of the special figure 2 change processing, the big hit or the small hit is determined according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Winning or losing is determined. Then, in the case of a jackpot, a symbol that becomes “probability variation A”, a symbol that becomes “probability variation B”, or a symbol that becomes “time reduction” after the jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. You. In the case of a small hit, a symbol corresponding to the small hit is determined. Further, in the case of a loss, a symbol corresponding to the loss is determined.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S5574, the stop effect of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display of the upper LED group 39b1 on the special symbol display device 39. A special figure 1 determination command is set (S5575) in order to perform synchronized and determined display, and the process proceeds to S5576.

  The special figure 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81. Upon receiving this special figure 1 confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a special figure 1 display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 stops the fluctuation effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the special figure 1 display confirmation command, and stops the symbol. Is configured to be displayed.

  Next, in the processing of S5576, it is determined whether or not the value of a time reduction counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is larger than “0” in order to determine whether or not the “time reduction state” is established (S5576). ).

  This time reduction counter is a counter for indicating that the time is in the “time reduction state”, and the value of a predetermined number (“50” in the thirteenth embodiment) is set at the end of the jackpot type of the jackpot corresponding to “time reduction”. Is set. Then, every time the dynamic display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed once, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by one, and the value of the time-saving counter is a value larger than “0”. In addition, the game state is determined as the “time reduction state”. Specifically, in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 112), which is one of the jackpot processes (see FIG. 109) described later, when the jackpot state ends and the “time reduction state” is started, At the end of the jackpot of the jackpot type corresponding to “shortening”, “50” is set.

  Although the value of the time saving counter is configured to be decremented in the dynamic display of any special symbol, it is configured to be decremented only when the dynamic display of any one of the special symbols is executed. You may. Specifically, for example, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the value of the time reduction counter is not subtracted, and only when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the time reduction counter is subtracted. With this configuration, for example, in the “time reduction state”, even if the dynamic display of the first special symbol having no winning assistance function is executed, the “time reduction state” is maintained, and the prize assisting function is maintained. Only when the dynamic display of the second special symbol having the function is executed, the "time reduction state" can be digested. Therefore, in the entire "time shortened state", a dynamic display of a special symbol having a prize assist function can be executed, and a player can be provided with a game value by the game having the prize assist function, and the interest of the game can be increased. Can be improved.

  In addition, a time reduction counter is provided for each special symbol, and the time reduction counter has a different value for each special symbol (for example, "10" for the time reduction counter for the first special symbol, and "10" for the time reduction counter for the second special symbol). May be set to “100”), and the “time reduction state” may be ended when the value of one of the time saving counters becomes “0”. With such a configuration, by providing a plurality of end conditions of the “time reduction state”, variations can be provided in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the process of S5576, if the value of the time reduction counter is greater than “0” (S5576: Yes), it is “time reduction state”, and the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol has been completed once. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S5577), and the process shifts to S5578. On the other hand, in the processing of S5576, if the value of the time reduction counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5576: No), it is not “time shortened state” but “super probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state” or “normal”. Since the game state is “game state”, the process of S5577 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5578.

  In the process of S5578, it is determined whether or not a big hit is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped this time (S5578). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped this time (S5578: No), then, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped this time, the small hit is determined. It is determined whether or not is derived (S5579). In the processing of S5578 or S5579, when it is determined that the big hit is derived (S5578: Yes) or when the small hit is derived (S5579: Yes), the first special symbol stopped this time To stop the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in order to preferentially execute the big hit game or the small hit game based on the dynamic display of the lower symbol group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 Then, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S5580). In this case, since the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol has been changed to the display mode corresponding to the loss by S5534 of the special figure 2 change process (see FIG. 104), the symbol corresponding to the loss is determined. You.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S5580, the stop symbol of the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the special symbol display device 39. A special figure 2 confirmation command is set (S5581) in order to perform a confirmation display in synchronization with the display of the lower LED group 39b2, and the process proceeds to S5582.

  The special figure 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81. Upon receiving this special figure 2 confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a special figure 2 display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 stops the fluctuation effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the special figure 2 display confirmation command, and stops the symbol. Is configured to be displayed.

  In the process of S5579, when it is determined that the small hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped this time (S5579: No), the processes of S5580 and S5581 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5582. Move to.

  Next, in the processing of S5582, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed on the special symbol display device 39 (S5582). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not been executed (S5582: No), S5583 to S5592 relating to the stop processing of the second special symbol are skipped, and the fluctuation stop process (S5509) ends. Then, the process returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 102).

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5582: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the execution time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed has elapsed. (S5583). The display time during dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the special pattern 2 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) has not elapsed (S5583: No), the display of the lower LED group 39b2 on the special symbol display device 39 is updated (S5584), and the motion stop processing (S5509). ) Is ended, and the process returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 102).

  In the thirteenth embodiment, in the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39, like the upper LED group 39b1, for example, the lower LED A lighting pattern in which the lowermost LED of the group 39b2 is turned on one by one from the uppermost LED, and when the lowermost LED is turned on, the lower LED is turned on one by one again from the uppermost LED. Is displayed repeatedly.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 has elapsed (S5583: Yes), the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 is displayed. Then, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S5585). The stop symbol is set in advance by special figure 2 change start processing (see FIG. 105), special figure 1 change processing (see FIG. 106), or special figure 2 change processing (see FIG. 104). According to the processing of S5548, S5553 or S5555 of the special figure 2 change start processing or S5568 of the special figure 1 change processing, the big hit or the small hit according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g. Winning or losing is determined. Then, in the case of a jackpot, a symbol that becomes “probability variation A”, a symbol that becomes “probability variation B”, or a symbol that becomes “time reduction” after the jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. You. In the case of a small hit, a symbol corresponding to the small hit is determined. Further, in the case of a loss, a symbol corresponding to the loss is determined.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S5585, the stop effect of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display of the lower LED group 39b2 on the special symbol display device 39. In order to synchronize and confirm the display, a special figure 2 decision command is set (S5586), and the process shifts to S5587.

  Next, in the processing of S5587, it is determined whether or not the value of a time reduction counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is larger than “0” in order to determine whether or not the “time reduction state” is established (S5587). ). As a result of the determination, if the value of the time reduction counter is greater than “0” (S5587: Yes), it is “time reduction state”, and the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol has been completed once. Is subtracted by 1 (S5588), and the process moves to S5589. On the other hand, in the processing of S5587, if the value of the time reduction counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5587: No), it is not “time reduction state” but “super probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state”, or “normal”. Game state, the process of S5588 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5589.

  In the processing of S5589, it is determined whether or not a big hit is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped this time (S5589). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped this time (S5589: No), then, the small hit is displayed in the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped this time. Is determined (S5590). In the processing of S5589 or S5590, when it is determined that the big hit is derived (S5589: Yes) or when it is determined that the small hit is derived (S5590: Yes), the second special symbol stopped this time To stop the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in order to preferentially execute the big hit game or the small hit game based on the dynamic display of the upper symbol group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39 Then, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S5592). In this case, since the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has been changed to the display mode corresponding to the loss by S5564 of the special figure 1 change process (see FIG. 106), the symbol corresponding to the loss is determined. You.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S5591, the stop symbol of the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the special symbol display device 39. A special figure 1 determination command is set (S5592) in order to perform a final display in synchronization with the display of the upper LED group 39b1, and the motion stop processing (S5509) is ended. Return.

  In the process of S5590, when it is determined that the small hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped this time (S5590: No), the variable stop process (S5509) ends and the special figure is stopped. Return to the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 102).

  As described above, in the fluctuation stop processing (S5509), the timing for stopping the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the timing for stopping the dynamic display of the second special symbol are determined separately, so that each special Even in the case of executing each of the symbol fluctuation effects, each special symbol can be individually stopped and displayed, and a consistent effect can be executed. In addition, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the fluctuation effect of one special symbol, a confirmation command is also transmitted to the fluctuation effect of the other special symbol, just in case, and the fluctuation of the other special symbol is changed. The effect can be stopped reliably. The fixed command is a command for performing only the process of stopping the variable effect, and even if the variable command of 2 is transmitted twice for the variable effect of 1 special symbol, a discrepancy in the effect occurs. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 does not judge an error even if the confirmation command is received repeatedly. Therefore, even if the confirmation command of 2 is transmitted for the fluctuation effect of one special symbol, no trouble or the like occurs, and the fluctuation effect can be surely stopped and a consistent effect can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a general-purpose variation process (S5111), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the ordinary figure change processing (S5111). The normal symbol variation process (S5111) controls the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 83.

  The MPU 271 determines whether or not the ordinary electric hand 64c is currently open (operating), that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol is being hit, in the ordinary figure variation processing (S5111) (S5601). ). As a result of the discrimination, if the ordinary electric hand 64c is open (S5601: Yes), it means that the ordinary symbol is being hit, so the ordinary figure variation processing (S5111) is terminated as it is, and the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 98) Return to).

  On the other hand, if the ordinary electric hand 64c is not open (S5601: No), it is not a hit of the ordinary symbol, so next, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is variably displaying the ordinary symbol. It is determined (S5602). As a result of the discrimination, if the display mode of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is not variable display of the ordinary symbol (S5602: No), then the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, “1 second”). )) It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (S5603). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S5603: No), the ordinary figure variation processing (S5111) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98). Thus, the stop symbol in the variable display is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S5603, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S5603: Yes), the value of the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 273h (variable for the ordinary symbol retained in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of operation-reserved balls HN) is greater than “0” (S5604).

  As a result of the processing in S5604, if the value of the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 273h (the operation reserved ball number HN) is not greater than "0" (S5604: No), there is a reserved pattern number of the ordinary symbol to be executed, which is variably displayed. Since this is not the case, the ordinary figure fluctuation processing (S5111) is ended, and the processing returns to the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, if the value of the normal figure reserved ball number counter 273h (operation reserved ball number HN) is a value larger than “0” (S5604: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the variable display related to the reserved ordinary symbol. In step S5605, the value of the normal figure reserved ball number counter 273h (operation reserved ball number HN) is decremented by one (S5605). This is because the execution of one variable display among the variable displays related to the ordinary symbols that has been suspended is started by the processing (S5606 to S5613) to be described later, and the number of reserved balls related to the ordinary symbols is reduced by one. That's why.

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary figure reserved sphere storage area 273i is shifted (S5606). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the general figure holding sphere storing area 273i toward the general figure holding sphere execution area 273j. Reservation first area → Utsugi reservation ball execution area 273j, Utsugi reservation second area → Utsugi reservation first area, Utsugi reservation third area → Utsugi reservation second area, The data in each area is shifted, such as in a reserved third area.

  After the data shift process in S5606, the normal symbol display device 83 changes the ordinary symbol based on the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball execution area 273j by the data shift process (ie, the value of the ordinary symbol counter C4). In order to execute the display, first, it is determined whether the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “super-probability varying state” (S5607). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the state is the “normal game state” or the “super probability fluctuation state” (S5607: Yes), the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set to “5 seconds” (S5608), and the process proceeds to S5610. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the “normal gaming state” or the “super-probability variation state”, that is, when it is determined to be the “probability variation state” or the “time reduction state” (S5607: No), The variable display time of the normal symbol is set to “0.5 seconds” shorter than the “normal gaming state” or “super probability fluctuation state” (S5609), and the process shifts to S5610.

  Thereby, in the "probability changing state" or the "time shortening state" in the right-handed game, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c (that is, about 3 seconds). Is stopped and the variable display wins, the ordinary electric hand 64c is opened, and almost all the balls rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c fall below the game board 13 in a front view. Then, it is configured to flow into the second starting port 64b (that is, does not flow into the small winning opening 72a side). On the other hand, in the “super probability fluctuation state” in the right-handed game, the variable display of the ordinary symbol may not stop while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c. It is configured to be able to roll completely from the right end to the left end and flow down to the small winning opening 72a side of the second variable winning device 72. Therefore, even with the same right-handed game, it is possible to create a game state that flows into the small winning opening 72a and a game state that does not flow into the small winning opening 72a, thereby enriching the variation of the game and improving the interest of the game.

  In the process of S5610, a stop symbol in the variable display of the normal symbol, that is, whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is determined, is determined with reference to the random number table 272f per symbol according to the game state (S5610). Specifically, in the “normal game state” and the “super-probability changing state”, that is, in the low-probability state of the ordinary symbol, the general-purpose-holding ball is referred to by referring to the group for the low-probability state in the random number table per general table 272f. The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol stored in the execution area 273j is determined, and a symbol for stopping the variable display of the ordinary symbol (that is, whether or not the symbol is an ordinary symbol) is determined. In the “probability variation state” and the “time reduction state”, that is, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the group for the high probability state in the random number table per general figure 272f is referred to and stored in the general figure holding ball execution area 273j. The stored value of the random number counter C4 per symbol is determined, and a stop symbol for variable display of the ordinary symbol (that is, whether or not the symbol is an ordinary symbol) is determined. After the processing in S5610, the ordinary figure fluctuation processing (S5111) is ended, and the flow returns to the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 98).

  Thus, by changing the probability of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is determined whether or not the normal electric hand 64c is easy to open when the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the player hits right. That can make a difference. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric hand 64c is likely to be opened (that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol) and easily flows into the second starting port 64b side. In a situation where the electric hand 64c is difficult to open (that is, a low probability state of a normal symbol), the upper surface of the closed (projecting) normal electric hand 64c is rolled from the right end to the left end, and is directed to the small winning opening 72a side. By making the situation that can flow into the game state different depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state.

  In the process of S5602, when it is determined that the display mode of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S5602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S5611). The variable display time of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the processing of S5608 or S5609, and if the variable display time has not elapsed (S5611: No), the display of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is performed. Is updated (S5612), the ordinary figure change processing (S5111) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, if the variable display time of the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S5611: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol preset in S5610 is set on the ordinary symbol display device 83. (S5613), and ends the ordinary figure fluctuation processing (S5111) and returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98).

  Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the ordinary symbol display device 83 is set based on the ordinary symbol variation processing (S5111), and the ordinary symbol is set. Until the variable display time elapses from the start of the variable display on the display device 83, the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” are alternately lit. Then, when the variable display result is a hit, the symbol “O” is turned on, and when the result is a loss, the symbol “X” is turned on.

  Next, the hit processing (S5103), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the hit processing (S5103).

  As described above, this winning process (S5103) sets the number of open times (number of rounds) of the special winning opening 65a in accordance with the type of big hit (big hit type) when a special symbol big hit occurs, and The opening time of the winning opening 65a is set. Then, in the case of the jackpot state, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 110) for controlling opening or closing of the special winning opening 65a is executed. At the end of the jackpot, a jackpot ending process (see FIG. 112) for ending the jackpot is executed. Further, when a special symbol small hit occurs, the number of times of opening the small winning opening 72a (the number of rounds) and the opening time of the small winning opening 72a are set. Then, in the case of the small hit state, a small winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 113) for controlling the opening or closing of the small winning opening 72a is executed.

  That is, in the jackpot game, the special winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 65a ("30 seconds" in the thirteenth embodiment) has elapsed, or the special winning opening has been set. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number of balls (10 in the thirteenth embodiment) have won the ball 65a. When any of these closing conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening 65a is closed, and the control related to opening and closing the special winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  In the small hit game, the small winning opening 72a is opened in the round of the small winning state (ie, one round), and the maximum opening time of the small winning opening 72a (“1.8 seconds” in the thirteenth embodiment) is set. The closing condition is determined as to whether or not a predetermined number of balls (one in the thirteenth embodiment) has been won in the small winning opening 72a. When any one of these closing conditions is satisfied, the small winning opening 72a is closed, and the control related to opening and the control related to closing the small winning opening 72a are executed only once.

  In the hit processing (S5103), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the jackpot lottery result has been derived (winning) as a dynamic display lottery result of any special symbol (S5701). If it is determined that the jackpot lottery result is derived as the lottery result of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of any of the special symbols (S5701: Yes), the control regarding the winning jackpot is executed. First, the number of rounds according to the winning jackpot type is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S5702). Then, in order to transmit a jackpot opening command indicating that the jackpot is started to the voice ramp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 (S5703). A jackpot opening time (for example, “5 seconds”) is set (S5704), and the process proceeds to S5709. As a result, the jackpot opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  In addition, when any of the jackpots is won, regardless of the game state and the jackpot type, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are both set to the low probability state during the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is frequently given to the second starting port 64b based on the winning of the ordinary symbol during the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5701, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery result is not derived (not won) as the lottery result of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of any special symbol (S5701: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a small hit lottery result is derived (winning) as the dynamic display lottery result (S5705). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small hit lottery result is derived (winned) in the dynamic display (variable production) of any of the special symbols (S5705: Yes), the control relating to the selected small hit is executed. For this purpose, first, a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is set to "1" which is the number of rounds according to the winning small win (S5706). Then, the small hit opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 in order to transmit the small hit opening command indicating that the small hit is started to the sound ramp control device 113 (S5707). Next, the opening time of the small hit (for example, “1 second”) is set (S5708), and the process proceeds to S5709. Thus, the small hit opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  With this configuration, the value of the round counter is set according to the winning jackpot or the small hit, and the number of times the large winning port 65a or the small winning port 72a is opened according to the winning combination is set. An opening effect corresponding to a big hit or a small hit can be executed.

  Next, in the process of S5709, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is being executed (S5709). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit game is being executed (S5709: Yes), a big win port opening / closing control process for executing opening / closing control of the big win port 65a corresponding to the big hit game is executed (S5710). .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710), which is one of the hit processes (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710). In the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710), the opening / closing control of the special winning opening 65a is executed based on the number of times of opening the special winning opening 65a set in the winning process (S5103).

  In the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the special winning opening 65a is open (S5721). As a result of the determination, if the special winning opening 65a is being opened (S5721: Yes), a special winning opening opening process for controlling the opened special winning opening 65a is executed (S5722), and the special winning opening is opened and closed. The control process (S5710) ends, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 109).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5721 that the special winning opening 65a has not been opened (S5721: No), then the jackpot opening time set in the winning processing (see FIG. 109), or described later. It is determined whether or not the interval time set in the special winning opening opening process (see FIG. 111) has elapsed (S5723). If the result of the determination is that the jackpot opening time or interval time has elapsed (S5723: Yes), a special winning opening opening process for opening the special winning opening 65a is executed to start a new round in the big hit game. (S 5724) Then, “10” is set to the value of a winning counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S 5725). Then, an opening time setting for setting the maximum opening time (ie, “30 seconds”) of the special winning opening 65 a is performed (S 5726), and an opening command indicating that the special winning opening 65 a has been opened is provided in the RAM 273. The transmission ring buffer is set (S5727), and the process proceeds to S5722. As a result, the release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5723, if the jackpot opening time or the interval time has not elapsed (S5723: No), it is during the jackpot opening time or the interval time, and the processing of S5724 to S5727 is skipped. The special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710) ends, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 109).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 111, the special winning opening opening process (S5722), which is one process of the special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the special winning opening (S5727).

  In the special winning opening opening process (S5722), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the opening time of the special winning opening 65a set in S5726 of the above-described special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 109) has elapsed. Is determined (S5731). If the result of the determination is that the opening time of the special winning opening 65a has elapsed (S5731: Yes), one closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the special winning opening 65a in that round. Then, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S5732), and the process shifts to S5736. The closing process of the special winning opening 65a from S5736 will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5731, if the opening time of the special winning opening 65a has not elapsed (S5731: No), the closing timing of the special winning opening 65a has not arrived, so that the opening of the special winning opening 65a is maintained. Next, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected by the special winning opening switch (not shown) (S5733), that is, whether or not the ball has won the special winning opening 65a.

  In the process of S5733, if a ball is detected by the special winning opening switch (S5733: Yes), that is, if the ball has won the special winning opening 65a, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 (S5734). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter obtained by subtracting 1 is a value larger than “0” (S5735). As a result of the determination, when the value of the winning counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5735: No), that is, when the value of the winning counter is “0” or less, ten balls win in the special winning opening 65a. Since one closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is satisfied, the process shifts to S5736 to close the special winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5733, when the ball is not detected by the special winning opening switch (S5733: No), that is, when the ball does not win in the special winning opening 65a, or in the processing of S5735, the processing of the winning counter is performed. If it is determined that the value is greater than “0” (S5735: Yes), the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is not satisfied, so that the open state of the special winning opening 65a is maintained. The processing of opening the special winning opening (S5722) ends without performing the processing of S5740. After the end of the special winning opening process (S5722), the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 109).

  In the closing process of the special winning opening 65a from S5736, first, a special winning opening closing process for closing the special winning opening 65a is executed (S5736), and then the special winning opening 65a is set to the audio lamp control device 113. A close command indicating that the camera is closed is set (S5737), and the process shifts to S5738. The closing command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and is output during the external output process (see S5101 in FIG. 98) of the timer interrupt process executed next. It is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Next, in the process of S5738, since one round of the special winning opening 65a has been consumed, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 (S5738), and whether the value of the round counter obtained by subtracting 1 is a value larger than “0” or not. It is determined whether or not (S5739). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S5739: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of times the large winning opening 65a is left open) remains. Next, an interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the special winning opening 65a is opened is set (S5740), and the special winning opening processing (S5722) is ended. After the end of the special winning opening process (S5722), the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 109).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5739, when the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5739: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “0”, the big winning port 65a in this big hit is Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the processing of S5740 is skipped, the interval time is not set, and this special winning opening processing (S5722) is ended to open and close the special winning opening. The process returns to the control process (see FIG. 110), and then returns to the hit process (see FIG. 109).

  Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. After the end of the special winning opening opening / closing control process in S5710, it is determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S5711). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S5711: Yes), the process of S5712 is skipped and the hit process (S5103) is performed once to continue the big hit game. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5711: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “0”, a jackpot ending process is executed to end the jackpot game. (S5712), the hit processing (S5103) ends, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the jackpot end process (S5712), which is one of the hit processes (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending processing (S5712).

  In the jackpot ending process (S5712) of the thirteenth embodiment, based on the jackpot type in which the jackpot game has occurred, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol executed after the jackpot game and the normal symbol Set the hit probability.

  In the big hit end processing (S5712), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the big hit type that generated the current big hit game is “probability variation A” (S5751). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type is “probability variation A” (S5751: Yes), the special symbol is set to the high probability state as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (S5752), and the normal symbol is set to low. A probability state is set (S5753), and the process proceeds to S5760. That is, a “super-probability variation state” in which the special symbol is in the high-probability state and the ordinary symbol is in the low-probability state is set. In the thirteenth embodiment, since the counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol in the “super probability fluctuation state” is not set, the “super probability fluctuation state” is maintained until the next big hit is won. Becomes

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5751 that the jackpot type is not “probability variation A” (S5751: No), then, it is determined whether the jackpot type that generated the current jackpot game is “probability variation B”. It is determined whether or not (S5754). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type is “probability variation B” (S5754: Yes), the special symbol is set to the high probability state as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (S5755), and the ordinary symbol is also high. A probability state is set (S5756), and the process proceeds to S5760. That is, a “probability variation state” in which both the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are in the high probability state is set. In the thirteenth embodiment, since a counter or the like for counting the number of executions of the special symbol in the “probability variation state” is not set, the “probability variation state” is maintained until the next big hit is won.

  In the process of S5754, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not “probability variation B” (S5754: No), the jackpot type that generated the jackpot game this time is “time reduction”, and therefore, after the jackpot game ends. As the gaming state, the special symbol is set to the low probability state (S5557), the ordinary symbol is set to the high probability state (S5758), and the value of the time reduction counter (not shown) is set to "50" (S5759). ) And the process moves to S5760. That is, a “time reduction state” in which the special symbol is in the low probability state and the ordinary symbol is in the high probability state is set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the “time reduction state” set here is maintained while the value of the time reduction counter is greater than “0”, and the value of the time reduction counter is greater than “0”. When the value is no longer the same (that is, when the value of the time reduction counter becomes “0” or less), the state is shifted to the “normal game state”.

  In the process of S5760, to end the jackpot, first, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S5760). Then, a jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S5761), the jackpot end process (S5712) ends, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 109). The ending command set in the process of S5760 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and is included in the external output process (see S5101 in FIG. 98) of the next timer interrupt process. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. In the process of S5709, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (S5709: No), it is next determined whether or not a small hit game is being executed (S5713). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small hitting game is being executed (S5713: Yes), the small winning opening / closing control processing for executing the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 72a corresponding to the small hitting game is executed ( S5714).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 113, a description will be given of the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714), which is one of the hit processes (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714). In the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714), a round counter and a winning counter, which are also used in the control at the time of the big hit, are set and determined, and the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 72a is executed.

  In the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the small winning opening 72a is being opened (S5771). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small winning opening 72a is not opened (S5771: No), the process proceeds to S5777 without performing S5772 to S5776, which is the control regarding the opening of the small winning opening 72a.

  On the other hand, if the small winning opening 72a is open (S5771: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the small winning opening time set in the winning process (see FIG. 109) has elapsed (S5772). If the result of the determination is that the opening time of the small hit has elapsed (S5772: Yes), a small winning opening setting process of opening the small winning opening 72a to execute one round of the small hit game is executed ( (S5773) Then, "1" is set to the value of a winning counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S5774). Then, an opening time setting for setting the maximum opening time of the small winning opening 72a (that is, “1.8 seconds”) is performed (S5775), and a small opening command indicating that the small winning opening 72a is opened is provided in the RAM 273. It is set to the received command transmission ring buffer (S5776), and the process moves to S5777. As a result, the small open command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  In the processing of S5772, if the small-hit opening time has not elapsed (S5772: No), the small-hit opening time is in progress, so that the subsequent processing is skipped and the small-winning-opening / closing control processing ( After the end of S5714), the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 109).

  Next, in the processing of S5777, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the opening time of the small winning opening 72a set in S5775 described above has elapsed (S5777). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the small winning opening 72a has elapsed (S5777: Yes), one closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the small winning opening 72a in the round. Then, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S5778), and the process shifts to S5782. The process of closing the small winning opening 72a from S5782 will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5777, if the opening time of the small winning opening 72a has not elapsed (S5777: No), since the closing timing of the small winning opening 72a has not arrived, the opening of the small winning opening 72a is maintained. Next, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected by the small winning opening switch (not shown), that is, whether or not the ball has won the small winning opening 72a (S5779).

  In the processing of S5779, if a ball is detected by the small winning opening switch (S5779: Yes), that is, if the ball has won the small winning opening 72a, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 (S5780). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter obtained by subtracting 1 is a value larger than “0” (S5781). If the result of the determination is that the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S5781: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is equal to or less than "0", one ball wins in the small winning opening 72a. Since one closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is satisfied, the process shifts to S5782 to close the small winning opening 72a.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5779, when the ball is not detected by the small winning opening switch (S5779: No), that is, when the ball does not win in the small winning opening 72a, or in the processing of S5781, the winning counter is set. If it is determined that the value is larger than “0” (S5781: Yes), the closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is not satisfied. Therefore, in order to maintain the open state of the small winning opening 72a, the small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714) is ended without performing the processing of S5782 to S5784. After the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714) ends, the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 109).

  As described above, the round counter and the winning counter used for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a in the jackpot game are also used for controlling the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a in the small hitting game, and the program for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a. And the program for controlling the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a have the same configuration, so that the program can be shared, the development man-hours can be reduced at the time of development, and if the above control is implemented as a subroutine, the ROM The capacity can be reduced.

  In the closing process of the small winning opening 72a from S5782, first, a small winning opening closing process for closing the small winning opening 72a is executed (S5782), and then the small winning opening 72a is set to the audio lamp control device 113. A small close command indicating that the command has been closed is set (S5783), and the process shifts to S5784. The small closing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273, and is output in the external output process (see S5101 in FIG. 98) of the next timer interrupt process. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S5784, since one round of the small winning opening 72a has been consumed, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S5784), and the small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714) ends. After the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714) ends, the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 109).

  Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. After the end of the small winning opening opening / closing control process in S5714, it is determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S5715). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S5715: Yes), the process of S5716 is skipped to continue the small hitting game, and the hitting process is temporarily performed (S5103). And returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5715, if the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5715: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is “0” or less, in order to end the small hitting game, A small ending command indicating the start of a small hit ending effect and a small hit ending process for setting an ending time and the like are executed for the sound ramp control device 113 (S5716), and the hit process (S5103) is ended. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  As described above, in the winning process (see FIG. 109), a special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 110) for controlling opening / closing of the special winning opening 65a, and a small winning opening opening / closing control process for performing opening / closing control of the small winning opening 72a. By executing (see FIG. 113), the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 can manage the execution of the jackpot game and the small jackpot game, and at the time of the jackpot associated with the process of opening and closing the jackpot 65a at the jackpot. And the various states at the time of the small hit accompanying the processing of opening and closing the small winning opening 72a at the time of the small hit can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In the winning process (see FIG. 109), by setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot by the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 113), different gaming properties are created for each of the winning jackpot types, and a wide variety of games is provided. To improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, a description will be given of the normal electric winning combination control process (S5104), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric hand control process (S5104).

  In the normal electric winning combination control process (S5104), when a normal symbol hits, the normal electric winning combination 64c is opened and closed (projected and immersed) in accordance with a game state. That is, the opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is set according to the game state, and the ordinary electric hand 64c is driven to open based on the set time. The control for closing (projecting) the ordinary electric hand 64c during (immersion) is executed.

  In the ordinary electric hand control process (S5104), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the ordinary electric hand 64c is being opened (immersed), that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol is being hit (S5801). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the ordinary electric hand 64c is not being opened (S5801: No), that is, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol is not being hit, whether or not the variable display of the ordinary symbol has been completed next. It is determined whether or not it is (S5802).

  If the result of determination in S5802 is that variable display of ordinary symbols has not been completed (S5802: No), the ordinary electric combination control process (S5104) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). If the variable display of the ordinary symbol has been completed (S5802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a win has been made in the variable display (S5803).

  As a result of the determination in S5803, when it is determined that the winning has not been won in the variable display (S5803: No), the normal electric combination control process (S5104) is ended, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) Return to On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning has been won in the variable display (S5803: Yes), first, in order to execute the control related to the winning, whether or not the ordinary symbol at the time of winning is in the high probability state is determined. That is, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the “probability changing state” or the “time reduction state” (S5804).

  As a result of the determination in S5804, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the high probability state, that is, it is not in the “probability variation state” or “time reduction state” (S5804: No), the gaming state is “normal gaming state”. Or the "super probability fluctuation state", the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the hit state is set to "0.1 second" based on the specified contents of the electric hand opening table 272h (S5805). In order to perform the opening of the normal electric hand 64c once, the value of an electric hand counter (not shown) is set to “1” (S5806), and the process proceeds to S5809.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5804, when it is determined that the symbol is in the high-probability state, that is, in the “probability variation state” or the “time reduction state” (S5804: Yes), the electric hand opening table The opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the hit state is set to “5 seconds” based on the specified contents of 272h (S5807), and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric hand 64c based on the corresponding condition is three times. The value of the winning combination counter is set to “3” (S5808), and the process shifts to S5809.

  In the process of S5809, the normal electric hand 64c is opened (immersed) (S5809), the normal electric hand 64c that has been closed (projected) is driven to the open state, and the normal electric hand control process (S5104) is performed. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  Thereby, when the player makes a right strike, the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the position where the ordinary electric hand 64c is disposed, and the state in which the ordinary electric hand 64c is open is long or short. Can make a difference. As a result, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided to the second starting port 64b side, or the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c rolls from the right end to the left end in the closed state of the ordinary electric hand 64c, By making the situation in which the ball can flow down to the small winning opening 72a side of the second variable winning device 72 different depending on the gaming state, it is possible to produce different gaming properties for each gaming state.

  In the processing of S5801, if it is determined that the normal electric hand 64c is being opened (S5801: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol is being hit, then it is set in S5805 or S5807. It is determined whether or not one open time of the ordinary electric utility 64c has elapsed (S5810). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that one set opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c has not elapsed (S5810: No), the routine proceeds to S5811 to S5813 in order to maintain the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c. The process is skipped, the normal electrical combination control process (S5104) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5810, if it is determined that the set opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c has elapsed (S5810: Yes), first, the closing (protruding) process of the ordinary electric hand 64c is performed. Performed (S5811). Then, the ordinary electric hand 64c in the closed (submerged) state is driven to the closed (projected) state, and “1” is subtracted from the value of the electric hand counter set in the processing of S5806 or S5808 (S5812). Then, it is determined whether or not the subtracted value of the electric hand counter is greater than “0” (S5813). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric hand counter is greater than “0” (S5813: Yes), the processing is not performed because the number of times of opening the ordinary electric hand 64c based on the corresponding number remains. The flow shifts to S5809, where the opening process of the ordinary electric hand 64c is performed again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power combination counter is not greater than “0” (S5813: No), that is, when the value of the power combination counter is equal to or less than “0”, the normal Since the release of the role 64c has been completed, the normal power combination 64c is not reopened, the normal power role control process (S5104) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the winning probability and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol are made different from the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c according to the gaming state, so that the through gate 67 is provided. In a right-handed game in which a ball can pass through, in the “probability changing state” and the “time shortening state”, the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is configured to frequently appear. Even when the port 72a is open, the ball can almost flow into the second starting port 64b. On the other hand, even in the same right-handed game, in the “super probability fluctuation state”, the open state and the closed state of the ordinary electric hand 64c are configured to coexist, and the ball also flows into the second starting port 64b. However, in some cases, the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c in the closed state may roll from the right end to the left end, and the ball can flow into the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72. Therefore, the winning holes 64b and 72a that can be won in each of the game states in the right-handed game are made different, the game value given to the player is made different, the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game is improved. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the “probability variation state” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the first special symbol and the third special symbol. (2) The range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal gaming state” is reduced while reducing the number of lost random numbers in the “normal gaming state” and compensating for the decrease. It is configured to be inside. In addition, the number of small random number values per hit is not changed between the “normal gaming state” and the “probability changing state”. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers (a decrease in the number of lost random numbers), Calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

  In addition, the increment of the number of the jackpot random number values of the first special symbol due to the setting change is determined by the role selected from the jackpot random number counter C1 in the “normal gaming state” which is the gaming state having the highest staying rate in the game. In addition, the configuration is made so as to compensate for the role of the largest random number other than the jackpot random number value (that is, in the “normal game state”, of the small random number value and the lost random number value, the lost random number value). With such a configuration, in the first special symbol whose execution rate is encouraged in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is high, the number of times of the loss role, which is the most frequent role in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, is calculated. Can make setting discrimination difficult. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance rate of the jackpot having a lower appearance probability than the losing role as the setting determination element by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, the increase in the number of the jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is compensated for from the number of the lost random numbers corresponding to the lost combination that does not give the player a gaming value in the jackpot random number counter C1.

  Unlike the jackpot role and the small jackpot role, the losing role is a role that does not provide a game value, and is therefore not clearly (largely) displayed on a data lamp (not shown) provided for each pachinko machine 10. is there. Here, if the number of the small hit random numbers corresponding to the small hit game clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp is changed for each setting, the player sets the appearance rate of the small hit game to the data lamp. In this case, the number of setting determination elements of the pachinko machine 10 increases. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is determined by a loss corresponding to a loss role that is not clearly (broadly) displayed on the data lamp of the jackpot random number counter C1 without giving a game value to the player. By compensating for the number of random numbers, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance determination rate of the jackpot as the setting determination element by the player. Therefore, for example, even if the setting is low (that is, the setting value is “1” or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad). In the second special symbol, since it is configured to be easy to win the small hitting game, if the ball is won in the second starting port 64b in the “normal game state”, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. In spite of the “normal game state”, a prize ball may be given to the player based on the small hit game, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the game hall. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. Thus, in the “normal gaming state”, when a ball is won in the second starting port 64b and the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is executed, a very long time (ie, at least) in comparison with the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol A fluctuation effect of “595 seconds or more” can be executed. For this reason, the execution efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is set to be very poor as compared with the execution efficiency of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the “normal game state”, the profit (merit) of winning the second starting port 64b can be reduced as much as possible, and the execution of a game that is not encouraged can be suppressed.

  Further, in a situation in which the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is reserved, even if an attempt is made to execute the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the time efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol may be reduced. With this configuration, it is possible to amplify the degree of reduction in the profit (merit) of winning the second starting port 64b in the “normal game state”. As a result, in the game state in which the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 is not encouraged, the player wins the prize (that is, the execution of the right-handed game) to the second starting port 64b which is a trigger of the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the assumed game specification and reduce disadvantages to the hall.

  In addition, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol, the dynamic display of the other special symbol is being executed, and the success / failure result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed is displayed. If it is a big hit or a small hit, the execution time of the dynamic display of one special symbol set this time is compared with the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed. When it is determined that the execution time of the dynamic display of one special symbol is shorter than the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the other special symbol, the dynamic time of the other special symbol being executed is changed. While changing the target display to the dynamic display of the loss, the execution time is stopped again at the same time as the dynamic display of one special symbol. In addition, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol, the dynamic display of the other special symbol is being executed, and the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed is small. When it is a hit, the execution time of the dynamic display of one special symbol set this time is compared with the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed. When it is determined that the execution time of the dynamic display of one special symbol is shorter than the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the other special symbol, the dynamic time of the other special symbol being executed is changed. While changing the target display to the dynamic display of the loss, the execution time is stopped again at the same time as the dynamic display of one special symbol. Furthermore, in the case where the dynamic display of one special symbol is not a small hit, if the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed has a content that can derive a big hit, a winning / non-winning lottery in one special symbol is performed. Instead, the dynamic display of the one special symbol is set as the dynamic display of the loss. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a jackpot or a small jackpot from being generated by the other special symbol while the jackpot or the small jackpot is being performed by one of the special symbols. ) Can prevent the player from being paid out an excessive game value.

  Further, when changing the content of the dynamic display of the other special symbol based on the content of the dynamic display of the other special symbol, a change pattern command and a stop type command related to the dynamic display of the other special symbol to be changed are provided. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 as a set.

  Here, the voice lamp control device 113 determines that a command transmission error has occurred if the variation pattern command and the display mode command cannot be normally received (as a set) when performing the variation effect of each special symbol. An error change (default change) indicating that a transmission error has occurred is executed. Here, when the variation pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the success / failure result are changed, and only the variation pattern command or only the stop type command is transmitted, the sound lamp control device 113 Since the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, which should be transmitted as a set, are not transmitted, there is a possibility that a command transmission error is determined. In addition, if the receiving program of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed in consideration of the change of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the control program must be newly designed and the sound lamp control device is changed. The control program on the 113 side may be complicated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the content of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is changed based on the content of the dynamic display of the other special symbol, the dynamic of the other special symbol to be changed is changed. By transmitting the variation pattern command and the stop type command relating to the display to the audio ramp control device 113 as a set, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute normal control without determining a command transmission error. Become. Therefore, even when the control for changing the content of the dynamic display is executed during the execution of the dynamic display of the special symbol, the normal control can be performed without changing the control program on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Since it can be executed, there is no need to set a new control program or the like, and it is possible to reduce design man-hours and control load.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is configured such that as the set value increases stepwise, the number of jackpot random numbers increases stepwise and evenly. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the jackpot random number value that is uniformly increased, and it is easy to calculate the payout rate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the lower the set value is, the harder the jackpot is generated, and the higher the set value, the more the large jackpot is generated. In the “state”, the lower the set value is, the longer the stay period of the “super probability fluctuation state” is likely to be. As a result, as the set value is lower, the number of wins in small hits in the “super probability fluctuation state” tends to increase, so that the game value given in the “super probability fluctuation state” increases. Therefore, even if the set value is low, by entering the “super probability fluctuation state”, it is possible to increase the game value that can be given to the player as compared with the case where the set value is high. Therefore, by providing the "super probability fluctuation state", the advantage and disadvantage of the setting difference can be reversed, the variation of the game can be abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<14th embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the winning and losing lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured so that both the big hit and the small hit can be won. The number of numerical values was increased, and only the jackpot probability was changed. Further, in the special symbol high-probability state, the number of jackpot random numbers is increased compared to the low-probability state. In any case, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers, and compensated for from the decrease, thereby reducing the number of setting discrimination elements by the player and changing the game state. In accordance with this, a game property that determines whether or not a game value based on a small hit game can be obtained is created, and the variation of the game is enriched.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, two special symbols (for example, a first special symbol and a second special symbol) are provided, and a low probability state is not provided in the lottery of each special symbol without providing a high probability state. Only a special symbol (eg, a first special symbol) that can be changed in a predetermined game state (eg, a “normal game state”) can win a large jackpot in any special symbol. Instead, a small win is won only in the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) that is easily changed in a game state (for example, “time reduction state”) other than the predetermined game state. In addition, a special area switch 208h (so-called V winning opening) is provided in the small winning opening 72a which is opened when a small hit is won with the other special symbol, and a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h. Is also configured to be able to generate a jackpot game (a so-called one-type and two-type mixer). Then, a configuration is provided in which a setting difference is provided only in the jackpot probability of each special symbol, and an increase in the jackpot random number value required to cause the setting difference is compensated from the lost random number value.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to thirteenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to thirteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to thirteenth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. The difference between the board configuration of the game board 13 of the fourteenth embodiment and the thirteenth embodiment is that the ordinary electric hand 64c is immersed in the board of the game board 13 in the normal state (non-winning state), and a normal symbol is formed. The point that it is a retractable type that protrudes to the front side of the game board 13 when winning, and the position where the second starting port 64b can win only when the ball rolls from the right end to the left end on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c. , The variable winning device 65 (large winning opening 65 a) is located at the lower center in the front view of the game board 13, and a special area is set in the small winning opening 72 a of the second variable winning device 72. The point that the switch 208h is provided and the point that the right general winning opening 63c is arranged at a position between the through gate 67 and the ordinary electric hand 64c. Other configurations and functions are the same or substantially the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment.

  The ordinary electric hand 64c of the fourteenth embodiment is configured to drive-control one plate to a protruding state or a immersing state according to a variable display result of an ordinary symbol. In the normal state (default state), the ordinary electric hand 64c is housed at a position immersed in from the front surface of the game board 13, and in the immersion state, it affects a ball flowing down the board of the game board 13. Not to be placed. On the other hand, when the player wins the variable display of the ordinary symbol, the stored state protrudes from the front surface of the game board 13, and when the ordinary electric hand 64 c is in the protruding state, the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64 c The ball can roll from the right end to the left along the slope. When the ball is rolled to the left end of the normal electric hand 64c while the normal electric hand 64c maintains the protruding state, the ball can be guided to the second starting port 64b.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when a ball is to be won in the second starting port 64b, the winning is possible only when the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is completely rolled from the right end to the left end. ) Is configured such that a ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b. In the fourteenth embodiment, when a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h in the small winning opening 72a, a jackpot is generated in any game state (period). In the fourteenth embodiment, a small hit game is easily generated based on a winning in the second starting opening 64b, and a small winning opening 72a capable of generating a big hit by winning the small hit is opened. If a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h in the small winning opening 72a, the player can easily acquire the game value. For this reason, it is configured such that a ball can enter the second starting port 64b only in a game state (period) executed after winning a predetermined jackpot (in the fourteenth embodiment, "time reduction state"), It is configured to prevent a game value that is not assumed as a game specification from being given to a player.

  A deceleration member (not shown) that collides with a sphere rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c to decelerate the sphere is formed on an upper portion (upper surface) of the ordinary electric hand 64c. In the fourteenth embodiment, the ball that rolls from the right end to the left end on the upper surface of the protruding ordinary electric hand 64c collides with this deceleration member, so that the time required for rolling from the right end to the left end of the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is reduced. It is configured to be long. Specifically, when the ball rolls on the upper surface from the right end to the left end of the ordinary electric hand 64c, it is configured to take about three seconds. Therefore, when the ball fired by the right-handed game is rolled on the protruding ordinary electric hand 64c (ie, for about 3 seconds), the ball is immersed when the ordinary electric hand 64c is immersed. Due to the weight of the game board 13, the game board 13 flows downward and vertically below the game board 13. On the other hand, when the protruding state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is maintained while rolling on the ordinary electric hand 64c, the normal electric hand 64c is completely rolled, and the game board 13 of the ordinary electric hand 64c is rolled. It is configured to flow down to the second starting port 64b disposed on the left side when viewed from the front.

  Note that the time for rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to have a short time of less than “3 seconds” (for example, “1 second”) or a long time of “3 seconds” or more (for example, “5 seconds”). The configuration may be such that

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first starting port 64a of the fourteenth embodiment in a front view, and a horizontally long large winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 116) is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, A special symbol group 39b of the special symbol display device 39 is illuminated and displayed so as to be a jackpot stop symbol, and a stop symbol (for example, “777”) corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The occurrence of a jackpot game is indicated. Thereafter, the opening / closing plate (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit game) in which the ball can easily enter the big winning opening 65a. In this special game state, the large winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until “30 seconds” elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The special winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since opening or a predetermined number of winnings are detected during opening), and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is re-opened. Is opened for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed in accordance with the type of the big hit, and can be repeated, for example, up to 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is provided with a larger value than usual at the time of giving a game value (game value). Prize balls are paid out.

  Since the variable winning device 65 of the fourteenth embodiment is disposed at the center lower part of the game board 13 in front view, the ball fired in the left-handed game (that is, passed through the left side of the variable display unit 80 in front view). The ball and the ball fired in the right-handed game (that is, the ball that has passed the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view) are configured to be able to win. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of variable winning devices for each gaming state (for each firing mode), and the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Here, as the jackpot type determined in the fourteenth embodiment, “16R jackpot” and “4R jackpot” are prepared based on the winning in the first starting port 64a (FIG. 119 (a)). reference). Further, “16R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “4R jackpot” are prepared based on the winning in the second starting opening 64b (see FIG. 119 (b)).

  The jackpot type of “16R jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a “time reduction state” in which a symbol is normally in a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds. The jackpot type of “8R jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a “time reduction state” in which a symbol is normally in a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds of eight jackpots. Further, the jackpot type of “4R jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a “time reduction state” in which a symbol is normally in a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds of four rounds.

  The "time reduction state" of the fourteenth embodiment is a state in which the big hit probability of each special symbol is a low probability state like the "normal game state", but the fluctuation time (variable display time) of the normal symbol is reduced, and This means that the so-called “time saving function” in which the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is also long is provided. That is, in the “time reduction state”, although the jackpot by the special symbol is equivalent to the “normal game state”, the variable display result by the ordinary symbol is easily derived in a short time, and the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is long. It becomes a state. Therefore, in the “time reduction state”, a so-called winning assistance state is set, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is more likely to win a prize in the second starting port 64b, so that the dynamic display of the special figure 2 is continuously executed. In addition to this, it is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, one piece / prize) based on a prize in the second starting port 64b and play a game while suppressing a decrease in possession balls.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the “time reduction state” is set so that the number of times given for each special symbol and big hit type is different. Then, after each jackpot, a predetermined number of times predetermined for each of the jackpots (in the fourteenth embodiment, the total number of times of dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 or the second special symbol) Is a dynamic display once, or the total number of times of dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 100 or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is seven). Is maintained until is executed. After the specified number of special symbols have been dynamically displayed, the state is shifted from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state". The number of times saved for each special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A second variable winning device 72 is disposed on the left side (downstream side) of the second starting port 64b when viewed from the front, and a horizontally long small winning port 72a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A special area switch 208h is provided in the small winning opening 72a, and is configured to detect a ball flowing into the small winning opening 72a.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 116) is a small hit, the small hit is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 is illuminated and displayed so as to become a symbol, and a stop symbol (for example, "341", "134", "143") corresponding to the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is displayed to indicate the occurrence of the small hit game. Thereafter, the opening / closing plate (not shown) provided in the second variable winning device 72 is opened, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (small hitting game) in which the ball easily enters the small winning opening 72a. In this special game state, the small winning opening 72a which is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until "1.8 seconds" elapses or one ball is won). .

  The ball that has flowed into the small winning opening 72a is detected by a special area switch 208h provided in the small winning opening 72a. When a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h (so-called V winning), a small hit type counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa for storing information on the dynamic display that has caused the small hit game is stored. The small hit type is determined based on the value of a small hit type counter C5 (see FIG. 117) described later stored in the area 273fa5, and a predetermined big hit game based on the small hit type is started. Therefore, by winning a game for a small hit, the game specification is such that a big hit game can be indirectly provided, and a game property of how to win a big hit or a small hit is realized. The small hit type and the like will be described later.

  A right general winning opening 63c is disposed below the through gate 67 in a front view of the game board 13 and above a right end portion of the ordinary electric hand 64c in a front view of the game board 13. The right general winning opening 63c is a winning opening in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins, similarly to the general winning opening 63.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, a right-handed game is performed during a special symbol big hit game, a special symbol small hit game, or during a “time shortened state” (that is, during an extended open state of the ordinary electric utility 64c). Is configured to be able to play a game. Specifically, the ball fired by the right-handed game is awarded during the big hit game 65a, which is opened during the big hit game, the small winning hole 72a which is opened during the small hit game, or during the "time reduction state". In addition to the possible second start-up opening 64b (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “winning openings 65a, 72a, 63c”), the above-mentioned right general winning opening 63c can be awarded.

  Conventionally, during a jackpot game, a small jackpot game, or a “time-saving state”, one winning port directly associated with each state (that is, the big winning port 65a, the small winning port 72a or the second winning port). The second starting port 64b) is configured to win a ball, and to give a game value to the player based on the winning. However, the winning holes 65a, 72a, 63c that can win in each of the above-mentioned states are fixed, and the game becomes monotonous, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned states, by configuring the ball so as to be able to win the right general winning opening 63c in addition to the directly related winning opening 65a, 72a, 64b, the above-mentioned state is directly related to each of the above-mentioned states. A game value other than the game value obtained by winning the winning ports 65a, 72a, 64b can be given to the player during the above state. Therefore, in order to amplify the game value given in the above state by the ball winning in the right general winning opening 63c, how to make the right general winning opening 63c win in each of the above states. Can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, during the jackpot game, when a predetermined winning number of balls (for example, 10) are made to win in the special winning opening 65a during one round, or a predetermined opening time (for example, “10 seconds”) has elapsed. In this case, an interval time during which the special winning opening 65a is closed is provided. In such a case, during the interval time (that is, during closing of the special winning opening 65a), the ball cannot enter the special winning opening 65a. Therefore, after the player has fired the ball with the specified winning number, the player stops firing the ball for the interval time and continues to stop firing the ball until the special winning opening 65a is opened again (so-called, There is a case where the player performs an action of suppressing a decrease in the ball held by the player himself / herself by performing a hitting game. When the above-described hitting game is performed, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 (the number of shot balls) is reduced by the number of balls that have not been fired. May be reduced.

  Therefore, the right general winning opening 63c is arranged upstream of the big winning opening 65a, and the ball fired in the right-handed game can also win the right general winning opening 63c. With such a configuration, even when the ball with the specified winning number is fired, some balls can win in the right general winning opening 63c, and only the firing balls for the specified winning number can be obtained. A situation where the special winning opening 65a is not closed can be created. As a result, if, for example, a phenomenon occurs in which the specified opening time elapses before the ball with the specified winning number is won in the special winning opening 65a, the player wins the ball with the specified winning number in the special winning opening 65a. It is not possible to make a ball, and the loss when the specified number of balls cannot be won in the large winning opening 65a is larger than the effect of suppressing the decrease of the balls by performing the hitting game. Therefore, by making it easier to give a demerit than the advantage of performing a hitting game to the player, the player is encouraged to continuously fire the ball without performing the hitting game, and the profit of the game hall Can be suppressed. The same effect can be obtained for the small winning port 72a during the small hit game or the second starting port 64b during the "time reduction state".

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment.

  In the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 of the fourteenth embodiment, a jackpot random number table 272a, a jackpot type table 272b, a hold number table 272c, a stop pattern table 272d, a variation pattern table 272e, a random number table for general figure 272f, and a general figure variation table 272g, an electrical opening table 272h, a big hit opening table 272i, and a small hit opening table 272j. The RAM 273 of the fourteenth embodiment has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1, a first initial value random number counter CINI1, a per-figure random number counter C4, and a second initial counter. In addition to the value random number counter CINI2, a small hit type counter C5 is provided. Main controller 110 executes the above main control using various counters stored in RAM 273 and various tables stored in ROM 272.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 273 of the main control device 110 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 39, a setting of a variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a variable display display result in the normal symbol display device 83. It is used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the jackpot lottery and the small hit lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 39, and the setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81 are used for the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used to select the stop type of the jackpot symbol, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the effect mode of the fluctuation effect, and used to set initial values of the jackpot random number counter C1. A first initial value random number counter CINI1, a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a small hit type counter C5 used for selecting a stop type of a small hit symbol are used.

  In addition, a random number counter C4 per ordinary figure (equivalent to the second random number counter C4 in the first embodiment) is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83. A second initial value random number counter CINI2 (equivalent to the second initial value random number counter CINI2 in the first embodiment) is used.

  Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time an update is performed, and the counter returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 17). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 273c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 273. Although details will be described later, the RAM 273 includes a first reserved ball storage area 273d including four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 273e including areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d in accordance with the timing of entering the first starting port 64a. Is done. In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small hit type are set in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b. Each value of the counter C5 is stored. Note that updating of each counter is the same as in the thirteenth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 118 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot random number table stored in the ROM 272. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of 272a2 typically.

  The special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the fourteenth embodiment are configured such that the big hit probability differs for each set value. In addition, a small hit random number value for winning a small hit game is not assigned to the special map 1 big hit random number table 272a1, whereas a small hit random number value for winning a small hit game is assigned to the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. ing.

  In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment, in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2, the increase in the number of the jackpot random number values required to displace the set value from “1” to “6” Is reduced by reducing the number of loss random numbers corresponding to the loss, and is compensated from the decrease. By making the number of the jackpot random numbers different in this way, the probability of the jackpot being changed for each set value is changed.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a1, the number of the small hit random numbers in each set value is set to be the same. By making the number of small hit random numbers the same for each set value in this way, the game value assignment ratios in all set values taking into account only the small hit games are equal.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the change in the set values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Are configured to reduce the number of lost random numbers and to compensate for the decrease, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers to be equal to or less than the number of lost random numbers. Also, the number of small random numbers is set so as not to change for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, and to increase the man-hour when designing the game specification. Can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is determined by a lottery table in any special symbol (that is, the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table). 272a2) is also configured so as to compensate for the assigned loss role. That is, it is configured to change not the small hit random number value assigned only to the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2, but the number of loss random numbers assigned to both the big hit random number tables 272a. Here, when the number of the jackpot random numbers associated with the setting change is supplemented from the hand assigned to only one of the lottery tables (for example, the small hit random value in the second special symbol), the payout rate of each special symbol is calculated. Since the calculation is different, the calculation becomes complicated, and the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification increases. Therefore, by compensating for the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers from the number of random numbers corresponding to the hand (ie, the losing hand) present in each special symbol, a part of the calculation of the payout rate in each special symbol is performed. Can be shared, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is determined by the role of the largest random number other than the jackpot random number in the jackpot random number counter C1 (that is, the small jackpot random number). The random number value and the loss random number value are compensated based on the loss random number value. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the setting based on the number of appearances of the winning combination, which is the most common combination in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance rate of the jackpot having a lower appearance probability than the losing role as the setting determination element by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is determined by the loss random number value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the loss role that does not give the player a gaming value. It is configured to compensate from the number.

  The losing role is different from the jackpot role and the small winning role, because it is a role that does not provide a game value, and is provided for each pachinko machine 10 and a data lamp (not shown) for displaying a game result or the like in the pachinko machine 10. Is not clearly (largely) displayed. Here, suppose that the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game and the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the small jackpot game which are easily (largely) easily displayed on the data lamp are changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rates of the two elements of the big hit game and the small hit game with a data lamp, the setting discrimination of the pachinko machine 10 is easily guessed. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the change in the setting of the probability set value is determined by using the jackpot random number counter C1 which does not give a game value to a player and is not clearly (broadly) displayed on a data lamp. Is configured so as to compensate from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the above, so that the setting discrimination element by the player is only the appearance rate of the big hit, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is hard to be seen from the appearance rate of the small hit. be able to. Therefore, the discrimination factor of the probability set value is limited to the appearance rate of the hand based on one random number value. The game can be continued without being seen, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 of the fourteenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 The number of (big hit random number) is 50, and the value “0-49” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “1” is set to be 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “1”, a small hit random number value (small hit random value) is not allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 0%, so that the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9950 numbers other than the big hit random number value, and the value “50 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is set so as to be 9950/10000 = 99.5 / 100 (that is, 99.5%).

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 52, and the value “0 to 51” is a special value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “2” is set to be 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%).

  Further, when the set value is “2”, as in the case where the set value is “1”, the value of the small random number (small hit random value) is not assigned in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “2” is 0%, and the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9948 other than the big hit random number value, and the value “52 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the set value “2” is set to be 9948/10000 = 99.48 / 100 (that is, 99.48%).

  That is, the set value “2” has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “1” (0.5% → 0.52%), and the bigger hit game occurs more than the set value “1”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 54, and the value “0 to 53” is a special value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “3” is set to be 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%).

  Also, when the set value is “3”, the value of the random number (small hit random value) to be a small hit is allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 as in the case of the set values of “1” and “2”. Not. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “3” is 0%, and the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random numbers (losing random value) which is a loss in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9946 other than the big hit random value, and the value “54 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the set value “3” is set to be 9946/10000 = 99.46 / 100 (that is, 99.46%).

  That is, the setting value “3” has a slightly higher probability of the jackpot than the setting value “2” (0.52% → 0.54%), and the jackpot game occurs more than the setting value “2”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 56, and the value “0 to 55” is It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “4” is set to be 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%).

  Further, when the set value is “4”, the value of the random number (small hit random value) to be a small hit is allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 as in the case where the set value is “1” to “3”. Not. In other words, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “4” is 0%, and the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9944 other than the big hit random values, and the value “56 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the setting value “4” is set to be 9944/10000 = 99.44 / 100 (that is, 99.44%).

  That is, the setting value “4” has a slightly larger probability of the jackpot than the setting value “3” (0.54% → 0.56%), and the jackpot game occurs more than the setting value “3”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 58, and the value “0 to 57” is the special hit. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “5” is set to be 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%).

  Further, when the set value is “5”, the value of the random number (small hit random value) to be a small hit is allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 as in the case where the set value is “1” to “4”. Not. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “5” is 0%, and the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a is not generated.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9942 other than the big hit random number value, and the value “58 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol having the set value “5” is set to be 9942/10000 = 99.42 / 100 (that is, 99.42%).

  That is, the setting value “5” has a slightly larger probability of the jackpot than the setting value “4” (0.56% → 0.58%), and the jackpot game occurs more than the setting value “4”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 60, and the value “0 to 59” is a special value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “6” is set to be 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%).

  Further, when the set value is “6”, the value of the random number (small hit random value) to be a small hit is allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 as in the case of the set value of “1” to “5”. Not. In other words, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “6” is 0%, so that the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9940 other than the big hit random value, and the value “60 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the set value “6” is set to be 9940/10000 = 99.4 / 100 (that is, 99.4%).

  That is, the set value “6” has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “5” (0.58% → 0.6%), and the jackpot game occurs more than the set value “5”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, the increase in the number of jackpot random values due to the setting change is reduced by reducing the number of the loss random numbers, and the loss random number is compensated for. It is configured to be within (below) the number of numerical values.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the fourteenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the big hit random number counter which becomes a big hit in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. The number of values of C1 (big hit random number value) is 50 as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1, and the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “1”, the number of small hit random numbers (small hit random numbers) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250, and the value “50 to 1299” is special. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a2 in FIG. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%).

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining 8700 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value “1300 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8700/10000 = 87/100 (that is, 87%).

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 52 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , The values “0 to 51” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “2”, the number of random hit values (small hit random value) which is a small hit in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250, and the value “52 to 1301” is special. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a2 in FIG. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), like the set value “1”.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) to be lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 8698 other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value. The value “1302 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8698/10000 = 86.98 / 100 (that is, 86.98%).

  That is, although the set value “2” has the same small hit probability as the set value “1”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.5% → 0.52%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a big jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 54 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , The values “0 to 53” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250 like the set values “1” and “2”. The value "54 to 1303" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), like the set values “1” and “2”.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) to be lost in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the remaining 8696 other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The values “1304 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8696/10000 = 86.96 / 100 (that is, 86.96%).

  That is, although the set value “3” has the same small hit probability as the set value “2”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.52% → 0.54%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 56 in the same manner as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-55” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 56/100000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “4”, the number of small random numbers (small hit random value) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250 like the set values “1” to “3”. The value “56 to 1305” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), similarly to the set values “1” to “3”.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 8694 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value “1306 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8694/10000 = 86.94 / 100 (that is, 86.94%).

  That is, although the set value “4” has the same small hit probability as the set value “3”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.54% → 0.56%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “3”.

  Next, when the set value is "5", the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 58 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , The values “0 to 57” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “5”, the number of random hit values (small hit random value) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250 like the set values “1” to “4”. The value “58 to 1307” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), similarly to the set values “1” to “4”.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) to be lost in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the remaining 8692 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The values “1308 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8692/10000 = 86.92 / 100 (that is, 86.92%).

  That is, although the set value “5” has the same small hit probability as the set value “4”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.56% → 0.58%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “4”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 60 in the same manner as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , The values “0 to 59” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “6”, the number of small random numbers (small hit random value) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250 like the set values “1” to “5”. The value “60 to 1309” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), similarly to the set values “1” to “5”.

  Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining 8690 pieces other than the large jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value. The value "1310-9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8690/10000 = 86.9 / 100 (that is, 86.9%).

  That is, although the set value “6” has the same small hit probability as the set value “5”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.58% → 0.6%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “5”.

  In this way, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is compensated from the decrease by decreasing the number of lost random numbers instead of the number of small jackpot random values. And within the range of the number of the lost random numbers (below).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2, the increase in the number of the big hit random numbers due to the setting change is present in both the big hit random number tables 272a1 and 272a2. While reducing the number of lost random numbers to make up for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers that increase is within the range of the number of lost random numbers at the lowest probability setting value (below). The configuration is as follows. Also, the number of small random numbers is set so as not to change for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, and to increase the man-hour when designing the game specification. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 117, the description will be continued. The small hit type counter C5 determines a small hit type when a small hit occurs, and is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in order, and the maximum value (for example, “ In the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99 ”, the counter returns to“ 0 ”after reaching“ 99 ”). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (in the fourteenth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98)).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the big hit in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. The random number counter C1 is stored in the small hit type counter storage area 273e5 of the second reserved area which is the same as the second reserved area in which the random number counter C1 is stored. If the update maximum values of two or more counters are set to the same value, the update content of the other counter may be grasped based on the extraction result of one counter. Therefore, the configuration may be such that the maximum update value of each counter is different.

  Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is not a random number (big jackpot random value) that is a big jackpot, That is, if it is a lost random number (loss random value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of the loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is a random number (big hit random number value) which is a big hit, a fluctuation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. In addition, if the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the second holding ball storage area 273e is a random number (small hit random number value) with a small hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are It will be a small hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the small hit are determined corresponding to the small hit type indicated by the value of the small hit type counter C5 stored in the same holding area. When a ball passes the special area switch 208h during the small hit game, a big hit game corresponding to the small hit type is generated.

  The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”, as in the thirteenth embodiment, and is stored in the jackpot type counter C2 and the ROM 272. The big hit type is determined based on the big hit type table 272b. The special jackpot type table 272b is referred to in the special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1 (see FIG. 119 (a)) which is referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and is referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. And a special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 (see FIG. 119 (b)).

  Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”, and the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type stored in the ROM 272. The small hit type is determined based on the table 272b3 (see FIG. 119 (c)). In the small hit type table 272b3, only the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol is provided, and the table referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol is Not provided. This is because it is not possible to win a small hit in the first special symbol, and it is not necessary to provide a small hit type table for the first special symbol.

  Here, the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1, the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2, and the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c). FIG. 119A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 119B is also stored in the ROM 272. FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 corresponding to the second special symbol shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the small hitting type table 272b3 typically.

  As shown in FIGS. 119 (a) and 119 (b), each of the jackpot type tables 272b1 and 272b2 includes a special symbol type (that is, a first special symbol or a second special symbol) and a type of the special symbol. Is a table in which the jackpot type according to the above is associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), the small hit type table 272b3 is a table in which the small hit type of the second special symbol is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once after the maximum number of rounds of four rounds, or the first special symbol Until the dynamic display of the symbol and the second special symbol is executed a total of ten times, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the number of times the ordinary electric hand 64c projects based on the winning of the variable display is large. After the “4R jackpot” that transits to a state in which the projecting time becomes longer and longer (ie, “time reduction state”), and the maximum number of rounds is 16 jackpots, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times. Until the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, there is a “16R jackpot” that becomes “time reduction state” (see FIG. 119 (a)). .

  Also, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the maximum number of rounds is four rounds, until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times, or between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times after the “4R jackpot” which becomes the “time reduction state” until the dynamic display is executed 100 times in total, and after the maximum number of rounds of eight rounds is reached. Until or after the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, "8R jackpot" which becomes "time reduction state" and the maximum number of rounds after 16 round jackpots Until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times, or until the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total. "16R jackpot" (Fig. 1 9 (b) reference).

  Further, three small hit types are provided as the small hit types of the second special symbol, and a small hit game having a maximum round number of one round is executed in all of them. In addition, when a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h during the small hitting game as the small hitting type, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed seven times after the maximum number of rounds is four. Until the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, a big hit game that becomes a “time-saving state” occurs. When a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h during the small hitting game, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times after the maximum round number of eight rounds, or the first special symbol is displayed. Until the dynamic display with the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, a “big hit game corresponding to the“ 8R big hit ”” in which the big hit game which is in the “time shortened state” occurs. When a ball is detected by the different area switch 208h, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times after the jackpot of the maximum round of 16 rounds, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed. There is a "16R big hit corresponding small hit" in which a big hit game that is in a "time shortened state" is generated until the dynamic display is executed 100 times in total (see FIG. 119 (c)).

  In the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 and the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2, each big hit type is associated with a possible value of the big hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type. In the special figure 2 small hitting type table 272b3, each possible small hitting type is associated with a possible value of the small hitting type counter C5 for determining the small hitting type.

  In the example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 of FIG. 119 (a), the value “0 to 98” of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with “4R big hit”, and the big hit type counter is set with “16R big hit”. The value “99” of C2 is associated.

  Specifically, in the winning / non-prize lottery of the first special symbol in the fourteenth embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. If the value is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2 of the same first holding area is from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1. It is determined. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "4R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "99", "16R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. Is done.

  In other words, when the big hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol as the first lottery game, the big hit type of "4R big hit" is 99%, and the big hit type of "16R big hit" is 1%. Will be done.

  In the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2 of FIG. 119 (b), the value “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “4R jackpot”, and the jackpot is associated with “8R jackpot”. The value “30 to 59” of the type counter C2 is associated, and the value “60 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “16R jackpot”.

  In the win / loss lottery of the second special symbol in the fourteenth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of any of the second reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e becomes a big hit. If it is the value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 273e2 of the same second holding area is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "17", "4R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "40", "8R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "89", "16R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  That is, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol as the second lottery game, the big hit type of “4R big hit” is 30%, the big hit type of “8R big hit” is 30%, and “16R big hit” is Jackpot type will be elected at a rate of 40%.

  In the example of the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3 of FIG. 119 (c), the value of the small hit type counter C5 “0 to 29” is associated with “4R big hit small hit”, and “8R big hit” The value "30-59" of the small hit type counter C5 is associated with "corresponding small hit", and the value "60-99" of the small hit type counter C5 is associated with "16R big hit corresponding small hit". ing.

  In the winning / non-prize lottery of the second special symbol in the fourteenth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of any of the second reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e is determined to be a small hit. If the value is smaller than the above, the small hit type associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 stored in the small hit type counter storage area 273e5 of the same second holding area is obtained from the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3. It is determined. For example, if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “27”, “4R big hit corresponding small hit” is determined as the small hit type, and if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “50”, the small hit type is Is determined, and if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "95", "16R big hit corresponding small hit" is determined as the small hit type.

  That is, when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is the second lottery game, the small hit type of "4R jackpot corresponding small hit" is 30%, and the small hit of "8R jackpot corresponding small hit" is 30%. The type is won at a rate of 30%, and the small hit type of "16R big hit corresponding to small hit" is 40%. Then, when the ball is detected by the special area switch 208h in the small winning opening 72a during the small hit game, the big hit game corresponding to the small hit type (that is, "4R big hit", "8R big hit" or " 16R jackpot ") is started. Therefore, the small hit type in the second special symbol and the big hit type in the second special symbol are substantially the same, and the small hit is won in the second special symbol, and the ball is set in the special area switch 208h. By winning a prize, it is possible to obtain a game value at the same ratio as in the case of winning with the second special symbol.

  In addition, when it is configured so that the same game value is obtained in the big hit and the small hit in the second special symbol, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuating effect), the big hit or the small hit is won. By making the game difficult or indistinguishable from the player, it is possible to obscure the timing of giving the game value. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess the jackpot probability associated with the setting change. For example, even if the setting is low (that is, the set value 1 or the like), the player can continue the game without letting the player know the setting. The operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, in the first lottery game with the first special symbol, the selection ratio of the “16R jackpot” having the highest game value is 1%, while the second special symbol with the second special symbol is selected. In the lottery game, the selection ratio of "16R jackpot" according to the jackpot win is 40%, and the selection ratio of "16R jackpot corresponding small hit" according to the jackpot win is 40%. The lottery game with the second special symbol is set to have a higher game value for the player than the game. For this reason, the player is provided with a game property of how to receive the lottery by the second special symbol, that is, to make the ball enter the second starting port 64b rather than the first starting port 64a. Variations are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  Note that the probability of selecting each of the big hit types or the small hit types when a big hit occurs is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the big hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5 associated with each big hit type or each small hit type in the big hit type table 272b or the small hit type table 272b3. Is defined.

  Further, the probability of selecting the big hit type or the small hit type may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the big hit type table 272b or the small hit type table 272b3 corresponding to each gaming state is prepared, and the big hit type associated with each big hit type or each small hit type in the respective big hit type table 272b or the small hit type table 272b3. What is necessary is just to change the number of values of the type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

  Returning to FIG. 117, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to add, for example, "1" in order within a range of "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the rough production mode of the fluctuation production at the time of the big hit and the loss, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, is determined by the number of the fluctuation productions held and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Selected. Specifically, only the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which “reach display” does not occur, and “variable element of“ normal reach ”as“ reach display ”are executed. A “normal reach” production mode, a “super-reach” production mode in which the “super-reach” variable element is executed by developing from the “normal-reach” variable element, and a “special-reach” mode that also evolves from the “normal-reach” variable element Are performed, and a special fluctuation effect mode in which any of the above-described “reach display” can be executed is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the fourteenth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98)). Then, at the timing when the ball has won the first starting port 64a, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first holding ball storage area 273d provided in the first holding ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first starting port 64a. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the second holding ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 of the second holding area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth areas.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is controlled in accordance with the success / failure of the fluctuating effect, the current game state, and the number of fluctuating effects of the two special symbols currently on hold (reserved ball count). The stop pattern table 272d that refers to the value is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 272d are provided, and are configured to be selected based on the number of floating effects (the number of reserved balls) of both special symbols in standby.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when determining a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect, first, based on the number-of-reserve table 272c provided in the ROM 272, whether or not the fluctuation effect is appropriate, the current game state, and the current game state are determined. One of the stop pattern tables 272d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 272d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and a value of a variation type counter CS1 described later.

  Here, the details of the suspended number table 272c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 272c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, a fluctuating effect (dynamic display, the same applies hereinafter) is performed based on the fact that a ball has entered the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. In this case, referring to the reserved number table 272c based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the gaming state at that time, and the total number of the variable effects of the special figures 1 and 2 at that time, The stop pattern tables 272d1 to 272d5 are configured to be selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern tables 272d1 to 272d5 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

  Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 272c of FIG. 120, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the total number of reserved balls is “1 to 3”, or When the loss is extracted and the total number of reserved balls is “1”, the A table 272d1 (see FIG. 121A) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected.

  Further, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the number of retained balls is “4 to 8”, or when the loss is extracted in the “time reduction state” and the retained ball number is “2 to In the case of “8”, the B table 272d2 (see FIG. 121B) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected.

  Further, at the time of winning the jackpot (ie, when extracting “16R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “4R jackpot”), the D table of the stop pattern table 272d regardless of the game state or the number of retained balls. 272d4 (see FIG. 122A) is selected.

  In addition, at the time of winning a small hit (that is, at the time of extracting a small hit game), the E table 272d5 (see FIG. 122 (b)) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of retained balls. Is done.

  That is, when any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 272d (D table 272d4) is selected based on only the type of the jackpot, regardless of the number of retained balls or the game state at that time, and the small jackpot is won. In this case, the stop pattern table 272d (E-table 272d5) is selected based only on the winning of the small hit, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, and the winning pattern or the small hit is selected. Only when a win is not made (ie, at the time of a loss), the stop pattern table 272d (A table 272d1 or B table 272d2) is selected based on the number of retained balls and the game state at that time.

  It should be noted that, even when a big hit or a small hit is won, the stop pattern table 272d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a jackpot is won, a stop pattern table 272d in which a relatively short variation pattern is easy to be selected (for example, a “super reach” effect mode in which the variation element of “high-speed variation” is 5 seconds or “ Special reach "production mode etc.) may be selected.

  Next, each stop pattern table 272d will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 272d that can be selected at the time of loss, and FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d. (B) is a figure which showed typically an example of B table 272d2 of stop pattern table 272d. FIG. 122 is a diagram schematically illustrating a stop pattern table 272d selected at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and FIG. 122A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d. FIG. 122B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d.

  As shown in FIG. 121A, in the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” production mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” production mode is “95” to “95”. 97, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is set to “98”, “99”. In the A table 272d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), in the B table 272d2 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is “95”. To "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the B table 272d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, and the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

  That is, in the A table 272d1, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. In the B table 272d2, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio.

  Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the A table 272d1, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the B table 272d2 instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, it can be said that the A table 272d1 tends to have a relatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 272d2. In other words, it can be said that the B-table 272d2 is more likely to have the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation effect shorter than the A-table 272d1.

  The selection ratios of the “normal reach” effect, the “super reach” effect, and the “special reach” effect with the A table 272d1 and the B table 272d2 are set to be equal.

  In this way, when the loss lottery result is extracted, the effect form of the variable effect is selected based on the number of balls on hold for the variable effect on hold. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. Thereby, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened, and the execution number of the variable effect is increased, whereby the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be increased.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending balls for the variable effect is small, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is used in order to secure the ball entry time to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is long is selected. Thereby, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is longer than when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected can be performed, and thus the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The situation in which the variable effect is being executed by making it easier to secure the ball entry time for the ball, and by increasing the possibility that a new starting prize will occur during the execution time of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. Can be maintained.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the stop pattern table 272d that is selected based on the number of retained balls in the variable effect is configured to be different when selecting the effect mode in the loss effect variable effect. Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected by the determination of the variable effect based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b and the determination of the variable effect based on the start of the variable effect based on the entering ball. Is configured.

  Specifically, in the case of a loss effect fluctuating effect, one of the A table 272d1 and the B table 272d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls of the fluctuating effect, but the A table 272d1 And the B table 272d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is the same, and is assigned to another effect mode. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

  That is, the only difference is whether the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected based on the number of pending balls for the variable effect. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even when the game state transitions (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even in the case of performing a pre-reading notice such as "preliminary change notice" based on the effect form selected at the time of the start winning prize, the content of the pre-reading notice is not included in the variable effect which is the target of the pre-read notice. An effect that does not cause inconsistency can be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122A, in the D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is set to “5” to “39”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is “40” to “40”. 99 ". In the D table 272d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “special fluctuation” effect mode, and the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. The D table 272d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, and since "reach display" always occurs, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), in the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is allocated only to the “special fluctuation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other “reach display” is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when the small hit is won is always set to the “special fluctuation” effect mode. Since the E table 272d5 is the stop pattern table 272d selected at the time of the small hit, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  That is, in the D table 272d4, the selection ratio is set such that the “normal reach” effect mode is 5%, the “super reach” effect mode is 35%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 60%. In the E table 272d5, the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set so as to have a selection ratio of 100%.

  Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode> It is set so that the selection ratio increases in the order of “super-reach” effect mode> “special reach” effect mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree at the time of appearance of each “reach display” is likely to show the jackpot display result in the order of “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode It is configured to be. Thereby, the degree of expectation to the big hit can be shown to the player by the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy a feeling of uplifting to the big hit according to the effect mode of the executed variable effect.

  As described above, the situation in which a game is played by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of executions of the variable effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

  Returning to FIG. 117, the description will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to add “1” in order within a range of “0 to 9” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value (that is, “9”). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. Of the obtained first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 of the first reserved area. At the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 273e of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. Of the obtained second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variation type counter storage area 273e4 of the second reserved area.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 272e stored in the ROM 272 to produce detailed information on the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 272d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The change mode is determined, and the presence or absence of the announcement effect and the execution mode of the advance effect are determined.

  As described above, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With this configuration, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed notice lottery control or the like necessary for executing the variable production, so that the processing of the MPU 271 related to the variable production can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 to prepare commands for all the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby performing the fluctuation effect. The degree of freedom for selection can be increased. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes every moment, it is possible to select or change the effect contents of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern table 272e will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as the fluctuation pattern table 272e, a special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 commonly used in all game states when the first special symbol is lost, and when the first special symbol has a big hit. The special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2 which is commonly used in all the game states, and all the game states when the second special symbol is lost (in the fourteenth embodiment, the "time reduction state" , The ball can enter the second starting port 64b only, so that the variation pattern table 272e3 for the special drawing 2 loss, which is commonly used in the "time reduction state" only), Special figure 2 big hit which is used at the time of big hit or small hit of the second special symbol and in all game states (substantially only "time shortened state") Ri, and for the variation pattern table 272e4 small prize are prepared.

  FIG. 123 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 123 (b) is a special figure 1 big jackpot stored in the ROM 272. FIG. 124A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation pattern table 272e2, and FIG. 124A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation diagram table for special figure 2 loss stored in the ROM 272. 124 (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 stored in the ROM 272. As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, each of the variation pattern tables 272e1 to 272e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, as the production mode at the time of the loss, “E0: non-reach (long)” and “non-reach (short)” productions referred to when the “non-reach (long)” production mode is determined “E1: non-reach (short)” referred to when the aspect is determined, “E2: normal reach” referenced when the “normal reach” production mode is determined, and “super reach” production mode Are determined when “E3: Super Reach” is referred to when the “Special Reach” effect mode is determined. In addition, as the production mode at the time of the big hit and the small hit, it is referred to when the “normal reach” rendering mode is determined and “E6: normal reach” and when the “super reach” rendering mode is determined. "E7: Super Reach", "E9: Special Reach", which is referred to when the production mode is determined, and "E9: Special Reach", and "E9", which is referred to when the "special variation" production mode is determined. : Special fluctuation ”. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value (small jackpot random value) that is a big jackpot, If the value is a loss, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls held at that time with reference to the number-of-holds table 272c, and the same hold area is selected. Is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern table 272d and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 which is referred to when the first special symbol is lost, “E0: non-reach (long)” has “15 seconds” for the entire variation time ““ high-speed variation (long) ”. And a fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation".

  In the example shown in FIG. 123A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ the low-speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. “Variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is associated with all possible values (“0 to 9”). In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. You.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E1: non-reach (short)” includes one of “only high-speed variation (short) variation elements” with a total variation time of “5 seconds”. There are two fluctuation patterns.

  In the example shown in FIG. 123A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only for the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 referred to when performing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 is set. All the possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “only the high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation element is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, in the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E2: normal reach” has a fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + a fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “20 seconds”. + Variable element of "normal reach"].

  In the example shown in FIG. 123A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "0 to 9" for the "variable element of" normal reach "", and only the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ the fluctuation element of" normal reach "" Is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all the fluctuation type counters CS1 can take. The value (“0 to 9”) is associated with “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ””. That is, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”” Is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E3: Super Reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with a total variation time of “30 seconds”. A variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”” is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 123A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “super reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + “Normal reach” fluctuation element + “super reach” fluctuation element ”alone.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss variable pattern table 272e1 that is referred to at the time of performing the variable effect of the first special symbol, all the possible values of the variable type counter CS1 can be obtained. (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”” Have been. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long) + variation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”is always used as the fluctuation pattern. + “Variable element of“ super reach ”” is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E4: special reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with an overall variation time of “40 seconds”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 123A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element "alone.

  That is, in any game state, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 that is referred to at the time of performing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” Have been. That is, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variation element of “normal reach” is always used as the fluctuation pattern. + “Variable element of“ special reach ”” is selected.

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of the loss in Tokuju 1 (the variation pattern at the time of the big hit in Tokuju 1 or the variation pattern at the time of the loss or the big hit / small hit in Tokuju 2) is the same as the variation pattern Therefore, the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. In addition, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, the selection may be made using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of the presence or absence of a notice display or the like).

  Next, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2 referred to at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). In the fourteenth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that is a big hit, the reserved number table 272c is referred to. Then, a stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the stop pattern table The effect mode is selected based on 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the variation pattern table for special figure 1 big hit 272e2, "E6: normal reach" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long) + a variation element of" low-speed variation "+" low-speed variation "of" 20 seconds ". Fluctuation element of "normal reach"], fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with fluctuation time of "25 seconds" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + "re- fluctuation" And "variable element" are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 123 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Variable element of" normal reach "", "0 to 2", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation of" re-variation " "3-9" for "element".

  That is, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 272e2 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the “high speed fluctuation (long)” is selected. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" is 30%, the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation of the "normal reach" The variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the special hit of the special map 1, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the“ re- fluctuation ” The variation pattern of the “variable element” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation element of“ high-speed variation (long) ”+ variation element of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”” is selected so that any variation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game that can be expected to be a big hit.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2, “E7: Super Reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with a total variation time of “30 seconds”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super reach" "and fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" 35 seconds " A variable element of "normal reach" + a variable element of "super reach" + a variable element of "re-variation" are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Have been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 123 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”,“ 0-3 ”,“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” “Variable element + variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is “4 to 9”.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 272e2 which is referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, ““ high speed fluctuation (long) ”” 40% of fluctuation pattern + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super reach" + 40% of fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" The variation pattern of “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the “super-reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 1, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ super-reach ” (Variable element of “+ variable element of re-change”) ”(60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ fluctuation element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2, “E8: special reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with an overall variation time of “40 seconds”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach"] and fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" of "45 seconds" + " A variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “special reach” + a variable element of “re-change” is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the change type counter CS1 is associated with each change pattern. Have been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 123 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”,“ 0-4 ”,“ fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” Variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation"].

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 272e2 which is referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, ““ high speed fluctuation (long) ”” The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation element of" special reach "" is 50%, and the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" The variation pattern of “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the “super-reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 1, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+“ special reach ” Of "variable element" and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach" + the variable element of "re-variation" Is selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected in any of the fluctuation patterns.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, since the small special winning is not dynamically won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the special pattern 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2 is executed when the small winning is won. No fluctuation pattern corresponding to “E9: special fluctuation” described later is provided.

  With such a configuration, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, a relatively long change pattern is easily selected so that a change effect of generating a big hit occurs. Enhancing the content of the performance can enhance the interest of the game. In addition, in the case where the jackpot has not been won, that is, in the case of a losing, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the content of the variation effect at the time of the losing, and making the variation effect. It can be digested efficiently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124 (a), the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to when the second special symbol is lost will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that is a big hit or a small hit, that is, When the value is a loss, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls at that time with reference to the number-of-reservations table 272c, and the same stop area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the stored value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “E0: non-reach (long)” has a total variation time of “15 seconds” and a “variation element of“ high-speed variation (long) ”+“ low-speed variation ”. One variation pattern is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 124A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ the low-speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in any game state, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) )) Is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ””. In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, as in the case of the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ The variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is selected.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “E1: non-reach (short)” has a total variation time of “5 seconds” and “only high-speed variation (short) variation element”. There are two fluctuation patterns.

  In the example shown in FIG. 124A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only for the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in any game state, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) )) Is associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, as with the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. Is selected.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “E2: normal reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed variation” with an overall variation time of “20 seconds”. + Variable element of "normal reach"].

  In the example shown in FIG. 124A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "is set to" 0-9 ", and only" Fast fluctuation (long) "fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element" It is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 that is referred to in any game state, all possible values (“0 to 9”) of the variation type counter CS1 are obtained. "Variable element of" high-speed variation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed variation "+ variable element of" normal reach "" are associated. That is, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, as in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” is always used as the fluctuation pattern. Variable element + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + variable element of "normal reach"].

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e3 for the special figure 2 loss, "E3: super reach" indicates that the total variation time is "30 seconds" and the "high-speed variation (long)" variation factor + "low-speed variation" variation. A variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”” is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 124 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is“ 0-9 ”, and“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + It is set so that only the "normal reach" fluctuation element + the "super reach" fluctuation element "can be selected.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in any game state, all possible values (“0-9”) of the variation type counter CS1 are changed to “0”. On the other hand, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”” are associated. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, as in the case of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern “variation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ” Variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e3 for the special figure 2 loss, "E4: special reach" indicates that the overall variation time is "40 seconds" and the "variation factor of" high-speed variation (long) "+ variation of" low-speed variation ". Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 124A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”is“ 0-9 ”, and“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + It is set so that only the "normal reach" fluctuation element + the "special reach" fluctuation element "can be selected.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 that is referred to in any game state, all possible values (“0 to 9”) of the variation type counter CS1 are changed to “0”. On the other hand, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” are associated. In other words, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, as in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124 (b), the special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 referred to at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that is a big hit or a small hit, With reference to the reserved number table 272c, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of retained balls at that time, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to is determined in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, a change pattern (change time) associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same hold area is stored in the hold area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the suspended fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4, "E6: normal reach" has a variation factor of "high speed variation (long)" + variation of "low speed variation" with a total variation time of "20 seconds". Element + “normal reach” fluctuation element ”, and the entire fluctuation time is“ 25 seconds ”“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”fluctuation element +“ low-speed fluctuation ”fluctuation element +“ normal reach ”fluctuation element +“ re The two variation patterns “variation element of variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 124B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Variable element of" normal reach "", "0 to 2", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation of" re-variation " "3-9" for "element".

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 which is referred to when the second special symbol change effect is executed, the “high-speed change (ultra short)” change element is selected. + Fluctuation factor of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" 30%, fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + The variation pattern of “re-variation” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ re-variation ” The variation pattern of “variable element” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “high-speed variation (ultra-short)” + “low-speed variation” + “normal reach” variation pattern is configured to be selected. However, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4, "E7: super reach" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "30 seconds". ”+“ Normal reach ”fluctuation +“ super reach ”fluctuation” and “high-speed fluctuation (long) fluctuation + low-speed fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “35 seconds”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each variation pattern Are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 124B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”,“ 0-3 ”,“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” “Variable element + variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is “4 to 9”.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 which is referred to when the second special symbol changing effect is executed, the “high-speed changing (long)” changing element is selected. + Variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super-reach" 40%, fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + A variation element of "normal reach" + a variation element of "super reach" + a variation element of "re-variation" are set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ super reach ” The variation pattern of “variable element of“ + variable element of “re-variation” ”” is easily selected (60% of the whole). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ fluctuation element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, "E8: special reach" has a total change time of "40 seconds", a "high-speed change (long)" change element + "low-speed change". ”+“ Normal reach ”+“ Special reach ”variance” and “High speed (long) variability” + “Slow variability” with a total variance of 45 seconds. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each variation pattern Are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 124B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”,“ 0-4 ”,“ fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” Variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation"].

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, which is referred to when the second special symbol changing effect is executed, the “high-speed changing (long)” changing element is selected. + Fluctuation factor of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach" is 50%, fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + Variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ special reach ” Pattern of "variable element" and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of "special reach" + the fluctuation of "re-variation" The variation pattern of the "element" is evenly selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected in any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 large hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, "E9: special change" has a total change time of "20 seconds", a "high-speed change (long)" change element + "low-speed change". "Variable element of" normal reach "" and "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+" super reach "of" 30 seconds " Fluctuation element ”and“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”fluctuation element with a total fluctuation time of“ 40 seconds ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”fluctuation element +“ normal reach ”fluctuation element +“ special reach ”fluctuation element Are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 124B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E9: special fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach"], the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" + "super reach" "4-6" for "variable element", "variable element for" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element for" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element for" normal reach "+ variable element for" special reach " "7 to 9".

  That is, when the “special fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e4, which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element is selected. + Variation factor of "low speed variation" + variation factor of "normal reach" is 40%, variation factor of "high speed variation (long)" + variation factor of "low speed variation" + variation factor of "normal reach" + The fluctuation pattern of the “super-reach” fluctuation element is 30%, the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + the “slow fluctuation” fluctuation element + the “normal reach” fluctuation element + the “special reach” fluctuation element ” Is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

  Therefore, in the “special fluctuation” effect mode selected at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, the fluctuation element of “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”” The pattern is easily selected (40% of the whole). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the fluctuation element of“ super-reach ”” or ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ” Variable element + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach", so that small hits can be obtained from any of the fluctuation patterns. It is possible to provide a playability that can be expected.

  As a result, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol, all "reach indications" can be selected, and therefore, in any of the "reach indications", the player should expect a lottery result of a big hit or a small hit. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern in the case of winning a small hit is not limited to the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, when a small hit is won by lottery in the second special symbol, a long variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern including a variation element of “re-variation”) may be performed. Alternatively, a short fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern of only a high-speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation element) may be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 117, the description will be continued. The per-figure random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of “0 to 99” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value (ie, “99”). When the per-figure-period random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-figure per-figure random number counter C4.

  The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is updated, for example, periodically (in the fourteenth embodiment, once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98)), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. At this time, the data is stored in one of the first to fourth general-purpose reserved areas provided in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i of the RAM 273. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the general figure reserved ball execution area 273j in the order stored in the general figure reserved ball storage area 273i, and the value of the general figure per-random number counter C4 stored in the general figure reserved ball execution area 273j is changed. A hit determination is made for the hit.

  The value of the random number which is a hit for the normal symbol is set by a general symbol random number table 272f (see FIG. 125 (a)) stored in the ROM 272 of the main controller 110, and is stored in the general symbol holding ball execution area 273j. If the value of the general-purpose hit counter C4 is equal to the value of the random number which is the hit set by the general-purpose hit random number table 272f, it is determined to be a hit. After the hit determination, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set with reference to the ordinary symbol change table 272g (see FIG. 125 (b)) according to the game state, and the variable symbol display time of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is elapsed. Thereafter, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol (a normal symbol). Thereafter, the protruding time of the normal electric hand 64c is set with reference to the electric hand opening table 272h (see FIG. 125 (c)) according to the gaming state, and during the opening time, the normal electric hand 64c protrudes. In the meantime, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b.

  On the other hand, if the value of the per-figure-per-counter C4 stored in the per-figure per-drawing counter area does not match the value of the winning random number set by the per-figure per-random number table 272f, it is determined that a loss has occurred. After the determination of the loss, the variable display time is set by referring to the ordinary figure change table 272g (see FIG. 125 (b)) according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses in the ordinary symbol display device 83, the stop symbol is set. The symbol “x” is lit and displayed as (ordinary symbol).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125 (a), details of the per-drawing random number table 272f will be described. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the per-figure random number table 272f stored in the ROM 272.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, a so-called probability variation function is not provided for both the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the random number table per ordinary symbol 272f is commonly used in all gaming states of the pachinko machine 10. Only one type is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the regular figure random number counter C4 which wins in all game states (ie, “normal game state” and “time shortened state”). The number of values is 99, and the values “1 to 99” are defined (set) in the random number table 272f per figure. That is, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to be 99/100 (99%).

  Thus, in the variable display of the normal symbol, it is set so that it is easy to win a win, but the variable display time of the normal symbol which differs for each game state described later and the projection of the normal electric hand 64c which differs for each game state are also described later. It is configured to change, depending on the time (the number of times), whether or not the second start-up port 64b can win the prize.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125 (b), the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation table 272g will be described. FIG. 125 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the general-purpose variation table 272g stored in the ROM 272.

  Different from the per-figure random number table 272f, the perpetual figure fluctuation table 272g is divided into two types: a "normal game state" and a "time reduction state". The variable display time of the ordinary symbol set for the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state” is set differently. As described above, by making the variable display time of the ordinary symbol different between the “normal game state” and the “time shortened state”, the time at which the result of the success / failure of the ordinary symbol is derived for each game state.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol set in the case of the “normal game state” is set to “5 seconds”. 272 g. That is, in the “normal game state”, the time from the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol is set to be “5 seconds” without exception.

  On the other hand, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol set in the case of the “time shortened state” is defined by the ordinary figure variation table 272g to be “0.5 seconds”. That is, in the “time reduction state”, the time from the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol is set to be “0.5 seconds” without exception.

  Thereby, when the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is changed according to the game state, the through gate 67 and the ordinary so that the time for the ball to flow from the through gate 67 to the ordinary electric hand 64c takes "0.5 seconds" or more are required. By arranging the electric hand 64c, it is possible to make a difference as to whether or not the variable display of the ordinary symbol ends before the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the position where the ordinary electric hand 64c is arranged. As a result, when the ball fired in the right-handed game passes through the through gate 67 in the "time shortened state" and the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage is executed, the ball is changed to the ordinary electric hand 64c. The normal electrical hand 64c can be protruded before reaching the disposition position. As a result, the ball itself that has passed through the through gate 67 can be guided to the second starting port 64b side, and in the ball fired in the right-handed game, the useless ball is reduced, and the ball held by the player in the “time shortened state” Can be suppressed.

  Next, the electrical activity release table 272h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the electric utility release table 272h stored in the ROM 272. The electric winning opening table 272h is referred to when a normal symbol hits, and the protruding time and the number of protruding times of the normal electric hand 64c are defined based on the game state at the timing when the normal symbol hit occurs.

  The electric activity opening table 272h is divided into groups based on the game state in which the symbols are usually drawn by lot. Specifically, the protruding mode (the number of times and the number of times) of the normal electric hand 64c is used for the “normal gaming state” referred to in the “normal gaming state” and for the “time shortened state” referred to in the “time shortened state”. Time) is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the number of protrusions of the ordinary electric hand 64c set when the ordinary symbol is won in the “normal game state” is “1”. The protruding time is defined in the electrical activity opening table 272h so as to be "0.1 second". In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the “normal gaming state”, the normal electric hand 64c is set to protrude for a total of “0.1 seconds”.

  On the other hand, the number of projections of the ordinary electric hand 64c set when the ordinary symbol is won in the "time reduction state" is "3 times", and the ejection time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is set to "5 seconds". 272h. That is, when a normal symbol is won in the "time reduction state", the normal electric hand 64c is configured to protrude for a total of "15 seconds".

  In addition, the immersion time (so-called interval time) between one projection and the next projection of the ordinary electric hand 64c is set to be "1 second". Therefore, when a normal symbol is won in the "time reduction state", the projection and the immersion of the ordinary electric hand 64c are intermittently repeated for a total of "17 seconds".

  Thus, by changing the manner in which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes according to the gaming state, it is possible to cause a difference in the length of the period during which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a situation in which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes for a long time to easily win a prize to the second starting opening 64b side, or a case in which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes. Whether the ball is difficult or impossible to win the second start-up port 64b due to the shortness is made different depending on the game state, so that different game properties can be generated for each game state.

  The winning probability of variable display of a normal symbol and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to those in the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the winning probability of the normal symbol, any probability may be used as long as the "time reduction state" is easier to win in the variable display of the normal symbol than the "normal gaming state", for example, Ordinarily, the winning probability of the symbol may be set to about 1/100 so that it is difficult to win. In addition, as the variable display time of the normal symbol, any variable display time may be used as long as the “time reduction state” is shorter than the “normal game state”, for example, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the “normal game state” It may be a long time of “5 seconds” or more (for example, “30 seconds”) or a short time of less than “5 seconds” (for example, “1 second”).

  Further, the projecting time and the projecting frequency of the ordinary electric hand 64c are not limited to the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, the protruding time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the “normal gaming state” may be set to “0.1 seconds” or more (for example, “1 second”), or the number of protrusions may be set to “1 time”. "(For example," 3 times "). Further, the protruding time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the “time reduction state” may be a long time of “5 seconds” or more (for example, “10 seconds”), or a short time of less than “5 seconds” (for example, “1”). Seconds "). Further, the number of times that the ordinary electric hand 64c protrudes in the “time shortened state” may be a large number of “3” or more (for example, “10”), or a small number of less than “3” (for example, “1”). Times)).

  Returning to FIG. 116, the description will be continued. The RAM 273 includes, in addition to the counter buffer 273c shown in FIG. 117, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 are stored, various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. A work area (work area) in which values such as O are stored. The RAM 273 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 273 is backed up. .

  The RAM 273 further stores a first reserved ball number counter 273a, a second reserved ball number counter 273b, a first reserved ball storage area 273d, a second reserved ball storage area 273e, a reserved ball execution area 273fa, and a general-purpose reserved ball number counter 273h. , And at least a general-purpose reserve ball execution area 273j.

  As described above, the reserved ball execution area 273fa is a storage area commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is used to start the execution or to execute the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 2. Data (counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1) to be referred to in a process such as a special symbol big hit lottery or a small hit lottery, and a process of setting a dynamic display and a variable effect of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81. Is stored in the memory.

  When the MPU 271 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the MPU 271 determines the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display. In order to execute the processing such as the setting of the dynamic display and the variable effect of the device 81, the data (counters C1 to C1) corresponding to the start winning prize stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e. C3, CS1), data corresponding to one start winning prize of the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa. Note that the shift in the fourteenth embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 273d, the second reserved ball storage area 273e, and the reserved ball execution area 273fa will be described with reference to FIG. 117 again. The first reserved ball storage area 273d, the second reserved ball storage area 273e, and the reserved ball execution area 273fa are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the operation of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to set a target display and a fluctuating effect.

  As described above, the jackpot lottery or the small hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the dynamic display and the variable effect setting of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 are set as the big hit lottery and The big hit random number counter C1 used for the small hit lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, and the change used for determining the change pattern The type counter CS1 and the small hit type counter C5 used for determining the small hit type are used. The first reserved ball storage area 273d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball has won the first starting port 64a (starting winning), The second reserved ball storage area 273e stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and C5 acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball has won the second starting port 64b (start winning). .

  The first reserved ball storage area 273d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 273d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  The second reserved ball storage area 273e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 273e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 273e4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a small area for storing the value of the small hit type counter C5. A hit type counter storage area 273e5 is provided.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 273d1 and 273e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 273d2 and 273e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 273d3 and 273e3, the fluctuation type counter storage areas 273d4 and 273e4, Although the hit type counter storage area 273e5 is provided collectively in one reserved ball storage area 273d, 273e (the small hit type counter storage area 273e5 is only the second reserved ball storage area 273e), each counter C1 is provided. A plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of C3, C5, and CS1.

  Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the small ball type counter is not provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d, but the small ball type counter is also provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d. Is also good. With this configuration, the counter value to be obtained can be made the same between when the ball wins in the first starting port 64a and when the ball wins in the second starting port 64b. Can be used. As a result, the number of man-hours for developing the control program can be reduced, and the program capacity in the ROM 272 can be reduced.

  In the first reserved ball storage area 273d, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a is stored up to a maximum of four times. However, in this case, data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the first starting port 64a that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the first reserved first area is stored in the first starting port 64a that is the oldest in time. Will be stored.

  In the second reserved ball storage area 273e, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and C5) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b is stored for up to four times. In this case, the data is sequentially stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). It is memorized. In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the second starting port 64b that is earlier in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the oldest second starting port 64b is stored in the second reserved first area. Will be stored.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 273fa is composed of only one area. Like the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the reserved ball execution area 273fa stores a jackpot random number counter storage area 273fa1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. An area 273fa2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273fa3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter storage area 273fa4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1, and a small area for storing the value of the small hit type counter C5. A hit type counter storage area 273fa5 is provided.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is provided with two special symbols (that is, a first special symbol and a second special symbol), like the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment. Unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment capable of executing the dynamic display of the special symbol of the thirteenth embodiment, only the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of one special symbol is performed on the special symbol display device 39 (and the third symbol display device 81). Is configured to be executable. Specifically, for example, in a state where the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is suspended, and in a state where the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is not suspended. If so, the special symbol display device 39 (and the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol. Also, for example, if the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is in a suspended state and the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is also in a suspended state, First, the special symbol display device 39 (and the third symbol display device 81) performs the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol, and after all the dynamic display of the reserved second special symbol has been executed. The dynamic display of the reserved first special symbol is executed (so-called special figure 2 priority change).

  Therefore, the RAM 273 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment has an execution area for storing information relating to the dynamic display and the fluctuating effects executed by the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, and the thirteenth embodiment As described above, the first reserved ball execution area 273f and the second reserved ball execution area 273g are not provided, and one reserved ball execution area 273fa is provided as the execution area.

  When the MPU 271 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. If so, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to each area 273fa1 to 273fa5 of the reserved ball execution area 273fa.

  On the other hand, when it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the MPU 271 does not store data in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e, and the first data of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. When data is stored in the reserved first area, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first reserved first area is transferred to each area 273fa1 of the reserved ball execution area 273f. To 273fa4. In this case, since the area for storing the value of the small hit type counter C5 (that is, the small hit type counter storage area) is not provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d, it corresponds to the value of the small hit type counter C5. The shift processing is omitted.

  Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa is referred to in the special figure 2 change start processing (see FIG. 129) or the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 130), and based on the reference data, the jackpot lottery ( And / or a small win lottery), and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the special symbol display device 39, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 according to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command. And the display control device 114 are notified. Under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 causes the special figure 1 change pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 change pattern command and the special figure 2 A fluctuation effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 271 determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of the second reserved first area is replaced with the jackpot random number of the reserved ball execution area 273fa. Shift to the counter storage area 273fa1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 273e2 of the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 273fa2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 of the second hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273fa3, shifts the random number value of the change type counter storage area 273e4 of the second hold first area to the change type counter storage area 273fa4, and shifts the small hit type counter of the second hold first area. The random number value in the storage area 273e5 is shifted to the small hit type counter storage area 273fa5.

  When the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa, the second reserved first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. ) Is shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). In the fourteenth embodiment, data is shifted only in the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved sphere storage area 273e.

  Here, the data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the second reserved ball storage area 273e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b when the start of the variable effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. It is assumed that it is. In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 271 transmits the data of the other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data of the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data of the second reserved fourth area is shifted. To the second reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b at the time of determining the start of the fluctuation effect is “2”, the MPU 271 transmits only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. After shifting to one area, the data shift ends. As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed on the second reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that it is easy to create a program.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e at the timing of starting the execution of the variable effect, the MPU 271 proceeds to the first reserved It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the ball storage area 273d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the big hit random number counter storage area 273d1 of the first reserved first area is replaced with the big hit random number counter storage area 273fa1 of the reserved ball execution area 273fa. Shift to Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2 of the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 273fa2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 of the first hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273fa3, and shifts the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 of the first reserved first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 273fa4.

  When the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa, the first reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. ) Is shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). In the fourteenth embodiment, data is shifted only in the first reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved sphere storage area 273d.

  Here, the data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 273d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a when the start of the variable effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. It is assumed that it is. In this state, the data of the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 271 transmits the data of the other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data of the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data of the first reserved fourth area is shifted. To the first reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a at the time of determining the start of the fluctuation effect is “2”, the MPU 271 transmits only the data of the first reserved second area and the first reserved second area. After shifting to one area, the data shift ends. As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, data shift processing is not performed on the first reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In such a case, it is unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), and thus it is possible to easily create a program.

  Returning to FIG. 116, the description will be continued. The ROM 272 of the main control device 110 includes a jackpot opening table referred to for controlling the opening of the jackpot 65a of the variable winning device 65 when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery game. 272i and a small hit opening table 272j that is referred to for controlling the opening of the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72 when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery game is stored. .

  Here, the big hit opening table 272i and the small hit opening table 272j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a big hit opening table 272i stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 126 (b) is a schematic diagram of an example of a small hit opening table 272j stored in the ROM 272. FIG. The jackpot opening table 272i is referred to at the time of a jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type of the jackpot generated in the dynamic display of each special symbol, the opening mode (number of times, maximum Opening time, maximum winning number). The small hit opening table 272j is referred to at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, and the small hit generated in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is independent of the game state (substantially, “time reduction”). Only the "state") defines the mode of opening one small winning opening 72a (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum winning number).

  First, the jackpot opening table 272i is classified based on the jackpot type that has won the jackpot. Specifically, for the “4R jackpot” that is referred to when the jackpot type “4R jackpot” is won, for the “8R jackpot” that is referred to when the jackpot type “8R jackpot” is won, and for the jackpot type “ The opening mode of the special winning opening 65a is changed for "16R jackpot" which is referred to when the "16R jackpot" is won.

  As shown in FIG. 126 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the number of times the large winning opening 65a is opened when the big hit type “4R big hit” is won is “four times”. The maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds" and the maximum winning number is "10", and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of a ball into the special winning opening 65a. Are defined in the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”.

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "8R big hit" is won is "8 times", and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is “10”, and the number of award balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a is defined by the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”. .

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "16R big hit" is won is "16 times", and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is “10”, and the number of award balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a is defined by the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”. .

  Thereby, the number of prize balls that can be paid out for each of the winning jackpot types is different, thereby making it possible to cause a difference in the game value directly given according to the winning jackpot type. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbol, it is possible to produce a game property of determining whether to win any of the jackpot types, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The mode of opening the special winning opening 65a based on the jackpot type (the number of times, the maximum opening time, the maximum winning number, the number of winning prizes, and the transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. is there. Specifically, the number of releases may be the same for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. May be. In addition, it is not necessary to shift to a separate gaming state for each jackpot type, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of jackpot types are shifted to a common gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, there is one type of opening mode of the small winning opening 72a which is set when a small hit is won. The number of times the small winning opening 72a is opened is "1 time", the maximum opening time in opening one of the small winning openings 72a is "1.8 seconds", and the maximum winning number is "1". The number of award balls to be paid out based on the winning of a ball into the small winning opening 72a is defined in the small hit opening table 272j so as to be "10".

  In the fourteenth embodiment, a special area switch 208h is provided in the small winning opening 72a, and a small hit game is won, and the special area switch 208h in the opened small winning opening 72a detects a ball. It is configured so that a big hit game is generated (so-called two kinds). Therefore, although it is necessary to act to make the ball win the special area switch 208h, the result equivalent to "winning the big hit game in the second special symbol" by "winning the small hit game in the second special symbol" Thus, in the dynamic display in the second special symbol, a playability of whether to win either the big hit game or the small hit game is created.

  The mode of opening the small winning opening 72a based on the small hit (the number of times, the maximum opening time, the maximum winning number, the number of winning balls, or the transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. is there. More specifically, the number of times of opening in the small hitting game may be configured to be performed a plurality of times, the maximum opening time may be changed, or the maximum winning number may be changed. May be.

  In addition, as a mode of opening the small winning opening 72a based on the small hit, as the maximum opening time (for example, “1.8 seconds”) based on the small winning game, the total accumulated seconds of the opening time of the small winning opening 72a is the maximum opening time. The small winning opening 72a may be opened and closed until the time is reached. Specifically, the opening time of one small winning opening 72a is set to “0.2 seconds”, and the small winning opening 72a is repeatedly opened and closed “9 times” in one small hitting game, and the small winning The small winning opening 72a is configured to be opened such that the total opening time of the small winning opening 72a based on the game is equal to the maximum opening time. When the entire small hitting game is completed in a short period (that is, “1.8 seconds”), if a situation in which the ball cannot be fired due to clogging of the ball or a shortage of the ball in the upper plate 17 occurs in the period, the small hitting is performed. During the game, the ball cannot be fired, the special area switch 208h in the small winning opening 72a does not detect the ball, the jackpot game does not occur, and the game value that should be originally obtained cannot be obtained, and the player It may cause unexpected damage. Therefore, by setting a long period during which the ball can enter the small winning opening 72a in the small hitting game, the entire small hitting game is performed for a long time, and during that time, unexpected clogging of the ball or shortage of the ball in the upper plate 17 occurs. Even if a situation occurs, the above situation is resolved during the small hitting game period, and the period during which the ball is fired to make the small winning opening 72a win the ball and the special area switch 208h can detect the ball is extended. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of unexpected disadvantage for the player. In addition, it is preferable that the opening / closing plate for closing the small winning opening 72a is a retractable type, the opening / closing plate is configured to protrude when closed, and to be immersed when opened, and that the upper surface of the opening / closing plate is configured to roll a ball. It is.

  Returning to FIG. 116, the description will be continued. An input / output port 275 is connected to the MPU 271 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 274 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 275 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 39, an ordinary symbol display device 83, an ordinary symbol holding lamp 84, and a front side with the lower side of the open / close plate of the special winning opening 65a as an axis. A special winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the opening, a small winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening and closing drive of the opening and closing plate of the small winning opening 72a to the front side, A solenoid 209 including a normal electric combination solenoid (not shown) for opening the combination 64 c is connected, and the MPU 271 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 275.

  The input / output port 275 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a special area switch 208h, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on the signal output from the switch 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  As described above, the special area switch 208h is configured to be able to detect a ball that has won the small winning opening 72a, and is turned on with respect to the MPU 271 when the ball passes through the arrangement position of the special area switch 208h. Output a signal. On the other hand, when the sphere does not pass through the position where the special area switch 208h is provided, an off signal is output to the MPU 271. Therefore, the MPU 271 can recognize whether or not a ball has flowed into the small winning opening 72a based on the detection output of the special area switch 208h.

  Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 271 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 54) started when the power is turned on, a setting change process (see FIG. 97) executed in the start-up process, and after the start-up process. The main processing to be executed (see FIG. 17), the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98) started periodically (in the fourteenth embodiment, at a period of 4 milliseconds), and the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal (See FIG. 15). Here, for convenience of explanation, a start winning process (see FIG. 127), a special figure changing process (see FIG. 128), and a hitting process (see FIG. 132) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) are described. Will be described. The start-up process (see FIG. 54), the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98), the main process (see FIG. 17), and the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) are performed in each of the above-described embodiments (the first embodiment). , The same processes as those of the seventh and thirteenth embodiments are performed, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the start winning process (S5108), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S5108) in the fourteenth embodiment.

  The start winning process (S5108) determines whether or not a ball has won the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. If there is a winning in the first starting port 64a, each of the counters C1 to C3 is determined. A process of storing (reserving) the value of CS1 in the first reserved ball storage area 273d is executed. Then, a process for transmitting the value of each of the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed. Further, when a winning is made in the second starting port 64b, a process of storing (reserving) the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and C5 in the second retaining ball storage area 273e is executed. Then, a process for transmitting the values of the held counters C1 to C3, CS1 and C5 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed.

  In the start winning process (S5108), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64a (start winning) (S6001). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 entrance switch (not shown) for detecting the entrance (winning) to the first starting port 64a, which is read in the switch reading processing (see S5105 in FIG. 98). , The ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 98).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (the start winning has been achieved) (S6001: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the first reserved ball number in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number N1 of operation-reserved balls for the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of one special symbol is less than an upper limit value ("4" in the fourteenth embodiment) (S6002). Then, even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a, if the number N1 of pending operation balls is not N1 <4 (S6002: No), this starting prize-winning process (S5108) ends, and a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). Return to

  On the other hand, if the number N1 <4 (S6002: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 273a (the number N1 of reserved balls) is incremented by 1 (S6003). Then, since this time is a prize in the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 273d is set as a storage destination of each of the random numbers C1 to C3, CS1 (S6004), and the processing is performed. To S6005.

  In the process of S6005, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 117), and the value set as the storage destination in S6004 The jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1, the jackpot type counter storage area of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 273a among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the one reserved ball storage area 273d. 273d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3, and the variation type counter storage area 273d4 are respectively reserved (stored) (S6005).

  Specifically, for example, in the processing of S6005 based on winning in the first starting port 64a, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition by the processing of S6003 is “1”, the first reserved The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of one area. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "4" in each of the storage areas of the first reserved third area, the respective stored areas of the first reserved fourth area are counters C1 to C3. , CS1 are reserved.

  Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) after the addition by the processing of S6003 and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 273d by the processing of S6005, A retained ball number command including the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 and data indicating that the command corresponds to the first special symbol is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. Therefore, the command of the number of reserved balls is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273 (S6006). As a result, the retained ball count command relating to the first special symbol is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process in S5101 of the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). Upon completion of the process in S6006, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  In the process of S6006, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be included in the reserved ball count command may use the values themselves read from the counter buffer 273c in the process of S6005, or the first suspended in the process of S6005. A value read out (stored) in the ball storage area 273d may be used.

  In the process of S6001, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64a (S6001: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 64b (start winning). (S6007). Here, similarly to the first starting port 64a, a special figure 2 entrance switch (shown in FIG. 98) for detecting the entry (winning) to the second starting port 64b read in the switch reading process (see S5105 in FIG. 98). On the basis of the output signal of FIG. 98, a ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 98).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (there is a winning start) (S6007: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the second reserved ball number in the main control device 110). 2 It is determined whether or not the number of active balls N2 in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit ("4" in the fourteenth embodiment) (S6008). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting opening 64b (S6007: No), or if there is a winning in the second starting opening 64b but the number of active balls is not N2 <4 (S6008: No), this is determined. The start winning process (S5108) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, if the number N2 of pending operation balls <4 (S6008: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number N2 of pending operation balls) is incremented by 1 (S6009). Then, this time, since the winning is to the second starting port 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 273e is set as the storage destination of each of the random numbers C1 to C3, CS1, and C5 (S6010). The process moves to S6011.

  In the process of S6011, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 is read from the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 117) and stored in S6010. The jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 273b among the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the previously set second reserved ball storage area 273e. Then, the large hit type counter storage area 273e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3, the fluctuation type counter storage area 273e4, and the small hit type counter storage area 273e5 are respectively suspended (stored) (S6011).

  Specifically, for example, in the process of S6011 based on winning in the second starting port 64b, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after the addition by the process of S6010 is “1”, the second reserved The values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and C5 are held in the respective storage areas of one area. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after the addition is "4" in each storage area of the second reserved third area, the counter C1 to C3 is stored in each stored area of the second reserved fourth area. , CS1, C5 are reserved.

  Next, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) after the addition in the processing of S6009 and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 273e by the processing of S6011; A voice lamp is used to output a command for the number of balls to be held, which includes the values of the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5, and data indicating that the command corresponds to the second special symbol. In order to transmit the command to the control device 113, the pending ball number command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273 (S6012). As a result, the retained ball count command relating to the second special symbol is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S5101 of the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). Upon completion of the process in S6011, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and C5 to be included in the pending ball number command in the processing of S6011 may use the values themselves read from the counter buffer 273c in the processing of S6011, or may be used in the processing of S6011. A value obtained by reading the value stored (reserved) in the 2 reserved ball storage area 273e may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, a special figure change process (S5110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special figure change processing (S5110) in the fourteenth embodiment.

  In the special map change process (S5110), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not a jackpot is currently underway (S6101). During the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 39 at the time of the big hit and during the predetermined time after the big hit game ends (that is, the big hit ending time. "5 seconds"). If the result of the determination is that the big hit is in progress (S6101: Yes), the special map change process (S5110) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  In the process of S6101, if it is not a big hit (S6101: No), then it is determined whether or not a small hit is currently made (S6102). The small hit is performed during the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 39 during the small hit and during the predetermined time after the end of the small hit game (for example, the small hit). Ending time, for example, “3 seconds”). If the result of the determination is that a small hit is occurring (S6102: Yes), the special figure change processing (S5110) is terminated, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98).

  In the processing of S6102, if it is not a small hit (S6102: No), then it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is in a dynamic display (fluctuating) (S6103). If the display mode of the symbol display device 39 is not during dynamic display (S6103: No), then, a predetermined time (for example, "1 second") has elapsed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 39 has stopped. It is determined (S6104). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after stopping the dynamic display (S6104: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). Thereby, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. .

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S6104, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S6104: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (retained in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number N2 of pending operation balls of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the second special symbol is larger than "0" (S6105).

  As a result of the processing in S6105, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not “0” (S6105: Yes), the execution of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) related to the second special symbol is started. It is determined that it is the timing, and first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of operation reserved balls N2) is decremented by 1 (S6106). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic displays (fluctuation effects) related to the second special symbol is started by the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S6108) described later. This is because the number of reserved balls related to the second special symbol is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the second reserved sphere storage area 273e is shifted (S6107). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e toward the reserved ball execution area 273fa. 1 area → holding ball execution area 273fa, second holding second area → second holding first area, second holding third area → second holding second area, second holding fourth area → second holding third area In such a manner, the data in each area is shifted.

  After the data shift process in S6107, the dynamic of the second special symbol with respect to the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa by the data shift process. In order to execute the display and the variation effect, the special figure 2 variation start process is executed (S6108), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). The special figure 2 change start process (S6108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6105, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not larger than “0” (for example, “0”) (S6105: No), It is determined whether the value of the first reserved ball counter 273a (the number N1 of the reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110) is larger than "0". It is determined (S6109). If the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is not "0" (S6109: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is decremented by 1 (S6110). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic display (fluctuation effect) related to the first special symbol is started by the later-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S6112). This is because the number of reserved balls related to the first special symbol is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d is shifted (S6111). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved sphere storage area 273d toward the reserved sphere execution area 273fa. 1 area → holding ball execution area 273fa, 1st holding 2nd area → 1st holding 1st area, 1st holding 3rd area → 1st holding 2nd area, 1st holding 4th area → 1st holding 3rd area In such a manner, the data in each area is shifted.

  After the data shift process in S6111, the dynamics of the first special symbol with respect to the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa by the data shift process. In order to execute the display and the variation effect, the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S6112), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). The special figure 1 change start process (S6112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing in S6109, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number N1 of suspended balls) is not larger than “0” (for example, “0”) (S6109: No), the third symbol is used. It is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed on the display device 81, that is, whether or not the demonstration is being performed (S6113). In this determination processing, after transmitting the demonstration command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a or the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the operation reserved ball number N1 or It is determined that the demonstration is being performed until any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is determined to be larger than “0”.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S6113: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S6114), and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S6113: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). The demo command set in the processing of S6114 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and is executed in the external output processing (see S5101 in FIG. 98) of the next timer interrupt processing. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the processing of S6103, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is in dynamic display (S6103: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variable time) has elapsed (S6115). ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 39 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the dynamic display time is determined. If (variable time) has not elapsed (S6115: No), the display of the special symbol display device 39 is updated (S6116), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variable time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 39 has elapsed (S6115: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set on the special symbol display device 39. (S6117). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special figure 2 change start process (S6108) or a special figure 1 change start process (S6112) described later with reference to FIG. 129 or FIG. In the special figure 2 change start processing or the special figure 1 change start processing, it is determined by the processing of S6107 or S6111 whether a big hit, a small hit or a loss is determined according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. In the case of a jackpot, a symbol of "4R jackpot", a symbol of "8R jackpot", or a symbol of "16R jackpot" is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In the case of a small hit, depending on the value of the small hit type counter C5, a symbol "4R big hit corresponding small hit", a symbol "8R big hit corresponding small hit" or "16R big hit corresponding small hit" is displayed. Is determined. Further, in the case of a loss, a symbol corresponding to the loss is determined.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S6117, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as the special symbol. In order to confirm and display in synchronization with the display of the device 39, a confirm command is set (S6118), and the process shifts to S6119. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and includes the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol. Used in common with directing. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display confirmation command, and to confirm and display the stopped symbol.

  In the process of S6119, in order to determine whether or not the time is in the “time shortened state”, both the values of the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter (both not shown) provided in the RAM 273 are larger than “0”. It is determined whether or not it is (S6119).

  The special figure 2 time-saving counter and the total time-saving counter are counters for indicating the “time reduction state”, and are initialized to “0” by the initial setting process of the RAM 273 after power-on (S616 in FIG. 16). Is set at the end of each jackpot, and in the fourteenth embodiment, a value of a predetermined number (“1” or “7” is set in the special figure 2 time saving counter, and “10” or “100” is set in the total time saving counter) If both the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the value of the total time reduction counter are greater than "0", the gaming state is determined as "time reduction state". Specifically, in the big hit end processing (see FIG. 133) in the hit processing (see FIG. 32) described later, when the big hit state ends, the special figure 2 time reduction is performed based on the type of the big hit game (big hit type). The values of the counter and the total time-saving counter are set.

  In the process of S6119, if both the value of the special figure 2 time-saving counter and the total time-saving counter are not “0” (S6119: Yes), it is “time-saving state” and dynamic display of any special symbol (fluctuation effect) ) Has been completed once, so that a time saving subtraction process is performed (S6120) to update (subtract) the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter or the total time saving counter (S6120), and the special figure changing process (S5110) is completed. The processing returns to the interruption processing (see FIG. 98). The time saving subtraction process (S6120) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6119, if both the value of the special figure 2 time-saving counter and the total time-saving counter are “0” (S6119: No), it is not “time reduction state” but “normal game state”. The processing is skipped, the special figure change processing (S5110) ends, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98).

  Next, the special figure 2 change start processing (S6108), which is one processing of the special figure change processing (S5110) when executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 change start process (S6108). This special figure 2 change start process (S6108) is based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa according to the game state, and the lottery (small hit lottery and big hit) in the second special symbol is performed. At the same time, a small win lottery is performed, and the dynamic display (variable pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variable effect on the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 are determined.

  In the special figure 2 change start process (S6108), the MPU 271 first sets the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 for the second special symbol (S6131), and then the big hit random number stored in the reserved ball execution area 272fa. Small hit lottery (small hit determination) based on the value of the counter C1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 118 (b)) set in S6131. ) Processing is performed (S6132).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the small hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the set value at that time. That is, in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 set based on the set value when the power is turned on, the small hit random value is set for each setting, and the small hit random value is set to "1250" for all setting values. Although specified, the range of the small hit random number value is changed in accordance with the change of the big hit random value that differs for each set value. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, “50 to 1299” is defined as the small hit random value, and when the set value is “2”, “52 to 1301” is set as the small hit random value. When the set value is “3”, “54 to 1303” is specified as the small random number value, and when the set value is “4”, “56 to 1305” is set as the small random number value. When the set value is “5”, “58 to 1307” is specified as a small hit random value, and when the set value is “6”, “60 to 1309” is specified as a small hit random value. You.

  In the processing of S6132, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is compared with the small jackpot random number value defined in the special jackpot random number table 272a2, and they match. In this case, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. As a result of the processing in S6132, when it is determined that the small hit is made (S6132: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa and the special figure 2 corresponding to the second special symbol 2 Based on the small hit type table 272b3 (see FIG. 119 (c)), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S6133).

  In this processing, the small hit type associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, that is, the small hit type, based on the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3 (see FIG. 119 (c)), When the ball passes the special area switch 208h during the small hit game, the maximum round number is “16R big hit small hit” which shifts to the “time reduction state” after the 16 round big hit, or the maximum round number is 8 rounds. It is determined whether the “8R jackpot corresponding small hit” shifts to the “time reduction state” after the big hit or the “4R big hit corresponding small hit” shifts to the “time shortened state” after the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. Then, the display mode at the time of the small hit on the special symbol display device 39 is set based on the determined small hit type. In addition, as a display mode at the time of the small hit, for example, "341" when "16R big hit corresponding small hit", "134" when "8R big hit corresponding small hit", "4R big hit corresponding small hit" In this case, "143" is selected.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S6134), and the process proceeds to S6141. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected rendering mode. In the fourteenth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, the E table 272d5 (see FIG. 122 (b)) is selected without fail irrespective of the game state and the number of reserved balls, and furthermore, the E table 272d5 "E9: Special fluctuation" effect mode is selected without exception.

  Specifically, in the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is selected (in the fourteenth embodiment, there is no leakage). "Special fluctuation" production mode).

  Then, a variation pattern associated with the type of the effect mode in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6132 that the small hit has not been won (S6132: No), then the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 272fa and the value set in S6131 are set. Based on the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (refer to FIG. 118 (b)), a big hit lottery (big hit success / failure judgment) process for determining whether or not a big hit is won is performed (S6135).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the set value at that time. That is, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 set based on the set value when the power is turned on, a different jackpot random value is set for each setting. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, “0-49” is defined as the jackpot random value, and when the set value is “2”, “0-51” is set as the jackpot random value. When the set value is “3”, “0-53” is defined as a jackpot random value, and when the set value is “4”, “0-55” is defined as a jackpot random value. If the value is “5”, “0-57” is defined as a jackpot random number value, and if the set value is “6”, “0-59” is defined as a jackpot random value.

  In the process of S6135, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in these special figure 2 jackpot random number tables 272a2, and when they match. Is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the processing in S6135, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S6135: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa and the special figure 2 jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol Based on the table 272b2 (see FIG. 119 (b)), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S6136).

  In this process, according to the special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2 (see FIG. 119 (b)), the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, that is, the maximum number of rounds "16R jackpot" which shifts to "time reduction state" after 16 rounds of jackpot, "8R jackpot" which shifts to "time reduction state" after 8 rounds of jackpot, or 4 rounds of maximum round number It is determined whether or not “4R jackpot” that shifts to the “time reduction state” after the jackpot. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot on the special symbol display device 39 is set.

  Next, a change pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S6137), a big hit flag (not shown) indicating that a process related to the big hit is executed is turned on (S6138), and the process shifts to S6141. Specifically, the processing of S6137 is based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, and the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device are used. The effect mode in the symbol display device 81 is selected, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected effect mode based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit, first, a stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 122 (a)) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big hit. In the fourteenth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit, the D table 272d4 (see FIG. 122 (a)) is selected without exception irrespective of the gaming state and the number of retained balls.

  Then, in the D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is selected (in the fourteenth embodiment, the “normal reach” effect). Mode, “Super Reach” production mode or “Special Reach” production mode).

  Then, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, a change pattern is selected based on the set effect mode and the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. As a result, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6135 that the hit is not a jackpot (S6135: No), that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is a lost random number value (that is, the set value is “1”). , "1300 to 9999" when the set value is "2", "1302 to 9999" when the set value is "3", "1304 to 9999" when the set value is "3", and "4" for the set value. If it is "1306 to 9999", if it is "5", it is "1308 to 9999", if it is "6", it is "1310 to 9999". The display mode at the time of losing is set (S6139).

  In the processing of S6139, the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is set to a display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and a rough variation pattern (effect mode) is set. As the setting of the effect form, specifically, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, the total value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a and the second reserved ball number counter 273b, Based on the current game state, the third symbol display device 81 displays the non-reach (long) effect, the "non-reach (short)" effect, the "normal reach" effect, One of the “super reach” effect mode and the “special reach” effect mode is set. In the fourteenth embodiment, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “time reduction state” or the “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 272d is set differently.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S6140), and the process proceeds to S6141. In the processing of S6140, the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuating time until the stop symbol is displayed in the lost symbol. Specifically, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S6139, the variation type counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. A variation pattern associated with the value of CS1 is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  As described above, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, and the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are performed by the stop pattern table 272d. By using the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 to determine and determine using the same determination program, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps during development can be reduced.

  In the process of S6141, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S6133, S6136, and S6139, the display controller 114 is notified of the variation time according to the variation pattern via the sound lamp controller 113. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command to be executed is set (S6141). Specifically, for example, when the small hit is won in the lottery, the small hit is “16R big hit corresponding small hit”, and further, the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is selected, The special figure 2 variation pattern command of “normal hit” of “small hit”, “small hit corresponding to 16R big hit” and “20 seconds” is selected. If the big hit is won and the big hit is “8R big hit” and the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is selected, the big hit, “8R big hit”, “20 seconds” Is set to "normal reach". Further, if the player loses the jackpot lottery and the “normal reach” fluctuation pattern of “20 seconds” is selected, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss of “20 seconds” “normal reach” is set. You. In this way, even if the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is the same fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device can be set by also setting the validity of the fluctuation effect and the content of the general fluctuation pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. The 113 can grasp the contents of the effect mode including the pass / fail and the fluctuation time, and determine the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol based on the information.

  After the processing of S6141, a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the processing of S6134, S6137 or S6140 is set (S6142). ), And return to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 128). Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “16R jackpot”, the stop mode (for example, “777” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified and “16R jackpot” is specified. A special figure 2 stop type command indicating "big hit" is set. In addition, if the small hit is won and the content of the small hit is “8R big hit corresponding small hit”, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “134”) is not specified and “8R The special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate "big hit small hit".

  On the other hand, if the player does not win the big hit or the small hit and further selects the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode, the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “787”) Without specifying, a special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode at the time of loss. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. A special figure 2 stop type command indicating the effect mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and any of the “non-reach” effect modes is selected, the loss mode is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258”). A special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate the “non-reach” effect mode at the time.

  In this way, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on the success or failure. Thus, it is possible to determine a more detailed stop effect of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol based on the information.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and are executed in step S5101 of the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98). Then, these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 change pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display special figure 2 change pattern command and a display special figure 2 type command based on the command, and displays the display control device 114. Send to

  Next, the special figure 1 change start processing (S6112) which is one of the special figure change processing (S5110) when executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 change start process (S6112). In the special figure 1 change start process (S6112), based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa in accordance with the game state, a lottery or a loss in the first special symbol (big hit lottery) is performed, and , A dynamic display (dynamic pattern and stop type) of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  In the special figure 1 change start process (S6112), the MPU 271 first sets the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 for the first special symbol (S6151), and then sets the big hit random number stored in the reserved ball execution area 272fa. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 118 (a)) set in S6151, a big hit lottery (big hit success / failure determination) process for determining whether or not a big hit has been won. Performed (S6152).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the set value at that time. That is, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 set based on the set value when the power is turned on, a different jackpot random value is set for each setting. Specifically, similarly to the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, when the set value is “1”, “0 to 49” is defined as the jackpot random value, and when the set value is “2”, “0-51” is defined as a jackpot random number value. If the set value is “3”, “0-53” is defined as a jackpot random value, and if the set value is “4”, “0-55”. Is defined as a jackpot random number value. When the set value is “5”, “0-57” is defined as a jackpot random value. When the set value is “6”, “0-59” is set as a jackpot random number. It is specified as a numerical value.

  In the process of S6152, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, and if they match. Is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the processing in S6152, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S6152: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa and the special figure 1 jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol Based on the table 272b1 (see FIG. 119 (a)), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S6153).

  In this process, according to the special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1 (see FIG. 119 (a)), the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, that is, the maximum number of rounds Is determined to be "16R jackpot" which shifts to "time reduction state" after 16 rounds of jackpot, or "4R jackpot" which shifts to "time reduction state" after 4 rounds of jackpot. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot on the special symbol display device 39 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S6154), and a big hit flag (not shown) indicating that the processing regarding the big hit is executed is turned on (S6155), and the process shifts to S6158. Specifically, the processing of S6154 is based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa and the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device. The effect mode in the symbol display device 81 is selected, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected effect mode based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the fourteenth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit, the D table 272d4 (see FIG. 122 (a)) is selected without exception irrespective of the gaming state and the number of retained balls.

  Then, in the D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is selected (in the fourteenth embodiment, the “normal reach” effect). Mode, “Super Reach” production mode or “Special Reach” production mode).

  Then, in the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2, the variation pattern is selected by being attached to the set effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. As a result, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6152 that it is not a jackpot (S6152: No), that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is a lost random number value (that is, the set value is “1”). , "50-9999" if the set value is "2", "52-9999" if the set value is "3", "54-9999" if the set value is "3", and "4" If it is "56-9999", if it is "5", it is "58-9999", if it is "6", it is "60-9999") The display mode at the time of losing is set (S6156).

  In the process of S6156, the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and a rough variation pattern (effect mode) is set. The setting of the rendering mode includes the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, the total value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a and the second reserved ball number counter 273b, and the current game state. Based on the above, the non-reach (long) production mode, the “non-reach (short)” production mode, the “normal reach” production mode, and the “super reach” production mode are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the production mode. , "Special reach" effect mode is set. In the fourteenth embodiment, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “time reduction state” or the “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 272d is set differently.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S6157), and the flow shifts to the process of S6158. In the process of S6157, the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the variation time until the stop symbol is displayed in the lost symbol. Specifically, in the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 provided for each loss display mode (effect mode) determined in the process of S6156, the variation type counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. A variation pattern associated with the value of CS1 is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  Thus, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number value C3 and CS1. Thus, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps at the time of development can be reduced. In addition, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern in the first special symbol and the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern in the second special symbol are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same C3 and CS1. Thus, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps at the time of development can be reduced.

  In the process of S6158, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S6154 and S6156, the display controller 114 is notified of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the sound lamp controller 113. FIG. 1 sets a variation pattern command (S6158). Specifically, for example, if a big hit is won in a lottery, the big hit is “4R big hit”, and the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is selected, A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating "normal reach" of "4R jackpot" / "20 seconds" is set. In addition, if the player loses the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is selected, a special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the loss of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is set. You. As described above, even if the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is the same fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device can be set by also setting the validity of the fluctuation effect and the content of the rough fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. The 113 can grasp the contents of the effect mode including the pass / fail and the fluctuation time, and can determine a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol based on the information.

  After the process of S6158, a special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S6153 or S6157 is set (S6159), The process returns to the special figure change process (see FIG. 128). Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “16R jackpot”, the stop mode (for example, “777” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified and “16R jackpot” is specified. A special figure 1 stop type command indicating "big hit" is set.

  On the other hand, if the player does not win the jackpot and the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “787”) is specified. Instead, a special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode at the time of loss. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. A special figure 1 stop type command indicating the effect mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and any of the “non-reach” effect modes is selected, the loss mode is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258”). The special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate the “non-reach” effect mode at the time.

  As described above, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the special figure 1 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (the display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure. Thus, it is possible to determine a more detailed stop effect of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol based on the information.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and are executed in step S5101 of the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98). Then, these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 1 change pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 1 change pattern command and a display special figure 1 type command based on the command, and generates the display control device 114. Send to

  Note that the special figure 2 change start processing (see FIG. 129) and the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 130) may be configured to be performed by a common control program. In this case, since the small hit lottery is also performed in the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 130) relating to the first special symbol that cannot be won in the small hit, extra processing is executed in the first special symbol determination processing. However, the number of development steps and the ROM capacity can be reduced by using a common program.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the time-saving subtraction process (S6120), which is one of the special figure variation processes (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the time saving subtraction process (S6120). This time saving subtraction process (S6120) counts the number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) or the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) in the "time reduction state", When the specified number of times of dynamic display has been executed, the “time reduction state” ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, as the end condition of the “time reduction state”, whether the dynamic display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is executed for the set number of single executions is performed. The total number of times of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) and the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) is executed for the total number of times of execution different from the number of single executions. The "time reduction state" is configured to end when one of the conditions is satisfied.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the number of executions is set for each jackpot type in a jackpot end process (see FIG. 133) described later. Specifically, the number of executions is set to “4R jackpot” in the first special symbol. In the case of winning, the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) is executed once, or the dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) and the dynamic display of the second special symbol ( The "time reduction state" based on the "4R jackpot" of the first special symbol is finished when the total of the time and the variation effect) is executed 10 times. In addition, the jackpot other than the "4R jackpot" in the first special symbol (that is, "16R jackpot" in the first special symbol, or "16R jackpot", "8R jackpot" or "4R jackpot" in the second special symbol) In the case of winning, dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) is executed seven times, or dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) and dynamic display of the second special symbol ( When a total of 100 times is performed, the first special symbol “16R jackpot” or the second special symbol “16R jackpot”, “8R jackpot” or “4R jackpot” The "shortened state" is configured to end.

  In the time saving subtraction process (S6120), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been completed (S6161). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol has been completed (S6161: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter (not shown) for counting the number of times the second special symbol is executed is decremented by one. (S6162), and the process moves to S6163. On the other hand, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not ended (S6161: No), that is, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol has ended, the processing of S6162 is skipped and the special figure is skipped. The process proceeds to S6163 without subtracting the value of the two-hour counter.

  In the processing of S6163, the value of the total time-saving counter (not shown) for counting the total number of times of execution of both special symbols is decremented by 1 (S6163), and the processing shifts to S6164. That is, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, only the value of the total time saving counter is decremented by one, while when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the special figure 2 is displayed. The value of both the time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter are decremented by one.

  In the process of S6164, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is a value larger than “0” (S6164). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is not greater than “0” (S6164: No), that is, when the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is “0” or less, (2) Since the end condition of the “time reduction state” based on the number of times of dynamic display of the special symbol is satisfied, the process shifts to S6165 to end the “time reduction state”.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6164, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is greater than “0” (S6164: Yes), the processing is performed based on the number of times of dynamic display of the second special symbol. Since the end condition of the “time reduction state” is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter is greater than “0” (S6167). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the total time saving counter is not greater than “0” (S6167: No), that is, when the value of the total time saving counter is “0” or less, the second special symbol is used. Although the end condition of the “time reduction state” based on the number of executions of the dynamic display is not satisfied, the “time reduction state” based on the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not satisfied. Since the end condition is satisfied, the process moves to S6165 to end the “time reduction state”.

  In the process of S6165, an end setting process (for example, transmission of a time reduction end command) for ending the “time reduction state” is performed (S6165), and then both the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter are set to “0”. After clearing (S6166), the time saving subtraction process (S6120) ends, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 128). Here, by clearing both the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter to “0”, even if one of the “time reduction state” end conditions is satisfied, the other “time reduction state” The counter associated with the end condition of the "state" can be initialized, and then the counting in the "time saving state" can be performed accurately.

  In the process of S6167, when it is determined that the value of the total time saving counter is larger than “0” (S6167: Yes), the total of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. Since the end condition of the “time reduction state” based on the number of executions is not satisfied, the processing of S6165 and S6166 is not performed to maintain the “time reduction state”, and the time reduction processing (S6120) is ended. The process returns to the special figure change process (see FIG. 128).

  As described above, by changing the condition (the number of times) at which the “time reduction state” ends depending on the special symbol to be executed, a variation can be provided in the game and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when a short specified number of “time reduction state” (for example, one time) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is to be executed in the “time reduction state”, If the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol exists before the game, before the execution condition of the second special symbol (that is, the winning in the second starting port 64b) is established by driving the ordinary electric combination 64c. The dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (ie, once), and the “time reduction state” may end when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the ending condition of the “time reduction state” is made different for each execution number of each special symbol, and the ball is transferred to the second starting port 64b before the ending condition based on the execution number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is satisfied. Is set so that the player can win the prize (ie, the total number of times of dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 or more), so that the second special symbol can be surely obtained in the "time reduction state". The dynamic display of the symbol can be executed, and the expected game specification (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed in the “time reduction state”) is provided to the player without fail. Can enhance the interest of the people.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the hit processing (S5103), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the hit processing (S5103).

  This winning process (S5103) is a type of a big hit (big hit type) or a small hit type when a big hit is won based on the detection of the special area switch 208h during a small hit game or a big hit in a special symbol. The number of rounds (the number of rounds) of the special winning opening 65a is set in accordance with, and the opening time of the special winning opening 65a is set. Then, in the case of the jackpot state, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 110) for controlling opening or closing of the special winning opening 65a is executed. At the end of the jackpot, a jackpot ending process (see FIG. 133) for ending the jackpot is executed. Further, when a special symbol small hit occurs, the number of times of opening the small winning opening 72a (the number of rounds) and the opening time of the small winning opening 72a are set. Then, in the case of the small hit state, the detection of the ball by the special area switch 208h is determined while executing the small winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 134) for controlling the opening or closing of the small winning opening 72a. .

  In the hit processing (S5103), the MPU 271 first determines whether the big hit flag is turned on (S6201). In the fourteenth embodiment, the big hit flag is turned on when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of each special symbol, or when a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h during the small hit game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot flag is turned on (S6201: Yes), the jackpot flag is set to off (S6202), and then, in order to execute the control related to the jackpot game, the selected jackpot type or small jackpot type is executed. The corresponding round number is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S6203). Then, in order to transmit a jackpot opening command indicating that the jackpot is started to the voice ramp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 (S6204). A jackpot opening time (for example, “5 seconds”) is set (S6205), and the process proceeds to S6210. As a result, the jackpot opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process executed next. In the above-described round counter, “0” is set as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6201 that the big hit flag is not turned on (S6201: No), it is next determined whether or not the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S6206). ). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S6206: Yes), the control is first provided in the RAM 273 in order to execute the control on the winning small hit. The number of rounds corresponding to the winning small hit is set to "1" in a round counter (not shown) (S6207). Then, the small hit opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 in order to transmit the small hit opening command indicating that the small hit is started to the sound ramp control device 113 (S6208). Next, the opening time of the small hit (for example, “1 second”) is set (S6209), and the process proceeds to S6210. Thus, the small hit opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  With this configuration, the value of the round counter is set according to the winning (acquired) jackpot or the small hit, and the number of times of opening the special winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a according to the winning combination is set. At the same time, an opening effect corresponding to the big hit or the small hit can be executed.

  Next, in the process of S6210, it is determined whether or not a big hit game is being executed (S6210). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit game is being executed (S6210: Yes), a big winning port opening / closing control process for executing the opening / closing control of the big winning port 65a corresponding to the big hit game is executed (S6211). The process moves to S6212. Note that the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S6211) is the same as the special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 110) in the thirteenth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S6212, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S6212). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S6212: Yes), the process of S6213 is skipped and the hit process (S5103) is performed once to continue the big hit game. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S6212: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “0”, a big hit end process is executed to end the big hit game. (S6213), the hit processing (S5103) ends, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 98).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end process (S6213), which is one of the hit processes (see FIG. 132) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S6213).

  In the big hit end processing (S6213) of the fourteenth embodiment, based on the big hit type (small hit type) in which the big hit game is generated, an end condition of the “time reduction state” executed after the big hit game is ended is set.

  In the big hit end process (S6213), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the game has been a big hit game by dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S6221). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit game is the big hit game by the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S6221: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the big hit type of the big hit game is “4R big hit” ( S6222). If the result of the determination is that it is “4R jackpot” (S6222: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to “1” in order to set a short “time reduction state” disadvantageous to the player. Is set (S6223), the value of the total time-saving counter is set to "10" (S6224), and the process shifts to S6227.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S6221 that the game is not a jackpot game by dynamic display of the first special symbol (S6221: No), that is, it is determined that the game is a jackpot game by dynamic display of the second special symbol. In the case, or when it is determined that the big hit game by the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not “4R big hit” (S6222: No), that is, the “16R big hit” in the dynamic display of the first special symbol , "7" is set to the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter (S6225), and the value of the total time saving counter is set to "7" in order to set a long "time reduction state" advantageous to the player. "100" is set (S6226), and the process moves to S6227.

  As described above, by generating the “time reduction state” having different degrees of advantage based on the big hit type or the small hit type of the winning special symbol, the variation of the game can be abundant and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the process of S6227, to end the big hit, first, an ending command indicating the start of the big hit ending effect is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S6227). Then, a jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S6228), the jackpot end process (S6213) is ended, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 132). The ending command set in the processing of S6227 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and is included in the external output processing (see S5101 in FIG. 98) of the next timer interrupt processing. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. In the process of S6210, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S6210: No), it is next determined whether or not a small hit game is being executed (S6214). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small hitting game is being executed (S6214: Yes), the small winning opening / closing control processing for executing the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 72a corresponding to the small hitting game is executed ( S6215).

  Here, the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215), which is one process of the hitting process (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S6215).

  In this small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215), a round counter and a winning counter which are also used in the control at the time of the big hit are set and determined, the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 72a is executed, and the special area switch 208h is detected and determined. To determine whether a big hit game based on the small hit game will occur.

  In the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the small winning opening 72a is open (S6231). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small winning opening 72a is not opened (S6231: No), it is then determined whether the small winning opening time set in the winning process (see FIG. 133) has elapsed. It is determined (S6322). If the result of the determination is that the opening time of the small hit has elapsed (S6322: Yes), a small winning opening opening process of opening the small winning opening 72a is executed in order to start one round in the small hit game ( (S6233) Then, "1" is set to the value of a winning counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S6234). Then, an opening time is set to set the maximum opening time of the small winning opening 72a (that is, "1.8 seconds") (S6235), and a small opening command indicating that the small winning opening 72a is opened is provided in the RAM 273. It is set to the received command transmission ring buffer (S6236), and the process moves to S6237. As a result, the small open command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  On the other hand, if the small hit opening time has not elapsed in the processing of S6231 (S6231: No), the small win opening time is in progress, and thus the small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S6215) is terminated. Return to the processing (see FIG. 133).

  In the processing of S6231, if it is determined that the small winning opening 72a is being opened (S6231: Yes), the processing proceeds to S6237 without performing the steps S6322 to S6236 relating to the opening of the small winning opening 72a. Transition.

  In the processing of S6237, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the opening time of the small winning opening 72a set in S6235 described above elapses (S6237). If the result of the determination is that the opening time of the small winning opening 72a has elapsed (S6237: Yes), one closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the small winning opening 72a in that round. Then, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S6238), and the process shifts to S6244. The process of closing the small winning opening 72a from S6244 will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6237, if the opening time of the small winning opening 72a has not elapsed (S6237: No), since the closing timing of the small winning opening 72a has not arrived, the opening of the small winning opening 72a is maintained. First, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected by the special area switch 208h (S6239).

  In the processing of S6239, when it is determined that the ball is detected by the special area switch 208h (S6239: Yes), it is a prize (ie, two kinds) to the special area switch 208h during the small hitting game. In order to execute the jackpot game based on the winning, the jackpot flag is set to ON (S6240), and the process proceeds to S6241. On the other hand, if the ball is not detected by the special area switch 208h in the process of S6239 (S6239: No), the process of S6240 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6241.

  In the processing of S6241, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected by the small winning opening switch (not shown) for detecting the ball flowing into the small winning opening 72a, that is, whether or not the ball has won the small winning opening 72a. (S6241). As a result of the determination, if a ball is detected by the small winning opening switch (S6241: Yes), that is, if the ball has won the small winning opening 72a, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 (S6242). It is determined whether the value of the winning counter obtained by subtracting 1 is greater than "0" (S6243). As a result of the determination, when the value of the winning counter is not greater than “0” (S6243: No), that is, when the value of the winning counter is “0” or less, one ball wins in the small winning opening 72a. Since one closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is satisfied, the process shifts to S6244 in order to close the small winning opening 72a.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6241, when no ball is detected by the small winning opening switch (not shown) (S6241: No), that is, when no ball is won in the small winning opening 72a, or in the processing of S6243. In the case where it is determined that the value of the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6243: Yes), the opening condition of the small winning opening 72a is maintained because the closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is not satisfied. Therefore, the small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S6215) is ended without performing the processing of S6244 to S6246. After the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215) ends, the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 133).

  As described above, the round counter and the winning counter used for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a in the jackpot game are also used for controlling the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a in the small hitting game, and the program for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a. By using the same configuration as the program for controlling the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a, the program can be shared, the number of development steps during development can be reduced, and the ROM capacity can be reduced.

  In the closing process of the small winning opening 72a from S6244, first, a small winning opening closing process of closing the small winning opening 72a is executed (S6244), and then the small winning opening 72a is set to the audio lamp control device 113. A small close command indicating that the command is closed is set (S6245), and the process proceeds to S6246. The small closing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273, and is output in the external output process (see S5101 in FIG. 98) of the next timer interrupt process. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S6246, since one round of the small winning opening 72a has been consumed, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S6246), and the small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S6215) is ended. After the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215) ends, the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 133).

  Returning to FIG. 133, the description will be continued. After the end of the small winning opening opening / closing control process in S6215, it is determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S6216). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S6216: Yes), the process of S6217 is skipped to continue the small hitting game, and the hitting process is temporarily performed (S5103). And returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6216, if the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S6216: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “0”, in order to end the small hitting game, A small ending command indicating the start of a small hit ending effect is set for the sound ramp control device 113, and a small hit end process for setting an ending time and the like is executed (S6217), and the hit processing (S5103) is ended. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98).

  As described above, in the winning process (see FIG. 133), the special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 110) for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a, and the small winning opening opening / closing control process for controlling the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a. By executing (see FIG. 134), the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 can manage the execution of the jackpot game and the small jackpot game, and various states at the time of the big hit accompanying the processing of opening and closing the big win 65a at the time of the big hit. The various states at the time of a small hit accompanying the process of opening and closing the small winning opening 72a at the time of a small hit can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, in the winning process (see FIG. 133), the specified number of “time reduction state” after the end of the big hit is set by the big hit end process (see FIG. 133), so that the winning type (small hit type) differs for each winning type. It can create amusement, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the increase in the jackpot random value resulting from the setting change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Each of the symbols is configured so as to compensate for the number of lost random numbers, and is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random values. Furthermore, in each special symbol, the number of random numbers other than the big random number value and the lost random number value (that is, the small random number value in the second special symbol) is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the jackpot random value, thereby suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specification. be able to.

  In addition, in each of the special symbols, an increase in the jackpot random number value caused by the setting change is compensated for from the role of the largest random number value other than the jackpot random number value in the jackpot random number counter C1 (ie, both of the random number values are lost). Constitute. With this configuration, it is possible to make setting discrimination difficult based on the number of appearances of the losing combination, which is the most common combination. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance rate of the jackpot having a lower appearance probability than the losing role as the setting determination element by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is compensated for from the lost random number value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the lost combination that does not give a game value to the player.

  Unlike the jackpot role and the small jackpot role, the losing role is a role that does not provide a game value, and is therefore not clearly (largely) displayed on a data lamp (not shown) provided for each pachinko machine 10. is there. Here, if the small hit random number value corresponding to the small hit game clearly (largely) recorded in the data lamp is changed for each setting, the player confirms the appearance rate of the small hit game with the data lamp. By doing so, the number of setting determination elements of the pachinko machine 10 increases. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is compensated from the lost random number value corresponding to the lost portion that is not counted in the data lamp without giving a game value to the player in the jackpot random number counter C1. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance ratio of the jackpot as the setting determination element by the player. Therefore, for example, even if the setting is low (that is, the setting value is “1” or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, the increase in the jackpot random value due to the setting change is determined by a lottery table in any special symbol (that is, the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2). However, it is configured to compensate from the part that has been assigned. Here, when the big hit random value accompanying the setting change is supplemented from the role (for example, the small hit random value in the second special symbol) assigned to only one lottery table, the calculation of the payout rate in each special symbol is performed. Due to the difference, the calculation becomes complicated, and the number of steps in designing the game specification increases. Therefore, by compensating for the increase of the jackpot random value from the hand (ie, the loss hand) present in each special symbol, it becomes possible to share a part of the calculation of the payout rate in each special symbol, An increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment changes (increases) the number of jackpot random numbers that generate jackpot games that provide the most time-efficient game value for each set value, and determines the change (increase) in the game. It was configured to compensate from the number of lost random numbers to which no value was given.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, although the time efficiency is lower than that of the big hit game, the number of the small hit random numbers for generating the small hit game which gives the player a game value is changed for each set value. (Increase), and the change (increase) is compensated from the number of loss random numbers. In the case of a small jackpot game, when trying to obtain a game value equivalent to one jackpot game, if the player does not win many small jackpot games over a longer period of time than the jackpot game, the same jackpot game will be obtained. Can not do. Therefore, by providing a portion where the setting difference occurs in the number of the small hit random numbers that generate the small hit game, it is difficult to perform the game for a long time and determine the setting unless a lot of the small hit games are won. be able to. Therefore, by setting the setting discriminating element by the player to a game specification that is difficult unless the game is played for a long time, it is possible to make it difficult for the pachinko machine 10 to see the set value in a short game. As a result, even if the setting is low (that is, the set value is 1 or the like), it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the user to find the setting and to continue the game, thereby promoting the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourteenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fourteenth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  The details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 135 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot random number table stored in the ROM 272. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of 272a2 typically.

  The special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the fifteenth embodiment are respectively for each set value, for the low probability state used when the gaming state is the special symbol low probability state, The game state is divided into two types, a high probability state used in the case of a special symbol high probability state having a higher probability of a big hit than the special symbol low probability state.

  Then, in each set value, the number of small hit random numbers included in the low-probability state and the high probability state is changed, and the number of the small random numbers is different in each set value in each game state. Is set to In addition, an increase in the number of small hit random numbers for each set value and each gaming state is compensated for from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the loss. In this way, by making the number of random numbers of small hits different, the winning probability of small hit is changed for each set value and each game state.

  On the other hand, in each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in the low probability state and the high probability state is set to be the same. As described above, the number of jackpot random numbers varies depending on the game state, but by setting the same for each set value, the game value assignment ratios in which only the jackpot games are considered at all the set values are equalized.

  As shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 of the fifteenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 The number of values (big hit random numbers) of the counter C1 is 50, and the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special drawing 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500, and the values “0 to 499” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are both 100 and low. The value “50 to 149” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 599” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (losing random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9850, the values “150 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that result in a loss is 9400 other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value, and the values “600 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9850/10000 = 98.5 / 100. (That is, 98.5%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9400. / 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9850 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes the big jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big jackpot random number table 272a1 is 50 like the set value “1”. The values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5, like the set value “1”. / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500 like the set value “1”. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high-probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability-change state” or “probability-change state”) is the same as the set value “1”. 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 102, and the value is “50”. To 151 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 102/10000 = 1.02 / 100 (that is, 1.2.0). 02%).

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 120, and the values are “500 to 619”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 120/10000 = 1. / 100 (that is, 1.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be easily hit by about 1.18 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. 9848, and the values “152 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is 9380 remaining values other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “620 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9848/10000 = 98.48 / 100. (That is, 98.48%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9380. /10000=93.8/100 (that is, 93.8%).

  That is, at the set value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random values due to the setting change in the low probability state and the high probability state in Toku-zu 1 also decreases the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". The number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, and for the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal". It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9848 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 is equivalent to the big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as compared with the set value “1”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1% → 1.02%, high-probability state: 1% → 1.2%). It can be said that there is.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of the values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the set values “1” and “2”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/100000, like the set values “1” and “2”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which is a big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as the set values “1” and “2”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” and “2”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 104, and the value is “50”. To 153 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state”) is 104/10000 = 1.04 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 04%).

  When the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 140, and the values are “500 to 639”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 140/10000 = 1.4. / 100 (that is, 1.4%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.35 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 9846, the values “154 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9360 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “640 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9846/10000 = 98.46 / 100. (That is, 98.46%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9360. /10000=93.6/100 (that is, 93.6%).

  That is, at the set value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest stay ratio in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random values due to the setting change in the low probability state and the high probability state in Toku-zu 1 also decreases the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". The number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, and for the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal". It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9846 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “2”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1.02% → 1.04%, high-probability state: 1.2% → 1.4%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the set value “1” to “3”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50 / 10,000 like the set values “1” to “3”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as the set values “1” to “3”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probabilities of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” to “3”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of the big hit random number counter C1 (small hit random value) which becomes the small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 106, and the value is “50”. To 155 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (ie, the “normal gaming state”) is 106/10000 = 1.06 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 06%).

  When the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 160, and the values are “500 to 659”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 160/10000 = 1.6. / 100 (that is, 1.6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.51 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Accordingly, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 9844, the values “156 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of lost random numbers (losing random number values) is the remaining 9340 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9844/10000 = 98.44 / 100. (That is, 98.44%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9340. /10000=93.4/100 (that is, 93.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random values due to the setting change in the low probability state and the high probability state in Toku-zu 1 also decreases the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". The number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, and for the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal". It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9844 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “3”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1.04% to 1.06%, high-probability state: 1.4% to 1.6%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of the values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the set value “1” to “4”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50 / 10,000 similarly to the set values “1” to “4”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as the set values "1" to "4". For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probabilities of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability changed state” or “probability changed state”) are set values “1” to “4”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 108, and the value is “50”. To 157 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 108/10000 = 1.08 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 08%).

  When the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 180, and the values are “500 to 679”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 180/10000 = 1.8. / 100 (that is, 1.8%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be easier to win by about 1.67 times than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "158 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is 9320 remaining values other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “680-9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9842/10000 = 98.42 / 100. (That is, 98.42%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9320. /10000=93.2/100 (that is, 93.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low-probability state and the high-probability state of Tokuju 1 also reduces the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9842 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “4”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1.06% → 1.08%, high-probability state: 1.6% → 1.8%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of the values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the set value “1” to “5”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000, similar to the set values “1” to “5”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as the set values “1” to “5”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability change state” or “probability change state”) are set values “1” to “5”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 110, and the value is “50”. To 159 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 110/10000 = 1.100 (that is, 1.1.0). 1%).

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers (small hit random number value) that is a small hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 200, and the value is “500 to 699”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 200/10000 = 2/100. (That is, 2%), so that the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.82 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9840, the values “160 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “700 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9840/10000 = 98.4 / 100. (That is, 98.4%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300. / 10000 = 93/100 (that is, 93%).

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low-probability state and the high-probability state of Tokuju 1 also reduces the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9840 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “5”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1.08% → 1.1%, high-probability state: 1.8% → 2%), and in any of the gaming states, the small hitting game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”. It can be said that it is a setting.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the fifteenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the special figure 2 big jackpot random number table 272a2 has a low probability state of big hit. The number of the big hit random number counter C1 (big hit random number value) is 50 like the first special symbol, and the value “0-49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. I have. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Also, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random value) in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 500 like the first special symbol. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times bigger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 are both 9400 pieces, The value “50 to 9449” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 9899” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. With 550, the values “9450-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 100 other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value “9900 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / 100. (I.e., 5.5%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 100. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 550 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a big jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 50 in the same manner as the set value “1”. The value “0-49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5, like the set value “1”. / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 500 like the set value “1”. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is the same as the set value “1”. 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “2”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9402, and the value is “50”. To 9451 "is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9402/10000 = 94.02 / 100 (that is, 94.02 / 100). 02%).

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9420, and the values are “500 to 9919”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9420/10000 = 94.2. / 100 (that is, 94.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.002 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 548, the values “9452 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is the remaining 80 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the values “9920 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 548/10000 = 5.48 / 100. (Ie, 5.48%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 80. /10000=0.8/100 (that is, 0.8%).

  In other words, at the setting value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low probability state and the high probability state of Tokuju 2 also reduces the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". The number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, and for the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal". It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “game state” (ie, 548 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “1”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94% → 94.02%, high-probability state: 94% → 94.2%). It can be said that there is.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the numbers of the jackpot random number counters C1 (small jackpot random value) which become the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 are the set values “1” and “2”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000, like the set values “1” and “2”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as the set values “1” and “2”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” and “2”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9404, and the value is “50”. ９４ 9453 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9404/10000 = 94.04 / 100 (that is, 94.04 / 100). 04%).

  When the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9440, and the values are “500 to 9939”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9440/10000 = 94.4. / 100 (that is, 94.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.004 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 546, the values “9454-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 60 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “9940 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 546/10000 = 5.46 / 100. (Ie, 5.46%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 60. /10000=0.6/100 (that is, 0.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small random numbers in the low-probability state and the high-probability state shown in Tokujin 2 also decreases the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 546 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same jackpot probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “2”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94.02% → 94.04%, high-probability state: 94.2% → 94.4%), and in any game state, a small hit game occurs more than the set value “2” It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1” to “3”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000, similar to the set values “1” to “3”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as the set values “1” to “3”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” to “3”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “4”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9406, and the value is “50”. ９４ 9455 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9406/10000 = 94.06 / 100 (that is, 94.06 / 100). 06%).

  When the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9460, and the values are “500 to 9959”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9460/10000 = 94.6. / 100 (that is, 94.6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.006 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 544, the values “9456-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) which are lost is the remaining 40 random numbers other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “9960 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 544/10000 = 5.44 / 100. (Ie, 5.44%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 40. /10000=0.4/100 (that is, 0.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 2 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay rate is the highest in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small random numbers in the low-probability state and the high-probability state shown in Tokujin 2 also decreases the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “game state” (ie, 544 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same jackpot probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “3”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94.04% → 94.06%, high-probability state: 94.4% → 94.6%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of the values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1” to “4”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50 / 10,000 similarly to the set values “1” to “4”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as the set values “1” to “4”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are set values “1” to “4”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9408, and the value "50" ９４9457 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9408/10000 = 94.08 / 100 (that is, 94.08 / 100). 08%).

  When the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9480, and the values are “500 to 9979”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9480/10000 = 94.8. / 100 (that is, 94.8%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.008 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value. For 542, the values “9458-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number values) is the remaining 20 other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 542/10000 = 5.42 / 100. (Ie, 5.42%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 20. /10000=0.2/100 (that is, 0.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low-probability state and the high-probability state of Tokuju 2 is also the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". It is configured to reduce and compensate for the decrease, and furthermore, the number of the big hit random numbers and the number of the small hit random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are “ It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal gaming state” (ie, 542 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same jackpot probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “4”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94.06% → 94.08%, high-probability state: 94.6% → 94.8%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1” to “5”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50 / 10,000 similarly to the set values “1” to “5”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as the set values “1” to “5”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” to “5”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9410, and the value is “50”. .. 9449 "is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9410/10000 = 94.1 / 100 (that is, 94.100). 1%).

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9,500, and the values are “500 to 9999”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9500/10000 = 95/100. (That is, 95%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.01 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 540, the values “9460 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is zero other than the jackpot random numbers and the small random numbers, and corresponds to the lost random numbers in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. Is not stored. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100. (I.e., 5.4%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super-probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%) is set so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low probability state and the high probability state of Tokuju 2 also reduces the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". The number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, and for the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal". It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 540 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same jackpot probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “6”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94.08% → 94.1%, high-probability state: 94.8% → 95%), and a small hitting game is more likely to occur in any of the gaming states than when the set value is “5”. It can be said that it is a setting.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, the jackpot random value associated with the change from the low probability state to the high probability state, and , While increasing the small random number value due to the setting change from the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state", the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is within the range. To be configured. Also, the number of jackpot random numbers is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state, but is not changed by the setting change. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only an increase in the small hit random value, thereby suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specification. can do.

  In addition, in the case of trying to obtain a game value equivalent to one jackpot game, if the small jackpot game does not win many small jackpot games over a longer time than the jackpot game, the small jackpot game has the same game value as the jackpot game. Can not get. Therefore, by providing a portion where a setting difference occurs in the small hit random value that generates a small hit game, it is possible to play a long time and make it difficult to determine the setting unless a lot of small hit games are won. it can. Therefore, by setting the setting discriminating element by the player to a game specification that is difficult unless the game is played for a long time, it is possible to make it difficult for the pachinko machine 10 to see the set value in a short game. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, the increase in the small random number value due to the setting change is compensated for from the random number value of the large random number counter C1 corresponding to the lost part that does not give the game value to the player. It is configured to

  Unlike the jackpot role and the small jackpot role, the losing role is a role that does not provide a game value, and is therefore not clearly (largely) displayed on a data lamp (not shown) provided for each pachinko machine 10. is there. Here, if the random number value of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game clearly (largely) recorded in the data lamp is changed for each setting, the player can confirm the appearance rate of the jackpot game by the data lamp. Therefore, the number of setting determination elements of the pachinko machine 10 increases. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, the increase in the small random number value due to the change in the setting is determined by a loss random corresponding to a loss part which is not clearly (broadly) displayed on the data lamp without giving a game value to the player in the large random number counter C1. By configuring so as to compensate from the numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance ratio of the small hit as the setting discriminating element by the player. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, and, for example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), the game is continued without the player observing the setting, and the pachinko machine 10 Operation can be promoted.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the jackpot random number value for generating the jackpot game in which the game value is obtained with the most time efficiency for each set value is changed (increased), and the change (increase) is determined as the game value. It was configured to compensate for the loss random value that was not given.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, the jackpot random value and the small jackpot random value that can provide a game value are changed (increased) for each set value, and the change (increase) is lost. It is configured to compensate from a random value. Further, when the increment of the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value for each set value is increased for each set value by one role (that is, one of the big hit game and the small hit game) (that is, The configuration is such that the rate of increase is lower than in the thirteenth and fifteenth embodiments). With this configuration, the difference in the setting of the appearance rate of one combination for each set value is reduced, and the game is performed only with the appearance rate of the single combination that gives the game value (that is, the big hit game or the small hit game). This makes it difficult for the user to find the setting, and promotes the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fifteenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  The details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol in the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 136 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot random number table stored in the ROM 272. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of 272a2 typically.

  The special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the sixteenth embodiment have a low probability of a special symbol whose gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "time shortened state" for each set value, respectively. For the low probability state used in the case of the state (the period that is not the “super probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”) and the height of the special symbol with a higher probability that the gaming state will be a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol It is divided into two types, that is, a "probable state" or a "high-probability state" used in the case of a "probability state".

  Then, for each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers included in the low-probability state and the high-probability state are changed, and the number of jackpot random numbers and Are set to be different. In addition, an increase in the number of big hit random numbers and small hit random numbers for each set value and each gaming state is compensated for from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the lost. In this way, by changing the numbers of the big hit random number and the small hit random number, the probability of the big hit and the small hit is changed for each set value and each gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 of the sixteenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 The number of values (big hit random numbers) of the counter C1 is 50, and the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special drawing 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500, and the values “0 to 499” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are both 100 and low. The value “50 to 149” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 599” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (losing random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9850, the values “150 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that result in a loss is 9400 other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value, and the values “600 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9850/10000 = 98.5 / 100. (That is, 98.5%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9400. / 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9850 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 51, and the value is “0 to 50”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 51/10000 = 0.51 / 100 (that is, 0.51). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 510, and the value “0 to 509” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 510/10000 = 5.1 / It is set to 100 (that is, 5.1%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 101, and the value is “51”. To 151 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small winning probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal gaming state”) is 101/10000 = 1.100 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 01%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 110, and the values “510 to 619” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 110/10000 = 1. / 100 (that is, 1.1%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.09 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. 9848, and the values “152 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is 9380 remaining values other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “620 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9848/10000 = 98.48 / 100. (That is, 98.48%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9380. /10000=93.8/100 (that is, 93.8%).

  That is, at the set value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease. So that the number of the big random numbers and the number of the small random numbers are increased within the range of the number of the lost random numbers of the set value “1” in the “normal gaming state” (that is, 9848 or less). It is configured.

  Therefore, the set value “2” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “1” (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.51%, high probability). Probability state: 5% → 5.1%) and small hit probability slightly improved (low probability state: 1% → 1.01%, high probability state: 1% → 1.1%). It can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in the gaming state than when the set value is “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big jackpot random number table 272a1 is 52, and the value is “0 to 51”. Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 520, and the values “0 to 5”
19 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 520/10000 = 5.2 / 100 (that is, 5.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is "3", the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 102, and the value is "52". To 153 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 102/10000 = 1.02 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 02%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 120, and the values “520 to 639” Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 120/10000 = 1. / 100 (that is, 1.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.18 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 9846, the values “154 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9360 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “640 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9846/10000 = 98.46 / 100. (That is, 98.46%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9360. /10000=93.6/100 (that is, 93.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest staying rate in the game is reduced. It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change Is configured so that the number of large random numbers and the number of small random numbers in increments within the range are within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 9846 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “3” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “2” (low probability state: 0.51% → 0.52%, high value). Probability state: 5.1% → 5.2%) and small hit probability slightly improved (low probability state: 1.01% → 1.02%, high probability state: 1.1% → 1. 2%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2” in any game state.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 53, and the value is “0 to 52”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state”) is 53/10000 = 0.53 / 100 (that is, 0.53 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 530, and the values “0 to 5”
29 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 530/10000 = 5.3 / 100 (that is, 5.3%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is "4", the number of the big hit random number counter C1 (small hit random value) which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 103, and the value is "53". To 155 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 103/10000 = 1.03 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 03%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 130, and the values “530 to 659” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 130/10000 = 1.3. / 100 (that is, 1.3%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.26 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Accordingly, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 9844, the values “156 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of lost random numbers (losing random number values) is the remaining 9340 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9844/10000 = 98.44 / 100. (That is, 98.44%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9340. /10000=93.4/100 (that is, 93.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change is configured. The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced to compensate for the decrease, and further, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the setting value change The number of big random numbers and the number of small random numbers for the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 9844 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “4” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “3” (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.53%, high value). Probability state: 5.2% → 5.3%) and small hit probability are slightly improved (low probability state: 1.02% → 1.03%, high probability state: 1.2% → 1. 3%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 54, and the value is "0 to 53". Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 540, and the values “0 to 5”
39 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100 (that is, 5.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is "5", the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 104, and the value is "54". To 157 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 104/10000 = 1.04 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 04%).

  On the other hand, if the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 140, and the values “540 to 679” Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 140/10000 = 1.4. / 100 (that is, 1.4%), and the special symbol high probability state is set to be about 1.35 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "158 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is 9320 remaining values other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “680-9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9842/10000 = 98.42 / 100. (That is, 98.42%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9320. /10000=93.2/100 (that is, 93.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of large random numbers and the number of small random numbers for the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9842 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “5” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly improved big hit probability compared to the set value “4” (low probability state: 0.53% → 0.54%, high probability). Probability state: 5.3% → 5.4%) and the small hitting probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 1.03% → 1.04%, high probability state: 1.3% → 1. 4%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “5”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 55, and the value is “0 to 54”. Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 55/10000 = 0.55 / 100 (that is, 0.55 %).

On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) which become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 550, and the values “0 to 5”
49 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / It is set to 100 (that is, 5.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 105, and the value is “55”. To 159 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal gaming state”) is 105/10000 = 1.05 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 05%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 150, and the values “550 to 699” Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 150/10000 = 1.5 / 100 (that is, 1.5%), so that the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 1.43 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9840, the values “160 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “700 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9840/10000 = 98.4 / 100. (That is, 98.4%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300. / 10000 = 93/100 (that is, 93%).

  That is, with the setting value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 1 is compensated from the decrease by reducing the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state”. I do. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change is configured. The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced to compensate for the decrease, and further, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the setting value change The number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers of the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 9840 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “6” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “5” (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.55%, high probability). Probability state: 5.4% → 5.5%) and the small hit probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 1.04% → 1.05%, high probability state: 1.4% → 1. 5%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “6”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the sixteenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 indicates The number of the big hit random number counter C1 (big hit random number value) is 50 like the first special symbol, and the value “0-49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. I have. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Also, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random value) in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 500 like the first special symbol. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times bigger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 are both 9400 pieces, The value “50 to 9449” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 9899” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. With 550, the values “9450-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 100 other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value “9900 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / 100. (I.e., 5.5%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 100. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 550 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  As described above, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (1% → 94%), and is smaller than the loss random value of the second special symbol. It is set to the number that can be very easily selected. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, the setting is such that it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit or a loss.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 51, and the values “0 to 50” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 51/10000 = 0.51 / 1, similar to the first special symbol. 100 (ie, 0.51%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) to be a big jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 510 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-509” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 510 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.1/100 (that is, 5.1%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9401, and the value “51” To 9451 "is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “normal gaming state”) is 9401/10000 = 94.01 / 100 (that is, 94.01 / 100). 01%).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9410, and the values “510 to 9919” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9410/10000 = 94.1. / 100 (that is, 94.1%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.001 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 548, the values “9452 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is the remaining 80 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the values “9920 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 548/10000 = 5.48 / 100. (Ie, 5.48%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 80. /10000=0.8/100 (that is, 0.8%).

  That is, at the setting value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of big random numbers and the number of small random numbers for the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 548 or less).

  Therefore, the setting value “2” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the setting value “1” (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.51%, high probability). Probability state: 5% → 5.1%) and small hit probability slightly improved (low probability state: 94% → 94.01%, high probability state: 94.1% → 94.1%), In any game state, it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur than the case where the set value is “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 52, and the values “0 to 51” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state”) is 52/10000 = 0.52 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.52%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random number value) of the jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 520 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-519” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 520 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.2/100 (that is, 5.2%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  When the set value is “3”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9402, and the value “52” ９４ 9453 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9402/10000 = 94.02 / 100 (that is, 94.02 / 100). 02%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9420, and the values “520 to 9939” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9420/10000 = 94.2. / 100 (that is, 94.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.002 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 546, the values “9454-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 60 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “9940 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 546/10000 = 5.46 / 100. (Ie, 5.46%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 60. /10000=0.6/100 (that is, 0.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers of the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 546 or less).

  Therefore, the setting value “3” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the setting value “2” (low probability state: 0.51% → 0.52%, high probability). Probability state: 5.1% → 5.2%) and the small hitting probability are slightly improved (low probability state: 94.01% → 94.02%, high probability state: 94.1% → 94. 2%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2” in any game state.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 53, and the values “0 to 52” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 53/10000 = 0.53 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (ie, 0.53%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random number value) in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 530, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-529” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 530 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.3/100 (that is, 5.3%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  When the set value is “4”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9403, and the value is “53”. ９４ 9455 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9403/10000 = 94.03 / 100 (that is, 94.03 / 100). 03%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9430, and the values “530 to 9959” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9430/10000 = 94.3. / 100 (that is, 94.3%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.003 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 544, the values “9456-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) which are lost is the remaining 40 random numbers other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “9960 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 544/10000 = 5.44 / 100. (Ie, 5.44%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 40. /10000=0.4/100 (that is, 0.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 2 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay rate is the highest in the game is reduced. It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of the big random numbers and the number of the small random numbers for the increase due to are set within the range of the number of the lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 544 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “4” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the set value “3” (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.53%, high value). Probability state: 5.2% → 5.3%) and the small hit probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 94.02% → 94.03%, high probability state: 94.2% → 94. 3%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 54, and the values “0 to 53” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 54/10000 = 0.54 /, like the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.54%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of the random numbers (small jackpot random number value) of the jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 540 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0 to 539” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 540 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  When the set value is “5”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9404, and the value is “54”. ９４9457 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9404/10000 = 94.04 / 100 (that is, 94.04 / 100). 04%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9440, and the values “540 to 9799” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9440/10000 = 94.4. / 100 (that is, 94.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.004 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value. For 542, the values “9458-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number values) is the remaining 20 other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 542/10000 = 5.42 / 100. (Ie, 5.42%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 20. /10000=0.2/100 (that is, 0.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change Is configured so that the number of big random numbers and the number of small random numbers in increments within the range are within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 542 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “5” in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “4” (low probability state: 0.53% → 0.54%, high value). Probability state: 5.3% → 5.4%) and small hit probability slightly improved (low probability state: 94.03% → 94.04%, high probability state: 94.3% → 94. 4%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “4”.

  Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 55, and the values “0 to 54” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 55/10000 = 0.55 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.55%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 550 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-549” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 550 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.5/100 (that is, 5.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9405, and the value “55” To 9449 "is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9405/10000 = 94.05 / 100 (that is, 94.05 / 100). 05%).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “6”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9450, and the values “550 to 9999” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9450/10000 = 94.5. / 100 (that is, 94.5%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.005 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 540, the values “9460 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number) is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 shows the number of lost random numbers. The corresponding value is not stored, that is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 540. /10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), and the second special symbol in the high-probability state (ie, “super-probability state” or “probability-state”). The loss probability of the special symbol is set to be 0/10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%), so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 2 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of big random numbers and the number of small random numbers for the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 540 or less).

  Therefore, the setting value “6” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the setting value “5” (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.55%, high value). Probability state: 5.4% → 5.5%) and the small hit probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 94.04% → 94.05%, high probability state: 94.4% → 94. 5%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5” in any game state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, the big hit random value and the small hit random value that can give a game value are changed (increased) for each set value, and the change (increase) is made. Is compensated from the loss random value. Further, when the increment of the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value for each set value is increased for each set value by one role (that is, one of the big hit game and the small hit game) (that is, The configuration is such that the rate of increase is lower than in the thirteenth and fifteenth embodiments). With this configuration, the difference in the setting of the appearance rate of one combination for each set value is reduced, and the game is performed only with the appearance rate of the single combination that gives the game value (that is, the big hit game or the small hit game). This makes it difficult for the user to find the setting, and promotes the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is configured to change (increase) the jackpot random value for generating the jackpot game, and to compensate for the change (increase) only from the lost random number value.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment, when increasing the set value to increase the jackpot random value corresponding to the jackpot game that is most advantageous to the player, first, the role with the lowest game value (that is, If the random number value corresponding to the lowest role becomes insufficient (decreased) as the set value is increased, the role having the next lower game value is compensated from the random number value (ie, the loss random number value) corresponding to the loss role. (That is, a small random number value corresponding to the small winning combination). With this configuration, the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change can be compensated from each random value, so that it is necessary to compensate from one random value (for example, only the lost random value). It is possible to eliminate restrictions at the time of designing game specifications and to increase the increase in the advantage due to the setting change as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in game specification design and suppress an increase in the number of development steps, while realizing game specifications with inflection (sharpness) due to the setting difference.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixteenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to sixteenth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  The details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 137 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot random number table stored in the ROM 272. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of 272a2 typically.

  The special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the seventeenth embodiment have a low probability of a special symbol whose gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "time shortened state" for each set value, respectively. For the low probability state used in the case of the state (the period that is not the “super probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”) and the height of the special symbol with a higher probability that the gaming state will be a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol It is divided into two types, one for the “probability state” and the “high-probability state” used for the “probability state”.

  In each of the set values in the predetermined special symbol (the second special symbol in the seventeenth embodiment), the number of the jackpot random numbers is reduced up to the predetermined set value (the set value “3” in the seventeenth embodiment). Only a setting difference is provided, and for a setting value larger than the predetermined setting value (in the seventeenth embodiment, a setting value “4” or more), a setting difference is provided for each of the number of large hit random numbers and the number of small random numbers. On the other hand, in each set value in the other special symbol (the first special symbol in the seventeenth embodiment), a setting difference occurs only in the number of large hit random values while the number of small hit random values is the same in all settings. Is configured as follows.

  Specifically, in the second special symbol, up to the predetermined set value, while increasing only the number of jackpot random values and decreasing only the number of lost random numbers with the increase, With a large set value, the number of small hit random numbers and the number of lost random numbers are decreased with the increase in the number of random hits. Accordingly, the second special symbol is different from the first special symbol in that the increment of the number of jackpot random numbers for each set value and each gaming state is determined by the increase of the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the loss up to a predetermined set value. It is configured to compensate from the number, and when the set value is larger than a predetermined set value at which the lost random number value does not exist, the compensation is made from the number of the small random number values corresponding to the small winning combination. In this way, by changing the number of the big hit random numbers and the number of the small hit random numbers for each setting, the probability of the big hit and the small hit is changed for each set value and each game state.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 of the seventeenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 The number of values (big hit random numbers) of the counter C1 is 50, and the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special drawing 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500, and the values “0 to 499” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are both 100 and low. The value “50 to 149” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 599” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (losing random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9850, the values “150 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that result in a loss is 9400 other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value, and the values “600 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9850/10000 = 98.5 / 100. (That is, 98.5%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9400. / 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9850 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 55, and the value is “0 to 54”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 55/10000 = 0.55 / 100 (that is, 0.55). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become the big jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 520, and the value “0 to 549” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / It is set to 100 (that is, 5.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is equal to the set value “1”. In the same manner as in the case, the value “55-154” in the case of the low probability state or the value “550-649” in the case of the high probability state is defined in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 (setting). Have been. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “2” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9845, the value “155 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that result in a loss is 9350 other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value “650 to 9999” is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9845/10000 = 98.45 / 100. (That is, 98.45%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9350. /10000=93.5/100 (that is, 93.5%).

  That is, at the set value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change in the set value is configured to compensate for the decrease. (That is, 9848 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “1”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.55%, high probability state: 5% → 5.5%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 60, and the value is “0 to 59”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state”) is 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 600, and the values “0 to 599” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 600/10000 = 6/100 ( That is, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Further, when the set value is “3”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are the set value “1” and As in the case of the set value “2”, the number is 100 each, and the value “60-159” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600-699” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table. 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “3” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 9840, the values “160 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “700 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9840/10000 = 98.4 / 100. (That is, 98.4%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300. / 10000 = 93/100 (that is, 93%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest staying rate in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9846 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “2”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low (Probability state: 0.55% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.5% → 6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 65, and the value “0 to 64” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 65/10000 = 0.65 / 100 (that is, 0.65). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) which are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 650, and the values “0 to 649” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 650/10000 = 6.5 / It is set to 100 (that is, 6.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Further, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are set values “1” to “1”. As in the case of “3”, the value is “100” in both cases, and the value “65 to 164” in the case of the low probability state or the value “650 to 749” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “4” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9835, the value “165 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9250 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value “750 to 9999” is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9835/10000 = 98.35 / 100. (That is, 98.35%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9250. /10000=92.5/100 (that is, 92.5%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9844 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “3”, the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.6% → 0.65%, high probability state: 6% → 6.5%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 70, and the value is “0 to 69”. Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 70/10000 = 0.7 / 100 (that is, 0.7). %).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “5”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 700, and the value “0 to 699” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 700/10000 = 7/100 ( That is, 7%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is from the set value “1” to As in the case of “4”, the number is 100 each, and the value “70 to 169” in the case of the low probability state or the value “700 to 799” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “5” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value “170 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 for 9830 pieces. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost is 9200 other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value “800 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9830/10000 = 98.3 / 100. (That is, 98.3%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9200. / 10000 = 92/100 (that is, 92%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9842 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “4”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.65% → 0.7%, high probability state: 6.5% → 7%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 75, and the value “0 to 74” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 75/10000 = 0.75 / 100 (that is, 0.75 %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 750, and the values “0 to 749” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 750/10000 = 7.5 / 100 (that is, 7.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is from the set value “1” to As in the case of “5”, the values are both 100, and the value “75 to 174” in the case of the low probability state or the value “750 to 849” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “6” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random number value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. The value “175 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of lost random numbers (losing random number values) is the remaining 9150 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “time shortening state”) is 9825/10000 = 98.25 / 100. (That is, 98.25%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9150. /10000=91.5/100 (that is, 91.5%).

  That is, at the setting value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (Ie, 9840 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “5”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.7% → 0.75%, high probability state: 7% → 7.5%), which can be said to be a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the seventeenth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 has The number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) is 50, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, and the value “0-49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. Have been. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random number value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 500 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500 as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 are both 9400 pieces. The value “50 to 9449” for the low probability state or the value “500 to 9899” for the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 550, the values “9450-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 100 other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value “9900 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / 100. (I.e., 5.5%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 100. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 550 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  As described above, the small hit probability of the second special symbol at the set value “1” is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (1% → 94%), and the loss in the second special symbol is also lost. The number is set to a value that is very easy to select even when compared with the random number value. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, the setting is such that it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit or a loss.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 55, and the values “0 to 54” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 55/10000 = 0.55 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.55%).

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 550 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-549” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 550 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.5/100 (that is, 5.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is set value “1”. In the same manner as in the case of (9), the value “55-9454” in the case of the low probability state or the value “550-9949” in the case of the high probability state is defined in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (setting). ) Has been. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “2” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 545 pieces, the value “9455-9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 50 random numbers other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the values “9950 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 545/10000 = 5.45 / 100. (I.e., 5.45%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super-probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 50. /10000=0.5/100 (that is, 0.5%).

  That is, at the setting value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 545 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (94%) as compared to the set value “1”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.55%, high probability state: 5% → 5.5%), which can be said to be a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , And 60 values thereof are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 60/10000 = 0.6 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.6%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 600, as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. The value “0-599” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 600 in the same manner as the first special symbol. / 10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the setting value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “2”, the number is 9,400, and the value “60 to 9449” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600 to 9999” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “3” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 540, the values “9460 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random numbers and the small random numbers, and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 includes the lost random numbers. The corresponding value is not stored. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100. (I.e., 5.4%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super-probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%) is set so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 540 or less).

  Therefore, although the setting value “3” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is equal to the setting value “2” (both at 94%), the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.55% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.5% → 6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 65, and the values “0 to 64” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 65/10000 = 0.65 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.65%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 650 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-649” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 650 like the first special symbol. /10000=6.5/100 (that is, 6.5%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9400, and the value “ 65-9644 "is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9400 / like the set values “1” to “3”. It is set so that 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9350, and the values “650 to 9999” Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. This is because, in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 at the setting value "4", in the high probability state of the special symbol, there is no value corresponding to the loss random number value, similarly to the setting value "3". Therefore, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased from the set value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change and the probability variation is not based on the number of lost random numbers but the number of small jackpot random values. It is configured to compensate from the number of hit random numbers. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9350/10000 = 93.5. / 100 (that is, 93.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be less likely to be a small hit than the low probability state (about 0.995 times).

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 535, the value “9465-9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random number value) which is lost is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value as in the case of the set value “3”. The value corresponding to the lost random number value is not stored in the random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 535/10000 = 5.35 / 100. (I.e., 5.35%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%) is set so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 2 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay rate is the highest in the game is reduced. In addition to the compensation from the decrease, the number that cannot be compensated by the lost random number (that is, 50) is reduced by reducing the number of small hit random numbers, and the compensation is also made from the decrease.

  Therefore, the setting value “4” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the setting value “3” (low probability state: 0.6% → 0.65%, high probability). Probability state: 6% → 6.5%), but the small hit probability decreases in the high probability state of the special symbol (high probability state: 94% → 93.5%. The low probability state is the same as the set value “3”. It can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value "3", but the small jackpot game is less likely to occur in the high probability state.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (small jackpot random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 70, and the values “0 to 69” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 70/10000 = 0.7 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.7%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) of the jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 700 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-699” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 700 as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 7/100 (that is, 7%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9400, and the value “ 70 to 9469 "are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9400 / like the set values “1” to “4”. It is set so that 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9300, and the values are “700 to 9999”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. This is because, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 at the setting value “5”, in the high probability state of the special symbol “4”, there is no value corresponding to the loss random number value in the special pattern high probability state. . Therefore, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased from the set value “4”, the increase in the jackpot random value due to the setting change and the probability variation is not determined from the number of small random numbers but the number of small random numbers. It is configured to compensate from numerical values. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300/10000 = 93/100. (That is, 93%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be less likely to be a small hit than the low probability state (about 0.989 times).

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value. For 530, the values “9470-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random numbers and the small random numbers, like the set values “3” and “4”. The value corresponding to the loss random number value is not defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 530/10000 = 5.3 / 100. (I.e., 5.3%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super-probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%) is set so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, In addition to compensating for the decrease, the number that cannot be compensated by the lost random number (ie, 50) is reduced by reducing the number of small hit random numbers, and compensated for from the decrease.

  Therefore, the set value “5” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the set value “4” (low probability state: 0.65% → 0.7%, high probability). Probability state: 6.5% → 7%, but small hit probability decreases in high probability state of special symbol (high probability state: 93.5% → 93%. Low probability state is the same as set value “4”). It can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”, but the small jackpot game is less likely to occur in the high probability state.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 75, and the values “0 to 74” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 75/10000 = 0.75 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.75%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 750 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0 to 749” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 750 like the first special symbol. /10000=7.5/100 (that is, 7.5%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9400, and the value “ 75 to 9474 are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9400 / like the set values “1” to “5”. It is set so that 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random hit values (small hit random value) in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9250, and the value is “750 to 9999”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. This is because, in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 at the setting value "6", in the high probability state of the special symbol "5", there is no value corresponding to the loss random number value in the special pattern high probability state. . Therefore, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased from the set value “5”, the increment of the jackpot random value due to the setting change and the probability variation is determined not from the number of lost random numbers but the number of small jackpot random values. It is configured to compensate from numerical values. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9250/10000 = 92.5. / 100 (that is, 92.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be less likely to be a small hit than the low probability state (about 0.984 times).

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 525, the values “9475-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the same as the set values “3” to “5”, with the remaining 0 other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, The value corresponding to the loss random number value is not defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 525/10000 = 5.25 / 100. (That is, 5.25%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%) is set so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 2 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. In addition to the compensation from the decrease, the number that cannot be compensated by the lost random number (that is, 50) is reduced by reducing the number of small hit random numbers, and the compensation is also made from the decrease.

  Therefore, the setting value “6” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the setting value “5” (low probability state: 0.7% → 0.75%, high probability). Probability state: 7% → 7.5%, but small hit probability decreases in high probability state of special symbol (high probability state: 93% → 92.5%. Low probability state is the same as set value “5”). It can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”, but the small jackpot game is less likely to occur in the high probability state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment, when the set value is increased to increase the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game most advantageous to the player, first, the game value is If the number of random numbers corresponding to the lower hand (ie, the loss hand) is compensated from the number of random numbers (ie, the loss random number) corresponding to the lower hand, and the set value is increased, the number of the random numbers corresponding to the lowest hand becomes insufficient (if the number decreases). ), It is configured to compensate from the number of random numbers (that is, small random number values) corresponding to the next lowest winning combination (that is, small winning combination). With this configuration, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change can be compensated from the number of each random number, so that the number of random numbers of one (for example, only the lost random number only) can be reduced. It is possible to eliminate restrictions on design of the game specification, such as the need to compensate, and to increase the advantage due to the setting change as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in game specification design and suppress an increase in the number of development steps, while realizing game specifications with inflection (sharpness) due to the setting difference.

  Further, in the high probability state of the second special symbol, when the set value is “3” to “6”, it is configured such that the loss combination does not appear. In other words, in the second lottery game in the second special symbol, the loss combination does not appear, so that it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has a high setting. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to set and suggest only in a specific game state (ie, a high probability state) in a specific special symbol (ie, a second special symbol), and how the lottery game by the special symbol is performed in the above-mentioned gaming state. As a result, a game property of whether or not a setting suggestion opportunity is obtained is created, a variety of games can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment is added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment, and the like. The embodiment may be modified to be configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are merely examples, and other numerical values can of course be adopted.

<Modification 1>
In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300, but instead of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or In addition to the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, information indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 10, such as a base value, the number of balls sucked in with respect to 100 balls hit (= 100−base value), and a jackpot. The average number of outs, etc., until it becomes, may be calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiments, the case where the first reading memory 263 is provided with a counter to count the number of winning balls for each winning opening, but the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 uses the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 for each winning opening. Alternatively, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted. Then, in the first embodiment, when the timing of calculating the accessory ratio comes, based on the number of balls paid out by winning, for each winning opening, counted by the first reading memory 263. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated and accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the second embodiment, when the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached, and when the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached, a prize for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263 is obtained. May be accumulated in the second reading memory 264 and recorded. In this case, when the number of winning balls for 0.5 seconds for each winning opening is stored in the buffer 262, the CPU 261 corresponds to the number of winning balls for each winning opening. By multiplying the number of prize balls of the winning opening to calculate the number of balls paid out by the prize in the 0.5 second, the calculated number of paid out balls is stored in the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding to the winning opening counter. When the MPU 201 detects that there is a winning in one winning opening, the MPU 201 writes information indicating the winning opening in which the winning has occurred in the buffer 262, and the CPU 261 causes the buffer 262 to receive the winning. When the information indicating the mouth is written, the number of balls paid out by winning the winning opening is added to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, so that for each winning opening, The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted. Further, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls paid out by winning at the winning opening every 0.5 seconds (or at every predetermined time) and stores the number in the buffer 262. When the writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the CPU 261 determines, for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out in the winning opening for 0.5 seconds by the winning in the buffer 262 for the first winning opening. By adding to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening. When the MPU 201 detects that there is a winning in one winning opening, the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out by the winning in an area corresponding to the winning opening in the buffer 262 in the buffer 262. In the CPU 261, when writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the paid-out data written to the buffer 262 is stored in the counter of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening in which the number of paid-out balls is stored. By adding the number of balls, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning port. As described above, even if the number of balls paid out by winning is counted for each winning opening by the counter provided in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by each winning opening is paid out. Since the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated from the number of the performed balls, it is possible to detect a fraud by analyzing the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. When the number of balls paid out by winning is stored in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201, the prize ball number table 202e may not be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Can be calculated from the number of balls paid out by winning in the winning opening for each winning opening stored in. Further, in order to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, the number of balls paid out by winning, counted for each winning opening, may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. . In this case, even if the contents of the award ball count table 202e are not transmitted to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can calculate the gate ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the accessory ratio data 264a and the continuous accessory ratio data 264b are recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. The recording may be performed in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300, or only the continuous accessory ratio data 264b may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. It may be. The inspection device 300 can analyze the improper behavior by analyzing the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 4>
In the above embodiments, the case where the first reading memory 263 is configured by a volatile memory has been described. However, the first reading memory 263 is configured by a nonvolatile memory (for example, a flash memory, an FeRAM, an MRAM, a ReRAM, and the like). May be done. Further, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the first reading memory 263 even when the power is turned off. In this case, the initialization of the first reading memory 263 may not be executed in the process of S711 (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 when the power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207. As a result, the respective counters 263a to 263f and the respective data 263g to 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 can be maintained even while the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the latest second reading memory 264 can be used before the power is cut off without executing the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storing process. In the second reading, the ratio of the role and the like is calculated without losing the prize to each winning opening during the time when it is determined that the power is cut off from the timing (trigger) when the recording is performed. It can be recorded in the memory 264. Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may be unnecessary.

<Modification 5>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process is executed, and the case where the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is output has been described. In addition, information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be output. Since the information stored in the first reading memory 263 has not yet reached the timing (trigger) for recording in the second reading memory 264, the information on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio recorded in the second reading memory 264 has not been reached. The information is not used for calculation, or is not recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection device 300, the analysis can be performed by the inspection device 300 using the latest information.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. However, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, so that the information is a short-term information, but the total number of the balls that have won each winning opening, that is, the ratio of the bonus and the continuous bonus. Raw information before calculating the ratio can be grasped by the inspection device 300. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

  Note that, as a modification of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. Accordingly, the inspection device 300 calculates the latest accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the total number of winning balls for each winning opening transmitted from the first reading memory 263 using the award ball number table 202e. And analyze it. Note that the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio are determined to be awarded to each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are not always accurate values, but can be used for the analysis of the inspection device 300 as reference values. .

  Further, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and calculates the calculated accessory. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. Accordingly, the inspection device 300 can easily analyze the misconduct using the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio output from the accessory ratio management chip 207. In this case, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be output to the inspection device 300 together. This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis using the information on the latest winning. Also in this case, the prize ball number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection apparatus 300 to perform a deeper analysis with reference to the award ball count table 202e.

<Modification 6>
In each of the above embodiments, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the volatile first reading memory 263 and the nonvolatile second reading memory 264 are provided, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. Until the indicated timing (trigger) is reached, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading memory 263 while being accumulated. Based on the information stored in 263, the main character ratio and the continuous main character ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 until the timing. The case where various types of information are recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, a nonvolatile memory provided with at least a first reading area serving as the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area serving as the second reading memory 264. The information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading area until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. And, when the timing is reached, based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area, calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio and record them in the second reading area, or Various kinds of information accumulated and stored in the first reading area may be recorded in the second reading area until the timing comes. As a result, the number of components of the memory can be reduced, so that an increase in the cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Variation 7>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning each winning opening in 0.5 seconds for each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path. The number of balls counted for each winning opening, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and information on the playing state at that time are stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. Each time the setting is made in the buffer 262, the number of balls winning each winning opening set in the buffer 262, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and the game state are set. The case where the information is accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 has been described. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, the winning of the first starting port 64a was detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of the various switches. In this case, the first buffer 262a is turned on. When the winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, the first buffer 262b is turned on and the first normal winning port switch 208c is turned on. When the winning of the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected by the output, the first buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d. The second buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned off. When a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding big hit buffer 262g, open buffer 262h, After turning on the buffer 262i during the error, an interrupt signal may be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, in the setting information receiving process executed in response to the interrupt signal, if the first buffer 262a is turned on, the first counter 263a is counted up by one, and the first buffer 262b is turned on. When it is on, the first counter 263b is counted up by one, when the first buffer 262c is turned on, the first counter 263c is counted up by one, and when the second buffer 262d is turned on, the second counter 263b is turned on. The counter 263d is counted up by one. When the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, the special winning opening counter 263e is counted up by one. When the out buffer 262f is turned on, the out counter 263f is counted up by one. And if the jackpot buffer 262g is on, If the opening buffer 262h is ON, the information on the opening of the door is added to the opening data 263h together with the current time in the opening buffer 262h. When the error buffer 262i is on, the error information is added to the error data 263i together with the time at that time and stored, and the time when the setting information receiving process is being executed is in the midnight time zone. In this case, the out-of-hours information may be added to the out-of-hours data 263j together with the time at that time and stored. This eliminates the need for the MPU 201 to count the number of balls winning each winning opening in 0.5 seconds or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, so that the processing load on the MPU 201 increases. Can be suppressed. Therefore, much of the processing capacity of the MPU 201 can be assigned to the main control of the game that should be performed by the MPU 201.

<Modification 8>
Also, in this case, the first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the big winning port switch 208e, and the out switch 208f are controlled by the role ratio management. The information may be directly input to the chip 207. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the big winning port switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. Of the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the presence or absence of a winning in the large winning opening 65a, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path. If there is a prize, the counters 263a to 264e of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the start port where the prize is won are counted up by one, and there is no ball guided to the ball discharge path. In such a case, the out counter 263f may be configured to count up by one. Thus, when a prize is won in the winning opening or when a ball is guided to the ball discharge path, the situation can be immediately reflected on the accessory ratio management chip 207. In addition, the door opening switch 208g is directly input to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and based on the output of the door opening switch 208g, the presence or absence of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is determined by the accessory ratio management chip 207. When the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the opening / closing information is added to the opening data 263h together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time, and stored. The management chip 207 may be configured. Thus, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the situation can be immediately reflected on the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiments, the number-of-balls winning in each winning opening until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is determined by the first. The number is counted by each of the counters 263a to 264e of the reading memory 263, and the number of balls ejected to the ball ejection path until the timing (trigger) is reached is counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263. As described above, the first reading memory 263 stores the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, and the special winning opening buffer 262e set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. , The value of the out buffer 262f (ie, the number of balls for each winning port winning in 0.5 seconds, and 0.5 seconds The number of balls which are guided to the ball discharge passage) in between, together with the time at that indicated by RTC266, may be stored sequentially. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, the main character ratio and the continuous main character ratio are calculated from the respective values stored in the first reading memory 263. It is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of the balls that have won the winning opening until the timing is calculated for each winning, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharge path until the timing. The total number of balls may be calculated and these may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether there is a possibility that an improper act has been performed based on the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. can do. Then, in this case, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, each prize port that has won a prize in 0.5 seconds. The number of balls for each, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with the number of the balls (that is, the number of the balls is the first reading memory (Time stored in H.263) may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thus, for each extremely short time of 0.5 seconds, information on how many balls have won at which winning opening and at what time, and for each extremely short time of 0.5 seconds, how many balls have The inspection apparatus 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether the ball has been guided to the ball discharge path (ie, whether the ball has been fired into the game area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

  Note that, as a modification of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thereby, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the number of winning balls for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263, Using the prize ball number table 202e, the latest accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed. Note that the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio are determined to be awarded to each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are not always accurate values, but can be used for the analysis of the inspection device 300 as reference values. .

<Variation 10>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 stores, in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls for each winning opening in 0.5 seconds, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, and When the time associated with the number of balls (that is, the time when the number of balls is stored in the first reading memory 263) is stored, the time is indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. When the timing (trigger) is reached, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 stores the number of balls for each winning port that has won a prize in 0.5 seconds and the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds recorded in the second reading memory 264. The number of guided balls and the time associated with the number of the balls are transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is transmitted to the inspection device 300. It may be. In this way, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the number of winning balls for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds, and then calculates the winning ball count table. By calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in each predetermined section using 202e, it is possible to analyze the possibility of an improper act from the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role in which the misconduct is suspected, the inspection device 300 sets the number of balls for each winning port in 0.5 seconds, and 0. Detailed information related to the game, such as the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 5 seconds and the time associated with the number of the balls, is input. The cause of the change of the ratio of the articles and the ratio of the continuous characters can be searched in detail.

<Modification 11>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. Each value of 262f (that is, the number of balls for each winning opening winning in 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds) is indicated by RTC 266. The time may be recorded directly in the second reading memory 264 sequentially in synchronization with the time at which the reading is performed. In this case, the information on the game state set in the big hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds also matches the game state of the second reading memory 264 with the time indicated by the RTC 266. If the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the midnight time zone, the out-of-hours information is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and the gaming state data 264d is recorded. May be recorded. This eliminates the need for the first reading memory 263, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 12>
Also, in the MPU 201, when a winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the output of various switches. Turns on the first buffer 262a, turns on the first buffer 262b when the winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, and turns on the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c. When a winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected, the first buffer 262c is turned on, and when a winning in the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the second ordinary 262 is turned on. The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned on. When the out buffer 262f is turned on when a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the MPU 201 sets the value in the first reading memory 263 every 2 milliseconds. Values of the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262f (that is, information indicating whether or not each winning opening has a winning for 2 milliseconds). , And information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds) may be sequentially stored together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, based on the respective values stored in the first reading memory 263, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls which have won the winning opening until the timing is calculated for each winning, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharge path until the timing. The total number of balls performed may be calculated, and these may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether there is a possibility that an improper act has been performed based on the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds in each prize port is determined. And the information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263). The time may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the time. As a result, information on which winning port has been won at which time at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and at which time the ball has been guided to the ball discharge path at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds (that is, a game) The inspection apparatus 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether the object has been fired to the area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

<Modification 13>
Also, in the MPU 201, when a winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the output of various switches. Turns on the first buffer 262a, turns on the first buffer 262b when the winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, and turns on the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c. When a winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected, the first buffer 262c is turned on, and when a winning in the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the second ordinary 262 is turned on. The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned on. When the out switch 262f is turned on when a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the first reading memory 263 stores each buffer 262a corresponding to each winning opening. When the out buffer 262f is turned on, there is a ball that has been guided to the ball discharge path when there is a buffer turned on among the buffers 262e to 262e. May be sequentially stored together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202 f set in the trigger setting area 265 b comes, based on each information stored in the first reading memory 263, the duty ratio and the continuous The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls which have won the winning opening until the timing is calculated for each winning, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharge path until the timing. The total number of balls performed may be calculated, and these may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether there is a possibility that an improper act has been performed based on the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds in each prize port is determined. And the information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263). The time may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the time. As a result, the inspection device 300 can grasp information such as which prize port has been won at which time, and detailed information such as which time the ball has been guided to the ball discharge path (that is, whether the ball has been launched into the game area). Become like Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

  Note that, as a modification of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thus, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the information indicating the presence or absence of a winning ball in each winning opening every 2 milliseconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263. With the use of the prize ball number table 202e, the latest accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed. Note that the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio are determined to be awarded to each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are not always accurate values, but can be used for the analysis of the inspection device 300 as reference values. .

<Modification 14>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 stores information indicating presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, information indicating presence or absence of a ball guided to a ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the information. When storing the attached time (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263), the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b and When this happens, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 has information recorded in the second reading memory 264 indicating the presence or absence of a prize for two milliseconds at each winning opening, and the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for two milliseconds. May be transmitted together with the time associated with the information, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thus, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence or absence of a winning ball in each winning opening every 2 milliseconds, and then calculates the winning balls. By calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in each predetermined section using the number table 202e, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraud from the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of the character and the continuous character in which the misconduct is suspected, the inspection device 300 includes information indicating the presence or absence of a prize in each prize port for two milliseconds, and a ball for two milliseconds. Information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the discharge path and detailed information related to the game, such as the time associated with the information, have been input. The cause of the change in the product ratio can be investigated in detail.

<Modification 15>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 includes information indicating a winning opening having a prize, information indicating that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and time associated with the information (that is, When the information is stored in the first reading memory 263), the first time (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is stored. The information stored in the reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 stores information indicating the winning opening where the prize is recorded, information indicating that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and information indicating the winning prize hole recorded in the second reading memory 264. The time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thus, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the winning opening where the winning has been achieved, and then uses the winning ball count table 202e to calculate the total number of winning balls for each winning opening. By calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the predetermined section, it is possible to analyze the possibility of an injustice from the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role in which the misconduct is suspected, the inspection device 300 includes information indicating the winning opening where the winning has occurred and the ball guided to the ball discharge path. And detailed information related to the game, such as the time associated with the information, are input. You can explore in detail.

<Modification 16>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the winning port buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262f set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. (Ie, information indicating the presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening and information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds) at the time indicated by the RTC 266. In addition, the information may be directly recorded in the second reading memory 264 sequentially. In this case, the information on the game state set in the big hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 2 milliseconds also matches the game state data in the second reading memory 264 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. In the case where the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the midnight time zone, the out-of-hour information is added to the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. It may be recorded. This eliminates the need for the first reading memory 263, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 17>
In each of the above embodiments, the area where information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 (for example, in the first embodiment, the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d) In the second embodiment, the checksum value in the area in which the number of fired balls data 264c, the game state data 264d, and the winning counter data 264e are recorded is calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264. When transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection apparatus 300, the checksum value may be transmitted together. When the inspection device 300 receives the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, it calculates a checksum value from the received information and compares it with the checksum value transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207. If they match, the received information may be determined to be correct and analysis may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the analysis performed by the inspection device 300 based on the erroneous information.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and the CPU 261 executes an inspection result output process based on the interrupt signal, and performs a management The case where the information recorded in the chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on a command transmitted from the inspection device 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. Alternatively, the information recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection device 300. Thus, if the inspection device 300 transmits a command to the accessory ratio management chip 207 after being able to receive information transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207, the inspection device 300 Information transmitted from the physical ratio management chip 207 can be reliably received.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above embodiments, when the CPU 261 is executing the accessory ratio calculation process (the first embodiment) or the winning information storing process (the second embodiment), the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and divided. When the interrupt signal is generated, the execution of the inspection result output process corresponding to the interrupt signal is suspended while the accessory ratio calculating process or the prize information storing process is executed, and the accessory ratio calculating process or the prize information is performed. After the storage processing is completed, the execution of the inspection result output may be started. As a result, during the execution of the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process, the inspection result output process is executed, and strange information that is being written to the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300. It can be suppressed that such a situation occurs.

<Modification 20>
In the above embodiments, the case where the winning information and the like are transmitted in one direction from the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the main control device 110 has been described, but the MPU 201 outputs the information output from the accessory ratio management chip 207. And perform some processing based on the information. For example, when the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 stops, or when an error occurs in the processing of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the information is transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201. Then, based on the information, the MPU 201 informs the user by the display on the first symbol display device 37, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, the output by voice, the display on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. It may be controlled. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall can know the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and can take some measures. In addition, the MPU 201, based on information that indicates that the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 has stopped, or information that indicates that an error has occurred in processing in the accessory ratio management chip 207, The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be reset. Thereby, the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be automatically eliminated, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be operated again.

<Modification 21>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, the pachinko machine The MPU 201 may control the device 10 to perform the first predetermined notification. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201, and the continuous accessory ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio. The MPU 201 may control the pachinko machine 10 to perform the second predetermined notification. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is appropriately calculated from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, and the calculated ratio is transmitted to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 may perform the above-described comparison and notification based on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. As the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or a predetermined number may be displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. In addition, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, a command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 so as to turn on or blink a predetermined lamp in a predetermined method or to output a predetermined sound. Alternatively, a command may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 so that a predetermined symbol or character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display control device is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command. A command may be further transmitted to 114. In addition, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the hall computer 600 provided in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed is provided with a first predetermined notification via a relay board (not shown). May be transmitted, or information indicating that the continuous accessory ratio is higher than a second predetermined ratio may be transmitted. By these notifications, the pachinko machine 10 can directly inform the person in charge of the hall of an abnormality in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. Further, by performing such notification, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

<Variation 22>
In the above embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 determines whether the calculated accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or the second predetermined ratio. The determination result may be output to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may be controlled to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the determination result received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 itself may execute a control for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the determination result. For example, LEDs for performing these notifications are connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the accessory ratio management chip 207 performs the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, the LEDs are drive-controlled. May be. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first symbol display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color or to display a predetermined number on the 7-segment display 37b. Further, the command for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification is directly transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. Based on the above, control may be performed such that a predetermined lamp is turned on or blinked, a predetermined sound is output, or a predetermined display is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, the information indicating that the accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, or the continuous accessory ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio, to the hall computer 600 directly from the accessory ratio management chip 207. You may make it transmit the information which shows that it is high. This also allows the pachinko machine 10 to directly inform the hall-related personnel of an abnormality in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. Further, by performing such notification, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

<Modification 23>
In the second embodiment, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the prize balls set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a are also set. The case where the information of the number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, the accessory ratio management chip 207 sends the prize ball number table 202e to the MPU 201 in response to the output of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a or based on a control signal from the inspection device 300. May be transmitted, and the bonus ratio management chip 207 may transmit the prize ball number table 202 e transmitted by the MPU 201 to the inspection device 300 in response to the request. Further, the inspection device 300 outputs a signal requesting the transmission of the award ball count table 202 e directly to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 receives the request signal and directly transmits the award ball count table 202 e to the inspection device 300. You may make it. Further, after the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be turned on. You may make it. Thus, the accessory ratio management chip 207 can eliminate the award ball number data setting area 265a, and can reduce the number of registers.

<Modification 24>
Further, main controller 110 may not transmit prize ball number table 202e to inspection device 300, and the setting of the number of prize balls for inspection device 300 may be performed manually. This eliminates the need for the main control device 110 to perform control for transmitting the prize ball count table 202e, so that it is possible to suppress the program of the MPU 201 and the program of the accessory ratio management chip 207 from becoming complicated.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment, the case where the award ball number table 202e is not transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. However, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the award ball number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Good. Thus, the inspection device 300 can analyze whether there is a possibility of an improper act due to a change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio while referring to the award ball count table 202e.

<Modification 26>
In each of the above embodiments, an output register (buffer) for temporarily storing information transmitted from the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 may be provided between the second reading memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a. Good. Thus, even when the reading speed of the information read from the second reading memory 264 is different from the transmission speed for transmitting the information to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the second reading memory 264 can transmit the information via the output register. The information can be easily transmitted from the two reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 27>
In each of the above-described embodiments, a case is described in which, when it is detected that the power is turned off, information relating to the accessory ratio and the like is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. explained. On the other hand, by configuring the first reading memory 263 as a non-volatile memory or supplying a backup voltage to the first reading memory 263, the first reading memory 263 is saved even when the power is turned off. It may be configured so that when power is supplied, information about the accessory ratio and the like is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. In this way, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio without omission for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off after being recorded in the second reading memory 264. . In addition, since recording to the second reading memory 264 is performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the power is completely cut off during recording to the second reading memory 264.

<Modification 28>
In each of the above embodiments, when it is detected that the power is cut off, the information on the accessory ratio and the like is automatically stored under the control of the CPU 261 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. The case of recording in the reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, “power-off” or “ "Power supply" may be defined. Then, when the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is “power off”, when it is detected that the power is turned off, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. , Information on the ratio of the accessory, etc. is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and when the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power supply", the first reading is performed when the power is supplied. Based on the information stored in the memory 263, information about the accessory ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, according to the setting of the trigger information data 202 f in the MPU 201, the power is cut off from recording the information about the accessory ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. Or when power is supplied. If “power supply” can be defined as the trigger information data 202f, the first reading memory 263 may be configured as a non-volatile memory, or the first reading memory 263 may be supplied with a backup voltage to supply the first reading memory 263 with a backup voltage. The reading memory 263 may be configured to be able to save the data even when the power is turned off.

<Modification 29>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the trigger information data 202f uses the “number of shots” as a timing (trigger) for recording information about the accessory ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. , "Time" and "game time" have been described. On the other hand, the “power supply time” may be defined in the trigger information data 202f. When the information indicating the “power supply time” is defined in the trigger information data 202f, the information indicating the “predetermined time” which is the timing for recording the information about the accessory ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264 is also defined. You may. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating “power supply time” and information indicating 4 hours as the “predetermined time”, the accessory ratio management chip 207 stores the trigger setting area 265b in the trigger setting area 265b. At the stage when the trigger information data 202f is set, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is obtained, and the obtained time is stored in the memory as “power supply time measurement start time”. It is determined whether four hours have elapsed since the power was supplied from the difference from the “power supply time measurement start time”, and when four hours have elapsed, the accessory ratio management chip 207 stores the information in the first reading memory 263. Based on the information thus obtained, information relating to the accessory ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the time at which the recording was performed is acquired from the RTC 266, and the time is stored in the memory as a new “power supply time measurement start time”. Thereafter, the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the “power supply time measurement From the difference from the “start time”, it may be determined whether four hours have elapsed. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio by the power supply time, even if the pachinko machine 10 does not play a game much, the power supply time has passed for a predetermined time, so that the role can be reliably achieved. It is possible to calculate the material ratio and the continuous character ratio. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can be surely analyzed for the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the surely calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 30>
In the second embodiment, information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening at each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f. Is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the prize ball number table 202e. On the other hand, when the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening at each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, the information based on each timing is used. Then, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio at each timing may be calculated, and information indicating the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together. Alternatively, when transmission to the inspection device 300 is performed, instead of the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening stored in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous winning combination are determined based on the information. The object ratio may be calculated, and the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thus, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Further, when calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated based on the prize ball number table set incorrectly or incorrectly. However, if the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the number of award balls in the award ball number data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 31>
Further, without being limited to the second embodiment, information indicating the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is not stored in the second reading memory 264, and information necessary for calculating at least one of these is stored in the second reading memory 264. When stored in the second reading memory 264, the CPU 261 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information stored in the second reading memory 264 when transmitting to the inspection device 300. The calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with or instead of the information stored in the second reading memory 264. Thus, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Further, when calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated based on the prize ball number table set incorrectly or incorrectly. However, if the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the number of award balls in the award ball number data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Also, if the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, the inspection device 300 allows the inspection device 300 to output the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. When it is determined that there is a suspicious point, the cause can be searched for based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the inspection device 300, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio output from the accessory ratio management chip 207 are calculated. By judging whether or not they match, it is possible to judge whether any wrongdoing has been performed.

<Modification 32>
In each of the above embodiments, the out switch 208f for detecting the ball guided to the ball discharge path is provided, and the number of times the ball is detected by the out switch 208f is counted, whereby the number of balls fired to the game area is counted. Has been described, but various methods may be used as a method of counting the number of balls fired into the game area. For example, an out port switch for detecting a ball passing through the out port 66 is provided, and the number of balls passing through the out port 66 detected by the out port switch and the first start detected by the first start port switch 208a. The number of balls passing through the mouth 64a, the number of balls passing through the second starting port 64b detected by the second starting port switch 208b, and the first normal winning port 63a detected by the first normal winning port switch 208c. The number of balls passing through the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the number of balls passing through the second normal winning opening 63b detected by the second normal winning opening switch 208d, and the number of balls passing through the large winning opening 65a detected by the large winning opening switch 208e. The number of balls fired into the game area may be calculated by summing the numbers of the balls. Also, a supply ball detection switch for detecting a ball supplied to the ball firing unit 112a, and a foul ball for detecting a ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a and discharged from the ball guide passage as a foul ball without reaching the game area. A ball fired into the game area is provided by a counter that is provided with a detection switch and counts up by one each time a ball is detected by the supply ball detection switch and counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. May be counted. In addition, instead of the supply ball detection switch, a firing ball detection switch for detecting a ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a is provided, and each time a ball is detected by the firing ball detection switch, the count is incremented by one, and a foul ball detection is performed. The number of balls fired into the game area may be counted by a counter that counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the switch. Further, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch detects a ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area, and detects a game ball. By providing a counter that counts up by one each time a ball is detected by the switch, the number of balls fired into the game area may be counted.

<Modification 33>
In each of the above embodiments, the CPU 261 is provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on software executed by the CPU 261. The case of transmitting to 300 has been described. On the other hand, some or all of the functions of the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be configured by wired logic. With the configuration using wired logic, it is possible to manage information relating to the accessory ratio at high speed.

<Modification 34>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, the information on the accessory ratio is recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207, and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory is connected to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 records information on the accessory ratio in the non-volatile memory, and transmits the information recorded in the non-volatile memory by the MPU 201 to the inspection device 300. Control may be performed. As a result, the MPU 201 uses the information on the winning of the ball in each winning opening detected by the MPU 201 and the information on the ball guided to the ball discharging path by itself without transferring the information to another chip, and obtains the information on the accessory ratio by itself. Since it can be managed, it is less susceptible to the influence of noise, and it is possible to more accurately manage information on the accessory ratio.

<Modification 35>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main control device 110 so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the main control device 110 are connected. In this case, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in the same substrate box 100 as the main control device 110, or may be stored in a substrate box different from the substrate box 100 in which the main control device 110 is stored. Good. When the accessory ratio management chip 207 is stored in a board box different from the main control device 110, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in a board box dedicated to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or other control may be performed. The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in any one of the substrate boxes 101 to 104 in which devices and the like are stored.

<Modification 36>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the payout control device 111. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on a signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main controller 110 instructs the payout controller 111 about winning information for each winning opening (for example, for each winning opening, a ball having a winning for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds)). (Information indicating the number) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, together with the number of prize balls (the number of payout balls), it is determined which prize port the prize ball is associated with. Based on the winning ball command, the number of winning balls indicated by the winning ball command is set in the buffer 262 in the area corresponding to the winning opening where the winning has been made. By adding the winning prize ball number to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, the counter displays, for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out by winning the corresponding winning opening. The number may be counted. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. According to these, the information relating to the accessory ratio can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In these cases, in the main control device 110, the information of the award ball count table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are changed by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. May be transmitted to the payout control device 111 by a command. Thus, the payout control device 111 can manage the ratio of the accessory and the like using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

<Modification 37>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 113, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on a signal from the audio lamp control device 113 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main controller 110 instructs the sound lamp controller 113 to obtain information about winning for each winning opening (for example, a ball having a winning for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening). May be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also according to these, information on the accessory ratio can be recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In addition, by managing the accessory ratio by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113, the calculated symbol ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the like are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to be displayed. A command may be transmitted to the control device 114. The display on the third symbol display device 81 makes it possible for a person in the hall to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory are wrong, or to suppress a wrongdoer from performing an illegal act. it can. In addition, when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the audio lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which an improper act is suspected), the audio output device 226 outputs a predetermined value. In order for the audio lamp control device 113 to perform control to output the notification sound of, or to turn on and blink the lamp display device 227 in a predetermined mode, and to display a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81, A command may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, the person in the hall can easily find the pachinko machine 10 suspected of wrongdoing, and can suppress the wrongdoer from performing wrongdoing. In these cases, in the main control device 110, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are changed to the main control device by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. It may be transmitted from the 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a command. Thus, using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the ratio of the accessory and the like.

<Modification 38>
The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on a signal from the display control device 114 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main controller 110 sends information (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening, for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) to the display controller 114 via the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. (Information indicating the number of balls having a prize in between) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also according to these, information on the accessory ratio can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. Also, by controlling the accessory ratio by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114, the control for displaying the calculated accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the like on the third symbol display device 81 is performed by the display control. The device 114 may do so. The display on the third symbol display device 81 makes it possible for a person in the hall to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory are wrong, or to suppress a wrongdoer from performing an illegal act. it can. In addition, when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which a wrongdoing is suspected), a predetermined display is displayed. The display control device 114 may control the display on the display device 81. Thereby, the person in the hall can easily find the pachinko machine 10 suspected of wrongdoing, and can suppress the wrongdoer from performing wrongdoing. In these cases, in the main control device 110, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are changed to the main control device by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. A command may be transmitted from 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. Thus, using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 can manage the accessory ratio and the like.

<Modification 39>
In each of the above embodiments, on the board on which the main control device 110 is provided, or connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the accessory ratio management chip 207, or A display device having a plurality of 7-segment displays provided on a substrate provided with a control device realizing the function is provided, and the display device relates to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio. Information or information indicating a game performance (for example, a base value or the like) may be displayed. The display device may be configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display. The display device is connected to the substrate on which the main control device 110 is provided, or connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the accessory ratio management chip 207, or functions of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Is not provided on the board provided with the control device that realizes the above, but is connected to the board provided with the main control device 110 or the accessory ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the accessory ratio management chip 207. Alternatively, it may be provided by being connected to a board on which a control device that realizes the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided. The display device may be assembled so that the display screen of the display device can be seen when viewing the back side of the pachinko machine 10, or the display screen of the display device can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It may be assembled as follows.

<Modification 40>
The information on the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on the display device may be, for example, information indicating, for each winning opening, the total number of balls paid out by winning, or to all winning openings. , The total number of balls paid out by winning a prize to the winning opening (in this embodiment, the second starting opening 64b and the big winning opening 65a) in which the accessory is activated, It may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning a winning opening (in the present embodiment, a winning opening 65a) in which objects continuously operate. Further, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area (the number of fired balls) may be included in the information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device. The display device is configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display, to which the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory, or Information relating to the physical ratio and the continuous character ratio may be displayed.

<Modification 41>
The information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance displayed on the display device is recorded in the second reading memory 264 in the latest area. At the timing (trigger), the information may be the information itself recorded in the second reading memory 264 or the information generated from the information. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording was performed on the plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest, the recording was performed on the second reading memory 264 itself, or the timing was recorded on the second reading memory 264 at each timing. The information generated from the information may be displayed on the display device as an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating a game performance. In addition, at the timing (trigger) when recording is performed on the plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest, information recorded on the second reading memory 264 or all the timings (trigger) recorded on the second reading memory 264 are read. ) From the information, the average value of the information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, and displaying the average value on the display device. You may. Furthermore, not only the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 but also the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is reflected, and the Related information or information indicating game performance may be generated and displayed on the display device.

  As a result, by looking at the display device, it is possible that an unauthorized act has been performed based on the information on the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the information on the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. Can be determined. The display device may simultaneously display any one of an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, and information indicating game performance, or may be displayed one by one. May be. In addition, any of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the information indicating the game performance may be alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals. When the information is displayed alternately, information indicating what is displayed may be displayed together. Further, when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device or the other information exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, If it exceeds 60%), the displayed accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio and other information may be displayed in a color different from the normal color or blinking. Further, in the display device, a predetermined period of time (for example, a predetermined time such as 30 seconds) from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or until the start-up process is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is completed. Period, such as a period until a predetermined process is completed), information relating to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating the game performance. May be displayed. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the person related to the hall checks the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device, and also checks information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any wrongdoing. Further, in the display device, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned off, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or game performance is displayed. Information may be displayed. Thereby, the hall-related person can easily confirm whether or not there has been any wrongdoing by confirming the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory displayed on the display device when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. . In addition, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off, information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio to the display device, information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance is displayed. The display may be a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined time such as 10 seconds) or a period until the processing related to power-off by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 ends (for example, until the processing of S705 ends). , Or a period until the predetermined process is completed). In addition, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio to the display device, information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating the game performance is Alternatively, it may be performed using power from a backup power supply, a secondary battery, a large-capacity capacitor, or the like. Further, the display device may be housed in a substrate box. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an act of displaying an incorrect value on the display device.

<Modification 42>
Further, a button for displaying information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance was provided on the display device, and the button was operated. In this case, the display device may display an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance. As a result, only when the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and other information are confirmed, by operating the button, information relating to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio can be obtained. Alternatively, information indicating game performance can be displayed on the display device, so that wasteful consumption of power in the display device can be suppressed. In addition, the operation of the button is valid only when the game is in a non-executing state in the pachinko machine 10, and the display device displays on the display device the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, Alternatively, information indicating game performance may be displayed. The determination that the game is not executed in the pachinko machine 10 is performed, for example, when the detection of the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is not detected for a predetermined time or more, or when the operation handle 51 is rotated. It may be performed when the ball has not been fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or when the ball guided to the game area has not been detected. Thereby, while playing the game, the information displayed on the display device can be viewed, and it can be suppressed that the wrongdoer tries to do something wrong.

<Modification 43>
Further, the operation of the button may be valid only when the button is operated in combination with another button. By this, a fraudster who does not know the effective combination of button operations can display information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance. It can be prevented from being easily displayed on the device. In addition, while operating a button for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating the game performance on the display device, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Only when is inserted, the information relating to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the display device. Accordingly, when the person in charge of the hall turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10, by operating the buttons together, the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role displayed on the display device, the ratio of the role and the sequence of the role of the role, and the like. By confirming the information related to the physical ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity during the previous business day or outside the business hours at night. Further, while operating a button for displaying the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance on the display device, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Only when it is cut off, information relating to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the display device. Thus, when the person in charge of the hall turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, by operating the buttons together, the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role, the ratio of the role and the sequence of the role, and the like are displayed on the display device. By confirming the information related to the physical ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any wrongdoing before or during today's business. The display of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio on the display device by the operation of the button, the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance ends based on the elapse of a predetermined period. Alternatively, the process may end when the button is operated again. In addition, only during the period in which the operation of the button is continuously performed, the information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is displayed. Is also good.

<Modification 44>
If the button is operated and the display device displays the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance, the pachinko machine is used. The ten game modes may be set to the check mode, and the main control of the game in the main control device 110 may be temporarily stopped. As a result, as the game progresses, the information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device, the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance changes. This makes it possible to suppress the difficulty in checking the ratio of the accessory and the like. In this case, the main control device 110 sets the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the check mode, and temporarily stops the main control of the game, at the stage where the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114) A command for notifying the transition to the check mode may be transmitted. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive a command notifying the transition to the check mode, for example, a predetermined image corresponding to the check mode (for example, a black screen) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is displayed, the fluctuation effect being executed is continuously changed at a high speed during the check mode, the sound output from the sound output device 226 is set to a predetermined sound corresponding to the check mode, or a sound corresponding to the high-speed change is output. May be output. Thereby, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the check mode. Further, the main control device 110 releases the check mode as the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 and, at the stage of restarting the main control of the game, sets the check mode to the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114). A command for notifying the cancellation may be transmitted. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 return the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 to those before the transition to the check mode. Can be.

<Modification 45>
Further, in the modified examples described so far, when a button operation is performed, the display device provided on the substrate such as the main control device 110 displays the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio. Although the case where related information or information indicating game performance is displayed has been described, in addition to or instead of this, when a button operation is performed, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device is displayed. 81, information related to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the information on the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the lamp display device 227 or the like, or audio output may be performed. The device 226 may output the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or some notification sound indicating the game performance. Also in this case, the above-described modification may be appropriately applied in connection with the button operation.

<Modification 46>
Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the information relating to the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300 when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. When the button operation is performed, information relating to the accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Also in this case, the above-described modified example may be appropriately applied in connection with the button operation.

<Modification 47>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. The display device provided on the substrate 110 or the like displays various information such as the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory, and the display of the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, and the lamp display device 227. By displaying information relating to the physical ratio or the continuous role ratio or information indicating the game performance, or from the audio output device 226, outputting a certain notification sound regarding the role ratio or the continuous role ratio, the game performance, When configured to perform some kind of notification, transmission to the inspection device 300 does not necessarily have to be performed.

<Modification 48>
In each of the above embodiments, a large-capacity capacitor 267 or a secondary battery is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 In the above, a case has been described in which a process accompanying a power-off is executed using the power charged in the capacitor 267. On the other hand, a backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply 115 to the accessory ratio management chip 207 instead of the capacitor 267 or the secondary battery. Thus, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 can be retained even when the power is turned off. Also, in the case where the wrongdoer attempts to set illegal information in the buffer 262 during the late night time period, the out-of-time information is stored in the out-of-time data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and then the second reading is performed at a predetermined timing. The out-of-time information can be recorded in the game state data 264d of the memory 264.

<Modification 49>
In the above-described embodiment, when the MPU 201 determines whether or not the transmission of the interrupt signal after the setting of the buffer 262 has been performed in the midnight time zone by the process of S724 (see FIG. 19), the time indicated by the RTC 266 is set to The MPU 201 may set the threshold value of the time used for the determination of the midnight time zone, as described in the case where it is determined whether the time is between midnight and 6 a.m. For example, the midnight time zone determination time data defining the threshold value of the time is stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201, and during the startup processing executed by the MPU 201 when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e The midnight time zone determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the midnight time zone determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265 together with the trigger information data 202f. Then, in the process of S724, it may be determined whether or not the MPU 201 has transmitted the interrupt signal after the setting of the buffer 262 in the time zone indicated by the midnight time zone determination time data. Thus, the determination of the midnight time zone can be variably set by the ROM 202.

<Modification 50>
In each of the above embodiments, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 is powered on, the power-on information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time, At the timing, the power-on information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. Further, when the power is turned on to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. Thereby, information on the time at which the power is turned on is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when there is a possibility of a fraudulent act due to a change in the ratio of the main character and the ratio of the consecutive main characters, the cause thereof can be explored in various aspects together with the time at which the power is turned on.

<Modification 51>
In each of the above embodiments, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cutoff information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. At a predetermined timing, the power-off information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 may be constituted by a nonvolatile memory or supplied with a backup voltage. Further, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cut-off information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 does not necessarily need to be constituted by a nonvolatile memory or to be supplied with a backup voltage. Thereby, information about the time at which the power is turned off is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when there is a possibility of a fraudulent act due to a change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, it is possible to search for the cause in various aspects, together with the time at which the power is turned off.

<Modification 52>
In the above embodiment, when the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off and the processing of S704 to S707 is executed in the main processing of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 17), after the execution of the processing of S704, the processing proceeds to S705. Before the processing of (1) is executed, the same processing as the processing of S155 and S156 shown in FIG. 11 may be executed. That is, in the process at the time of power-off, after the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited (S704), the values of the first counter 203d, the second counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g, and the special winning opening counter 203h of the RAM 203 are set. Is set as the winning information, the value of the out counter 203i is set as the out information, and the interrupting signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio managing chip 207 in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time. May be. As a result, the number of balls winning each winning opening immediately before the power is turned off and the balls guided to the ball discharge path and not counted in the accessory ratio management chip 207 are turned off. Before being counted by the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, the number of balls winning each winning opening immediately before the power is turned off and the balls guided to the ball discharge path can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 without omission.

<Modification 53>
In the above embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “game time”, a ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is detected. Although the case where the game time is calculated by counting the performed time has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an out-port switch for detecting a ball passing through the out-port 66 is provided, the out-port switch, the first starting-port switch 208a, the second starting-port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, and the second normal winning port. When the passage of a ball to each winning opening or the out opening is detected by one of the switch 208d and the special winning opening switch 208e, the game time is calculated by counting the detected time. Is also good. Further, based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the operation handle 51, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time when it is determined that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the operation handle. The game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the player 51 is being rotated by the player, or by accumulating the time during which the player touches the operation handle 51 and rotates the operation handle 51. The game time may be calculated. Further, the ball launching unit 112a may be driven by the launch control device 112 to accumulate the time during which the ball is launched to calculate the game time. Further, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the end of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch counts the time during which the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area is continuously detected. By doing so, the game time may be calculated.

<Modification 54>
In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are set in advance by the main control device 110, and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol cannot be changed by persons involved in the hall. However, instead of this, a configuration may be employed in which a person related to the hall or the like can change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol in a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). Thus, on the hall side, by making the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol different for each pachinko machine with respect to the same model pachinko machine, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the platform. .

<Modification 55>
The change of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol may be performed, for example, as follows. First, for each of a plurality of stages in which the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed (hereinafter, described as six stages (levels 1 to 6)), a jackpot random number value at a corresponding level (stage) and And / or the random number value of the second symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability at that level are determined by the number of the jackpot random numbers and / or the second symbol hit random values determined for each level.

<Modification 56>
The main board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. The keyhole may be normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, or may appear by opening the back pack 92. Alternatively, a keyhole opening may be provided in the back pack 92 so that the keyhole is exposed from the opening. The keyhole is configured to be rotatable by a dedicated key between two positions on the “probability setting off” side and the “probability setting on” side. On the other hand, the exclusive key can be inserted and removed. When the keyhole is set to the “probability setting ON” position by the dedicated key, the pachinko machine 10 can change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the keyhole is rotated from the “probability setting off” to the “probability setting on” position by a dedicated key, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be activated in a probability setting mode in which the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to safely change the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability at the time of starting the pachinko machine 10 in the hall. If the keyhole is turned from the “probability setting off” to the “probability setting on” position by a dedicated key while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is on, the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol You may make it impossible to change a winning probability. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from illegally changing the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability during business hours.

<Modification 57>
In the pachinko machine 10, a push-type probability setting button for changing the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is provided on the main board. Like the keyhole, the probability setting button is normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, an opening for a probability setting button may be provided in the back pack 92 so that the probability setting button is exposed from the opening. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level (stage) of the hit probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is displayed on, for example, a display device provided on the main board. Then, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is increased by one and displayed on the display device. Further, when the level before the probability setting button is pressed is “6”, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level “1” is displayed on the display device. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level displayed on the display device is a predetermined level (instead of the level of the hit probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol). For example, the level may be “1”.

<Modification 58>
When the level of the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability to be set is displayed on the display device, when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the jackpot value of the level displayed on the display device or the second value is displayed. The hit value of the symbol is set, and the pachinko machine 10 is started. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 operates at the set level of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. Also, when the level of the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability to be set is displayed and the keyhole into which the dedicated key is inserted is turned to the “probability setting off” position, the display is displayed. The hit value of the level or the hit value of the second symbol displayed on the apparatus may be set, and the pachinko machine 10 may be started. This also allows the pachinko machine 10 to operate at the set level of the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability.

<Modification 59>
Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a display device for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the pachinko machine 10 sets the probability setting. When activated in the mode, the level of the set jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol may be displayed on the display device. Thereby, by suppressing an increase in the number of display devices mounted on the pachinko machine 10, an increase in cost can be reduced. In addition, by also using the display device and suppressing an increase in the number of parts, the arrangement (layout) of each part can be easily performed.

<Modification 60>
If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, the ratio of the bonuses and the ratio of the continuous bonuses naturally change according to the change. Therefore, it is determined whether the change in the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio managed by the bonus ratio management chip 207 is due to a change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, or due to some kind of fraud. May be lost.

  Therefore, when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be deleted. . With this, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the change of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio with the change of the big hit probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. In this case, information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. You may. As a result, it can be grasped at the stage of the inspection that the information or the like recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been erased due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. Can be used as a reference for the judgment. In this case, the date and time when the change was made may be stored together. Further, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information of the level before the change. Based on these date and time and level, it is possible to more reliably determine whether there has been fraud.

<Modification 61>
On the other hand, even if the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are retained. It may be. Thus, before the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, it is possible to analyze whether there is any fraud. In this case, information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. You may. Thereby, it can be easily determined whether or not the influence of the change of the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is caused by a change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. The information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed may include the date and time when the change was made. Further, it may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information of the level before the change. Based on these date and time and level, it is possible to more reliably analyze the cause of the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 62>
Further, even when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are kept stored. In the case of, the display device provided for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, has a jackpot probability and / or a hit of the second symbol. After the probability is changed, based on the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and / or the first reading memory 263, based on the information such as the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, Related information may be displayed. Therefore, regarding the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device, or the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol change. Thus, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the change in the ratio of the bonus and the ratio of the continuous bonus, and to easily detect the fraudulent behavior after the change of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. In this case, information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the date and time when the change was made. Based on this information, after the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is easily determined, and based on the information, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory Information related to the ratio or the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio can be displayed.

<Modification 63>
Further, even when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are kept stored. In this case, the information may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each level (stage) of the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability. With this, for each level of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio when the level is set are determined from the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to clearly switch and analyze the change in the ratio of the bonuses and the continuous ratio of bonuses due to the change of the jackpot probability and / or the probability of the second symbol, and the change in the ratio of the bonuses and the ratio of continuous bonuses due to the misconduct. it can.

<Modification 64>
When the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, one or more pieces of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 immediately before may be stored, and the others may be deleted. Further, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be kept stored. Further, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 may be deleted, and only the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be kept. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the effect ratio and the continuous character ratio before the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, and to influence the analysis and display, while the jackpot probability and / or Before the winning probability of the second symbol is changed, it is possible to analyze whether there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. In this case, information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information may be output to the connected inspection device 300. Good. Thereby, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the influence of the change of the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is caused by the change of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and is recorded in the second reading memory 264. It can be grasped at the inspection stage that some of the information, etc. that was deleted due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be used as a reference for judging whether there was fraud. it can. The information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed may be stored together with the date and time when the change was made. Further, it may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information of the level before the change. Based on these date and time and level, it is possible to more reliably analyze the cause of the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 65>
In each of the above embodiments, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 cannot be erased from the outside, so that the wrongdoer cannot delete the evidence of the wrongdoing. . On the other hand, there is a used market in the pachinko machine market, and it is often sold from one store to another store and installed at other stores. In this case, even if a fraudulent act is performed in the previous one store and the ratio of the accessory is changed, if the information remains in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, the current reading is performed. There was a possibility that suspicion that cheating had occurred at another store might occur. Therefore, in preparation for such a case, when selling from one store to another store, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is deleted or the information to be resold is deleted. The second reading memory 264 may be recorded. By deleting information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, it is possible to prevent a record of an improper act performed in one previous store from being carried over to another next store. it can. Also, if the information to be resold is recorded in the second reading memory 264, the information relating to the ratio of the public goods in the preceding one store and the information relating to the ratio of the public goods in the next other store are clearly separated. In addition to performing analysis, it is also possible to detect an improper act performed in the preceding one store from information related to the ratio of the accessory in the previous store.

<Modification 66>
Deletion of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or recording of information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 is performed in a limited place such as the maker of the pachinko machine 10. It is good to be limited to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the erasure or the deception of the record of the misconduct from being easily performed. The erasing of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 and the recording of information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be performed by the following method. . For example, by connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a and inputting a dedicated command from the inspection device 300 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the data is recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264. Alternatively, a program for deleting the information or recording the information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. By using this command as a special command that is confidential except for some persons, it is possible to suppress erasure of a record of fraudulent activity by a fraudster or facilitation of deception. Also, a hole such as a keyhole is provided on the main board, and only when a key or the like corresponding to the hole is inserted, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased or resold. A program for recording the information in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, only those having a key or the like that fits the hole can delete information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or transfer information to be resold to the second reading memory 264. Since the recording can be performed, it is possible to suppress the erasure or the deception of the recording of the fraudulent activity by the fraudulent person from being performed easily. Also, a switch is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is stored, and only when the switch is operated, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased or resold. A program for recording the information to be read into the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, unless the board box 100 is opened, the switch cannot be operated and the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased, and the information to be resold is transferred to the second reading memory 264. Cannot record. As described above, in the board box 100, the box base and the box cover are connected in a non-openable manner (connection by caulking structure), and the connection portion between the box base and the box cover extends over the box base and the box cover. And a sealing sticker is attached. Therefore, since the fraudster cannot easily open the board box, it is possible to suppress the erasure of the fraudulent record by the fraudster or the manipulation of the fraudulently. Further, if the board box is opened and the switch is operated, evidence of the opening remains, so that it is possible to easily judge that the wrongdoing has been performed.

<Modification 67>
In the above-described third to seventh embodiments, as the process of using the area 203y outside the use area in the RAM 203, the process relating to the accessory ratio and the base value has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Various processes excluding the above may be used. For example, a process for determining improper behavior may be performed. In the process of judging this misconduct, for example, it is judged whether there is an approach or vibration of a magnet, or an unnatural ball entering the winning opening (a detected ball despite the large winning opening 65a being closed). Alternatively, a process for giving a notification when there is an illegal act may be performed. In addition, the process using the area 203y outside the use area may include a plurality of processes having different functions (purposes) (for example, a “process relating to the ratio of an accessory” and a “process for determining an improper act”).

<Modification 68>
In the above-described third to seventh embodiments, the case where the contents of the register 200 are saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the outside area 203y using the load (LD) instruction has been described. Alternatively, the same operation and effect can be obtained by using the store (ST) instruction to retreat to the outside work area 203y1 of the outside use area 203y.

<Modification 69>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, in addition to the real-time base value, three base values (previous base value, two-time previous base value, and two-time previous base value) counted in the past for each predetermined period are used as the base display device. Although the case of displaying at 401 has been described, at least two base values counted in the past for each predetermined period (for example, a previous base value and a base value two times before) may be displayed together with the real-time base value. Alternatively, four or more base values counted for each predetermined period in the past may be displayed together with the real-time base value.

<Modification 70>
In the above fifth to seventh embodiments, the case where each base value measured in a plurality of periods and the base value being measured in real time are displayed on the base display device 401 has been described. Or, in addition to the base value, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, and / or other information indicating the game performance, each measured in a plurality of periods. And the one measured in real time may be displayed on a display device.

<Modification 71>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the case where the MPU 201 executes the base value processing (FIG. 41) and displays the various base values on the base display device 401 has been described, but the main control device 110 manages the base values. A chip is provided, or a management chip for managing a base value is provided separately from the main controller 110. The management chip executes processing equivalent to base value processing, calculates a real-time base value, and calculates a real-time base value. , The last base value, the last-before-last base value, and the two-last-before-base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. In this case, the management chip may directly control the display of the base display device 401, or the management chip may control the display of the base display device 401 by the MPU 201 via the MPU 201. Further, the base display device 401 may be directly connected to the management chip.

<Modification 72>
The various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, the base value data 203l to 203o, and the flag 203p shown in FIG. 39A may be stored in the RAM in the management chip. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM all erasure switch is turned on, the MPU 201 transmits a signal notifying the fact to the management chip during the start-up process, and the management chip receives the signal and receives the signal. The various counters 203j, 203k, and 203q, the base value data 203l to 203o, the flag 203p, and the like may be initialized.

<Modification 73>
Further, when the power is turned on, the management chip may control the base display device 401 to turn on all the segments of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d. In this case, the control may be performed immediately after the management chip starts up with the power-on, or when the power is turned on, the MPU 201 sends an initialization signal to the management chip during the startup process. May be transmitted, and the control may be executed in a process executed by the management chip upon receiving the initialization signal.

<Modification 74>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when the last base value, the last-before-last base value, and the two-last-before-base are displayed on the base display device 401, if there is no effective base value as the base value, the comparison segment is used. Has been described in which “−−” is displayed to indicate that there is no valid base value. On the other hand, when there is no effective base value as the last base value, the last-before-last base value, or the two-before-last base, only the real-time base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, it can be shown that there is no effective base value in the previous base value, the base value before last time, and the base value before last time. In addition, it is possible to suppress the useless display of the previous base value, the base value before the last time, and the base value before the previous time without a valid base value. On the other hand, in this case, the real-time base value and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and the previous base value may be displayed as “−−−” in the comparison segment. This can also indicate that there is no valid base value in the previous base value, the pre-last base value, and the pre-last base value. Further, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the previous base value, it is possible to suggest that the previous base value and the like are also displayed on the base display device 401 after a valid base value is obtained.

<Modification 75>
If there is a valid base value as the last base value and there is no base value before and twice before the base value, only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401. May be. In addition, if there is a valid base value in the previous base value and the base value before the last time, and there is no valid base value as the base time before the previous time, only the real time base value, the previous base value and the base value before the previous time are displayed on the base display device. It may be displayed at 401. Thereby, it is possible to indicate that there is no valid base value for the base value that is not displayed. In addition, it is possible to suppress unnecessary display of a base value that does not have a valid base value.

<Modification 76>
On the other hand, if there is a valid base value in the previous base value and there is no valid base value as the pre-last base value or the pre-last base value, the base display device displays the real-time base value, the previous base value, and the pre-last base value. The reference value may be displayed at 401, and “−−−” may be displayed in the comparison segment for the base value two times before. If there is a valid base value for the previous base value and the base value two times before, and there is no valid base value as the base value two times before, the real time base value, the previous base value, the base value two times before and the base value two times before The base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and “−−” may be displayed in the comparison segment about the base value two times before. This can also indicate the type of base value for which there is no valid base value. Further, by displaying one base value of a type having no valid base value, it is possible to suggest that the base value of the type is displayed on the base display device 401 after a valid base value is obtained.

<Modification 77>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are determined immediately after the power is turned on. Although the case of lighting for a period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) has been described, all segments may blink for a predetermined period instead of lighting. By blinking all the segments, it is possible to confirm not only whether all the segments can be normally turned on but also whether all the segments can be normally turned off, and determine whether the display of the base display device 401 is normally performed. Easy to judge.

<Variation 78>
Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up at a manufacturing plant, or when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, such as when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, for example, when the RAM is completely started up, Only after the power is turned on while the erase switch is operated and until the total number of outs reaches 300, all segments (dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed. ) May be turned on or off for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). Thus, at least at the time of newly starting up the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to confirm whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is normally performed. Further, while the lighting is performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

<Modification 79>
When the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are displayed for a predetermined period (this embodiment). (5 seconds in this case).

<Modification 80>
In the fifth embodiment, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are kept for a predetermined period (this embodiment). In the above description, the control for turning on (or blinking) for 5 seconds is performed at a predetermined point (S3007) of the start-up process (see FIG. 40). May be performed at an arbitrary position in. For example, the control may be performed first after execution of the startup processing is started, or the control may be performed after the initial setting (S601). Further, the control may be executed after setting the interruption permission (S613). Further, the control may be executed at a place other than the start-up processing. For example, in the main processing (see FIG. 17) performed after the start-up processing is completed, the control may be performed before the loop processing (S701 to S703) is performed. In the timer interrupt process, for example, in the base value process (see FIG. 41) which is one process of the timer interrupt process, this timer interrupt process or the base value process is executed only after the power is turned on. It may be determined whether or not the control has been performed, and if the control has been executed for the first time after the power is turned on, the control may be performed. That is, after turning on the power, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d once provided on the base display device 401 are turned on (or blink) for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). If possible, this control may be performed at any timing.

<Modification 81>
In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up in a manufacturing factory, or when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, such as when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand. Until the total number of outs reaches 300, every time the power is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed for a predetermined period (the (5 seconds in the present embodiment), and then the display of the base display device 401 blinks (or lights) “88.” in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is compared with the ratio segment. Has been described in the case where the display is performed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, in which the display is blinked (or lit). In this case, every time the power is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are turned on for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). May not be executed. In this case, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in a special display mode, so that it is possible to indicate that the displayed base value is not a regular base value, Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

<Modification 82>
In the fifth embodiment or the modification, as the special display mode displayed on the base display device 401 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, “88.” blinks (or lights) on the identification segment. At the same time, the mode in which the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is blinked (or lit) in the ratio segment is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this mode. May be displayed on the base display device 401 in a different manner. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, “bL.”, “B1.”, “B2.”, And “b3.” Are switched and displayed at 5-second intervals while the identification segment is blinking. The display of the base display device 401 may be performed in such a manner that “−−” is lit on the comparative segment. Thereby, while this display is being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state. In this aspect, while “bL.” Is displayed blinking, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l may be lit or blinked in the ratio segment. Thereby, the real-time base value at that time can be shown for reference.

<Modification 83>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages of “1” to “6”, and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed. Is not limited to six stages, but may be changed to any stage.

<Modification 84>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the case where the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed by changing the probability set value has been described. However, when the pachinko machine 10 includes a so-called small hit, Instead of or in addition to the change of the big hit probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, the small hit winning probability may be changed. Here, the small hit is a kind of miss, and when the ball enters the big winning opening 65a opened by the small hit and the ball is paid out, the number of the paid out ball is also calculated as the base value. Used for In other words, if the winning probability of the small hit is changed, the base value also changes. Therefore, if the base value data 203r based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the base value based on the changed probability setting value is changed. Cannot be calculated correctly. Therefore, in this case, the base value data 203r may be erased during the data erasure of the RAM 203 which is started in the setting change mode and performed when the probability set value is changed. . Thereby, the base value based on the changed probability setting value can be correctly calculated.

<Modification 85>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, a case has been described in which whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (the range of “1” to “6”) is checked each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. However, this confirmation may be performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth to twelfth embodiments. Further, this confirmation is performed every time a predetermined opportunity comes, such as every time a variable effect is started, every predetermined time (for example, every hour, or every time a clock provided inside reaches 00 minutes). It may be.

<Modification 86>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (the range of “1” to “6”) during the timer interrupt processing, and the probability set value is determined to be within the normal range. If not, the case where the game is stopped and a notification that prompts the person in charge of the hall to restart the pachinko machine 10 to change the probability set value has been described. Alternatively, a setting change process may be executed to forcibly change the probability set value by a person related to the hall or the like. In this case, a notification sound that prompts a change in the probability setting value may be output, or a notification may be performed on the third symbol display device 81 to call a person related to the hall. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the probability set value is not within the normal range. As a result, the probability set value can be reset within a normal range by a person involved in the hall or the like.

<Modification 87>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal during the start-up process, and the RAM determination value is normal. If not, it is further confirmed whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range, and if not, the setting change processing is executed, and the change of the probability set value is performed by a person related to the hall or the like. The case has been described. Instead of executing the setting change processing, the voice output device 226 or the third symbol display device 81 notifies the person involved in the hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability set value. And / or from an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110, notifies hall computer 600 that the probability set value is not within the normal range, and enters an infinite loop. You may do so. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted by the person involved in the hall and the like, and the probability set value can be changed.

<Modification 88>
Further, when it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the startup processing, a specific probability setting value (for example, “1”) is set from the range of “1” to “6”. It may be forcibly set as a value. If it is determined that the probability set value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during a timer interrupt process), the probability set value should not be forcibly set to a specific probability set value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to sudden change of the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability during the game.

<Modification 89>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the case where the probability set value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (check sum) has been described. However, the probability set value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (S4009 in FIG. 54), it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range. In order to change the probability setting value by the person involved in the hall to change the probability setting value, to prompt the person involved in the hall to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, A specific probability setting value within the range may be forcibly set.

<Modification 90>
In the eighth embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (check sum) has been described. However, the probability setting value may be included from the calculation of the RAM determination value.

<Modification 91>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed. The case of lighting for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) has been described. However, in the sixth to twelfth embodiments, each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. All the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may be turned on or off for a predetermined period. However, until the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Turning on or blinking for a predetermined period may be troublesome. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, lighting or blinking of all the segments of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d may not be executed. When the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, after the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed, all the segments of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d are turned on or blinking. May be executed. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d are once lit or blinked for a predetermined period, When an operation is performed, the lighting or blinking may be terminated.

<Modification 92>
In the fifth to twelfth embodiments, the base display device 401 is divided into an identification seg composed of two seven-segment displays 401a and 401b and a ratio seg composed of two seven-segment displays 401c and 401d. Although the configuration is described, the identification segment may be configured with one or two or more seven-segment displays, or the ratio seg may be configured with two or more seven-segment displays.

<Modification 93>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, using the round number notification LED, the LED for notifying the big hit symbol, the LED for notifying the hit symbol, or the like prepared in the first symbol display device 37, or the entire LED 37a, A case has been described in which the base display device 401 notifies that the display indicating that the setting is being changed or the display that is confirming the setting is being performed by using a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification. 37, using a round number notification LED, an LED for notifying a big hit symbol, an LED for notifying a hit symbol, or the like, or using the entire LED 37a, using a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification, The fact that the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 may be notified.

<Modification 94>
Further, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with one LED for notifying that the setting change display and the setting confirmation display are being performed on the base display device 401, and for example, the LED is turned on. The base display device 401 notifies that the setting change display is being performed, and blinks its LED to notify that the setting confirmation display is being performed on the base display device 401. You may. In addition, an LED for notifying that the setting change display is being performed on the base display device 401 on the first symbol display device 37, and a setting confirmation display being performed on the base display device 401. And a LED for notifying that the setting display is being performed on the base display device 401 to indicate that the setting change display or the setting check display is being performed. It may be. Further, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with an LED for notifying that the error history is being displayed on the base display device 401, and by turning on the LED, the error is displayed on the base display device 401. The fact that the history display is being performed may be notified.

<Modification 95>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of each of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b of the identification segment are turned off, or the identification segment is displayed as " −− ”or a case where fixed characters are displayed on each of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b in a display mode different from the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. When the value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment may be displayed in any display mode as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. For example, a predetermined segment of each of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b may be blinked, or each of the segments of each of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b may be lit or blinked sequentially or randomly. In the identification segment, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401.

<Modification 96>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment are turned off or "-" is displayed. In the case where the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment displays the base display device 401. The display may be performed in an arbitrary display mode as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed. For example, a predetermined segment of the seven-segment display 401c may be blinked, or each segment of the seven-segment display 401c may be sequentially or randomly lit and blinked. Further, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed on the seven-segment display 401c. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value is displayed.

<Modification 97>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, an example shown in FIG. 50 is shown as an example of a display mode when an error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and a display mode when a probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401. The case where the display mode is different from that described above has been described. On the other hand, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, a display mode similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 49A or 49B may be used. In this case, the display mode when the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 may be the same as the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. The probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 when the person involved in the hall starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The error history is displayed on the base display device 401 when the person related to the hall or the like presses the error display button 502. In other words, even if the display mode when displaying the probability set value on the base display device 401 and the display mode when displaying the error history on the base display device 401 are the same display mode, the hall-related person or the like performs the same operation. Based on the operation performed, it can be grasped whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability set value or an error history.

<Modification 98>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 or by turning on the setting change switch. Although the case in which the setting is performed has been described, the setting may be performed using the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is rotatable from an on state to a setting change position provided in a direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. The setting key 501 is configured to be urged to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is turned from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

<Modification 99>
In the sixth and twelfth embodiments, the case where the probability set value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode has been described. The probability setting value may be updated by providing a setting change switch similar to that described above and turning on the setting change switch. As a result, the roles of the RAM erase switch and the setting change switch are clearly separated, so that the operator can clearly grasp the role of each switch.

<Modification 100>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is set by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 122. Has been described, but this may be performed by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting confirmation switch. The setting confirmation switch is a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated, for example, during the setting change mode. It may be provided so as to be more protruding, and can be operated by persons involved in the hall or the like without opening the substrate box 100. This also makes it easy to determine the probability set value.

<Modification 101>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, when a person related to the hall performs a start operation in any one of the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode during the RAM abnormality, the main controller 110 In the processing of S4215 of the startup processing executed by the MPU 201, it is always determined that it is determined that the RAM is abnormal (S4215: Yes), the process proceeds to S4219, and the notification by the RAM abnormality setting processing and (S4219), the output to the hall computer 600 (S4220), and then the infinite loop state has been described. On the other hand, in this case, after the notification by the RAM abnormality setting process and the output to the hall computer 600 (S4219) are executed, the process may proceed to S4213 to execute the setting change process. As a result, the probability setting value is surely reset, and the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally by clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15. Further, in this case, since the setting change process is automatically executed, it is not necessary to restart the pachinko machine 10 again, and it is possible to save time and labor for persons involved in the hall.

<Modification 102>
In the processing of S4313 of the setting change processing in the eighth to twelfth embodiments, among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling the game (excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) (Predetermined data) is erased (cleared), and the data 203s for the bonus ratio stored in the outside work area 203y1 is erased, while the data 203r for the base value and the data 203t for the error (see FIG. 53) Although the case where the data is retained without being erased has been described, the data used for controlling the game (the data stored in the inner work area 203x1) among the data stored in the RAM 203, as in the processing of S4216 of the start-up processing, has been described. The predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11) is deleted (cleared) while the outside work area 20 is deleted. A character object ratio data 203s stored in y1, the base value data 203 r, (see FIG. 53) the error data 203t and may be held without being erased. That is, the same process may be performed for the RAM clear after the setting change process and the RAM clear executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode.

<Modification 103>
In the above eighth to twelfth embodiments, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is only the startup operation for starting in the setting change mode. However, even in the case of another start-up operation, the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning and executed is described. On the other hand, only when the startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, the setting change processing is started from the beginning. Start up as a setting change mode to execute again, and start up operation when power is turned on after power is cut off during setting change, other start up modes (normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting check mode) In the case of the start-up operation corresponding to (1), the MPU 201 may be set to an infinite loop state. In this case, a notification is issued to the person involved in the hall to promptly turn off the power and restart in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. Or you may. Thus, it is possible to cause the persons involved in the hall and the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and to surely reset the probability set value.

<Modification 104>
Also, when the startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is a startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (that is, the setting key 501). Is turned on), the setting change mode is started from the beginning and the setting change mode is executed. When the power is turned on after the power is cut off during the setting change, If the start operation corresponds to another start mode (normal mode, RAM clear mode) (that is, if the setting key 501 is turned off), the MPU 201 enters an infinite loop state. Is also good. In this case, a notification is issued to the person involved in the hall to promptly turn off the power and restart in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. Or you may. This allows the person involved in the hall to turn on the setting key 501 and then restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, so that the probability setting value can be reliably reset. . On the other hand, when the start-up operation is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting key 501 is in an ON state, and the person involved in the hall or the like is ready to update and set the probability set value smoothly. I have. Therefore, in this case, the probability set value can be definitely determined by starting in the setting change mode.

<Modification 105>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power supply is cut off during the setting change, the power-up operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, the power supply with the setting key 501 turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off is performed. In the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change mode is executed by restarting (from the beginning) the setting change processing instead of starting up in the normal mode when the startup operation of turning on the pachinko machine is performed. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability set value that was being updated before the power was last turned off. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the normal mode by ignoring the setting change process executed before the power was turned off, deleting the probability set value in the middle of the update.

<Modification 106>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is cut off during the setting change, the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed again from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting in the RAM clear mode when the start operation of turning on the power is performed. explained. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability set value that was being updated before the power was last turned off. When the setting key 501 is turned on, the setting key 501 is turned on. When the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting key 501 is turned off. It may be raised or RAM clear may be executed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the RAM clear mode by ignoring the setting change process executed before the power is turned off, deleting the probability set value in the middle of the update. Then, wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, wait until the setting key 501 is turned off. When the setting key 501 is turned off, the game can be executed. You may make it become. Wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, insert a process to wait for the setting key 501 to be turned off. Can be given to the person in charge of the hall or the like as if the cancellation of the release was canceled.

<Modification 107>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is cut off during the setting change, the start operation for starting in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the startup operation of turning on the power is performed, the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode as in the startup operation has been described. When the setting key 501 is turned on, the setting key 501 may be further turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the operation may be started in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to give a person related to the hall or the like a feeling that the release of the setting change mode executed when the power was last turned off is released.

<Modification 108>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is cut off during the setting change, the start operation for starting in the setting check mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. When a power-on startup operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted (from scratch) and executed instead of starting in the setting check mode. As described above, the setting change process may be executed based on the probability set value that was being updated before the power was turned off last time. In this case, after the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation processing may be continuously executed, or the setting confirmation processing may be ignored. In addition, it is possible to start up in the setting confirmation mode, ignore the setting change process executed before the power is turned off, and delete the probability setting value in the middle of updating.

<Modification 109>
In the above-described eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is cut off during the setting confirmation, the power-up operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, with the setting key 501 turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, the power supply is turned off. In the case where the start-up operation of turning on the pachinko machine 10 is performed, instead of starting up in the normal mode, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting check mode in which the setting check process is executed again (from the beginning) and executed. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the normal mode, ignoring the setting confirmation process that was executed before the power was turned off.

<Modification 110>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, a start-up operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off. When the startup operation of turning on the power is performed, the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode as described in the startup operation of the person in charge of the hall has been described. The pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the confirmation processing is started again (from the beginning) and executed. In this case, wait until the setting key 501 is turned on. When the setting key 501 is turned on, wait until the setting key 501 is turned off. When the setting key 501 is turned off, the RAM is not cleared. May be started, or the RAM may be cleared.

<Modification 111>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the start operation for starting in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. The case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the start-up operation when the power-on operation is performed is described above, but the setting change mode is ignored and the start-up is performed in the setting confirmation mode. You may. Further, after starting up in the setting confirmation mode, a transition to the setting change mode may be made upon a predetermined operation.

<Modification 112>
In the eleventh embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, at least the inner frame 12 must be opened, and the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 The start-up mode has been set according to the detection mode. On the other hand, it may be configured such that whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is set as a condition for setting change or setting confirmation can be set so that the hole can be selected.

  The island facilities of the hall where the pachinko machines 10 are installed include “Ryoshima” where the pachinko machines 10 can be installed on both sides of the island facilities, “Kawashima” where the pachinko machines 10 can be installed on only one side of the island facilities, There are a variety of island facilities, such as a "pillar island" constructed by surrounding a pillar of a hall with a "wall island", or a "single island" in which the pachinko machine 10 can be installed in units of one or two. Depending on the island facility, setting change or setting confirmation may be performed while the inner frame 12 is locked. Therefore, depending on the type of operation of the hall (island facilities), the setting change or setting confirmation is not always performed by opening the inner frame 12, and the setting change or setting confirmation work is performed on condition that the door opening switch 208g is opened. In such a configuration, the operation has to be performed once the inner frame 12 is opened, and the operation becomes complicated.

  Therefore, when a dip switch or the like is provided at a part (for example, inside the main control device 110) which cannot be operated by an employee or the like, and opening in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition. The determination may be made so that the administrator of the hall or the like can determine whether or not the determination is made. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 while considering work efficiency according to each hall environment.

<Modification 113>
In the eleventh embodiment, the front frame 14 may be configured so that the employee cannot close the front frame 14 without permission during the maintenance work in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened. Specifically, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened, the front frame 14 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 12 unless a dedicated key is inserted by a hall manager or the like. Constitute. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or the like from closing the front frame 14 without permission during the maintenance work, and to prevent the setting change or the setting confirmation from being performed. The security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 114>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion 92a of the back pack 92, the upper side protrusion 171a of the protective cover member 140, and the lower side surface are configured to abut. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the upper surface of the lower side protrusion 92a, the upper side protrusion 171a, and a lower surface may be engaged. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the engagement is easily disengaged, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, when the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion 92a and the upper side protrusion 171a engage with the lower side surface. It is suitable. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the security performance of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 without any trouble during the maintenance work of the inner frame 12.

<Modification 115>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 in a cantilever manner. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may be attached to both ends of the support plate from the right plate 11d to the left plate 11c. With this configuration, the security performance of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration while increasing the rigidity of the protective cover member 140. In addition, since the protective cover member 140 does not cover the upper or lower back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and does not interfere with replenishment and discharge of balls, the pachinko machine 10 employing the protective cover member 140 in existing island facilities Can be attached.

<Modified example 116>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 is fixedly formed at a predetermined position on the cover plate 171. On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be configured to be separable and attachable from the cover plate 171 so that the position of the cover-side protrusion 172 in the cover plate 171 can be changed and adjusted. Conventionally, the general pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change the board of the game board 13 or the like. Here, when the game board 13 attached to the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed, the position of the setting unit 100d of the main control device 110 attached to the game board 13 after the replacement may be changed. is there. In such a case, the inner frame 12 may not be able to be closed because the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 does not fit into the setting unit 100d of the main control device 110. On the other hand, in the case where the game board 13 is replaced and the position of the setting unit 100d of the main control device 110 is changed by configuring the cover-side protrusion 172 so as to be detachable and attachable from the cover plate 171. However, since the cover-side protrusion 172 can be fitted into the setting unit 100d, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved, and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protection cover member 140 and the main control device 110 can be mounted. The inner frame 12 can be locked without interfering with the setting unit 100d, so that the conventional distribution form of the pachinko machine 10 is not hindered.

<Modification 117>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the protective cover member 140 may be attached to the left side board 11c, the upper board 11a, and the lower board 11b in a cantilever shape. Also in this case, it is preferable to attach the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 from the inner wall surface of each of the plates 11a to 11c.

<Modification 118>
In the ninth embodiment, the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 is attached to the inner wall surface of the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11. On the other hand, the mounting surface 151 may be mounted on the outer wall surface of the right side plate 11d, or the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 may be fitted (inserted) inside the right side plate 11d. .

<Modification 119>
In the twelfth embodiment, the protection cover member 140 is configured to cover the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111. On the other hand, the control devices 110 and 111 are entirely covered by the protective cover member 140, and in addition to the control devices 110 and 111, other control devices (for example, It may be configured to cover part or all of the launch control device 112 and the power supply device 115). By covering many control devices with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration.

<Modification 120>
In the eleventh embodiment, the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed only when the inner frame 12 is open to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12. However, in other situations (for example, when the inner frame 12 is not opened, or when the front frame 14 is also opened even if the inner frame 12 is opened), the setting change or the setting confirmation cannot be performed. Was composed. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed when the front frame 14 is open even if the inner frame 12 is not open.

<Modification 121>
In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 122 is mounted on the power supply 115. On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch 122 may be mounted on the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111.

<Modification 122>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper protrusion of the protective cover member 140 and the lower surface. On the other hand, the upper surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 is engaged with the upper protrusion of the protective cover member 140 and the lower surface thereof, and the engagement is released with the operation of the cylinder lock 20. May be.

<Modification 123>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper protrusion of the protective cover member 140 and the lower surface. On the other hand, the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 may be configured to abut or engage with the outermost surfaces of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111.

<Modification 124>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 is formed in a wall shape surrounding the setting key 501 of the setting unit 100d. On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be configured by a protrusion that fits over the entire setting portion 100d.

<Modification 125>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper protrusion of the protective cover member 140 and the lower surface. On the other hand, the back pack 92 is extended to the portion of the payout control device 111, and the payout control device 111 is mounted on the back side of the backpack 92. Then, a part of the extended back pack 92 may be located in a space between the inner frame 12 and the protective cover member 140. With this configuration, the protection cover member 140 interferes with opening the back pack 92 to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is locked. Therefore, at the time of locking the inner frame 12, it is possible to prevent the backpack 92 from being fraudulent on the audio lamp control device 113 and the like disposed inside the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 126>
In the ninth to twelfth embodiments, the protective cover member 140 is formed of one member. On the other hand, two or more protective cover members may be attached to the outer frame 11 so as to cover part or all of the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 127>
In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed by the setting key 501. On the other hand, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the player wins one winning opening by the setting key 501 (for example, change from three to five), and the driving of a movable role assisting the winning in the winning opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or a member (for example, a stage or a croon on which the ball can roll) that affects the flow-down state of the ball Settings relating to the degree of advantage for the player, such as the inclination mode (for example, changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the inclination mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), can be changed in multiple stages. You may comprise.

<Modification 128>
In the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured so as to face the lateral direction (leftward or rightward) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. You may.

<Modification 129>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the big hit random numbers, the small hit random numbers, and the lost random numbers are set as continuous values, and a range judgment is made as to whether or not a big hit or a small hit (for example, “ (Whether it is 0 or more and not more than 49)) so as to reduce the control burden of main controller 110. On the other hand, each random number value (that is, the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value) that gives the game value may be arranged in a dispersed (dissipated) manner instead of a continuous arrangement. That is, any value may be used as long as the random number value is distributed so as to have the big hit probability (small hit probability, loss probability) equivalent to the above-described embodiment, and specifically, for example, updated with “0 to 999” In the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 to be set, the jackpot random number value in the low probability state is set to “7,341,555,777,831” so that the jackpot probability becomes 5/1000, and the small jackpot random value is set to “7,341,555,777,831”. 77, 175, 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845 "so that the small hit probability is 10/10000.

  Here, when a value that becomes a random number of the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, in the low-probability state and the high-probability state, if it is “0 to 50”) continuously exists, There is a possibility that the value can be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally winning a jackpot is increased. Therefore, by configuring as in the above-described modified example, it is possible to make it difficult to externally predict each random number value to which a game value is given, to enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 272a are respectively set so as not to be duplicated. A jackpot random value may be set. With this configuration, the value of the random number to be a big hit is changed by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Can be hardly predicted, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 130>
In the thirteenth embodiment, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol that can be simultaneously changed, if a small hit is won in one special symbol that is stopped first, it is stopped later. It was designed to eliminate the jackpot of the other special symbol that was played. On the other hand, when a small symbol is won in one special symbol that is stopped earlier, the progress of the dynamic display of the other special symbol that derives the later large jackpot to be stopped is temporarily stopped, and the small symbol is determined. After the small hitting game based on one special symbol to be derived is completed, the execution of the dynamic display of the other special symbol that has been paused is resumed, and the big hit is derived in the dynamic display. Good. With this configuration, all the winning combinations (game values) can be provided to the player, and an event (so-called damage) in which the gaming value is not given despite the winning combination is eliminated. And the player can be prevented from getting up to play.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, when the dynamic display to stop first derives the small hit game, and when the dynamic display to stop later can derive the big hit game or the small hit game, the dynamic stop The big hit game or the small hit game which can be derived by the target display is extinguished. On the other hand, when the dynamic display that stops first is a jackpot game, when the dynamic display that stops later can derive a jackpot game or a small jackpot game, it can be derived by the dynamic display that stops later. The big hit game or the small hit game may be configured to disappear.

<Modification 131>
In the thirteenth to seventeenth embodiments, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number C1, and the like are updated by software processing such as a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98). random number). On the other hand, a configuration may be employed in which the random number generation IC that updates the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like is updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random number (so-called hard random number). With this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from the outside, and the security performance can be improved.

<Modification 132>
In the thirteenth to seventeenth embodiments, the number of the big hit random numbers or the number of the small hit random numbers increases evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers (or small random number values) may be increased unequally or at a predetermined rate each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, the number of jackpot random numbers is increased by “2” for each of the set values “1” to “3”, while the number of jackpot random numbers is increased for the set values of “4” to “6”. Is increased by “5”. With this configuration, the game value that can be provided by the setting difference changes greatly, and a game with inflection (sharpness) due to the setting difference can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 133>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the type of the small hit game is determined using the small hit type counter C5. On the other hand, instead of using the small hit type counter C5, the big hit type counter C2 may be used to determine the type of the small hit game. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of counters, and to use a program for determining a jackpot type when selecting a small jackpot type, thereby reducing the program capacity.

<Modification 134>
In the thirteenth embodiment to the seventeenth embodiment, the configuration of changing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each set value is changed. On the other hand, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the big hit type counter or the small hit type counter is changed for each set value, and a setting difference is caused by a change in the selection ratio of the big hit type or the small hit type. Is also good.

<Modification 135>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the configuration is such that the determination command (ie, the special figure 1 determination command and the special figure 2 determination command) is transmitted for each special symbol. On the other hand, when one special symbol becomes a small hit or a big hit and the other special symbol is stopped, a common determination command in which both special symbols are stopped by one command is transmitted, and the fluctuation effect of both special symbols is performed. It may be configured to stop.

<Modification 136>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the number of executions of the dynamic display of each special symbol in the “time reduction state” is counted using the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter. On the other hand, a special figure 1 time reduction counter corresponding to the first special symbol may be provided so that the “time reduction state” may be ended depending on the number of times the first special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 137>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, each special symbol may be executed in the order in which the dynamic display is acquired (the order in which the special symbols are held), or the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be replaced with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. You may comprise so that it may perform more preferentially.

<Modification 138>
In the above thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, a random number value (ie, a jackpot random number value) that gives a game value is changed according to a setting change, and the changed value is a random number value that does not give a game value (that is, a random number value). (A random number value). On the other hand, when a random number value (for example, a jackpot random value) that gives a game value is changed due to a setting change, the change is replaced with a random value (for example, a small random number value) that gives another game value. )). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in the game value that can be given for each setting, provide a game with intonation (sharpness) for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 139>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the like, in the big hit random number table 272a, the respective random numbers are arranged in ascending order of “range of big hit random value”, “range of small hit random value”, and “range of lost random value”. Had been assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 272a2, in the ascending order, “range of jackpot random value”, “range of small hit random value”, “range of jackpot random value (hereinafter referred to as“ range of re-hit jackpot random value ”)” , "Random loss value range". Here, the “range of re-jackpot random numbers” is configured so as to correspond to the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change. With this configuration, the range of the random number value (ie, the increase in the jackpot random number value) corresponding to the role increased by the setting difference is changed to the random number value (ie, the lost random number value) corresponding to the role decreasing by the setting difference. ) Can be fixed, and the range of the random number value (ie, the fixed portion of the jackpot random value and the small random number value) that is not changed with the setting change can be fixed. Thereby, for example, in the control program of the hit / fail determination, while the basic hit / fail determination of the range of the fixed random value is shared by all the setting values, the increase in the number of the jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is set to the setting value. In addition, it is possible to make an additional determination in accordance with the above, thereby facilitating the design of the control program and reducing the number of development steps.

<Modification 140>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the like, in the big hit random number table 272a, the respective random numbers are arranged in the ascending order of “range of big hit random values”, “range of small hit random values”, and “range of lost random numbers”. Had been assigned. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that each random value is defined (set) in the order of increasing (or decreasing) number of random numbers. With this configuration, for example, when the determination of the random value is performed in the ascending order, the determination of the winning combination that is easy to win can be performed first, and the control load can be reduced.

<Modification 141>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the like, the random numbers are defined in the jackpot random number table 272a so as to be in the order of “range of jackpot random values”, “range of small hit random values”, and “range of lost random numbers” ( Settings). On the other hand, the “range of jackpot random number values” increased according to the setting change is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 272a so as to be adjacent (adjacent) to the “range of lost random number values” decreased according to the setting change. ). Specifically, in the big hit random number table 272a, each random value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of “small hit random value range”, “big hit random value range”, and “loss random number value range”. . With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is made adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the loss random number value), and with the setting change, The range of the random number value that is not changed (that is, the small random number value per hit) can be fixed. Thus, for example, in a control program for determining whether or not a small hit is appropriate, the determination of the random number value of the small hit is shared by all the set values, and the increase in the random number of the big hit due to the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value. This facilitates the design of the control program and reduces the number of development steps.

<Modification 142>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the like, when transitioning from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability variation state”, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is improved (increased by 10 times). On the other hand, when transitioning from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”, the small hit probability of the special symbol may be improved. Further, when transitioning from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”, the degree of increase in the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 10 times or less (for example, 2 times). Furthermore, in the case of transition from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”, both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are set to be improved (for example, the big hit probability is five times and the small hit probability is also five times). Good.

<Modification 143>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened and driven in the big hit game, and the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72 different from the variable winning device 65 is opened and driven in the small winning game. Was configured. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the large winning opening 65a is opened and driven in the first driving mode (for example, a maximum opening time of 30 seconds × 16 rounds). The opening driving may be performed in a second driving mode (for example, a maximum opening time of 1.8 seconds × 1 round) which is disadvantageous for the player. This eliminates the need to share a special winning opening 65a for the jackpot game and the small hitting game and to provide another device (for example, a small winning opening, etc.), thereby reducing the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 and reducing the number of pachinko machines. 10 can be reduced.

<Modification 144>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol is higher than the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small hitting game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small hitting game in the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. The winning probability of the small hit game in may be configured to be equal.

<Modification 145>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the like, the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 is not notified, the number of appearances of the big hit game and the number of appearances of the small hit game are output to the outside, and the contents are displayed on a data lamp or the like. The pachinko machine 10 is suggested to be set to the player based on the number of outgoings. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the setting situation of the pachinko machine 10 may be notified (suggested) to a player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined number of dynamic displays are executed, a part of an ending screen of a jackpot game, a part of an effect screen executed at predetermined intervals, or immediately after winning a predetermined combination, and the like. Then, an image (for example, a character design corresponding to the set value) indicating the set contents of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. With such a configuration, in addition to the number of appearances of the big hit game and the small hit game, the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested to the player by performing the game, and the player confirms the above image and the like. According to the number of appearances of the big hit game and the small hit game, a game property of estimating the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10 is generated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 146>
In the above-described thirteenth embodiment and the like, a so-called loop that maintains the “super-probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” only when the “super-probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” is entered until the next jackpot occurs. It consisted of type game specifications. On the other hand, even if any of the jackpots is won after the end of the jackpot, a game in which a “probability change state” (a so-called “ST type”) is given under the condition of executing a predetermined number of dynamic displays after the end of the jackpot. It may be configured by specification. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 147>
In the above thirteenth embodiment, when the special symbol is in the high probability state after entering the “super probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state”, the player can recognize that the special symbol is in the high probability state. It was configured to inform. On the other hand, unlike the above “super-probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”, the so-called “latent probability fluctuation state” in which the special symbol is in the high probability state but does not suggest (notify) to that effect to the player is executed. You may comprise so that it is possible. With this configuration, when a jackpot is won, the player does not recognize whether the special symbol is in the high probability state or not, and a gaming property that indicates which gaming state the gaming state is born, and the game is played. By providing variations and realizing various game characteristics, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 148>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the like, in all the set values, when the special symbol changes from the low probability state to the high probability state, the jackpot probability is increased evenly (all 10 times increase). On the other hand, the increase rate of the jackpot probability is changed for each set value (for example, the set value “1” is five times, the set value “2” is six times,..., The set value “6” is ten times, etc.). It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol, and the phenomenon itself of winning the jackpot game earlier in the high probability state becomes a setting suggestion. Therefore, in the high-probability state, a game characteristic of how quickly a jackpot is won or not is created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 149>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the like, the configuration is such that a setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in any of the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the configuration is such that the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated and the setting difference of the jackpot probability in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state) is provided. May be.

<Modification 150>
In the sixteenth embodiment, the big hit random value and the small hit random value are increased for each set value, and the increment of each random value is compensated for from the lost random value. On the other hand, only the big hit random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the big hit random value may be compensated from the small hit random value and the lost random value. With this configuration, the change in the number of jackpot random numbers based on the setting change can be compensated for from the small hit random value and the loss random value, and the change in the jackpot random value can be fixed. There is no need to supplement from a predetermined random number value of one. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from the predetermined random number value of 1 for the change of the jackpot random number value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers may be equally compensated from the number of small hit random numbers and the number of lost random numbers, or may be reduced by the number of small hit random numbers and the number of lost random numbers. Supplementation may be made so that the ratios become equal.

<Modification 151>
In the thirteenth embodiment, as the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, the number of random numbers corresponding to the hand that is likely to be acquired in the gaming state with the highest stay ratio (ie, the loss in the “normal gaming state”) (The number of random numbers) is reduced, and the decrease is the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers. On the other hand, for each special symbol executed in the gaming state, the special symbols may be compensated by reducing the number of random numbers corresponding to the winning combinations easily acquired in the gaming state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal gaming state", in the first special symbol that is easy to be executed, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers is compensated by decreasing the number of lost random numbers that are most easily acquired. In the “probability fluctuation state”, the second special symbol that is easy to execute is configured to compensate for the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers by reducing the number of small jackpot random values that are most easily obtained. You may.

<Modification 152>
In the thirteenth embodiment, as the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change, the number of lost random numbers that are not displayed (accounted) on the data lamp in a large (clear) manner is reduced, and the decrease is calculated as It was configured to compensate for the increased number of jackpot random numbers. On the other hand, as the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, the number of random numbers corresponding to other roles other than the lost role that is not largely (clearly) displayed (accounted) on the data lamp is reduced. , The decrease and the increase may be compensated as the number of jackpot random numbers.

<Modification 153>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is set to “9999” for all the set values, and the number of jackpot random numbers that can be a big hit is changed for each set value, and the change is lost. It was configured to compensate from random numbers and to change the jackpot derivation probability. In contrast, the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 may be changed for each set value to change the jackpot derivation probability. Specifically, for example, the number of jackpot random numbers is 100 (for example, “0 to 99”) in all the set values, while the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “9999” for the set value “1”. , The maximum update value of the jackpot random number value is “9899” at the set value “2”, the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “9799” at the set value “3”, and the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is at the set value “4”. When the maximum update value is "9699", the set value is "5", the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is "9599", and when the set value is "6", the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is "9499". May be configured to reduce the number of lost random numbers, and to change the jackpot derivation probability.

<Modification 154>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the number of small random numbers is smaller than the number of random numbers, so that the probability of derivation is higher than that of small ones in the first special symbol. The number of small hit random numbers is set to be larger than the number of lost random numbers so that the probability of deriving the small hit is higher than the loss. On the other hand, in the first special symbol, the number of small hit random numbers is larger than the number of lost random numbers, and in the second special symbol, the number of small random numbers is smaller (or smaller) than the number of lost random values. (A random number value itself may not be provided). Then, when changing the number of jackpot random numbers by changing the setting, a larger random number value other than the jackpot random number or an increase in the number of jackpot random number values from the smaller random number value is compensated. May be configured.

<Modification 155>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the jackpot, the small jackpot, and the losing hand are provided as the extracting hand, so that each hand can be extracted. On the other hand, as a role to which a game value is given to a player, a middle hit is provided in which a game value of less than a big hit or a small value or more is given, and each of the roles is configured to be extractable. While increasing the number of random numbers corresponding to one of the roles (for example, a jackpot, a middle, or a small jackpot), while increasing the number of other roles (for example, a middle, a small, or a small jackpot), A configuration may be adopted in which the number of random numbers corresponding to the losing role is reduced. The jackpot, the medium jackpot and the small jackpot are, for example, a 15R jackpot as a jackpot, an 8R jackpot as a middle jackpot, a 4R jackpot as a jackpot, a probable jackpot as a jackpot, a latent probability jackpot as a jackpot, and a jackpot. When a time saving jackpot is applicable, a 15R probability variable jackpot as a jackpot, a 15R time jackpot as a medium jackpot, and a 15R ordinary jackpot as a small jackpot (a jackpot that does not shift to the “probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction state”) may be applicable. Is exemplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display is instructed from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device. Further, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, a case has been described in which the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON when the stop type command is received. When the stop type command is received in response to the above, the change start flag may be set to ON. This makes it possible to suppress a strange fluctuation effect from being executed when a fluctuation type command is not received and a stop type command is received.

  Further, the variation start flag may be set to ON at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, based on the fact that the variation start flag has been turned on, a display that notifies the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This allows the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the sound lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can be. In this case, at the timing when the stop type command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine a stop symbol of the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 236 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image for which the drawing processing is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). Therefore, a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may be one in which the third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed. Further, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided, and the third symbol display device is provided. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect executed on the display device 81. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by providing an accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Also, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous announcement effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous announcement effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  Thus, every time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode. By playing the sound, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illuminations 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, but the display of symbols by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The continuous announcement effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, so that an unusual effect is performed on the player. Can be easily recognized. Further, the continuous announcement effect can be easily and continuously performed by a simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, actuation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination portions 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous announcement effect is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 performs a lottery process at the time of start / stop of the fluctuating process and the start of the change, the continuous announcement effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113, and the change effect is performed by the display control device 114. When performing a notice effect, each processing can be shared by each control device. Therefore, the load can be prevented from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be reduced.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the audio output device 226. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling them in conjunction with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of continuous announcement effects. In addition, the method of executing the continuous announcement effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) , Or a combination thereof) to prepare a plurality of continuous announcement production modes that are selected in accordance with the game state (15R probability change jackpot, 2R probability change jackpot, 15R regular jackpot, departure) after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Is also good.

  In addition, when a continuous announcement effect is performed, an image for a continuous announcement effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the continuous announcement effect is completed. The stop symbols to be displayed may be displayed by displaying a so-called “chance eye”, which is a combination of predetermined symbols. In this case, if it is determined in the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27C) that the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 has received the continuous advance command, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on, and Alternatively, other stop symbol determination flags may be set to off. In the command determination processing, after the stop identification command processing, processing corresponding to the continuous advance command is executed in other command processing, so that the chance pattern is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eyes can be definitely displayed when the fluctuation stops. If the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays the chance symbols as stop symbols for each variable effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  In the above embodiment, when there is a prize (start prize) in the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, the main control device 110 increases the number of retained balls added by “1” to the sound lamp control device 113. A description has been given of the case where the counter C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning prize and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in response to the hold ball number command notified to The type of counter included in the ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the value of another counter. When the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired along with the winning start, the information indicating the values of the respective counters is included in the reserved ball count command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command different from the reserved ball count command, and these values may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. As another command, a dedicated command for notifying the value of each counter acquired with the start winning prize to the voice lamp control device 113 may be used, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be obtained by adding the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning prize to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each notified counter is included in the command in the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether or not such information may be included. Thereby, based on the information on the number of hold times included in the command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores, in one of the pre-read information first to fourth areas corresponding to the number of hold times, each of the information included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the ball count command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the ball count command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When the command of the number of reserved balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether the jackpot is a jackpot, a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, In this case, a part or all of the outliers and the like are determined, and these determination results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with a part or all of the value of the counter, It may be stored in the RAM 223.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control device 110 calculates the number of retained balls by using one retained ball number counter 203a regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b receives a ball. The case of counting has been described. On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter for the first starting port corresponding to the first starting port 64a, the reserved ball number counter for the second starting port corresponding to the second starting port 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 It is also possible to separately prepare and count the number of reserved balls associated with the start winning in the first starting port 64a and the number of reserved balls associated with the starting winning in the second starting port 64b.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the maximum number of reserve balls that can be reserved is set to “4” regardless of which of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b the ball has won has been described, The maximum number of reserved balls that can be retained with the start winning in the first starting port 64a and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be retained with the starting winning in the second starting port 64b are separately determined and managed. Is also good. For example, the maximum number of balls that can be held with the start winning prize in the first starting port 64a is “4”, and the maximum number of balls that can be held with the starting prize in the second starting port 64b is “4”. At a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls retained with the start winning in the first starting port 64a is “4”, and the number of retained balls retained in accordance with the starting winning in the second starting port 64b Is "2", even if there is a further starting prize in the first starting opening 64a, the starting prize is not held, but if there is a starting prize in the second starting opening 64b, it is held. You may. As a result, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b can be recognized by the player as being separate from each other, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, for example, the variable effect based on the winning winning in the second starting port 64b may be performed in preference to the variable effect based on the winning winning in the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the winning winning in the first starting port 64a may be performed in preference to the variable effect based on the winning winning in the second starting port 64b. This allows the player to pay more attention to the starting port in which the variable effect is preferentially performed.

  In the above embodiment, a description will be given of a case where two starting ports, a first starting port 64a and a second starting port 64b, are provided on the game board 13 as starting ports from which a jackpot lottery is started when a ball is entered. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding reserved ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting port, and for each starting port, the reserved ball number retained with the winning in the corresponding starting port. The number may be counted. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held in association with the start winning in the corresponding opening may be set for each starting opening.

  In the case where there are two or more starting ports, the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 to notify that the holding has been performed along with the winning in the starting port includes May be included to indicate whether a hold has been made by winning a prize at the start port of the game. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating which of the start-up ports has the fluctuation effect suspended. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the starting port indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. Is set, and the variation pattern command is received. If the number of retained balls counter for the starting port indicated by the variation pattern command is reduced by 1, the number of retained balls can be counted for each starting port.

  When a plurality of starting ports are provided on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with each of the starting ports (winning winning) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 with the start winning is the one acquired with the start winning to any starting opening. Information indicating whether or not there is may be included. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating which of the starting openings is a fluctuation effect associated with a start winning. . Further, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a pre-reading information storage area is prepared for each start-up opening, and the respective counter values transmitted from the main control unit 110 in accordance with the start winning at the corresponding start-up opening are stored in the RAM 223. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. Thus, every time a variation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the starting opening that has detected the start winning that has triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. it can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the fluctuating effect being held for each starting port can be held in the sound lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, in the case where the probability of becoming a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the outdated type, and the like are different depending on the starting opening that has won the start, in the pre-reading process, whether or not each variable effect will be a jackpot, The type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, the type of a jackpot in the case of a miss, and the like can be correctly determined based on which starting port the start winning. In the case where the variable effect based on the start winning prize to one starting opening is performed in preference to the variable effect based on the starting winning prize to another starting opening, the change based on the starting winning prize to the first starting opening is performed. The pre-reading process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of suspensions of the variable effect that will be the most recent big hit can be correctly determined.

  When a plurality of starting ports are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 gives a continuous notice when the values of the respective counters obtained based on the winning start at the starting port are received from the main control device 110 by a command. When the start of the effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) held at that time, regardless of the starting opening where the starting prize has been won. Also, a plurality of starting ports are provided, and in a pachinko machine that executes a variable effect for a winning in one starting port with priority over a variable effect for a winning in another starting port, The start of the continuous announcement effect may be determined only from the pre-read result of the counter value acquired for the winning at the starting opening where the variable effect is executed. As a result, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning in the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous announcement effect is not started for this variable effect. If a continuous announcement effect is started for a variable effect corresponding to winning in a low-priority starting opening, and if the variable effect is continuously suspended in a high-priority starting opening, the continuous announcement effect is hard to end. There is a possibility that a situation will occur. On the other hand, in the present modified example, it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting port with the lower priority. Is not started, so that such a situation can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, a description will be given of a case where the sound lamp control device 113 decreases the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 (see S1107 in FIG. 26). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fluctuation processing (FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110
), The value (N) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a of the main controller 110, which has been subtracted in accordance with the setting of the fluctuation pattern command by the fluctuation start processing (S307) (see S305 in FIG. 13), A command to reserve the number of balls is set so as to be transmitted from the control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, and the command to reserve the number of balls is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command It may be transmitted. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of balls retained in the main control device 110. In this case, S1107 in FIG. 26 is omitted. Further, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the subtraction may be included in the variation pattern command. In this case, when receiving the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 may extract the number of retained balls (N) included in the variation pattern command and set the number of retained balls to the number of retained balls stored in the RAM 223.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four. It is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, for the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately for each starting port. And any number other than "." Further, the maximum number of reserved balls in each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. In addition, the number of retained balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b can be changed in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or an area divided into four. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of the reserved balls. It may be configured to notify the number.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined direction such as a direction or an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 were scrolled so fast that the player could not visually recognize it was used. Thus, all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In the slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by a bonus (combination) to the total number of game media (coins and medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the combination of bonuses. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device in place of the award ball count table 202e, and is equivalent to the bonus ratio management chip or the bonus ratio management chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of winning combinations (patterns are aligned on the activated line) established in the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning combinations established during the bonus game period, and established during the AT period The number of winning combinations may be counted to manage the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value found in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. In addition, each concept of the various inventions described below may be obtained by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another invention to the concept of the invention or a part or a plurality of the configuration of the other invention. The concept of the invention may be modified and replaced by replacing the parts.

(Issue 1)
The following gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 To L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, and O1 have been made to solve the following problems.

  That is, conventionally, a game medium is fired by a firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, and when the gaming medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined value is set for the winning port. There are gaming machines in which a number of game media are paid out to players. In addition, some of the winning openings are provided with an accessory, and the operation of the accessory affects the winning of the game medium (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  By the way, some of the wrongdoers illegally actuate the role in the winning port provided with the role, or guide the game medium to win the role in the winning port, and the role is provided. Some attempt to increase the winnings in the winning opening. However, the response to discover such misconduct is insufficient.

  The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting illegal acts.

(Means and effects 1)
<Group A>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
An output unit that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout unit is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out along with the prize in the prize port, the ratio of the first and second prize ports (that is, the operation of the prize), Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters.

In the gaming machine A1,
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the launch means has won any one of the winning holes, the payout is performed based on the winning hole of the game medium. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means, and comprising a main control means for performing a main control of the game,
A gaming machine A2, wherein the storage means, the storage control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the prize detecting means and the game medium fired by the firing means have won one of the prize holes, the game medium is paid out based on the winning prize hole of the game medium. Means for setting the number of game media, and a payout number setting means for notifying the payout means, wherein the main control means for performing main control of the game includes a first control means for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Storage means for accumulating and storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the winning opening; storage control means for accumulating the information and storing the information in the storage means; Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. Thereby, the detection of a prize in the winning opening by the prize detecting means, the setting of the number of game media paid out based on the detection, based on the set number of payouts, the number of game media paid out by the payout means, The main control is performed by the storage of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening in the storage means and the output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means. It can be done in the means. Therefore, even if a fraudster outputs fraudulent information from the output means and tries to prevent the fraud detection based on the ratio of the role and the property, the above configuration is completed by the main control means. Difficult to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the detection of the fraudulent behavior based on the ratio of the public goods by the output of the fraudulent information by the fraudster.

In the gaming machine A2,
The gaming machine A3, wherein the main control means is housed in a board box in which a box pace and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, since the main control means is housed in the board box in which the box pace and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected in a non-openable manner, the wrongdoer can give illegal information to the output means. Is output to prevent the detection of fraudulent acts based on the ratio of characters, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the detection of the fraudulent behavior based on the ratio of the accessory and the act of outputting the fraudulent information by the fraudster.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3,
External device connection means connectable to an external device;
An external device connection detection unit that detects that the external device is connected to the external device connection unit,
The output unit is based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit for the external device, triggered by the detection of the connection of the external device by the external device connection detection unit. A gaming machine A4 that outputs a signal.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connection means, the external device is detected by the external device connection means, and upon the detection, a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is sent to the external device. Is output by the output means. Thereby, by simply connecting the external device to the external device connection means of the gaming machine, the external device is paid out based on the winning in the first winning port for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Since the signal based on the information related to the ratio of the number of the played game media is output from the gaming machine, it is possible to quickly and easily find a fraudulent act based on the accessory ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine A5 for outputting at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning in the corresponding winning opening is made at each winning opening. Output by Thereby, even if the device that receives the signal output from the output unit does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when a prize is won for each winning port in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that the accessory ratio can be easily analyzed on the basis of the signal output from.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means in a storage means. Machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5. That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is stopped, all winnings are reflected, and the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine A6,
The gaming machine A7, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A6. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information regarding the winning in the latest winning port stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7,
The first winning opening includes a second winning opening having an accessory that operates continuously based on a game,
The storage control means, the information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening, with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, Accumulate and store in the storage means,
The output unit is configured to store the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit, which is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Information relating to a ratio of numbers, and information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. And a game machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are provided. That is, the first winning port provided in the game area includes a second winning port having a role that is continuously operated based on the game, and the number of the game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening is also stored in the storage means by the storage control means. And information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device, which is accumulated and stored in the storage means. And information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. As a result, the ratio of the one receiving the signal output from the output means to the ratio of the one due to the first winning opening (that is, the operation of the accessory) out of the number of the game media paid out according to the winning in the winning opening. In addition to the ratio of the bonus, the continuous bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the second winning port (that is, the activation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated), can be analyzed. There is an effect that fraudulent acts can be detected more accurately based on the continuous character ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the launch means has won any one of the winning holes, the payout is performed based on the winning hole of the game medium. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means, and comprising a main control means for performing a main control of the game,
The main control unit has an operation unit that executes an operation for performing main control of the game,
The gaming machine A7, wherein at least the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, the storage control means, and the output means are realized by executing calculations by the calculation means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8. That is, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the prize detecting means and the game medium fired by the firing means have won one of the prize holes, the game medium is paid out based on the winning prize hole of the game medium. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means, wherein the main control means for performing the main control of the game includes a calculation for executing a calculation for performing the main control of the game. Means are provided. Then, at least the payout based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, which is accumulated and stored in the storage means, at least in the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, and the storage means. The generation of the information related to the ratio of the number of the game media performed and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by executing the calculation by the calculation means. Accordingly, the detection of the winning in the winning opening by the winning detecting means, the setting of the number of game media paid out based on the detection, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts, The storage control means stores the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in one winning opening in the storage means, and the output of the signal based on the information stored in the storage means, All can be performed by the arithmetic unit of the main control means. Therefore, even if a fraudster makes the output means output fraudulent information and tries to prevent a fraudulent act from being discovered based on the accessory ratio, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the detection of the fraudulent behavior based on the ratio of the public goods by the output of the fraudulent information by the fraudster.

<Group B>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
Main control means for performing main control of the game is provided,
The main control unit includes an operation unit that executes an operation for performing main control of the game,
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the launch means has won one of the winning holes, the payout is performed based on the winning hole of the game medium. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculating means,
The gaming machine B1, wherein the storage control means and the output means are provided on a different microchip from the effect means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control unit that performs the main control of the game is provided with a calculation unit that performs a calculation for performing the control. The winning detection unit and the game medium that is fired by the firing unit are either When the winning detection means detects that a winning is made in the winning opening of the game medium, the payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning opening of the game medium and notifying the payout means , By the execution of the operation by the operation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided on a separate microchip from the arithmetic means. Thereby, the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit to the first winning port can be increased without providing a separate microchip and largely rewriting the instruction (program) of the operation executed by the calculation unit. There is an effect that a signal based on information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning can be output. A calculating means for outputting a signal based on information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a prize to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Thus, there is an effect that a large part of the processing capacity of the calculation means can be used for main control of the game.

In the gaming machine B1,
The gaming machine B2, wherein the microchip is provided in the main control unit.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the microchip provided with the storage control means, the output means, and the effect means is provided in the main control means. Thereby, based on the set number of payouts, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Is stored in the storage means, and a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output in the main control means. Therefore, even if the wrongdoer tries to output the wrong information to the output means to prevent the detection of the wrongdoing based on the ratio of the public goods, the above-mentioned configuration is completed by the main control means. Information is difficult to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the detection of the fraudulent behavior based on the ratio of the public goods by the output of the fraudulent information by the fraudster.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2,
The gaming machine B3, wherein the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a board box in which a box pace and a box cover for covering an opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, since the main control means and the microchip are housed in a board box in which the box pace and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected in a non-openable manner, a fraudulent person can However, even if an attempt is made to output illegal information to prevent the detection of fraudulent acts based on the ratio of characters, it becomes difficult to input the illegal information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the detection of the fraudulent behavior based on the ratio of the accessory and the act of outputting the fraudulent information by the fraudster.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3,
The main control means includes:
At each winning opening, there is provided payout information storing means for storing information on the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning in the corresponding winning opening,
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
The start-up processing, based on the storage of the payout information storage means, for each winning opening, when there is a winning in the corresponding winning opening, information indicating the number of game media paid out by the payout means, A gaming machine B4 including a process for transmitting to the microchip.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3. In other words, the payout information storage means stores information on the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port in each prize port. In the arithmetic means, a start-up process is executed when the main control means is turned on. In the start-up process, each winning port is assigned to a corresponding winning port based on the storage of the payout information storage means. Information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize is transmitted to the microchip. Thus, even if the information indicating the number of game media to be paid out for winning in each winning opening that differs for each type of gaming machine does not need to be stored in the microchip in advance, the microchip is controlled by the main control when the power is turned on. Based on the information transmitted from the means, calculate the accessory ratio, or output a signal based on the information, and receive the signal output from the output means, There is an effect that calculation can be performed.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
The gaming machine B5, wherein the microchip includes a second calculating unit that performs a calculation for realizing the storage control unit and the output unit.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4. That is, the microchip is provided with the second arithmetic means, and the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is calculated. The storage control means for accumulating and storing related information in the storage means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the operation of the second operation means. . Thus, by changing the operation instruction (program) of the second effect unit, there is an effect that it is possible to flexibly cope with a function change or a specification change of the storage control unit or the output unit.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
The gaming machine B6, wherein the microchip realizes the storage control unit and the output unit by wired logic.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4. That is, the microchip stores information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device by wired logic. And an output unit that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Thus, processing such as storing or outputting information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout unit to the storage unit. Can be performed at high speed.

<Group C>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6,
The gaming machine C1 wherein the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout device, stored in the storage means, It is maintained while the power is turned off. Thereby, regardless of whether the power to the gaming machine is turned on or not, the gaming medium paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means over a long period of time. The information relating to the ratio of the numbers can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, the player who has received the signal output from the output means can analyze the accessory ratio of the gaming machine over a long period of time, so that there is an effect that it is possible to detect past misconduct.

In the gaming machine C1,
A second storage unit that cannot hold information while the power is off;
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means in a storage means. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. The second storage means cannot retain information while the power is turned off. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all prizes are reflected, and a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is provided. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. Further, the storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored information even when the power is turned off, and generally requires large power for writing, takes a long time for writing, Although the number of times of writing is limited from the viewpoint of performance, the configuration described above can reduce the number of times of writing to the storage unit, and can suppress the problem of the storage unit from becoming apparent.

In the gaming machine C2,
The gaming machine C3, wherein the output unit outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information regarding the winning in the latest winning port stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

<Group D>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
The storage control means, as the information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening, with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, A gaming machine D1 wherein information indicating a winning detected by the winning detecting means is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage control means stores, in the storage means, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The information indicating the winning opening for which a winning is detected by the winning detecting means is accumulated and stored. Then, a signal based on this information is output. The signal received from the output means is received based on the information indicating the winning opening in which the winning is detected, based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means and the winning in the first winning opening. The number of game media paid out can be calculated, and the accessory ratio can be analyzed from these numbers. Then, when a suspicious change is recognized in the accessory ratio, the cause can be deeply searched based on the information indicating the winning opening in which the winning is detected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably detect a fraudulent act based on the ratio of the accessory.

In the gaming machine D1,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity has been deviated, pays out information related to a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit by the payout unit. The information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media issued is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means is based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The information is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, each time a predetermined opportunity is met, the information stored in the second storage means reflecting all winnings is determined based on the winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine D2,
The gaming machine D3, wherein the output unit outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information regarding the winning in the latest winning port stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine D4 for outputting at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning in the corresponding winning opening is made at each winning opening. Output by Thereby, even if the device that receives the signal output from the output unit does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when a prize is won for each winning port in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that the accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed from the information on winnings output from the prize.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit, and the number of the game media paid out based on the prize in the first prize port. A ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of numbers;
The gaming machine D5, wherein the output unit outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined. , Calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit is output by the output unit as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit. This eliminates the need for the signal that has been output by the output means to calculate the ratio (combination ratio), thereby facilitating the analysis of fraud. In addition, in the case of receiving the signal output by the output means, when trying to calculate the accessory ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding prize port in each of the prize ports set incorrectly or incorrectly. May be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D5, since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

In the gaming machine D5,
The output unit, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit A gaming machine D6, which outputs a signal indicating the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D5. That is, the signal indicating the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means accumulated and stored in the storing means and the first game medium calculated by the ratio calculating means and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means. A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the winning opening is output by the output means. In this way, when there is a suspicious point in the above-mentioned ratio (accessory ratio) output from the output means, the cause is searched for from the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means, which is also output. There is an effect that can be.

<Group E>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted;
When the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the first storage unit determines whether the predetermined opportunity has fallen out of the game medium paid out by the payout unit based on the information stored in the second storage unit. Ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the winning opening,
The gaming machine E1 wherein the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are obtained. That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. When it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the winning of the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is performed based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the ratio is calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, the calculated ratio (government ratio) is output, so that those who receive the signal output by the output means do not need to calculate the ratio (government ratio), and analyze the fraud. There is an effect that can be facilitated. In addition, when an attempt is made to calculate an accessory ratio by receiving a signal output by the output means, or when an incorrect or incorrectly set winning port has a corresponding winning port. There is a possibility that the accessory ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, but since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory The effect is that the ratio can be calculated. In addition, since the information indicating the accessory ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the amount of information stored in the storage unit can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the storage unit can be prevented from increasing.

In the gaming machine E1,
The gaming machine E2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information regarding the winning in the latest winning port stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined. In addition, while the information stored in the storage means is the accessory ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means. This has the effect of enabling a deeper analysis of the cause of the suspected fraud situation.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine E3 that outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning in the corresponding winning opening is made at each winning opening. Output by As a result, if there is a situation where the wrongdoing is suspected due to the analysis of the role material ratio, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means at each winning port when there is a prize at the corresponding winning port is referred to. Thus, there is an effect that the cause of the situation can be found.

<Group F>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the prize detecting means, the number of game media that has won each prize port is counted for each prize port after a predetermined trigger is released and before the next predetermined trigger is stopped, and counted for each prize port. Second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means,
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, store the information stored in the second storage unit with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit. A gaming machine F1 that is accumulated and stored in the storage means as information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a winning in the first winning port.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the detection by the prize detecting means, the number of game media winning in each prize port from the time when the predetermined trigger is released to the time when the next predetermined trigger is stopped is counted by the second storage control means for each prize port. Then, information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. When the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means pays out the information indicating the winning game media, which is stored in the second storage means and counted for each winning opening, by the payout means. The storage control means accumulates and stores the information in the storage means as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out. Thereby, first, the prize detected by the prize detecting means is counted by the second storage control means for each prize port, so that the prize to the prize port is not lost, and the information stored in the second storage means is stored. Can be reflected. Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, the information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning port, which is stored in the second storage means reflecting all winnings, is provided by the payout means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. In addition, the storage means stores the total number of game media for each winning port that has won a prize from the time when a predetermined opportunity is delayed to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released, so that the storage capacity required for the storage means is reduced. There is an effect that the increase can be suppressed. Further, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media which have won each winning opening from the moment when the predetermined opportunity is delayed to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is terminated, so that the second storage means is required. There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1,
The gaming machine F2, wherein the output unit outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. Thereby, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning port, including the latest winning in the winning port, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means and is stored in the second storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the presence or absence of impropriety, including the latest winning situation.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine F3 which outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning in the corresponding winning opening is made at each winning opening. Output by Thereby, even if the device that receives the signal output from the output unit does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when a prize is won for each winning port in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that the accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed from the information on winnings output from the prize.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit, and the number of the game media paid out based on the prize in the first prize port. A ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of numbers;
The gaming machine F4, wherein the output unit outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined. , Calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit is output by the output unit as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit. This eliminates the necessity of calculating the ratio (government ratio) for those receiving the signal output from the output means, and has the effect of facilitating the analysis of fraud. In addition, when a signal output from the output means is received, if the attempt to calculate the accessory ratio is made, if there is a prize in the corresponding prize port at each prize port set incorrectly or incorrectly. May be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

In the gaming machine F4,
The output unit, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit A gaming machine F5, which outputs a signal indicating the game machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F4. That is, as information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating, for each winning port, the number of game media which has won each winning port after a predetermined trigger has elapsed and before the next predetermined trigger has stopped. And a signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device, calculated by the ratio calculating means. Is output by Accordingly, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (actor-character ratio) output from the output means, the output of the predetermined trigger, which is also output, is delayed until the next predetermined trigger is stopped. The effect is that the cause can be found from the number of game media for each winning opening that has won each winning opening.

<Group G>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the prize detecting means, the number of game media that has won each prize port is counted for each prize port after a predetermined trigger is released and before the next predetermined trigger is stopped, and counted for each prize port. Second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means,
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted;
When the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the first storage unit determines whether the predetermined opportunity has fallen out of the game medium paid out by the payout unit based on the information stored in the second storage unit. Ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the winning opening,
The gaming machine G1, wherein the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the detection by the prize detecting means, the number of game media winning in each prize port from the time when the predetermined trigger is released to the time when the next predetermined trigger is stopped is counted by the second storage control means for each prize port. Then, information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the winning of the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is performed based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the ratio is calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, the calculated ratio (government ratio) is output, so that those who receive the signal output by the output means do not need to calculate the ratio (government ratio), and analyze the fraud. There is an effect that can be facilitated. In addition, when a signal output from the output means is received, if the attempt to calculate the accessory ratio is made, if there is a prize in the corresponding prize port at each prize port set incorrectly or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the accessory ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The effect is that the ratio can be calculated. In addition, since the information indicating the accessory ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the amount of information stored in the storage unit can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the storage unit can be prevented from increasing. Further, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have won each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is delayed to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released, so that the second storage means is required. There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine G1,
The gaming machine G2, wherein the output unit outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. Thereby, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning port, including the latest winning in the winning port, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means and is stored in the second storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the presence or absence of impropriety, including the latest winning situation. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the accessory ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is stored in each winning port until a predetermined trigger is released after a predetermined trigger is released. Since the information indicates the number of winning game media, the use of the information has an effect that the cause of a situation suspected of cheating can be analyzed more deeply.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine G3 that outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1 or G2. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning in the corresponding winning opening is made at each winning opening. Output by As a result, when a signal received from the output unit is received, if there is a situation where suspected misconduct is analyzed by analyzing the accessory ratio, if there is a winning in the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening, There is an effect that the cause of the situation can be found by referring to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

<Group H>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3,
A second storage control unit that stores information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit in the second storage unit after a predetermined trigger has been released and before the next predetermined trigger has stopped, and
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means in a storage means. Machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3, the following effects are obtained. . That is, the information related to the prize detected by the prize detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storage means by the second storage control means from the time when the predetermined opportunity is released to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is stopped, all winnings are reflected, and the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. Further, the second storage means stores only the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means from the time when the predetermined opportunity is released to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released, so that the storage capacity of the second storage means is reduced. This has the effect that it can be kept small.

In the gaming machine H1,
The gaming machine H2, wherein the output unit outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information regarding the winning in the latest winning port stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The gaming machine H3, wherein the second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines H1 and H2. In other words, the information on the prize, which is stored in the second storage means and is detected by the prize detecting means from the time when the predetermined opportunity is released to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released, is retained even when the power is turned off. Thereby, when the power is cut off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the information on the winning that is stored in the second storage unit and has not yet been reflected in the storage in the storage unit, and the reliability of the output signal can be reduced. There is an effect that can be increased.

<Group I>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted;
Power-off detecting means for detecting that the power is off,
The storage control means stores the information in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted and when the power-off detection means detects that power has been cut off. The game medium paid out based on a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that information relating to the ratio of the number of game machines is stored in a storage means.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3, Has the effect of That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Further, even when the power-off detecting means detects that the power supply is cut off, the payout is performed by the payout means based on the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means stored in the second storage means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media played is accumulated in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is released, and even when the power is cut off before the predetermined opportunity is released, the payout is performed by reflecting all winnings. Information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is cut off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the information on the winning stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means, and the game medium paid out by the payout means There is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media.

In the gaming machine I1,
At least for a predetermined period even after the power is cut off, comprising a power supply unit capable of supplying power,
The gaming machine I2, wherein the power supply unit supplies the power to at least the storage control unit.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, at least the storage control unit is supplied with power by the power supply unit for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power-off detection means detects that the power is cut off, the storage control means uses the power to store the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device based on the payout device is reliably stored in the storage device. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine I2,
The gaming machine I3, wherein the power supply unit supplies the power to the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I2. That is, not only the storage control unit but also the second storage unit is supplied with power by the power supply unit for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Thus, before the situation stored in the second storage means is deleted, the payout by the payout means is ensured based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. There is an effect that information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media used can be stored in the storage means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The second storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored information even when the power is turned off,
The prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit when the power is supplied and when the determination unit determines that the predetermined trigger has been lost. Storing information related to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out device based on the information on the A gaming machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I3 are produced. In addition to the above, the following effects are obtained. That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. The information stored in the second storage means is retained even when the power is turned off. Then, when the power is supplied and when the predetermined means is judged to be out of order by the determination means, the payout means is provided based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out is accumulated and stored in the storage device by the storage control device. . Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the number of game media paid out by the payout means by reflecting all winnings when power is supplied and each time a predetermined opportunity is stopped. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the information on the winning stored in the second storage unit and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage unit is surely reflected in the information stored in the storage unit after the power is supplied. And information stored in the second storage means can be prevented from being lost. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. This has the effect. In addition, when it is detected that the power is cut off, if the information is stored in the storage unit based on the information stored in the second storage unit, the power may be stored during the storage of the information in the storage unit. There is a possibility that the supply may be interrupted and the information may not be stored in the storage unit by reflecting all the information stored in the second storage unit, or that strange information may be stored in the storage unit. Is supplied, the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, so that such an effect can be suppressed.

<Group J>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine J1, wherein the predetermined opportunity includes that the number of game media fired into the gaming area has reached a predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine J1, any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4. In addition to the above, the following effects are obtained. That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is stopped, all winnings are reflected, and the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. Also, since the predetermined opportunity includes that the number of game media fired into the game area has reached the predetermined number, the game medium paid out by the payout means while the predetermined game medium was fired is It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number (combination ratio). Therefore, since many game media win various prize holes and payouts can be calculated at the stage where the payout is performed, the averaged bonus material ratio can be calculated. Therefore, fluctuations of the accessory ratio in a short time in a normal game can be eliminated, and thus, it is possible to more easily analyze a fraudulent act in a signal received by the output means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine J2, wherein the predetermined opportunity includes that the current time has reached a predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine J2, one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1. The following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved. That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is stopped, all winnings are reflected, and the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. Further, since the predetermined opportunity includes that the current time has reached the predetermined time, even when the game has not been played, the predetermined time has arrived and the payout means has surely paid out the game. It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media (combination ratio). Therefore, there is an effect that the one receiving the signal output from the output means can be surely analyzed for the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the reliably calculated accessory ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine J3, wherein the predetermined opportunity includes that a cumulative time in which a game has been played has reached a predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine J3, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 and J2. In addition to the effect of the sword, the following effects are achieved. That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is stopped, all winnings are reflected, and the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. Further, the predetermined opportunity includes that the cumulative time during which the game has been played has reached the predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (actual material ratio) is essentially the ratio of game balls. This is calculated by performing a test firing test for 10 hours. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is used to determine when the game time reaches a predetermined time. By storing it in the storage means, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio close to the original definition. Therefore, there is an effect that the signal received from the output means can be analyzed using the accessory ratio close to the original definition.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine J4, wherein the predetermined opportunity includes that a cumulative time during which power has been supplied has reached a second predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine J4, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, and J1 to J3. In addition to the effect of the sword, the following effects are achieved.

  That is, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is stopped, all winnings are reflected, and the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. In addition, the predetermined opportunity includes the fact that the cumulative time during which the power has been supplied has reached the second predetermined time. As a result of the predetermined time of 2, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (government ratio ) Can be calculated. Therefore, there is an effect that the one receiving the signal output from the output means can be surely analyzed for the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the reliably calculated accessory ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4,
Main control means for performing main control of the game is provided,
The main control unit includes an operation unit that executes an operation for performing main control of the game,
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the launch means has won one of the winning holes, the payout is performed based on the winning hole of the game medium. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculating means,
The storage control unit and the output unit are provided on a separate microchip from the production unit,
The microchip is
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The main control means includes:
Comprising a predetermined opportunity information storage means for storing information indicating the predetermined opportunity,
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
The gaming machine J5, characterized in that the start-up process includes a process for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J4. In addition to the effect of the sword, the following effects are achieved. That is, the main control unit that performs the main control of the game is provided with a calculation unit that performs a calculation for performing the control. The winning detection unit and the game medium that is fired by the firing unit are either When the winning detection means detects that a winning is made in the winning opening of the game medium, the payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning opening of the game medium and notifying the payout means , By the execution of the operation by the operation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided on a separate microchip from the arithmetic means. Thereby, the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit to the first winning port can be increased without providing a separate microchip and largely rewriting the instruction (program) of the operation executed by the calculation unit. There is an effect that a signal based on information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning can be output.

  A calculating means for outputting a signal based on information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a prize to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Thus, there is an effect that a large part of the processing capacity of the calculation means can be used for main control of the game. In the microchip, the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening to the information stored in the second storing means, without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is stopped, all winnings are reflected, and the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be.

  On the other hand, in the main control unit, the predetermined trigger is stored in a predetermined trigger information storage unit. Then, in the arithmetic means, a start-up process is executed when the main control means is turned on, and in the start-up process, a predetermined trigger is generated based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. The indicated information is transmitted to the microchip. Here, the storage of the information on the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize in the first winning opening (the ratio of the bonus) to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is based on the number of the game media. Because there is a physical limitation on the storage capacity of the storage means that stores information about the ratio, the microchip does not fix the timing of the storage, but considers the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the gaming machine It is preferable that it has been done. Therefore, by causing the main control means to store the predetermined opportunity in the predetermined opportunity information storage means and transmitting information indicating the predetermined opportunity to the microchip every time the power is turned on, the microchip can play a game. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize to the first prize port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means at a predetermined opportunity that matches the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the machine ( There is an effect that the information on the (accessory ratio) can be stored in the storage means.

<Group K>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5,
A third storage control unit that accumulates information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine and stores the information in a third storage unit;
The gaming machine K1, wherein the output means outputs information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K1, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5. There are the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by KA. That is, the information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine is accumulated by the third storage control means and stored in the third storage means. Information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is output by the output means. Thus, when a signal received from the output unit is received, it is possible to analyze the gaming state of the gaming machine and find out the cause when the situation is suspected of cheating.

In the gaming machine K1,
A door frame covering a front surface of the game area,
The gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is being opened.

  According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame covering the front surface of the gaming area is being opened, the one that receives the signal output from the output means In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed from the occurrence state of the state where the door frame is being opened.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
The gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error state of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2. In other words, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the error state of the gaming machine, the signal received from the output means is the state of occurrence of the error state of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that the wrongdoing has been performed.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3,
The gaming machine K4, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage unit includes a hit state in which a predetermined gaming value is given to a player.

  According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a hit state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, the one that receives the signal output from the output means There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that an improper act has been performed from the occurrence state of the hit state of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which a prize is detected in any one of the winning openings by the prize detecting means within a predetermined time. Gaming machine K5.

  According to the gaming machine K5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K4. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the winning detection means detects that any one of the winning openings has been won within a predetermined time. Therefore, the one receiving the signal output from the output means determines whether or not there is a possibility that the wrongdoing has been performed, based on whether or not the state where the prize is won is included outside the business hours, for example, at midnight hours. This has the effect of being able to determine

<L group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
A gaming machine L1 comprising: erasing means for erasing all information accumulated and stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout unit is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out along with the prize in the prize port, the ratio of the first and second prize ports (that is, the operation of the prize), Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means which triggers the provision of an advantageous game value to the player, if the winning probability is changed by the change means, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is deleted by the deletion means. Are all erased. Here, if the winning probability is changed, the role-object ratio also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the ratio of the accessory which can be analyzed based on the information accumulated and stored is the It is unclear whether this is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraud. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed, all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased, thereby changing the probability of winning with the change of the probability of winning. This has the effect that it is possible to eliminate the remaining in the storage means.

In the gaming machine L1,
The gaming machine L2, wherein, when the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the change in the probability of being hit, and it can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there has been fraud. There is.

In the gaming machine L2,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating the date and time when the change has been performed. A gaming machine L3 characterized by causing the game machine L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. Is done. With this, it is possible to know at the stage of analysis that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the change in the probability of hitting, and the change has been made (that is, the information has been deleted). Since the date and time can also be ascertained, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud.

In the gaming machine L2 or L3,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine L4,

  According to the gaming machine L4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2 or L3. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, the information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability after the change. Is done. This makes it possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the change in the probability of hitting, and also to understand the probability of hitting after the change. There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not fraud has occurred, while also suppressing the probability of a later hit.

In any of the gaming machines L2 to L4,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine L5,

  According to the gaming machine L5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L2 to L4. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability before the change. Is done. This makes it possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the change in the probability of hitting, and also to understand the probability of hitting before the change. There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not fraud has occurred, while also suppressing the probability of the previous hit.

<M group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
The gaming machine M1 wherein the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is kept held even when the probability is changed by the change means.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout unit is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out along with the prize in the prize port, the ratio of the first and second prize ports (that is, the operation of the prize), Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means which triggers the provision of an advantageous game value to the player, all the information stored in the storage means is retained even if the probability of winning is changed by the change means. to continue. Thereby, although the ratio of the accessory changes with the change of the probability of winning, there is an effect that it is possible to analyze whether there is a fraud before the probability of winning is changed.

In the gaming machine M1,
The gaming machine M2, wherein when the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine M2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M1. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and it is possible to use the information as a reference for determining whether there has been fraud.

In the gaming machine M2,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating the date and time when the change has been performed. A gaming machine M3 characterized by causing the game machine M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. Is done. As a result, the date and time when the probability of winning has been changed can be easily grasped. There is an effect that the judgment can be made easily.

In the gaming machine M2 or M3,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine M4 characterized by causing a game machine M4.

  According to the gaming machine M4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2 or M3. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, the information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability after the change. Is done. This makes it possible to grasp the probability of a hit after the change, so that it is possible to more reliably determine whether there has been a fraud while suppressing the probability of the hit after the change.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine M5,

  According to the gaming machine M5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines M2 to M4. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability before the change. Is done. This makes it possible to grasp the probability of winning before the change, and thus has an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether there has been fraud while suppressing the probability of winning before the change.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5,
Based on the information stored in the storage means, comprises a display means for displaying information related to the accessory ratio,
M6, wherein when the change is made by the change means, the display means displays information related to the accessory ratio based only on the information stored after the change.

  According to the gaming machine M6, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines M1 to M5. That is, the display means displays information related to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means. At this time, when the probability is changed by the changing means, information relating to the accessory ratio is displayed based only on the information stored after the change. As a result, regarding the information on the accessory ratio displayed on the display means, it is possible to exclude a change in the accessory ratio due to the change in the hit probability, and it is possible to easily find an illegal act after the change in the hit probability. effective.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M6,
The gaming machine M7, wherein the storage control means accumulates and stores the information in the storage means for each of the probabilities that can be set by the change by the change means.

  According to the gaming machine M7, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines M1 to M6. That is, the information stored in the storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means for each probability that can be set by the change by the change means. This makes it possible to easily determine, for each probability that can be set, the accessory ratio at the time that the probability is set from the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the change of the accessory ratio due to the change of the probability of winning and the change of the accessory ratio due to the misconduct can be clearly switched and analyzed.

<Group N>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the deletion unit deletes part of the information stored most recently from the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Gaming machine N1.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout unit is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out along with the prize in the prize port, the ratio of the first and second prize ports (that is, the operation of the prize), Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means which is an opportunity to give an advantageous game value to the player, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, the most recently stored information in the storage means The information is erased by the erasing means except for a part of the stored information. Here, if the winning probability is changed, the role-object ratio also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the ratio of the accessory which can be analyzed based on the information accumulated and stored is the It is unclear whether this is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraud. On the other hand, when the winning probability is changed, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is deleted except for a part stored recently, thereby changing the winning probability. In this way, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the effect of a change in the ratio of characters and actors from remaining in the storage means, and to analyze whether there is a possibility that a wrongdoing might have been performed before the probability of winning was changed There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine N1,
The gaming machine N2, wherein when the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N1. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. By this, it is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the hit probability, and the information stored in the storage means has been changed by the change in the hit probability. There is an effect that the fact that the data has been erased can be grasped at the stage of analysis, and can be used as a reference for judging whether or not there has been fraud.

In the gaming machine N2,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating the date and time when the change has been performed. A gaming machine N3 characterized by causing a game machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. Is done. By this, it is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the hit probability, and the information stored in the storage means has been changed by the change in the hit probability. The fact that the data has been deleted can be grasped at the stage of analysis, and the date and time when the change has been made (that is, when the data has been deleted) can also be grasped. This has the effect.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine N4 characterized by causing the game machine N4.

  According to the gaming machine N4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2 or N3. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, the information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability after the change. Is done. By this, it is possible to grasp at the stage of the analysis that the role ratio has changed due to the change in the hit probability, and the information stored in the storage means is changed by the change in the hit probability. It is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the erasure has been made, and also to know the probability of hitting after the change, so that the probability of hitting after the change can be suppressed and the judgment on whether or not there is fraud more reliably. There is an effect that it can be performed.

In any of the gaming machines N2 to N4,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines N2 to N4. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability before the change. Is done. By this, it is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the hit probability, and the information stored in the storage means has been changed by the change in the hit probability. It is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the erasure has occurred, and also to know the probability of winning before the change, so that the probability of winning before the change is suppressed, and the determination of whether there has been fraud is more reliable. There is an effect that it can be performed.

<Group O>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
Display means for displaying information relating to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means,
Mode switching means for switching to a mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
When the mode is switched to the mode to be changed by the mode switching unit, the display unit displays a value indicating the probability of the hit to be changed,
Setting means for setting the hit probability to be changed displayed on the display means as the hit probability when the mode for changing the hit probability is completed. Gaming machine O1.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout unit is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out along with the prize in the prize port, the ratio of the first and second prize ports (that is, the operation of the prize), Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters. In addition, the display means displays information relating to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means. There is an effect that can be determined. On the other hand, when the mode switching means is switched to the mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means, the display means displays a value indicating the probability of the winning to be changed. Then, when the mode for changing the probability of hitting ends, the probability of hitting to be changed displayed on the display means is set as the probability of hitting by the setting means. Thereby, the display means for displaying information relating to the accessory ratio can also be used as a display means for displaying the probability of winning which is desired to be changed when the probability of winning is changed. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in the number of display means mounted on the gaming machine.

(Issue 2)
The following gaming machines P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, and U2 have been made to solve the following problems.

  That is, a RAM (Random Access Memory) used in the main control means for controlling the game is stored in a first storage area used for processing for performing main control of the game and a second storage area used for other processing. 2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine configured to protect information that is divided and used in main control of a game from being destroyed by other processing (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6154863).

  On the other hand, there is a demand for more appropriate protection of information used in processing for performing main control of a game from other processing.

  The present technical concept has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of suitably protecting information used in main control of a game.

(Means and effects 2)
<P group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second processing is executed when the calculating means is stored in the second storage means. Evacuation means for evacuation of the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction when shifting to the stage of executing the second processing using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first process using information, a return unit that returns the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage unit to a corresponding register; A gaming machine P1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine P1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a save instruction by a save instruction. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from other processes with respect to the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game. Further, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, the location to be saved is fixed to the predetermined area as compared with the case where the contents are saved to the stack area. be able to. Therefore, while performing the second processing, the program used to use the second storage means while clearly avoiding the predetermined area in which the contents of the register are saved is used, so that the register used in the first processing is used. Content can be reliably protected. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine P1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the arithmetic means,
The gaming machine P2, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on the arithmetic for the arithmetic means. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the capacity required for the stack area can be reduced and the capacity of the work area can be secured large.

In the gaming machine P2,
The arithmetic means is
Stack area designating means for designating a range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, storage clear for clearing at least all information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area A game machine P3 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine P3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P2. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clear means. Here, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the process proceeds to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the saving means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information from being stacked beyond the range specified in the stack area by the saving, and to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage unit is cleared. is there.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3,
The gaming machine P4, wherein the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

  According to the gaming machine P4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3. In other words, the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is a step in which the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the operation shifts to the stage where the calculating means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the evacuation means saves the data to a predetermined area of the second storage means. . Thus, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before the execution of the second process, based on the content saved to the predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine P4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. .

  According to the gaming machine P5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P4. In other words, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing starts at the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the unit shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the unit is evacuated to a predetermined area of the second storage unit by the evacuating unit. Thus, there is an effect that only the minimum necessary registers are saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second processing can be reliably restored.

<Group Q>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second processing is executed when the calculating means is stored in the second storage means. Evacuation means for evacuation of the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means when the process proceeds to the step of executing the second processing using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first process using information, a return unit that returns the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage unit to a corresponding register; A gaming machine Q1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine Q1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of some of the plurality of registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from other processes with respect to the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game. In addition, since only a part of the registers is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be reduced, and the memory capacity can be reduced. Or the area for storing such information can be enlarged. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine Q1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the arithmetic means,
The gaming machine Q2, wherein the save unit saves the contents of the partial register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on arithmetic to the arithmetic means. The contents of some registers saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the capacity required for the stack area can be reduced and the capacity of the work area can be secured large.

In the gaming machine Q2,
The arithmetic means is
Stack area designating means for designating a range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, storage clear for clearing at least all information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area A gaming machine Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q2. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clear means. Here, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the process proceeds to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of some registers are saved by the saving means in the work area instead of the stack area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information from being stacked beyond the range specified in the stack area by the saving, and to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage unit is cleared. is there.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3,
The gaming machine Q4, wherein the partial registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means include registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3. That is, some of the registers including the registers used when the arithmetic processing performs the second processing execute the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the operation unit shifts from the stage of executing to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the evacuation unit sets the storage unit to the predetermined area of the second storage unit. Will be evacuated. Thus, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before the execution of the second process, based on the content saved to the predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the partial registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means are registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. Gaming machine Q5.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q4. That is, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is a part of the register where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the operation unit shifts from the stage of executing to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the evacuation unit sets the storage unit to the predetermined area of the second storage unit. Will be evacuated. Thus, there is an effect that only the minimum necessary registers are saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second processing can be reliably restored.

<R group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second processing is executed when the calculating means is stored in the second storage means. Evacuation means for evacuation of the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register when the process proceeds to the step of executing the second processing using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first process using information, a return unit that returns the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage unit to a corresponding register; A gaming machine R1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine R1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means by an individual instruction for each register. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from other processes with respect to the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game. In addition, the evacuation is performed to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register. Only necessary registers can be individually designated and saved. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine R1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the arithmetic means,
The gaming machine R2, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on the arithmetic for the arithmetic means. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the capacity required for the stack area can be reduced and the capacity of the work area can be secured large.

In the gaming machine R2,
The arithmetic means is
Stack area designating means for designating a range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, storage clear for clearing at least all information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area Means, a gaming machine R3.

  According to the gaming machine R3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R2. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clear means. Here, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the process proceeds to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the saving means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information from being stacked beyond the range specified in the stack area by the saving, and to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage unit is cleared. is there.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3,
The gaming machine R4, wherein the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

  According to the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines R1 to R3. In other words, the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is a step in which the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the operation shifts to the stage where the calculating means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the evacuation means saves the data to a predetermined area of the second storage means. . Thus, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before the execution of the second process, based on the content saved to the predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine R4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. .

  According to the gaming machine R5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R4. In other words, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing starts at the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the unit shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the unit is evacuated to a predetermined area of the second storage unit by the evacuating unit. Thus, there is an effect that only the minimum necessary registers are saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second processing can be reliably restored.

<S group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit having a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, the second storage unit storing, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process relating to the accessory ratio is executed by the arithmetic unit;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second processing is executed when the calculating means is stored in the second storage means. Evacuation means for evacuation of the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means when the process proceeds to the step of executing the second processing using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first process using information, a return unit that returns the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage unit to a corresponding register; A gaming machine S1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine S1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Also, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second processing relating to the accessory ratio is executed by the calculation means is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. . Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in the register can be appropriately protected from the processing related to the accessory ratio with respect to the information used in the processing for performing the main control of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine S1,
The gaming machine S2, wherein the save unit saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage unit by a load instruction or a store instruction.

  According to the gaming machine S2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine S1. That is, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, the location to be saved is fixed to the predetermined area as compared with the case of saving to the stack area. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2,
The gaming machine S3, wherein the saving means saves the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine S3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2. In other words, only a part of the registers is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means, so that the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be reduced, and the memory capacity can be reduced. This has the effect that the area for storing such information can be enlarged.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3,
The gaming machine S4, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register.

  According to the gaming machine S4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines S1 to S3. That is, the evacuation is performed to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register, so that the evacuation is performed to ensure that the game processing for performing main control of the game is not affected by other processing. There is an effect that only necessary registers can be individually specified and saved.

<Group T>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
And a stack pointer,
The second processing is executed by a program read at a predetermined position of the first processing,
The main control means includes:
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. A game machine T1 comprising: a stack pointer setting means for setting the stack pointer to a fixed value when returning to the step of executing the first process using information.

  According to the gaming machine T1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Here, the second processing is executed by a program read at a predetermined position in the first processing. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the stack pointer is set to a fixed value by the stack pointer setting means. Since the second process is a program read at a predetermined position of the first process, when the execution of the second process is started, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process is always It is constant. Therefore, by simply setting a fixed value based on the number of pieces of stacked information in the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the execution is performed again. In the first process, the stacked information can be reliably read. Therefore, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer pointing to the stack area provided in the first storage means used in the first process, so Therefore, an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine T1,
The arithmetic means includes: a main process; a loop process executed in the main process; and a timer allocation executed at a predetermined position in the loop process when a timer interrupt generated at predetermined time intervals is detected. And perform the
The gaming machine T2, wherein the first processing and the second processing are processing executed in the timer interruption processing.

  According to the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine T1. That is, a main process, a loop process executed in the main process, and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined position in the loop process when a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined time is detected. Is executed by the calculation means. Then, the first processing and the second processing are executed in the timer interrupt processing. Thus, when the execution of the second processing is started by the program read at the predetermined position of the first processing, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first processing always becomes a fixed number. Therefore, only by setting a fixed value based on the fixed number to the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the first value to be executed again is set. Has the effect that the stacked information can be reliably read.

<U group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second processing is executed when the calculating means is stored in the second storage means. First fixed value storage means for storing a fixed value in a predetermined register when the process proceeds to the step of executing the second process using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: second fixed value storage means for storing the fixed value in the predetermined register when returning to the step of executing the first processing using information.

  According to the gaming machine U1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the first fixed value storage means stores a fixed value in a predetermined register. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the fixed value is stored in the predetermined register in which the fixed value is stored by the first fixed value storage means by the second fixed value storage means. Thus, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the operation means shifts to the stage of executing the second processing, and when the operation means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the operation means At the time of returning to the stage of executing the first processing using the first information stored in the storage means, the contents of the registers can be made identical at a glance. Therefore, it can be ensured that the first process for performing the main control of the game is not affected by the second process executed between the first and second processes. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine U1,
The gaming machine U2, wherein the fixed value is 0.

According to the gaming machine U2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine U1. That is, from the stage in which the arithmetic means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the operation proceeds to the step of executing the second processing, and when the operation means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the operation means executes the first storage. When returning to the stage of executing the first process using the first information stored in the means, 0 is stored as a fixed value of a predetermined register. Thereby, it can be grasped that this predetermined register has been cleared to 0 at a glance.
(Issue 3)
The following gaming machines V1 to V9, W1 to W7, and X1 to X6 have been made to solve the following problems.

  Conventionally, a game medium is fired by a firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, and when the gaming medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined number of winning ports are determined for the winning ports. There is a gaming machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  By the way, some of the wrongdoers make it difficult for a game medium to win a predetermined winning opening or conversely guide the game medium to a predetermined winning opening so that the game medium can easily win. However, the response to discover such misconduct was insufficient.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting illegal acts.
(Means and effects 3)
<Group V>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
A gaming machine V1 comprising: a display unit for confirming whether a normal display is possible on the gaming performance information display unit for a predetermined period of time.

  According to the gaming machine V1, a game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. For the game performance display means, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Since it is possible to confirm whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means by this confirmation display, it is possible to determine whether or not the game performance information displayed on the game performance display means is normal. Thereby, since the presence or absence of a fraudulent act can be determined based on the game performance information determined to be normal, there is an effect that the fraudulent act can be suitably detected.

In the gaming machine V1,
The gaming machine V2, wherein the confirmation display means causes the gaming performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when power is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine V2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine V1. That is, when the power is turned on, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not a normal display is possible on the game performance display means is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Thus, each time the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether or not the display of the game performance display means is normal, so that it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of a fraud based on the game performance information determined to be normal. There is.

In the gaming machine V1,
The gaming machine V3, wherein the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means.

  According to the gaming machine V3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine V1. That is, when a predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation means, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Is Thereby, if a predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation means, it can be determined whether or not the display of the game performance display means is normal. Therefore, when making the determination, the user can make the determination by performing a predetermined operation on the predetermined operation means, so that there is an effect that a fraudulent activity can be suitably detected.

In the gaming machine V1,
The gaming machine includes a new startup specifying unit for specifying that it is a new startup period,
The gaming machine V4, wherein the confirmation display means causes the gaming performance information display means to perform the display for a predetermined period when the new start-up period is reached.

  According to the gaming machine V4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine V1. That is, when the specifying means specifies that the gaming machine is in the new startup period, the confirmation display for confirming whether or not a normal display is possible on the gaming performance display means is a confirmation display. This is performed for a predetermined period by means. Thus, at least when the gaming machine is in the new startup period, it can be determined whether the display of the gaming performance display means is normal. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the shipment of gaming machines that cannot display the game performance display means normally.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4,
A gaming machine V5 comprising a stop means for stopping the progress of the game during the predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, during a predetermined period in which the confirmation display is performed by the gaming performance information display by the confirmation display, the game is played. Since the progress is stopped by the stopping means, a display for confirmation is displayed on the game performance display means, and while the game performance information is not displayed, the game proceeds without being able to determine whether or not there is a fraud. This has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4,
A gaming machine V6 wherein the progress of the game is continued during the predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, even during a predetermined period during which the confirmation display is performed by the gaming performance information display by the confirmation display, the game performance is displayed. Since the progress is continued, the display for confirmation is displayed on the game performance information display means, so that it is possible to suppress the waiting of the game.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V6,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments, and for each segment indicator, displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments,
The gaming machine V7, wherein the confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on.

  According to the gaming machine V7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines V1 to V6. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . The confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally lit, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is normally performed.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V6,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments, and for each segment indicator, displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments,
The gaming machine V8, wherein the display for confirmation is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are blinked.

  According to the gaming machine V8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines V1 to V6. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . The confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are blinked. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally turned on and off, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is normally performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is provided when the gaming state is normal when the number of gaming media fired in the gaming area is 100. A gaming machine V9, which is a base value that is the number of game media.

  According to the gaming machine V9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines V1 to V8. In other words, the game performance information display means displays, as the game performance information, a base value which is the number of game media paid out in a normal game state with respect to 100 game media launched into the game area. Is done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act.

<W group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
New start-up specifying means for specifying that the gaming machine is in a new start-up period,
A special display mode display unit for displaying the game performance information display unit in a special display mode different from a normal mode when the new startup specifying unit specifies the new startup period. A gaming machine W1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine W1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. On the other hand, when the new start-up specifying unit specifies that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, the special display mode display unit displays the game performance information display unit in a special display mode different from the normal mode. Will be As a result, from the game performance information display means displayed in the special display mode, it is possible to indicate that a new start-up period is currently in progress, and to indicate that there is no information that can judge an improper act. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine W1,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments, and for each segment indicator, displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments,
The gaming machine W2, wherein the special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked.

  According to the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . The special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked. Thereby, in the game performance information display means, all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked, so that it is possible to easily indicate that a new start-up period is currently in progress.

In the gaming machine W1 or W2,
The game performance information display means,
A plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments are provided, and for each segment indicator, information is displayed by lighting, blinking or extinguishing the individual segments,
Some segment displays are used to display the game performance information, and other segment displays are used to identify the type of the game performance information displayed on the some segment displays. Is used to display information,
The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked on the other segment display. .

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1 or W2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . Some segment displays are used for displaying game performance information, and other segment displays are identification information for identifying the type of game performance information displayed on some segment displays. Is used to display. The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked on another segment display. As a result, if information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinking displayed on the other segment display of the game performance information display means, it is during the new start-up period. Can be easily shown.

In the gaming machine W3,
The gaming machine W4, wherein the special display mode is a display mode in which game performance information indicating game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked on the partial segment display.

  According to the gaming machine W4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W3. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which game performance information indicating game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked on some segment displays. As a result, although the normal game performance of the gaming machine cannot be measured during the new start-up period, information indicating the game performance measured in real time can be shown as a reference.

The game performance information display means,
A plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments are provided, and for each segment indicator, information is displayed by lighting, blinking or extinguishing the individual segments,
Some segment displays are used to display the game performance information, and other segment displays are used to identify the type of the game performance information displayed on the some segment displays. Is used to display information,
The gaming machine W5, wherein the special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying a type of the game performance information is blinked on the other segment display.

  According to the gaming machine W5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines W1 and W2. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . Some segment displays are used for displaying game performance information, and other segment displays are identification information for identifying the type of game performance information displayed on some segment displays. Is used to display. The special display mode is a display mode in which the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information blinks on another segment display. With this, when the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is blinkingly displayed on the other segment display of the game performance information display means, it is easy to indicate that a new start-up period is currently in progress. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine W5,
The gaming machine W6, wherein the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit on the partial segment display.

  According to the gaming machine W6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W5. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit on some segment displays. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly indicate that the normal gaming performance of the gaming machine has not been measured because the new startup period is being started.

  In any of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is such that the number of gaming media fired in the gaming area is 100 and the gaming state is paid out at normal times. A gaming machine W7, characterized in that the gaming machine W7 has a base value that is the number of gaming media.

  According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the following effect is achieved. In other words, the game performance information display means displays, as the game performance information, a base value which is the number of game media paid out in a normal game state with respect to 100 game media launched into the game area. Is done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act.

<Group X>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
For each predetermined period, during the predetermined period, a game performance information obtaining means for obtaining game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
For a plurality of predetermined periods, a game performance information storage unit that stores the game performance information acquired by the game performance acquisition unit,
A gaming machine X1 comprising: game performance information display means for displaying game performance information stored for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine X1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Here, for each predetermined period, during the predetermined period, game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is obtained by the game performance information obtaining means, and each of the game performance information is It is stored in the performance information storage means. Then, the game performance information stored in the game performance information storage means and obtained for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, the game performance information for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed, so that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not a fraud has occurred, and it is possible to predict to some extent the time at which the fraud has occurred. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect the misconduct.

In the gaming machine X1,
The game performance obtaining means obtains game performance information indicating a performance of a game executed in the gaming machine in real time during the predetermined period,
The game performance information storage means stores the game performance information acquired in real time,
The game performance information display means displays the game performance information obtained in real time together with the game performance information stored for the plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. A gaming machine X2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine X2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine X1. That is, the game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine in real time during the predetermined period is obtained by the game performance obtaining means, and the obtained game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means. It is memorized. Then, the game performance information acquired in real time is displayed on the game performance information display means together with the game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. Thereby, since the game performance information acquired in real time is also indicated, there is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been an illegal act.

In the gaming machine X1,
The game performance information storage means,
A first storage area for storing game performance information in a previous predetermined period;
A second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period of two times before,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and during the predetermined period obtained by the game performance obtaining means, A gaming machine X3 storing game performance information indicating the performance of the executed game in the first storage area.

  According to the gaming machine X3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine X1. That is, the game performance information storage means is provided with at least a first storage area for storing the game performance information in the last predetermined period and a second storage area for storing the game performance information in the last two predetermined periods. . When the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information is executed by the gaming machine during the predetermined period acquired by the game performance acquisition means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game is stored in the first storage area. Thus, every time the predetermined period elapses, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means instead of the oldest acquired game performance information, and is displayed on the game performance information display means. You. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be more determined whether or not there has been an improper act based on the new game performance information.

In the gaming machine X2,
The game performance information storage means,
A 0th storage area for storing, by overwriting, the game performance information acquired in real time during the predetermined period by the game performance acquisition means;
A first storage area for storing game performance information in a previous predetermined period;
A second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period of two times before,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the zero storage area is shifted to the eleventh storage area. A gaming machine X4 characterized by shifting.

  According to the gaming machine X4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine X2. That is, the game performance information storage means stores the 0th storage area for storing the game performance information acquired in real time in the middle of the predetermined period by the game performance acquisition means by overwriting, and the game performance information in the previous predetermined period. There is at least a first storage area for storing game performance information for a predetermined period two times before and a second storage area for storing game performance information. Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the zero storage area is shifted to the first storage area. . Thus, every time the predetermined period elapses, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means instead of the oldest acquired game performance information, and is displayed on the game performance information display means. You. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be more determined whether or not there has been an improper act based on the new game performance information. The game performance information stored in the 0th storage area when the predetermined period has elapsed becomes the game performance information in the predetermined period. By shifting it to the first storage area as it is, there is an effect that the game performance information in the previous predetermined period can be easily stored in the first storage area.

In the gaming machine X3 or X4,
A gaming machine X5 comprising shift processing means for executing a shift of game performance information between storage areas in the game performance information storage means using an LDIR instruction.

  According to the gaming machine X5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines X3 or X4. That is, the shift processing means shifts the game performance information between the respective storage areas in the game performance information storage means according to the LDIR command. Thus, there is an effect that the shift processing can be easily executed by one instruction.

  In any one of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is such that the number of gaming media fired in the gaming area is 100 and the gaming state is paid out at normal times. A gaming machine X6, which is a base value that is the number of game media.

  According to the gaming machine X6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines X1 to X5. In other words, the game performance information display means displays, as the game performance information, a base value which is the number of game media paid out in a normal game state with respect to 100 game media launched into the game area. Is done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act.

(Issue 4)
The following gaming machines a1 to a9, a1 to a7, c1 to c5, d1 to d3, o1, o2, k1, k2, and k1 to k3 are as follows. This was done to solve the problem.

  Conventionally, a game medium is fired by a firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, and when the gaming medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined number of winning ports are determined for the winning ports. There is a gaming machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  There are those who commit cheating on such games. However, measures to suppress such misconduct were insufficient.

  The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately suppressing improper behavior.

(Means and effects 4)
<Group A>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information,
The game performance information display means,
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information;
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means,
Means for hiding the display of the second display means when the information other than the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect a fraudulent activity from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. By switching the display on the game performance information display means, information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information is also displayed. Here, game performance information or information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Is done. When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is not displayed. Thus, there is an effect that, by seeing that the display of the second display means is not displayed, it is possible to clearly grasp that the display content displayed on the first display means is information other than the game performance information.

In gaming machine A1,
A predetermined determination is performed in response to the establishment of the start condition, and a predetermined game value is provided to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability of the predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels by the change means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the level of the probability as the information other than the game performance information. And a display control means for displaying on the means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1. That is, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the change unit, the display of the game performance information display unit is switched by the display control unit, and the level of the probability is set as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is not displayed. Thereby, the effect that the display content displayed on the first display means can be clearly grasped to be the level of the probability of being changed by the change means by seeing that the display of the second display means is not displayed. There is.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of the type of error detected by the error detection means,
Error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as information outside the game performance information based on the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying the game performance information on the game performance information display means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. When the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed on the game performance information display means based on the When the history of the error type is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is not displayed. Thus, there is an effect that, by seeing that the display of the second display means is not displayed, it is possible to clearly grasp that the display content displayed on the first display means is the history of the error type.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3,
The second display means includes a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing the individual segments on the segment display,
The gaming machine a4, wherein the means for hiding the display of the second display means turns off all segments of the segment display.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, the second display means includes a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on the segment display. When information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means, all segments of the segment display of the second display means are turned off, and the display of the second display means is not displayed. Thus, there is an effect that the non-display can be performed with a simple control.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4,
The first display means is configured to display a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine is
When the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the level of the probability is displayed by using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed by the gaming performance. A gaming machine (3) comprising means for performing display in a display mode not displaying information.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when information other than gaming performance is displayed on the first display means, the gaming performance is determined by using some of the plurality of digits. Outside information is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information based on the display contents of the remaining digits on the first display means. effective.

In gaming machine A5,
The gaming machine a6, further comprising means for displaying the gaming performance information using all of the plurality of digits when displaying the gaming performance information on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A5. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all of the plurality of digits. Thereby, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine a7, wherein the means for performing the display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information hides the display of the remaining digits.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the non-gaming performance information is displayed using some of a plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are not displayed. . Thus, the remaining digits are hidden, so that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. is there.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine a8, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the game performance information display fixedly displays the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when information other than gaming performance is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. You. Thereby, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine a9, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the game performance information display blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinked in a predetermined display manner. You. Thus, the remaining digits are displayed in a blinking manner in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

<Group A>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information,
The game performance information display means,
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information;
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means,
The first display means is configured to display a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine is
When the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the level of the probability is displayed by using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed by the gaming performance. A gaming machine (1) comprising means for performing display in a display mode not displaying information.

  According to the gaming machine I, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect a fraudulent activity from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. By switching the display on the game performance information display means, information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information is also displayed. Here, game performance information or information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Is done. The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the non-gaming performance information. Is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information. This makes it possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information based on the display contents of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is.

In gaming machine A1,
The gaming machine (2), further comprising: means for displaying the gaming performance information using all of the plurality of digits when displaying the gaming performance information on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all of the plurality of digits. Thereby, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine I1 or I2,
A predetermined determination is performed in response to the establishment of the start condition, and a predetermined game value is provided to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability of the predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels by the change means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the level of the probability as the information other than the game performance information. A gaming machine a3, comprising: a display control means for causing the means to display.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 and A2. That is, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the change unit, the display of the game performance information display unit is switched by the display control unit, and the level of the probability is set as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed in the display of the game performance information. It is performed in a display mode that is not performed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or a probability level based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. is there.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a3,
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of the type of error detected by the error detection means,
Error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as information outside the game performance information based on the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying the game performance information on the game performance information display means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. When the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed on the game performance information display means based on the When displaying the history of the error type on the first display means, the history of the error type is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is the display of the game performance information. Is performed in a display mode that is not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the error type history based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is.

In any of gaming machines a1 to a4,
The gaming machine A5, wherein the means for performing the display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information hides the display of the remaining digits.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the non-gaming performance information is displayed using some of a plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are not displayed. . Thus, the remaining digits are hidden, so that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. is there.

In any of gaming machines a1 to a4,
The gaming machine A6, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information displays the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, when information other than gaming performance is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. You. Thereby, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a4,
The gaming machine A7, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the game performance information display blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinked in a predetermined display manner. You. Thus, the remaining digits are displayed in a blinking manner in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

<Clusters>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information,
The game performance information display means,
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information;
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means,
When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. And c. Means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect a fraudulent activity from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. By switching the display on the game performance information display means, information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information is also displayed. Here, game performance information or information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Is done. When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the information other than the game performance information by looking at the display on the second display means.

In gaming machine c1,
A predetermined determination is performed in response to the establishment of the start condition, and a predetermined game value is provided to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability of the predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels by the change means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the level of the probability as the information other than the game performance information. A display control means for causing the means to display the information.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1. That is, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the change unit, the display of the game performance information display unit is switched by the display control unit, and the level of the probability is set as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed. Then, when the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the level of the probability of being changed by the change means by looking at the display on the second display means. effective.

In gaming machine U1 or U2,
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of the type of error detected by the error detection means,
Error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as information outside the game performance information based on the storage of the error history storage means. A display control means for displaying the game performance information on the game performance information display means.

  According to the gaming machine U3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine U1 or C2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. When the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed on the game performance information display means based on the When the history of the error type is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thus, there is an effect that the user can clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the history of the error type, by looking at the display on the second display means.

In any of gaming machines c1 to c3,
When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. The game machine c4, wherein the means fixedly displays the display of the second display means in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information.

In any of gaming machines c1 to c3,
When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. The means (5) blinks the display of the second display means in a predetermined display manner.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are provided. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means blinks in a predetermined display mode. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information.

<D group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine;
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of the type of error detected by the error detection means,
Error history display accepting means for accepting the display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is displayed based on the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying the information on the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with the plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect a fraudulent activity from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Further, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. When the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is displayed on the basis of the storage of the error history storage means. It is displayed on the display means. As a result, the history of the error type can be displayed by one game performance information display means, and an effect of detecting an improper act from the history of the error type can be obtained.

In gaming machine d1,
The gaming machine (2), wherein the display control means keeps displaying the game performance information on the game performance information display means when an error is detected by the error detection means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection unit, the game performance information is continuously displayed on the game performance information display unit by the display control unit. Therefore, even if the wrongdoer intentionally generates some error, there is an effect that the cheating can be reliably detected from the game performance information continuously displayed on the game performance information display means.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
The display control means switches the game performance information display means and displays the game performance information on the game performance information display means when the reception of the history display by the error history display reception means is completed. 3. A gaming machine d.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D1 and D2. That is, when the reception of the display of the history of the error type by the error history display receiving means is completed, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the game performance information is displayed again on the game performance information display means. You. With this, even if the history of the error type is once displayed on the game performance information display means, the game performance information can be displayed again, so that it is possible to reliably detect an illegal act from the game performance information. There is an effect that can be.

<E group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Storage means for storing information on a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
Output means for outputting information on game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the information related to the game performance information affected by the probability is deleted from the information stored in the storage unit, and the information related to the game performance information not affected by the probability is deleted. A gaming machine (1) comprising: a storage control means for holding information.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Information relating to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act from the information on the game performance information output from the output means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. When the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the changing unit, the information related to the game performance information that is affected by the probability is erased from the information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. The information on the game performance information that is not affected by the probability is retained. Therefore, as for the information on the game performance information affected by the probability, the information on the game performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, so that the game performance information with high accuracy can be output. On the other hand, the information on the game performance information which is not affected by the probability is stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if the fraudster changes the probability in order to conceal the erasure of the fraud, the information is retained in the storage means. There is an effect that a fraudulent activity can be reliably detected based on the performed game performance information.

In gaming machine O1,
The gaming machine (2), wherein information on gaming performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine O1, the information on the game performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means, so that the probability is changed by the changing means. In such a case, by deleting the predetermined areas of the storage means collectively, there is an effect that information on the game performance information which is easily affected by the probability can be easily deleted.

<Mosquito group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Storage means for storing information on a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
Output means for outputting information on game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means,
When the determination is not a predetermined result, a specific determination unit that determines whether the determination is a specific result,
When the determination is determined to be the specific result by the specific determination unit, the predetermined game value is not given, and an opening unit that opens the normally closed one winning port for a predetermined time,
Changing means for changing the probability of the specific result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A gaming machine 1 comprising: storage control means for deleting information stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the change means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Information relating to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act from the information on the game performance information output from the output means. In addition, the gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. If the result is not the predetermined result, the specific determination unit determines whether the determination is a specific result. When the specific determination means determines that the determination is a specific result, the predetermined game value is not given, and one closed winning port is normally opened by the opening means for a predetermined time. If a game medium wins in the opened winning opening, the payout of the game medium by the payout means is performed. Further, the probability that a specific result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing unit. Then, when the probability is changed by the change unit, the information stored in the storage unit is deleted by the storage control unit. Therefore, the information relating to the game performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, so that there is an effect that accurate game performance information can be output.

In gaming machine 1
The gaming machine power 2, wherein the gaming performance information is a base value.

  According to the gaming machine power 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine power 1, the gaming performance information is a base value. Since it is stored in the storage means, there is an effect that a precise base value can be output.

<K group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Display means for displaying the level of the probability,
The gaming machine key 1 is characterized in that the display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine key 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. The level of the probability is displayed on the display means. The display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on. As a result, the probability level set for the gaming machine is not displayed unless the power is turned on, so that it is difficult for the player to know the probability level set for the gaming machine, and it is preferable to suppress fraudulent acts. There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine key 1,
The gaming machine key 2, wherein the display means is provided on a back side of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine key 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine key 1, the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, so that the door of the gaming machine is opened and the back side of the gaming machine is not exposed. , The level of the probability displayed on the display means cannot be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is more difficult for the player to know the level of the probability set in the gaming machine.

In game machine key 2,
A door opening detecting means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine is unlocked and opened,
The display of the level of the probability on the display means is performed when the power is turned on, at least on condition that the opening of the door is detected by the door opening detecting means. .

  According to the gaming machine key 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine key 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unlocked door of the locked gaming machine is detected by the door open detecting means. The display of the probability level on the display means is performed on condition that at least the door opening is detected by the door opening detecting means when the power is turned on. Since the unlocking of the door is usually performed by a key managed by the hall, there is an effect that it is more difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine.

(Issue 5)
The following gaming machines C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, C1, C2, C1, C2, C1, C2, C1, C2, S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 are made to solve the following problems.

  Conventionally, a game medium is fired by a firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, and when the gaming medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined number of winning ports are determined for the winning ports. There is a gaming machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  There is a demand to change the winning probability for such a game. However, the measures for changing the probability of such a hit have been insufficient.

  The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

(Means and effects 5)
<K group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Storage means for storing information used for controlling the game, and capable of holding the information even when the power is turned off;
Information erasure instructing means for instructing erasure of information stored in the storage means,
Permission means for permitting a change or confirmation of the level of the probability by being in a predetermined state,
A first state enabling the change unit to change the probability level when the power is turned on in a state where the permission unit is set to a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction unit is instructed to erase the information; First mode starting means for starting in a mode,
When the permission unit is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on in a state where the information erasure instruction unit does not instruct the erasure of the information, a start-up in a second mode enabling the confirmation of the probability level is performed. When the power is turned on in a state where the two-mode start-up means and the permission means are not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means has given an instruction to erase the information, the information stored in the storage means is deleted. Third mode starting means for starting in a third mode to be erased;
When the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instructing means does not give an instruction to erase the information, a fourth mode is started in a fourth mode for performing a normal startup. A gaming machine 1 comprising upper means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with the plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. Further, information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information can be retained even when the power is turned off. There are provided information erasure instructing means for instructing erasure of the information stored in the storage means, and permission means for permitting a change in the probability level or the probability when the state is set to a predetermined state. Then, when the permission unit is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on in a state where the information erasing instruction unit instructs erasure of the information, the change of the probability level by the changing unit is performed by the first mode starting unit. It is started up in a first mode that allows it. Further, when the permission unit is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on in a state where there is no instruction to erase information by the information erasure instructing unit, the probability level can be confirmed by the second mode start-up unit. It can be launched in two modes. When the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in the predetermined state and the information erasing instruction means has given an instruction to erase the information, the information stored in the storage means is read by the third mode starting means. It is started in the third mode for erasing. Further, when the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means does not give an instruction to erase information, a fourth mode in which a normal startup is performed by the fourth mode startup means. Is launched. Thus, by combining the operations of the information erasure instructing means and the permission means, there is an effect that the start-up mode including the mode in which the probability level can be changed and confirmed can be set easily. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine k1,
A door opening detecting means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine is unlocked and opened,
The first mode start-up means detects that the door has been opened by the door open detection means, sets the permission means in a predetermined state, and instructs the information erasure instruction means to erase the information. When the power is turned on in a state, the power supply is started up in a first mode that enables the change of the probability level by the change unit,
The second mode start-up means detects that the door has been opened by the door open detection means, sets the permission means in a predetermined state, and does not receive an instruction to delete the information by the information deletion instruction means. A gaming machine (2) characterized in that, when the power is turned on in a state, the game machine is started up in a second mode that allows the probability level to be confirmed.

(Effects)
According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. That is, when the door is detected by the door opening detecting means to open the door, the permission means is set in a predetermined state, and the power is turned on in a state where the information erasing instruction means instructs the information erasure, It is started in the first mode in which the probability level can be changed by the changing means by the one-mode starting means. Further, when the door opening detecting means detects that the door is opened, the permission means is set in a predetermined state, and the power is turned on in a state where the information erasing instruction means is not instructed to erase the information, the second operation is performed. The mode is started in the second mode in which the probability level can be confirmed by the mode starting means. Accordingly, since the change or confirmation of the probability level is not performed unless the door is opened, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
The gaming machine (3), wherein the permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state where the permission means is rotated to a predetermined position by the key.

  According to the gaming machine ku3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ku1 or ku2. That is, the permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state where the permission means is rotated to a predetermined position by the key. Therefore, when starting up in the first mode or starting up in the second mode, it is necessary to rotate the permission means to a predetermined position by the key. Since the key is managed by the hall, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirming means for confirming whether or not the probability level is normal each time a predetermined timing arrives,
A game machine device 1 comprising: a process executing unit that executes a predetermined process when the probability level is not normal by the checking unit.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. In addition, whether or not the probability level is normal is checked by the checking means every time a predetermined timing comes. Is done. Thus, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, the probability level can be detected at an early stage, and some action can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine 1
The gaming machine ke 2, wherein the predetermined timing is a lapse of a predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means every time a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, when the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, there is an effect that the probability level can be reliably detected.

In gaming machine 1
The gaming machine 3 characterized in that the predetermined timing is a start of dynamic display of identification information executed when the start condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means every time the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Therefore, when the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, there is an effect that the dynamic display of the identification information can be reliably detected before the start of the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 3,
The gaming machine 4 characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines 1 to 3. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the fact that the probability level is abnormal is performed, so that the player or the hall can immediately grasp the state.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 4,
The gaming machine device 5, wherein the predetermined process includes a process for stopping a game.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines 1 to 4. That is, the game is stopped when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, so that there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by playing at an abnormal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 5,
The gaming machine 6 characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for causing the change means to change a probability level.

  According to the gaming machine 6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines 1 to 5. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the changing means can change the probability level, so that it is possible to return to the game at the normal probability level.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Checking means for checking whether the level of the probability is normal or not in a start-up process executed when the power is turned on,
A game machine co-1 comprising: a process execution unit that executes a predetermined process when the probability level is not normal by the checking unit.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, in the startup processing executed when the power is turned on, the confirmation means confirms whether or not the probability level is normal, and when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the predetermined processing is performed. Is executed by the processing execution means. Thus, when the power is turned on, if the probability level has been destroyed, it can be reliably detected, and any countermeasure can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine co1,
The gaming machine co2, wherein the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

  According to the gaming machine U2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the fact that the probability level is abnormal is performed, so that the player or the hall can immediately grasp the state.

In gaming machine co1 or co2,
The game machine co3, wherein the predetermined process includes a process of performing an infinite loop.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, an infinite loop is performed, so that there is an effect that the start-up process is terminated and the game is not performed with the abnormal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines Ko 1 to Ko 3,
The gaming machine device (4), wherein the predetermined process includes a process for causing the change means to change a probability level.

  According to the gaming machine U4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the changing means can change the probability level, so that there is an effect that the start-up process can be completed at the normal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines Ko 1 to Ko 3,
The gaming machine co4, wherein the predetermined process includes a process for setting the probability level to one of normal levels.

  According to the gaming machine U5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level is set to one of the normal levels, so that the startup process can be completed at the normal probability level. is there.

<Sa group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means may be configured such that, if the processing is being executed by the change processing execution means when the power was last turned off, the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A gaming machine 1 that executes processing by a change processing executing means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, a game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means. The processing by the means is executed. In this way, if the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, the probability level can always be changed when the power is subsequently turned on, so that the probability level can be changed with confidence. Changes can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In the gaming machine 1
The start-up means may be configured such that, if the processing is being executed by the change processing execution means when the power is last turned off, the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A gaming machine 2 wherein the processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. In other words, when the processing is being executed by the change processing executing means when the power was last turned off, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the change processing is executed by the start-up means. The processing by the means is executed from the beginning. As a result, the probability level can be reset from the beginning, so that there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with ease.

<Shi group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing capable of confirming the set probability level;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the processing by the change processing execution unit is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is performed. A start-up unit that executes a process by the confirmation process execution unit on condition that the condition is satisfied,
When the power supply is turned on last time, the start-up means is configured to execute the change processing execution means when the power supply is turned on, and the second predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine 1 also executes the processing by the change processing executing means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by a process executed by the confirmation process executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing executing means is performed on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is performed when the power is turned on. It is executed by the start-up means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. If the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process is stopped. The raising means executes the processing by the change processing executing means. Thus, even if the power is turned on after the second predetermined condition is satisfied, if the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, the probability level is always changed. Can be performed, so that the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine 1,
The start-up unit is configured to execute the change process execution unit when the power is turned off last time, and when the power is turned on, the second predetermined condition is satisfied. , The processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning.

  According to the gaming machine system 2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine system 1. In other words, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process is stopped. By the raising means, the processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning. As a result, the probability level can be reset from the beginning, so that there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with ease.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
First storage means for storing the original probability level when the probability level is changed by the processing by the change processing execution means;
2. A gaming machine 1 comprising: a second storage unit for storing a probability level changed by a process performed by the change process execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine 1, a game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. When the probability level is changed by the processing by the change processing execution means, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the probability level changed by the processing by the change processing execution means is stored in the second storage means. You. With this, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the change of the probability level is performed using the second storage means. The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with a sense of security, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine 1,
The gaming machine device (2), wherein the first storage means keeps storing the original probability level even when power is cut off.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. That is, the original probability level stored in the first storage means is maintained even while the power is turned off. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the processing by the change processing execution means, the power level is not changed. After the input, the probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the first storage means. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with a sense of security, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means may include a second predetermined condition, which is different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on, when the process is being executed by the change processing execution means when the power was last turned off. Even if is established, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operation means is in a first state,
The second predetermined condition includes that the first operation means is in a second state different from the first state,
The change processing execution means includes a detection means for detecting that the first operation means has changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means detects the first operation of the first operation means. The gaming machine system 1, wherein when the change from the state to the second state is detected, the changed probability level is determined.

  According to the gaming machine set 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Also, if the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. However, the start-up means executes the processing by the change processing executing means. Accordingly, when the process is being executed by the change process execution unit when the power was last turned off, the probability level is set at the subsequent power-on even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be changed, so that the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided. The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state, and the second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the second state different from the first state. In. The change processing executing means has a detecting means for detecting that the first operating means has changed from the first state to the second state, and the detecting means detects the first state of the first operating means. When a change from to the second state is detected, the changed probability level is determined. Here, even if the change processing execution means is executed when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the change processing execution means determines that the first operation means is in the second state and determines the probability of the change. Instead of determining the level, the detection means determines the probability level changed when the change of the first operating means from the first state to the second state is detected. Therefore, even if the change processing execution means is executed when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the probability level can be surely changed.

In gaming machine center 1,
The gaming machine 2 wherein the first operation means is a key.

  According to the gaming machine set 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine set 1, the first operation means is a key, so that the probability level can be easily changed only by shifting the key from the first state to the second state. Has the effect of being able to determine

<Soviet group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, when a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is turned on when the power is turned on. A gaming machine so1 wherein an infinite loop state is established when the condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine S1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, in the case where the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, Is set to an infinite loop state. This allows the probability level to be changed by causing the predetermined condition to be satisfied and turning on the power, and executing the process by the change process executing means in the startup process, so that the probability level can be changed. You can change the level. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In the gaming machine SO1,
The gaming machine So2, comprising: a notifying unit that issues a notification for instructing to turn on the power by establishing the predetermined condition when the infinite loop state is set.

  According to the gaming machine S02, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S01. That is, when the initiating loop is set by the start-up means, a notification for giving an instruction to establish a predetermined condition and turn on the power is performed by the notification means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand that it is sufficient to turn on the power while satisfying the predetermined condition.

<Ta group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing capable of confirming the set probability level;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the processing by the change processing execution unit is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is performed. A start-up unit that executes a process by the confirmation process execution unit on condition that the condition is satisfied,
The starting means,
If the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, Execute processing by the change processing execution means,
In the case where the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, a third predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on. A gaming machine 1 wherein an infinite loop state is established when a condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by a process executed by the confirmation process executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing executing means is performed on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is performed when the power is turned on. It is executed by the start-up means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. If the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process is stopped. The raising means executes the processing by the change processing executing means. Thus, even if the power is turned on after the second predetermined condition is satisfied, if the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, the probability level is always changed. Can be performed, so that the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided. Further, in a case where the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, a third predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on. Is established, an infinite loop state is set. This allows the probability level to be changed by causing the predetermined condition to be satisfied and turning on the power, and executing the process by the change process executing means in the startup process, so that the probability level can be changed. You can change the level. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In the gaming machine 1
The start-up unit includes a notification unit that issues a notification for instructing to turn on power by satisfying the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition when the infinite loop state is set. Gaming machine 2

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. That is, when the initiating loop state is set by the start-up means, a notification for instructing to turn on the power after satisfying the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is performed by the notification means. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp that the power supply is to be turned on while the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

<H group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operation means is in a first state,
The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the change of the first operation means from the second state to the first state. When the change of is detected, the probability level is changed,
The gaming machine is
A storage unit for storing a state of the first operation unit last time;
The detection means refers to the previous state of the first operation means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operation means at that time, and determines whether the first operation means is in the first state from the second state. To detect whether it has been changed to
The storage device stores the first state as the previous state of the first operation unit during a period from when the power is turned on until the detection unit performs the detection for the first time. .

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with the plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, the predetermined condition includes that the first operation means is in the first state. The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means has changed from the second state to the first state, and the detection means detects the second state of the first operation means. When the change from to the first state is detected, the level of probability is changed. On the other hand, the previous state of the first operation means is stored in the storage means, and the detection means refers to the previous state of the first operation means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operation means at that time. Thus, it is detected whether or not the first operation means has changed from the second state to the first state. Then, the first state is stored in the storage unit as the previous state of the first operation unit during a period from when the power is turned on until the detection unit performs the detection for the first time. Thus, when the power is turned on, the first operating means is set to the first state in order to satisfy a predetermined condition, and the first operating means is kept in the first state until the detection is performed by the detecting means for the first time. However, the first state is stored in the storage means as the previous state of the first operation means from when the power is turned on until the detection is performed by the detection means for the first time. In the detection performed by the detection unit, it is possible to suppress the detection that the first operation unit is changed from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the first operation means is set to the first state in order to satisfy the predetermined condition, it is possible to prevent the probability level from being erroneously changed based on the first operation means. There is an effect that a machine can be provided.

In the gaming machine H1,
The storage means stores information used for controlling the game, and can hold the information even when the power is turned off,
The gaming machine (2), wherein the first operation means is for instructing erasure of information stored in the storage means when the first state is set.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1. That is, the storage means stores information used for controlling the game, and can hold the information even when the power is turned off. The first operation means stores the information when the first state is set. It is to instruct the erasure of the information. Thus, the probability level can be changed by using the first operation means for instructing the erasure of the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, the storage means can be changed without providing a dedicated operation means for changing the probability level. There is an effect that the probability level can be changed by using the first operation means for instructing the erasure of the information stored in the storage device.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on;
Storage means for storing information used for controlling the game, and capable of holding the information even when the power is turned off,
The start-up means, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means, in an infinite loop state,
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine 1 comprising means for executing processing for monitoring power interruption even in the infinite loop state.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. The information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is held even when the power is turned off. Here, when the start-up means determines that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal, an infinite loop state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played at an abnormal probability level because the probability level changed before the power-off was not correctly held. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided. On the other hand, even in the case of the infinite loop state, the process of monitoring the power interruption is executed. Thereby, by performing the process related to the power-off correctly, there is an effect that the operation of the gaming machine can be prevented from being further abnormal.

In gaming machine 1,
The gaming machine 2 further comprising means for executing a process of updating a random number used for the predetermined determination even in the infinite loop state.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. That is, even in the infinite loop state, the updating process of the random number used for the predetermined determination is executed. As a result, there is an effect that the random number updating process can be continued as long as the power is kept turned on.

In gaming machine Tu 1 or Tu 2,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein said start-up means includes a notification means for issuing a notification for instructing to turn on power after satisfying said predetermined condition when said infinite loop state is set.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1 or 2. That is, when the initiating loop is set by the start-up means, a notification for giving an instruction to establish a predetermined condition and turn on the power is performed by the notification means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to make the user turn on the power supply while satisfying the predetermined condition.

<Te group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means includes a means for performing a process for disabling the control relating to the game when it is determined that the game is in a predetermined state, and notifying the external device of the processing. Gaming machine te1.

  According to the gaming machine te 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, when it is determined in the start-up means that the game is in a predetermined state, a process for disabling the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified of the process. Thereby, it can be suppressed that a game is played at an abnormal probability level due to the gaming machine being in a predetermined state. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided. On the other hand, since the fact is notified to the external device, there is an effect that the person in charge of the hall or the like can take some kind of countermeasure.

In gaming machine TE1,
The predetermined state is a state in which the second predetermined condition, which is different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on, when the process is being performed by the change processing execution unit when the power is last turned off. A gaming machine te 2 characterized in that it is established.

  According to the gaming machine te 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine te 1. That is, when the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, Is executed to execute the control related to the game, and the external device is notified to that effect. Thereby, when the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Has an effect that it is possible to make the user turn on the power supply while satisfying a predetermined condition.

In the gaming machine TE1 or TE2,
Storage means for storing information used for controlling the game, and capable of holding the information even when the power is turned off,
The gaming machine te3, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which information stored in the storage means has an abnormality.

  According to the gaming machine te3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine te1 or te2. That is, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even when the power is turned off. Then, when it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit has an abnormality, a process for not performing the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified of the process. With this, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage unit while the process is being performed by the change processing execution unit when the power supply was last shut down, some response to the abnormality is performed. Has the effect of being able to be driven.

<Group>
A gaming area with a number of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing capable of confirming the set probability level;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the processing by the change processing execution unit is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is performed. Start-up means for executing processing by the confirmation processing execution means on condition that the condition is satisfied;
Interrupt processing means for performing a process of monitoring at least whether or not the power is turned off, based on an interrupt generated every predetermined time;
An interrupt permitting means for permitting the interrupt while the processing by the change processing executing means is executed and while the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is executed. .

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning prize opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by a process executed by the confirmation process executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing executing means is performed on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is performed when the power is turned on. It is executed by the start-up means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Further, at least a process of monitoring whether or not the power is turned off is performed by the interrupt processing unit based on an interrupt generated every predetermined time. Then, the interrupt is permitted by the interrupt permitting unit while the process by the change process executing unit is being executed and the process by the confirmation process executing unit is being executed. With this, it is possible to monitor whether or not the power has been turned off while the processing by the change processing execution means and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means are performed. Such processing can be performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, a process corresponding to a situation where the power is turned off is executed while the process by the change process execution unit is being executed or while the process by the confirmation process execution unit is being executed. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine 1,
A gaming machine (2) comprising: an interrupt prohibition unit that prohibits the interrupt when the processing by the change processing execution unit ends or the processing by the confirmation processing execution unit ends.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G1. That is, when the processing by the change processing executing means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing executing means ends, the interrupt is prohibited by the interrupt prohibiting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of the interrupt processing by the interrupt processing means in the start-up means.

<Group I: Protective cover that covers the setting key when the inner frame is closed>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the content of a game value (hit probability and / or hit type, etc., given to a player in accordance with a game result) in a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine. Is provided in a plurality of stages (e.g., six stages of setting values "1" to "6") based on operation of the setting unit by a person related to the hall or the like. It is configured to be changeable.

  The setting means is provided so as to be exposed in the direction of the back of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is closed with respect to the support. When rotated with respect to the body, the setting means is configured to be exposed to the front side of the gaming machine with the rotation of the support. With this configuration, when the hall-related person wants to change the settings of the gaming machine, it is possible to immediately insert the setting change key into the setting means by rotating the opening / closing body, The game machine is configured so that the setting change operation can be performed quickly.

  In the hall, an island facility having a built-in automatic ball supply device or the like is provided in a closed predetermined space, and a game machine support is attached to both long sides in the long side direction of the island facility to provide the island facility. It is configured such that a plurality of gaming machines can be installed therein. Then, outside the opening hours of the hall, the person involved in the hall releases the lock between the opening and closing body of each gaming machine installed on the island facility and the support, and places the opening / closing body on the support (island facility). Open and perform setting change work and maintenance work for each gaming machine.

  However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the gaming machine, for example, in a situation where the gaming machine is installed on one long side of the island facility of the hall, the length of the gaming machine is set. If the opening / closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side that is not the side (that is, the back side of the gaming machine) is opened for some reason (for example, fraud, etc.), the gaming The setting means provided to be exposed on the back side of the machine can be directly operated. As a result, even if the opening / closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, The setting contents may be changed by unauthorized operation of, and an unexpected disadvantage may be caused in the hall.

  Here, as in a slot machine, a structure in which the entire back side of the gaming machine is covered with a housing structure to prevent improper operation of the setting means of the control device from the back side of the gaming machine can be considered. Unlike the slot machine, the gaming machine needs to supply the game balls from above the island facilities and discharge the discharge balls (out balls). Therefore, if the back side of the gaming machine is covered with a housing structure, a complicated structure for replenishing and discharging game balls is required, and the manufacturing cost increases due to the housing structure and the replenishing and discharging structure. There is a risk of doing it.

  In addition, in the island facilities, when the wiring connection with a card sand device arranged adjacent to the left side of the gaming machine and the connection wiring with the power supply are taken into consideration, the back surface structure of the gaming machine, in particular, the right side of the gaming machine when viewed from the back ( The structure (left side in front view) is desirably configured so as to be opened to some extent, and is easily wired and connected to the above-described device or the like.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The inventions of the first group have been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203b) for acquiring lottery information based on a game ball fired by the shooting means having entered the ball entry means;
Determining means for determining the lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means (for example, a change start process (S307));
A gaming value providing means (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for providing a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result being derived by the determining means. ,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing a probability that the specific determination result is derived by the determining means;
The support is
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the setting means is operable. The gaming machine 10 is provided with protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140).

  According to the gaming machine 10, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the game body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means capable of entering game balls. Further, the launching means launches a game ball toward the game area, and the lottery information acquiring means acquires lottery information based on the fact that the game ball launched by the launching means enters the ball entry means. The determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and based on the fact that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means, provides a predetermined game value to the player by the game value provision means. Is done. Here, the setting means is configured to be able to change the setting of the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determining means. And, by the protection means provided on the support, when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making the setting means difficult to operate, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, The setting means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the setting means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. Can be Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved.

In game machine 1
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means,
A gaming machine (1), wherein the gaming machine (1) is mounted in a cantilever manner on any one of the plate bodies (for example, the right side plate (11d)).

  According to the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I0. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plate members, and the protection means is attached to any one of the plate members in a cantilever shape. This has the effect of preventing improper acts on the setting means with a simple structure, and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

  The “cantilever beam shape” refers to a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is free without being fixed.

In gaming machine Ichi0 or Ichi1,
Control means for controlling the game (for example, main controller 110);
Storage means (for example, substrate box 100) for storing the control means,
The setting means,
Provided in the control means,
The storage means,
A setting unit (for example, a setting unit 100d) in which the setting unit is located;
An exposing portion that exposes a part of the setting unit from the setting unit toward the outside of the storage unit (for example, a portion where a keyhole of a setting key 501 in the setting unit 100d is exposed);
A concave portion (for example, a setting portion side wall 100e and a setting portion bottom surface 100f) for recessing the exposed portion from the outermost surface side of the storage means toward the control means side;
The protection means,
A gaming machine (1), comprising: a projection (for example, a cover-side projection (172)) that enters the recess when the opening / closing body is locked to the support.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0 or Ichi1. That is, the control of the game is performed by the control means, the control means is stored by the storage means, and the setting means is provided in the control means. Here, the setting unit is located at the setting unit provided in the storage unit, a part of the setting unit is exposed from the setting unit to the outside of the storage unit by the exposure unit, and the exposed unit is formed by the concave unit. It is formed at a position recessed from the outermost surface toward the control means. Then, when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion provided on the protection means is configured to enter the recess. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion of the protection means enters into the recess of the storage means, and the setting means exposed from the storage means is covered by the protrusion, thereby opening and closing. When locking the body, it is possible to make it difficult to access the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an improper act against the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

In gaming machine I2,
The protrusion is
A gaming machine (1), characterized in that it is formed so as to surround and close the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I2. That is, the protruding portion surrounds and closes the setting means. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion of the protection means enters the recess of the storage means and surrounds and closes the setting means exposed from the storage means. , It is possible to make it difficult to access the entire setting means from the back side of the gaming machine when locking the opening / closing body. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an improper act against the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

In gaming machine Ichi2 or Ichi3,
The recess is
A concave side wall (e.g., setting section side wall 100e) formed to be concave from the outermost surface of the storage means;
A concave bottom surface (setting portion bottom surface 100f) extending from the concave portion side wall and constituting a bottom surface of the concave portion and having the exposed portion formed in a part thereof;
A concave-side protruding portion (for example, a case-side protruding portion 100g) protruding in a rectangular shape from the bottom surface of the concave portion toward the protection means side so as to surround the exposed portion;
The protrusion is
A gaming machine (1) characterized in that when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, it enters a space formed by the concave side wall and the concave side projection.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the concave side wall of the concave portion is formed to be concave from the outermost surface of the storage means, and the concave bottom surface of the concave portion is also extended from the concave side wall to form the bottom surface of the concave portion, and an exposed portion is formed in a part thereof. Similarly, the recess-side projection of the recess is projected from the bottom surface of the recess toward the protection means side in a rectangular shape so as to surround the exposed portion. Then, when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion is configured to enter a space formed by the recess side wall and the recess-side protrusion. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is closed, the portion provided with the setting means is closed by the recess-side projection of the storage means, thereby making it difficult to access the setting means. The projections make access to the setting means difficult. With this configuration, the security of the setting means is enhanced, and there is no room for wire or the like to enter, so that there is an effect that fraudulent acts on the setting means can be prevented.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4
The protection means,
An attaching portion (for example, a cover attaching portion 150) attached to the plate body;
An upright portion (e.g., upright portion 160) extending from the attachment portion to the back side of the gaming machine;
A cover portion (e.g., a cover portion 170) that is formed to extend from the upright portion to the setting unit side and has the protrusion portion formed thereon;
The upright portion,
A gaming machine (1), comprising: a bending portion (for example, a curved portion 154) capable of bending based on the impact when the impact is applied to the protection means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate body by the attachment part, an upright part is formed to extend from the attachment part to the back side of the gaming machine, and a cover part is formed to extend from the upright part to the setting means side. A protrusion is formed. Then, when a shock is applied to the protection means, the bending portion provided on the upright portion can be bent based on the shock. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is closed, even when the storage means or the like contacts the protection means due to the momentum at the time of closing and the shock is applied, the bending section bends and absorbs the shock, whereby the protection means is provided. There is an effect that damage can be prevented.

In game machine 1 5,
The cover part,
A gaming machine (1) characterized in that it comprises a rear protruding rib (for example, a cover outer rib (174)) projecting toward the back side of the gaming machine along at least the outer shape of the cover portion.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rear protruding rib of the cover portion protrudes toward the back side of the gaming machine at least along the outer shape of the cover portion. Thereby, the rear protruding ribs increase the rigidity of the cover portion, and when an illegal act is performed by wire from the back surface of the gaming machine, the wire is directed upward or downward from the back surface side of the cover portion. When the wire travels, the wire collides with the rear protruding rib, thereby preventing the wire from entering.

In game machine 1 6,
The rear protruding rib,
A gaming machine 7 provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 17, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1 6. That is, a rearwardly projecting rib is provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means. Thus, by forming the rearward protruding rib on the cover portion at a position corresponding to the setting means, it is possible to make it difficult to form a hole or the like in the cover portion, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine. There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine 1 5 to 1 7,
The upright portion,
A gaming machine having at least a laterally projecting rib (for example, an upper outer cover portion 162b or a lower outer cover portion 163b) projecting to the side of the gaming machine along the outer shape of the upright portion. 8.

  According to the gaming machine 18, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 1 to 5. That is, the side protruding ribs of the upright portion protrude toward the gaming machine side at least along the outer shape of the upright portion. Thus, the side protruding ribs increase the rigidity of the upright portion, and in the case where wire misconduct is performed from the side of the gaming machine, the wire is moved upward or downward from the side surface of the upright portion. When transmitted toward the wire, the wire collides with the laterally protruding rib, so that the wire can be prevented from entering.

In game machine 1 5 to 1 8,
The control means includes:
It is arranged below the central part of the gaming machine,
The upright portion and the cover portion,
An upper inner cover portion (e.g., upper inner cover portion 162a) extending from an upper portion of the upright portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine;
A lower inner cover portion (e.g., a lower inner cover portion 163a) extending from the lower portion of the upright portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine.
The lower inner cover portion,
A gaming machine (1), characterized in that it is formed with a larger area than the upper inner cover portion.

  According to the gaming machine 19, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 1 to 8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the control means is disposed below the central portion of the gaming machine, the upper inner cover portion is formed extending from the upright portion and the upper portion of the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine, and the lower inner cover portion is formed. , From the upper portion of the upright portion and the cover portion to the inside of the gaming machine. The area of the lower inner cover is formed to be larger than the area of the upper inner cover.

  Conventionally, since the control means is disposed below the central portion of the gaming machine, when cheating is performed, it is easier to access the control means from above and below the gaming machine. Therefore, in many cases, a person who commits an illegal act to the control means performs an illegal act by causing a wire or the like to enter from a lower portion of the back surface of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned misconduct, the area of the lower inner cover portion is formed to be large, and the gap between the control means and the protection means can be reduced as much as possible by the lower protective cover portion. There is an effect that the security performance on the side can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I9,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 1 10 made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I0 to I9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it becomes possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or trouble with the changing means. This has the effect.

<Group 2: A cover that protects the control means is configured to be non-removable from the back side>
Conventionally, on the back side of a gaming machine, setting means for performing various settings of a game is provided, and when the opening / closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed, a player cannot contact the setting means. It is configured. On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening / closing body outside the opening hours of the hall and executes various maintenance work and setting work for the setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, even in such a gaming machine, even when the opening / closing body is closed, there is a possibility that an illegal act may be performed on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The inventions of the second group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an illegal act on a setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening / closing body to perform various game settings;
Protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for protecting the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means;
A means for making the protection means difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine (for example, a fixing screw from the outside of the right side plate 11d with the mounting surface 151 of the protective cover member 140 abutting against the inner wall of the right side plate 11d). A gaming machine 20 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine 20, the opening / closing body is supported to be openable / closable with respect to the support, the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various settings of the game are set by the setting means mounted on the opening / closing body. Done. And the protection means protects the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means. Here, the protection unit is configured to be difficult or non-removable from the gaming machine by the removable unit. Thereby, the protection means for protecting the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the attachment / detachment means, and an unauthorized act on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

In gaming machine 20,
The protection means,
Attached to the support,
The detachment difficult means,
The gaming machine 21 wherein the protection means is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the support when the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device.

  According to the gaming machine 21, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 20, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the protection means is attached to the support and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be difficult to attach to or detach from the support by the attachment / detachment means.

  Conventionally, in a hall in which a gaming machine is installed, an island facility incorporating a game ball automatic supply device or the like is provided in a closed predetermined space, and a support for the gaming machine is provided on both sides in the long side direction of the island facility. By attaching, a plurality of gaming machines can be installed on the island facility. Then, outside the opening hours of the hall, the person involved in the hall releases the lock between the opening and closing body of each gaming machine installed on the island facility and the support, and places the opening / closing body on the support (island facility). Open and perform setting change work and maintenance work for each gaming machine.

  However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the gaming machine, for example, in a situation where the gaming machine is installed on one long side of the island facility of the hall, the length of the gaming machine is set. If the opening / closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side that is not the side (that is, the back side of the gaming machine) is opened for some reason (for example, fraud, etc.), the gaming The setting means provided to be exposed on the back side of the machine can be directly operated. As a result, even if the opening / closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, The setting contents may be changed by unauthorized operation of, and an unexpected disadvantage may be caused in the hall.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 21, when the protection means is attached to the support and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is difficult to attach or detach from the support by the attachment / detachment means. It is configured to be non-detachable. Thereby, even if the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine is illegally opened, the setting means provided on the back side of the gaming machine is protected by the protection means, and when the opening / closing body is locked, the protection means is protected by the game. There is an effect that it is difficult or impossible to attach / detach from the back side of the machine, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act on the setting means.

In gaming machine 20 or 21,
The protection means,
A mounting portion (for example, mounting surface 151) that is mounted on the plate body,
The support is
A plurality of plate bodies (for example, upper plate 11a, lower plate 11b, left plate 11c, and right plate 11d) are formed in combination,
The plate body is
A side portion located on the side of the gaming machine,
A front portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine at a front side of the gaming machine at the side portion;
A rear portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine, on a rear side of the gaming machine on the side portion,
The mounting portion,
A gaming machine 22 which is attached to an inner wall of the side portion.

  According to the gaming machine 22, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 20 or 21. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate by the attachment portion of the protection means. In addition, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates. And, on the plate body, a side portion located on the side surface of the gaming machine, a front portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine on the front side of the gaming machine on the side portion, and a gaming machine on the side portion On the rear side, a rear portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine is provided. And a protection means is attached to the inner wall of a side part. Thereby, by attaching the mounting portion of the protection means to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion, and the rear portion of the plate body, from the front of the game machine or from the rear side of the game machine to the mounting portion of the protection means And make it difficult to access. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the protection unit difficult to attach or detach from the back side of the gaming machine, thereby preventing improper act on the setting unit.

In gaming machine 22,
Part or all of the plate body,
A gaming machine 23 characterized by being formed of a metal material having a higher hardness than wood (for example, aluminum).

  According to the gaming machine 23, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 22. That is, part or all of the plate body is formed of a metal material having a higher hardness than wood. Thereby, by attaching the mounting portion of the protection means to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion, and the rear portion of the plate body formed of a metal material higher in height than wood, This makes it difficult to access the mounting portion of the protection means from the rear side of the machine. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the protection unit difficult to attach or detach from the back side of the gaming machine, thereby preventing improper act on the setting unit.

In the gaming machine 22 or 23,
The side portions are
A fixing member (for example, a fixing screw 11g) capable of fixing the protection means to the support, a lateral insertion hole (for example, a cover mounting hole 11e or a cover lower mounting hole 11f),
The mounting portion,
A mounting insertion hole (for example, an upper mounting hole 152 or a lower mounting hole 153) provided corresponding to the side insertion hole and capable of inserting the fixing member,
The fixing member,
The gaming machine 24, wherein the gaming machine 24 is inserted into the side insertion hole and the attachment insertion hole from outside the gaming machine at the side portion.

  According to the gaming machine, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 2-2 or 2-2. That is, a fixing member capable of fixing the protection means to the support can be inserted into the side insertion hole provided in the side portion. Further, the fixing member is configured to be insertable by the mounting insertion hole provided in the mounting portion corresponding to the side insertion hole. Then, the fixing member is inserted into the side insertion hole and the attachment insertion hole from the outside of the gaming machine at the side portion.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is installed in an island facility of a hall without a gap so that a player cannot access a back side of the gaming machine from a front side of the gaming machine. In addition, beside the gaming machine installed on the island equipment, a card sanding device that can insert a card storing the amount of money to be used for the game etc. is also provided, and this card sanding device also creates a gap with the gaming machine It is not arranged.

  Therefore, the fixing member is inserted from the outside of the gaming machine to fix the plate body and the protection means, and the gaming machine is installed in the island facility in that state, so that a gap is generated in a portion where the fixing member is installed. Can not be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent access to the fixing member that fixes the protection means to the game machine, to prevent the protection means from being detached from the game machine, and to improve security performance on the back side of the game machine. This has the effect.

In any of gaming machines 22 to 24,
The protection means,
An extending portion (for example, a curved portion 154) extending from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine,
The extension part,
A gaming machine (2) characterized in that the gaming machine (2) is formed in a shape following (abutting) the inner wall shape of the rear portion.

  According to the gaming machine 25, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 22 to 24. That is, the extending portion provided on the protection means extends from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine, and the shape of the extending portion is formed along (abuts on) the inner wall shape of the rear portion. You. Thereby, the mounting portion of the protection means is covered by the rear portion of the plate body from the back side of the gaming machine, and the extended portion is formed in a shape following (abutting) the inner wall shape of the rear portion. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the side part on which the fixing member is mounted and the mounting part. Therefore, the protection means can be prevented from being detached from the gaming machine, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In gaming machine 2,
The extension portion,
A gaming machine 26 comprising: a bending portion (for example, a bending portion 154 made of a resin having an elastic force) that can be elastically deformed when an impact is applied to the protection means.

  According to the gaming machine 26, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 25. That is, when an impact is applied to the protection means, the bending portion of the extension portion is configured to be elastically deformable. Thereby, for example, even when a part of the opening and closing body comes into contact with the protection means due to the momentum at the time of closing and the shock is applied, when the opening and closing body is closed, the bending portion is bent by the elastic force to absorb the shock. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the protection means from being damaged.

In any of gaming machines 20 to 26,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Control means (for example, main controller 110) for controlling the game,
The control means includes:
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203b) for acquiring lottery information based on a game ball fired by the shooting means having entered the ball entry means;
Determining means for determining the lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means (for example, a change start process (S307));
Game value providing means (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for providing a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result being derived by the determining means,
The setting means,
A gaming machine 27 wherein the probability that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine 27, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 20 to 26. That is, a game area is formed in which the game body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and the game body is provided with a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball. A game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and the control of the game is performed by the control means. Then, the lottery information is obtained by the lottery information obtaining means provided in the control means based on that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball-entering means. Then, the lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means is determined by the determination means similarly provided in the control means, and the game value provided in the control means is determined based on the fact that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means. A predetermined game value is provided to the player by the providing means. Here, the setting means is configured to be able to change the setting of the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determining means. Thereby, the protection means which can change the probability of the specific determination result and protects the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means which influences the result of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the attaching / detaching means. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an improper act from the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the setting means such that the setting content of the gaming machine is illegally changed.

In any of gaming machines 20 to 27,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 28 characterized by being formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine 28, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 27. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it becomes possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or trouble with the changing means. This has the effect.

<Group: Settings can be changed and settings can be checked regardless of whether the inner frame is open>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the content of a game value (hit probability and / or hit type, etc., given to a player in accordance with a game result) in a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine. Is provided in a plurality of stages (e.g., six stages of setting values "1" to "6") based on operation of the setting unit by a person related to the hall or the like. It is configured to be changeable.

  In such a gaming machine, in order to improve security performance, when the opening / closing body equipped with the setting means is closed by the support, it is determined that the setting is impossible, and the opening / closing body is opened from the support, and the setting means is opened. If it is determined that the game machine can be operated from the front of the gaming machine, the setting by the setting means is permitted. With such a configuration, in a situation where the opening / closing body is closed with respect to the support, even if the setting means is improperly operated by an illegal act from the back side of the gaming machine, the setting of the gaming machine is performed. It cannot be changed (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, when determining whether or not the setting of the gaming machine can be changed based on the opening state of the opening / closing body, if the opening detection means for detecting opening of the opening / closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, the opening / closing body is opened. Setting cannot be changed on the basis of the above. Therefore, due to erroneous detection of the opening / closing body opening detection means, setting change or the like, which is an important game element of the gaming machine, cannot be performed, and there is a possibility that the business form assumed by the hall cannot be executed.

  The invention of the group of players has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Opening / closing detection means (for example, an inner frame opening switch 208g1) for detecting an opening / closing state of the opening / closing body with respect to the support,
First operating means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the locking of the opening and closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening and closing body is in an open state. When,
Change enable / disable determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a change enable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be changed when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner (for example, S4412 of start-up processing: Yes); ,
The change availability determination means,
Regardless of the detection result of the opening / closing detection unit, when the first operation unit is operated by the predetermined operation, a changeable state transition unit that shifts to the changeable state (for example, S4407 of the startup process: Yes) is provided. A gaming machine characterized by having 0.

  According to gaming machine 0, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to the support, and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the open / close state of the open / close body with respect to the support is detected by the open / close detection means. Further, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the first operating means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner, the changeability determining means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be changed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the opening / closing detecting means, when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner, the state is changed to the changeable state by the changeable state shifting means provided in the changeability determining means. That is, as a condition for shifting to the changeable state, it is possible to shift to the changeable state when a predetermined operation is performed on the first operation means without determining the detection result of the opening / closing detection means. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to change the setting, which is an important game element of the gaming machine, and it is assumed that the hall is supposed to be open. There is an effect that it is possible to surely execute the business mode.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Opening / closing detection means (for example, an inner frame opening switch 208g1) for detecting an opening / closing state of the opening / closing body with respect to the support,
First operating means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the locking of the opening and closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening and closing body is in an open state. When,
Confirmation availability determination means (for example, S4408 of start-up processing: Yes) which determines whether or not to shift to a state of confirming the degree of advantage in which the degree of advantage to the player can be confirmed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner. ),
The confirmation possibility determination means,
Irrespective of the detection result of the opening / closing detection means, when the first operation means is operated by the predetermined operation, confirmable transition means which shifts to the advantage confirmable state (for example, S4407 of startup processing: No), A gaming machine reference 1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine 1, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be capable of opening and closing with respect to the support, and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the open / close state of the open / close body with respect to the support is detected by the open / close detection means. Further, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the first operating means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the confirmation possibility determination means determines whether or not to shift to the advantage confirmable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be confirmed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the open / close detection means, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the state is shifted to the advantage degree checkable state by the checkable shift means provided in the checkability determination means. That is, as a condition for shifting to the advantage confirmable state, the state can be shifted to the advantage confirmable state based on an operation on the first operation means without determining the detection result of the opening / closing detecting means. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to check the setting status, which is an important game element of the gaming machine, There is an effect that the setting contents can be surely confirmed.

In gaming machine Gan 0 or Gan 1,
When the lock between the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in an open state, second operation means (for example, a RAM erasing switch 122) which can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. ),
The changeable state transition means or the confirmable transition means,
2. A gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein, when the second operation means is specially operated, the state shifts to the changeable state or the advantage confirmable state.

  According to the gaming machine attendant 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine attendant 0 or 1, the following effect is exhibited. That is, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the second operating means is operable from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the second operation means is specially operated, the changeable state transition means or the confirmable state transition means transitions to the changeable state or the advantage degree confirmable state. That is, the condition for shifting to the changeable state or the advantage degree confirmable state is based on a predetermined operation on the first operation means and a special operation on the second operation means without determining the detection result of the open / close detection means. Thus, the state can be changed to the changeable state or the advantage degree confirmable state. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, the setting change or setting confirmation, which is an important gaming element of the gaming machine, can be performed, and the hall can be changed. Has the effect that the business form envisioned by the company can be surely executed. Further, in the control for shifting to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body becomes unnecessary, and the control load of the gaming machine shifting to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state is reduced. There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines 0 to 2,
When the locking device unlocks the opening / closing body and the support, and the opening / closing body is in an open state, a third operation means that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine,
The third operation means includes:
When a specific operation is performed, a state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off is changed to a state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The change availability determination means,
A gaming machine reference 3 characterized in that the gaming machine is executed in a startup process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 0 to 2. That is, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the second operating means provided in the specific detecting means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Is done. Then, when the third operation means is specifically operated, an operation of changing from a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off to a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned on corresponds, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In the start-up process executed in the case where the determination is made, the determination by the change availability determination unit is performed.

  Conventionally, when performing a process of determining whether or not to shift to a changeable state in a start-up process at the time of power-on, if a process of detecting the opening of the opening and closing body is performed, a process for detecting the opening of the opening and closing body is performed. In addition, the control required when the power is turned on becomes complicated, and the processing load on the gaming machine may increase.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine reference 3, when the setting of the gaming machine is changed, the setting can be changed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the third operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine. It can be determined whether or not to shift to the state. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state and set the gaming machine.

In gaming machine 3
The confirmation possibility determination means,
3. A gaming machine reference 4, which is executed in the start-up process.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 3. That is, similarly to the change permission / inhibition determination means, the determination by the confirmation permission / inhibition determination means is executed in the start-up processing executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  Conventionally, in performing a process of determining whether or not to shift to a state in which the advantage can be checked in a startup process at the time of power-on, if a process of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body is performed, the opening of the opening / closing body is detected. The control required at the time of turning on the power becomes complicated for the processing, and the processing load on the gaming machine may increase.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine reference 4, when the setting of the gaming machine is confirmed, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the third operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the advantage is determined. It can be determined whether or not to shift to the checkable state. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the state where the advantage can be checked, and to check the setting of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machine 0 to gaming machine 4,
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the first operation means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the first operation is performed. A game machine 5 comprising a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for enabling the means to be operated.

  According to the gaming machine attendant 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine attendants 0 to 4. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the first operating means is made difficult to operate by the protection means, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the first operating means is opened. Is configured to be operable. Thus, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the first operating means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, the first operating means is protected by the protection means. This has the effect of making the means difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support. In addition, since the first operating means cannot be completely operated when the opening / closing body is closed by the protection means, even if the opening / closing body is not detected by the opening / closing detection means, the opening / closing body is inevitably open. For example, since the first operating means cannot be operated, it is not necessary to determine the detection result of the open / close detecting means as a condition for shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state. Therefore, in the control for shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body becomes unnecessary, and the control load of the gaming machine shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state can be reduced. effective.

In gaming machine 5
The protection means,
A gaming machine 6, which is attached to the support.

  According to the gaming machine 6, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device by the protection means attached to the support, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, while the opening / closing body is released from the support. In addition, the second operation means is configured to be operable. Thus, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the second operating means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, the second operating means is protected by the protection means. This has the effect of making the means difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support.

In gaming machine Gan 5 or Gan 6,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 7 characterized by being formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine 7, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5 or 6. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it becomes possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or trouble with the changing means. This has the effect.

<Shishi group: Setting change and setting confirmation are not possible when the front frame is open>
Conventionally, if the game machine is easily shifted to a state where settings can be changed and settings can be checked, it is not possible to eliminate the possibility of unauthorized settings changes and settings confirmation. Alternatively, it is desirable to take a multi-step security measure for the gaming machine so as not to shift to a checkable state where the setting content can be checked.

  On the other hand, when a person in charge of the hall performs maintenance work on a gaming machine, both the opening / closing body and the decorative body are released from the support (opening / closing body). It is general that an employee of a hall who does not have the authority to change settings or confirm settings performs the setting, instead of the responsible person (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-092371)).

  Here, if the employee enters a changeable state or a checkable state during maintenance work by an employee of a hall who does not have the authority to change the setting or check the setting, if the employee enters inside with an outside fraudulent person Therefore, there is a possibility that information on the setting status of the gaming machine may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The invention of the shosh group has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A decorative body (e.g., a front frame 14) on the front side of the opening / closing body and supported to be openable / closable with respect to the opening / closing body or the support;
First locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) for locking the support and the opening / closing body,
Second locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) for locking the decorative body and the support or the opening / closing body,
Opening / closing detection means (for example, an inner frame opening switch 208g1) for detecting an opening / closing state of the opening / closing body with respect to the support,
Decoration opening / closing detection means (for example, a front frame opening switch 208g2) for detecting an opening / closing state of the decoration body with respect to the support or the opening / closing body;
When the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the first locking means is released and the opening / closing body is in an open state, first operating means (for example, a power switch) which can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine, respectively. ) And second operating means (for example, setting key 501);
Change enable / disable determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be changed when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operating means is specifically operated (for example, , S4412 of start-up processing: Yes).
The change availability determination means,
When the second operation unit is operated to perform the specific operation, the opening / closing detection unit detects opening of the opening / closing body, and the decoration opening / closing detection unit does not detect opening / closing of the decoration body, the state shifts to the changeable state. (For example, S4453: Yes and S4454: Yes in the start-up process).

  According to the gaming machine shop 0, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the decorative body is supported at the front side of the opening / closing body so as to be able to open and close with respect to the opening / closing body or the support. Then, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the first locking means, and the decorative body and the support or the opening and closing body are locked by the second locking means. Here, the opening / closing state of the opening / closing body with respect to the support is detected by the opening / closing detecting means, and the opening / closing state of the decorative body with respect to the supporting body or the opening / closing body is detected by the decoration opening / closing detecting means. Further, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the first locking means is released and the opening / closing body is in an open state, the first operating means and the second operating means can be respectively operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Become. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specified manner, the changeability determination means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be changed. You. Here, when the second operation means is specified and the opening / closing detecting means detects opening / closing of the opening / closing body, and the decorative opening / closing detecting means does not detect the opening / closing of the decorative body, the change provided in the changeability determination means is provided. The transition means transitions to the changeable state. That is, as conditions for shifting to the changeable state, a specific operation on the second operating means, detection of opening / closing of the opening / closing body by the opening / closing detecting means, and non-opening (that is, closing) of the decorative body by the decorative opening / closing detecting means. When the condition for detection is satisfied, the state can be changed to a changeable state. As a result, during maintenance work in which both the opening and closing body and the decorative body are open, the setting change cannot be performed, thereby making it difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting to change the setting. This has the effect of improving the security performance of the device.

In gaming machine shop 0,
Confirmation availability determination means for determining whether or not to shift to an advantage confirmability state in which an advantage for a player can be confirmed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is specifically operated. (For example, S4408 of the start-up process: Yes),
The confirmation possibility determination means,
In the case where the second operation means is the specific operation, the opening / closing detecting means detects the opening of the opening / closing body, and the decorative opening / closing detecting means does not detect the opening / closing of the decorative body, the state in which the advantage can be confirmed (For example, S4451: Yes and S4452: Yes in the start-up process).

  According to the gaming machine shop 1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine shop 0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, and when the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, whether or not the confirmation possibility determination means shifts to a confirmable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be confirmed. Is determined. Here, when the second operation means is specifically operated, the opening / closing detection means detects the opening of the opening / closing body, and the decoration opening / closing detection means does not detect the opening / closing of the decoration body, the change provided in the confirmation possibility determination means is provided. The transition means transitions to a state in which the degree of advantage can be confirmed. That is, as the conditions for shifting to the state of being able to be set to the advantage nucleus, the specific operation on the second operation means, the detection of opening of the opening / closing body by the opening / closing detection means, and the non-opening of the decoration body by the decoration opening / closing detection means (ie, When the condition of detection of (closed) is satisfied, the state can be shifted to the state in which the advantage can be confirmed. As a result, during maintenance work in which both the opening and closing body and the decorative body are both open, the configuration can not be checked, so that it is difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to confirm the setting to check the setting, so that the game can be played. This has the effect of improving the security performance of the device.

In gaming machine Shio 0 or Shii 1,
A third operating means (for example, a RAM erase switch 122) which can be operated when the opening / closing body is opened;
Operation mode detection means for detecting the operation mode of the third operation means (for example, detection of ON or OFF of the RAM erase switch 122),
The change availability determination means,
When the operation mode detection unit detects a first operation mode (for example, ON) of the third operation unit, it determines whether or not to shift to the changeable state,
The confirmation possibility determination means,
When the operation mode detection unit detects a second operation mode (for example, OFF) different from the first operation mode of the third operation unit, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantage confirmable state. A gaming machine shop 2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine shod 2, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects of the gaming machine sho 0 or the shred 1. That is, when the opening / closing body is opened, the third operation means becomes operable, and the operation mode of the third operation means is detected by the operation mode detection means. Then, when the operation mode detection means detects the first operation mode of the third operation means, it is determined by the changeability determination section whether or not to shift to the changeable state. When a second operation mode different from the first operation mode of the operation unit is detected, a determination is made by the confirmation availability determination unit as to whether or not the state shifts to the advantage confirmability state. Thereby, there is an effect that the state can be shifted to either the changeable state or the advantage degree confirmable state according to the operation mode of the third operation means.

  The “second operation mode” may be any operation mode as long as the operation mode is different from the first operation mode. For example, when the first operation mode is pressed, the second operation mode includes Operation modes other than pressing, that is, operation modes such as non-pressing, touching, and pulling, are applicable.

In any of the gaming machines Shi 0 to Shi 2
The predetermined operation of the first operation means includes:
This is an operation for changing from a state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off to a state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The change availability determination means,
A game machine shop 3 which is executed in a startup process executed when the power of the game machine is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine shop 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine shops 0 to 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined operation of the first operation means corresponds to an operation of changing from a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off to a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In the startup process to be executed, the determination by the changeability determination unit is performed. Thereby, when the setting of the gaming machine is changed, whether or not to shift to the changeable state when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in response to the operation of the first operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine. Can be determined. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state and set the gaming machine.

In gaming machine shop 3,
The confirmation possibility determination means,
A gaming machine chain 4 which is executed in the start-up process.

  According to the gaming machine shackle 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine shackle 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, similarly to the change permission / inhibition determination means, the determination by the confirmation permission / inhibition determination means is executed in the start-up processing executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Thereby, when confirming the setting of the gaming machine, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the first operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine, whether the state shifts to the state in which the advantage can be confirmed. Can be determined. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the state where the advantage can be checked, and to check the setting of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines 0 to 4,
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means, the second operation means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the (2) A gaming machine shop 5 provided with protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for enabling the operation means to be operated.

  According to the gaming machine shod 5, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects of the gaming machine sho 0 to the shod 4. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means by the protection means, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the second operating means is opened. The operation means is configured to be operable. Thus, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support and the decorative body is closed by the opening / closing body or the support, the opening / closing body is configured to be easily operable while the opening / closing body is connected to the support. When locked, the protection means makes the second operation means difficult to operate, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved. There is.

In gaming machine shop 5,
The protection means,
A game machine shove 6 attached to the support.

  According to the gaming machine shed 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine shedding 5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means by the protection means attached to the support, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, and the opening / closing body is released from the support. The second operation means is configured to be operable when it is present. Thus, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support and the decorative body is closed by the opening / closing body or the support, the opening / closing body is configured to be easily operable while the opening / closing body is connected to the support. When locked, the protection means makes the second operation means difficult to operate, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved. There is.

In gaming machine sushi 5 to sushi 6,
The protection means,
A game machine 7 formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine shed 7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine shed 5 or 6. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it becomes possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or trouble with the changing means. This has the effect.

<Groups: Covers that protect parts that affect game specifications>
Conventionally, on the back of the opening and closing body of a gaming machine composed of a support and an opening and closing body, a number of influence means for affecting the result of the game are arranged, and during the opening hours of the hall, While the opening / closing body is locked so that the influence means cannot be operated by the player, the maintenance work of the influence means is performed by opening the opening / closing body outside the opening hours of the hall (for example, Patent Document 1 ( JP, 2015-024202, A).

  However, even in such a gaming machine, even when the opening / closing body is closed, there is a possibility that an illegal act may be performed on the influence means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The invention of the group of the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing improper acts on the influence means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Influence means (for example, a setting key 501, a main control device 110 or a payout control device 111) mounted on the opening / closing body and affecting a result of a game by a player;
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, it covers a part or the entirety of the influencing means, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, A gaming machine 0 that includes a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) that enables operation.

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening and closing body is supported on the support so as to be openable and closable, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and the influence means mounted on the opening and closing body allows the player to play the game. The result is affected. The protection means covers a part or the entirety of the influencing means when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, and operates the influencing means when the opening / closing body is released from the support. Is made possible. Thus, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the influence means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, a part of the influence means is protected by the protection means. Alternatively, there is an effect that it is difficult to perform operations for all of them, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved.

  In addition, "influencing the result of the game" is, for example, a case where the effect is obtained by performing a main control of the game, or a case where the effect is obtained by changing or determining the setting content of the game. For example, there is a case where the payment of the game value has an effect on the payout.

In gaming machine 0,
The influence means,
Main control means for controlling the game (for example, main control device 110);
Payout control means (for example, payout control) for performing control in accordance with a payout instruction of game media output from the main control means based on establishment of a predetermined prize condition (for example, winning of a ball into the first starting port 64a). Device 111), and
The protection means,
A gaming machine 1 that covers a part or all of the main control means and also covers a part or all of the payout control means.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 5. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means provided as the influence means, and the game medium outputted from the main control means based on the establishment of the predetermined prize condition by the payout control means also provided as the influence means. Is controlled according to the payout instruction. Here, the protection means covers part or all of the main control means, and also covers part or all of the payout control means. With this configuration, when the opening and closing body is unlocked from the support, the main control unit and the payout control unit can be easily operated, and when the opening and closing body is locked to the support, The protection means can make it difficult to operate a part or all of the main control means and a part or all of the payout control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support body can be improved by one member (protection means).

In gaming machine 5,
The main control means includes:
A main control board (e.g., a main board) on which a microchip (e.g., MPU 201) for executing processing relating to a game is mounted;
Main storage means (for example, a substrate box 100) for storing the main control board;
Main sealing means (for example, a sealing unit 100c) for sealing the main storage means so as to be difficult to open.
The protection means,
A gaming machine 2 which covers at least the main sealing means.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 5. That is, a microchip for executing a game-related process is mounted on a main control board provided in the main control means, and the main control board is stored in the main storage means. Then, the main storage means is sealed by the main sealing means so as to be difficult to open. Here, the protection means covers at least the main sealing means.

  Conventionally, illegal actions such as unauthorized replacement of the main control board due to cutting of the main sealing means for sealing the main storage means containing the main control board so as to be difficult to open are performed, causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. There is a risk.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 5, at least the main sealing means is covered by the protection means. Thereby, by covering the main sealing means of the main storage means, which houses the main control board on which the microchip for executing the processing relating to the game is mounted, with the protection means, it is possible to prevent improper actions such as unauthorized exchange of the main control board. However, when the opening / closing body is closed, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In gaming machine 5 or 5
The main control means includes:
A game value assigning means for assigning a predetermined game value to a player based on a game result (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103));
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the probability that the game value to be provided to the player by the game value providing means is derived.
The protection means,
A gaming machine 5 that covers at least the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 53, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5 or 5. That is, a predetermined game value is provided to the player by the game value provision means, and the setting means can change the probability of deriving the game value to be provided to the player by the game value provision means. Then, at least the setting unit is covered by the protection unit. With this, by covering the setting means capable of changing the probability of deriving the game value given to the player with the protection means, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting contents, and at the time of closing the opening / closing body Thus, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of gaming machines 5 to 5,
The main control means includes:
A wiring attaching section (for example, a connector attaching section 100h) to which a wiring is attached for outputting control information to other control means including the payout control means;
The protection means,
A gaming machine 4 which covers at least the wiring attachment portion.

  According to the gaming machine 54, in any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the wiring attachment portion of the main control means causes the wiring for outputting control information to the other control means including the payout control means. Is attached, and at least the wiring attachment portion is covered by the protection means. Thus, by covering the wiring attachment portion where the wiring for exchanging control information between the main control means and the other control means is attached with the protection means, it is possible to prevent improper actions such as attaching an incorrect board to the wiring. However, when the opening / closing body is closed, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of gaming machines 5 to 5,
The main control means includes:
Game performance information display means (for example, a base display device 401) for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 5 wherein the gaming performance information display means is not covered.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 5-1. That is, the game performance information display means provided in the main control means displays the game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, and the protection means prevents the game performance information display means from being covered. Be composed. Thereby, there is an effect that the game performance information can be always checked without the game performance information being unable to be checked by the protection means.

In any of gaming machines 5 to 5,
The payout control means,
A payout control board (for example, a payout board) on which a microchip (for example, the MPU 211) for executing a process related to a payout operation of a game medium is mounted;
Payout storage means (for example, substrate box 101) for storing the payout control board;
Dispensing sealing means (for example, a sealing portion 111a) for sealing the dispensing storage means so as to be difficult to open;
The protection means,
A gaming machine 6 that covers at least the payout sealing means.

  According to the gaming machine 56, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 5-5. In other words, a payout control board provided in the payout control means is provided with a microchip for executing processing relating to the payout operation of the game medium, and the payout control board is stored in the payout storage means. Then, the dispensing storage means is sealed by the dispensing sealing means so as to be difficult to open. Here, at least the dispensing sealing means is covered with the protection means.

  Conventionally, improper actions such as improper replacement of the dispensing control board due to cutting of the dispensing and sealing means for sealing the dispensing storage means storing the dispensing control board so as to be difficult to open are performed, causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. There is a risk.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 5, at least the payout sealing means is covered by the protection means. Thereby, by covering the payout sealing means of the payout storing means storing the payout control board mounted with the microchip for executing the processing relating to the payout operation of the game medium by the protection means, the payout control board is illegally replaced. This has the effect of preventing fraud and improving the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is closed.

In any of the gaming machines 5 to 6,
Storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing game information related to the game being executed;
Erasing means (for example, a RAM erasing switch 122) for erasing the game information stored in the storage means by performing a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation when the power is turned on);
The protection means,
A gaming machine 7 covering at least the erasing means.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 5 to 6. That is, the storage means stores information about the game being executed, and the erasing means performs a predetermined operation, thereby deleting the game information stored in the storage means. Then, the erasing means is covered by the protection means. Thereby, by covering the erasing means capable of erasing the game-related information with the protection means, it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as erasing of the game-related information, and to prevent the illegal operation of the game machine from being performed when the opening / closing body is closed. There is an effect that security performance can be improved.

In gaming machine 5,
The erasing means,
Deleting the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine (8), characterized in that, when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the probability that the gaming value is derived is updated.

  According to the gaming machine 8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 7. That is, when the first condition is satisfied, the information stored in the storage device is deleted by the erasing device, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the probability that the game value is derived is updated. You. Thus, the erasing unit can erase the storage unit and change the probability by the setting unit under different conditions, and perform various settings of the gaming machine with a small number of members, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. There is.

In any of gaming machines 5 to 8,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 9 characterized by being mounted in a cantilever manner on any one of the plate bodies (for example, the right side plate 11d).

  According to the gaming machine 9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 5 to 8. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plate members, and the protection means is attached to any one of the plate members in a cantilever shape. This has the effect that fraudulent acts on the influence means can be prevented with a simple structure, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved at low cost.

  The “cantilever beam shape” refers to a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is free without being fixed.

In any of gaming machines 0-5,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 10 characterized by being formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine 10, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 5 to 9. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it is possible to check the influence means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or malfunction with respect to the influence means. This has the effect.

<Land group: Connect the covers on the back side of the pachinko machine>
Conventionally, on the back side of a gaming machine, a plurality of control means for executing various settings and processing of a game are arranged, and when the opening / closing body equipped with each control means is closed, a player contacts the control means. It is configured so that it cannot be done. On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening / closing body outside the opening hours of the hall and executes various settings and maintenance work for the control means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, even in such a gaming machine, even when the opening / closing body is closed, there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed on the control means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the land group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an illegal act on a control means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
First control means (for example, the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114) and second control means (for example, the main control device 110 or payout) which are mounted on the back side of the gaming machine of the opening / closing body and control the game. Control device 111);
A first protection unit (for example, a back pack 92) provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the opening / closing body and covering at least a part or the whole of the back side of the gaming machine of the first control unit;
A second protection unit (for example, a protection cover member 140) that is provided on the support and covers at least a part or all of the second control unit on the back side of the gaming machine;
A game machine land 0, wherein a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap with a part of the second protection means in a rear surface direction of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine land 0, the opening / closing body is supported on the support so as to be openable and closable, and the first control means and the second control means for controlling the game are mounted on the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the opening / closing body. Then, at least a part or all of the first control means on the back side of the gaming machine is covered by the first protection means mounted on the back side of the gaming machine of the opening / closing body. Also, at least a part or all of the second control means on the back side of the gaming machine is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed so as to be in contact with a part of the second protection means in a superimposed manner in the back side of the gaming machine. This eliminates the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means that respectively cover the first control means and the second control means, and there is no room for wires or the like to enter the inside of the gaming machine from the back side of the gaming machine. There is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the machine can be improved. Also, when the first protection means provided on the opening / closing body is formed so as to overlap with the second protection means provided on the supporting body in the back direction of the gaming machine, the opening / closing body is released from the supporting body. However, since the first protection means of the opening and closing body and the second protection means of the support do not interfere with each other, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine is improved without increasing extra work in maintenance work and the like. There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine land 0,
The opening and closing body is
Installing the first control means above the second control means,
The first protection means includes:
A first protection unit that covers the back side of the gaming machine of the first control unit;
A first protruding portion (for example, a lower side protruding portion) that protrudes below the first protection portion and toward the back side of the gaming machine,
The second protection means is
A second protection unit that covers a part or all of the second control unit on the back side of the gaming machine;
A second protruding portion (for example, an upper side protruding portion) that protrudes toward the front side of the gaming machine above the first protection portion,
The gaming machine land 1, wherein the first projecting portion is formed so as to overlap the second projecting portion in the up-down direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine land 1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine land 0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first control means is disposed above the second control means in the opening / closing body. In addition, the back side of the gaming machine of the first control unit is covered by the first protection unit provided in the first protection unit, and the first protrusion provided below the first protection unit is moved to the back side of the gaming machine. Protruded. Further, the back surface of the game machine of the second control means is covered by the second protection portion provided on the first protection means, and the second projection provided above the second protection portion is moved to the front side of the game machine. Protruded. The first projection is formed so as to overlap the second projection in the up-down direction of the gaming machine. Thus, the respective protrusions of the first protection means and the second protection means are formed so as to be folded in the vertical direction, so that a gap between the first protection means and the second protection means can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent wire or the like from entering from the back side of the gaming machine, and to improve security performance on the back side of the gaming machine.

In land machine 0 or land 1,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The second protection means includes:
A gaming machine land 2 which is attached to one of the plate bodies (for example, the right side plate 11d) in a cantilever manner.

  According to the gaming machine land 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 0 or land 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the second protection means is attached to any one of the plates in a cantilever shape. This has the effect of preventing improper acts on the second control means with a simple structure, and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

  The “cantilever beam shape” refers to a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is free without being fixed.

In gaming machine land 2,
The first protection means includes:
A game machine land 3 characterized in that at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening / closing body in the form of fixed beams at both ends.

  According to the gaming machine land 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 2. That is, at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening / closing body in the form of fixed beams at both ends, respectively. Thus, even when an impact is applied to the second protection means attached to the support in a cantilever manner from the back side of the gaming machine, the first protection attached to the opening / closing body in the form of fixed beams at both ends. By means, the rigidity of the second protection means can be compensated. Therefore, even when an impact or the like is given from the back side of the gaming machine, there is an effect that the second protection means can be prevented from being damaged.

In any one of land 0 to land 3,
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203b) for acquiring lottery information based on a game ball fired by the shooting means having entered the ball entry means;
Determining means for determining the lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means (for example, a change start process (S307));
A game value providing means (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for providing a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result being derived by the determining means;
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the probability that the specific judgment result is derived by the judging means,
The second protection means includes:
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting unit is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the setting unit is operable. A gaming machine land 4 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine land 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 0 to land 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the game body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means capable of entering game balls. Further, the launching means launches a game ball toward the game area, and the lottery information acquiring means acquires lottery information based on the fact that the game ball launched by the launching means enters the ball entry means. The determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and based on the fact that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means, provides a predetermined game value to the player by the game value provision means. Is done. Here, the setting means is configured to be able to change the setting of the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determining means. The second protection means makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, and operates the setting means when the opening / closing body is released from the support. It is configured to be possible. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the setting means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, the setting means is controlled by the second protection means. This has the effect of making operation difficult and improving the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support.

In any of the land machine 0 to land 4,
When the opening / closing body is closed with respect to the support, there is provided an engagement means for engaging a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means. Gaming machine land 5.

  According to the gaming machine land 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 0 to land 4. That is, when the opening / closing body is closed with respect to the support, a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means are engaged by the engagement means. Thereby, the first protection means and the second protection means are engaged when the opening / closing body is closed, so that a gap between the first protection means and the second protection means can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent wire or the like from entering from the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is closed, thereby improving security performance on the back side of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine land 5,
The locking device,
It is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine,
A game machine land 6 comprising an engagement releasing means for releasing the engagement of the first protection means and the second protection means by the engagement means by a predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine land 6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine land 5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the locking device is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine, and is engaged with the first protection means and the second protection means by the engagement means by performing a predetermined operation by the engagement release means provided on the locking device. Is released. Thereby, the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means can be released from the front side of the gaming machine, so that even when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the engagement from the front side of the gaming machine can be achieved. By releasing the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means by performing a predetermined operation of the release means, there is an effect that the opening / closing body can be released from the support without any trouble.

In any of land 0 to land 6,
The first protection means includes:
A gaming machine land 7 which is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the opening / closing body.

  According to the gaming machine land 7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 0 to land 6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first protection means is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the opening and closing body. As a result, a part of the first protection means overlaps with a part of the second protection means in the reverse direction of the gaming machine, thereby preventing the first protection means from being opened in the reverse direction of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is closed. There is an effect that can be.

<Lacquer group: 2 versions of Ichi group>
An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Game value assigning means for assigning a predetermined game value to a player based on the game ball shot by the shooting means having entered the ball entry means (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103)); In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the game value provided by the game value providing means,
The support is
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting unit is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the setting unit is operable. A gaming machine lacquer 0 characterized by comprising protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140).

  According to the gaming machine lacquer 0, the opening and closing body is supported to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the game body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means capable of entering game balls. In addition, a game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and based on the fact that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball-entering means, a predetermined game is given to the player by the game value providing means. Value is given. Here, the game value provided by the game value providing means can be set and changed by the setting means. And, by the protection means provided on the support, when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making the setting means difficult to operate, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, The setting means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the setting means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. In addition, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved.

<Soul group: higher version of Ichi group>
Conventionally, a game medium is fired by a firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, and when the gaming medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined number of winning ports are determined for the winning ports. There are gaming machines in which game media are paid out to players.

  Among the gaming machines, for example, there is a gaming machine having a function of allowing a person involved in a hall to change a game setting such as an acquisition condition and acquisition contents of a game value to be given to a player. JP-A-2005-024202).

  For such a gaming machine, there is a risk that the game settings may be changed due to fraud, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a change in game setting due to an illegal act.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A game value providing means (for example, a large open opening / closing process (S103)) for providing a predetermined game value to a player when a game ball fired by the shooting means enters the ball entering means. Gaming machines,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of changing the degree of advantage to the player in a plurality of stages;
The support is
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting unit is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the setting unit is operable. A gaming machine handling device (e.g., a protective cover member 140).

  According to the gaming machine handling 0, the opening and closing body is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the game body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means capable of entering game balls. Further, when the game means launches a game ball toward the game area and the game ball fired by the fire means enters the ball entry means, the game value provision means provides the player with a predetermined game value. Is given. Here, the setting means is configured so that the degree of advantage for the player can be changed in a plurality of stages. And, by the protection means provided on the support, when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making the setting means difficult to operate, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, The setting means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the setting means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. Can be Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved.

  The “degree of advantage to the player” refers to, for example, the jackpot probability of the first symbol, the selection probability of the jackpot symbol when the first symbol is hit, and a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variation state). Transition probability to 1, the number of prize balls when winning in one winning opening, the driving time or driving mode of the movable role changing the flow mode of the game ball, the inclination mode of the member affecting the flow mode of the game ball, Any member or process that affects a situation that is advantageous to the player when the player plays the game, such as the inclination mode of the gaming machine itself, may be used.

<Ku group: Version for group 2 in the horizontal direction>
Conventionally, on the back side of a gaming machine, setting means for performing various settings of a game is provided, and when the opening / closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed, a player cannot contact the setting means. It is configured. On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening / closing body outside the opening hours of the hall and executes various maintenance work and setting work for the setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, even in such a gaming machine, even when the opening / closing body is closed, there is a possibility that an illegal act may be performed on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of Ku group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an illegal act on a setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening / closing body to perform various game settings;
Protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable (for example, the fixed screw 11g is inserted from outside the right side plate 11d, and the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island facility without gaps). Gaming machine 0

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening and closing body is supported to be able to open and close with respect to the support, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various settings of the game are set by the setting means mounted on the opening and closing body. Done. Then, the setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the gaming machine is installed in the game arcade, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable. Thereby, in a state where the gaming machine is installed in the game arcade, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine, thereby preventing an illegal act on the setting means. There is an effect that can be.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening / closing body to perform various game settings;
Protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable (for example, in a state where the mounting surface 151 of the protection cover member 140 is in contact with the inner wall of the right side plate 11d). A gaming machine 1 characterized in that a fixing screw 11g is inserted from the outside of the right side plate 11d).

  According to the gaming machine 1, the opening and closing body is supported to be able to open and close with respect to the support, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various settings of the game are set by the setting means mounted on the opening and closing body. Done. Then, the setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable. Thus, in a state where the support and the opening / closing body are locked, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine, thereby preventing an illegal act on the setting means. There is an effect that can be.

In game machine Ku0 or Ku1,
The setting means,
Has a keyhole that can insert a predetermined key,
The keyhole is
A gaming machine (2) characterized in that when the supporter and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device, the gaming machine faces the back side of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 0 or 1. That is, it is configured such that a predetermined key can be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and is configured such that the keyhole faces the back side of the gaming machine when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device. . As a result, there is an effect that the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game can prevent improper operation of the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

In game machine Ku0 or Ku1,
The setting means,
Has a keyhole that can insert a predetermined key,
The keyhole is
A gaming machine 3 characterized by facing the gaming machine side when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 0 or 1. That is, a predetermined key is configured to be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device, the keyhole is located on the side of the gaming machine (rightward or leftward). It is configured to face. As a result, there is an effect that the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game can prevent the setting means from being fraudulently operated by the gaming machine.

<Group: Lost the big hits due to the setting change>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is directed to one of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. Performs a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a ball, and in the case of a winning or losing lottery in the applicable or not lottery, opens the normally closed variable ball-taking means to give a predetermined game value to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION A group of inventions have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, a big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, a big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored so as to be different,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. Compensation for the increase in the jackpot random value accompanying the loss random value)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 10, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means can be changed by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is stored in the hit / fail storage means so as to be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the first value is changed. The determination information acquisition means is configured to change the derivation probability of the third value with the change of the derivation probability. Thus, depending on the set value, the derivation probability between the first value at which the game value is given to the player and the third value at which the game value is not given to the player is provided with inflection (brightness), and the variation of the game is abundant. Thus, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 10,
The said pass / fail storage means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed (for example, the number of small random number values is maintained even when the setting value is changed).
A gaming machine 11 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine 11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value in the hit / fail storage unit is not changed.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in order to install a gaming machine in a gaming hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by a competent authority and obtain approval indicating that the gaming machine is within a specified range. For this reason, at the time of designing the gaming specification, the developer of the gaming machine continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine at all the set values of the gaming machine in order to pass the certification test and receive approval. A test is performed on the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the ball is played (the number obtained by dividing the number of paid-out balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out-balls; so-called machine-divided. The first value and the second value need to be distributed so that the probability of deriving the first value and the second value in the determination means is an appropriate value so that the payout rate can be obtained in the test.

  However, in a gaming machine in which the set value can be changed, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, if the derivation probability of the second value is changed, the first value is changed for each set value. And the payout rate of the second game value based on the derivation probability of the second value need to be calculated separately, and the total payout rate for each set value needs to be calculated. The calculation of the ball rate becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification may increase.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 11, even if the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the winning probability of the first game value (that is, only the appearance rate of the first game result). This has the effect of facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing game specifications.

In the gaming machine 10 or 11,
The third value is
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest deriving probability of the first value from the first setting value A gaming machine 12 characterized by being provided with an increment of the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 10 or 11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first setting value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, the third value and the increment of the first value in the second setting value with the highest derivation probability of the first value are provided from the first setting value. ing. Thereby, in all the setting values, all the first values changed by the setting change can be changed from the third values. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and designing the game specifications. There is an effect that an increase in man-hours at the time can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 12,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
A gaming machine (13) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased.

  According to the gaming machine 13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. As a result, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that is increased stepwise and evenly. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “equally increase” means that, for example, the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower or the derivation probability that is one step lower. On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 12,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (14), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate, and calculates the payout rate. And it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 14,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (15) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 15, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 14. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each of the changed first values in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 14,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
The gaming machine (16), wherein the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by the determination of the agreement of the individual first values, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the success / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to prevent the first game value from being illegally derived and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 16,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The said pass / fail storage means,
At one predetermined set value (for example, set value "1") set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means (for example, 0.5 %) Is equal to the first value, and
At the predetermined setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability (for example, 1%) of the second game result by the first determination means is derived from the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means ( For example, the second value is stored in such a manner that
Storing the second value such that the derivation probability (for example, 1%) of the second game result by the first determination means is equal for all the setting values set by the setting means;
The second value is stored such that the derivation probability (for example, 94%) of the second game result by the second determination means is equal in all the setting values set by the setting means. Gaming machine 17 to do.

  According to the gaming machine 17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 16, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. At this time, at one predetermined set value set by the setting means, the hit / non-kill storage means stores the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means so that the derivation probabilities are equal. While the first value is stored, the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means is higher than the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means at a predetermined set value set by the setting means. Then, the second value is stored in the success / failure storage means. In addition, for all the setting values set by the setting unit, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the derivation probabilities of the second game result by the first determination unit are equal in the hit storage unit. In addition, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the probability of derivation of the second game result by the second determination unit is equal in all the setting values set by the setting unit. . Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value and each piece of determination information is performed by calculating the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination unit and the second determination unit accompanying the setting change, and the first determination unit. The calculation can be performed by taking into account the change in the derivation probability of the second game result with the second determination means, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specifications. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine 17,
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided (for example, the “normal game state”), after the first game value is provided, the advantageous game state is different from the predetermined game state (for example, the “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine 18.

  According to the gaming machine 18, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 17. That is, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided by the game state changing means provided in the first game value provision means. Be changed. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. The approximate calculation can be performed by taking into account the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. The effect of simplifying the calculation of the ball rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be obtained.

In the gaming machine 17 or 18
A first dynamic display execution unit (for example, a first special display unit) that executes a first dynamic display of the first identification information on a display unit (for example, the special symbol display device 39) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. Execution of dynamic display of symbols), and
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit; Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Game machine nine.

  According to the gaming machine 19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 17 or 18, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means based on the determination result of the first determination means. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 19, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means is set to a set value. And the derivation probability of the second game result in the second determination means is not changed for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the change in the derivation probability of the first game result. In a gaming machine capable of performing display, there is an effect that calculation of a payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In game machine 19,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Gaming machine 110.

  According to the gaming machine 110, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 19. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In game machine 19,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine (11) comprising: a result suspending means (for example, a modification 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 19. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 18 to 11
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric drive in the thirteenth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712): Yes to shift to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the thirteenth embodiment)) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous transition means that transitions the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a “super-probability changing state” in the thirteenth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, the jackpot ending process (S5712: S5751: Yes)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position (for example, on the downstream side of the ordinary electric utility 64c) where a game ball rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enters the ball. 12.

  According to the gaming machine 112, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 18 to 111. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the upper part of the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. The game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 17 or 18
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the fourteenth embodiment) Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
A gaming machine (13), wherein the first gaming value can be given when a gaming ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 17 and 18, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll over the movable means. The driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which game balls are difficult or impossible to enter the second ball-in means. Accordingly, the movable means is driven in a ball-enterable pattern in which game balls can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a game of whether to get or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 13,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine (14), wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 114, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 113. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Second group: Absorption of big hits due to setting changes is absorbed from many other random numbers>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is directed to one of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. Performs a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a ball, and in the case of a winning or losing lottery in the applicable or not lottery, opens the normally closed variable ball-taking means to give a predetermined game value to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The two groups of inventions have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, a big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, a big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored so as to be different,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the higher the deriving probability is the higher of the deriving probability of the second value or the deriving probability of the third value in accordance with the change in the deriving probability of the first value. Is derived (for example, the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is compensated from the lost random number value).
A gaming machine 20 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 20, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means can be changed by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the probability of deriving the first value is stored in the hit / fail storage means so as to be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the first value is changed. With the change in the derivation probability, the determination information acquisition unit changes the derivation probability of the higher derivation probability among the derivation probabilities of the second value and the third value. Thereby, depending on the set value, the first value at which the game value is given to the player and the derivation probability of the role having a high derivation probability are provided with inflection (sharpness), the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In the gaming machine 20,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the lower derivation probability is configured not to change (for example, even if the setting value is changed, Keep the number)
A gaming machine 21 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine 21, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 20. That is, no matter which setting value is set by the setting means, the derivation storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the value with the lower derivation probability is not changed. That is, even if the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, the derivation probability of the value with the higher derivation probability is changed without changing the derivation probability of the value with the lower derivation probability. It is configured so that With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the set value of the gaming machine from the appearance rate of the hand corresponding to the value whose appearance rate is low. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, and, for example, the ratio of the number of balls (the number of paid-out balls (the number of safe balls) obtained when the player continuously plays the game in the pachinko machine is divided by the number of out-balls) The number is a so-called machine split, which may be hereinafter referred to as a "ball rate". There is an effect that the operation can be continued and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine 20 or 21,
The value with a high derivation probability is
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest deriving probability of the first value from the first setting value The gaming machine 22 characterized by being provided with an increase in the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 22, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 20 or 21. In other words, at the setting value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a value with an increase of the first value at the setting value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the setting value, and a value with a high departure probability are provided. Thereby, all the first values changed by the setting change can be changed from the value with the higher derivation probability. Therefore, since a value with a low derivation probability (a small number) is not changed for each setting, the appearance rate of a hand corresponding to a value with a low derivation probability is prevented from being seen by a player through a setting value of a gaming machine. be able to. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, for example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), it is difficult for the player to find out the setting, and the game is continued. There is an effect that operation can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 22,
The value with a high derivation probability is
A gaming machine 23 characterized by the third value.

  According to the gaming machine 23, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 22. That is, the third value is provided as a value having a high derivation probability. That is, the derivation probability of the third value is set higher than the derivation probability of the second value.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in order to install a gaming machine in a gaming hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by a competent authority and obtain approval indicating that the gaming machine is within a specified range. For this reason, a gaming machine developer can obtain certification in the certification test for the payout rate for all set values of the gaming machine in order to pass the certification test and receive approval when designing the game specifications It is necessary to distribute the first value and the second value such that the derivation probability of the first value and the second value in the determination means becomes an appropriate value so that the payout rate is high.

  However, in a gaming machine in which the set value can be changed, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, if the derivation probability of the second value is changed, the first value is changed for each set value. And the payout rate of the second game value based on the derivation probability of the second value need to be calculated separately, and the total payout rate for each set value needs to be calculated. The calculation of the ball rate becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification may increase.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 23, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, only the derivation probability of the third value is changed, and the derivation probability of the second value is not changed. I do. With such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the winning probability of the first game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing specifications.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 23,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine 24, wherein the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 24, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 23. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. As a result, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that is increased stepwise and evenly. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “equally increase” means that, for example, the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower or the derivation probability that is one step lower. On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 23,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (25), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 25, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 20 to 23. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate, and calculates the payout rate. And it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 25,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
The gaming machine (2), characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 26, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 20 to 25. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each of the changed first values in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 25,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
The gaming machine (27), wherein, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 27, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 25, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by the determination of the agreement of the individual first values, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the success / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to prevent the first game value from being illegally derived and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 27,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The said pass / fail storage means,
At one predetermined set value (for example, set value "1") set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means (for example, 0.5 %) Is equal to the first value, and
At the predetermined setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability (for example, 1%) of the second game result by the first determination means is derived from the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means ( For example, the second value is stored in such a manner that
Storing the second value such that the derivation probability (for example, 1%) of the second game result by the first determination means is equal for all the setting values set by the setting means;
The second value is stored such that the derivation probability (for example, 94%) of the second game result by the second determination means is equal for all the setting values set by the setting means. Gaming machine 28 to do.

  According to the gaming machine 28, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 20 to 27. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. At this time, at one predetermined set value set by the setting means, the hit / non-kill storage means stores the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means so that the derivation probabilities are equal. While the first value is stored, the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means is higher than the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means at a predetermined set value set by the setting means. Then, the second value is stored in the success / failure storage means. In addition, for all the setting values set by the setting unit, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the derivation probabilities of the second game result by the first determination unit are equal in the hit storage unit. In addition, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the probability of derivation of the second game result by the second determination unit is equal in all the setting values set by the setting unit. . Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value and each piece of determination information is performed by calculating the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination unit and the second determination unit accompanying the setting change, and the first determination unit. The calculation can be performed by taking into account the change in the derivation probability of the second game result with the second determination means, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specifications. There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine 28,
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided (for example, the “normal game state”), after the first game value is provided, the advantageous game state is different from the predetermined game state (for example, the “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine two 9.

  According to the gaming machine 29, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 28. That is, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided by the game state changing means provided in the first game value provision means. Be changed. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. The approximate calculation can be performed by taking into account the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. The effect of simplifying the calculation of the ball rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be obtained.

In gaming machines 28 or 29,
A first dynamic display execution unit (for example, a first special display unit) that executes a first dynamic display of the first identification information on a display unit (for example, the special symbol display device 39) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. Execution of dynamic display of symbols), and
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit; Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Gaming machine two 10.

  According to the gaming machine 210, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 28 or 29, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means based on the determination result of the first determination means. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 210, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means is set to a set value. And the derivation probability of the second game result in the second determination means is not changed for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the change in the derivation probability of the first game result. In a gaming machine capable of performing display, there is an effect that calculation of a payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 210,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Two gaming machines 11.

  According to the gaming machine 211, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 210, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 210,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine (12) comprising: a result suspending means (for example, a modified example (130)) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 212, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 210. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 29 to 212,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric drive in the thirteenth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712): Yes to shift to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the thirteenth embodiment)) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous transition means that transitions the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a “super-probability changing state” in the thirteenth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, the jackpot ending process (S5712: S5751: Yes)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing-time rolling means to the other end is easy to enter (for example, downstream of the normal electric utility 64c). 13.

  According to the gaming machine 213, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 209 to 212. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the upper part of the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. The game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machines 28 or 29,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the fourteenth embodiment) Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine (14), wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 214, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines 28 or 29. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll over the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a game of whether to get or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine two 14,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 215, wherein the second value derivation probability is configured to be higher than the first value derivation probability.

  According to the gaming machine 215, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 215. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Third group: Probable change machine, loss of more than high probability change & more than setting change exists>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  However, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The inventions of the third group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, a big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, a big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
Game state changing means (for example, a jackpot ending process) for changing a game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a “normal game state”) to an advantageous game state (for example, a “probability variation state”) that is advantageous to the player (S5712)),
Probability changing means for changing the derivation probability of the first game result when the predetermined game state is changed to the advantageous game state by the game state changing means (for example, S5516 of special figure 1 change start processing (S5505)). )When,
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. (For example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Predetermined success / failure storage means used in the predetermined game state (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 referred to in a low probability state of a special symbol);
Advantageous success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 referred to in a special symbol high probability state) used in the advantageous game state,
The setting means,
At least a minimum setting value (for example, setting value “1”) that is most disadvantageous for the player and a maximum setting value (for example, setting value “6”) that is most advantageous for the player are configured to be settable.
The third value is
At least in the predetermined gaming state of the minimum set value, the number (for example, 50) of the first values stored in the predetermined correctness storage means at the minimum set value, and the advantageous suitability storage means at the highest set value The number of the first value stored in the game machine 30 (e.g., 600) or more is provided.

  According to the gaming machine 30, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means can be changed by the setting means. Further, the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from a predetermined predetermined gaming state to an advantageous gaming state which is advantageous for the player. Then, when the game state is changed from the predetermined game state to the advantageous game state by the game state changing means, the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, the predetermined success / failure storage means provided in the success / failure storage means is used in a predetermined game state, and the advantageous success / failure storage means similarly provided in the success / failure storage means is used in the advantageous game state. Further, the setting means is configured to be able to set at least a lowest setting value most disadvantageous to the player and a highest setting value most advantageous to the player. Then, the third values that are equal to or more than the difference between the number of first values stored in the predetermined validity storage means at the lowest set value and the number of first values stored in the advantageous validity storage means at the highest set value are: The minimum setting value is provided in the predetermined gaming state, that is, in all setting values, the number of first values accompanying the setting change is configured to be changeable from the third value, and any setting value may be used. When the number of the first values is changed in accordance with the change of the gaming state, the third value provided for the change can be changed. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate of each set value and the derived probability by considering only the winning probability of the first game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate, and This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing.

In the gaming machine 30,
The said pass / fail storage means,
When the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability change means, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed (for example, even if the probability of the special symbol is changed, a small hit is made). Maintain the number of random values)
A gaming machine 31 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine 31, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 30, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means, the derivation probability of the second value in the success / failure storage means is not changed. Thereby, even if the derivation probability of the first game result is changed, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each game state by considering only the winning probability of the first game value, and to facilitate the calculation of the payout rate, This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing specifications.

In the gaming machine 30 or 31,
The said pass / fail storage means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed (for example, the number of small random number values is maintained even when the setting value is changed).
A gaming machine (3) characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine 32, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 or 31. That is, when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value in the hit / fail storage unit is not changed. Thereby, even if the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the winning probability of the first game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing specifications.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 32,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
A gaming machine (33) characterized in that the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 33, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 to 32, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. As a result, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that is increased stepwise and evenly. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “equally increase” means that, for example, the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower or the derivation probability that is one step lower. On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 32,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (34), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 34, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 to 32. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate, and calculates the payout rate. And it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 34,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (3) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 35, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 to 34. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each of the changed first values in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 34,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (36) characterized in that the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 36, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 to 34. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by the determination of the agreement of the individual first values, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the success / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to prevent the first game value from being illegally derived and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 36,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The said pass / fail storage means,
At one predetermined set value (for example, set value "1") set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means (for example, 0.5 %) Is equal to the first value, and
At the predetermined setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability (for example, 1%) of the second game result by the first determination means is derived from the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means ( For example, the second value is stored in such a manner that
Storing the second value such that the derivation probability (for example, 1%) of the second game result by the first determination means is equal for all the setting values set by the setting means;
The second value is stored such that the derivation probability (for example, 94%) of the second game result by the second determination means is equal for all the setting values set by the setting means. Gaming machine three seven.

  According to the gaming machine 37, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 30 to 36. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. At this time, at one predetermined set value set by the setting means, the hit / non-kill storage means stores the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means so that the derivation probabilities are equal. While the first value is stored, the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means is higher than the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means at a predetermined set value set by the setting means. Then, the second value is stored in the success / failure storage means. In addition, for all the setting values set by the setting unit, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the derivation probabilities of the second game result by the first determination unit are equal in the hit storage unit. In addition, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the probability of derivation of the second game result by the second determination unit is equal in all the setting values set by the setting unit. . Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value and each piece of determination information is performed by calculating the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination unit and the second determination unit accompanying the setting change, and the first determination unit. The calculation can be performed by taking into account the change in the derivation probability of the second game result with the second determination means, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specifications. There is an effect that can be.

In game machine three 7,
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine three eight.

  According to the gaming machine 38, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 37. That is, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In the gaming machine 37 or 38,
A first dynamic display execution unit (for example, a first special display unit) that executes a first dynamic display of the first identification information on a display unit (for example, the special symbol display device 39) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. Execution of dynamic display of symbols), and
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit; Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Game machine three nine.

  According to the gaming machine 39, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 37 or 38. That is, the first dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means based on the determination result of the first determination means. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 39, in the gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means is set to a set value. And the derivation probability of the second game result in the second determination means is not changed for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the change in the derivation probability of the first game result. In a gaming machine capable of performing display, there is an effect that calculation of a payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In game machine three 9,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Three gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 310, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 39. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In game machine three 9,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine 311 comprising: a result pause unit (for example, a modified example 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 311, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 3 9. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 38 to 311,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric drive in the thirteenth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712): Yes to shift to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the thirteenth embodiment)) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous transition means that transitions the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a “super-probability changing state” in the thirteenth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, the jackpot ending process (S5712: S5751: Yes)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine characterized by being provided at a position (for example, on the downstream side of the ordinary electric utility 64c) where a game ball rolled from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means is easy to enter. 12.

  According to the gaming machine 312, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 38 to 311. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 37 or 38,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the fourteenth embodiment) Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 313, wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 313, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 37 or 38. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll over the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a game of whether to get or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine three 13,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 314, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 314, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 313. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Fourth group: If there are multiple roles other than the jackpot, increase both the jackpot and the small jackpot and compensate for the increase from other roles>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ratio of the number of balls (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls) when a player continuously plays a game with the pachinko machine. A so-called machine split, hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “payout rate”) is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the payout rate desired by a person in charge of the hall, etc. There is a configuration in which a person related to the hall or the like can set (change or update) the game after the power is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The inventions of the fourth group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, a big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, a big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
Setting means capable of changing both the probability that the first game result is derived by the determination means and the probability that the second game result is derived by the determination means (for example, S4121 of the setting change process (S4005)) And in a gaming machine having
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the set value set by the setting means, the first value derivation probability and the second value derivation probability are stored so as to be sometimes different,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value. (For example, the increase in the big hit random number and the small hit random number resulting from the setting change is compensated from the lost random number)
A gaming machine 40 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 40, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. The probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means and the probability that the second game result is derived by the determining means are both changeable by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the setting value is changed by the setting means. In this case, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value. Thus, depending on the set value, the derivation probability between the first value and the second value at which the game value is provided to the player and the third value at which the game value is not provided to the player is provided with an inflection (sharpness). There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by enriching the variations of the game.

In the gaming machine 40,
The third value is
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) in which the derivation probability of the first value and the second value is the lowest, the derivation probability of the first value and the second value is the lowest from the first setting value. A gaming machine 41 characterized by being provided with an increase in the first value and the second value at a high second set value (for example, a set value “6”).

  According to the gaming machine 41, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 40, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at the first set value at which the derivation probability of the first value and the second value is the lowest, the first value and the second value at the second set value at which the derivation probability of the first value and the second value are the highest from the first set value A third value is provided for an increment of two values. Thus, the derivation probability of the first value and the increase associated with the derivation probability of the second value that are changed by the setting change can all be changed from the third value. Therefore, since the appearance rate of the first game result and the appearance rate of the second game result both change for each setting, a setting difference between the appearance rate of the first game result and the appearance rate of the second game result hardly occurs. In addition, it is possible to make the setting determination difficult from the comparison between the appearance rate of the first game result and the appearance rate of the second game result. As a result, the setting discriminating element is limited, making it difficult for the player to see the setting of the gaming machine, and setting the player even if the payout rate is low (ie, the set value “1” or the like). There is an effect that the game can be continued by making it hard to be seen by the player and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine 40 or 41,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of pass / fail storage means (for example, setting values "1" to "3 , The special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value, the derivation probability of the second value, or the derivation probability of the first value and the second value are equal. A gaming machine 42 characterized by being configured to increase in number.

  According to the gaming machine 42, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 40 or 41. That is, the hit / fail storage means is provided with at least three stages of hit / fail storage means in which the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value are different for each set value set by the setting means. When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means stores the derivation probability of the first value, the derivation probability of the second value, or the derivation of the first value and the second value. The probabilities are configured to increase evenly. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value can be calculated by considering the increase in the winning probability of the first game value and / or the winning probability of the second game value, which is increased stepwise and evenly. This makes it possible to easily calculate the payout rate and suppress an increase in man-hours when designing game specifications.

  Note that “equally increase” means that, for example, the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower or the derivation probability that is one step lower. On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In the gaming machine 40 or 41,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of pass / fail storage means (for example, setting values "1" to "3 , Special table 1 jackpot random number table 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed step by step by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value, the derivation probability of the second value, or the derivation probability of the first value and the second value are set to a predetermined value. A gaming machine 43 characterized by being configured to increase at a rate.

  According to the gaming machine 43, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 40 or 41, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the pass / fail storage means is provided with at least three-stage pass / fail storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value and the second value for each set value set by the setting means. When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means stores the derivation probability of the first value, the derivation probability of the second value, or the derivation of the first value and the second value. The probabilities are configured to increase at a predetermined rate. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value and / or the winning probability of the second game value, which increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate. This makes it possible to easily calculate the payout rate and suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 43,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
The gaming machine (44), characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 44, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 40 to 43. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each of the changed first values in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 43,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (45) characterized in that the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 45, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 40 to 43. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by the determination of the agreement of the individual first values, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the success / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to prevent the first game value from being illegally derived and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 45,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the second value as a continuous value;
The gaming machine (46), wherein, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the second value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 46, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 40 to 45. That is, the second value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous second value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the second game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the second value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting means, it is not necessary to determine each changed second value in the determination of rejection, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the second value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 45,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the second value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (47) wherein the number of discontinuous second values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 47, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 40 to 45. That is, the second value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous second values is changed. Accordingly, it is necessary for the determination means to determine the second game value, and to determine whether each second value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the second value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the second value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the second game value and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 47,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information that is determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information that is determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided (for example, the “normal game state”), after the first game value is provided, the advantageous game state is different from the predetermined game state (for example, the “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine 48.

  According to the gaming machine 48, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 40 to 47. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The game state changing means provided in the first game value providing means changes the game state from a predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided. You. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In game machine 48,
A first dynamic display execution unit (for example, a first special display unit) that executes a first dynamic display of the first identification information on a display unit (for example, the special symbol display device 39) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. Execution of dynamic display of symbols), and
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit; Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Game machine four nine.

  According to the gaming machine 49, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 48. That is, the first dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means based on the determination result of the first determination means. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 49, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means is set to a set value. And the derivation probability of the second game result in the second determination means is not changed for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the change in the derivation probability of the first game result. In a gaming machine capable of performing display, there is an effect that calculation of a payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 49,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. 4 gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 410, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 4.9. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 49,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine 411 comprising: a result temporary stopping means (for example, a modified example 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 411, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 49. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 48 to 411,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric drive in the thirteenth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712): Yes to shift to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the thirteenth embodiment)) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous transition means that transitions the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a “super-probability changing state” in the thirteenth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, the jackpot ending process (S5712: S5751: Yes)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine which is provided at a position (for example, on the downstream side of the ordinary electric utility 64c) where a game ball which has rolled from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means easily enters the ball. 12.

  According to the gaming machine 412, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 48 to 411. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In game machine 48,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the fourteenth embodiment) Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 413, wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 413, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 48. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll over the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a game of whether to get or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 413,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 414, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 414, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 413. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Fifth group: If there are multiple roles other than the jackpot, compensate for the jackpot increase from each role other than the jackpot>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  Specifically, for example, a game in which a first role (for example, a jackpot game) with a high obtained game value and a second role (for example, a small hit game) with a lower obtained game value than the first role can be randomly selected. In the machine, the value of the random number counter, the value of which is updated in a predetermined range, is obtained based on the starting winning, and the value of the obtained random number counter is determined by referring to the determination table provided for each set value, There is a configuration in which a winning or losing lottery of the first role or the second role is performed. In this determination table, the number of the first random numbers corresponding to the first combination, the number of the second random numbers corresponding to the second combination, and the random number corresponding to the third combination (for example, losing) to which the game value is not provided. The numbers are distributed (defined) so that the number of values differs for each set value. In some cases, the higher the set value, the more advantageous the payout rate for the player.

  Here, in order to install a gaming machine in a gaming hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by a competent authority and obtain approval indicating that the gaming machine is within a specified range. For this reason, when designing the game specifications, the gaming machine developer has a payout rate at which the certification can be obtained by the certification test at all the set values of the gaming machine in order to pass the certification test and receive the approval. As described above, it is necessary to allocate the first random number value and the second random number value in the determination means.

  However, in a gaming machine in which the setting value can be changed, when the derivation probability of the first random number value is changed in accordance with the setting change, if the configuration is such that the fixed random number value is compensated for, the first random number is compensated. Due to the change in the derivation probability of the numerical value, it is necessary to secure the number of predetermined random numbers, which causes restrictions when designing game specifications, reduces the degree of freedom in designing game specifications, and reduces the interest in games. There is a possibility that it will.

  The inventions of the fifth group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, a big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, a big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored so as to be different,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value and the derivation probability of the third value are changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value (for example, The increase in the big hit random number value due to the setting change is compensated for from the small hit random number and the lost random value.)
A gaming machine 50 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 50, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means can be changed by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored in the hit / fail storage unit so that the first value may be different. With the change of the derivation probability, the derivation probability of the second value and the derivation probability of the third value are respectively changed. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the derivation probability of the first value from each of the second value and the third value based on the setting change. There is no need to supplement from a predetermined random number value. Therefore, there is no need to secure the number of the predetermined random numbers from the number of the one predetermined random value for the change in the derivation probability of the first value. There is an effect that the degree of freedom can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 50,
The second value and the third value are:
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first setting value A gaming machine 51 characterized by being provided with an increment of the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 51, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 50, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at the first set value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, the increment of the first value, the second value, and the third value at the second set value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first set value Value is provided. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the first value is changed from the fixed predetermined random number value of 1. There is no need to make up for it. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the derivation probability of the predetermined random number value from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the first value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 50 or 51,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the first value derivation probability is configured to increase uniformly,
The gaming machine 52, wherein the second value and the third value are configured to decrease uniformly as the derivation probability of the first value increases.

  According to the gaming machine 52, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 50 or 51. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. Also, the second value and the third value are configured to decrease evenly as the derivation probability of the first value increases. As a result, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed in such a manner that the winning probability of the first game value, which increases stepwise and uniformly, and the decrease of the winning probability of the second game value, which decreases gradually and evenly, are calculated. In consideration of the above, the calculation can be performed, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “equally increase” means that, for example, the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower or the derivation probability that is one step lower. On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In gaming machine 50 or 51,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is configured to increase at a predetermined rate,
The gaming machine 53, wherein the second value and the third value decrease at a predetermined rate with an increase in the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 53, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine 50 or 51, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate. In addition, the second value and the third value are configured to decrease at a predetermined rate as the derivation probability of the first value increases. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed by increasing the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate and the winning probability of the second game value that decreases stepwise and at a predetermined rate. The calculation can be performed by considering the reduced amount, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 50 to 53,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (54) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 54, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 50 to 53, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each of the changed first values in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 50 to 53,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine 55 characterized in that the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 55, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 50 to 53, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by the determination of the agreement of the individual first values, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the success / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to prevent the first game value from being illegally derived and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 50 to 55,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided (for example, the “normal game state”), after the first game value is provided, the advantageous game state is different from the predetermined game state (for example, the “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. 56 gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 56, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 50 to 55, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The game state changing means provided in the first game value providing means changes the game state from a predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided. You. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In game machine 56,
A first dynamic display execution unit (for example, a first special display unit) that executes a first dynamic display of the first identification information on a display unit (for example, the special symbol display device 39) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. Execution of dynamic display of symbols), and
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit; Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). 57 gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 57, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 56. That is, the first dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means based on the determination result of the first determination means. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 57, in a gaming machine in which the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display can proceed in parallel (simultaneously), in a predetermined gaming state, the first ball-in means is shifted from the second ball-in means. The first determination information is easily obtained from the second determination information because the game ball easily enters the ball, and in the advantageous game state, the game ball enters the second ball entry unit from the first ball entry unit. It is configured such that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. The approximate calculation can be performed by taking into account the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. The effect of simplifying the calculation of the ball rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be obtained.

In gaming machine 57,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. 58 game machines.

  According to the gaming machine 58, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 57. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In gaming machine 57,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, In the case where the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine 59 comprising: a result pause means (for example, a modification 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 59, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 57. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 56 to 59,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric drive in the thirteenth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712): Yes to shift to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the thirteenth embodiment)) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous transition means that transitions the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a “super-probability changing state” in the thirteenth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, the jackpot ending process (S5712: S5751: Yes)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing rolling means to the other end is easy to enter (for example, on the downstream side of the normal electric utility 64c). 10.

  According to the gaming machine 510, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 56 to 59. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In game machine 56,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the fourteenth embodiment) Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 511, wherein the first gaming value can be given when a gaming ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 511, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 5.6. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll over the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a game of whether to get or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 511,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 512, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 512, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 511. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Sixth group: Procurement of the jackpot increase from the role with the lowest profit level, and from the role with the next lowest profit level when it runs out>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  Specifically, for example, a game in which a first role (for example, a jackpot game) with a high obtained game value and a second role (for example, a small hit game) with a lower obtained game value than the first role can be randomly selected. In the machine, the value of the random number counter, the value of which is updated in a predetermined range, is obtained based on the starting winning, and the value of the obtained random number counter is determined by referring to the determination table provided for each set value, There is a configuration in which a winning or losing lottery of the first role or the second role is performed. In this determination table, the number of the first random numbers corresponding to the first combination, the number of the second random numbers corresponding to the second combination, and the random number corresponding to the third combination (for example, losing) to which the game value is not provided. The numbers are distributed (defined) so that the number of values differs for each set value. In some cases, the higher the set value, the more advantageous the payout rate for the player.

  Here, in order to install a gaming machine in a gaming hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by a competent authority and obtain approval indicating that the gaming machine is within a specified range. For this reason, when designing the game specifications, the gaming machine developer has a payout rate at which the certification can be obtained by the certification test at all the set values of the gaming machine in order to pass the certification test and receive the approval. As described above, it is necessary to distribute the numbers of the first random number value and the second random number value in the determination means.

  However, in a gaming machine in which the set value can be changed, if the number of the first random numbers is changed in accordance with the setting change, the configuration is such that the number of the first random numbers is compensated from the fixed number of the predetermined random number. A change in the number of random numbers must be secured for a predetermined number of random values, which causes restrictions when designing game specifications, lowering the degree of freedom in designing game specifications, and reducing the interest in games. There is a possibility that it will.

  The inventions of the sixth group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, a big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, a big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored so as to be different,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, a third change pattern (for example, the setting value “1”) in which the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value To “3”, the loss random number value decreases with an increase in the jackpot random number value), and a second change pattern in which the derivation probability of the second value is changed (for example, the jackpot at the set values “4” to “6”) The gaming machine 60 is characterized in that the random number value decreases as the random number value increases.

  According to the gaming machine 60, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value is provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result is derived by the determining means. Based on this, a predetermined second game value is provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means can be changed by the setting means. Here, a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the success / failure storage means so that the first value may be different. Are configured to have a third change pattern in which the derivation probability of the third value is changed and a second change pattern in which the derivation probability of the second value is changed according to the change of the derivation probability of. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the first value derivation probability based on the setting change by changing the second value derivation probability or the third value derivation probability. Therefore, the change in the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, and there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the game specification. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 60,
The determination information acquisition means,
The setting means changes the derivation probability of the third value by the third change pattern when the setting value that is most disadvantageous for the player becomes the setting value that is advantageous for the one-step player from the setting value that is most disadvantageous for the player. A gaming machine 61 characterized by changing the number of first values.

  According to the gaming machine 61, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 60, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the determination information acquisition unit, when the setting unit changes the setting value most disadvantageous to the player to the setting value advantageous to the one-step player, the third value change pattern changes the derivation probability of the third value. This changes the number of first values. That is, when the setting value that is most disadvantageous for the player changes to a setting value that is advantageous for the one-step player, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change in the number of the first values.

  Game information, which is a game result (for example, a losing role) corresponding to the third value stored in the hit / fail storage means, is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and, for example, a data lamp or the like which allows the player to refer to the game history and the like. Unlike the first game result and the second game result which are clearly (largely) displayed, there is a case where the data lamp (not shown) is not clearly (largely) displayed.

  Here, the number of the second values corresponding to the second game result clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp is changed in accordance with the change of the setting and the derivation probability of the first value. In this case, the relationship in which the appearance rate of the first game result and the second game result is relatively changed for each setting (for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of the big hit game, while the smaller the probability of the small hit game) Decrease, etc.), the player glances (confirms) the appearance of the first game result and the second game result with the data lamp, thereby increasing the factors for estimating the setting contents of the gaming machine. I will. As a result, for example, if the setting of the gaming machine set to a low setting (for example, the setting value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the gaming machine, Operation may be reduced.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 61, when the setting value most disadvantageous to the player becomes the setting value advantageous to the one-step player, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. Is configured to be changed. That is, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, the change is changed from the third value. With this configuration, the setting discrimination element by the player is set to the second most favorable setting value for the player, or the setting value that is advantageous for the player from the most disadvantageous setting value to one step (so-called low setting). It is possible to make it difficult for the set value of the gaming machine to be seen from the appearance ratio of the second game result only as the appearance ratio of one game result. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, for example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), it is difficult for the player to find out the setting, and the game is continued. There is an effect that operation can be improved.

In the gaming machine 60 or 61,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed from the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player to the advantageous setting value and the third value is depleted (less), the second value is derived by the second change pattern. A gaming machine 62, wherein the probability of deriving the first value is changed by changing the probability.

  According to the gaming machine 62, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 60 or 61, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the determination information obtaining means, when the setting value is changed from a disadvantageous setting value to an advantageous setting value by the setting means, when the third value is depleted (less), the second value is changed by the second change pattern. Is changed, the derivation probability of the first value is changed. That is, when the third value that can be changed first is depleted (small) when the setting value is changed from a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player to an advantageous setting value, the second value is changed with the change in the derivation probability of the first value. The derivation probability is changed. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the derivation probability of the first value from each of the second value and / or the third value based on the setting change. Therefore, the change of the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, and there is no restriction at the time of designing game specifications, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing game specifications. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 62,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table for setting values “1” to “6”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
A first-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at a set value "1") which is most disadvantageous for the player;
Second-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at setting value "3") which is more advantageous to the player than the first-step hit / fail storage means;
A third-stage hit / failure storage unit (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at a set value “6”) which is more advantageous to the player than the second-stage hit / failure storage unit;
The second stage pass / fail storage means comprises:
While the first-step hit / fail storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value, the first-step hit / fail storage means and the derivation probability of the second value are configured to be equivalent,
The third stage pass / fail storage means comprises:
A gaming machine 63, wherein the second-step success / failure storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value, but a lower derivation probability of the second value.

  According to the gaming machine 63, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 62. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, as the stepwise success / failure storage means, a first-stage success / failure storage means most disadvantageous for the player, a second-stage success / failure storage means more advantageous to the player than the first-stage success / failure storage means, and a second-stage success / failure storage means Third stage pass / fail storage means, which is more advantageous to the player than the storage means, is provided. Here, the second-stage pass / fail storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value than the first-stage pass / fail storage means, while the first-step pass / fail storage means has the same derivation probability of the second value. In addition, the third-stage pass / fail storage means has a higher first-value derivation probability than the second-step pass / fail storage means, but has a lower second-value derivation probability. That is, in the second-stage hit / fail storage means, the derivation probability of the first value is higher and the derivation probability of the second value is set equal to that in the first-step hit / fail storage device. Further, the second-stage hit / fail storage means is configured to have a higher first value derivation probability and a lower second-value derivation probability as compared to the second-step hit / fail storage device. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and / or the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the derivation probability of the first value is fixed to one. There is no need to supplement from a predetermined random number value. Therefore, the change of the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, and there is no restriction at the time of designing game specifications, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing game specifications. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 63,
The second value and the third value are:
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest deriving probability of the first value from the first setting value (6)) A gaming machine (64) characterized by being provided with an increase in the first value in (6)).

  According to the gaming machine 64, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 63. That is, at the first set value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, the increment of the first value, the second value, and the third value at the second set value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first set value Value is provided. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the first value is changed from the fixed predetermined random number value of 1. There is no need to make up for it. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the derivation probability of the predetermined random number value from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the first value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 63 or 64,
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the first value derivation probability is configured to increase uniformly,
The gaming machine 65, wherein the second value or the third value is configured to decrease uniformly as the derivation probability of the first value increases.

  According to the gaming machine 65, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 63 or 64. That is, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. In addition, the second value or the third value is configured to decrease uniformly as the derivation probability of the first value increases. As a result, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed in such a manner that the winning probability of the first game value, which increases stepwise and uniformly, and the decrease of the winning probability of the second game value, which decreases gradually and evenly, are calculated. Alternatively, the calculation can be performed by considering the decrease in the appearance probability of the loss, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specification. There is.

  Note that “equally increase” means that, for example, the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower or the derivation probability that is one step lower. On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In the gaming machine 63 or 64,
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is configured to increase at a predetermined rate,
The gaming machine 66, wherein the second value or the third value is reduced at a predetermined rate as the derivation probability of the first value increases.

  According to the gaming machine 66, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 63 or 64. That is, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. Further, the second value or the third value is configured to decrease at a predetermined rate as the derivation probability of the first value increases. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed by increasing the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate and the winning probability of the second game value that decreases stepwise and at a predetermined rate. It is possible to calculate by considering the decrease or the decrease in the appearance probability of the loss, it is possible to easily calculate the payout rate, and it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications, This has the effect.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 66,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
The gaming machine 67, wherein when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 67, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 66. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each of the changed first values in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 66,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
The gaming machine 68, wherein when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 68, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 66. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by the determination of the agreement of the individual first values, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the success / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to prevent the first game value from being illegally derived and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 68,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided (for example, the “normal game state”), after the first game value is provided, the advantageous game state is different from the predetermined game state (for example, the “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine six nine.

  According to the gaming machine 69, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 68. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, the first determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second entry ball The second determination information is obtained by the second information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the game ball having entered the means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The game state changing means provided in the first game value providing means changes the game state from a predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided. You. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In game machine sixty nine,
A first dynamic display execution unit (for example, a first special display unit) that executes a first dynamic display of the first identification information on a display unit (for example, the special symbol display device 39) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. Execution of dynamic display of symbols), and
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit; Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Game machine six ten.

  According to the gaming machine 610, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 6.9. That is, the first dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means based on the determination result of the first determination means. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 610, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), in a predetermined gaming state, the first determination information is obtained from the second determination information. In the advantageous game state, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In gaming machine 610,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, In the case where the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing unit (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Gaming machine six 11.

  According to the gaming machine 611, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 610, the following effects are achieved. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, during the provision of the second game value based on the second game result by the first dynamic display, the provision of the first game value based on the first game result by the second dynamic display or the second game result The second game value based on the first game value or the second game value can be prevented from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or the second game value. It has the effect of being able to. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In gaming machine 610,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, In the case where the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. The gaming machine 612, further comprising: a result suspending unit (for example, a modified example 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 612, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 610, the following effects are achieved. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 69 to 612,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric drive in the thirteenth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712): Yes to shift to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the thirteenth embodiment)) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous transition means that transitions the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a “super-probability changing state” in the thirteenth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, the jackpot ending process (S5712: S5751: Yes)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing rolling means to the other end is easy to enter (for example, on the downstream side of the normal electric utility 64c). 13.

  According to the gaming machine 613, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 69 to 612. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In game machine sixty nine,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the fourteenth embodiment). ,
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 614, wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 614, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 69. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means allows the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a game of whether to get or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 614,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 615, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 615, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 614. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Seventh group: has 2 special symbols, and compensates for the jackpot increase from the role assigned to each special symbol>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  However, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The inventions of the seventh group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, a big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, a big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means;
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. (For example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored so as to be different,
When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the value of the value corresponding to the extracting combination that can be extracted together by the first determining means and the second determining means with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. The derivation probability is configured to be changed (for example, the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is compensated for from the lost random number value that is a common role).
A gaming machine 70.

  According to the gaming machine 70, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means can be changed by the setting means. Here, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also a first ball-in The second ball entry means different from the means is configured to be able to enter the ball. Further, in the hit / fail storage means used for the determination by the determination means, a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. Here, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the first value may be different. Is changed, the derivation probability of the value corresponding to the extracted combination that can be extracted by both the first determination means and the second determination means is changed. That is, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed by changing the setting, it is possible to compensate for the derivation probability of the value corresponding to the extracted combination common to the first determination unit and the second determination unit. With this, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, the common extracting combination in each determination unit can be changed. 1 It becomes possible to calculate by taking into account the change in the winning probability of the game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the specifications.

In the gaming machine 70,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first hit / fail storage means and the second hit / fail storage means,
A gaming machine 71 which is configured to store at least the first value and the third value.

  According to the gaming machine 71, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 70. That is, the first validity storage means as the validity storage means is used in the first determination means, and the second validity storage means also used as the validity storage means is used in the second determination means. Here, the first validity storage means and the second validity storage means are configured to store at least a first value and a third value. That is, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed by the setting change, the derivation probability of the value corresponding to the third value, which is a common extractor, can be supplemented by the first determination unit and the second determination unit. . Thereby, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, the derivation probability of the third value, which is a common extractor in each determination unit, can be changed. The payout rate can be calculated by considering the change in the winning probability of the first game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. Is simplified, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 70 or 71,
The value corresponding to the extractor is
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest deriving probability of the first value from the first setting value A gaming machine 72, which is provided by the increment of the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 72, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 70 or 71, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first setting value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, an increase of the first value in the second setting value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first setting value, the value corresponding to the extraction combination Is provided. Thereby, all the first values changed by the setting change can be changed from the values corresponding to the common extractor. Therefore, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value can be calculated by considering the change in the winning probability of the first game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. This makes it possible to easily calculate the payout rate and suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

In any of the gaming machines 70 to 72,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (73), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 73, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 70 to 72. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is changed stepwise and evenly by the change in the winning probability of the first game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. In consideration of the above, the calculation can be performed, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in man-hours at the time of designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “equally increase” means that, for example, the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower or the derivation probability that is one step lower. On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 70 to 72,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (74), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 74, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 70 to 72. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate. Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is changed stepwise and at a predetermined rate, with the change in the winning probability of the first game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. The calculation can be performed by considering the minute and minute, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 70 to 74,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (75) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 75, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 70 to 74, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each of the changed first values in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 70 to 74,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
The gaming machine (76), wherein the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 76, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 70 to 74. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by the determination of the agreement of the individual first values, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the success / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to prevent the first game value from being illegally derived and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In the gaming machines 70 to 76,
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided (for example, the “normal game state”), after the first game value is provided, the advantageous game state is different from the predetermined game state (for example, the “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Gaming machine seven.

  According to the gaming machine 77, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 76. That is, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided by the game state changing means provided in the first game value provision means. Be changed. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In any of the seven gaming machines,
A first dynamic display execution unit (for example, a first special display unit) that executes a first dynamic display of the first identification information on a display unit (for example, the special symbol display device 39) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. Execution of dynamic display of symbols), and
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit; Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Seventy eight gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 78, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 77. That is, the first dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means based on the determination result of the first determination means. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 78, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), in the normal gaming state, the first determination information is obtained from the second determination information. In the advantageous game state, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In gaming machine seventy eight,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, In the case where the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing unit (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Game machine seven nine.

  According to the gaming machine seventy-nine, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine seventy-eight. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In gaming machine seventy eight,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, In the case where the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine (710), comprising: a result pause means (for example, a modified example (130)) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 710, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 178. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 78 to 710,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric drive in the thirteenth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712): Yes to shift to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the thirteenth embodiment)) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous transition means that transitions the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a “super-probability changing state” in the thirteenth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, the jackpot ending process (S5712: S5751: Yes)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enters (for example, downstream of the normal electric utility 64c). 11.

  According to the gaming machine 711, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 178 to 710. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine seventy eight,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the fourteenth embodiment) Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
A gaming machine (712), wherein the first gaming value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 712, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 178. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means allows the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a game of whether to get or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine seven 12,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine (713), wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 713, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 712, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Height group: Compensate for increased probability & changed settings between roles that generate game value>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is directed to one of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. Performs a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a ball, and in the case of a winning or losing lottery in the applicable or not lottery, opens the normally closed variable ball-taking means to give a predetermined game value to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, a big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, a big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored so as to be different,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value is changed in accordance with the change in the derivation probability of the first value (for example, an increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change). Is supplemented from the random number value of small hits)
A gaming machine 80 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 80, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means can be changed by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the first value may be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the first value may be changed. The derivation probability of the second value changes with the change of the derivation probability. That is, in each setting, the derivation probability of the first game result corresponding to the first value is changed, and the derivation probability of the second game result corresponding to the second value is changed. As a result, there is an effect that the departure probability of the first game result and the second game result is provided with inflection (sharpness) for each setting, the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

In the gaming machine 80,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the third value is not changed by changing the setting value (for example, even when the setting value is changed, the loss random number value is not changed). Keep the number)
A gaming machine 81, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine 81, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 80. That is, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the change in the setting value does not change the derivation probability of the third value in the determination information obtaining means. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering the difference between the winning probability of the first game value and the winning probability of the second game result. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

In gaming machine 80 or 81,
Game state changing means (for example, a jackpot ending process) for changing a game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a “normal game state”) to an advantageous game state (for example, a “probability variation state”) that is advantageous to the player (S5712)),
Probability changing means for changing the derivation probability of the first game result when the predetermined game state is changed to the advantageous game state by the game state changing means (for example, S5516 of special figure 1 change start processing (S5505)). ) And
The said pass / fail storage means,
Predetermined success / failure storage means used in the predetermined game state (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 referred to in a low probability state of a special symbol);
Advantageous success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 referred to in a special symbol high probability state) used in the advantageous game state,
The advantage advantage storage means,
When the probability of derivation of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means, the probability of derivation of the third value is changed with the change of the probability of derivation of the first value (for example, with the probability change). The increase of the jackpot random value is compensated from the lost random value.)
A gaming machine 82.

  According to the gaming machine 82, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 80 or 81, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state to the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player by the game state changing means. Then, when the game state is changed from the predetermined game state to the advantageous game state by the game state changing means, the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means. Further, the predetermined success / failure storage means provided in the success / failure storage means is used in the normal game state, and the advantageous success / failure storage means similarly provided in the success / failure storage means is used in the advantageous game state. Here, when the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means, the derivation probability of the third value is changed in the advantage / non-permission storage means in accordance with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each game state by considering only the change in the winning probability of the first game value, and to calculate the payout rate for each set value. The calculation can be performed by considering the difference between the winning probability of the first game value and the winning probability of the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 82,
The second value is
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest deriving probability of the first value from the first setting value (6)) The gaming machine (83), which is provided by the increment of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 83, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 80 to 82. That is, in the first set value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, an increase of the first value from the first set value to the second set value with the highest derivation probability of the first value, and the second value are provided. ing. Thus, the derivation probabilities of the first value changed by the setting change can be changed from the second value for all the setting values. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering the increase in the winning probability of the first game value and the decrease in the second game value. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 83,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine 84, wherein the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 84, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 80 to 83, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. As a result, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value considers the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and evenly and the decrease of the winning probability of the second game value that decreases stepwise and evenly. By doing so, the calculation can be performed, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “equally increase” means that, for example, the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower or the derivation probability that is one step lower. On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 83,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine 85, wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 85, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 80 to 83. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is determined by the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate, and the decrease of the winning probability of the second game value that decreases stepwise and at a predetermined rate. Can be calculated by taking into account the above, there is an effect that the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 85,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
The gaming machine 86, wherein when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 86, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 80 to 85, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each of the changed first values in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 85,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
The gaming machine (8), wherein the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 87, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 80 to 85, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by the determination of the agreement of the individual first values, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the success / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to prevent the first game value from being illegally derived and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 87,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided (for example, the “normal game state”), after the first game value is provided, the advantageous game state is different from the predetermined game state (for example, the “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine 88.

  According to the gaming machine 88, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 80 to 87. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, the first determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second entry ball The second determination information is obtained by the second information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the game ball having entered the means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The game state changing means provided in the first game value providing means changes the game state from a predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided. You. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In the game machine 88,
A first dynamic display execution unit (for example, a first special display unit) that executes a first dynamic display of the first identification information on a display unit (for example, the special symbol display device 39) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. Execution of dynamic display of symbols), and
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit; Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Game machine eighty nine.

  According to the gaming machine 89, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 88. That is, the first dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means based on the determination result of the first determination means. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 89, in a gaming machine in which the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display can proceed in parallel (simultaneously), in the normal gaming state, the first determination information is obtained from the second determination information. In the advantageous gaming state, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In the game machine 89,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, In the case where the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing unit (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Gaming machine eight ten.

  According to the gaming machine 810, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 809. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the game machine 89,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, In the case where the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine 811 comprising: a result suspending means (for example, a modified example 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 811, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 89. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. The effect is that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 88 to 811,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric drive in the thirteenth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712): Yes to shift to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the thirteenth embodiment)) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous transition means that transitions the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a “super-probability changing state” in the thirteenth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, the jackpot ending process (S5712: S5751: Yes)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position (for example, on the downstream side of the normal electric utility 64c) where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing rolling means to the other end is easily entered. 12.

  According to the gaming machine 812, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 8.8 to 811. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 88,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the fourteenth embodiment) Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 813, wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 813, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 88. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll over the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a game of whether to get or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine eight 13
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 814, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 814, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 813. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Group 9: Random value changed by setting is different>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  Specifically, for example, a game in which a first role (for example, a jackpot game) with a high obtained game value and a second role (for example, a small hit game) with a lower obtained game value than the first role can be randomly selected. In the machine, the value of the random number counter, the value of which is updated in a predetermined range, is obtained based on the starting winning, and the value of the obtained random number counter is determined by referring to the determination table provided for each set value, There is a configuration in which a winning or losing lottery of the first role or the second role is performed. In this determination table, the number of the first random numbers corresponding to the first combination, the number of the second random numbers corresponding to the second combination, and the random number corresponding to the third combination (for example, losing) to which the game value is not provided. The numbers are distributed (defined) so that the number of values differs for each set value. In some cases, the higher the set value, the more advantageous the payout rate for the player.

  Here, for each gaming machine installed in the gaming hall, the number of wins of the first role and the second role to which the gaming value output from the gaming machine is provided is totaled, and the totaled result is calculated by the player. Is provided with a data lamp for displaying information. The player performing the game may check this data lamp before playing the game, and according to the display contents of the data lamp, refer to the day or the past game history of the gaming machine to be played from now on. Guess the settings and select a gaming machine to play the game. In this case, if the setting content is a game result that is easily discriminated (observed), the player selects a game with a good setting content (for example, the setting value “6”) in the gaming machine, and the setting content is bad. (For example, the setting value is “1”) By avoiding the game of the gaming machine, the operation of the gaming machine with the bad setting content may be reduced, and the profit of the gaming hall may be reduced.

  The inventions of the ninth group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the setting status of the gaming machine is difficult to grasp.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, a big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, a big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored so as to be different,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting means, one of the second value derivation probability and the third value derivation probability is changed with the change of the first value derivation probability. (For example, there is a setting for compensating an increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change from the lost random number value, and a setting for supplementing the increase from the small jackpot random value value)
A gaming machine 90 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 90, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means can be changed by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored in the hit / fail storage unit so that the first value may be different. With the change in the derivation probability, the determination information acquisition unit changes one of the second value derivation probability and the third value derivation probability. That is, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, the derivation probability of the second value may be changed or the derivation probability of the third value may be changed depending on the set value. The configuration is as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the setting determining element by the player. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, for example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), it is difficult for the player to find out the setting, and the game is continued. There is an effect that operation can be improved.

<Group 10: There is a big hit, a middle hit, and a small hit, and with the change in the jackpot derivation probability, the middle hit or small hit derivation probability is changed>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  However, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  A group of inventions has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main controller 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first special game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, first special value giving means (for example, big hit game) that can give a predetermined first special value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process based on the jackpot (S5710);
Based on the second special game result (for example, middle hit) different from the first special game result being derived by the determination means, a second special value (for example, medium) lower than the first special value is given to the player. Second special value providing means (for example, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710) based on a medium winning) that can provide a winning game);
Based on the fact that the third special game result (for example, a small hit) different from the first special game result or the second special game result is derived by the determination means, the player is given a third special game result lower than the second special value. A third special value providing means (for example, a small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714)) capable of providing 3 special values (for example, a small hit game);
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first special game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a big hit random value) corresponding to the first special game result and a second value (for example, medium hit random) corresponding to the second special game result are used for the determination by the determining means. Numerical value) and a third value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the third special game result, a hit / fail storage means (for example, a big hit random number table and / or a big hit type table),
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored so as to be different,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value, and the derivation probability of the third value is changed. (For example, there is a case where the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is compensated for from the medium random number value, and a case where it is compensated from the small jackpot random value value)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine 100, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first special game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first special value is provided to the player by the first special value providing means, and is different from the first special game result by the determining means. Based on the derivation of the second special game result, the second special value giving means gives the player a second special value lower than the first special value. Further, based on the fact that the determination means derives a third special game result different from the first special game result or the second special game result, the third special value providing means gives the player a third special game result lower than the second special value. 3 Special value is given. Further, the probability that the first special game result is derived by the determining means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Here, in the success / failure storage means used for the determination by the determination means, a first value corresponding to the first special game result, a second value corresponding to the second special game result, and a third value corresponding to the third special game result. The three values are stored. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the first value derivation probability may be different. Are changed in accordance with the change of the derivation probability of the second value, and the case where the derivation probability of the third value is changed. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the first value derivation probability based on the setting change by changing the second value derivation probability or the third value derivation probability. Therefore, a change in the derivation probability of one predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing game specifications and improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine 100,
The determination information acquisition means,
The setting means changes the derivation probability of the third value by changing the derivation probability of the third value when the set value that is most disadvantageous to the player becomes the set value that is advantageous to the one-step player from the set value that is most disadvantageous for the player. A gaming machine 11 characterized by being changed.

  According to the gaming machine 11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 100, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the determination information acquisition unit, when the setting unit changes the setting value most disadvantageous to the player to the setting value advantageous to the one-stage player, the derivation probability of the third value is changed to change the first value. The derivation probability is changed. That is, when the setting value that is most disadvantageous for the player changes to the setting value that is advantageous for the one-step player, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. With this, with the change of the derivation probability of the first value from the setting value that is the most disadvantageous to the player to the setting value that is advantageous to the one-step player, the derivation of the third value having the lowest game value for the player Configure to change probabilities. With this configuration, the derivation probabilities of the first special game result and the third special game result at the most unfavorable setting value for the player and the setting value advantageous for the one-step player from the setting value are determined. There is an effect that it is possible to provide intonation (sharpness), enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 100,
The determination information acquisition means,
The setting means changes the derivation probability of the second value when the third value is depleted (less) when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player changes from the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player to the setting value that is advantageous. A gaming machine (11), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 100, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the determination information acquisition unit, when the setting value changes from a disadvantageous setting value to an advantageous setting value, when the third value is depleted (less), the derivation probability of the second value is changed. By doing so, the derivation probability of the first value is changed. That is, when the third value that can be changed first is depleted (small) when the setting value is changed from a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player to an advantageous setting value, the second value is changed with the change in the derivation probability of the first value. The derivation probability is changed. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the derivation probability of the first value from each of the second value and / or the third value based on the setting change. Therefore, the change of the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, and there is no restriction at the time of designing game specifications, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing game specifications. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 12,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three-stage step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table for setting values “1” to “6”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
A first-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at a set value "1") which is most disadvantageous for the player;
Second-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at setting value "3") which is more advantageous to the player than the first-step hit / fail storage means;
A third-stage hit / failure storage unit (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at a set value “6”) which is more advantageous to the player than the second-stage hit / failure storage unit;
The second stage pass / fail storage means comprises:
While the first-step hit / fail storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value, the first-step hit / fail storage means and the derivation probability of the second value are configured to be equivalent,
The third stage pass / fail storage means comprises:
A gaming machine (13), wherein the first value derivation probability is higher than the second stage pass / fail storage means, while the second value derivation probability is lower.

  According to the gaming machine 13, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 10 to 12. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, as the stepwise success / failure storage means, a first-stage success / failure storage means most disadvantageous for the player, a second-stage success / failure storage means more advantageous to the player than the first-stage success / failure storage means, and a second-stage success / failure storage means Third stage pass / fail storage means, which is more advantageous to the player than the storage means, is provided. Here, the second-stage pass / fail storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value than the first-stage pass / fail storage means, while the first-step pass / fail storage means has the same derivation probability of the second value. In addition, the third-stage pass / fail storage means has a higher first-value derivation probability than the second-step pass / fail storage means, but has a lower second-value derivation probability. That is, in the second-stage hit / fail storage means, the derivation probability of the first value is higher and the derivation probability of the second value is set equal to that in the first-step hit / fail storage device. Further, the second-stage hit / fail storage means is configured to have a higher first value derivation probability and a lower second-value derivation probability as compared to the second-step hit / fail storage device. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and / or the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the derivation probability of the first value is fixed to one. There is no need to supplement from a predetermined random number value. Therefore, the change of the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, thereby reducing restrictions when designing the game specification and increasing the degree of freedom in designing the game specification. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 13,
The second value and the third value are:
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest deriving probability of the first value from the first setting value A gaming machine 14 characterized by being provided with an increment of the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 14, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 100 to 13. That is, at the first set value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, the increment of the first value, the second value, and the third value at the second set value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first set value Value is provided. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the first value is changed from the fixed predetermined random number value of 1. There is no need to make up for it. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the derivation probability of the predetermined random number value from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the first value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 13 or 14,
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the first value derivation probability is configured to increase uniformly,
A gaming machine (10), wherein the second value or the third value is configured to decrease uniformly as the derivation probability of the first value increases.

  According to the gaming machine 15, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 13 or 14. That is, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. In addition, the second value or the third value is configured to decrease uniformly as the derivation probability of the first value increases. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed in such a manner that the appearance probability of the first special game value that increases stepwise and uniformly and the appearance of the second special game value that decreases stepwise and evenly are calculated. It is possible to calculate by considering the decrease in the probability or the decrease in the appearance probability of the third special game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and increasing the man-hours in designing the game specification. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  Note that “equally increase” means that, for example, the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower or the derivation probability that is one step lower. On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In the gaming machine 13 or 14,
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is configured to increase at a predetermined rate,
The gaming machine (16), wherein the second value or the third value decreases at a predetermined rate with an increase in the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 16, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 13 or 14. That is, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. Further, the second value or the third value is configured to decrease at a predetermined rate as the derivation probability of the first value increases. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed by increasing the appearance probability of the first special game value increasing stepwise and at a predetermined rate and calculating the second special game value decreasing stepwise and at a predetermined rate. The calculation can be performed by considering the decrease in the appearance probability or the decrease in the appearance probability of the third special game value. This facilitates the calculation of the payout rate, and reduces the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification. There is an effect that the increase can be suppressed.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 16,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (10), wherein, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 17, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 100 to 16. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed. This makes it possible for the determination means to determine the first special game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each of the changed first values in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included until the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 16,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (10), wherein when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 18, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 100 to 16, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first special game value by the determination means must be performed by determining whether each first value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. it can. Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first special game value and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. There is.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 18,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first special value providing means includes:
From the predetermined game state before the first special game value is provided (for example, “normal game state”), after the first special game value is provided, an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, “super probability fluctuation state”) ”Or“ probability change state ”), and a game state changing means (for example, a jackpot ending process (S5712)) for changing the game state,
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine nineteen.

  According to the gaming machine 19, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 10 to 18. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, the first determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second entry ball The second determination information is obtained by the second information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the game ball having entered the means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The gaming state changing means provided in the first special value providing means changes the gaming state from a predetermined gaming state before the first special gaming value is provided to an advantageous gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state after the first special gaming value is provided. Be changed. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is performed by increasing the derivation probability of the first special game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. A change in the derivation probability of the second special game result between the first determination means and the second determination means, a change in the derivation probability of the third special game result between the first determination means and the second determination means, It is possible to calculate by taking into account judgment information that is easily obtained for each game state, thereby facilitating calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing game specifications. There is.

In the gaming machine 19,
A first dynamic display execution unit (for example, a first special display unit) that executes a first dynamic display of the first identification information on a display unit (for example, the special symbol display device 39) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. Execution of dynamic display of symbols), and
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on a determination result of the second determination unit; Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Gaming machine 10.

  According to the gaming machine 1010, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 19: That is, the first dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display means based on the determination result of the first determination means. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates in the first special game result, the second special game result, and the third special game result are combined and calculated for each set value, a game specification design There is a possibility that the man-hour at the time becomes enormous.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1010, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), in a predetermined gaming state, the first determination information is obtained from the second determination information. In the advantageous gaming state, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is performed by increasing the derivation probability of the first special game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. A change in the derivation probability of the second special game result between the first determination means and the second determination means, a change in the derivation probability of the third special game result between the first determination means and the second determination means, It is possible to calculate by taking into account judgment information that is easily obtained for each game state, thereby facilitating calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing game specifications. There is.

In the gaming machine 1010,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the third special game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The first dynamic game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic game result. If it is longer than the execution time of the dynamic display, result changing means for deriving a game result other than the first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result in the second dynamic display (for example, A gaming machine 11 having a special figure 2 change process (S5520).

  According to the gaming machine 1011, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 1010. That is, in a situation where the third special game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display executing means. In the second dynamic display, the first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result can be derived, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the execution time of the first dynamic display. If it is longer, the result changing means provided in the first determining means derives a game result other than the first special game result, the second special game result or the third special game result in the second dynamic display. Be composed. Accordingly, while the third special value is provided based on the second special game result by the first dynamic display, the first special value is provided based on the first special game result by the second dynamic display, and the second special game result is provided. Of the second special value based on the third special game result or the third special value based on the result of the third special game can be prevented from being performed. Depending on the value, it is possible to prevent an excessive gaming value from being paid out to the player. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first special value, second special value, or third special value. In this case, there is an effect that an increase in the number of steps can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 1010,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the third special game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is different from the first dynamic game. If the execution time is longer than the target display time, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the third special game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporary stop is performed. Result temporary stop means (for example, modified example 130) for deriving the first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result by advancing the second dynamic display. A gaming machine 1012 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine 1012, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 1010. That is, in a situation where the third special game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means by the result temporary stopping means provided in the first determining means, the second dynamic display executing means , The first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the second dynamic display can be derived. If the execution time of the display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, after the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped and the third special game value based on the first dynamic display has been given Then, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced to derive the first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result. Thus, while the second special value is being given based on the second special game result by the first dynamic display, the first special value is given based on the first special game result by the second dynamic display, and the second special game result is given. The second special value based on the third special game result or the third special value based on the result of the third special game can be prevented from being provided, and the duplicated first special value, second special value or third special value can be prevented. Depending on the value, it is possible to prevent an excessive gaming value from being paid out to the player. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first special value, second special value, or third special value. In this case, there is an effect that an increase in the number of steps can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 19 to 12,
At least when the first special game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the third special game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) that is driven so that the game ball can enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric drive in the thirteenth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first special value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first special game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” giving “probability change state”), the game state Out of the advantageous gaming state to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” in the thirteenth embodiment) (eg, S5754 of a jackpot ending process (S5712)). Yes)
The first special value is given as the first special game result based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability fluctuation A” that gives “super probability fluctuation state”). In this case, the game state shifts to a second advantageous game state different from the first advantageous game state (for example, a “super probability fluctuation state” in the thirteenth embodiment) among the advantageous game states. Means (for example, S5751 of the jackpot end process (S5712: Yes)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enters (for example, downstream of the normal electric utility 64c). 13.

  According to the gaming machine 1013, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 19 to 12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least when the first special game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven so as to be able to enter a game ball, and when the third special game result is derived, the second special game result is derived. The special ball entry means is driven so that game balls can be entered. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first special value is given as the first special game result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous transition means provided in the gaming state changing means. Of these, a transition is made to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first special value is given as the first special game result based on the second derived result different from the first derived result, the gaming state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game mode is shifted to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the third special game result is derived, based on the first derived result and the second derived result as the first special game result. Can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 19,
At least a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter when the first special game result is derived;
When the third special game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) that is driven so that the game ball can enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the fourteenth embodiment). ,
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine (10), wherein the first special value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 1014, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 19: That is, at least when the first special game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven so as to be able to enter a game ball, and when the third special game result is derived, the second special game result is derived. The special ball entry means is driven so that game balls can be entered. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means allows the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first special value can be given. That is, in the hit / fail judgment by the first judging means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit / fail storage means and the first value is stored, the first special game result is derived and the first special value is obtained. Or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination by the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first special game result is derived to obtain the first special value, or , The third special game result is derived, and further, the first special value is obtained by causing the fourth ball entry means to enter the game ball. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 14
The second right / wrong storage means,
A gaming machine (10), wherein the derivation probability of the second value or the derivation probability of the third value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 1015, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 1014. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value or the derivation probability of the third value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second special game result based on the extraction of the second value or the third special game result based on the extraction of the third value is the first game result. And so on. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the gaming machines B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B1-B6, the gaming machines A1-A9, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1-H3, I1- I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C1-C3, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1-H3, I1- I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D1-D6, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1-H3, I1- I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F1-F5, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, G1-G3, H1-H3, I1- I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G1-G3, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, H1-H3, I1- I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines K1-K5, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1- H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines L1 to L5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines N1 to N5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine O1, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines T1 and T2, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1- H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines U1 and U2, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1- H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines V1-V9, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1- H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines W1 to W7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines X1 to X6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines U1 to C5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines O1 and O2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A1 and A2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, Ki1 to Ki 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, K1 to K6, K1 to K5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1-K3, C1-K3, K1-K5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1-K3, C1-K3, K1-K6, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines S1 and S2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, KI 1 to KI 3, KU 1 to KU 3, KE 1 to KE 6, KO 1 to KO 5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, SE2, SO1, SO2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines S1 and S2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1-K3, C1-K3, K1-K6, K1-K5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines S1 and S2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, KI1 to KI3, KU1 to KU3, KE1 to KE6, KO1 to KO5, SA1, SA2, SI1, SI2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tsu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 and C2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines So1 and So2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines T1 and T2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Seo1, Seo2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, and 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 and C2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Seo1, Seo2, Ta1, Ta2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the above-mentioned gaming machines T1 to T3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Seo1, Seo2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, and 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines TE1 to TE3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Seo1, Seo2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G1 and G2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Seo1, Seo2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, 10 to 1 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I10, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Seo1, Seo2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 20 to 28, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tu 1-Tu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0, 10, 0-7, 7, 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8 and 0 ~ Shishi 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ Ginseng 7, Go0 ~ Go9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shichi0 ~ Shishi7, Riku0 ~ Liku7, Lacquer0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines land 0 to land 7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 ~ Shio7, Go0 ~ Go9, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine lacquer 0, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1-H3 , I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ca2, K 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 1, 2, S2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7 , 0 to 7, 9, 0 to 7, 0 to 7 , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine handling 0, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3 , I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ca2, K 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 1, 2, S2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7 , Shio0 to Shi7, Ryo0 to Rgo9, Ryo0 to Riku7, Lacquer0, Kuro0 to Kuro , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the above-described gaming machines K0 to K3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 to Shi7, Go0 to Go9, Land0 to Land7, Lacquer0, Handling , 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 9 A configuration limited to any one of 0, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines 10 to 114, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 ~ Shio7, Go0 ~ Go9, Riku0 ~ Liku7, Lacquer0, 0, ku0 to ku3, 20 to 215, 30 to 314, 40 to 414, 50 to 512, 600 to 615, 70 to 713, 80 to 814, A configuration limited to any one of 90, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 20 to 215, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 ~ Shio7, Go0 ~ Go9, Riku0 ~ Liku7, Lacquer0, 0, ku0-ku3, 10-114, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 600-615, 70-713, 80-814, A configuration limited to any one of 90, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines 30 to 314, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 to Shi7, Go0 to Go9, Land0 to Land7, Lacquer0, 0, KU0-KU3, 10-114, 20-215, 40-414, 50-512, 600-615, 70-713, 80-814, A configuration limited to any one of 90, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 40 to 414, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 to Shi7, Go0 to Go9, Land0 to Land7, Lacquer0, 0, ku0-ku3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 50-512, 600-615, 70-713, 80-814, A configuration limited to any one of 90, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the above-described gaming machines 50 to 512, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 ~ Shio7, Go0 ~ Go9, Riku0 ~ Liku7, Lacquer0, 0, KU0-KU3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 600-615, 70-713, 80-814, A configuration limited to any one of 90, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 60 to 615, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 ~ Shio7, Go0 ~ Go9, Riku0 ~ Liku7, Lacquer0, 0, KU0-KU3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 70-713, 80-814, A configuration limited to any one of 90, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 70 to 713, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 ~ Shio7, Go0 ~ Go9, Riku0 ~ Liku7, Lacquer0, 0, ku0-ku3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 600-615, 80-814, A configuration limited to any one of 90, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 80 to 814, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 ~ Shio7, Go0 ~ Go9, Riku0 ~ Riku7, Urushi0, 0, ku0-ku3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, A configuration limited to any one of 90, 100 to 1015 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine 90, the gaming machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1-H3 , I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ca2, K 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 1, 2, S2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2, 1 to 1, 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7 , Shio0 to Shi7, Ryo0 to Rgo9, Riku0 to Riku7, Lacquer 0, Handling 0, Ku -Ku3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 600-615, 70-713, 80-8 A configuration limited to any one of 14, 100 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the above-mentioned gaming machines 100 to 1015, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C1 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, 10 to 1, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 ~ San 7, Shio0 to Shi7, Go0 to Go9, Land0 to Land7, Lacquer0, 0, ku0-ku3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, A configuration limited to any one of 80 to 814 and 90 may be applied.

  In these cases, further effects due to the application of each configuration can be obtained.

  A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A1 9, a1 to a7, c1 to c5, d1 to d3, o1, o2, ca1, ca2, ki1 to ki3, c1 to c3, c1 to c6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, sa 1, sa 2, shi 1, shi 2, su 1, su 2, su 1, se 2, se 1, so 2, ta 1, ta 2, chi 1, chi 2, tu 1 Karatsu 3, te1 to te3, to1, to2, ichi0 to ichi10, ii0 to ji28, seki0 to seki7, shira0 to shi7, suko0 to suga9, land 0 Ra-Riku 7, Lacquer 0, Handle 0, Ku 0 to Ku 3, 10 to 114, 20 to 215, 30 to 3, 14, 40 to 414, 50 to 512, 60 to 6 15, the gaming machine Y1 is any one of the slot machine and any one of the gaming machines Y1 to 7,0 to 713, 80 to 814, 90, and 100 to 1015. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A1 9, a1 to a7, c1 to c5, d1 to d3, o1, o2, ca1, ca2, ki1 to ki3, c1 to c3, c1 to c6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, sa 1, sa 2, shi 1, shi 2, su 1, su 2, su 1, se 2, se 1, so 2, ta 1, ta 2, chi 1, chi 2, tu 1 Karatsu 3, te1 to te3, to1, to2, ichi0 to ichi10, ii0 to ji28, seki0 to seki7, shira0 to shi7, suko0 to suga9, land 0 Ra-Riku 7, Lacquer 0, Handle 0, Ku 0 to Ku 3, 10 to 114, 20 to 215, 30 to 3, 14, 40 to 414, 50 to 512, 60 to 6 15. The gaming machine Y2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the following: 70, 713, 80 to 814, 90, 100 to 10,15. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A1 9, a1 to a7, c1 to c5, d1 to d3, o1, o2, ca1, ca2, ki1 to ki3, c1 to c3, c1 to c6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, sa 1, sa 2, shi 1, shi 2, su 1, su 2, su 1, se 2, se 1, so 2, ta 1, ta 2, chi 1, chi 2, tu 1 Karatsu 3, te1 to te3, to1, to2, ichi0 to ichi10, ii0 to ji28, seki0 to seki7, shira0 to shi7, suko0 to suga9, land 0 Ra-Riku 7, Lacquer 0, Handle 0, Ku 0 to Ku 3, 10 to 114, 20 to 215, 30 to 3, 14, 40 to 414, 50 to 512, 60 to 6 15, 70 to 713, 80 to 814, 90, and 100 to 15, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine Y3. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

  Note that the “ball” described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the “game medium” or “game ball” in the claims, and the “accessory ratio” described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the “ The ratio of the number of the game media paid out by the payout means to the number of the game media paid out based on the prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means. The “combination ratio” corresponds to the “ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by payout means” in the claims. I do.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 outer frame (part of support)
11d Right side plate (part of side part)
11e Cover mounting hole (part of side insertion hole)
11f Mounting hole under cover (part of side insertion hole)
11g fixing screw (part of fixing member)
12 inner frame (part of opening and closing body)
14 Front frame (part of decorative body)
20 Cylinder lock (part of locking device, part of first locking means, part of second locking means)
63a First ordinary winning opening (winning opening)
63b 2nd ordinary winning opening (winning opening)
64a 1st starting opening (winning opening, 1st winning opening, a part of the 1st ball entry means)
64b 2nd starting port (winning opening, 1st winning opening, a part of the 2nd ball entry means)
64c Ordinary electric part (part of movable means, part of rolling means at closing, part of rolling means at projection)
65a Winning opening (winning opening, 1st winning opening, 2nd winning opening, a part of the 1st special ball entry means)
67 Through gate (part of the third ball entry means)
72a Small winning opening (part of the second special ball entry means)
100 substrate box (part of storage means, part of main storage means)
100c Sealing unit (part of sealing means, part of influence means)
100d Setting part (part of change part, part of exposed part (keyhole))
100e Setting part side wall (part of immersion part)
100f Setting part bottom (part of immersion part)
100h Connector attachment part (part of wiring attachment part, part of influence means)
101 Substrate box (part of payout storage means)
110 Main control device (main control means, display control means, part of control means, part of influence means, part of determination information acquisition means)
111 payout control device (payout means, part of payout control means, part of influence means)
111a Sealing part (part of sealing means, part of influence means, part of dispensing sealing means)
112a Ball launching unit (part of launching means)
122 RAM erase switch (predetermined operation means, information erasure instruction means, first operation means, part of third operation means, part of erasure means, part of influence means)
140 Protective cover member (part of protective means)
150 Cover mounting part (part of mounting part)
152 Upper mounting hole (part of mounting insertion hole)
153 Lower mounting hole (part of mounting insertion hole)
154 Curved part (part of the bent part)
160 Standing part (part of protection means)
170 Cover part (part of protection means)
171 Cover plate (part of protection means)
172 Cover side protrusion (part of protrusion)
173 key cover part (part of protection means)
200 register 201 MPU (calculation means, part of microchip)
202e Prize ball number table (payout information storage means)
202f trigger information data (predetermined trigger information storage means)
203 RAM (storage means)
203b Reserved ball storage area (part of lottery information acquisition means)
203l Real-time base value data (part of game performance information storage means, 0th storage area)
203m Previous base value data (part of game performance information storage means, first storage area)
203n Base value data before last time (part of game performance information storage means, second storage area)
203o Two-last-last base value data (part of game performance information storage means)
203p New startup flag (new startup specifying means)
203x area in use area (first storage means)
203x1 outside work area (first work area)
203x2 outer stack area (first stack area)
203x11 probability set value data (first storage means)
203x12 update probability set value data (second storage means)
203x16 RAM erase switch flag (storage means)
203y Area outside use area (second storage means)
203y1 Outside work area (work area, second work area)
203y2 outer stack area (stack area, second stack area)
203r Base value data (storage means)
203s Accessory data (storage means)
203t Error data (error history storage means)
207 Accessory ratio management chip (micro chip)
207a Inspection terminal (external device connection means)
208a First start-up switch (winning detection means)
208b Second start-up switch (winning detection means)
208c First ordinary winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208d 2nd normal winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208e Big winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208g1 Inner frame open switch (part of open / close detector)
208g2 Front frame release switch (part of decoration open / close detection means)
208h Special area switch (part of the fourth ball entry means)
211 MPU (part of microchip)
261 CPU (external device connection detecting means, second calculating means, ratio calculating means)
263 First Reading Memory (Second Storage Unit)
264 Second reading memory (storage means, third storage means)
267 Capacitor (power supply means)
272a1 Special figure 1 jackpot random number table (part of the hit / fail storage means, part of the stepwise hit / fail storage means, part of the first hit / fail storage means, part of the normal hit / fail storage means)
272a2 Special figure 2 jackpot random number table (part of the hit / fail storage means, part of the stepwise hit / fail storage means, part of the second hit / fail storage means, part of the advantageous hit / fail storage means)
273d First reserved ball storage area (part of first information acquisition means)
273e Second reserved ball storage area (part of second information acquisition means)
273i General-purpose drawing ball storage area (part of the third information acquisition means)
300 Inspection device (external device)
401 Base display device (game performance information display means, output means)
401a, 401b 7-segment display (segment display, second display means)
401c, 401d 7-segment display (segment display, first display means)
501 setting key (permission means, first operation means, part of setting means, part of changing means)
502 Error display button (error history display accepting means)
S103 Large opening / closing processing (part of game value providing means)
S152 (payout number setting means)
S307 Fluctuation start processing (part of determination means)
S717 (Power-off detection means)
S728 (second storage control means)
S729 (judgment means)
S740, S741 (storage control means, ratio calculation means)
S723 (third storage control means)
S761 (storage control means)
S751 to S754, S771, S772 (output means)
S2022 (evacuation means)
S2024 (stack pointer setting means)
S2025 (Return means)
S2031 (first fixed value storage means)
S2041 (second fixed value storage means)
S3007 (display means for confirmation)
S3008 (stopping means)
S3208 (gaming performance information acquisition means, shift processing means)
S3302 (Special display mode display means)
S4004: Yes (first mode start-up means)
S4004: No (third mode start-up means)
S4011: Yes (second mode start-up means)
S4011: No (4th mode start-up means)
S4005 (change means)
S4121 (part of setting means)
S4210 (Confirmation processing execution means)
S4213 (change processing execution means)
S4301 (interrupt permission means)
S4308 (Detection means)
S4309 (Detection means)
S4312 (interruption prohibition means)
S4401 (interruption permission means)
S4405 (interruption prohibition means)
S4407 (part of specific detection shift means)
S4408 (part of confirmation possibility determination means)
S4412 (part of change possibility determination means)
S4451 (part of confirmation transfer means)
S4452 (part of confirmation transfer means)
S4453 (part of change transition means)
S4454 (part of change transition means)
S5104 Normal electric hand control process (part of third dynamic execution means)
S5505 Special figure 1 change start processing (part of the determination means, part of the first determination means)
S5508 Special figure 2 change start processing (part of the determination means, part of the second determination means)
S5516 (part of probability changing means)
S5520 Special figure 2 change processing (part of result non-derivation means)
S5710 Big winning opening opening / closing control processing (part of the first game value giving means, part of the first special value giving means)
S5712 Jackpot end processing (part of game state changing means)
S5714 Small winning opening opening / closing control processing (part of the second game value giving means, part of the third special value giving means)
S5751 (part of the second advantageous transition means)
S5754 (part of the first advantageous transition means)
S5805 (part of driving means)
S5807 (part of driving means)

Claims (3)

Determination information obtaining means for obtaining determination information based on satisfaction of a predetermined start condition;
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means,
A first game value providing means for providing a player with a predetermined first game value based on the first game result being derived by the determination means;
Based on the second game result being derived by the determination means, a second game value providing means capable of providing the player with a second game value different from the first game value;
A setting means capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination means,
A determination unit configured to store at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result;
The determining means includes:
When the determination information is extracted by the determination information obtaining means, the determination information being a third value other than the first value or the second value, a game value is not provided to the player,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored so as to be different,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. Machine. The said pass / fail storage means,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed. The third value is
In the first setting value having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, an increase of the first value in the second setting value having the highest derivation probability of the first value is provided from the first setting value. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein

Images